:xX^^X\.sKiN^>"-K;\.^^\"^--' ^-^ v' 
 
 \SIA 
 
 .N X^ 
 
Cf^atnell Htttoerattg ffiibrarg 
 
 atiiara, ^tta fork 
 
 FROM THE 
 
 BENNO LOEWY LIBRARY 
 
 COLLECTED BY 
 
 BENNO LOEWY 
 
 1854-1919 
 
 BEQUEATHED TO CORNELL UNIVERSITY 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PK 2903. W37 1878 
 
 3 1924 022 960 821 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924022960821 
 
THE HISTORY 
 
 OF 
 
 INDIAN LITERATUEE. 
 
 ALBRECHT WEBER 
 
 Ctanglateli ftam tfje SecontJ ©crman ©bi'tion 
 
 ET 
 
 JOHN MANN, M.A., 
 
 AND 
 
 THEODOE ZACHARIAE, Ph.D., 
 
 Ittfi tijt SanttiDti of tfje ^tttfinr. 
 
 Nil desperarl — 
 
 Auch hier wird es tagen. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 HOUGHTON, OSGOOD, & COMPANY. 
 
 1878. 
 
TRANSLATORS' NOTE. 
 
 AccoEDiNG to the original intention, the English trans- 
 lation of this work was to have appeared shortly after the 
 second German edition, which came out in the end of 1875^ 
 and which, as mentioned by the author in his preface, was 
 in part prepared with a view to this translation. In con- 
 sequence, however, of the death of Professor Childers, 
 under whose direction it was in the first instance begun, 
 and of whose aid and supervision it would, had he lived, have 
 had the benefit, the work came to a stand-still, and some 
 time elapsed before the task of continuing and completing 
 it was entrusted to those whose names appear on the title- 
 page. The manuscript of the translation thus interrupted 
 embraced a considerable part of the text of the first divi- 
 sion of the work (Vedic Literature). It had not under- 
 gone any revision by Professor Childers, and was found to be 
 in a somewhat imperfect state, and to require very material 
 modification. Upon Mr. Zachariae devolved the labour of 
 correcting it, of completing it as far as the close of the 
 Vedic Period, and of adding the notes to this First Part, 
 none of which had been translated. , From the number of 
 changes introduced in the course of revision, the portion 
 of the work comprised in the manuscript in question 
 has virtually been re-translated. The rendering of the 
 second division of the volume (Sanskrit Literature) is 
 entirely and exclusively the work of Mr. Mann. 
 
 The circumstances under which the translation has been 
 
viii TRANSLATORS' NOTE. 
 
 produced have greatly delayed its appearance. But for 
 this delay some compensation is afforded by the Supple- 
 mentary Notes which Professor Weber has written for 
 incorporation in the volume (p. 3 1 1 ff.)> ^^<i which sup- 
 ply information regarding the latest researches and the 
 newest publications bearing upon the subjects discussed in 
 the work. Professor Weber has also been good enough to 
 read the sheets as they came from the press, and the trans- 
 lators are indebted to him for a number of suggestions. 
 
 A' few of the abbreviations made use of in the titles of 
 works which are frequently quoted perhaps require ex- 
 planation: e.g., I. St. for Weber's Indische Studien ; I. Sir. 
 for his Indische Streifen; I. AK. for Lassen's Indische 
 Alterthwrnskunde ; Z. B. M. 0. for Zeitschrift der deutschen 
 morgenlmdischen Gesellschaft, &c. 
 
 The system of transliteration is in the main identical 
 with that followed in the German original; as, however, it 
 varies in a few particulars, it is given here instead of in 
 the Author's Preface. It is as follows : — 
 
 a 
 
 & 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 u ti ri 
 
 ri 
 
 
 !i 
 
 U 
 
 e 
 
 ai 
 
 o au ; 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 kh 
 
 g 
 
 gH 
 
 fi; 
 
 
 
 ch 
 
 ohh 
 
 J 
 
 jh 
 
 fi; 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 th 
 
 4 
 
 dh 
 
 n; 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 th 
 
 d 
 
 dh 
 
 n; 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 ph 
 
 b 
 
 bh 
 
 m; 
 
 
 
 Anusvdra 
 
 iPj 
 
 iu the middle of a 
 
 word before sibilants ii 
 
 Viaarga h 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 July, 1878. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The work of my youth, which here appears in a new edi- 
 tion, had been several years out of print. To have repuh- 
 lished it without alteration would scarcely have done ; 
 and, owing to the pressure of other labours, it was im- 
 possible for me, from lack of time, to subject it to a com- 
 plete and systematic remodelling. So the matter rested. 
 At last, to meet the urgent wish of the publisher, I re- 
 solved upon the present edition, which indeed leaves the 
 original text unchanged, but at the same time seeks, by 
 means of the newly added notes, to accommodate itself to 
 the actual position of knowledge. In thus finally decid- 
 ing, I was influenced by the belief that in no other way 
 could the great advances made in this field of learning 
 since the first appearance of this work be more dlearly ex- 
 hibited than precisely in this way, and that, consequently, 
 this edition might at the same time serve in some measure 
 to present, m nuce, a history of Sanskrit studies during 
 the last four- and- twenty years. Another consideration 
 was, that only by so doing could I furnish a. critically 
 secured basis for the English translation contemplated by 
 Messrs. Tnibner & Co., which could not possibly now give 
 the original text alone, as was done in the French transla- 
 
X PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 tion* which appeared at Paris in 1859. It was, indeed, 
 while going over the work with the view of preparing it 
 for this English translation, that the hope, nay, the con- 
 viction, grew upon me, that, although a complete recon- 
 struction of it was out of the question, still an edition 
 like the present might advantageously appear in a German 
 dress also, I rejoiced to see that this labour of my youth 
 was standing well the test of time. I found in it little 
 that was absolutely erroneous, although much even now 
 remains as uncertain and unsettled as formerly ; while, on 
 the other hand, many things already stand clear and sure 
 which I then only doubtfully conjectured, or which were 
 at that time still completely enveloped in obscurity. 
 
 The obtaining of critical data from the contents of Indian 
 literature, with a view to the establishment of its internal 
 chronology and history — not the setting forth in detail of 
 the subject-matter of the different works — was, from the 
 beginning, the object I had before me in these lectures ; 
 and this object, together with that of specifying the publi- 
 cations which have seen the light in the interval, has con- 
 tinued to be my leading point of view in the present 
 annotation of them. To mark off the new matter, square 
 brackets are used.f 
 
 The number of fellow-workers has greatly increased 
 during the last twenty-four years. Instead of here running 
 over their names, I have preferred — in order thus to faci- 
 
 • Histoire de la Idttlrature Indimne, trad, de VAUemand par Alfred 
 Sadous. Paris : A. Durand. 1859, 
 
 + In the translation, these hraokets are only retained to mark new 
 matter added in the second edition to the original notes of the first ; the 
 notes whioh in the second edition were entirely new are here simply indi- 
 cated by numbers. — Tb. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. xi 
 
 litate a general view of this part of the subject — to add to 
 the Index, which in other respects also has been con- 
 siderably enlarged, a new section, showing where I have 
 availed myself ,of the writings of each, or have at least 
 referred, to them. One work there is, however, which, as 
 ■ it underlies all recent labours in this field, and cannot 
 possibly be cited on every occasion when it is made use of, 
 calls for special mention in this place — I mean the Sanskrit 
 Dictionary of Bohtlingk and Eoth, which was completed 
 in the course of last summer.* The carrying through of 
 this great work, which we owe to the patronage of the St. 
 Petersburg Academy of Sciences, over a period of a quarter 
 of a century, wiU. reflect lasting honour upon that body as 
 
 well as upon the two editors. 
 
 A. W. 
 
 Berlin, November, 1875. 
 
 * The second edition bears the inscription : ' Dedicated to my friends, 
 Bohtlingk and Roth, on the completion of the Sanskrit Dictionary.'— Tr. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 The lectures herewith presented to the narrow circle of 
 my fellows in this field of study, and also, it is hoped, to 
 the wider circle of those interested in researches into the 
 history of literature generally, are a first attempt, and as 
 such, naturally, defective and capable of being in many 
 respects supplemented and improved. The material they 
 deal with is too vast, and the means of mastering it in 
 general too inaccessible, not to have for a lengthened 
 period completely checked inquiry into its internal relative 
 chronology — the only chronology that is possible. Nor 
 could I ever have ventured upon such a labour, had not 
 the Berlin Eoyal Library had the good fortune to possess 
 the fine collection of Sanskrit MSS. formed by Sir E. 
 Chambers, the acquisition of which some ten years ago, 
 through the liberality of his Majesty, Frederick William 
 IV., and by the agency of his Excellency Baron Bunsen, 
 opened up to Sanskrit philology a fresh path, upon which 
 it has already made vigorous progress. In the course of 
 last year, commissioned by the Eoyal Library, I undertook 
 the work of cataloguing this collection, and as the result 
 a detailed catalogue wUl appear about simultaneously with 
 these lectures, which may in some sense be regarded as a 
 
xiv PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 coramentary upon it. Imperfect as, from the absolute 
 poiat of view, both works miist appear, I yet cherish the 
 hope that they may render good service to learning. 
 
 How great my obligations are, in the special investiga- 
 tions, to the writings of Colebrooke, Wilson, Lassen, Bur- 
 nouf, Eoth, Eeinaud, Stenzler, and Holtzmann, I only 
 mention here generally, as I have uniformly given ample 
 references to these authorities in the proper place. 
 
 The form in which these lectures appear is essentially 
 the same in which they were delivered,* with the excep- 
 tion of a few modifications of style : thus, iu particular, 
 the transitions and recapitulations belonging to oral de- 
 livery have been either curtailed or omitted; whUe, on 
 the other hand, to the incidental remarks — -here given as 
 foot-notes — much new matter has been added. 
 
 A. W. 
 
 Berlin, Jvly, 1852. 
 
 * In the Winter-Semester of 1851-32. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Introduction, 1-7 
 
 Antiquity of Indian literature, 2 ; proved by geographical 
 evidence, 3-4 ; by internal evidence from the history 
 of the Hindd religion, S ; by evidence drawn from the 
 language, 6 ; want of external chronology, 7. 
 
 FIRST PERIOD— VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 Preliminary Survey, 8-30 
 
 (l.) Tlie Samhitds, 8-11. 
 
 Sanihit^ of the three older Vedas, 8-9 ; mutual relation of 
 these three Vedaa, 9-10 ; period of their final compila- 
 tion, 10 ; Samhit^ of the Atharvan, 11. 
 
 (2.) The Brdhmanas, II-IJ. 
 
 Their character, 12, and origin, 13 ; mutual relation of 
 the Brdhmanas of the several Vedas, 14 ; their common 
 name Sruti, 15, 
 
 (3.) The Sutras, &c. 
 
 Their character and origin, 16 ; ^rauta-Slitras, 17 ; Grihya- 
 or Sm^ta-Stitras, 17 ; gradual transformation of the 
 original Smriti (Custom and Law), 17, 18; origin of 
 caste, 18 ; connection between the Grihya-Stitras and 
 the legal literature, 19-20 ; linguistic Slitras, their 
 origin, 20, 21 ; character of the time in question, 21, 
 22 ; Pr^ti^khya-Slitras, 23 ; metric, 23 ; Anukramanis, 
 24 ; tradition — Brihaddevatii, 24 ; Nighantu, Nirukti, 
 the Ved^ngas, 25 ; science of grammar, 26 ; philoso- 
 phical speculation, 26 ff. ; names applied to the early 
 sages, 28 ; Upanishads, Araiayakas, 28, 29 ; astronomy ' 
 
 and medicine, 29, 30. 
 i.— RIGVEDA, 31-62 
 
 (a) SaipMtd, 31-44. 
 
 Its divisions, 31, 32; S^kala and Yttshkala recensions. 
 
:vi TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 32 ; Vdrkali, the school of the kanakas, 33 ; Saunaka, 
 Panch^la B^hravya, 34; mythology of the primitive 
 Indo-Qermanic time, 35 ; Persian and Indian cycles of 
 legend, 36, 37 ; mode of life of the Indians in their 
 ancient home, 37, 38 ; reasons why they left their 
 ancient homes, 38, 39 ; different constituents of Rigveda- 
 Saqihit^ 39 ; gods to whom the hymns are addressed, 
 40 ; exegetic literature connected with the SamhitfC : 
 Y&ka, 41 ; Siiya^a, 41, 42 ; editions, translations, &c., 
 
 43. 44- 
 
 (6) Brdhmanas, 44-52. 
 
 Aitareya- and Sinkfa^yana-Br^hmana!!, 44 ; data therein 
 bearing on time of their composition, 45 ; they presup- 
 pose earlier compositions with similar contents, 45-47 ; 
 fables and legends contained in these two BrElhmanas, 
 47 ; the Aranyakas of the Rik : Aitareya- Aranyaka, 48 ff. ; 
 KaushltakiEranyaka, Kaushitakopanishad, 50, 51 ; Sam- 
 kara's commentaries on the Upanishads, 51; Ydshkala- 
 Upanishad, 52. 
 
 (c) SAtras, 52, 62. 
 
 The Srauta-Stitras of AsvaUyaua and Sinkhdyana, 52 ff. ; 
 commentaries thereon, 54, 55 ; the Grihya-Sdtras of 
 Aivaliiyana and ^iiakhityana, 55 ff. ; the literature pre- 
 supposed in these, 56, 57 ; Rik-Pr^ti&ikhya, Upalekha, 
 59, 60 ; Sikshi, Chhandas, Jyotisha, 60, 61 ; Anukra- 
 manis, 61 ; Brihaddevati, Rigvidh^na, Pariiishtas, 62. 
 (.— SAMAVEDA 63-85 
 
 {a) Samhitd, 63-66. 
 
 Its arrangement, 63; the Gjinas, 64; antiquity of the 
 readings of the Sdma-Saiphit^ 64, 65 ; recensions, 65 ; 
 editions, &e., 65, 66. 
 
 (6) BrdJirtumas, 66-75. 
 
 The Titndya-Panchavin^a-Brdhmana, 66 ff. ; geographical 
 and other data contained therein, 67-68 j Shadvin^a- 
 Brdhmana, 69 ; OhhEindogyopanishad, its relation to the 
 Vrihad- Aranyaka, 70, 71 ; literary and other data in the 
 Chhdndogyop., 71, 72; Kenopanishad, 73 ; the smaller 
 Brdhmanas of the Sdman — Sstmavidhiina, &c., 74, 75. 
 
 (c) Sutras, 75-85. 
 
 Srauta-Sdtras : the Kalpa-SAtra of Masaka, 75-76 ; La- 
 tydyana-Slitra, 76 ff. ; literature therein presupposed, 
 76, 77 ; position of non-Brahraanical tribes in this work, 
 77; existence of Buddhism presupposed, 78; Sfitra of 
 Drihyiiyana, 79 ; its relation to the Sdtras of the other 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. xvii 
 
 Vedas, 80 ; Anupada-Siitra, 80, 81 ; Nidstna-Stitra, 81, 
 82 ; the Pushpa-Slitra of Gobhila, 82 ; S^ma-Tautra, 
 Pafichavidhi-, Pratih^ra-, Tanddlakshana-, and Upa'. 
 grantha-Slitras, 83 ; the Grihya-Stltra of Gobhila, 84 ; 
 the Karma-pradipa of Kdtystyaua, 84 ; Paddhatis and 
 Pari^ishtaSj 85, 
 
 a— YAJURVEDA, 8S-I4S 
 
 I. — The Black Yajus, 85-103 
 
 (o) SamMtds, 85-gi. 
 
 Difference between the Black and the White Yajus, 86 ; 
 names of the Black Yajus, 86 ff. ; Charaka, Taittiriya, 
 and Kh^ndikiya, 87, 88 ; schools of the Black Yajus : 
 Taittiriya- Samhitd; (Apastamba), the Kdthaka, and the 
 Atreyi ^dkhii, 88 ; Samhit^s of the Apastamba and 
 Atreya schools, and the Kslthaka, 89 ; data contained 
 therein, 90 ; Y^ska's connection with the arrangement 
 of the Samhitd of the Black Yajus, 91 j the M^nava and 
 the Maitra, 91. 
 (6) Brdhmanas, 92-99. 
 
 The Brdhmanas of the Apastamba and Atreya schools ; the 
 K&haka portion of the Taitt. Br^hmana, 92 ; Taittiriya- 
 Aranyaka, 93 ; Upanishads of the Taitt. Ar., 93, 94 ; 
 schools of the Bhdllavins, S^tysiyanins, S^kdyauins, &c., 
 95 ; SvetStSvataropanishad, 96 ; Maitrdyana-XJpanishad, 
 its modern date, 97 ; the planets, &c., in the Maitr. Up., 
 98 ; possible relation of the work to Buddha, 99. 
 (c) Saras, 99-103. 
 
 ^rauta-Slitras, 99-101 ; Grihya-Sdtras, lOi, 102 ; Prdti- 
 ^ikhya-Siitra, 102 ; Anukramanis, 103. 
 II. — The White Yajus 103-145 
 
 The name explained, 103 f. ; the name 'ViSjasaneya,' 104 
 f. ; the two schools of the K^nvas and M^dhyarudinas, 
 105; possible connection of the Mddhyamdinas with the 
 MaSiavSii'of, 106. 
 (a) Samhitd, 107-116. 
 
 Division of the Viijasaneyi-Sarfihit^, 107 ; later origin of 
 the last fifteen adhydyas, 108 ; relation of the several 
 parts of the V^j. S. to the Black Yajus, 108; to its 
 own Br^hmana, and to each other, 109-110; probable 
 date of the Eudra-book, no; the mixed castes, III; 
 position of the MsCgadha, in; his position in the 
 Atharva-Veda, 112 ; astronomical and other data in the 
 V^j. S., 113; position of the Kurus and Panchilas, 
 the names Subhadrd and Kamplla, 1 14; Arjuna and 
 
 i 
 
xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Fhalguna as (secret) names of Indra, 11$; the richas 
 incorporated in the Yaj us, 115, 116; editions, commen- 
 taries, 116. 
 (6) Srdkmam, 116-139. 
 
 The &tapatha-Br^hmana, 116 ; its name and extent, 117; 
 relation of the Br^Uimana of the Kdnva school to that of 
 the Mddhyaindinas, 117, 118; relation of the several 
 hdifdas to the Sarnhit^ and to each other, 118, 119; 
 posteriority of the last five kdndas, 120 ; Agnirahasya- 
 kiinda, 120, 121; Ashtddhydiyi-k^da, 121 ; subjects of 
 study named therein, 121, 122 ; other data, 122, 123 ; 
 A^vamedha-kiinda, 124 ff. ; G&thia, 124, 125 ; position 
 of Janamejaya, 125 ; of the Pflrikshitiyas, 126 ; the 
 Aranyaka-k^4^, 126 ; the Tjihad-Aranyaka :— Madhu- 
 kiinda, 127; its name and list of teachers, 128 ; Tdjna- 
 Talkiya-k^da, 129; Khila-kfinda, 130; the concluding 
 laMapi the ^atapatha-Br&mana, 131 ; probable north- 
 western origin of Jcdndas vi.-x. of the 6atap. Br., 132 ; 
 the whole blended together by one arranging hand, 
 133 ; teachers mentioned in the iSatap. Br., 133, 134 ; 
 legends, 134 & ; relation of these to the Epic legends, 
 13s ; position of the Kuru-Fanch£ilas compared with 
 that of the P^rikshitas, 136 ; the F^f^vas not men- 
 tioned, 137; points of contact with the Sirnkhy a tradi- 
 tion, 137 ; with Buddhist legend, 138; commentaries on 
 the Satap. Br., editions, Sus., 139. 
 (c) Sutras, 139-145. 
 
 The Srauta-Stitra of EiCtydyana, teachers mentioned there- 
 in, 139; other data, 140; commentaries, 141 ; Pad- 
 dhatis and Fari^ishtas : Nigama-ParijSishta, Pravarsi- 
 dhyiya, Charana-vyiiha ; the Vaijavstpa-Slitra, 142 ; the 
 Ksttlya-Gyihya-Sfitra of Fiiraskara, 142, 143 ; the PrSti> 
 ^(ikhya-SAtra of the ViijaBaneyi-Samh., 143, 144 ; Anu- 
 kramani, 144, 145. 
 
 Z>.— ATHARVAVEDA, 14S-171 
 
 (a) Samhitd, 145-150. 
 
 Extent and diviBioO of Atharvaveda-Samhit^ 145, 146 • 
 its contents and arrangement, 146 ; it probably origi- 
 nated in part with the unbr^hmanised Aryans of the 
 West, 147; data furnished by the Ath. S., the name 
 'Atharvan,' 148; earliest mention of this name, 149; 
 the name 'Brahmaveda,' its meaning, 149, 150 ; edi- 
 tions, &G., of the Ath. S., 15a 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 (5) Brdhmana. 
 
 The Gopatha-BrSihmana, 150-151. 
 
 (c) Sitras, 151-153. 
 
 The Saunaklyd Chaturadhy^yiH, 151 ; Anukramani, 152 ; 
 the Kau^ika-Stitra, 152; Kalpas and Pari^ishtas, 153. 
 
 Upanishads, 153-171. 
 
 Number of the Upanishads, 154, 155; Upanishads be- 
 longing to the three older Vedas, 155, 156 ; special divi- 
 sion of the Atharvopanishads into three groups : Ved^nta, 
 Yoga, and Sectarian Upanishads, 156; Atharvan re- 
 cension of Upanishads bbrrowed from the other Vedaa, 
 157. The Athaevopanishads peopkr : (i.) those of the 
 Veddnta class— the Mundakopanishad, 158, 159; Prai5- 
 nopauishad, 159, 160; Garbhopanishad, 160; Brahmopa- 
 nishad, 160, 161 ; Mdndl^kyopanishad, 161 ; remaining 
 Upanishads of the Vedilnta class : Prdnitgnihotrop., Arshi- 
 kop., 161, 162 ; (2) Atharvopanishads of the Toga class : 
 J^bitla, Katha^ruti, Arunika, Bhdllavi, and others, 163 ; 
 range of ideas and style in this class of Upanishads, 165 ; 
 (3) the Sectarian Upanishads, 165 ff. ; (o) those in which 
 worship of Vishnu (under the names NiJrityana, &c. ) is in- 
 culcated, 166; Nrisinhatdpaniyopanishad, 167 ; Rstmatii- 
 paniyopanishad, 168 ; Gop^lat^paniyopanishad, 169 ; 
 (j3) Upanishads of the Siva sects : ^atarudriya, Kaivalyo- 
 panishad, 169; Atharva^iras, 169, 170; remaining 
 Upanishads of the ^iva sects, 170, 171. 
 
 SECOND PERIOD— SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 Wherein Distinguished PROM First Period, . . 175-183 
 
 Distinction in respect of language, 175 ; gradual develop- 
 ment of Indo- Aryan Bhdshd, 1 76 ; influence of Indian 
 aborigines thereon, 177 ; separation of written language 
 from popular dialects — ^ancient dialectic differences, 
 178 ; rock-inscriptions in popular dialects, 179 ; in- 
 ternal evidence for posteriority of second period, 180 ; 
 critical condition of texts in this period — age of MSS., 
 181; distinction as regards subject-matter, 182; classi- 
 fication of Sanskfit literature, 183. 
 
 J.— WORKS OP POETRT, 183-215 
 
 I. Epic Poetry, 183-196. 
 (a) Itihdsa, 183-189 : forerunners of Epic poetry in Vedie 
 
XX TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 period, 183; the Mahsl-BhSrata, 184; existence of a 
 work resembling it in first century A.D., 186; legend 
 of Mahii-Bh^rata, its relation to ^atapatha-Briihmana, 
 &o., 186 ; text of Mahii-Bhirata, non-epic constituents, 
 187 ; Kavi translation ; Jaimini-Bh&ata, 189 ; (6) Tu- 
 rdnas : their general character — ancient Purinas lost — 
 absence of epic and prominence of ritual ' element in 
 existing Puriinaa and Upa-pur£inas, 190, 191 ; (c) Kd- 
 vyas, 191-196 : the E^m^yana, 191 ; its allegorical 
 character, 192 ; colonisation of Southern India, 193 ; 
 Rdmiiyana the work of a single author, 193 ; different 
 recensions of the text, 194 ; remaining Kivyas, artificial 
 Epic, 195. 
 
 2. Deamatio Poetkt, 196-208. 
 
 Origin of Drama from dancing, 196 ; Nata-Slitras men- 
 tioned in Pfoini, 197 ; dancing at the great sacrificial 
 festivals, 198 ; alleged mention of dramas in oldest (?) 
 Buddhistic writings, 199; age of surviving dramas, 
 200 ; no foundation for the view which places KAMdisa, 
 in the first century B.C., 201, 202 ; internal evidence from 
 Edlid&a's dramas themselves on this point, 203 ; authen- 
 ticity of the Mdlavikdgnimitra, 204; age of ^tidraka's 
 Mriohhakatl, 205 ; subject-matter and special peculi- 
 arities of the Hindii drama, 206 ; possibility of Greek 
 influence on its development, 207. 
 
 3. Ltkioal Poetry, 208-210. 
 
 Beligious lyric, 208 j Erotic lyric : Megha-dlita, &c., 209 ; 
 mystical character of some of these poems — ^the Gita- 
 govinda, 210. 
 
 4. Ethico-Didactic Poetry, 210-213. 
 
 Niti-^stras, 210; 'Beast-Fable,' 211; PaBcha-tantra, Hito- 
 padefe, 212 ; popular tales and romances, 213. 
 
 5. History and Geography, 213-215. 
 Eiija-taramgini, 213; inscriptions, grants, and coins, 215. 
 
 .B.— WORKS OF SCIENCE AND ART, .... 215-276 
 I. SciENOB OP Language, 216-232. 
 (o) Grammar, 216-225 : Pdnini's Grammar, its peculiar 
 terminology, 216; Pdnini's date — statements of the 
 Chinese traveller Hiuan Thsang, 217 ; weakness of the 
 evidence on which Bbhtlingk's view rests, 218 ; exist- 
 ence of Mahdbhishya in the time of Abhimanyu, 219 ; 
 acquaintance with Greeks presupposed in Pdijini, 220 ; 
 ' Tavanitni, ' 22 1 ; commentaries on P^nini — Paribhdshfe, 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Vdrttikas, Mahiibhdahya, 222 ; date of Kity^yana, 222 ; 
 of the Mahiibhdshya, 223 ; critical condition of the text 
 of Pdnini, 224; Gana-psttha, &c., 225; other gram- 
 matical systems, 226. (J) Zetmcography, 227-230 : 
 Amara-kosha, no foundation for the view which places 
 it in the first century B. 0. , 228 ; internal evidence against 
 this view, 229 ; age of the work still uncertain, 230 ; 
 Dhitu-piithas, 230. (c) Metric, Poetics, Rhetoric, 231, 
 232 : Chhandal^-^stra of Pingala, A\3,rnk&ca,-&iEXra, of 
 Bharata, SEihitya-darpana, 231. 
 
 2. Philosophy, 232-246, 
 
 High antiquity of philosophical speculation among the 
 Hindiis, 232 ; ' Development,' ' Arrangement,' ' Crea- 
 tion ' theories of the world, 233 ; gradual growth of 
 these theories into philosophical systems, 234; the 
 Sdiiikhya-system, 235, 236 ; the Yoga-system, 237 ; 
 Deistio sects, 238 ; influence of Silmkhya-Yoga on 
 development of Gnosticism and 6iifism, 239 ; the two 
 Mim^nsds, 239 ; Karma-Mimdns^-S^itra of Jaimini, 240 ; 
 Brahma-Mimiinsd-Stitra of B^idardyana, 242 ; age of 
 Bidar^yana, 243 ; the two logical systems, Ny%a and 
 Yaiseshika, 244 ; Heterodox systems, 246. 
 
 3. ASTEONOMT AND ACXILIAET SCIENCES, 246-264. 
 Autiqtiity of astronomy, 246 ; solar year, quinquennial 
 
 cycle, Tugas, 247 ; the lunar asterisms, 247 ; mention 
 of these in Rik-Sanihit^, 248 ; Jyotisha, 249; the planets, 
 249 ; their peculiar Indian names and number, 250 ; 
 importance of Greek influence here, 251 ; relations of 
 Greeks with India, 251 ; the Yavanas, teachers of the 
 ancient Indian astronomers, 252; ' Ptolemaios,' 'Asura- 
 Maya,' 253 ; Eomaka-Siddh^nta, Paulife-Siddh^nta, 
 253 ; Greek terms in Var^ha-Mihira, 254, 255 ; further 
 development of Indian astronomy : Hindtis the teachers 
 of the Arabs, 255 (also in algebra and arithmetic, — the 
 arithmetical figures, 256), and through the Arabs, of Euro- 
 pean mediseval astronomers, 257 ; Aryabhata, 257 ; the 
 five Siddhiintas, 258 • Brahmagupta, Variiha-Mihira, 
 259 ; date of Yarflha-Mihira, Sat^anda, and Bhfiskara, 
 260, 261 ; Albiruni's statements regarding Bhdskara (?), 
 262. Later period : Arabs in turn the teachers of the 
 Hindtis in astrology, 263 ; Arabic technical terms in 
 Indian and European astrological works, 263, 264 ; lore 
 of omens and portents, 264 ; magic, &c., 264. 
 
xxii TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 4. Medibai Science, 265-271. 
 
 Its earliest representatives, 265 ; Charaka, Su^ruta, Dhan- 
 vantari, 266 ; Sdlihotra, VdtsySyana, 267 ; uncertain 
 date of extant medical works, 268; Hindi! medicine 
 apparently an independent development, 269 ; ques- 
 tionable authenticity o£ existing texts, 269 ; importance 
 of Indian medicine, 269 ; Its influence on Arabs, 270. 
 
 5. Abt of Wae, Music, Formative and Technical Abts, 
 
 271-276. 
 Art of war (Dhanur-veda) : Vi^viimitra, Bharadv^ja, 27 1 ; 
 music (GSndharva-veda), 271 (musical notation, 272) ; 
 Artha-i548tra, 273 : painting and sculpture, 273 ; archi- 
 tecture, 274 ; technical arts, 275. 
 
 a— WORKS ON LAW, CUSTOM, AND RELIGIOUS WOR- 
 SHIP, 276-283 
 
 The Dharma-^fctras, 276 ; Code of Manu, Brahraanical 
 organisation as here presented, 276 ; highly developed 
 judicial procedure here exhibited, 277 ; connection of 
 Dharma-S^stras with Grihya-Sdtras, 277, 278 ; critical 
 questions connected with existing text of Manu, 279 ; 
 different redactions of Manu and the other Dharma- 
 ^fctras, number of these, 280 ; relation of Manu's Code 
 to that of Ydjnavalkya, date of the latter, 280, 281 ; 
 Epic poetry and Fur^nas also sources for HindA law, 
 282 ; modem jurisprudence, 282 ; Dekhan the chief 
 seat of literary activity after eleventh century, 283. 
 
 i).— BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE, . . . 283-310 
 Buddhism, its origin from S^khya doctrine, 284 ; rela- 
 tion of Buddhist legend to the later portions of Tedic 
 literature, 285 ; princes of same name in Buddhist 
 legend and ^atapatha-Br^hmana, 286 ; position in former 
 of Kuru-Pa!lch^las, Psindavas, Mdgadhas, 286, 287 ; 
 Buddhist eras, 287 ; discordance of these with other 
 historical evidence, 287 ; earliest demonstrable nse of 
 these eras, 288 ; Buddha's doctrine, 288 ; his novel way 
 of promulgating it, and opposition to Brahmanical 
 hierarchy, 289 ; tradition as to redaction of Buddhistic 
 sacred scriptures, Northern and Southern, 290 ; mutual 
 relation of the two collections, 292 ; Pdli historical litera- 
 ture, 293 ; scriptures of Northern Buddhists, their 
 gradual origin, 294 ; language in which Southern 
 scriptures were at first preserved different from that in 
 which the Northern scriptures were recorded at third 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. xxiii 
 
 council, 29s, 296 (Jaina-literature, 296) ; data furnished 
 by Buddhistic Sanskrit literature of doubtful authority 
 for Buddha's age, 297, 
 (o) The Sjitra-Pitaha : distinction between the simple and 
 the Mahdvaipulya-Stitras, 298 ; poetical pieces in latter, 
 G^tb^-dialect, 299 ; contents of the simple Sdtras : 
 Ityukta, Vydkarana, AvadiCna, Adbhuta-dharma, Geya, 
 Gdthd, Upadefo, Niddna, Jdtaka,300, 301 ; their Pantheon 
 different from that of the Brahniana-texts, 301 ; but 
 identical with that of the Epic poetry, 303 ; other 
 chronological data in the Sritras, 304. — (6) The Vinaya- 
 Pitaha: discipline of clergy, system of mendicancy, 
 305 ; Buddhistic hierarchy as distinguished from the 
 Brahmanical, Buddhist cult, 306 ; points of connection 
 with Christian ritual, 307. — (c) The Abhidharma-PitaTm, 
 307 ; schools of Buddhist philosophy, 308 ; relation to 
 the Sinikhya-system, 308; and to Gnosticism, 309. — 
 Commentaries on the sacred scriptures, 309 ; Tantras, 
 310. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES, 311 
 
 INDICES : 
 
 Sauskkii Index, 329 
 
 ItfDEX OP Matters, &c., 353 
 
 Index of Authors, 358 
 
LECTURES 
 
 HISTORY OF INDIAN LITERATURE. 
 
 At the very outset of these lectures I find myself in a 
 certain degree of perplexity, being rather at a loss how 
 best to entitle them. I cannot say that they are to treat 
 of the history of " Indian Literatiire ; " for then I should 
 have to consider the whole body of Indian languages, in- 
 cluding those of non- Aryan origin. Nor can I say that 
 their subject is the history of " Indo- Aryan Literature ; " 
 for then I should have to discuss the modem languages of 
 India also, which form a third period in the development 
 of Indo- Aryan speech. Nor, lastly, can I say that they 
 are to present a history of " Sanskrit Literature ; " for the 
 Indo- Aryan language is not in its first period " Sanskrit," 
 i.e., the language of the educated, but is still a popular 
 dialect ; while in its second period the people spoke not 
 Sanskrit, but Prakritic dialects, which arose simultaneously 
 with Sanskrit out of the ancient Indo- Aryan vernacular. 
 In order, however, to relieve you from any doubt as to 
 what you have to expect from me here, I may at once 
 remark that it is only the literature of the first and second 
 periods of the Indo-Aryan language with which we have 
 to ^0. For the sake of brevity I retain the name " Indian 
 Literature." 
 
 I shall frequently in the course of these lectures be 
 forced to draw upon your forbearance. The subject they 
 discuss may be compared to a yet uncultivated tract of 
 
 A 
 
2 LECTURES ON THE 
 
 country, of which only a few spots have here and there 
 been cleared, while the greater part of it remains covered 
 with dense forest, impenetrable to the eye, and obstructing 
 bhe prospect. A clearance is indeed now by degrees being 
 made, but slowly, more especially because ia addition to 
 the natural obstacles which impede investigation, there still 
 prevails a dense mist of prejudice and preconceived opinions 
 hovering over the land, and enfolding it as with a veU. 
 
 The Uterature of India passes generally for the most 
 ancient literature of which we possess written records, and 
 justly so.^ But the reasons which have hitherto been 
 thought sufficient to establish this fact are not the correct 
 ones; and it is indeed a matter for wonder that people 
 should have been so long contented with them. In the &st 
 Iplace, Indian tradition itself has been adduced in support of 
 this fact, and for a very long time this was considered suffi- 
 cient. It is, I thiak, needless for me to waste words upon 
 the futile nature of such evidence. In the next place, as- 
 tronomical data have been appealed to, according to which 
 the Vedas would date from about 1400 B.C. But these 
 data are given in writings, which are evidently of very 
 modern origin, and they might consequently be the result 
 of calculations ^ instituted for the express purpose. Fur- 
 
 ^ In so far as this claim may not other hand, the opinion expressed in 
 
 now be disputed by the Egyptian the first edition of this work (1852), to 
 
 monumental records and papyrus the effect that the Indians may either 
 
 rolls, or even by the Assyrian fitera- have brought the knowledge of these 
 
 ture which has but recently been lunar mansions, headed by KriUikd, 
 
 brought to light. with them into India, or else have 
 
 2 Besides, these calculations are of obtained it at a later period thvough 
 a very vague character, and do not the commercial relations of the Phoe- 
 yield any such definite date as that niciaus with the Panj^b, has recently 
 given above, but only some epoch gained considerably in probability ; 
 lying between 1820-860 B.C., see and therewith the suggestion of 
 /. St., X. 236; Whitney in /oara. Babylon as the mother country of the 
 R. A. S., i. 317, ff. (1864). True, observations on which this date is 
 the circumstance that the oldest re- established. Seetheseoondof my two 
 cords begin the series of nahliatras treatises. Die vediaehen Nachrichten 
 with the sign Krittikd, carries us voa (iejjiVaMirtro (Berlin, 1862), pp. 
 back to a considerably earlier period 362-400 ; my paper, Ueber den Veda- 
 even than these dates, derived from halender Narnens Jyotisha (1862), p. 
 the so-called Vedic Calendar, viz., 15 ; /. St., x. 429.ix. 241, ff.- Whit- 
 to a period between 2780-1820 B.C., ney, Oriental and Linguistic Studies 
 since the vernal equinox coincided (1874), ii. 418. — Indeed a direct re- 
 with 7) Tauri {Rrittikd), in round ferenoe to Babylon and its sea trade, 
 numbers, about the year 2300 B.C., in which the ex'portatiou of peacocks 
 see /. St., i. 234-236. But, on the is mentioned, has lately come to light 
 
HISTORY OF INDIAN LITERATURE. 
 
 tlier, one of the Buddhist eras has been relied upon, 
 according to which a reformer is supposed to have arisen 
 in the sixth century B.C., in opposition to the Brahmanical 
 hierarchy ; but the authenticity of this particular era is 
 still extremely questionable. Lastly, the period when 
 Panini, the first systematic grammarian, flourished, has 
 been referred to the fourth century B.C., and from this, as a 
 starting-point, conclusions as to the period of literary deve- 
 lopment which preceded him have been deduced. But the 
 arguments in favour of Panini's having lived at that time* 
 are altogether weak and hypothetical, and in no case can 
 they furnish us with any sort of solid basis. 
 
 The reasons, however, by which we are fully justified in 
 regarding the literature of India as the most ancient lite- 
 rature of which written records on an extensive scale have 
 been handed down to us, are these : — 
 
 In the more ancient parts of the Rigveda-Samhita, we 
 find the Indian race settled on the north-western borders 
 of India, in the Panjab, and even beyond the Panjab, on 
 the Kubha, or Kxa^v, in Kabul.* The gradual spread of 
 
 in an Indian text, the B^veruj^taka, 
 Bee MinayefF in the Milanges Asia- 
 tiques (Imperial Bussian Academy), 
 ■vi. 577, £f. (1871), a,Tidi Monatsierichte 
 of the Berlin Academy, p. 622 (1871), 
 As, however, this testimony belongs 
 to a comparatively late period, no 
 great importance can be attached to 
 it. — Direct evidence of ancient com- 
 mercial relations between India and 
 the West has recently been found in 
 hieroglyphic texts of the seventeenth 
 century, at which time the Aryas 
 would appear to have been already 
 settled on the Indus. For the word 
 Ica^, ' ape,' which occurs in I Kings 
 X. 22, in the. form qof, 6r. Krpros, is 
 found in these Egyptian texts in the 
 form iafu, see Joh. Dumichen, Die 
 FloUe einer egypt. KSnigin aus dem 1 7. 
 JaJirh. (Leipzig, 1868), table ii. p. 17. 
 Lastly, tukkitm, the Hebrew name 
 for peacocks (l Kings x. 22, 2 Chron. 
 ix. 21) necessarily implies that al- 
 ready in Solomon's time the Phoeni- 
 cian ophir-merchants "onteu affaire 
 soit au pays meme des Abhlra soit 
 sur un autre point de la cote de 
 
 I'Inde avec des peuplades dravidi- 
 ennes," Julien Vinson, iJentje de 
 Zinguistique, yi. 120, ff. (1873). See 
 also Burnell, Elements of South In- 
 dian Palceography, p. 5 (Mangalore, 
 1874). 
 
 ° Or even, as Goldstiicker sup- 
 poses, earlier than Buddha., 
 
 * One of the Vedic Rishis, asserted 
 to be Vatsa, of the family of Kanva, 
 extols, Rik, viii. 6. 46-48, the splen- 
 did presents, consisting of horses, 
 cattle, and ushtras yoked four toge- 
 ther — (Roth in the St. Petersburg 
 Diet, explains ushtra as ' buffalo, 
 humped bull;' generally it means 
 ' camel ') — which, to the glory of the 
 Tddvas, he received whilst residing 
 with Tiriindira and Parsu. Or have 
 we here only a single person, Tirim- 
 dira Parsu ? In the Sftnkh^yana 
 Srauta-Sutra, xvi. 11. 20, at least, 
 he is luiderstood as Tirinidira Psira- 
 s'avya. These names suggest Tiridates 
 and the Persians; see I.St., iv. 379, n., 
 but compare Girard de Eialle, Heitie 
 de Linguist., iv. 227 (1872). Of 
 course, we must not think of the 
 
4 LECTURES ON THE 
 
 the race from these seats towards the east, beyond the 
 Sarasvati and over Hindustan as far as the Ganges, can be 
 traced in the later portions of the Vedic writings almost 
 step by step. The writings of the following period, that 
 of the epic, consist of accounts of the internal conflicts 
 among the conquerors of Hindtistan themselves, as, for 
 instance, the Maha-Bharata ; or of the farther spread of 
 Brahmanism towards the south, as, for instance, the Ea- 
 mayana. If we connect with this the first fairly accurate 
 information about India which we have from a Greek 
 source, viz., from Megasthenes,* it becomes clear that at 
 the time of this writer the Brahmanising of Hindustan was 
 already completed, while at the time of the Periplus (see 
 Lassen, I. AK., ii. 150, n.; I. St., ii. 192) the very south- 
 ernmost point of the Dekhan had already become a seat of 
 the worship of the wife of ^iva. What a series of years, 
 of centuries, must necessarily have elapsed before this 
 boundless tract of country, inhabited by wild and vigorous 
 tribes, could have been brought over to Brahmanism ! ! It 
 may perhaps here be objected that the races and tribes 
 found by Alexander on the banks of the Indus appear to 
 stand entirely on a Vedic, and not on a Brahmanical foot- 
 ing. As a matter of fact this is true ; but we should not 
 be justified in drawing from this any conclusion whatever 
 with regard to India itself. For these peoples of the Pan- 
 jab never submitted to the Brahmanical order of things, 
 but always retained their ancient Vedic standpoint, free 
 and independent, without either priestly domination or 
 system of caste. For this reason, too, they were the ob- 
 jects of a cordial hatred on the part of their kinsmen, who 
 had wandered farther on, and on this account also Buddh- 
 ism gained an easy entrance among them. 
 
 Persians after Cyrus : that would current, of the word Tiri in Tiridates, 
 
 bring us too far down. But the Per- &c., from the Pahlavi tir= Zend tis- 
 
 sians were so called, and had their tiya (given, e.g., by M. Br&il, Be 
 
 own princes, even before the time of Persicis nominibus (1863), pp. 9, lo), 
 
 Cyrus. Or ought we rather, as sug- is hardly justified, 
 jested by Olshausen in the BeHincr * Who as ambassador of Seleucus 
 
 Monatsberichte (1874), p. 708, to resided for some time at the court 
 
 think of the Parthavas, i.e., Parthi- of Chandragupta, His reports are 
 
 ans, who as well as PirSas are men- preserved to us chiefly in the 'IvSini 
 
 tioned in the time of the Achseme- of Arrian, who lived in the second 
 
 nidse ? The derivation, hitherto century A.D. 
 
niSTOR Y OF INDIAN LITER A TURE. 5 
 
 And while the claims of the written records of Indian 
 literature to a high antiqidty — its beginnings may per- 
 haps he traced back even to the time when the Indo- 
 Aryans still dwelt together with the Persa- Aryans — are 
 thus indisputably proved by external, geographical testi- 
 mony, the internal evidence in the same direction which 
 may be gathered from their contents, is no less conclusive. 
 In the songs of the Rik, the robust spirit of the people 
 gives expression to the feeling of its relation to nature, 
 with a spontaneous freshness and simplicity ; the powers 
 of nature are worshipped as superior beings, and their 
 kindly aid besought within their several spheres. Begin- 
 ning with this nature-worship, which everywhere recog- 
 nises only the individual phenomena of nature, and these 
 in the first instance as superhuman, we trace in Indian 
 literature the progress of the Hindu people through almost 
 all the phases of religious development through which the 
 human mind generally has passed. The individual pheno- 
 mena of nature, which at first- impress the imagination as 
 being superhuman, are gradually classified within their 
 different spheres ; and a certain unity is discovered among 
 them. Thus we arrive at a number of divine beings, each 
 exercising supreme sway within its particular province, 
 whose influence is in course of time further extended to 
 the corresponding events of human life, while at the same 
 time they are endowed with human attributes and organs. 
 The number — already considerable — of these natural 
 deities, these regents of the powers of nature, is further 
 increased by the addition of abstractions, taken from ethi- 
 cal relations ; and to these as to the other deities divine 
 powers, personal existence, and activity are ascribed. Into 
 this multitude of divine figures, the spirit of inquiry seeks 
 at a later stage to introduce order, by classifying and 
 co-ordinating them according to their principal bearings. 
 The principle followed in this distribution is, like the con- 
 ception of the deities themselves, entirely borrowed from 
 the contemplation of nature. We have the gods who act 
 in the heavens, in the air, upon the earth ; and of these 
 the sun, the wind, and fire are recognised as the main repre- 
 sentatives and rulers respectively. These three gradually 
 obtain precedence over all the other gods, who are only 
 looked upon as their creatures and servants. Strength- 
 
6 LECTURES ON THE 
 
 ened by these classifications, speculation presses on and 
 seeks to estabUsh the relative position of these three 
 deities, and to arrive at unity for the supreme Being. This 
 is accomplished either speculatively, by actually assuming 
 such a supreme and purely absolute Being, viz., " Brah- 
 man" (neut.), to whom these three in their turn stand 
 in the relation of creatures, of servants only; or arbi- 
 trarily, according as one or other of the three is worshipped 
 as the supreme god. The sun-god seems in the first 
 instance to have been promoted to this honour ; the Persa- 
 Aryans at aU events retained this standpoint, of course 
 extending it still further; and ia the older parts of the 
 Brahmanas also — ^to which rather than to the Samhitas 
 the Avesta is related in respect of age and contents — ^we 
 find the sun-god here and there exalted far above the other 
 deities (prasavitd, dev&ndm). We also find ample traces of 
 this in the forms of worship, which so often preserve 
 relics of antiquity.^ 2f ay, as " Brahman " (masc), he has 
 in theory retained this position, down even to the latest 
 times, although in a very colourless manner. Hiis col- 
 leagues, the air and fire gods, in consequence of their 
 much more direct and sensible influence, by degrees ob- 
 tained complete possession of the supreme power, though 
 constantly iu conflict with each other. Their worship has 
 passed through a long series of different phases, and it 
 is evidently the same which Megasthenes found in Hin- 
 dustan,* and which at the time of the Periplus had pene- 
 trated, though in a form already very corrupt, as far as the 
 southernmost point of the Dekhan. 
 
 But while we are thus justified in assuming a high 
 antiquity for Indian literature, on external geographical 
 grounds, as well as on internal evidence, connected with 
 the history of the Hindii religion,* the case is suf&ciently 
 unsatisfactory, when we come to look for definite chrono- 
 
 ^ Cf . my paper, Zwei vedische Texte popular dialects, for whose gradual 
 
 iiber Ominaund Portenta (1859), pp. development out of the language of 
 
 392-393. the Vedic hymns into this form it is 
 
 * To these, thirdly, we have to absolutely necessary to postulate the 
 
 add evidence derived from the Ian- lapse of a series of centuries, 
 
 guage. The edicts of Piyadasi, * According to Strabo, p. 117, 
 
 whose date is fixed by the mention Aiopvffos (Budra, Soma, Siva^ was 
 
 therein of Greek kings, and even of worshipped in the mountains, "Rpa- 
 
 Alexander himself, are written in icX^s (Indra, Vishnu) in the plain. 
 
HISTORY OF INDIAN LITERATURE. 7 
 
 logical dates. We must reconcile ourselves to the fact 
 that any such search will, as a general rule, be absolutely 
 fruitless. It is only in the case of those branches of 
 literature which also became known abroad, and also in 
 regard to the last few centuries, when either the dates of 
 manuscripts, or the data given in the introductions or 
 closing observations of the works themselves, furnish us 
 some guidance, that we can expect any result. Apart 
 from this, an internal chronology based on the character 
 of the works themselves, and on the quotations, &c., 
 therein contained, is the only one possible. 
 
 Indian literature divides itseK into two great periods, 
 the Vedic and the Sanskrit. Turning now to the former, 
 or Vedic period, I proceed to give a preliminary general 
 outline of it before entering into the details. 
 
( 8 ) 
 
 FIRST PERIOD. 
 
 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 We have to distinguish four Vedas — the Rig- Veda, the 
 Sama-Veda, the Yajur-Veda, which is in a double form, 
 and the Atharva-Veda. Each of these is again subdivided 
 into three distinct parts — Samhita, Brahmana, and Siitra. 
 Their relation to each other is as follows : — 
 The Samhita * of the Rik is purely a lyrical collection, 
 comprising the 'store of song which the Hindiis brought 
 with them from their ancient homes on the banks of the 
 Indus, and which they had there used for " invoking pro- 
 sperity on themselves and their flocks, in their adoration 
 of the dawn, in celebration of the struggle between the 
 god who wields the lightning and the power of darkness, 
 and in rendering thanks to the heavenly beings for pre- 
 servation in battle." t The songs are here classified 
 according to the families of poets to which they are as- 
 cribed. The principle of classification is consequently, so 
 to speak, a purely scientific one. It is therefore possible, 
 though more cannot be said, that the redaction of the text 
 may be of later date than that of the two Samhitas which 
 
 * The name Saiphitd (collection) vidyd, svddhydya, adhyayana, also 
 
 first occurs in the so-called Aran- ' Veda * alone. It is in the Sutras 
 
 yakas, or latest supplements to the that we first find the term Chhandas 
 
 Brdhmanas, and in the Stitrag ; but specially applied to the Saqihit^ 
 
 whether in the above meaning, is and more particularly in Piinini, 
 
 not as yet certain. The names by by whom Rishi, Nigama, Mantra (?) 
 
 which the Sanihit£[s are designated are also employed in the same 
 
 in the Br£[hmanas are — either richah, manner. 
 
 idmdim, yajimshi, — or Rigveda, Si- + See Roth, Zur Litteratur und 
 
 maveda, Yajurveda, — or Bahvrichas, Gesc/achte des Weda, p. 8 (Stutt- 
 
 ChhandogaB, Adhvaryus, — or trayi gart, 1846). 
 
THE SAMHITAS. 9 
 
 ■will come next under our consideration, and which, pro- 
 viding as they do for a practical want, became necessary 
 immediately upon the institution of a worship with a iixed 
 ritual. For the Samhita of the Saman, and both the 
 Samhitas of the Yajus, consist only of such richas (verses) 
 and sacrificial formidas as had to be recited at the cere- 
 monies of the Soma offering and other sacrifices, and in 
 tlie same order in which they were practically used ; at 
 least, we know for certain, that this is the case in the 
 Yajus. The Samhita of the Saman contains nothing but 
 verses (richas); those of the Yajus, sentences in prose 
 also. The forpaer, the richas, all recur, with a few ex- 
 ceptions, in the Rik-Samhita, so that the Sama-Samhita 
 is nothing more than an extract from the songs of the 
 latter, of the verses applied to the Soma offering. Now 
 the richas found in the Sama-Samhita and Yajuh-Samhita 
 appear in part in a very altered form, deviating consi- 
 derably from the text of the Eik, the Rik-Samhita. Of 
 this a triple explanation is possible. First, these read- 
 ings may be earlier and more original than those of the 
 Rik, liturgical use having protected them from alteration, 
 while the simple song, not being immediately connected 
 with the sacred rite, was less scrupulously preserved. Or, 
 secondly, they may be later than those of the Rik, and 
 may have arisen from the necessity of precisely adapting 
 the text to the meaning attributed to the verse in its 
 application to the ceremony. Or, lastly, they may be of 
 equal authority with those of the Rik, the discrepancies 
 being merely occasioned by the variety of districts and 
 families in which they were used, the text being most 
 authentic in the district and family in which it originated, 
 and less so in those to which it subsequently passed. AU 
 three methods of explanation are alike correct, and in 
 each particular case they must all be kept in view. But 
 if we look more closely at the relation of these verses, it 
 may be stated thus : The richas occurring in the Sama- 
 Samhita generally stamp themselves as older and more 
 original by the greater antiquity of their grammatical 
 forms ; those in the two Samhitas of the Yajus, on the 
 contrary, generally give the impression of having under- 
 gone a secondary alteration. Instances which come 
 under the third method of explanation are found in equal 
 
lo VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 numbers, both in the Sama-Samhita and the Yajuh- 
 Samhita. Altogether, too much stress cannot be laid on 
 this point, namely, that the alterations which the songs 
 and hymns underwent in the popular mouth during their 
 oral transmission, must in any case be regarded as very 
 considerable; since preservation by means of writing is 
 not to be thought of for this period. Indeed we can 
 hardly admit it for the time of the Brahmanas either, 
 otherwise it would be difficult to account for the numerous 
 deviations of the various schools with regard to the text 
 of these works also, as well as for the great number of 
 different schools (Sakhas) generally. 
 
 !But although the songs of the Rik, or the majority of 
 them, were composed on the banks of the Indus, their 
 final compilation and arrangement can only have taken 
 place in India proper ; at what time, however, it is diffi- 
 cult to say. Some portions come down to an age so recent, 
 that the system of caste had already been organised ; and 
 tradition itself, in ascribing to Sakalya and Panchala 
 Babhravya a leading part in the arrangement of the Eik- 
 Samhita, points us to the flourishing epoch of the Videhas 
 and Panchalas, as I shall show hereafter. The Samhita 
 of the Saman, being entirely borrowed from the Rik, gives 
 no clue to the period of its origin; only, in the fact that it 
 contains no extracts from any of the later portions of the 
 Rik, we have perhaps an indication that these were not 
 then in existence. This, however, is a poiut not yet in- 
 vestigated. As for the two Samhitas of the Tajus, we 
 have in the prose portions peculiar to them, most distinct 
 proofs that both originated in the eastern parts of Hin- 
 dustan,^ in the country of the Kurupanchalas, and that 
 they belong to a period when the Brahmanical element 
 had already gained the supremacy, although it had still to 
 encounter many a hard struggle, and when at all events 
 the hierarchy of the Brahmans, and the system of caste, 
 were completely organised. Nay, it may be that we have 
 even external grounds for supposing that the present re- 
 daction of the Sainhita of the White Yajus dates from 
 the third century B.C. For Megasthenes mentions a people 
 called MaSiavBivoL, and this name recurs in the Ma- 
 
 ' Or rather to the east of the Indus, in Hindustdu. 
 
THE BRAHMANAS. n 
 
 dliyamdinas, the principal school of the White Yajus. 
 More of this later on. 
 
 The origin of the Atharva-Samhita dates also from the 
 period when Brahmanism had become dominant. It is in 
 other respects perfectly analogous to the Rik-Samhita, and 
 contains the store of song of this Brahmanical epoch. 
 Many of these songs are to be found also in the last, that 
 is, the least ancient book of the Rik-Sairihita. In the 
 latter they are the latest additions made at the time of 
 its compilation ; in the Atharvan they are the proper and 
 natural utterance of the present. The spirit of the two 
 collections is indeed entirely different. In the Rik there 
 breathes a lively natural feeling a warm love for nature ; 
 while in the Atharvan there prevails, on the contrary, only 
 an anxious dread of her evil spirits, and their magical 
 powers. In the Rik we find the people in a state of free 
 activity and independence; in the Atharvan we see it 
 bound in the fetters of the hierarchy and of superstition. 
 But the Atharva-Sainhita likewise contains pieces of great 
 antiquity, which may perhaps have belonged more to the 
 people proper, to its lower grades; whereas the songs of 
 the Rik appear rather to have been the especial property 
 of the higher families.* It was not without a long struggle 
 that the songs of the Atharvan were permitted to take 
 their place as a fourth Veda. There is no mention made 
 of them in the more ancient portions of the Brahmanas of 
 the Rik, Saman, and Yajus ; indeed they only originated 
 simultaneously with these Brahmanas, and are therefore 
 only alluded to in their later portions. 
 
 We now come to the second part of Vedic literature, 
 the Brahmanas. 
 
 The character of the Brahmanas f may be thus gene- 
 
 * This surmise, tased upon cer- vediscTie Texte vber Omina wnd Por- 
 tain passages in theAtharran, would tenia, pp. 346-348.] 
 certainly be at variance with the t This term signifies ' that which 
 name ' Atharringirasas,' borne by relates to prayer, hrahman.' Brah- 
 this SainhitEi ; according to which man itself means ' drawing forth, ' as 
 it would belong, on the contrary, to well in a physical sense 'producing,' 
 the most ancient and noble Brah- 'creating,' as in a spiritual one 'lift- 
 man families. But I have elsewhere ing up,' 'elevating,' ' strengthen- 
 advanced the conjecture, that this ing.' The first mention of the name 
 name was simply assumed in order BrSihmaria, in the above sense, is 
 to impart a greater sanctity to the found in the Br^hmana of the White 
 contents, see /. St., i. 295. \Zwei Yajus, and especially in its thir- 
 
1 2 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 rally defined : Their object is to connect the sacrificial 
 songs and formulas with the sacrificial rite, by pointing 
 out, on the one hand, their direct mutual relation ; and, on 
 the other, their symbolical connection with each other. 
 In setting forth the former, they give the particular ritual 
 in its details : in illustrating the latter, they are either 
 directly explanatory and analytic, dividing each formula 
 into its constituent parts, or else they establish that con- 
 nection dogmatically by the aid of tradition or specula- 
 tion. We thus find in them the oldest rituals we have, 
 the oldest linguistic explanations, the oldest traditional nar- 
 ratives, and the oldest philosophical speculations. This 
 peculiar character is common generally to all works of 
 this class, yet they differ widely in details, according to 
 their individual tendency, and according as they belong to 
 this or that particular Veda. With respect to age they 
 all date ftom the period 6f the transition from Vedic 
 civilisation and culture to the Brahmanic mode of thought 
 and social order. Nay, they help to bring about this very 
 transition, and some of them belong rather to the time of 
 its commencement, others rather to that of its termina- 
 tion.* The Brahmanas originated from the opinions of 
 individual sages, imparted by oral tradition, and preserved 
 as well as supplemented in their families and by their 
 disciples. The more numerous these separate traditions 
 became, the more urgent became the necessity for bring- 
 ing them into harmony with each other. To this end, as 
 time went on, compilations, comprising a variety of these 
 materials, and in which the different opinions on each 
 subject were uniformly traced to their original represen- 
 
 teentli book. In cases where the commentary, in the same, sense ; 
 
 dogmatical explanation of a cere- they also mention Anubrdhmana, a 
 
 monial'or other precept has already term which does not occur elsewhere 
 
 been given, we there find the ex- except in P^ini. 
 pression tasyoktam brdhmanam, ' of * Pdnini, iv. 3. 105, directly men- 
 
 this the Brdhmana has already been tions ' older {purdnaprokta) Brfh- 
 
 Btated;' whereas in the books pre- manaa ;' and in contradistinction to 
 
 ceding the thirteenth, we find in these there must, of course, have 
 
 such oases taayokto handhuh ' its con- been in existence in his day ' more 
 
 nection has already been set forth.' modern (or as the scholiast says, tnl- 
 
 [I. St., V. 60, ix. 351.] — Besides yakdla) Brithmanas." [See on this 
 
 JBrdhmana, Pravachana is also used Goldstuoker, Pdnini, p. 132, S., and 
 
 in the Silma-Sdtras, according to the my rejoinder in /. St., v, 64, if.] 
 
THE BRAHMANAS. 13 
 
 tatives, were made in different districts by individuals 
 peculiarly qualified for the task. But whether these com- 
 pilations or digests were now actually written down, or 
 were still transmitted orally only, remains uncertain. The 
 latter supposition would seem prohable from the fact that 
 of the same work we here and there find two texts en- 
 tirely differing in their details. Nothing definite, how- 
 ever, can be said on the subject, for in these cases there 
 may possibly have been some fundamental difference in 
 the original, or even a fresh treatment of the materials. 
 It was, moreover, but natural that these compilers should 
 frequently come into collision and conflict with each 
 other. Hence we have now and then to remark the 
 exhibition of strong animosity against those who in the 
 author's opinion are heterodox. The preponderant in- 
 fluence gradually gained by some of these works over the 
 rest — ^whether by reason of their intrinsic value, or of the 
 fact that their author appealed more to the hierarchical 
 spirit* — has resulted, unfortunately for us, in the preserva- 
 tion of these only, while works representative of the dis- 
 puted opinions have for the most part disappeared. Here 
 and there perhaps in India some fragments may still be 
 found ; in general, however, here as everywhere in Indian 
 literature, we encounter the lamentable fact that the 
 works which, in the end, came off victorious, have almost 
 entirely supplanted and effaced their predecessors. After 
 all, a comparatively large number of Brahmanas is still 
 extant — a circumstance which is evidently owing to their 
 being each annexed to a particular Veda, as well as to the 
 fact that a sort of petty jealousy had always prevailed 
 among the families in which the study of the different 
 Vedas was hereditarily transmitted. Thus in the case of 
 each Veda, such works at least as had come to be con- 
 sidered of the highest authority have been preserved, 
 although the practical significance of the Brahmanas was 
 
 * The difficulty of their preserra- writing in India, it is important to 
 tion is also an important factor in point out that the want of suitable 
 the case,' as at that time writing materials, in the North at least, be- 
 either did not exist at all, or at any fore the introduction of paper, must 
 rate was but seldom employed, have been a great obstacle to its 
 [" In considering the question of general use." — Burnell, Elements of 
 the age and extent of the use of Smith Indian Palaogrwphy, p. 10.] 
 
14 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 gradually more and more lost, and passed over to the 
 Siitras, &c. To the number of the Brahmanas, or recen- 
 sions of the Samhitas, which were thus lost, belong those 
 of the Vashkalas, Paingins, Bhallavins, Satyayanins, 
 Kalabavins, Lamakayanins, ^ambuTis, Khadayanins, and 
 ^alankayanins, which we find quoted on various occasions 
 in writings of this class ; besides aU the Chhandas works 
 (Samhitas) specified in the gana, '&unaka' (Pan., iv. 3. 
 106), whose names are not so much as mentioned else- 
 where. 
 
 The difference between the Brahmanas of the several 
 Vedas as to subject-matter is essentially this : The Brah- 
 manas of the Rik, in their exposition of the ritual, gene- 
 rally specify those duties only which fell to the Hotar, or 
 reciter of the riehas, whose office it was to collect from the 
 various hymns the verses suited to each particular occa- 
 sion, as its iastra (canon). The Brahmanas of the Saman 
 confine themselies to the duties of the TJdgatax, or singer 
 of the sAmans; the Brahmanas of the Yajus, to the duties 
 of the Adhvaryu, or actual performer of the sacrifice. In 
 the Brahmanas of the Eik, the order of the sacrificial per- 
 formance is on the whole preserved, whereas the sequence 
 of the hymns as they occur in the Rik-Sainhita is not 
 attended to at all. But in the Brahmanas of the Saman and 
 Yajus, we find a difference corresponding to the fact that 
 their Samhitas are already adapted to the proper order of 
 the ritual. The Brahmana of the San^an enters but sel- 
 dom into the explanation of individual verses; the Brah- 
 mana of the White Yajus, on the contrary, may be almost 
 considered as a running dogmatic commentary on its 
 Samhita, to the order of which it adheres so strictly, that 
 in the case of its omitting one or more verses, we might 
 perhaps be justified in concluding that they did not then 
 fgrm part of the Samhita. A supplement also has been 
 added to this Brahmana for some of those books of the 
 Samhita which were incorporated with it at a period sub- 
 sequent to its original compilation, so that the Brahmana 
 comprises 100 adhy&yas instead of 60, as formerly seems 
 to have been the case. The Brahmana of_ the Black 
 Yajus does not, as we shall see further on, (iiffer in its 
 contents, but only in point of time, from its Samhita. It 
 is, in fact, a supplement to it. The Brahmana of the 
 
THE SUTRAS. 
 
 IS 
 
 Atliarvan is up to the present time unknown, though there 
 are manuscripts of it in England.^ 
 
 The common name for the Brahmana literature is aruti, 
 ' hearing/ i.e., that which is suhject of hearing, subject of 
 exposition, of teaching, by which name their learned, and 
 consequently exclusive, character is sufficiently intimated. 
 In accordance with this we find in the works themselves 
 frequent warnings against intrusting the knowledge con- 
 tained in them to any profane person. The name Sruti is 
 not indeed mentioned in them, but only in the Siitras, 
 though it is perfectly justified by the corresponding use of 
 the verb sru which occurs in them frequently. 
 
 The third stage in Vedic literature is represented by the 
 Siitras.* These are, upon the whole, essentially foundevi 
 
 ' It has since been published, see 
 below. It presents no sort of di- 
 rect internal relation to the Ath. 
 Samhitd, 
 
 * The word Stitra in the above 
 sense occurs first in the Madhuk^nda, 
 one of the latest supplements to the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus, next 
 in the two Grihya-S6tras of the Rik, 
 and finally in F^ini. It means 
 'thread,' 'band,' of. Lat. mere. 
 Would it be correct to regard it as 
 an expression analogous to the Ger- 
 man band (volume) ? If so, the term 
 would have to be understood of the 
 fastening together of the leaves, and 
 would necessarily presuppose the 
 existence of writing (in the same 
 way, perhaps, as grantha does, a 
 term first occurring in P^nini?). 
 Inquiry into the origin of Indian 
 writing has not, unfortunately, led 
 to much result as yet. The oldest 
 inscriptions, according to Wilson, 
 date no earlier than the third century 
 B.C. Nearchus, however, as is well 
 known, mentions writing, and his 
 time corresponds very well upon the 
 whole to the period to which we 
 must refer the origin of the Stitras. 
 But as these were composed chiefly 
 with a view to their being committed 
 to memory — a fact which follows 
 from their form, and partly accounts 
 for it — there might be good grounds 
 
 for taking exception to the etymo- 
 logy just proposed, aijd for regard- 
 ing the signification 'guiding-line,' 
 ' clue,' as the original one. [This is 
 the meaning given in the St. Peters- 
 burg Dictionary. — The writing of 
 the Indians is of Semitic origin ; 
 see Benfey, Jndien (in Ersch and 
 Gruber's Encydopcedia, 1840), p. 254; 
 my Indisdie Skizzen (1856), p. 127, 
 ff. ; Burnell, Elem. of South Indian 
 Pal., p. 3, £F. Probably it served in 
 the first instance merely for secular 
 purposes, and was only applied sub- 
 sequently to literature. SeeMUller, 
 Anc. S. lAt., p. 507 ; /. St., v. 20, ff. ; 
 /. Str., ii. 339. Goldstiioker {Pdnini, 
 i860, p. 26, ff.) contends that the 
 words sUtra and grantha must abso- 
 lutely be connected with writing. 
 See, however. /. St. , v. 24, ff. ; xiii. 
 476.] — Nor does etymology lead 
 us to a more certain result in the 
 case of another word found in this 
 connection,viz., ahshara, 'syllable.' 
 This word does not seem to occur in 
 this sense in the Sainhitd of the Rik 
 (or Silman) ; it there rather signifies 
 'imperishable.' The connecting link 
 between this primary signification 
 and the meaning ' syllable,' which is 
 first met with in the Samhitii of the 
 Yajus, might perhaps be the idea of 
 writing, the latter being the making 
 imperishable, as it were, of otherwise 
 
i6 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 on the Brahmanas, and must be considered as their neces- 
 sary supplement, as a further advance in the path struck 
 out by the latter in the direction of more rigid system and 
 formalism.* While the Brahmanas, with the view of ex- 
 plaining the sacrifice and supporting it by authority, &c., 
 unifofinly confine themselves to individual instances of 
 ritual, interpretation, tradition, and speculation, subjecting 
 these to copious dogmatic treatment, the object of the 
 Sutras is to comprehend everything that had any reference 
 whatever to these subjects. The mass of matter became 
 too great ; there was risk of the tenor of the whole being 
 lost in the details ; and it gradually became impossible to 
 discuss all the different particulars consecutively. Diffuse 
 discussion of the details had to be replaced by concise 
 collective summaries of them. The utmost brevity was, 
 however, requisite in condensing this great mass, in order 
 to avoid overburdening the memory; and this brevity 
 ultimately led to a remarkably compressed and enigmatical 
 style, which was more and more cultivated as the litera- 
 ture of the Sutras became more independent, and in pro- 
 portion as the resulting advantages became apparent. 
 Thus the more ancient a Siitra, the more intelligible it is ; 
 the more enigmatical it is, the more modern wiU it prove.* 
 But the literature of the Siitras can by no means be 
 said to rest entirely upon the Brahmanas, for these, as 
 a rule, give too exclusive a prominence to the ritual of 
 the sacrifice. Indeed, it is only one particular division of 
 the Siitras — viz., the Kalpa-Siitras, aphorisms exclusively 
 devoted to the consideration of this ritual ^^ — which bears 
 
 fleeting and evanescent words and ' On the mutual relations of the 
 
 syllables (.'). Or is the notion of the Brahmanas and Stitras, see also/. St., 
 
 imperishable Xo7os at the root of viii. 76, 77 ; ix. 353, 354. 
 
 this signification ? [In the Errata * Precisely as in the case of the 
 
 to the first German edition it was Brdhmanas, so also in the case of the 
 
 pointed out, on the authority of a Kalpas, i.e., Kalpa-S6tras, Panini, 
 
 communication received from Pro- iv. 3. 105, distinguishes those com- 
 
 f essor Aufrecht, that ahshara is twice posed by the ancients from those 
 
 used in the Rik of the ' measuring of that are nearer to his own time, 
 
 speech,' viz., i. 164. 24 (47), and " On the sacrifice and sacrificial 
 
 ix. 13. 3, and consequently may implementsof the^rauta-Sutras, see 
 
 there mean ' syllable.' According to M. Miillerin^. i). ilf. (?.,IX. xxxvi.- 
 
 the St. Petersburg Dictionary, this Ixxxii. ; Haug's notes to his transla- 
 
 latter meaning is to be derived from tion of the Aitarey a-Brdhmana ; and 
 
 the idea of ' the constant, simple ' ele- my paper, Ziir Kenntniss des vedischen 
 
 ment in language.] Opfei-rituals, I. St., x. xiii. 
 
THE SUTRAS. 17 
 
 the special name of ^rauta-Siitras, i.e., " Siitras founded 
 on the Sruti." The sources of the other Siitras must be 
 sought elsewhere. 
 
 Side by side with the Srauta-Siitras we are met by a 
 second family of ritual Siitras, the so-called Grihya-Siitras, 
 which treat of domestic ceremonies, those celebrated at 
 birth and before it, at marriage, as weU as at death and 
 after it. The origin of these works is sufficiently indi- 
 cated by their title, since, in addition to the name of 
 Grihya-Siitras, they also bear that of Smarta- Siitras, i.e., 
 " Siitras founded on the Smriti." Smriti, ' memory,' i.e., 
 that which is the subject of memory, can evidently only 
 be distinguished from Sruti, ' hearing,' i.e., that which is 
 the subject of hearing, in so far as the former impresses 
 itself on the memory directly, without special instruction 
 and provision for the purpose. It belongs to all, it is the 
 property of the whole people, it is supported by the con- 
 sciousness of all, and does not therefore need to be spe- 
 cially inculcated. Custom and law are common property 
 and accessible to all ; ritual, on the contrary, though in 
 like manner arising originally from the common conscious- 
 ness, is developed in its details by the speculations and 
 suggestions of individuals, and remains so far the property 
 of the few, who, favoured by external circumstances, under- 
 stand how to inspire the people with a due awe of the 
 importance and sanctity of their institutions. It is not, 
 however, to be assumed from this that Smriti, custom and 
 law, did not also undergo considerable alterations iu the 
 course of time. The mass of the immigrants had a great 
 deal too much on their hands in the subjugation of the 
 aborigines to be in a position to occupy themselves with 
 other matters. Their whole energies had, in the first in- 
 stance, to be concentrated upon the necessity of holding 
 their own against the enemy. When this had been 
 effected, and resistance was broken down, they awoke 
 suddenly to find themselves bound and shackled in the 
 hands of other and far more powerful enemies ; or rather, 
 they did not awake at all ; their physical powers had been 
 so long and so exclusively exercised and expended to the 
 detriment of their intellectual energy, that the latter had 
 gradually dwindled away altogether. The history of these 
 new enemies was this : The knowledge of the ancient songs 
 
 B 
 
1 8 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 with which, in their ancient homes, the Indians had woiv 
 shipped the powers of nature, and the knowledge of the 
 ritual connected with these songs, became more and more 
 the exclusive property of those whose ancestors perhaps 
 composed them, and in whose families this knowledge had 
 been hereditary. These same famUies remained in the 
 possession of the traditions connected with them, and 
 which were necessary to their explanation. To strangers 
 in a foreign country, anything brought with them from 
 home becomes invested with a halo of sacredness; and 
 thus it came about that these families of singers became 
 families of priests, whose influence was more and more 
 consolidated in proportion as the distance between the 
 people and their former home increased, and the more 
 their ancient institutions were banished from their minds 
 by external struggles. The guardians of the ancestral 
 customs, of the primitive forms of worship, took an in- 
 creasingly prominent position, became the representatives 
 of these, and, finally, the representatives of the Divine 
 itself For so ably had they used their opportunities, that 
 they succeeded in founding a hierarchy the like of which 
 the world has never seen. To this position it would have 
 been scarcely possible for them to attain but for the ener- 
 vating climate of Hindustan, and the mode of life induced 
 by it, which exercised a deteriorating influence upon a 
 race unaccustomed to it. The families also of the petty 
 kings who had formerly reigned over individual tribes, 
 held a more prominent position in the larger kingdoms 
 which were of necessity founded in Hindustan ; and thus 
 arose the military caste. Lastly, the people proper, the 
 Vi^as, or settlers, united to form a third caste, and they in 
 their turn naturally reserved to themselves prerogatives 
 over the fourth caste, or Siidras. This last was composed 
 of various mixed elements, partly, perhaps, of an Aryan 
 race which had settled earlier in India, partly of the 
 aborigines themselves, and partly again of those among 
 the immigrants, or their Western kinsmen, who refused 
 adherence to liie new Brahmanical order. The royal 
 
 * Who were dietiDguished by their colour, for caste, [See I. St.,x.4, 
 very colour from the three other lo.] 
 castes ; hence the name vaiiia, i. e. 
 
THE SUTRAt. 19 
 
 families, the warriors, who, it may be supposed, strenu- 
 ously supported the priesthood so long as it was a ques- 
 tion of robbing the people of their rights, now that this 
 was effected turned against their former allies, and sought 
 to throw off the yoke that was likewise laid upon them. 
 These efforts were, however, unavailing ; the colossus was 
 too firmly established. Obscure legends and isolated 
 allusions are the only records left to us in the later 
 writings, of the sacrilegious hands which ventured to at- 
 tack the sacred and divinely consecrated majesty of the 
 Brahmans; and these are careful to note, at the same 
 time, the terrible punishments which befell those impious 
 offenders. The fame of many a Barbarossa has here 
 passed away and been forgotten ! 
 
 The Smarta- Sutras, which led to this digression, gene- 
 rally exhibit the complete standpoint of Brahmanism. 
 Whether in the form of actual records or of compositions 
 orally transmitted, they in any case date from a period when 
 more than men cared to lose of the Smriti^ — that precious 
 tradition passed on from generation to generation — was in 
 danger of perishing. Though, as we have just seen, it had 
 imdergone considerable modifications, even in the families 
 who guarded it, through the influence of the Brahmans, 
 yet this influence was chiefly exercised with reference 
 to its political bearings, leaving domestic manners and 
 customs ^^ untouched in their ancient form; so that these 
 works cover a rich treasure of ideas and conceptions of 
 extreme antiquity. It is in them also that we have to 
 look for the beginnings of the Hindii legal liter&ture,^^ 
 whose subject-matter, indeed, in part corresponds exactly 
 to theirs, and whose authors bear for the most part the 
 same names as those of the Grihya-Sutras. With the 
 strictly legal portions of the law-books, those dealing with 
 
 " For the ritual relating to birth (1854), and M. MuUer, iSW., IX.' 
 
 see Speijer's book on the ,/(f taiar«»a i.-xxxvi. (1855) ; andlastly, 0. Don- 
 
 (Leyden, 1872) — for the marriage ner's PindapiVriyajna (1870). 
 
 ceremonies, Haas's paper, Ueber die ^^ Besides the Grihya-Sitras we 
 
 Beirathsgebrduche der (dten Jnder, find some texts directly called Dhar- 
 
 with additions by myself in /. St., ma-Siitras, or Stoay^oh&ika-Stitras, 
 
 V. 267, ff. ; also my paper Vedische which are specified as portions of 
 
 Hochseitsspruche, ibid., p. 177, ff. ^rauta-Sritras, but which were no 
 
 (1862) — on the burial of the dead, doubt Bubsequently inserted into 
 
 lioth in Z. D. M. G., viii. 487, ff. these. 
 
20 VEDIC LITERATURE. ' 
 
 civil law, criminal law, and political law, we do not, it is 
 true, find more than a few points of connection in these 
 Sutras ; but probably these branches were not codified at 
 aU until the pressure of actual imminent danger made it 
 necessary to establish them on a secure foundation. The 
 risk of their gradually dying out was, owing to the con- 
 stant operation of the factors involved, not so great as in 
 the case of domestic customs. But a far more real peril 
 threatened them in the fierce assaults directed against the 
 Brahmanical polity by the gradually increasing power of 
 Buddhism. Buddhism originally proceeded purely from 
 theoretical heterodoxy regarding the relation of matter to 
 spirit, and similar questions; but in course of time it 
 addressed itself to practical points of religion and worship, 
 and thenceforth it imperilled the very existence of Brah- 
 manism, siuce the military caste and the oppressed classes 
 of the people generally availed themselves of its aid in 
 order to throw off the ' overwhelming yoke of priestly 
 domination. The statement of Megasthenes, that the 
 Indians in his time administered law only atro fiv^fi7]<;, 
 ' from memory,' I hold therefore to be perfectly correct, 
 and I can see no grounds for the view that /iv^firj is but a 
 mistranslation of Smriti in the sense of Smriti-Sastra, ' a 
 treatise on Smriti.'* For the above-mentioned reason, 
 however — in consequence of the development of Bud- 
 dhism into an anti-Brahmanical religion — the case may 
 have altered soon afterwards, and a code, that of Manu, 
 for example (founded on the Manava Grihya-Siitra), may 
 have been drawn up. But this work belongs not to the 
 close of the Vedic, but to the beginning of the following 
 period. 
 
 As we have found, in the Smriti, an independent basis for 
 theGrihya-Siitras — in addition to the Brahmanas, where but 
 few points of contact with these Siitras can be traced — so 
 too shall we find an independent basis for those Siitras 
 the contents of which relate to language. In this case it 
 is in the recitation of the songs and formulas at the sac- 
 rifice that we shall find it. Although, accordingly, these 
 
 * This latter view has teen best nell, Elements of S. Ind. Palceogr., 
 set forth by Sohwanbeok, Megas- p. 4] 
 thenes, pp. 50, 5 1 . [But see alao Bur- 
 
THE SUTRAS. ■ 21 
 
 Siitras stand on a level with the Brahipanas, which owe 
 their origin to the same source, yet this must be under- 
 stood as applying only to those views on linguistic rela- 
 tions which, being presupposed in the Siitras, must be 
 long anterior to them. It must not be taken as applying 
 to the works themselves, inasmuch as they present the 
 results of these antecedent investigations in a collected 
 and systematic form. Obviously also, it was a much more 
 natural thing to attempt, in the iirst instance, to elucidate 
 the relation of the prayer to the sacrifice, than to make 
 the form in which the prayer itself was drawn up a sub- 
 ject of investigation. The more sacred the sacrificial per- 
 formance grew, and the more fixed the form of worship 
 gradually became, the greater became the importance of 
 the prayers belonging to it, and the stronger their claim to 
 the utmost possible purity and safety. To effect this, it 
 was necessary, first, to fix the text of the prayers ; secondly, 
 to establish a correct pronunciation and recitation; and) 
 lastly, to preserve the tradition of their origin. It was 
 only after the lapse of time, and when by degrees their 
 literal sense had become foreign to the phase into which the 
 language had passed — and this was of course much later 
 the case with the priests, who were familiar with them, 
 than with the people at large — that it became necessary 
 to take precautions for securing and establishing the sense 
 also. To attain all these objects, those most conversant 
 with the subject were obliged to give instruction to the 
 ignorant, and circles were thus formed around them of 
 travelling scholars, who made pilgrimages from one teacher 
 to another according as they were attracted by the fame 
 of special learning. These researches were naturally not 
 confined to questions of language, but embraced the whole 
 range of Brahmanical theology, extending in like manner 
 to questions of worship, dogma, and speculation, all of 
 which, indeed, were closely interwoven with each other. 
 We must, at any rate, assume among the Brahmans of this 
 period a very stirring intellectual life, in which even the 
 women took an active part, and which accounts still 
 further for the superiority maintained and exercised by the 
 Brahmans over the rest of the people. Nor did the mili- 
 tary caste hold aloof from these inquiries, especially after 
 they had succeeded in securing a time of repose from 
 
22 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 external warfare. "We have here a faithful copy of the 
 scholastic period of the Middle Ages; sovereigns whose 
 courts form the centres of intellectual life ; Brahmans who 
 with lively emulation carry^ on their inquiries into the 
 highest questions the human mind can propound ; women 
 who with enthusiastic ardour plunge into the mysteries 
 of speculation, impressing and astonishing men by the 
 depth and loftiness of their opinions, and who — ^while in 
 a state which, judging from description, seems to have heen 
 a kind of somnambulism — solve the questions proposed to 
 them on sacred subjects. As to the quality of their solu- 
 tions, and the value of all these inquiries generally, that 
 is another matter. But neither have the scholastic sub- 
 tleties any absolute worth in themselves; it 'is only the 
 striving and the effort which ennobles the character of 
 any such period. 
 
 The advance made by linguistic research during this 
 epoch was very considerable. It was then that the text 
 of the prayers was fixed, that the redaction of the various 
 Samhitas took place. By degrees, very extensive pre- 
 cautions were taken for this purpose. For their study 
 (Patha), as well as for the different methods of preserving 
 them — whether by writing or by memory, for either is 
 possible^^ — such special injunctions are given, that it seems 
 
 ^' All the technical terms, how- by the rest of the Brahmans. On 
 
 ever, which occur for study of the the other hand, GoldstUeker, Boht- 
 
 Veda and the like, uniformly refer lingk, Whitney, and Roth (Der 
 
 to speaking and reciting only, and Athcurvaveda in Kashmir, p. lo), are 
 
 thereby point to exclusively oral of the opposite opinion, holding, in 
 
 tradition. The writing down of the particular, that the authors of the 
 
 Vedic texts seems indeed not to Pr^ti^khyas must have had written 
 
 have taken place until a compara- texts before them. Benfey also 
 
 tively late period. Seel. St., v. i8, formerly shared this view, but re- 
 
 ff. (1861). Miiller, Anc. S. Lit., p. cently {Einleitung in die Qramma- 
 
 507, ff. (1859) ; Westergaiird, Ueher tik der ved. Sprache, p. 31), he has 
 
 den iiltesten Zeitraum der indiachen expressed the belief that the Vedic 
 
 Geschichte (i860, German transla- texts were only committed to writ- 
 
 tion 1862, p. 42, £f.); and Haug, ing at a late date, long subse- 
 
 Ueber das Wesen des vedischen Ac- quent to their ' diaskeaasis.' Bur- 
 
 eenfs (1873, p. 16, ff.), have declared nell also, I. c, p. 10, is of opinion 
 
 themselves in favour of this theory, that, amongst other things, the very 
 
 Haug thinks that those Brahmans scarcity of the material for writing 
 
 who were converted to Buddhism in ancient times " almost precludes 
 
 were the first who consigned the the existence of MSS. of books or 
 
 Veda to writing — for polemical pur- long documents." 
 ^loses — and that they were followed 
 
THE SUTRAS. 23 
 
 all but impossible that any alteration in the text, except 
 in the form of interpolation, can have taken place since. 
 These directions, as well as those relating to the pronun- 
 ciation and recitation of the words, are laid down in the 
 Prati^akhya-Siitras, writings with which we have but 
 recently been made acquainted* Such a Prati^akhya- 
 Siitra uniformly attaches itself to the Samhita of a single 
 Veda only, but it embraces aU the schools belonging to it ; 
 it gives the general regulations as to the nature of the 
 sounds employed, the euphonic rules observed, the accent 
 and its modifications, the modulation of the voice, &c. 
 Further, all the individual cases in which peculiar phonetic 
 or other changes are observed are specially pointed out ; 1* 
 and we are in this way supplied with an excellent critical 
 means of arriving at the form of the text of each Samhita 
 at the time when its Prati^akhya was composed. If we 
 find in any part of the Samhita phonetic peculiarities 
 which we are unable to trace in its Prati^akhya, we may 
 rest assured that at that period this part did not yet 
 belong to the Samhita. The directions as to the recital of 
 the Veda, i.e., of its Samhita,t in the schools — each indivi- 
 dual word being repeated in a variety of connections — pre- 
 sent a very lively picture of the care with which these 
 studies were pursued. 
 
 For the knowledge of metre also, rich materials have 
 been handed down to us in the Sutras. The singers of 
 the hymns themselves must naturally have been cognisant 
 of the metrical laws observed in them. But we also find 
 the technical names of some metres now and then men- 
 tioned in the later songs of the Rik. In the Brahmanas 
 the oddest tricks are played with them, and their harmony 
 is in some mystical fashion brought into connection with 
 the harmony of the world, in fact stated to be its funda- 
 
 * By Roth in his essays, Zur separately in their original form, 
 
 Litteratur und Geschichte des Weda, unafTected by samdhi, i.e., the influ- 
 
 p. 53, £F. (translated in Joum. As. enoe of the words which immedi- 
 
 Soc. 5enj'aZ, January 1848, p. 6, ff.). ately precede and-foUow. Whatever 
 
 ^* This indeed is the real purpose else, over and above this, is found 
 of the Prdti^itkhyas, namely, to in the Pr^tidiikhyas is merely acces- 
 show how the continuous Samhita sory matter. See Whitney in Jour- 
 text is to be reconstructed out of nal Am. Or.Soc, iv. 259 (1853). 
 the Pada text, in which the indivi- + Strictly speaking, only these 
 dual words of the text are given (the Saijihitis) are Veda. 
 
24 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 mental cause. The simple minds of these thinkers were 
 too much charmed by their rhythm not to be led into 
 these and similar symbolisings. The further development 
 of metre afterwards led to special inquiries into its laws. 
 Such -investigations have been preserved to us, both in 
 Siitras^' treating, directly of metre, e.g., the Nidana-Siitra, 
 and in the Anukramanis, a peculiar class of works, which, 
 adhering to the order of each Samhita, assign a poet, a 
 metre, and a deity to each song or prayer. They may, 
 therefore, perhaps belong to a later period than most of 
 the Siitras, to a time when the text of each Samhita was 
 already extant in its final form, and distributed as we 
 there find it into larger and smaller sections for the better 
 regulation of its study. One of the smallest sections 
 formed the pupil's task, on each occasion. — ^The preserva- 
 tion of the tradition concerning the authors and the origin 
 of the prayers is too intimately connected herewith to be 
 dissociated from the linguistic Siitras, although the class 
 of works to which it gave rise' is of an entirely different 
 character. The most ancient of such traditions are to be 
 found, as above stated, in the Brahmanas themselves. These 
 latter also contain legends regarding the origin and the 
 author of this or that particular form of worship ; and on 
 such occasions the Brahmana frequently appeals to Gathas, 
 or stanzas, preserved by oral transmission among the 
 people. It is evidently in these legends that we must 
 look for the origin of the more extensive Itihasas and 
 Puranas, works which but enlarged the range of their sub- 
 ject, but which in every other respect proceeded after the 
 same fashion, as is shown by several of the earlier frag- 
 ments preserved, e.g., in the Maha-Bharata. The most 
 ancient work of the kind hitherto known is the Brihad- 
 devata by ^aunaka, in Hohas, which, however, strictly fol- 
 lows the order of the Rik-Samhita, and proves by its very 
 title that it has only an accidental connection with this 
 class of works. Its object properly is to specify the deity 
 for each verse of the Rik-Samhita. But in so doing, it 
 supports its views with so many legends, that we are fuUy 
 justified in classing it here. It, however, like the other 
 Anukramanis, belongs to a much later period than most 
 
 " See Part i. of my paper on Indian Prosody, /. St., viii, i, ff. (1863). 
 
NIGHANTU—NIRUKTI. 25 
 
 of the Slitras, since it presupposes Yaska, the author of 
 the Nirukti, of whom I have to speak presently ; it is, in 
 fact, essentially based upon his work. [See Adalb. Kuhn 
 in /. St., i. 101-120.] 
 
 It was remarked above, that the investigations into the 
 literal sense of the prayers only began when this sense 
 had gradually become somewhat obscure, and that, as this 
 could not be the case among the priests, who were fami- 
 liar with it, so soon as amongst the rest of the people, the 
 language of the latter may at that time have undergone 
 considerable modifications. The first step taken to ren- 
 der the prayers intelligible was to make a collection of 
 synonyms, which, by virtue of their very arrangement, ex- 
 plained themselves, and of specially obsolete words, of which 
 separate interpretations were then given orally. These 
 collected words were called, from their being "ranked," 
 " strung together," Nigranthu, corrupted into Nighantu* 
 and those occupied with them Naiglmntukas. One work 
 of this kind has been actually preserved to us.'-* It is in 
 five books, of which the three first contain synonyms ; the 
 fourth, a list of specially difficult Vedic words ; and the 
 fifth, a classification of the various divine personages who 
 figure in the Veda. We also possess one of the ancient 
 expositions of this work, a commentary on it, called 
 Nirukti, " interpretation," of which Yaska is said to be the 
 author. It consists of twelve books, to which two others 
 having no proper connection with them were afterwards 
 added. It is reckoned by the Indians among the so-called 
 Vedangas, together with ^iksha, Chhandas, and Jyotisha 
 — three very late treatises on phonetics, metre, and astro- 
 nomical calculations^^and also with Kalpa land Vya- 
 karana, i.e., ceremonial and • grammar, two general cate- 
 gories of literary works. The four first names likewise 
 originally signified the class in genera^ and it was only 
 later that they were applied to the four individual works 
 
 * See Both, Introduction to the '' Sikshil still continues to be the 
 
 Nirukti, p. xii. name of a species. A considerable 
 
 '° To this place belong, further, the number of treatises so entitled have 
 
 Nighantu to the Atharva-S., men- recently been found, and more are 
 
 tioned by Hang (cf. /. St., ix. 175, constantly being brought to light. 
 
 176,) and the Kigama-Parisishta of Cf. Kielhorn, 1. St., xiv. 160. 
 the White Yajua, 
 
26 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 now specially designated by those titles. It is in Yaska's 
 work, the Nirukti, that we find the first general notions of 
 grammar. Starting from the phonetic rules, the observ- 
 ance of which the Pratilakhya-Siitras had already estab- 
 lished with so much minuteness — ^but only for each of the 
 Veda-Samhitas — advance was no doubt gradually made, in 
 the first place, to a general view of the subject of phone- 
 tics, and thence to the remaining portions of the domain 
 of language. Inflection, derivation, and composition were 
 recognised and distinguished, and manifold reflections 
 were made upon the modifications thereby occasioned in 
 the meaniug of the root. Yaska mentions a considerable 
 number of grammatical teachers who preceded him, some 
 by name individually, others generally under the name of 
 Nairuktas, Vaiyakaranas, from which we may gather that 
 a very brisk activity prevailed in this branch of study. 
 To judge from a passage in the Kaushitaki-Brahmana, 
 linguistic research must have been carried on with pecu- 
 liar enthusiasm in the North of India ; and accordingly, it 
 is the northern, or rather the north-western district of 
 India that gave birth to the grammarian who is to be 
 looked upon as the father of Sanskrit grammar, Panini 
 Now, if Yaska himself must be considered as belonging 
 only to the last stages of the Vedic period, Panini — from 
 Yaska to whom is a great leap — must have lived at the 
 very close of it, or even at the beginning of the next 
 period. Advance from the simple designation of gram- 
 matical words by means of terms corresponding to them 
 in sense, which we find in Yaska, to the algebraic symbols 
 of Panini, implies a great amount of study in the interval 
 Besides, Paniai himself presupposes some such symbols 
 as already known; he cannot therefore be regarded as 
 having invented, but only as having consistently carried 
 out a method which is certainly in a most eminent degree 
 suited to its purpose. 
 
 Lastly, Philosophical Speculation also had its peculiar 
 development contemporaneously with, and subsequently 
 to, the Brahmanas. It is in this field and in that of 
 grammar that the Indian mind attained the highest pitch 
 of its marvellous fertility in subtle distinctions, however 
 abstruse or naive, on the other hand, the method may 
 occasionally be. 
 
PHILOSOPHY. 27 
 
 Several hymns of a speculative purport in the last book 
 of the Rik-Samhita testify to a great depth and concen- 
 tration of reflection upon the fundamental cause of things, 
 necessarily implying a long period of philosophical research 
 in a preceding age. This is borne out by the old renown 
 of Indian wisdom, by the reports of the companions of 
 Alexander as to the Indian gymnosophists, &c. 
 
 It was inevitable that at an early stage, and as soon as 
 speculation had acquired some vigour, different opinions 
 and starting-points should assert themselves, more espe- 
 cially regarding the origin of creation ; for this, the most 
 mysterious and difhcult problem of all, was at the same 
 time the favourite one. Accordingly, in each of the Brah- 
 manas, one at least, or it may be more, accounts on the 
 subject may be met with ; while in the more extensive 
 works of this class we find a great number of different 
 conjectures with regard to cosmogony. One of the prin- 
 cipal points of difference naturally was whether indiscrete 
 matter or spirit vas to be assumed as the First Cause. 
 The latter theory became gradually the orthodox one, and 
 is therefore the one most frequently, and indeed almost 
 exclusively, represented in the Brahmanas. From among 
 the adherents of the former view, which came by degrees 
 to be regarded as heterodox, there arose, as thought de- 
 veloped, enemies still more dangerous to orthodoxy, who, 
 although they confined themselves in the first place solely 
 to the province of theory, before long threw themselves 
 into practical questions also, and eventually became the 
 founders of the form of belief known to us as Buddhism. 
 The word huddha, " awakened, enlightened," was originally 
 a name of honour given to all sages, including the ortho- 
 dox. This is shown by the use both of the root ludh in 
 the Brahmanas, and of the word huddha itself in even the 
 most recent of the Vedantic writings. The technical 
 application of the word is as much the secondary one as it 
 is in the case also of another word of the kind, iramana, 
 which was in later times appropriated by the Buddhists 
 as peculiarly their own. Here not merely the correspond- 
 ing use of the root sram, but also the word iramana itself, 
 as°a title of honour, may be pointed But in several passages 
 in the Brahmanas. Though Megasthenes, in a passage 
 quoted by Strabo, draws a distinct line between two sects 
 
28 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 of philosophers, the Bpa^/iave^ and the Sap/j,dvat, yet we 
 should hardly be justified in identifying the latter with 
 the Buddhist mendicants, at least, not exclusively ; for he 
 expressly mentions the vXo^ioi — i.e., the Brahmacharins 
 and Vanaprasthas, the first and third of the stages into 
 which a Brahman's life is distributed— as forming part of 
 the ^apiiavM. The distinction between the two sects pro- 
 bably consisted in this, that the Bpayjxavei were the " phil- 
 osophers" by birth, also those who lived as householders 
 (Grihasthas) ; the Sapfidvat, on the contrary, those who 
 gave themselves up to special mortifications, and who 
 might belong also to other castes. The IIpd/ivM, men- 
 tioned by Strabo in another passage (see Lassen, I. AK. 
 i. 836), whom, following the accounts of Alexander's time, 
 he describes as accomplished polemical dialecticians, in 
 contradistinction to the Bpa^avei, whom he represents 
 as chiefly devoted to physiology and astronomy, appear 
 either to be identical with the Sapfidvai — a supposition 
 favoured by the fact that precisely the same things are 
 asserted of both — or else, with Lassen, they may be re- 
 garded as Pramanas, i.e., founding their belief on pramdna, 
 logical proof, instead of revelation. As, however, the word 
 is hot known in the writings of that period, we shoTild in 
 this case hardly be justified in accepting Strabo's report 
 as true of Alexander's time, but only of a later age. 
 Philosophical systems are not to be spoken of in connec- 
 tion with this period ; only isolated views and speculations 
 are to be met with in those portions of the Brahmanas 
 here concerned, viz., the so-called Upanishads (upanishad, 
 a session, a lecture). Although there prevails in these a 
 very marked tendency to systematise and subdivide, the 
 investigations still move within a very narrow and limited 
 range. Considerable progress towards systematising^ and 
 expansion is visible in the Upanishads found in the Axan- 
 yakas,* i.e., writiags supplementary to the Brahmanas, and 
 specially designed for the vXo^ioi; and stUl greater. pro- 
 gress in those Upanishads which stand by themselves, i.e., 
 
 * The name Aranyaka ocaurs first passages in contradistinction to 
 
 in the vdrttika to Pill. iv. 2. 129 [see ' Veda'), iii. no, 309 ; and in the 
 
 on this, /. St., V. 49], then in Manu, Atharvopanishada (see /. St.,u. 179). 
 iv. 123 ; Y.^jnavalkya, i. 145 (in hath 
 
ASTRONOMY— MEDICINE. 29 
 
 those which, although perhaps originally annexed to a 
 Brahmana or an Aranyata of one of the three older Vedas, 
 have come down to us at the same time — or, it uiay be, 
 have come down to us only — in an Atharvan recension. 
 Finally, those XJpanishads which are directly attached to 
 the Atharva-Veda are complete vehicles of developed 
 philosophical systems ; they are to some extent sectarian 
 in their contents, in which respect they reach down to the 
 time of the Puranas. That, however, the fundamental 
 works now extant of the philosophical systems, viz., their 
 Siitras, were composed much later than has hitherto been 
 supposed, is conclusively proved by the following consider- 
 ations. In the first place, the names of their authors are 
 either not mentioned at all in the most modern Brahmanas 
 and Aranyakas, or, if they are, it is under a different form 
 and in other relations — ^in such a way, however, that their 
 later acceptation is already foreshadowed and exhibited in 
 the germ. Secondly, the names of the sages mentioned 
 in the more ancient of them are only in part identical with 
 those mentioned in the latest liturgical Sutras. And, 
 thirdly, in all of them the Veda is expressly presupposed 
 as a whole, and direct reference is also made to those 
 XJpanishads which we are warranted in recognising as the 
 latest real XJpanishads j nay, even to such as are only found 
 attached to the Atharvan. The style, too, the enigmatical 
 conciseness, the mass of technical terms — although these 
 are not yet endowed with an algebraic force — imply a long 
 previous period of special study to account for such pre- 
 cision and perfection. The philosophical Sutras, as 
 well as the grammatical Siitra, should therefore be con- 
 sidered as dating from the beginning of the next period, 
 within which both are recognised as of predominant 
 authority.- 
 
 In closing this survey of Vedic literatiu-e, I have lastly 
 to call attention to two other branches of science, which, 
 though they do not appear to have attained in this period 
 to the possession of a literature — at least, not one of which 
 direct relics and records have reached us — must yet have 
 enjoyed considerable cultivation — I mean Astronomy and 
 Medicine. Both received their first impulse from the _ 
 exigencies of religious worship. Astronomical observa- " 
 tions — though at first, of course, these were only of the 
 
3P VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 rudest desoription — were necessarily required for the regu- 
 lation of the solemn sacrifices ; in the first place, of those 
 offered in the morning and evening, then of those at the 
 new and full moon, and finally of those at the commence- 
 ment of each of the three seasons. Anatomical observa- 
 tions, again, were certain to he brought about by the dis- 
 section of the victim at the sacrifice, and the dedication of 
 its different parts to different deities. The Indo-G-ermanic 
 mind, too, being so peculiarly susceptible to the influences 
 of nature, and nature in India more than anywhere else 
 inviting observation, particular attention could not fail to 
 be early devoted to it. Thus we find in the later portions 
 of the Vajasaneyi-Samhita and in the Chhandogyopani- 
 shad express mention made of " observers of the stars " 
 and "the science of astronomy;" and, in particular, the 
 knowledge of the twenty-seven (twenty-eight) lunar man- 
 sions was early diffased. They are enumerated singly in 
 the Taittiriya-Samhita, and the order in which they there 
 occur is one that must necessarily* have been established 
 somewhere between 1472 and 536 B.C. Strabo, in the 
 above-mentioned passage, expressly assigns a<rrpovoij,ia as 
 a favourite occupation of the BpajQiave';. Nevertheless, 
 they had not yet made great progress at this period ; their 
 observations were chiefly confined to the course of the 
 moon, to the solstice, to a few fixed stars, and more par- 
 ticularly to astrology. 
 
 As regards Medicine, we find, especially in the Sam-^ 
 hita of the Atharvan, a number of songs addressed to 
 illnesses and healing herbs, from which, however, there is 
 not much to be gathered. Animal anatomy was evidently 
 thoroughly understood, as each separate part had its own 
 distinctive name. Alexander's companions, too, extol 
 the Indian physicians, especially for their treatment of 
 snake-bite. 
 
 * See /. St., ii. 240, note. [The seems to be that contained in- the 
 
 coiTect numbers are rather 2780- Jyotisha, we obtain the years 1820- 
 
 i820B.c.,see/.Se.,x. 234-236(1866); 860, ihid. p. 236, ff. See further 
 
 and for the bharatjX series, which the remarks in note 2 above.] 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 31 
 
 1*10111 tliis preliminary survey of Vedic literature we 
 now pass to the details. Adhering strictly to the Indian 
 classification, - we shall consider each of the four Vedas 
 by itself, and deal with the writings belonging to them 
 in their proper order, in connection with each Veda sepa- 
 rately. 
 
 And first of the Rif/veda. The Rigveda-Samhitd pre- 
 sents a twofold subdivision — the one purely external, 
 having regard merely to the compass of the work, and 
 evidently the more recent ; the other more ancient, and 
 based on internal grounds. The former distribution is 
 that into eight ashtaJcas (eighths), nearly equal in length, 
 each of which is again subdivided into as many adhydyas 
 (lectures), and each of these again into about 33 (2006 in 
 all) Vargas (sections), usually consisting of five verses.^* 
 The latter is that into ten mandalas (circles), 85 anuvdkas 
 (chapters), iQiys'Aktas (hymns), and 10,580 WcAas (verses) ; 
 it rests on the variety of authors to whom the hymns are 
 ascribed. Thus the first and tenth mandalas contain 
 songs by Rishis of different families ; the second mandala, 
 on the contrary (asht. ii. 71-113), contains songs belong- 
 ing to Gritsamada; the third (asht. ii. 114-119, iii. 1-56) 
 belongs to Vi^vamitra; the fourth (asht. iii. 57-114} to 
 Vamadeva; the fifth (asht. iii. 11 5-1 22, iv. 1-79) to Atri; 
 the sixth (asht. iv. 80-140, v. I-14) to Bharadvaja; the 
 seventh (asht. v. 1 5-1 18) to Vasishtha; the eighth (asht. 
 V. 1 19-129, vi. 1-81) to Kanva; and the ninth (asht. vi. 
 82-124, vii. I -71) to Angiras.^* By the names of these 
 Rishis we must understand not merely the individuals, but 
 also their families. The hymns in each separate rhandcda 
 are arranged in the order of the deities addressed.^^" Those 
 addressed to Agni occupy the first place, next come those 
 
 " For particulars see /. St., iii. siitos); the ninth 7 an. 1148.,- and 
 
 255 ; Miiller, Anc. S. Lit., p. the tenth 12 an. 191s. 
 
 220. '"' Delbriiok, in his review of Sie- 
 
 ^ The first mandala contains 24 hemig Lieder des Rirjveda (cf. note 
 
 anuvdkas and 191 suktas; the second 32) in the Jmaer Literaturzeitung 
 
 4an. 43s.; the thirds an. 62 s.; the (1875, p. 867), points out that in 
 
 fourth 5 an. 58 s.; the fifth 6 an. books 2-7 the hymns to Agni and 
 
 87 s.; the sixth 6 an. 75 s. ; the Indra are arranged in a descending 
 
 seventh 6 an. 104 a.; the eighth 10 gradation as regards tbo number of 
 
 an. 92 s. (besides II vdlakhilya- verses. 
 
32 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 to Indra, and then those to other gods. This, at least, is 
 the order in the first eight mandalas^ The ninth is ad- 
 dressed solely to Soma, and stands in the closest connec- 
 tion with the Sama-Samhita, one- third of which is bor- 
 rowed from it ; whereas the tenth Tnandala stands in a 
 very special relation to the Atharva-Samhita. The earliest 
 mention 9f this order • of the maridalas occurs in the 
 Aitareya-Aranyaka, and in the two Grihya-Siitras of 
 Alvalayana and ^ankhayana. The Pratiiakhyas and 
 Yaska recognise no other division, and therefore give to 
 the Rik-Samhita the name of da§atayyas, i.e., the songs 
 "in ten divisions," a name also occurring in the Sama- 
 Siitras. The Anukramani of Katyayana, on the contrary, 
 follows the division into ashtakas and adhydyas. The 
 name siikta, as denoting hymn, appears for the first time in 
 the second part of the Brahmana of the White Yajus ; the 
 Rig-Brahmanas do not seeni to be acquainted with it,^" but 
 we find it in the Aitareya-Aranyaka, &c. The extant re- 
 cension of the Rik-Samhita is that of the Sakalas, and 
 belongs specially, it would seem, to that branch of this 
 school which bears the name of the Sai&iyas. Of 
 another recension, that of the Vashkalas, we have but 
 occasional notices, but the difference between the two does 
 not seem to have been considerable. One main distinc- 
 tion, at all, events, is that its eighth Tnandala contains 
 eight additional hymns, making loo in all, and that, con- 
 sequently, its sixth ashtaka consists of 132 hymns.^^ The 
 name of the Sakalas is evidently related to Sakalya, a 
 sage often mentioned in the Brahmanas and Sutras, who is 
 
 '" This is a mistake. They formed part of the eighth mandala. 
 know the word not only in the When I wrote the above I was pro- 
 above, but also in a technical sense, bably thinking of the V^lakhilyas, 
 viz., as a designation of one of the whose number is given by S^yana, 
 six parts of the Nostra (' canon '), in his commentary on the Ait. Br., 
 more especially of the main sub- as eight (cf. Both, Zur Litt. und 
 stance of it ; when thus applied, Gesch. des Weda, p. 35 ; Hang on 
 sihla appears in a collective mean- Ait. Br., 6. 24, p. 416), whereas the 
 ing, comprising several sUktas, Cf. editions of Muller and Aufrecht 
 Sitnkh. Br^hm., xiv. i. have eleven. But as to whether 
 
 '^ I am at present unable to oorro- these eight or eleven Vdlakhilyas 
 
 borate this statement in detail. I belong specially to the Vdshkalas, I 
 
 can only show, from Saunaka's cannot at present produce any direct 
 
 Anuvik^nukramanl, that the reoen- evidence. On other differences of 
 
 sion of the Vdshlialas had eight the Vdshkala school, &c., see Adalb. 
 
 hymns more than that of the Sslka- Kuhn, in /. St., i. 108, ff. 
 las, but not that these eight bymus 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 
 
 33 
 
 stated by Yaska^a to be the author of the Padapatha* 
 of the Rik-Sainhita.t According to^ the accounts in the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus (the Satapatha-Brahmana), 
 a Sakalya, surnamed Vidagdha (the cunning ?), lived con- 
 temporaneously with Yajnavalkya as a teacher at the 
 court of Janaka, King of Videha, and that as the declared 
 adversary and rival of Yajnavalkya. He was vanquished 
 and cursed by the latter, his head dropped off, and his 
 bones were stolen by robbers— "Varkali also (a local form of 
 Vashkali) is the name of one of the teachers mentioned in 
 the second part of the Satapatha-Brahmana.^* 
 
 The Sakalas appear in tradition as intimately connected 
 with the Sunakas, and to Saunaka in particular a number 
 of writings are attributed.J which he is said to have com- 
 posed with a view to secure the preservation of the text 
 {rig'dedaguptaye), as, for instance, an Anukramani of the 
 Rishis, of the metres, of the deities, of the anuvdkas, of the 
 hymns, an arrangement (? Vidhana) of the verses and their 
 constituent parts,^ the above-mentioned Brihaddevata, 
 
 2^ Or rather Durga, in his comm. 
 on Nir, iv. 4 ; see Roth, p. 39, in- 
 troduction, p. liviii. 
 
 * This is the designation of that 
 peculiar method of reciting the Veda 
 in which each word of the text 
 stands by itself, unmodified by the 
 euphonic changes it has to undergo 
 when connected with the preceding 
 and following words. [See aboTe,p.23.] 
 
 t His name seems to point to 
 the north-west (?). The scholiast on 
 Pinini [iv. 2. 1 1 7], at least, proba- 
 bly following the Mahsibhfehya, cites 
 Sikala in connection with the Bilhi- 
 tas ; see also Buruouf, Introduction 
 A I'JSist. du Buddh. , p. 620, ff. The 
 passage in the sitra of Piinini, iv. 3. 
 128, has no local reference [on the 
 data from the Mahibhfchya bearing 
 on this point, see I. St., xiii. 366, 
 372, 409, 428, 44S]. On the other 
 hand, we find ^likyaa also in the 
 Kosala country in Kapilavastu, of 
 whom, however, as of the Sik^- 
 yanins in the Yajus, we do not ex- 
 actly know what to make (see be- 
 low). [The earliest mention of the 
 word ^^kala, in immediate reference 
 
 to the Rik, occurs in a memorial 
 verse, yajnagathd, quoted in the 
 Ait. Bri[hm., iii. 43 (see /. St., ix. 
 277)i^For the name ^ai^iriya I can 
 only cite the pravara section added 
 at the close of the Aivaljtyaua- 
 ^rauta-Slitra, in which the ^ai^iris 
 are mentioned several times, partly 
 by themselves, partly beside and in 
 association with the ^uflgas.] 
 
 "^ Thisformof name, which might 
 be traced to vrikala, occurs also in 
 the S^kh^yana Aranyaka, viii. 2 : 
 " asitisahasram YArhalino hrihaMr 
 ahar ahhisaimpddayanti;" though the 
 parallel passage in the Aitar. Arany., 
 iii. 8, otherwise similarly worded, 
 reads instead of " Vdrhalino," " vd 
 (i.e., vai) ArhaUnol" 
 
 t By Shadguruiishya, in the in- 
 troduction to his commentary on 
 the Rig- Anukramani of Ksityityana. 
 
 " Rather two Vidhana texts (see 
 below), the one of which has for its 
 object the application of particular 
 richas, the other probably that of 
 particular pddas, to superstitious 
 purposes, after the manner of the 
 S^mavidh^na-Brilhmana. 
 
34 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the Prati^akhya of the Rik, a Smarta-Siitra * and also a 
 Kalpa-Siitra referring specially to the Aitareyaka, which, 
 however, he destroyed after one had been composed hy his 
 pupil, A^valayana. It is not perhaps, on the face of it, 
 impossible that^ all these writings might be the work of 
 one individual ^aunaka ; still they probably,* nay, in part 
 certainly, belong only to the school which bears his name. 
 But, in addition to this, we find that the second mandala 
 of the Samhita itself is attributed to him ; and that, on the 
 other hand, he is identified with the ^aunaka at whose 
 sacrificial feast Sauti, the son of Vaiiampayana, is said 
 to have repeated the Maha-Bharata, recited by the latter 
 on an earlier occasion to Janamejaya (the second), together 
 with the Harivanla. The former of these assertions must, 
 of course, only be understood in the sense that the family 
 of the Sunakas both belonged to the old Rishi families 
 of the Rik, and continued still later to hold one of the 
 foremost places in the learned world of the Brahmans. 
 Against the second statement, on the contrary, no direct 
 objection can be urged ; and it is at least not impossible 
 that the teacher of Alvalayana and the sacrificer in the 
 Naimishaf forest are identical. — In the Brahmana of the 
 White Yajus we have, further, two distinct ^aunakas men- 
 tioned; the one, Indrota, as sacrificial priest of the prince 
 who, in the Maha-Bharata, appears as the first Janame- 
 jaya (Parikshita, so also in M.-Bh. xii. 5595, ff.), the other, 
 Svaidayana, as Audichya, dwelling in the north. 
 
 As author of the Krama-patha of the Rik-Samhita a 
 Panchala Babhravya^ is mentioned. Thus we see that to 
 the KuTU-Panchalas and the Kosala-Videhas (to whom ^a- 
 kalya belongs) appertains the chief merit of having fixed and 
 arranged the text of the Rik, as well as that of the Yajus ; 
 
 * On the Grihya of ^auuaka, Bee quoted as an authority in the text 
 
 Stenzler, /. St., i. 243. of the Rik-Prdtililkhya itself, viz., 
 
 _ + The sacrifice conducted hy this ii. 12, 44, and that beside the 
 
 Saunaka in the Naimisha forest Prdohyas (people of the east), the 
 
 ■would, in any case, have to be dis- above conclusions still hold good, 
 
 tinguished from the great sacrificial See Regnier on Rik-Pr., ii. 12, p. 
 
 festival of the Naimishiyas, so often 113; Compare also ^slfikh. Sr., xii. 
 
 mentioned in the Brdhmanas. 13. 6 (panchdlapadavrittih), and 
 
 ^' In the Rik-Prdt. , xi. 33, merely Samhitopanishad-Bnlliinana,' § 2 
 
 Bfthravya ; only in Uata's scholium (mrvatra PrdchyaPdnchdlishu muk- 
 
 is he designated as a Pafiohitla. As, tain, sarvatrd 'liiuhtam,). 
 however, the Pailohdlas are twice 
 
niG VEDA-SAMIIITA. 3 5 
 
 and tHs was probably accomplished, in the case of both 
 Vedas, during the most flourishing period of these tribes. 
 
 For the origin of the songs themselves we must go back, 
 as I have already repeatedly stated, to a far earlier period. 
 This is most clearly shown by the mythological and geo- 
 grapliical data contained in them. 
 
 The former, the mythological relations, represented in 
 the older hymns of the Eik, in part carry us back to the 
 primitive Indo-Germanic time. They contain reHcs of 
 the childlike and naive conceptions then prevailing, such 
 as may also be traced among the Teutons and Greeks. 
 So, for instance, the idea of the change of the departed 
 spirit into air, which is conducted by the winged wind, as 
 by a faithful dog, to its place of destination, as is shown 
 by the identity of Sarameya and 'E/a/teia?,* of Sabala and 
 Kep^epoi.f Further, the idea of the celestial sea, Varuna, 
 Ovpav6<!, encompassing, the world; of the Father -Heaven, 
 Dyaushpitar, Zev^, Diespiter ; of the Mother - Earth, 
 Arnxrjrrip ; of the waters of the sky as shining nymphs ; 
 of the sun's rays as cows at pasture ; of the dark cloud-god 
 as the robber whocarries off these maidens and cows ; and 
 of the mighty god who wields the lightning and thunder- 
 bolt, and who chastises and strikes down the ravisher; 
 and other such notions. { Only the faintest outlines of 
 this comparative mythology are as yet discernible ; it will 
 unquestionably, however, by degrees claim and obtain, in 
 relation to classical mythology, a position exactly analo- 
 gous to that which has already, in fact, been secured by 
 comparative Indo-Germanic grammar in relation to classi- 
 cal grammar. The ground on which that mythology has 
 hitherto stood trembles beneath it, and the new light 
 about to be shed upon it we owe to the hymns of the Rig- 
 veda, which enable us to glance, as it were, into the work- 
 shop whence it originally proceeded.! 
 
 * See Kuhn, in Haupt's Deutsche § See Z. D. M. G., v. 112. [Since 
 
 Zeitsckrift, vi. 125, ff. I wrote the above, comparative m_v- 
 
 f /. St., ii. 297, ff. [and, still e.ar- thology has been enriched with much 
 
 lier, Max Miiller ; see his Chips vahiable matter, but much also that 
 
 from a Qerman Workshop, ii. 182]. is crude and fanciful has been ad- 
 
 J See Kuhn, I. c, and repeatedly vanced. Deserving of special men- 
 
 in the Zdtschrift fur vergldchmde tion, besides various papers by Adalb. 
 
 Sprachforschung, edited by him Kuhn in his Zeitschrift, are two 
 
 jointly with Aufrecht (vol. i., 1851). papers by the same author, entitled, 
 
36 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 Again, secondly, the hymns of the Rik contain siifl&cient 
 evidence of their antiquity in the invaluable information 
 which they furnish regarding the origin and gradual de- 
 velopment of two cycles of epic legend, the Persian and 
 the Indian. In both of these the simple allegories of 
 natural phenomena were afterwards arrayed in an historic 
 garb. In the songs of the Rik we find a description, 
 embellished with poetical colours, of the celestial contest 
 between light and darkness, which are depicted either 
 quite simply and naturally, or else in symbolical guise as 
 divine beings. In the Persian Veda, the Avesta, on the 
 other hand, "the contest* descends from heaven to 
 earth, from the province of natural phenomena into the 
 moral sphere. The champion is a son, bom to his father, 
 and given as a saviour to earth, as a reward for the pious 
 exercise of the Soma worship. The dragon slain by him 
 is a creation of the Power of Evil, armed with demoniacal 
 might, for the destruction of purity in the world. Lastly, 
 the Persian epic enters upon the ground of history. The 
 battle is fought in the Aryan land; the serpent, Aji 
 Dahaka in Zend, Ahi [Dasaka] in the Veda, is trans- 
 formed into Zohak the tyrant on the throne of Iran ; and 
 the blessings achieved for the oppressed people by the 
 warlike Fer^diin — Traitana in the Veda, Thra^taono in 
 Zend— are freedom and contentment in life on the pater- 
 nal soil." Persian legend traversed these phases in the 
 course of perhaps 2000 years, passing from the domain 
 of nature into that of the epic, and thence into the field of 
 history. A succession of phases, corresponding to those 
 of Fer^diin, may be traced also in the case of Jemshid 
 (Yama, Yima) ; a similar series in the case of Kaikaviis 
 (Kavya Uianas, Kava Ui) ; and probably also in the case 
 of Kai Khosru (Su^ravas, Hu^ravanh). Indian legend in 
 its development is the counterpart of the Persian myth. 
 Even in the time of the Tajurveda the natural significance 
 
 Pie Berahhunft des Peuere und des cvle et Oacus (1863) ; Cox, Mythology 
 
 Gottertranhs (1859), and Ueler Ent- of the Aryan Nations (1870, 2 vols.); 
 
 wicMungsatufen der Mythtnhildung A. de Gubernatis, Zoological Mytho- 
 
 (1874) ; further, Max Miiller's logy (1872, 2 vols.) ; and Mitologia 
 
 ' Comparative Mythology,' in the Vedica (1874).] 
 
 Oxford Essays (1856), reprinted in * See Both, in Z. D. M. G., ii. 
 
 the Chips, vol. ii. ; M. Br&l, Her- 216, ff. 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 37 
 
 of the mytli had become entirely obliterated. Indra is 
 there but the quarrelsome aud jealous god, who subdues 
 the unwieldy giant by low cunning; and in the Indian 
 epic the myth either stUl retains the same form, or else 
 Indra is represented by a human hero, Arjuna, an incarna- 
 tion of himself, who makes short work of the giant, and 
 the kings who pass for the incarnations of the latter. The 
 principal figures of the Maha-Bharata and Eamayana fall 
 away like the kings of Firdusi, and there remain for his- 
 tory only those general events in the stoiy of the people 
 to which the ancient myths about the gods have been 
 applied. The personages fade into the background, and in 
 this representation are only recognisable as poetic crea- 
 tions. 
 
 Thirdly, the song-s of the Rik unfold to us particulars 
 as to the time, place, and conditions of their origin and 
 growth. In the more ancient of them the Indian people 
 appear to us settled on the banks of the Indus, divided 
 into a number of small tribes, in a state of mutual hos- 
 tility, leading a patriarchal life as husbandmen and 
 nomads ; living separately or in small communities, and 
 represented by their kings, in the eyes of each other by the 
 wars they wage, and in presence of the gods by the com- 
 mon sacrifices they perform. Each father of a family acts 
 as priest in his own house, himseK kindling the sacred 
 fire, performing the domestic ceremonies, and offering up 
 praise and prayer to the gods. Only for the great com- 
 mon sacrifices — a sort of tribe-festivals, celebrated by the 
 king — are special priests appointed, who distinguish them- 
 selves by their comprehensive knowledge of the requisite 
 rites and by their learning, and amongst whom a sort of 
 rivalry is gradually developed, according as one tribe or 
 another is considered to have more or less prospered by 
 its sacrifices. Especially prominent here is the eimiity 
 between the families of Vaiishtha and Vilvamitra, which 
 runs through all Vedic antiquity, continues to play an 
 important part in the epic, and is kept up even to the 
 latest times ; so that, for example, a commentator of the 
 Veda who claims to be descended from Vaiishtha leaves 
 passages unexpounded in which the latter is stated to have 
 had a curse imprecated upon him. This implacable hatred 
 owes its origin to the trifling circumstance of Va^ishtha 
 
38 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 having once been appointed chief sacrificial priest instead 
 of Viivamitra by one of the petty kings of these early 
 times. — The influence of these royal priests does not, how- 
 ever, at this early period, extend beyond the sacrifice ; 
 there are no castes as yet ; the people is still one united 
 whole, and bears but one name, that of in&as, settlers. 
 The prince, who was probably elected, is called Viipati, a 
 title still preserved in Lithuanian. The free position held 
 by women at this time is remarkable. We find songs of 
 the most exquisite kind attributed to poetesses and queens, 
 among whom the daughter of Atri appears in the foremost 
 rank. As regards love, its tender, ideal element is not 
 very conspicuous ; it rather bears throughout the stamp of 
 an undisguised natural sensuality. Marriage is, however, 
 held sacred; husband and wife are both rulers of the 
 house {dampat'C), and approach the gods in united prayer. 
 The religious sense expresses itself in the recognition of 
 man's dependence on natural phenomena, and the beings 
 supposed to rule over them ; but it is at the same time 
 claimed that these latter are, in their turn, dependent 
 upon human aid, and thus a sort of equUibrium is estab- 
 lished. The religious notion of sin is consequently want- 
 ing altogether, and submissive gratitude to the gods is as 
 yet quite foreign ^^ to the Indian. ' Give me, and I will 
 render to thee,' he says,^' claiming therewith a right on 
 his part to divine help, which is an exchange, no grace. 
 In this free strength, this vigorous self-consciousness, a 
 very different, and a far more manly and noble, picture of 
 the Indian is presented to us than that to which we are 
 accustomed from later times. I have already endeavoured 
 above to show how this state of things became gradually 
 altered, how the fresh energy was broken, and by degrees 
 disappeared, through the dispersion over Hindustan, and 
 the enervating influence of the new climate. But what it 
 was that led to the emigration of the people in such masses 
 from the Indus across the Sarasvati towards the Ganges, 
 
 ^' 'Quite foreign' is rather too (1851). There are different phases 
 strong an expression. See Roth's to be distinguished, 
 paper. Die hochstm GStter der ari- ^ V^j. S., iii. 50; or, "Kill him, 
 8c/ie» YSIMr, in Z. D. M. G., vi. 72 then wiH I sacrifice to thee," Taitt. 
 
 S., vi. 4. 5. 6. 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 39 
 
 ■wliat was its principal cause, is still uncertain. Was it 
 the pressure brought about by the amval of new settlers ? 
 Was it excess of population ? Or was it only the longing 
 for the beautiful tracts of Htudustan? Or perhaps all 
 these causes combined ? According to a legend preserved 
 in the Brahmana of the White Yajus, the priests were in 
 a great measure the cause of this movement, by urging 
 it upon the kings, even against their will [/. St., i. 178]. 
 The connection with the ancestral home on the Indus 
 remained, of course, at first a very close one ; later on, 
 however, when the new Brahmanical organisation was 
 completely consolidated in Hindustan, a strong element of 
 bitterness was infused into it, since the Brahmans looked 
 upon their old kinsmen who had remained true to the cus- 
 toms of their forefathers as apostates and unbelievers. 
 
 But while the origin of the songs of the Rik dates from 
 this primitive time, the redaction of the Rik-Sainhita only 
 took place, as we observed, at a period when the Brah- 
 manical hierarchy was fully developed, and when the 
 Kosala-Videhas and Kuru-Panchalas.* who are to be re- 
 garded as having been specially instrumental in effect- 
 ing it, were in their prime. It is also certain that not 
 a few of the songs were composed either at the tim£ of 
 the emigration into Hindustan, or at the time of the 
 compilation itself. Such songs are to be found in the last 
 book especially, a comparatively large portion of which, as 
 I have already remarked, recurs in the Atharvaveda-Sam- 
 hita. It is for the critic to determine approximately in 
 the case of each individual song, having regard to its con- 
 
 * Mandala x. 98 is a dialogue scribed in this epic liad been fought 
 
 between Devipi and Samtauu, the out long before the final arrange- 
 
 two ' Kauravyau' as Y^iska calls ment of the Rik-Samhit^ ! It is, 
 
 them. In the Mahil-Bhilrata Saqi- however, questionable whether the 
 
 tanii is the name of the father of Samtanu of the Mahfi-Bhiirata is 
 
 Bhishma and Vichitravlrya, by identical with the Samtanu men- 
 
 whose two wives, Ambiki and Am- tioned in the Rik ; or, even if we 
 
 billiksJ, Vy&a became the father of take this for granted, whether he 
 
 Dhritarfehtra and P^du. This may not merely have been associated 
 
 Samtanu is, therefore, the grand- with the epic legend tn Tnajorem rei 
 
 father of these latter, or the great- gloriam. Dev^pi, at least, who, 
 
 grandfather of the Kauravas and according to Tdska, is his brother, 
 
 Piindavas, the belligerents in the has in the Rik a different father 
 
 Mahil-Bhkrata. We should thus from the one given in the epic. See 
 
 have to suppose that the feud de- I.St.,i. 203. 
 
40 VEDIC LI TERA TURK. 
 
 tents, its ideas, its language, and the traditions connected 
 ■with it, to what period it ought possibly to be ascribed. 
 But as yet this task is only set ; its solution has not yet 
 even begun,^ 
 
 The deities to whom the songs are for the most part 
 addressed are the following : — ^First, Agni, the god of fire. 
 The songs dedicated to him are the most numerous of aH 
 — a fact sufficiently indicative of the character and import 
 of these sacrificial hymns. He is the messenger from men 
 to the gods, the mediator between them, who with his far- 
 shining flame summons the gods to the sacrifice, however 
 distant they may be. He is for the rest adored essentially 
 as earthly sacrificial fire, and not as an elemental force. 
 The latter is rather pre-eminently the attribute of the god 
 to whom, next to Agni, the ^eatest number of songs is 
 dedicated, viz., Indra. Indra is the mighty lord of the 
 thunderbolt, with which he rends asunder the dark clouds, 
 so that the heavenly rays and waters may descend to bless 
 and fertUise the earth. A great number of the hymns, 
 and amongst them some of the most beautiful, are devoted 
 to the battle that is fought because the malicious demon 
 will not give up his booty; to the description of the 
 thunderstorm generally, which, with its flashing light- 
 nings, its rolling thunders, and its furious blasts, made a 
 tremendous impression upon the simple mind of the 
 people. The break of day, too, is greeted ; the dawns are 
 praised as bright, beautiful maidens ; and deep reverence 
 is paid to the flaming orb of the mighty sun, as he steps 
 forth vanquishing the darkness of night, and dissipating it 
 to aU the quarters of the heavens. The brilliant sun-god 
 is besought for light and warmth, that seeds and flocks 
 may thrive in gladsome prosperity. 
 
 Besides the three principal gods, Agni, Indra, and Siirya, 
 we meet with a great number of other divine personages, 
 prominent amongst whom are the Maruts, or winds, the 
 faithful comrades of Indra in his battle ; and Eudra, the 
 howUng, terrible god, who rules the furious tempest. It 
 is not, however, my present task to discuss the whole 
 of the Vedic Olympus ; I had only to sketch generally 
 
 ** See now PerUch, Updlekha, p. tralUatt, 1875, p. 522) ; /. St., \x. 
 57 (1854; compare Literarischa tin- 299, xiii. 279, 280 ; I. Str., i. 19. 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 41 
 
 the groundwork and the outlines of this ancient edifice. ^^ 
 Besides the powers of nature, we find, as development pro- 
 gresses, personifications also of spiritual conceptions, of 
 ethical import ; but the adoration of these, as compared 
 with the former, is of later origin. 
 
 I have already discussed the precautions taken to secure 
 the text of the Rik-Samliita, i.e., the question of its authen- 
 ticity, and I have likewise alluded to the aids to its ex- 
 planation furnished by the remaining Vedic literature. 
 These latter reduce themselves chiefly to the Nighantus, 
 and the Nirukta of Yaska.^" Both works, in their turn, 
 found their commentators in course of time. For the 
 Nighantus, we have the commentary of Devarajayajvan, 
 who belongs to about the fifteenth or sixteenth century. 
 In the introduction he enlarges upon the history of their 
 study, from which they appear to have found only one 
 other complete commentator since Yaska, viz., Skanda- 
 svamin. For Yaska's Nirukta a commentary has been 
 handed down to us dating from about the thirteenth cen- 
 tury, that of Durga. Both works, moreover, the Nighan- 
 tus as well as the Nirukta, exist in two different recen- 
 sions. These do not materially differ from oue another, 
 and chiefly in respect of arrangement only ; but the very 
 fact of their existence leads us to suppose that these works 
 were originally transmitted orally rather than in writing. 
 A commentary, properly so called, on the Rik-Samhita, ha^ 
 come down to us, but it dates only from the fourteenth 
 century, that of Sayanacharya.* " From the long series of 
 
 ^ Muir's Original Sanskrit Texts, again is quoted by P^ini ; see 
 
 vol. v. (1870), is the best source of 1. St., iii. 475. A direct reference 
 
 information for Yedic mythology. to Yi^ka is made in the Rik-Pr^t, 
 
 ^^ This name appears both in the and in the Brihaddevati ; see also 
 
 Vanias in the last book of the Satap. /. St., viii. 96, 245, 246. 
 Br., ,and in the K^d^nukrama of * The circumstance that com- 
 
 the Atreyi school, where he is called mentaries on almost all branches of 
 
 Paifigi, and described as the pupil theyedas,andonTariousotherimpor- 
 
 of Vai^mp^yana, and teacher of tant and extensive works as well, 
 
 Tittiri, Prom Piin., ii. 4. 63, it are ascribed to Silyana and his 
 
 follows that P^ini was cognisant of brother Mddhava, is to be explained 
 
 the name Yfeka, for he there teaches by the practice prevailing in India 
 
 the plural Taskds for the patronymic by which woi'ks composed by order 
 
 Ydsha. Compare on this the pravara of some distinguished person bear 
 
 section in the Aivalflyana-^rauta- his name as the author. So in the 
 
 SAtra. The Yaskd Gairihsliitdh are present day the Pandits work for the 
 
 mentioned in the Ei^thaka, which person who pays them, and leave 
 
42 
 
 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 centuries* between Yaska and Sayana but scanty remains 
 of an exegetic literature connected -witli the Rik-Samhita 
 are left to us, or, at any rate, have as yet been discovered. 
 Samkara and the Vedantic school turned their attention 
 chiefly to the TJpanishads. Nevertheless, a gloss upon a 
 portion at least of the Rik-Samhita was drawn up by 
 Anandatirtha, a pupil of Samkara, of which there is an 
 exposition by Jayatirtha, comprising the second and third 
 adhy&yas of the first ashtaka, in the Library of the India 
 House in London." Sayana himself, in addition to Durga's 
 commentary on the Nirukti, only quotes Bhatta Bhaskara 
 Miira and Bharatasvamin as expositors of the Vedas.® 
 The former wrote a commentary upon the Taitt. Tajus, 
 not the Rik-Samhita, in which he refers to Ka^akritsna, 
 Ekachiirni, and Taska as his predecessors in the work. 
 For Bharatasvamin we have no further data than that his 
 name is also cited by Devaraja (on the Nighantus), who 
 further mentions Bhatta Bhaskara Mi^ra, Sfadhavadeva, 
 Bhavasvamin, Guhadeva, Srinivasg,, and Uvatta. The 
 latter, otherwise called tTata, wrote a commentary on the 
 
 the fruit of their labour to him as 
 bis property. M^dhava, and prolj- 
 ably also Sayana, were ministers at 
 the court of King Bukka at Yijaj'a- 
 nagara, and took advantage of their 
 position to give a fresh impulse to 
 the study of the Veda. The writings 
 attributed to them point, by the very 
 diSTerence of their contents and style, 
 to a variety of authorship. [Accord- 
 ing to A. C. Burnell, in the preface 
 to his edition of the Van^a-Brdh- 
 mana, p. viii., ff. (1873), the two 
 names denote one person only. 
 Sdyana, he says, is "the Bhoga- 
 ndtha, or mortal body, of Mddhava, 
 the soul identified with Visbnu." 
 Burnell is further of opinion ihat 
 the twenty-nine writings current 
 under the name of Mfidhava all pro- 
 ceed from Mddbava himself, unas- 
 sisted to any large extent by others, 
 and that they were composed by 
 him during a period of about thirty 
 of the fifty-five years between 1331- 
 1386 A.D., which he spent as abbot 
 of the monastery at 6ringeri, under 
 
 the name Vidyiranyasvdmin. See 
 my remarks to the contrary in Idle- 
 rarisches Centralblait (1873), P- 1421. 
 Burnell prefers the form Vidyina- 
 gara to Vijayanagara. Cowell, in 
 his note on Colebr., Misc. Est., i. 
 23s, has Vidyi" and Vijaya" side by 
 side.] 
 
 * See Eoth, Zur Zitt., p. 22. 
 
 "^ To these have to be added 
 Skandasvdmin (see p. 41) and Ka- 
 pardin (see below) ; and as anterior 
 to Sdyana we must probably regard 
 the works of Atmdnanda, Bivana, 
 and Kau^ika (or is the latter iden- 
 tical with Bhatta Kau^ika Bb^kara 
 Mi^ra ? cf. Burnell, Catalogue of 
 VedM MSS., p. 12), and the Gli- 
 dh^tharatnamdU; Burnell, Yaiisdbr., 
 p. xxvi., ff. ; Miiller, in the preface 
 to his large edition of the Rik- 
 Samhitd, vol. vi. p. xxvii., ff. Some 
 extracts from Etivana's commentary 
 have been published by Fitz-Edward 
 Hall in Journal As, Soc. Beny., 
 1862, pp. 129-134. 
 
RIGVEDA-SAMHITA. 43 
 
 SamLita of the White Yajus, not the Rik-Samhita, as well 
 as commentaries on the two Prati^akhyas of the Rik and 
 the White Yajus. 
 
 As regards European researches, the Rik-Samhita, as 
 well as the other Vedas, first became known to us through 
 Colebrooke's excellent paper " On the Vedas," in the As. 
 Res. vol. viii. (Gale. 1 805). To Eosen we are indebted for the 
 first text, as given partly in his Rigvedce Specimen (London, 
 1830), partly in the edition of the first ashtaka, with Latin 
 translation, which only appeared after the qarly death of 
 the lamented author (ibid. 1838). Since then, some other 
 smaller portions of the text of the Rik-Samhita have here 
 and there been communicated to us in text or translation, 
 especially in Eoth's alreajiy often quoted and excellent 
 Abhandlun^en zur Zitteratur und GescMchte des Weda 
 (Stuttgart, 1846). The entire Samhita, together with the 
 commentary of Sayana, is now being published, edited by 
 Dr. M. Miiller of Oxford, at the expense of the East India 
 Company ; the first ashtaka appeared in 1849. At the same 
 time an edition of the text, with extracts from the com- 
 mentary, is in course of publication in India. From Dr. 
 M. Miiller, too, we may expect detailed prolegomena to 
 his edition, which are to treat in particular of the position 
 held by the songs of the Rik in the history of civilisation. 
 A French translation by Langlois comprises the entire 
 Samhita (i 848-1 851); it is, of course, in many respects 
 highly useful, although in using it great caution is neces- 
 sary. An English translation by Wilson is also begun, of 
 which the first ashtaka only has as yet appeared.^^ 
 
 32 MuUer's edition of the text, Indica, Nos. 1-4 (Cale. 1849), only 
 
 together with the oommentary of reaches to the end of the second 
 
 Siyana, a complete index of words, adhydya. A fragment of the text, 
 
 and list of prattJcas, is now com- edited by Stevenson so long ago as 
 
 plete in six vols., 1849-1875. He 1833, extends but a little farther 
 
 has also published separately the (i. 1-3S). — Of Wilson's translation, 
 
 text of the first mandala, in sam- five volumes have appeared; the 
 
 hitd- and pada-pdt?ia (Lt\fz\g, lS$6- last, in 1866, under the 'editorship 
 
 69), as also the whole 10 mandalas, of Cowell, brings it up to momd. 
 
 likewise in double form (London, viii. 20. Benfey published in his 
 
 1873). The first complete edition Orient -und Occident (1860-68) a 
 
 of tlie text was published, in Eoman critical translation of mand. i. I- 
 
 transliteration, by Aufrecht, in vols. 118. Twelve hymns to the Maruts 
 
 vi. and vii. of the Indische Studim are translated and furnished with a 
 
 (1861-63). Roer's edition of text detailed commentary in vol. i. of Max 
 
 and commentary, in the Bibliotheca MuUer's Rigreda SamJAii, trans- 
 
44 
 
 VEDIC LITER A TUBE. 
 
 We now turn to the Brdhmanas of the Rik. 
 
 Of these, we have two, the AUareya-Brdhmana and tlie 
 ^dnkhdyana- (or KaushitaJci-) Brdhmatia. They are closely- 
 connected with one another,* treat essentially of the same 
 matter, not unfrequently, however, taking opposite views 
 of the same (question. It is in the distribution of their 
 matter that they chiefly differ. In the ^aikhayana-Brah- 
 mana we have a perfectly arranged work, embracing on 
 a definite plan the entire sacrificial procedure; but this 
 does not seem to be the case in an equal degree in the 
 Aitareya-Brahmana. The latter, moreover, appears to 
 treat exclusively of the Soma sacrifice ; whereas in the 
 former it merely occupies the principal place. In the 
 Safikhayana-Brahmana we meet with nothing at all cor- 
 responding to the last ten adhydyas of the Aitareya-Brah- 
 mana, a gap which is only filled up by the Safikha- 
 yana-Siitra ; and for this reason, as well as from internal 
 evidence, it may perhaps be assumed that the adhydyas 
 in question are but a later addition to the Aitareya-Brah- 
 In the extant text, the Aitareya-Brahmana con- 
 
 mana. 
 
 tains 40 adhydyas (divided into eight panchikds, or pen- 
 
 lated and explained (London, 1869). 
 But the scholar who has done most 
 by far for the right understanding 
 of the Rik is Roth; both in the 
 commentary added to his edition of 
 Yislca's Nirnkta (Gottingen, 1848- 
 52), and in the great St. Petersburg 
 Sanskrit Dictionary (seven vols., 
 1853-75), edited by Bohtlingk and 
 him. Here we may also mention the 
 following works : — Grassmann, WSr- 
 te.rbv/ih zvm Rigveda (1873, ff.) ; 
 Delbruck, Das aXtindiielte Verbum 
 (1874) ; Benfey, Einleitung in die 
 Grammatik der vediscJien Sprache 
 (1874), and Die Qnantitdtaverachie- 
 denheiten in den Sainkitd- und Pad i- 
 Texten der Veden ; BoUensen, Die 
 Lieder des PariUara, in Z. D. M. O. 
 xxii. (1868) ; Siehensig Lieder des 
 Rigveda, ubersetzt von Karl Geldner 
 imd Adolf Kaegi, mit Beitrdgen von 
 15. Roth (Tiibingen, 1875) — reviewed 
 by Abel Bergaigne in the Revue 
 Critique, Dec. II and 18, 1875 ; 
 Alfred Ludwig, Die Nachrichten des 
 
 Rig- un^ Atka/rvaveda vher Geogror 
 phie, Gesehiehte und Ver/assung des 
 aUen Indiens (the identification here 
 mentioned, p. 13, of the Vedic 
 Sarasvati with the Indus, was first 
 mad« by myself ; cf. Vdj. S. Spec., ii. 
 80 n., 1847), and Die philosophi- 
 schen und religiosen Anschauungen, 
 des Veda (Prag, 1875) ; Alfred Hil- 
 lebrandt, Ueber dieGottin Aditi{BTeB- 
 laa, 1876) ; H, Zimmer, Parjanya 
 PiSrgyn Vdta Wodan in Zeitschri/t 
 fwr Deutsches Alterthum, New Series, 
 vii. 164, ff. Lastly, we have to draw 
 attention specially to Muir's Original 
 Sanskrit Texts (5 vols., second edit., 
 London, 1868, fi^.), in which the 
 antiquarian information contained 
 in the Rik-Samhitit on the different 
 stages and phases of Indian life at 
 that early period is clearly and com- 
 prehensively grouped : translations 
 of numerous Vedic passages and 
 
 pieces are given. 
 
 * See on this /. 
 [and ix. 377]. 
 
 St., ii. 289, ff. 
 
BRAH.MANAS OF THE RIK. 45 
 
 tads), while the Sankhayana-Brahmana contains 30 ; and 
 it is perhaps allowable to refer to them the rule in Panini 
 V. I. 62, which states how the name of a Brahmana is to 
 be formed if it contain 30 or 40 adhydyas, — a view which 
 would afford external warrant also of the fact of their 
 existence in this form in Panini's time, at all events. 
 Geographical or similar data, from which a conclusion 
 might be drawn as to the time of their composition, are of 
 very rare occurrence. Most of these, together with really 
 historical statements, are to be found in the last books of 
 the Aitareya-Brahmana (see /. St., i. 199, ff.), from which 
 it at any rate specially follows that their scene is the 
 country of the Kuru-Panchalas and Va^a-Uiinaras (see 
 viii. 14). In the Sankhayana-Brahmana mention is made 
 of a great sacrifice in the Naimisha forest ; but this can 
 hardly be identified with the one at which, according to 
 the accounts of the Maha-Bharata, the second recitation 
 of this epic took -place. Another passage implies a very 
 special prominence amongst the other gods of the deity 
 who is afterwards known to us exclusively by the name 
 of Siva. He here receives, among other titles, those of 
 Isana and Mahadeva, and we might perhaps venture to 
 conclude from this that he was already the object of a very 
 special worship. We are at any rate justified in inferring, 
 unless the passage is an interpolation, that the Sankha- 
 yana-Brahmana ranks chronologically with the last books 
 of the Samhita of the White Yajus, and with those por- 
 tions of its Brahmana and of the Atharva-Samhita iil 
 which this nomenclature is likewise found. Lastly, a 
 third passage of the Sankhayana-Brahmana implies, as 
 already hinted, a special cultivation of the field of lan- 
 guage in the northern parts of India. People resorted 
 thither in order to become acquainted with the language, 
 and on their return enjoyed a special authority on ques- 
 tions connected with it. [J. St., ii 309.] 
 
 Both Brahmanas presuppose literary compositions of 
 some extent as having preceded them. Thus mention is 
 made of the dkhydnavidas, i.e., " those versed in tradition ;" 
 and gdthds, abhiyaj'na-ffdthds, a sort of memorial verses 
 (kdrikds), are also frequently referred to and quoted. The 
 names Eigveda, Samaveda, and Yajurveda, as well as trayi 
 vidyd, a term used to express them collectively, repeatedly 
 
46 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 occur. In the Sankhayana-Brahmana, however, special 
 regard is had to the Paingya and Kaushitaka, whose views 
 are very frequently quoted side by side, that of the Kau- 
 shitaka being always recognised as final. The question 
 now arises what we are to understand by these expres- 
 sions, whether works of the Brahmana order, already ex- 
 tant in a written form, or stUl handed down orally only — 
 or merely the inherited tradition of individual doctrines. 
 Mention of the Kaushitaka and the Paingya occurs in the 
 Aitareya-Brahmana only in a single passage — and that 
 perhaps an interpolated one — ^in the latter part of the 
 work. This at all events proves, what already seemed pro- 
 bable from its more methodical arrangement, that the 
 Sankhayana-Brahmana is to be considered a later produc- 
 tion than the Aitareya-Brahmana, since it appears to be a 
 recast of two sets of views of similar tenor already extant 
 under distinct names, while the Aitareya-Brahmana pre- 
 sents itself as a more independent effort. The name 
 Paingya belongs to one of the sages mentioned in the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus and elsewhere, from whose 
 family Yaska Paingi* was descended, and probably also 
 Pingala, the author of a treatise on metre. The Paingi 
 Kalpah is expressly included by the commentator of 
 Panini, probably following the MahabhaShya, among the 
 ancient Kalpa-Siitras, in contradistinction to the Asmara- 
 thah Kalpah, with which we shall presently become 
 acquainted as an authority of the Aivalayana-Sutra. 
 The Paingins are, besides, frequently mentioned in early 
 writings, and a Paingi-Brahmana must still have been in 
 existence even in Sayana's time, for he repeatedly refers 
 to it. The case stands similarly as regai-ds the name 
 Kaushitaka, which, is, moreover, used directly^ in the ma- 
 jority of passages where it is quoted for the Saukhayana- 
 Brahmana itself — a fact easy of explanation, as in the latter 
 the view represented by the Kaushitaka is invariably 
 upheld as the authoritative one, and we have in this 
 Brahmana but a remoulding by ^aukhayana of the stock 
 of dogma peculiarly the property of the Kausliitakins. 
 Further, in its commentary, which, it may be remarked, 
 
 * The quotations from Brdhmanas Paingi Kalpah in tlie Mahilbhashya, 
 in Ydska, therefore, belong in part see I. Si., xui. 455.] 
 perhaps to the Paingya (.'). [Ou the 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE RIK. 47 
 
 interprets the work under the sole title of the " Kaushi- 
 taki-Brahmana," passages are frequently quoted from a 
 Maha-Kaushitaki-Brahmana, so that we have to infer the 
 existence of a stOl larger work of similar contents, — pro- 
 bably a later handling of the same subject (?). This com- 
 mentary further connects the Kaushitaki-Brahmana with 
 the school of the Kauthumas — a school which otherwise 
 belongs only to the Samaveda : this, however, is a relation 
 which has not as yet been cleared up. — The name San- 
 khayana-Brahmana interchanges occasionally with the 
 form Saiikhyayana-Brahmana, but the former would seem 
 to deserve the preference ; its earliest occurrence is pro- 
 bably in the Prati^akhya-Sdtra of the Black Yajus. 
 
 The great number of myths and legends contained in 
 both these Brahmanas of the E.ik invests them with a 
 peculiar interest. These are not indeed introduced for 
 their own sake, but merely with a view to explain the 
 origin of some hymn ; but this, of course, does not detract 
 from their value. One of them, the legend of Sunah^epa, 
 which is found in the second part of the Aitarej'a- 
 Brahmana, is translated by Eoth in the Indische Studien, 
 i. 458-464, and discussed in detail, ibid., ii 1 12-123. 
 According to him, it follows a more ancient metrical ver- 
 sion. We must indeed assume generally, with regard to 
 many of these legends, that they had already gained a 
 rounded, independent shape in tradition before they were 
 incorporated in+o the Brahmana, and of this we have fre- 
 quent evidence in the distinctly archaic character of their 
 language, compared with that of the rest of the text. Now 
 these legends possess great value for us from two points 
 of view : first, because they contain, to some extent at 
 least, directly or indirectly, historical data, often stated in 
 a plain and artless manner, but at other times disguised 
 and only perceptible to the eye of criticism ; and, secondly, 
 because they present connecting links with the legends- 
 of later times, the origin of which would otherwise have 
 remained almost entirely obscure. 
 
 On the Aitareya- Brahmana we have a commentary by 
 Sayana, and on the Kaushitaki-Brahmana one by Vina- 
 yaka, a son of Madhava.^ 
 
 '3 The Aitareya- Brdhmana has by Martin Hang, 2 toIs., Bomliay, 
 been edited, text with translation, 1863, see 7. St., ix. 177-380 (1S65). 
 
if£ VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 To each of these Brahmanas is also annexed an Aran- 
 yaka, or ' forest-portion/ that is, the portion to be studied 
 ia the forest by the sages known to us through Mega- 
 sthenes as vXofiioi, and also by their disciples. This 
 forest-life is evidently only a later stage of development 
 in Brahmanical contemplation, and it is to it that we must 
 chiefly ascribe the depth of speculation, the complete 
 absorption in mystic devotion by which the Hindus are 
 so eminently distinguished. Accordingly, the writings 
 directly designated as Aranyakas bear this character im- 
 pressed upon them in a very marked degree ; they consist 
 in great part of Upanishads only, in which, generally 
 speaking, a bold and vigorous faculty of thought cannot 
 fail to be recognised, however much of the bizarre they 
 may at the same time contain. 
 
 The Aitareya-Aranyaka^" consists of five books, each 
 of which again is called Aranyaka. The second and third 
 books* form a separate Upanishad ; and a still further sub- 
 division here takes place, inasmuch as the four last sections 
 of the second book, which are particularly consonant with 
 the doctrines of the Vedanta system, pass xar' i^oj(^ as the 
 Aitareyopanishad.^ Of these two books Mahidasa Aitareya 
 is the reputed author; he is supposed to be the son of 
 Vi^ala and Itara, and from the latter his name Aitareya 
 is derived. This name is indeed several times quoted 
 in the course of the work itself as a final authority, a cir- 
 cumstance which conclusivelyproves the correctness of trac- 
 ing to him the views therein propounded. For we must 
 divest ourselves of the notion that a teacher of this period 
 ever put his ideas into writing ; oral delivery was his only 
 method of imparting them to his pupils ; the knowledge of 
 them was transmitted by tradition, until it became fixed in 
 
 The legend of Sanah^epa (vii. 13- come to hand (Nov. 30, 1875), see 
 
 18), had been diBcussed by Roth ; see Mbliolheca Indica, New Series, No. 
 
 also M. MuUer, Sist. of A. S. L. , p. 325 ; the text reaches as far as i. 
 
 573, ff. Another section of it (viii. 4. i. 
 
 S-20), treating of royal inaugura- * See I. St., i. 388, flf. 
 
 tiona, had preTiously been edited by '■" This Aitareyopanishad, amongst 
 
 Schonborn (Berlin, 1862). others, has been editfed (with Sam- 
 
 ^i> The first fasciculus of an edi- kara's commentary) and translated 
 
 tion, together with Ssiya^a's com- by Eoer, Bibl. Ink., vii. 143, Sf. 
 
 mentary, of the Aitareya-lranyaka, (Calc. 1850), xv. 28, £F. (1853). 
 
 by KSjendra Ma Mitra, has just 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE RIK. 45 
 
 some definite form or other, always however retaining his 
 name. It is in this way that we have to account for the fact of 
 our finding theauthors of works that have been handed down 
 to us, mentioned in these works themselves. For the rest, 
 the doctrines of Aitareyamust have found especial favour, 
 and his pupils have been especially numerous ; for we find 
 his name attached to the Brahmana as well as the Aran- 
 yaka. With respect to the former, however, no reasons 
 can for the present be assigned, while for the fourth 
 book of the Aranyaka we have the direct information that 
 it belpngs to Aivalayana,* the pupil of Saunaka; nay, 
 this Saunaka himself appears to have passed for the 
 author of the fifth book, according to Colebrooke's state- 
 ments on the subject. Misc. Ess., i. 47, n. The name of 
 Aitareya is not traceable anywhere in the Brahmanas; 
 he is first mentioned in the Chhandogyopanishad. The 
 earliest allusion to the school of the Aitareyins is in the 
 Sama-Siitras. — ^To judge from the repeated mention of 
 them in the third book, the family of the Mandiikas, or 
 Mandiikeyas, must also have been particularly active in 
 the development of the views there represented. Indeed, 
 we find them specified later as one of the five schools of 
 the Rigveda; yet nothing bearing their name has been 
 preserved except an extremely abstruse Upanishad, and 
 the Mandxiki-Siksha, a grammatical treatise. The former, 
 however, apparently only belongs to the Atharvan, and 
 exhibits completely the standpoint of a rigid system. The 
 latter might possibly be traced back to the Manditkeya 
 who is named here as well as in the Rik-Prati^akhya. 
 
 The contents of the Aitareya-Aranyaka, as we now 
 have it,^ supply no direct clue to the time of its composi- 
 
 * I findan AsTaUyana-Brdhmana the high importance of those fami- 
 also quoted, but am unable to give liar with them. Among the names 
 any particulars regarding it. [In mentioned in the course of the work, 
 a MS. of the Ait. Ar., India Office Agnive^yiiyana is of significance on 
 Library, 986) the entire work is account of its formation. The in- 
 described at the end as is!;oMyo»oi- teresting passages on the three 
 torn Aranyakam,.1 ^f!^lf *''* '^f^ nirbhuja^sani- 
 
 35 See/ St i ^87--5Q2 lam f^ttapdtha, pratrmna = padapdtha, 
 
 now in ppssession of the complete <indubkuyamantarqia=l^anuipd(ha, 
 
 text, but have nothing material to are discussed by M. Muller on R>k- 
 
 add to the above remarks. Great P'^'-. >■ 2-4(see also tbtd., Nachlraye, 
 
 stress is laid upon keeping the par- P- "J- 
 ticuiar doctrines secret, and upon 
 
50 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 tion, other than the one already noticed, namely, that in 
 the second chapter of the second book the extant arrange- 
 ment of the Rik-Samhita is given. Again, the number 
 of teachers individually mentioned is very great, particu- 
 larly in the third book — among them are two Sakalyas, a 
 Krishna Harita, a Panchalachanda — and this may be con- 
 sidered as an additional proof of its more recent origin, a 
 conclusion already implied by the spirit and form of the 
 opinions enunciated.^^ 
 
 The Kaushitakaranyaka, in its present form, consists of 
 three books ; but it is uncertain whether it is complete.^^ 
 It was only recently that I lighted upon the two first 
 books* These deal rather with ritual than with specula- 
 tion. The third book is the so-called KausMtdky-Upani- 
 shad,'\ a work of the highest interest and importance. Its 
 first adhydya gives us an extremely important account of 
 the ideas held with regard to the path to, and arrival in, 
 the world of the blessed, the significance of which in 
 relation to similar ideas of other races is not yet quite 
 apparent, but it promises to prove very rich ia information. 
 The second adhydya gives us in the ceremonies which it 
 describes, amongst other things, a very pleasing picture of 
 the warmth and tenderness of family ties at that period. 
 The third adhydya is of inestimable value in connection 
 with the history and development of the epic myth, inas- 
 much as it represents Indra battling with the same powers 
 of nature that Arjuna in the epic subdues as evil demons. 
 Lastly, the fourth adhydya contains the second recension 
 of a legend which also appears, under a somewhat different 
 
 '^ The circumstance here empha- 9 gWea the rivalry of the senses 
 
 siaed may be used to support the (like Satap. Br. 14. 9. 2). 
 very opposite view ; indeed I have * See Catalogue of the Berlin 
 
 so represented it in the similar case Skr. MSS., p. 19, n. 82. 
 of the Ldty^yana-Siitra (see below). t See /. St., i. 392-420. It would 
 
 This latter view now appears to me be very desirable to know on what 
 
 to have more in its favour. Foley's assertion is founded, " that 
 
 ^ A manuscript sent to Berlin the Kaushltaki-Brdhmana consists 
 
 by Buhler {MS. Or. fol. 630) of the of nine adhydyas, the first, seventh, 
 
 ' ^^khiCyana-Aranyaka ' (as it is eighth, and ninth of which form the 
 
 there called) presents it in 15 adhy- Kaushitaki-Brdhmana-Upanishad." 
 
 dyos/, the first two correspond to I have not succeeded in finding any 
 
 Ait. Ar. i., V. ; adiiy. 3-6 are made statement to this ejfect elsewhere, 
 
 up of the Kaush. Up. ; adhy. 7, 8 [See now Cowell's Preface, p. vii., 
 
 correspond to Ait. Ar. iii.; adliy. to his edition of the Kaush, Up. in 
 
 the Bibl. Ind.] 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE RIK. 51 
 
 form, in the Aranyaka of the "White Yajus, the legend, 
 namely, of the instruction of a Brahman, who is very wise 
 in his own esteem, by a warrior called Ajata^atru, king of 
 Kali. This Upanishad is also peculiarly rich in geogra- 
 phical data, throwing light upon its origin. Thus the 
 name of Chitra Gangyayani, the wise king in the first 
 adhydya who instructs Aruni, clearly points to the Ganga. 
 According to ii. 10, the northern and southern mountains, 
 i.e., Himavant and Vindhya, enclose in the eyes of the 
 author the whole of the known world, and the list of the 
 neighbouring tribes in iv. i perfectly accords with this. 
 That, moreover, this Upanishad is exactly contemporaneous 
 with the Vrihad- Aranyaka of the "White Yajus is proved 
 by the position of the names Aruni, ^vetaketu, Ajatalatru, 
 Gargya Balaki, and by the identity of the legends about 
 the latter. [See' I. St., i. 392-420.] 
 
 We have an interpretation of both Aranyakas, that is to 
 say, of the second and third books of the Aitareya- Aran- 
 yaka, and of the third book of the Kaushitaki-Aranyaka 
 in the commentary of Samkaracharya, a teacher who lived 
 about the eighth century a.d.,^ and who was of the 
 highest importance for the "Vedanta school. For not 
 only did he interpret aU the Vedic texts, that is, all the 
 "CTpanishads, upon which that school is founded, he also 
 commented on the Vedanta-Siitra itself, besides composing 
 a number of smaller works with a view to elucidate and 
 establish the Vedanta doctrine. His explanations, it is 
 true, are often forced, from the fact of their having to 
 accommodate themselves to the Vedanta system; still 
 they are of high importance for us. Pupils of his, Anan- 
 dajnana, Anandagiri, Anandatirtha; and others, in their 
 turn composed glosses on his commentaries. Of most of 
 these commentaries and glosses we are now in possession, 
 as they have been recently edited, together with their 
 Upanishads, by Dr. Eoer, Secretary to the Asiatic Society 
 of Bengal, in the Bibliotheca, Indica, a periodical appealing 
 under the auspices of that Society, and devoted exclusively 
 
 " ^amkara's date has not, unfor- called a Saiva, or follower of Siva, 
 
 tunately, been more accurately de- In his works, however, he appears 
 
 termined as yet. He passes at the as a worshipper of Vfeudeva, whom 
 
 same time for a zealous adversary lie puts forward as the real incarna- 
 
 of the Buddhists, and is therefore tiou or representative of braliman. 
 
52 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 to the publication of texts. Unfortunately the Kaushi- 
 taki-Upanishad is not yet among the numher, neither 
 is the Maitrayany-Upanishad, of which we have to speak 
 in the sequeL It is, however, to be hoped that we shall 
 yet receive both.** — ^And may yet a third, the Vashkala- 
 Upanishad, be recovered and added to the list of these 
 Upanishads of the Rik ! It is at present only known to 
 us through Anquetil Duperron's Oupnekhat, n. 366-^71; 
 the original must therefore have been extant at the time 
 of the Persian translation (rendered into Latin by Anque- 
 tU.) of the principal Upanishads (1656). The Vashkala- 
 Sruti is repeatedly mentioned by Sayana. We have seen 
 above that a particular recension of the Rik-Samhita, 
 which has likewise been lost, is attributed to the Vash- 
 kalas. This Upanishad is therefore the one sorry relic 
 left to us of an extensive cycle of literature. It rests 
 upon a legend repeatedly mentioned in the Brahmanas, 
 which in substance, and one might almost say in name 
 also, corresponds to the Greek legend of Gany-Medes. 
 Medhatithi, the son of Kanva, is carried up to heaven by 
 Indra, who has aasumed the form of a ram, and during 
 their flight he inquires of Indra who he is. Indra, in 
 reply, smilingly declares himself to be the All-god, identi- 
 fying himself with the universe. As to the cause of the 
 abduction, he goes on to say that, delighted with Medha- 
 tithi's penance, he desired to conduct him into the right 
 path leading to truth ; he must therefore have no further 
 misgiving. With regard to the date of this Upanishad, 
 nothing more definite can of course at present be said 
 than that its general tenor points to a tolerably high 
 antiquity.*" 
 
 We now descend to the last stage in the literature of 
 the Rigveda, viz., to its S'Atras. 
 
 Pirst, of the Srauta-S'Atras, or text-books of the sacri- 
 ficial rite. Of these we possess two, the Siitra of Aivala- 
 yana in 12 adhydyas, and that of Sankhayana in 18 
 
 " Both have now been published Maitri-Up. with that of Edmatlrtlia 
 
 and translated by Cowell in the (1863-69). 
 
 Bibliotheca Indica. The Kauah.-Up. *° See now tny special paper on the 
 
 (Calc. 1861) is accompanied with subject in /. St., ix. 38-42 ; the ori- 
 
 thc comm. of ISainkariinanda, the giual test lias uut yet been met with. 
 
SUTRAS OF THE RIK. 
 
 53 
 
 adhyAyas. The former connects itself with the Aitareya- 
 Brahmana, the latter with the Sankhayana-Brahmana, and 
 from these two works frequent literal quotations are re- 
 spectively borrowed. From this circumstance alone, as 
 well as from the general handling of the subject, we might 
 infer that these Siitras are of comparatively recent origin ; 
 and direct testimony is not wanting to establish the fact. 
 Thus the name A^valayana is probably to be traced back 
 to A^vala, whom we find mentioned in the Aranyaka of 
 the White Yajus as the Hotar of Janaka, king of Videha 
 (see I. St., i. 441). Again, the formation of the word by 
 the afBx 6,yana^ probably leads us to the time of estab- 
 lished schools (ayana) ? However this may be, names 
 formed in this way occur but seldom in the Brahmanas 
 themselves, and only in their latest portions ; in general, 
 therefore, they always betoken a late period. We find 
 corroboration of this in the data supplied by the contents 
 of the A^valayana-Siitra. Among the teachers there 
 quoted is an Almarathya, whose kalpa (doctrine) is con- 
 sidered by the scholiast on Panini, iv^ 3, 105, probably 
 following the Mahabhashya," as belonging to the new 
 kalpas implied in this rule, in contradistinction to the old 
 halpas. If, then, the authorities quoted by Alvalayana 
 were regarded as recent, Aivalayana himself must of 
 course have been still more modern; and therefore we 
 conclude, assuming this statement to originate from the 
 Mahabhashya,*^ that Aivalayana was nearly contemporane- 
 ous with Panini. Another teacher quoted by Aivalayana, 
 Taulvali, is expressly mentioned by Panini (ii. 4. 61) as 
 belonging to the prdnchas, or " dwellers in the east." — ^At 
 the end there is a specially interesting enumeration of the 
 various Brahmana-families, and their distribution among 
 the family stems of Bhrigu, Angiras, Atri, Vilvamitra, 
 Kaiyapa, Vasishtha, and Agastya. — The sacrifices on the 
 Sarasvati, of which I shall treat in the sequel, are here only 
 briefly touched upon, and this with some differences in the 
 
 * As in the case of Agnivesy^- kdyana (?), L^mak^yana, Vstrshyd- 
 
 yana, AlamMyana, Ajti^ayana, Au- yani, S^kat^yana, S^inkh^yana, S^- 
 
 dumbar^yana, K^ndamiyana, K£- tyiyana, Sindilyd^yana, Silamkdyana, 
 
 tySyana, Kh^dSyana, DrSihyd[yana, Saityiyana, ^aulvdyana, &e. 
 PUksh^yana, BSdarSiyana, M&iddki- *^ The name is not known in the 
 
 yana, RiniJyana, Littyilyana, Ldbu- Mahslbhstahya, see I. St., xiii. 455. 
 
S + VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 names, which may well be considered as later corruptions. 
 We have also already seen that Aivalayana is the ahithor 
 of the fourth book of the Aitareya-Aranyaka, as also that 
 he was the pupil of ^aunaka, who is stated to have de- 
 stroyed his own Siitra in favour of his pupil's work. 
 
 The Siitra of Sankhayana wears in general a somewhat 
 more ancient aspect, particularly iu the fifteenth and six- 
 teenth books, where it assumes the appearance of a Brah- 
 mana. The seventeenth and eighteenth books are a later 
 addition, and are also ranked independently, and sepa- 
 rately commented upon. They correspond to the first two 
 books of the Kaushitaki-Aranyaka. 
 
 Prom my but superficial acquaintance with them, I am 
 not at present in a position to give more detailed informa- 
 tion as to the contents and mutual relation of these two 
 Sutras.*^ My conjecture would be that their differences 
 may rest upon local grounds also, and that the Sutra of 
 Aivalayana, as well as the Aitareya-Brahmana, njay be- 
 long to the eastern part of Hindustan ; the Siitra of San- 
 khayana, on the contrary, like his Brahmana, rather to 
 the western.* The order of the ceremonial is pretty much 
 the same in both, though the great sacrifices of the kings, 
 &c., viz., vdjapeya (sacrifice for the prospering of the means 
 of subsistence), rdjasiiya (consecration of the king), ciha- 
 Tnedha (horse sacrifice), purushxi'medha (human sacrifice), 
 sarvamedha (universal sacrifice), are handled by Sankha- 
 yana with far more minuteness. 
 
 For Aivalayana I find mention made of a commentary 
 by Narayana,** the son of Krishnajit, a grandson of 
 Sripati. A namesake of his, but son of Paiupati^arman, 
 
 *' The iivaUyana-Sfitra has since *^ This is a confusion. The above- 
 been printed, 5i4Z. /«<£. (Calc. 1864- named Fjtriyana wrote a commen- 
 74), accompanied with the comm. tary upon the SdnkhfCyana-Grihya ; 
 of Ndt^yanaGiirgya, edited by Bima- b,ut the one who commented the 
 Kdrfiyana and Anandachandra. A Aivaldyana-Srauta-Siltra calls him- 
 special comparison of it with tbe self in the introduction a son of 
 Sankhdyana-Siitra is still wanting. Narasiiiha, just as Ndrdyana, the 
 BUhler, Catalogite of MSS. from commentator of the Uttara-Nai- 
 GujarM, i. 154 (1871), cites a com- shadhiya, does, who, according to 
 mentary by Devatrfta on the A^v. tradition (Roer, Pref., p. viii., 1855), 
 Sr. S., likewise a partial one by lived some five hundred years ago. 
 Vidydranya. Are these two to be regarded as one 
 
 * Perhaps to the Naimisha fo- and the same person ? £ee I. Sir., 
 
 rest (?). See below, p. 59. 2, 298 (1869). 
 
SUTRAS OF THE RIK. 55 
 
 composed apaddhati ('outlines') to Sankhayana, after the 
 example of one Brahmadatta. When he lived is uncer- 
 tain, but we may with some probability assign him to the 
 sixteenth century. According to his own statements he 
 was a native of Malayade^a. Further, for the Siitra of 
 Sankhayana we have the commentary of Varadattasuta 
 Anarttiya. Three of its adhydyas were lost, and have 
 been supplied by Dasa^arman Munjasiinu, viz., the ninth, 
 tenth, and eleventh.** On the last two adhydyas, xvii., 
 xvui., there is a commentary by Govinda. That these 
 commentaries were preceded by others, which, however, 
 have since been lost, is obvious, and is besides expressly 
 stated by Anarttiya. 
 
 Of the Grihya-Siitras of the Rigveda we Hkewise only 
 possess two, those of A^valayana (in four adhydyas) and 
 of Sankhayana (in six adhydyas). That of Saunaka is 
 indeed repeatedly mentioned, but it does not seem to be 
 any longer in existence. 
 
 However widely they may differ as to details, the con- 
 tents of the two works are essentially identical, especially 
 as regards the order and distribution of the matter. They 
 treat mainly, as I have already stated (p. 17), of the 
 ceremonies to be performed in the various stages of con- 
 jugal and family life, before and after a birth, at marriage, 
 at the time of and after a death. Besides these, however, 
 manners and customs of the most diverse character are 
 depicted, and " in particular, the sayings and formulas to 
 be uttered on different occasions bear the impress of a very 
 high antiquity, and frequently carry us back into the time 
 when Brahmanism had not' yet been developed" (see 
 Stenzler in /. St., ii. 1 59). It is principally popular and 
 superstitious notions that are found in them ; thus, we are 
 pointed to star-worship, to astrology, portents, and witch- 
 craft, and more especially to the adoration and propitia- 
 tion of the evil powers in nature, the averting of their 
 malign influence, &c. It is especially in the pitritarpana, 
 or oblation to the Manes, that we find a decisive proof of 
 
 ** Sections 3-5 of the fourth book Streiter (1861) ; the variants pre- 
 
 have been publiBhed by Conner in Bented therein to the parallel pas- 
 
 his Pindapitriyajna (Berlin, 1870), sage in the Ait. Brdhm. had already 
 
 and the section relating to the le- been given by M. MuUer, A. S. L., 
 
 gend of ^unah^epa (xv. 17-27) by p. 573, flf. 
 
56 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the modem composition of these works, as the forefathers 
 are there emimerated individually hy name — a custom 
 which, although in itself it may be very ancient (as we 
 find a perfect analogy to it in the Teshts and Nerengs of 
 the Parsis), yet in this particular application belongs to a 
 very recent period, as is apparent from the names them- 
 selves. For not only are the Rishis of the RLk-Samhita 
 cited in their extant order, but all those names are like- 
 wise mentioned which we encounter as particularly signi- 
 ficant in the formation of the different schools of the Rik, 
 as well as iu connection with its Brahmanas and Siitras ; 
 for example, Vashkala, ^akalya, Mandiikeya, Aitareya, 
 Paingya, Kaushltaka, Saunaka, A^valayana, and Sankha- 
 yana themselves, &c. Joined to these, we find other 
 names with which we are not yet otherwise acquainted, 
 as also the names of three female sages, one of whom, 
 Gdrgi Vachaknavf, meets us repeatedly in the Vrihad- 
 Aranyaka of the White Yajus, as residing at the court of 
 Janaka. The second*^ is unknown; but the name of the 
 third, Sulabha Maitreyi, is both connected with this very 
 Janaka in the legends of the Maha-Bharata,* and also 
 points us to the Saioldbhdni BrdhTnan&ni, quoted by the 
 scholiast on Panini, iv. 3. 105, probably on the authority 
 of the Mahabhashya,*^ as an instance of the 'modern' 
 Brahmanas implied by this rule. Immediately after the. 
 Rishis of the Rik-Samhita, we find mention of other names 
 and works which have not yet been met with in any other 
 part of Vedic literature. In the Sankhayana-Grrihya we 
 have these: Sumardw-Jaimini-VaiiampAyaTUb-PaUa-s'ilhtra- 
 hkdshya [--Gdrgya-Babhno\ . . . ; and in the AlvaJayana- 
 Grihya these : Sumantu-Jaimini- Vaiiampdyana-Paila-' 
 s'^Ura-WiAratormaJiAhliArata-dharmiichArydh.'^^ The latter 
 
 *° Her name is Vadavd Priti- They are there cited a second time 
 tlieyl; a teacher called Pratlthi is also, to P£in., iv. 2. 68, and are ex- 
 mentioned in the Yan^a-Brilhmana plained by Kaiyata as Suldbhaia 
 of the S^maveda. proHdni. 
 
 * [Cf. ^amkara's statements as to *' The wori'bhdshya is to be in- 
 
 this in Ved. Stitrabh. to iii. 3. 32, serted above between gtitra and hhd- 
 
 p. 915, ed. E^ma Nslriyana.] Bud- rata; though wanting in the MS. 
 
 dha's uncle is called by the Bud- used by me at the time when I 
 
 dhista Sulabha ; see Schiefner, Le- wrote, it is found in all the other 
 
 ben des Sdkyamuni, p. 6. MSS. 
 
 ^ See on this /. St., xiii. 429. 
 
SUTRAS OF THE RIK. 57 
 
 passage is evidently the more modern, and although we 
 must not suppose that the Maha-Bharata in its present 
 form is here referred to, still, in the expression " VaiSam- 
 pdyano mahdhhdratdcMryah," apparently indicated by this 
 passage, there must at all events be implied a work of 
 some compass, treating of the same legend, and there- 
 fore forming the basis of our extant text. The passage 
 seems also to indicate that the same material had already 
 been handled a second time by Jaimini, whose work, 
 however, can have borne but a distant resemblance to the 
 Jaimini-Bharata of the present day. We shall find in 
 the sequel frequent confirmation of the fact that the origin 
 of the epic and the systematic development of Vedic litera- 
 ture in its different schools belong to the same period. Of 
 a Siitra by Sumantu, and a Dharma by Paila, we have no 
 knowledge whatever. It is only in more modern times, 
 in the Puranas and in the legal literature proper, that I 
 find a work attributed to Sumantu, namely, a Smriti- 
 Sastra; while to Paila (whose name appears from Pan. 
 iv. I. 118) is ascribed the revelation of the Rigveda — a 
 circumstance which at least justifies the inference that he 
 played a special part in the definitive completion of its 
 school development. — ^It is, however, possible to give a 
 wholly different interpretation of the passage from A^va- 
 layana; and in my opinion it would be preferable to do so. 
 "We may divest the four proper names of any special rela- 
 tion to the names of the four works, and regard the two 
 groups as independent,^' as we must evidently assume 
 them to be in the Saakhayana-Grihya.* If this be done, 
 then what most readily suggests itself in connection with 
 the passage is the manner in which the Puranas apportion 
 
 ** This interpretation becomes tinction to one another, just as in 
 
 imperative after the rectification of the FiiiiiiTuhya, of the Black Yajus 
 
 the text (see the previous note), (ii. 12) we find chhandas and bhdshd, 
 
 according to which no longer four, and in Tdska anvadhydya and 
 
 but five names of works are in ques- iJutshd. We must, therefore, under- 
 
 tion. stand by it 'works in hhdshd,' 
 
 * What is meant in the latter though the meaning of the word 
 
 [and cf. note 47 in the iiv. Qrih, is l>ere more developed than in the 
 
 too] by the word JA^%a, appears works just mentioned, and ap- 
 
 from the PrsCtisdkhya of the White preaches the sense in which P^nini 
 
 Yajus,where (i. 1. 19,20) i-cicsAu and uses it, I shall return to the sub- 
 
 bhdskyeshu are found in contradis- ject further on. 
 
58 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the revelation of the several Vedas; inasmuch as they 
 assign the Atharvaveda to Sumantu, the Samaveda to 
 Jaimini, the Tajurveda to Vailampayana, and the Rigveda 
 to Paila. But in either case we must assume with Eoth, 
 who first pointed out the passage in Aivalayana (op. c, p. 
 27), that this passage, as well as the one in SankMyana, 
 has been touched up by later interpolation;*^ otherwise 
 the dates of these two Grihya-Siitras would be brought 
 down too far ! For although, from the whole tenor of both 
 passages, that in the A^valayana-Grihya, as well as that in 
 the Sankhayana-Grihya — ^which for the rest present other 
 material discrepancies of detail — it is suf&ciently clear 
 that they presuppose the literature of the Rigveda as 
 entirely closed, still the general attitude of both works 
 shows their comparatively ancient origin. — The question 
 whether any connection exists between the Smriti-Sastra 
 of Sankha and the Grihya-Siitra of ^ankhayana, remains 
 stiLl unanswered. 
 
 Por both Grihya-Siitras there are commentaries by the 
 same Narayana who commented the Srauta-Siitra of Aiva- 
 layana.'" They probably belong to the fifteenth century.* 
 There are, besides, as in the case of the Srauta-Siitras, 
 
 ^ We find the Sumantu-Jaimiai- comm. of the 6inkh. Grihya, son of 
 
 Vaisampdyana - PaUddi/d dchdryd^ Krishnajit, and grandson of ^rlpali. 
 
 quoted a second time in the ^dnkh. (This third Nir. lived a.d. 1538; see 
 
 G., in its last section (vi. 6), which Catalogue of the Berlin MSS., p. 
 
 is probably of later origin ; and here, 354, sub No. 1282.) — The text of 
 
 without any doubt, the reference is the Aival. Orihya has been edited 
 
 to the same distribution of the four by Stenzler, with a translation (/n- 
 
 Vedas among the above-named per- dische ffausregdn, 1864-65) ; the 
 
 sonages which occurs in the Vishnu- text, with Nirdyaija's comm., by 
 
 Pun^a, iii. 4. 8, 9. Both times the B^mandrdyana and Anandachandra, 
 
 representative . of the Atharvan in Sibl. Ind. (1866-69). "^^^ B^<^' 
 
 comes first, that of the Rik last, tions relating to marriage ceremo- 
 
 which in a Rik text serves as a clear nies have been edited by Haas, /. 
 
 proof that we have here to do with St., v. 283, S. ; those relating to 
 
 later appendages. A similar prece- funeral rites, by Miiller, Z. D. M. 
 
 dence is given to the Atharvaveda in G., ix. 
 
 the MahdbhiJahya ; of. /. St., xiii. * Two glosses on Samkara's com- 
 
 431. mentary on the Prainopanishad and 
 
 '^ This is a mistake, see note the Mundakopanishad bear the same 
 
 43; all three Ndnlyanas must be name, so that possibly the author of 
 
 kept distinct. The commentator of them is identical with the above- 
 
 the A^val. ^r. S. calls himself a named Niriyana. Ace. to what has 
 
 Gdrgya, and so.n of Narasinha ; the just been remarked in note 50, this 
 
 comm. of the A^val. Grihya, a Nai- must appear ii, priori very doubtful, 
 
 dhruva, and son of Divdkara ; the since a considerable number of other 
 
SUTRAS OF THE RIK'. S9 
 
 many small treatises in connection with the Grihya- 
 Biitras, some of them being summaries, in which the larger 
 works are reduced to system. Among them is a Paddhati 
 to the Sankhayana-Grihya by Eamachandra, who lived in 
 the Naimisha forest in the middle of the fifteenth century ; 
 and I am inclined to think that this Naimisha forest was 
 the birthplace of the Siitra itself It is perhaps for this 
 reason that the tradition connected with it was so well 
 preserved in that district. 
 
 The extant Frdti^dkhya-S^tra of the Rik-Samhita is 
 ascribed to Saunaka, who has been repeatedly mentioned 
 already, and who was the teacher of Alvalayana. This 
 extensive work is a metrical composition, divided into 
 three hdndas, of six patalas each, and containing 103 
 Jcandikds in all. The first information regarding it was 
 given by Eoth, op. c, p. 53, ff. According to tradition, it 
 is of more ancient origin than the Sutras of Aivalayana 
 just mentioned, which only purport to be written by the 
 pupil of this Saunaka ; but whether it really was composed 
 by the latter, or whether it is not much more probably 
 merely the work of his school, must for the present remain 
 undecided. The names quoted in it are in part identical 
 with those met with in Taska's Mrukti and in the Siltra 
 of Panini. The contents of the work itself are, however, 
 as yet but little known '^ in their details. Of special in- 
 terest are those passages which treat of the correct and 
 incorrect pronunciation of words in general. There is an 
 excellent commentary on it by tTata, which professes in 
 the introduction to be a remodelling of an earlier com- 
 mentary by Vishnuputra. — The Vpalekha is to be con- 
 authors bear the same name. But he is probably identical with the 
 in this particular case we are able author of the dipikd on the small 
 to bring forward definite reasons Atharyopanishads published in the 
 against this identification. The £ibl. Ind. in 1872, who (ibid., p. 
 glosaarist of the Pra^nop. was called 393) is called Bhatta Ndrdyana, and 
 Ndrdyanmdra according to /. St., son of Bhatta Ratnikara.] 
 i. 470; according to the note, ibid., " We are now in possession of 
 i. 439, Ndrdyana Sarasvati; accord- two editions of this most important 
 ing to Aufrecht, Catalogue of the work, text and translation, with 
 Oxford MSS., p. 366 (1859-64), elucidatory notes, by Ad. Eegnier 
 rather Sdyanendrasarasvati (!). The (Paris, 1857-58), and M. Miiller 
 glossarist of the Mundakop., on the (Leipzig, 18567^9) ; see /. Str., ii. 
 other hand, was, according to /. St., 94, ff., 127, ff., 159, ff. ; Lit. Cert- 
 i. 470, called Ndrdyanabliatta ; and tralblatt, 1870, p. 530. 
 
6o VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 sidered as aa epitome of the Pratilakhya-Siitra, and to 
 some extent as a supplement to it [specially to chapters 
 X. xi.]i It is a short treatise, numbered among the 
 Pariiishtas (supplements); and it has in its turn heen 
 repeatedly commented upon.^^ 
 
 A few other treatises have still to be noticed tere, which, 
 although they bear the high-sounding name of Veddngas, 
 or ' members of the Veda,' are yet, as above stated (p. 25), 
 only to be looked upon as later supplements to the litera- 
 ture of the Eigveda : the ^ikshd, the Chhandas, and the 
 Jyotisha. All three exist in a double recension according 
 as they profess to belong to the Rigveda or to the Yajur- 
 veda. The Chhandas is essentially alike in both recen- 
 sions, and we have to recognise in it the Siitra on prosody 
 ascribed to Pingala.^ It is, moreover, like both the other 
 treatises, of very recent origin. We have a proof of this, 
 for instance, in the fact that, in the manner peculiar to 
 the Indians, it expresses numbers by words," and feet by 
 letters, and that it treats of the highly elaborated metres, 
 which are only found in modern poetry.^^ The part deal- 
 ing with Vedic metres may perhaps be more ancient. The 
 teachers quoted in it bear in part comparatively ancient 
 
 °^ Edited by W. Pertscli (Berlin, "' Edited and commented by my- 
 
 1854) ; this tract treats of the irama- self in /. St., viii. (1863); the text, 
 
 pdtha, an extended form of the pa- together with the commentary of 
 
 dapdtha, which at the same time HaUyudha, edited by Vi^vanStha- 
 
 gires the text in the samhitd form, ^^trin in BUI. Indica (1871-74). 
 
 namely, each word twice, first joined °* See Alblrdnl's account in Woep- 
 
 with the preceding, and then with cke's Memoire sur la propagaMon 
 
 the following word (thus : 06, hc,cd, des chifres indiena, p. 102, ff. (1863). 
 
 rfe . . .). There are also other still Bumell, F.lem. of S. I. Paleeogr., 
 
 more complicated modes of reciting p. 58. 
 
 the Veda, as to which cf . Thibaut in ^' On the other hand, there are 
 
 his edition of the Jatipatala (1870), metres taught in this work which 
 
 p. 36, S. The next step, called but rarely occur in modern litera- 
 
 jata, exhibits the text in the follow- ture, and which must be looked 
 
 ing manner : albha aJ), he cb he, and upon as obsolete and out of fashion. 
 
 MSS. of this kind have actually Therefore, in spite of what has been 
 
 been preserved, e.g., in the case of said above, we must carry back the 
 
 the Wjas. Saipb. The following date of its composition to a period 
 
 step, called ghana, is said to be still about simultaneous with the close 
 
 in use; cf. Bhandarkar, Indian All- of the Vedic Sdtra literature, or the 
 
 iviuary, iii. 133 ; Haug, Veher das commencement of the astronomical 
 
 Wesen des vedischen Accents, p. 5S ; and algebraical literatures; see /.£t., 
 
 it runs : ab ba ahc cba abc, be cb be viii. 173, 178. 
 bed deb bed. 
 
VEDANGAS—AKUKRAMANIS OF THE RIK. 6i 
 
 names. These are : Kjcaushtiiki, Tandin, Yaska, Saitava, 
 Eata, and Mandavya. The recensions most at variance 
 with each other are those of the ^iksha and Jyotisha 
 respectively. The former work is in both recensions 
 directly traced to Panini, the latter to Lagadha, or Lagata, 
 an otherwise unknown name in Indian literature.*— Besides 
 the Paniniya Siksha, there is another bearing the name of 
 the Mandiikas, which therefore may more directly follow 
 the Rik, and which is at any rate a more important work 
 than the former. As a proof of the antiquity of the name 
 ' Siksha ' for phonetic investigations, we may adduce the 
 circumstance that in the Taitt. Arany., vii. i, we find a 
 section beginning thus : " we will explain the Siksha ; " 
 whereupon it gives the titles of the topics of the oral 
 exposition which we may suppose to have been connected 
 therewith {1. St., ii. 211), and which, to judge by these 
 titles, must have embraced letters, accents, quantity, arti- 
 culation, and the rules of euphony, that is to say, the same 
 subjects discussed in the two existing Sikshas.^® 
 
 Of the writings called Anukramani, in which the 
 metre, the deity, and the author of each song are given in 
 their proper order, several have come down to us for the 
 Rik-Samhita, including an AnuvdJcdnukramani by Sau- 
 naka, and a Sarvdnukramani by Katyayana.^^ For both 
 of these we have an excellent commentary by Shadguru- 
 
 * Reinaud in Lis Mimoire sur '' The Pd^iniyil Sikshd has been 
 
 I'Inde, pp. 331, 332, adduces from printed with a translation in I. St., 
 
 Albirunl a Lita, who passed for the it. 345-371 {1858) ; on the numerous 
 
 author of the old Sirya-Siddhsinta ; other treatises bearing the same 
 
 might he not be identical with this name, see E^jendra Lala Mitrn, 
 
 Lagadha, Lagata? According to Notices of Sanskrit MSS., i. 71, ff. 
 
 Colebr., £ss., ii. 409, Brahmagupta (1870), Burnell, Catalogue of Vedic 
 
 quotes a Lildhiichdrya ; this name A/S5., pp. 8,42 (1870), my essay 011 
 
 also could be traced to Lagadha. the Pratijnasutra (1872), pp. 70-74; 
 
 [By Siiryadeva, a scholiast of jirya- specially on the Mdndilkl ^ikshd, pp. 
 
 bhata, the author of the Jyotisha is 106-112; Haug, Ueher das Wesm 
 
 cited under the name of Lagadil- des vedisclien Accents, p. 53, ff. 
 
 chdrya; see Kern, Preface to the (1873), on the Ndrada-Sikshd, «6id., 
 
 Aryabhatiya, p. ix., 1874. An edi- 57, ff, and lastly Kielhorn, /. St., 
 
 tion of the text of the Jyotisha, to- xiv. 160. 
 
 gather with extracts from Somd- °' In substance published' by 
 
 kara's commentary and explanatory Miiller in the sixth volume of his 
 
 notes, was published by me in 1862 large edition of the Rik, pp. 621- 
 
 under the title : Ueber den Vedaka- 671. 
 lender, Namens Ji/otisham.} 
 
62 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 ^ishya, whose time is unknown,^* as also his real name. 
 The names of the six teachers from whom he took this 
 surname are enumerated by himself; they are Vinayaka, 
 Triiiilanka, Govinda, Siirya, Vyasa, and ^ivayogin, and he 
 connects their names with those of the corresponding 
 deities. — Another work belonging to this place, the Bri- 
 haddevata, has been already mentioned (p. 24), as attri- 
 buted to Saunaka, and as being of great importance, con- 
 taining as it does a rich store of mythical fables and 
 legends. From Kuhn's communications on the subject 
 (/. St., i. 1 01- 1 20), it appears that this work is of tolerably 
 late origin, as it chiefly follows Ya^ka's Nirukta, and pro- 
 bably therefore only belongs' to Saunaka in the sense of 
 having proceeded from his school. It mentions a few 
 more teachers in addition to those quoted by Yaska, as 
 Bhaguri and Aivalayana ; and it also presupposes, by fre- 
 quently quoting them, the existence of the Aitareyaka, 
 BhaUavi-Brahmana, and Nidana-Siitra. As the author 
 strictly adheres to the order of the hymns observed in the 
 Samhita, it results that in the recension of the text used 
 by him there were a few deviations from that of the 
 Sakalas which has been handed down to us. In fact, he 
 here and there makes direct reference to the text of the 
 Vashkalas, to which, consequently, he must also have had 
 access. — Ijastly, we have to mention the writings called 
 Rigvidhdna, &c., which, although some of them bear the 
 name of Saunaka, probably belong only to the time of the 
 Puranas. They treat of the mystic and magic efficacy of 
 the recitation of the hymns of the Eik, or even of single 
 verses of it, and the like. There are, likewise, a number 
 of other similar Pari^ishtas (supplements)^ under various 
 names ; for instance, aBahvricha-Parilishta, Sankhayana-P., 
 Aivalayana-Grihya-P., &c. 
 
 °^ His work was composed towards about 1 187 A.D. -of. /. St., viii. l6£), 
 the close of the twelfth century, n. {l86j). 
 
SAMA VEDA-SAMHITA. 63 
 
 I now turn to tlie Sdrnaveda* 
 
 The Samhitd of the Samaveda is an aathology taken 
 from the Eik-Samhita, comprising those of its verses 
 which were intended to he chanted at the ceremonies of 
 the Soma sacrifice. Its arrangement would seem to be 
 guided by the order of the Rik-Samhita ; but here, as in 
 the case of the two Samhitas of the Yajus, we must not 
 think to find any continuous connection. Properly speak- 
 ing, each verse is to be considered as standing by itself: it 
 only receives its real sense when taken in connection with 
 the particular ceremony to which it belongs. So stands 
 the case at least in the first part of the Sama-Samhita. 
 This is divided into six prap&thakas, each of which f con- 
 sists of ten daiats or decades, of ten verses each, a division 
 which existed as early as the time of the second part of 
 the Satapatha-'Brahmana, and within which the separate 
 verses are distributed according to the deities to whom 
 they are addressed. The first twelve decades contain in- 
 vocations of Agni, the last eleven invocations of Soma, 
 while the thirty-six intermediate ones are for the most 
 part addressed to Indra. The second part of the Sama- 
 Samhita, on the contrary, which is divided into nine pra- 
 pdthakas, each of which again is subdivided into two or 
 occasionally three sections, invariably presents several, 
 usually three, verses closely connected with one another, 
 and forming an independent group, the first of them having 
 generally appeared already in the first part. The prin- 
 ciple of distribution here is as yet obscure.^^ In the Sam- 
 hita these verses are still exhibited in their Wc^form, 
 although with the sAnTvan-aXiQeatB ; but in addition to this 
 we have four gdnas, or song-books, in which they appear 
 in their sdmarir-ioTm. For, in singing they were consider- 
 
 * See /. St., i. 28-66. use of which my example has _ 
 
 t Except the last, which contains misled Miiller also. History of 
 
 only nine decades. A. S. L., p. 473, n., is wrong, see 
 
 ™ The first part of the Saiphitd is Monatsberickte derBerl. A cad. , 1 868, 
 
 referred to under the names drcWia, p. 238. -According to Durga, the 
 
 clihandas, chJiaJtdimJcd, the second author of the padapdtha of the 
 
 as vOwrdrcMha or uUard ; the de- Sama-Samhitii was a Giirgya; see 
 
 signation of the latter as stauhhiJca Roth, Comm., p. 39 (respecting this 
 
 (see 7. St., i. 29, 30, 66), into the family, see J. i>t., xiii. 411). 
 
64 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 ably altered by tlie prolongation and repetition of the 
 syllables, by the insertion of additional syllables, serving 
 as a rest for the chanting, and so forth; and only thus 
 were they transformed into sdnians. Two of these song- 
 books, the Grd/mageya^gdna (erroneously called Veya,- 
 gdna), in seventeen prapdthahis, and the Aranyorgdna, 
 in six prapdthakas, follow the order of the richas contained 
 in the first part of the Samhita; the former being intended 
 for chanting in the grdmas, or inhabited places, the latter 
 for chanting in the forest. Their order is fixed in a com- 
 paratively very ancient Anukramani, which even bears 
 the name of Brahmana, viz., Rishi-Brdhmana. The other 
 two gdnas, the Uha^gdruiyin. ivfeakij-^AneQ prapdthakas, and 
 the Ohya-gdna, in sis. prapdthakas, follow the order of the 
 richas contained in the second part of the Samhita. Their 
 mutual relation here still requires closer investigation. 
 Each such sdman evolved out of a rich has a special tech- 
 nical name, which probably in most cases originated from 
 the first inventor of the form in question, is often, how- 
 ever, borrowed from other considerations, and is usually 
 placed in the manuscripts before the text itself. As each 
 rich can be chanted in a great variety of ways, in each of 
 which it bears a particular name, the number of sdmans, 
 strictly speaking, is quite unlimited, and is of course far 
 greater than that of the richas contained in the Samhita. 
 Of these latter there are 1 549,* of which all but seventy- 
 eight have been traced in the Rik-Samhita. Most of them 
 are taken from its eighth and ninth mandalas. 
 
 I have already remarked (p.. 9) upon the antiquity of 
 the readings of the Sama-Samhita as compared with those 
 of the Rik-Samhita. It follows from this almost with 
 
 • Benfey [Einleitung, p. xix.] much as 249 of those occurring in 
 
 erroneously states the number as the first part are repeated in the 
 
 1472, which I copied from him, /. second, three of them twice, while 
 
 St., i. 29, 30. The above number is nine of the richas which occur iu 
 
 borrowed from a paper by Whitney, the second part only, appear twice, 
 
 which will probably find a place iu [See on this Whitney's detailed table 
 
 the Indische Studim. The total num- at the end of his Tabellarische Dar- 
 
 ber of the richas contained in the stdlung der gegenaeitigen Yerhalt- 
 
 Sitma-Samhitii is 1810 (585 in the nisse der Samhitds des Rik, Sdman, 
 
 first, 1225 in the second part), from Weissen Yajus, und Athai-van, I. St., 
 
 which, however, 261 are to be de- ii. 321, ff., 363 (1853)]. 
 ducted as mere repetitions, iuas- 
 
SAAfA VEDA'.SAMHITA. 65 
 
 certainty that the ricJias constituting the former were bor- 
 rowed from the songs of the latter at a remote period, 
 before their formation into a Rik-Samhita had as yet 
 taken place ; so that in the interval they suffered a good 
 deal of wearing down in the mouth of the people, which 
 was avoided ia the ease of the richas applied as sdmans, and 
 so protected by beiag used in worship. The fact has also 
 already been stated that no verses have been received into 
 the Sama-Saiahita from those songs of the Rik-Sanihita 
 which must be considered as the most modern. Thus we 
 find no sdmans borrowed from the Purusha-Siikta, in the 
 ordinary recensions at least, for the school of the Naigeyas 
 has, in fact, incorporated the first five verses of it into the 
 seventh prapdthaka of the first part — a section which is 
 peculiar to this school. The Sama-Samhita, beiug a purely 
 derivative production, gives us no clue towards the deter- 
 mination of its date. It has come down to us in two 
 recensions, on the whole differing but little from each 
 other, one of which belongs to the school of the Eanayani- 
 yas,.the other to that of the Kauthumas. Of this latter 
 the school of the Negas, or Naigeyas, alluded to above, is 
 a subdivision, of which two Anukramanis at least, one 01 
 the deities and one of the Rishis of the several verses, 
 have been preserved to us.^" Not one of these three 
 names has as yet been traced in Vedic hterature; it is 
 only in the Sdtras of the Samaveda itself that the first 
 and second at least are mentioned, but even here the name 
 of the Negas does not appear. — The text of the Eanayani- 
 yas was edited and translated, with strict reference to 
 Sayana's commentary, by the missionary Stevenson in 
 1842; since 1848 we have been ia possession of another 
 edition, furnished with a complete glossary and much 
 
 ^ The seventh prapdthaka, which specially refers to the Aranyaka- 
 
 is pecuUar to it, has since been, dis- Samhitd, see Burnell, Catalogue of 
 
 covered. It bears the title Aran- Y^'^^ MSS. (1870), p. 39. — Of the 
 
 yaka-Samhitd, and has been edited Aranyaka-gdna as well as of the 
 
 by Siegfried Goldsohmidt in Mo- Grdmageya-gdna we find, ibid., p. 49, 
 
 natshei-ich.tederBerl.Acad. 1868, pp. a text in the Jaimini-Siikhil also. 
 
 228-248. The editor points out that According to Edjendra Ldla Mitra 
 
 the Aranya-gdna is based upon the (Preface to Translation of Chhdnd. 
 
 drchika of the Naigeya text (I. c, p. Up., p. 4), 'the Kauthuma (-Sdkhd) 
 
 238), and that MSS. have probably is current in Guzerat, the Jaimi- 
 
 been preserved of its uttardrchika nlya in Karndtaka, and the Kdndya- 
 
 also (p. 241). — A London MS. of niya in Mahdrashtra.' 
 
 Bhavatasvdmin's Sdmavedavivarana E 
 
66 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 additional material, together with translation, -which we 
 owe to Professor Benfey, of Gottingen.*^ 
 
 Although, from its very nature, the Samhita of the 
 Samaveda is poor in data throwing light upon the time of 
 its origin, yet its remaining literature contains an ahun- 
 dance of these ; and first of all, the Brdhmanas. 
 
 The first and most important of these is the Tdndya 
 Brdhmaim, also called PanehaviMa, from its containing 
 twenty-five books. Its contents, it is true, are in the 
 main of a very dry and unprofitable character; for in 
 mystic trifling it often exceeds all bounds, as indeed it 
 was the adherents of the Samaveda generally who carried 
 matters furthest in this direction. Nevertheless, from its 
 great extent, this work contains a mass of highly interest- 
 ing legends, as well as of information generally. It refers 
 solely to the celebration of the Soma sacrifices, and to the 
 chanting of the sdmans accompanying it, which are quoted 
 by their technical names. These sacrifices were celebrated 
 in a great variety of ways ; there is one special classifica- 
 tion of them according as they extended over one day or 
 several, or finally over more than twelve days.*^ ^he 
 latter, called sattras, or sessions, could only be performed 
 by Brahmans, and that in considerable numbers, and might 
 last loo days, or even several years. In consequence of 
 the great variety of ceremonies thus involved, each bears 
 its own name, which is borrowed either from the object of 
 its celebration, or the sage who was the first to celebrate 
 it, or from other considerations. How far the order of the 
 Samhita is here observed has not yet been investigated, 
 
 '^ Recently a new edition, like- is said to be still in existence in 
 
 wise very meritorious, of the first Malabar ; see Kost, /. St., ix. 
 
 two hooks, the dgneyam and. the ain- 176. 
 
 dram parva, of the drchika (up to i. " To each Soma sacrifice belong 
 
 5. 2. 3. 10), has been published by several (four at least) preparatory 
 
 Satyavrata S^m^ramin, in the Bib- days ; these are not here taken into 
 
 liotheca IncUca (1871-74), accom- account. The above division refers 
 
 panied by the corresponding por- only to those days when Soma juice 
 
 tions ( prapdfialcas 1-12) of the is expressed, that is, to the suiyd 
 
 GeyagSlna, and the complete com- days. Soma sacrifices having only 
 
 mentary of S^yana, and other illus- one such day are called elcdha; those 
 
 trative matter. — The division of the with from two to twelve, ahina. 
 
 edmans into pa/mans is first men- Sattras lasting a whole year, or even 
 
 tioned by Piraskara, ii. 10 {adhyd- longer, arc called ayana. For the 
 
 yddin prdbr&ydd; rishimvJckdni bah- gutyd festival there are seven f unda- 
 
 vriclidndm, parvdni chhandogdndm). mental forms, eaXlei sarpjthd ; I. St., 
 
 A Ritvariabhitshya on the Siimaveda x. 352-355.' 
 
BRAHAIANAS OF THE SAMAN. 67 
 
 but in any case it would be a mistake to suppose that for 
 all the different sacrifices enumerated in the Brahmana 
 corresponding prayers exist in the Samhtta. On the con- 
 trary, the latter probably only exhibits the verses to be 
 chanted generally at all the Soma sacrifices; and the 
 Brahmana must be regarded as the supplement in. which 
 the modifications for the separate sacrifices are given, and 
 also for those which arose later. While, as we saw above 
 (p. 14), a combination of verses of the Eik for the pur- 
 pose of recitation bears the nfime Sastra, a similar selec- 
 tion of different sdmans united into a whole is usually 
 called uMha {slvach, to speak), stoma {>J stu, to praise), or 
 prishtha ( tj pracKh, to ask) ; and these in their turn, like 
 the Nostras, receive different appellations.^^ 
 
 Of special significance for the time of the composition 
 of the Tandya Brahmana are, on the one hand, the very 
 minute descriptions of the sacrifices on the Sarasvati and 
 Drishadvati; and, on the other, the Vratyastomas, 01 
 sacrifices by which Indians of Aryan origin, but not living 
 according to the Brahmanical system, obtained admission 
 to the Brahman community. The accounts of these latter 
 sacrifices are preceded by a description of the dress and 
 ' mode of life of those who are to offer them. " They drive 
 in open chariots of war, carry bows and lances, wear tur- 
 bans, robes bordered with red and having fluttering ends, 
 shoes, and sheepskins folded double; their leaders are 
 distinguished by brown robes and silver neck-ornaments ; 
 they pursue neither agriculture nor commerce ; their laws 
 are in a constant state of confusion ; they speak the same 
 language as those who have received Brahmanical conse- 
 cration, but nevertheless call what is easily spoken hard 
 to pronounce." This last statement probably refers to 
 
 6s 'Jt'lie term directly opposed to The simple recitation of the iastras 
 
 iastra is, rather, stoira. Prishtha by the Hotar and his companions 
 
 specially designates several stotras always comes after the chanting 
 
 belonging to the mid-day sacrifice, recitation of the same yerses by the 
 
 and forming, as it is expressed,, its TJdg^tar and his assistants (grahdya 
 
 " back ; " uktha is originally em- grihitaya stuvate 'tka ^ansati, Sat. 
 
 ployed as a synonym of iaslra, and viii. i. 3. 3). The differences of the 
 
 only at a later period in the mean- seven samsthds, or fundamental types 
 
 ing of sdman (I. St., xiii. 447) ; of the Soma sacrifice, rest mainly 
 
 stoma, lastly, is the name for the six, upon the varying number of the 
 
 seven, or more ground-forms of the ^aslras and ttoWas belonging to their 
 
 stotras, after which these latter are autyd days. See /. St., x. 353, ff., 
 
 formed for the purposes of chanting, ix. 229, 
 
68 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 prakritic, dialectic differences, to the assimilatioa of groups 
 of consonants, and similar changes peculiar to the Prakrit 
 vernaculars. Ttite great sacrifice of the Naimishiya-Eishis 
 is also mentioned, and the river Sudaman. Although we 
 have to conclude from these statements that commuiiica- 
 tion with the west, particularly with the non-Brahmanic 
 Aryans there, was stHl very active, and that therefore the 
 locality of the composition must be laid more towards the 
 west,^* stiU data are not wanting which point us to the 
 east. Thus, there is mention of Para Atnara, king of the 
 Kosalas ; of Trasadasyu Purukutsa, who is also named in 
 the Rik-Samhita ; further of Ifamin Sapya, king of the 
 Videiias (the Nimi of the epic) ; of Kurukshetra, Yamuna, 
 &c. The absence, however, of any allusion in the Tandya- 
 Brahmana either to the Kuiu-Panchalas or to the names 
 of their princes, as well as of any mention of Janaka, is 
 best accounted for by supposing a difference of locality. 
 Another possible, though less Kkely, explanation of the 
 fact would be to assume that this work was contemporary 
 with, or even anterior to, the flourishing epoch of the 
 kingdom of the Kuru-Panchalas. The other names quoted 
 therein seem also to belong to an earlier age than those of 
 the other Brahmanas, and to be associated, rather, with the 
 Rishi period. It is, moreover, a very significant fact that 
 scarcely any differences of opinion are stated to exist 
 amongst the various teachers. It is only against the 
 Kaushitakis that the field is taken with some acrimony ; 
 they are denoted as vr&tyas (apostates) and as yajudvakirva 
 (unfit to sacrifice). Lastly, the name attached to this 
 Brahmana,* viz., Tandya, is. mentioned in the Brahmana 
 of the White Yajus as that of a teacher ; so that, com- 
 bining all this, we may at least safely infer its priority to 
 the latter work.^s 
 
 ** The fact that the name of Chi- the other Siltras invariably quoting 
 
 traratha {etena vai Chitraratham Kd- it by ' tti iruteh.' 
 
 peyd aydjaycm . , . tasmdch Ckai- " The T!liidya-Br:thmana has been 
 
 traraihlndmekahTahatrapatir jdyate edited, together with Sdlyana's com- 
 
 'nvlamia iva dmtlyah, xz. 12, 5) mentary, in the Bwl. Ind. (1869-74), 
 
 occurs in the gana 'Sdjadanta' to by Anandachandra Yeddntav^!^ 
 
 Pan., ii. 2. 31, joined with the name At the time of the Bhilshika-Sdtra 
 
 Bithllka in a compound (Cfti«7'<iratfia- (see Kielhom, I. St., i. 421) it must 
 
 BdlUiham), is perhaps also to be still have been accentuated, and that 
 
 taken in this connection. in the same manner as the Sata- 
 
 * The first use of this designation, patha; in Kumdrilabhat^'s time, 
 
 it is true, only occurs in Littydyana, on the contrary (the last half of the 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE SAM AN. 69 
 
 The ShadvihSa-Brdhmana by its very name proclaims 
 itself a supplement to the Panchavin^a-Brahmana. It 
 forms, as it were, its twenty-sixth hooi:, although itself 
 consisting of several hooks. Sayana, when giving a sum- 
 mary of its contents at the commencement of his here 
 excellent commentary, says that it both treats of such 
 ceremonies as are not contained in the Panchavin^a-Brah- 
 mana, a,nd also gives points of divergence from the latter. 
 It is chiefly expiatory sacrifices and ceremonies of impre- 
 cation that we find in it, as also short, comprehensive 
 general rules. The fifth book (or sixth adhydya) has 
 quite a peculiar character of its own, and is also found as 
 a separate Brahmana under the name of Adbhuta-Brdh- 
 maria ; in the latter form, however, with some additions 
 at the end. It enumerates untoward occurrences of daily 
 life, omens and portents, along with the rites to be per- 
 formed to avert their evil consequences. These afford us 
 a deep insight into the condition of civilisation of the 
 period, which, as might have been expected, exhibits a 
 very advanced phase. The ceremonies first given are 
 those to be observed on the occurrence of vexatious events 
 generally; then come those for cases of sickness among 
 men. and cattle, of damaged crops, losses of precious things, 
 &c. ; those to be performed in the event of earthquakes, 
 of phenomena in the air and in the heavens, &c., of mar- 
 vellous appearances on altars and on the images of the 
 gods, of electric phenomena and the like, and of mis- 
 carriages.^^ This sort of superstition is elsewhere only 
 treated of in the Grihya-Siitras, or in the Paiiiishtas (sup- 
 plements) ; and this imparts to the last adhydya of the 
 Shadvin^a-Brahmana — as the remaining contents do to 
 the work generally — the appearance of belonging to a 
 very modern period. And, in accordance with this, we 
 find mention here made of Uddalaka Aruni, and other 
 teachers, whose names are altogether unknown to the 
 Panchavih^a-Brahmana. — A Slolca is cited in the course of 
 
 seventh century, according to Bur- ^^ The Adbhuta-Brtihniana has 
 
 nell), it was already being handed been published by myself, text with 
 
 down without accents, as in the pre- translation, - and explanatory notes, 
 
 sent day. See Mtiller, A. S. L., p. in Zwel vedische Texte iiber Omina 
 
 348 ; BumeU, S^maTidh£lna-Bi4h- und Portenta (1859). 
 mana, Preface, p. vi. 
 
70 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the work, in -whicli the four yiigas are still designated by 
 their more ancient names, and are connected with the 
 four lunar phases, to which they evidently owe their 
 origin, although all recollection of the fact had in later 
 times died out.^'^ This Sldka itself we are perhaps justified 
 in assigning to an earlier time than that o^Megasthenes, 
 who informs us of a fabulous division of the mundane 
 ages analogous to that given in the epic. But it does not 
 by any means follow that the Shadvin^a-Brahmana, in 
 which the Sldka is quoted, itself dates earlier than the 
 time of Megasthenes. 
 
 The third Brahmana of the Samaveda bears the special 
 title of ChMndogya-BrdhmaTm, although Chhandogya is 
 the common name for all Saman theologians. We, how- 
 ever, also find it quoted, by Samkara, in his commentary 
 on the Brahma- Siitra, as "Tdndindm iruti," that is to say, 
 under the same name that is ^iven to the Panchavin^a- 
 Brahmana. The two first adhydyas of this Brahmana are 
 stOl missing, and the last eight only are preserved, which 
 also bear the special title of Ghhdndogyopanishad. This 
 Brahmana is particularly distinguished by its rich store 
 of legends regarding the gradual development of Brah- 
 manical theology, and stands on much the same level as 
 the Yrihad-Aranyaka of the White Yajus with respect to 
 opinions, as well as date,. place, and the individuals men- 
 tioned. The absence in the Vrihad-Axanyaka, as in the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus generally, of any reference . 
 to the Naimi^iya-Rishis, might lead us to argue the pri- 
 ority of the Chhandogyopanishad to the Vrihad-Axanyaka. 
 Still, the mention in the Chhandogyopanishad of these, as 
 well as of the Mahavrishas and the Gandharas — the latter, 
 it is true, are set down as distant — ought perhaps only to 
 be taken as proof of a somewhat more western origin ; 
 whereas the Yrihad-Aranyaka belongs, as we shall here- 
 after see, to quite the eastern part of Hindustan. The 
 numerous animal fables, on the contrary, and the mention 
 of Mahida^a Aitareya, would sooner incline me to suppose 
 that the Chhandogyopanishad is more modern than the 
 Yrihad-Aranyaka. With regard to another allusion, in 
 
 ''' Dififerently Roth in his essay Die Lehre von den vier Weltallei-n 
 (Tiibingen, i860). 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE SAMAN. 71 
 
 itself of the greatest significance, it is more hazardous to 
 venture a conjecture : I mean the mention of Krishna 
 Pevakfputra, who is instructed by Ghora Angirasa. The 
 latter, and besides him (though not in connection with 
 him) Krishna Angirasa, are also mentioned in the Kau- 
 shitaki-Brahmana ; and supposing this Krishna Angirasa 
 to be identical with Krishna Devakiputra, the allusion to 
 him might perhaps rather be considered as a sign of priority 
 to the Vrihad-Aranyaka. StUl, assuming this identifica- 
 tion to be correct, due weight must be given to the fact 
 that the name has been altered here : instead of Angirasa, 
 he is called Devakiputra, a form of name for which we 
 find no analogy in any other Vedic writing excepting the 
 Van^as (genealogical tables) of the Vrihad-Aranyaka, and 
 which therefore belongs, at all events, to a tolerably late 
 period* The significance of this allusion for the under- 
 standing of the position of Krishna at a later period is 
 obvious. Here he is yet but a scholar, eager in the pur- 
 suit of knowledge, belonging perhaps to the military caste. 
 He certainly must have distinguished himself in some 
 way or other, however little we know of it, otherwise his 
 elevation to the rank of deity, brought about by external 
 circumstances, would be iaexplicable.®^ 
 
 The fact of the Chhandogyopanishad and the Vrihad- 
 Aranyaka having in common, the names Pravahana Jai- 
 vali, Ushasti Chakrayana, ^andilya, Satyakama Jabala, 
 Uddalaka>Aruni, ^vetaketu, and A^vapati, makes it clear 
 that they were as nearly as possible contemporary works ; 
 and this appears also from the generally complete identity 
 of the seventh book of the former with the corresponding 
 passages of the Vrihad-Aranyaka. What, however, is of 
 most significance, as tending to establish a late date for 
 
 * Compare also Pitn., iv. I. 159, mythical relations to Indra, &e., are 
 
 and the names Sambdputra, Bdnd- at the root of it; see /. St., xiii. 
 
 yaniputra, in the Sdma-Stitras ; aa 349, ff. The whole question, how- 
 
 also Kdtydyanlputra, Maitrdyanl- ever, is altogether vague. Krishna- 
 
 putra, Vdtsiputra, &c., among the worship proper, i.t., the sectarian 
 
 Buddhists. [On these metronymic worship of Krishna as the one God, 
 
 names in putra see /. St., iii. 157, probably attained its perfection 
 
 485,486; iv. 380, 435; V. 63, 64.] through the influence of Christi- 
 
 lis By what circumstances the elo- anity. See my paper, Krishna's 
 
 vatiou of Krishna to the rank of Oelurtsfest, p. 316, ff. (where also 
 
 deity was brought about is as yet are further particulars as to the name 
 
 obscure ; though unquestionably Devakl). 
 
72 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the Clihandogyopaiushad, is the voluminous literature, the 
 existence of which is presupposed by the enumeration at 
 the heginning of the ninth book. Even supposing this 
 ninth book to be a sort of supplement (the names of Sanat- 
 kumara and Skanda are not found elsewhere in Vedic 
 literature; Narada also is otherwise only mentioned in 
 the second part of the Aitareya-Brahmana*^), there still 
 remains the mention of the ' Atharvangirasas/ as well as of 
 the Itihasas and Puranas in the fifth book. Though we 
 are not at liberty here, any more than in the correspond- 
 ing passages of the Vrihad-Aranyaka, to understand by 
 these last the Itihasas and Puranas which have actually 
 come down to us, stUl we must look upon them as the 
 forerunners of these works, which, originating in the 
 legends and traditions connected with the songs of the 
 Rik, and with the forms of worship, gradually extended 
 their range, and embraced other subjects also, whether 
 drawn from real life, or of a mythical and legendary 
 character. Originally they found a place in the Brah- 
 manas, as well as in the other expository literature of the 
 Vedasj but at the time of this passage of the Chhan- 
 dogyopanishad they had possibly already in part attained 
 an independent form, although the commentaries,* as a 
 rule, only refer such expressions to passages in the Brah- 
 manas themselves. The Maha-Bharata contains, especially 
 in the first book, a few such Itihasas, still in a prose form ; 
 nevertheless, even these fragments so preserved to us be- 
 long, in respect both of style and of the conceptions they 
 embody, to a much later period than the similar passages 
 of the Brahmanas. They however sufi&ce, together with 
 the ilohas, gdthds, &c., quoted in the Brahmanas them- 
 selves, and with such works as the Barhaddaivata, to 
 bridge over for us the period of transition from legend to 
 epic poetry. 
 
 We meet, moreover, in the Chhandogyopanishad with 
 one of those legal cases which are so seldom mentioned in 
 Vedic literature, viz., the infliction of capital punishment 
 for (denied) theft, exactly corresponding to the severe 
 
 ^' And a few timeB in the Atharva- case, but Sftyan.i, Harisvimin, and 
 
 Sambitd, as also in the Yan^a of the Uvivedaganga in similar passages of 
 
 S^mavidhilna-Brilbmana. the Satapat^a-Brdhina;ia and Tait- 
 
 * Not ^amkara, it is true, in this tiriya-Arapyaka, 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE SAMAN. 73 
 
 enactments regarding it in Mann's code. Guilt or inno- 
 cence is determined by an ordeal, the carrying of a red- 
 hot axe ; this also is analogous to the decrees in Manu. 
 We find yet another connecting link with the state of 
 culture in Manu's time in a passage occurring also in the 
 Vrihad-Aranyaka, viz., the doctrine of the transmigration 
 of souls. We here meet with this doctrine for the first 
 time, and that in a tolerably complete form; in itself, 
 however, it must certainly be regarded as much more 
 ancient. The circumstance that the myth of the creation 
 in the fifth book is on the whole identical with that found 
 at the beginning of Manu, is perhaps to be explained by 
 regarding the latter as simply a direct imitation of the 
 former. The tenth book, the subject of which is the soul, 
 its seat in the body and its condition on leaving it, i.e., its 
 migration to the realm of Brahman, contains much that is 
 of interest in this respect in connection with the above- 
 mentioned parallel passage of the Kaushitaky-Upanishad, 
 from which it differs in some particulars. Here also for 
 the first time in the field of Vedic literature occurs the 
 name Eahu, which we may reckon among the proofs of 
 the comparatively recent date of the Chhandogyopanishad. 
 
 Of expressions for philosophical doctrines we find only 
 IPpanishad, Ade§a, Guhya Adeia (the keeping secret of doc- 
 trine is repeatedly and urgently inculcated), Updhhydna 
 (explanation). The teacher is called dchdrya [as he is 
 also in the ^at. Br.]; for "inhabited place," ardha is used; 
 single §loTcas and gdthds are very often quoted. 
 
 The Chhandogyopanishad has been edited by^Dr. Eoer 
 in the Bibliotheca Indica, vol. iii., along with Samkara's 
 commentary and a gloss on it.^" Fr. Windischmann had 
 previously given us several passages of it in the original, 
 and several in translation; see also I. St., i. 254-273. 
 
 The Kenopanishad has come down to us as the rem- 
 nant of a fourth Brahmana of the Samaveda, supposed to 
 be its ninth book.* In the colophons and in the quota- 
 tions found in the commentaries, it also bears the other- 
 
 '° In this series (1854-62) a trans- first eight hooks, ^amkara furnishes 
 
 lation also has been published by us with information in the begin- 
 
 Eijendra L^la Mitra. uing of his commentary. 
 
 * Regarding the contents of the 
 
74 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 wise unknown name of the Talavahdras.* It is divided 
 into two parts : the first, composed in Mokas, treats of the 
 being of the supreme Brahman, appealing in the fourth 
 verse to the tradition of the " earlier sages who have 
 taught us this" as its authority. The second part con- 
 tains a legend in support of the supremacy of Brahman, 
 and here we find Uma Haimavati, later the spouse of Siva, 
 acting as mediatrix between Brahman and the other gods, 
 probably because she is imagined to be identical with 
 Sarasvati, or Vach, the goddess of speech, of the creative 
 word.f 
 
 These are the extant Brahmanas of the Samaveda. 
 Sayana, indeed, in his commentary on the Samavidhana 
 enumerates eight (see Miiller, Rik L Pret p. xxvii) : the 
 Praudha- or Mahd-Brdhmana, {i.e., the PanchamMob), the 
 Shadvinia, the Sd/mavidhi, the Arsheya, the DevatMhydya, 
 the Upanishad, the Samhitopanishad, and the VwhAa. 
 The claims, however, of four of these works to the name of 
 Brahmana, have no solid foundation. The Arsheya is, as 
 already stated, merely an Anukramani, and the Devata- 
 dhyaya can hardly be said to be anything else ; the Van^a 
 elsewhere always constitutes a part of the Brahmanas 
 themselves : the two latter works, moreover, can scarcely 
 be supposed to be still in existence, which, as far as the 
 Van^a is concerned, is certainly very much to be regretted. 
 The Samavidhana also, which probably treats, like the 
 portion of the Latyayana-Siitra bearing the same name, of 
 the conversion of the rvihas into sdmans, can hardly pass 
 for a Brahmana.'^ As to the Samhitopanishad, it appears 
 
 * Might not this name be trace- an Anukramani, but only contains 
 
 able to the same root tdd, land, from some information as to the deities 
 
 which Tdndya is derived ? of the different sdmans, to which a 
 
 t On the literature, &c., of the few other short fragments are added. 
 
 Keuopanishad, see/. St., ii. i8l, ff. Finally, the Sdmavidhdna - Brdh- 
 
 [We have to add Roer's edition with mana does not treat of the conver- 
 
 Saipkara's commentary, in Biblio- sion of richas into sdmans ; on the 
 
 tlieca Indica, vol. viii., .ind his trans- contrary, it is a work similar to the 
 
 lation, ibid., vol. xv.] Rigvidhdua, and relates to the em- 
 
 '^ The above statements require ployment of the sdmans for all sorts, 
 
 to be corrected and supplemented of superstitious purposes. Both 
 
 in several particulars. The Vansa- texts have likewise been edited by 
 
 Brdhmana was first edited by myself Burnell, with Sdyana's commentaries 
 
 in /. St., iv. 371, ff., afterwards by (1873). By Kumitrila, too, the num- 
 
 Bnniell with Sayana's commentary ber of the Brdhmarias of the Sitma- 
 
 (1S73). 1''^ Devatddhyiiya is not veda is given as eight (Miiller, 
 
SUTRAS OF THE SAMAN. 75 
 
 to me doubtful whether Sayana meant by it the Keno- 
 panishad; for though the samhitd (universality) of the 
 Supreme Being certainly is discussed in the latter, the sub- 
 ject is not handled under this name, as would seem to be 
 demanded by the analogy of the title of the Samhitopa- 
 nishad of the Aitareya-Aranyaka as well as of the Taittiriya- 
 Aranyaka. My conjecture would be that he is far more 
 likely to have intended a work'^ of the same title, of which 
 there is a MS. in the British Museum (see I. St., i. 42) ; and 
 if so, all mention of the Kenopanishad has been omitted by 
 him ; possibly for the reason that it appears at the same 
 time in an Atharvan-recension (differing but little, it is 
 true), and may have been regarded by him as belonging to 
 the Atharvan ? 
 
 There is a far greater number of StUras to the Sama- 
 yeda than to any of the other Vedas. We have here three 
 Srauta-Siitras ; a Siitra which forms a running commen- 
 tary upon the Panchavin^a-Brahmana ; five Sutras on 
 Metres and on the conversion of richas into sdmans ; and 
 a Grihya-Siitra. To these must further be added other 
 similar works of which the titles only axe known to us, as 
 well as a great mass of different Pari^ishtas. 
 
 Of the Srauta-SMras, or Siitras treating of the sacrifi- 
 cial ritual, the first is that of Maiaka, which is cited in 
 the other Sama-Siitras, and even by the teachers men- 
 tioned in these, sometimes as Arsheya-Kalpa, sometimes 
 as Kal'pob, and once also by Ldtyayana directly under the 
 name of Ma^akaJ^ In the colophons it bears the name of 
 Kalpa-S'Atra. This Siitra is but a tabular enumeration of 
 the prayers belonging to the several ceremonies of the 
 Soma sacrifice ; and these are quoted partly by their tech- 
 nical Saman names, partly by their opening words. The 
 
 A. S. L., p. 348) ; in his time all of since this text appears there, as well 
 
 them were already without accents, as elsewhere, in cornection with the 
 
 One fact deserves to be specially Van,4a - Br^hmana, &c. It is not 
 
 noticed here, namely, that several much larger than the DevatddhySya, 
 
 of the teachers mentioned in the but has not yet been published ; see 
 
 Vansa - Brihmana, by their very /. 5i., iv. 375. 
 
 names, point us directly to the north- '' Lityiyana designates Masaka as 
 
 west of India, e.g., K^mboja Au- Gitrgya. Is this name connected 
 
 pamanyava, Madragstra ^aungdyani, with the 'H.d.aaa^a. of the Greeks? 
 
 Siti Aushtr^kshi, Sdlamkilyana, and Lassen, 7. AK., i. 130; I. St., iv 
 
 Kajihala ; see I. St., iv. 378-380. 78. 
 '2 This is unquestionably correct, 
 
76 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 order is exactly that of the Panchavin^a-Brahmana ; yet a 
 few other ceremonies are inserted, iacludiag those added 
 in the Shadvin^a-Brahmana, as well as others. Among 
 the latter the Janakasaptardtra deserves special notice, 
 — a ceremony owing its origin to King Jan aka,'^* of 
 ■whom, as we saw ahove, no mention is yet made in the 
 Panchavin^a-Brahmana. His life and notoriety therefore 
 evidently fall in the interval between the latter work 
 and the Sutra of Maiaka.— ^The eleven prwpdthdkas of this 
 Siitra are so distributed that the ekdhas (sacrifices of one 
 day) are dealt with in the first five chapters ; the aMnas 
 (those lasting several days) in the following four ; and the 
 sattras (sacrifices lasting more than twelve days) in the 
 last two. There is a commentary on it, composed by 
 Varadaraja, whom we shall meet with again as the com- 
 mentator of another Sama-Siitra. 
 
 The second Srauta-Siitra is that of Zdtydyana, which 
 belongs to the school of the Kauthumas. This name ap- 
 pears to me to point to Lata, the Aapiiaj of Ptolemy ,^^ to 
 a country therefore lying quite in the west, directly south 
 of Surashtra {"SvpaaTprivrj). This would agree perfectly 
 with the conjecture above stated, that the Panchavin^a- 
 Brahmana belongs more to the west of India ; and is borne 
 out by the data contained in the body of the Siitra itself, 
 as we shall see presently. 
 
 This Siitra, like that of Ma^aka, connects itself closely 
 with the Panchavin^a-Brahmana, and indeed often quotes 
 passages of some length from it, generally introducing 
 them by "tad uktam IrdJmianena;" or, "iti hrdhmanam hhwo- 
 ati; " once also by " tathd jpurdnam Tdndam." It usually 
 gives at the same time the different interpretations which 
 these passages received from various teachers, ^andilya, 
 Dhanamjayya, and SandUyayana are most frequently 
 mentioned in this manner, often together, or one after the 
 other, as expounders of the Panchavinia-Brahmana. The 
 first-named is already known to us through the Chhando- 
 gyopanishad, and he, as well as SandUyayana, is repeatedly 
 
 '■• Sdyana, it is true, to PaSoh. '^ Ldtika as early as the edicts of 
 xxii. 9. I, tslkea janaka as an ap- Piyadasi ; see Lassen, /, 4^., 1. 108 ; 
 pellative in the sense of prajdpati, ii. 793 n. 
 which is the reading of the PaSicha- 
 vin^a-BrdhmaQa, 
 
SUTRAS OF THE SAMAN. 77 
 
 mentioned also in another Siitra, the Mdana-Siitra; the 
 same is the case with Dhanamjayya. Besides these, how- 
 ever, Latyayana mentions a number of other teachers and 
 schools, as, for example, his own dchdryas, with especial 
 frequency ; the Arsheya-Kalpa, two different Gautamas, 
 one being distinguished by the surname Sthavira (a tech- 
 nical title, especially with the Buddhists); fiirther Sauchi- 
 vrikshi (a teacher known to Panini), Kshairakalambhi, 
 Kautsa, Varshaganya, Bhanditayana, Lamakayana, Eana- 
 yaniputra, &c. ; and in particular, the Satyayanins, and 
 their work, the Satyayanaka, together with the Salanka- 
 yanins, the latter of whom are well known to belong to 
 the western part of India. Such allusions occur in the 
 Siltra of Latyayana, as in the other Siitras of the Sama- 
 veda, much more frequently than in the Siitras of the 
 other Vedas, and are in my opinion evidence of their 
 priority to the latter. At the time of the former there 
 still existed manifold differences of opinion, while in that 
 of the latter a greater unity and fixedness of exegesis, of 
 dogma, and of worship had been attained. The remaining 
 data appear also to point to such a priority, unless we 
 have to explain them merely from the difference of loca- 
 lity. The condition of the Sddras, as well as of the Msha- 
 das, i.e., the Indian aborigiaes, does not here appear to be 
 one of such oppression and wretchedness as it afterwards 
 became. It was permitted to sojourn with them (Sandi- 
 lya, it is true, restricts this permission to " in the neigh- 
 bourhood of their grdmas"), and they themselves were 
 allowed to attend in person at the ceremonies, although 
 outside of the sacrificial ground. They are, moreover, now 
 and then represented, though for the most part in a mean 
 capacity, as taking an actual part on such occasions, which 
 is not to be thought of in later times. Toleration was 
 still a matter of necessity, for, as we likewise see, the 
 strict Brahmanical principle was not yet recognised even 
 among the neighbouring Aryan tribes. These, equally 
 with the Brahmanical Indians, held in high esteem the 
 songs and customs of their ancestors, and devoted to them 
 quite as much study as the Brahmanical Indians did ; nay, 
 the latter now and then directly resorted to the former, 
 and borrowed distinct ceremonies from them. This is 
 sufficiently clear from the particulars of one ceremony of the 
 
78 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 kind, which is embodied, not indeed in the Panchavliia- 
 Brahmana, hut in the Shadvin^a-Brahmana, and which is 
 descrihed at full length hy Latyayana. It is an imprecatory 
 ceremony (called iyeiia,, falcon); and this naturally sug- 
 gests the idea that the ceremonial of the Atharvan, which 
 is essentially based upon imprecations and magical expe- 
 dients, — as well as the songs of the Atharvan itself, — ^may 
 perhaps chiefly owe its cultivation to these western, non- 
 Braljnanical, Aryan tribes. The general name given to 
 these tribes by Latyayana (and with this Panini v. 2. 2i 
 agrees) is Vratinas, and he further draws a distinction 
 between their yaudhas, warriors, and their arTuints, 
 teachers. Their awiuchdnas, i.e., those versed in Scripture, 
 are to be chosen priests for the above-mentioned sacrifice. 
 Sandilya limits this to the arhants alone, which latter 
 word — subsequently, as is well known, employed exclu- 
 sively as a Buddhistic title — ^is also used in" the Brahmana 
 of the White Yajus, and in the Aranyaka of the Black 
 Yajus, to express a teacher in general. The turban and 
 garments of these priests should be red (lohita) according 
 to Shadvinia and Latyayana ; and we find the same colour 
 assigned to the sacrificial robes of the priests of the Ea- 
 kshasas in Lanka, in the Eamayana, vi. 19. no, 51. 21 ; 
 with which may be compared the light red, yellowish red 
 Qcashdya) garments of the Buddhists (see for instance 
 Mrichhakat., pp. 112, 114, ed. Stenzler; M.-Bhar., xii. 566, 
 1 1 898; Yajnav., i. 272), and the red (rakta) dress of the 
 Samkhyabhikshu * in the Laghujataka of Varaha-Mihira. 
 Now, that these western non-Brahmanical Vratyas, Vrati- 
 nas, were put precisely upon a par with the eastern non- 
 Brahmanical, i.e., Buddhistic, teachers, appears from an 
 addition which is given by Latyayana to the description 
 of the Vratyastomas as found in the Panchavinla-Brah- 
 mana. We are there told that the converted Vratyas, i.e., 
 those who have entered into the Brahman community, 
 must, in order to cut off all connection with their past, 
 hand over their wealth to those of their companions who 
 stOl abide by the old mode of life — ^thereby transferring to 
 these their own former impurity — or else, to a " Brahma- 
 
 * According to the commentary; or should this be &Lh/abhi}:Jiu ? 
 See /. St., ii. 287. 
 
SUTRAS OF THE SAM AN. 79 
 
 bandhu Magadhade^iya." This latter expression is only 
 explicable if we assume tliat Buddhism, -with its anti- 
 Brahmanical tendencies, was at the time flourishing in 
 Magadha; and the absence of any such allusion in the 
 Panchavih^a-Brahmana is significant as to the time which 
 elapsed between this work and the Siitra of Latyayana * 
 
 The first seven prapdthakas of the Latyayana-Siitra 
 comprise the rules common to all Soma sacrifices; the 
 eighth and part of the ninth book treat, on the contrary, 
 of the separate eJcdhas ; the remainder of the ninth book, 
 of the ahinas; and the tenth, of the sattras. We have 
 an excellent commentary on it by Agnisvamia,^^ who be- 
 longs probably to the same period as the other commen- 
 tators whose names terminate in svdmin, as Bhavasvamin, 
 Bharatasvamin, DhTirtasvdmin, Harisvamin, Khadirasva- 
 miri, Meghasvamin, Skandasvamin, Kshirasvamin, &c. ; 
 their time, however, is as yet undetermined.^^ 
 
 The third Sama- Siitra, that of Drdhydyana,, differs but 
 slightly from the Latyayana- Sdtr a. It belongs to the 
 school of the Eanayanlyas. "We meet with the name of 
 these latter in the Eanayaniputra of Latyayana; his 
 family is descended from Vasishtha, for which reason this 
 Sutra is also directly called Vdsishtha-S'Aira. For the 
 name Drahyayana nothing analogous can be adduced;^* 
 The difference between this Siitra and that of Latyayana 
 
 * In the Rik-Saiphit^, where the bitants regarding it as a means of 
 B^ataa — the ancient name of the recovering their old position though 
 people of Magadha — and their king under a new form. 
 Pramagamda are mentioned as hos- '^ We now poasees in the Sibl. 
 tile, we have probably to think of Indica (1870-72) an edition of the 
 the aborigines, of the country, and L^tySiyana-Sritra, with Agnisv^miu's 
 not of hostile Aryas (?). It seems not commentary, by Auandachandra 
 impossible that the native iuhabi- VedfotavSgiia. 
 tants, being particularly vigorous, ^^ We find quite a cluster of Brah- 
 retained more influence in Magadha man names in -svdmin in an inscrip- 
 than elsewhere, even after the ooun- tiou dated ^^ka 627 in Journal Bom- 
 try had been brahmanised, — a pro- iay Branch R. A. S., ill. 208 (iSjl), 
 cess which perhaps was never com- and in an undated inscription in 
 pletely effected ; — ^that they joined Journal Am. Or. Soc, vi. 589. 
 the community of the Brahmans as '* It first occurs in the Van^a- 
 Kshatriyas, as happened elsewhere Br^hmana, whose first list of teach- 
 also ; and that this is how we have ers probably refers to this very 
 to account for the special sympathy school ; see /. St., iv. 378 : dralia 
 and success which Buddhism met is said to be a Pr^rit corruption of 
 with in Magadha, these native inha- hrada ; see Hem. Pr^kr., ii. 80, 120. 
 
So VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 is mainly confined to the different distribution of the 
 matter, which is on the whole identical, and even ex- 
 pressed in the same words. I have not yet met with a 
 complete codex of the whole work, but only with its begin- 
 ning and its end, in two different commentaries, the date 
 of which it is not yet possible to determine — the begin- 
 ning, namely, in Maghasvamin's commentary, remodelled 
 by Eudraskanda ; the end in the excellent conunentary of 
 Dhanvin. 
 
 The only knowledge I have of a Srauta-Siitra by Go- 
 blula is derived from a notice of Eoth's {ap. c, pp. 55, 56), 
 according to which EIrityachintamani is said to have com- 
 posed a commentary upon it.'* 
 
 In a far more important degree than he differs from 
 Drahyayana does Latyayana differ, on the one hand, from 
 Katyayana, who in his Srauta-Siitra, belonging to the 
 White Yajus, treats in books 22-24 of the ekdhas, aMnas, 
 and sattras; and ^ on the other, from the Rik-Siitras of 
 Aivalayana and Sankhayana, which likewise deal with 
 these subjects in their proper place. In these there is no 
 longer any question of differences of opinion ; the stricter 
 view represented by Sandilya in the I^tyayana-Siitra has 
 everywhere triumphed. The ceremonies on the Sarasvatl 
 and the Vratyastomas have also become, in a local sense 
 too, further removed from actual life, as appears both from 
 the slight consideration with which they are treated, and 
 from modifications of names, &c., which show a forgetting 
 of the original form. Many of the ceremonies discussed 
 in the Sama-Siitras are, moreover, entirely wanting in the 
 Sutras of the other Vedas ; and those which are found in 
 the latter are enumerated in tabular fashion rather than 
 fully discussed — a difference which naturally originated 
 in the diversity of purpose, the subject of the Siitra of the 
 Yajus being the duties of the Adhvaryu, and that of the 
 Sutras of the Rik the duties of the Hotar. 
 
 A fourth Sama-Siitra is the Anupada-SMra, in ten 
 prapdthakas, the work of an unknown author. It explains 
 
 " The name ' Krityachintdmani ' on a Srauta-Siitra of Gobhila re- 
 
 probably belongs to the work itself ; mains doubtful in the meantime, 
 
 compare /. St., i. 60, ii. 396 ; Auf- since such a work is not mentioned 
 
 recht, Catalogus, p. 365*; but elsewhere, 
 whether it really was a commentary 
 
SUrJiAS OF THE SAMAN. 8i 
 
 the obscure passages of the Panchavin^a-Brahmana, and, 
 it would appear, of the Shadviii^a-Brahmana also, accom- 
 panying the text step by step. It has not as yet been 
 closely examined ; but it promises to prove a rich mine of 
 material for the history of Brahmanical theology, as it 
 makes mention of, and appeals to, an extremely large 
 number of different works. For example, of schools of 
 the Rik, it cites the Aitareyins, the Paingins, the Kaushl- 
 taka ; of schools ^of the Yajus, the Adhvaryus in gene- 
 ral ; further, the Satyayanins, Khadayanins, the^ Taittirf- 
 yas, the Kathaka, the Kalabavins, Bhallavins, Sambuvis, 
 Vajasaneyins ; and frequently also iruti, smriti, dchdryas, 
 &c. It is a work which deserves to be very thoroughly 
 studied.®* 
 
 While the above-named four Siitras of the Samaveda 
 specially attach themselves to the Panchavii^a-Brahmana, 
 the Siitras now to be mentioned stand out more indepen- 
 dently beside the latter, although of course, in part at 
 least, often referring to it. In the first place, we have to 
 mention the Ifiddna-Siitra, which contains in ten pra- 
 jpdthakas metrical and other similar investigations on the 
 different ukthas, stomas, and gdnas. The name of the 
 author is not given. The word niddna, 'root,' is used 
 with reference to metre in the Brahmana of the "White 
 Yajus ;^ and though in the two instances where the 
 Naidanas are mentioned by Yaska, their activity appears 
 to have been directed less to the study of metre than to 
 that of roots, etymology, still the Mdanasamjnaka Grantha 
 is found cited in the Bnhaddevata, 5. S, either directly as 
 the Sruti of the Chhandogas, or at least as containing 
 their Sruti.* This Siitra is especially remarkable for the 
 great number of Vedic schools and teachers whose various 
 opinions it adduces ; and in this respect it stands on pretty 
 much the same level as the Anupada-Sutra. It differs 
 from it, however, by its particularly frequent quotation 
 
 ^" Unfortunately we do not even or yo vd atrd 'gnir gdyatH sa nidd- 
 
 now know of more than one MS. ; nena). 
 
 see /. St., i. 43. * Niddna, in the sense of 'cause, 
 
 81 This is wrong; on the con- foundation,' is a favourite word in 
 
 trary, the word has quite a general the Buddhistic Sutras ; see Burnouf, 
 
 meaning in the passages in question Jntrod. d, VHisloire du Buddhisme 
 
 {e.g., in gdyatrl id eshd niddnena, Indim, pp. 59, ff., 484, ff. 
 
 F 
 
82 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 also of the views of the Saman theologians named by Latya- 
 yana and Drahyayana, viz., Dhanamjayya, Sandilya, Sau- 
 chivrikshi, &c. — a thing which seldom or never occurs 
 in the former. The animosity to the KaushitaMs, with 
 which we have already become acquainted in the Pancha- 
 vitila-Brahmana, is here again ejdiibited most vividly in 
 some words attributed to Dhanamjayya. With regard to 
 the Rigveda, the daSatayi division into ten mavdalas is 
 mentioned, as in Yaska. The allusion to the Atharva- 
 nikas, as well as to the Anubrahmanins, is particularly to 
 be remarked ; the latter peculiar name is not met with 
 elsewhere, except in Panini. A special study of this 
 Sitra is also much to be desired, as it likewise promises 
 to open up a wealth of information regarding the condi- 
 tion of literature at that period.^^ 
 
 Not much information of this sort is to be expected 
 from the Pushpa-S'iitra of Grobhila,* which has to be 
 named along with the E"idana-Sutra. The understanding 
 of this Siitra is, moreover, obstructed by many difficulties. 
 For not only does it cite the technical names of the 
 s&mans, as well as other words, in a very curtailed form, 
 it also makes use of a number of grammatical and other 
 technical terms, which, although often agreeing with the 
 corresponding ones in the Pratilakhya-Siitras, are yet also 
 often formed in quite a peculiar fashion, here and there, 
 indeed, quite after the algebraic type so favoured by 
 Panini. This is particularly the case in the first four 
 prapdthakas ; and it is precisely for these that, up to the 
 present time at least, no commentary has been found; 
 whereas for the remaining six we possess a very good 
 commentary by Upadhyaya Ajatalatru.t The work 
 treats of the modes in which the separate richas, by various 
 insertions, &c., are transformed into sdmans, or " made to 
 blossom," as it were, which is evidently the origin of the 
 name Pushpa-Siitra, or " Plower-Siitra." In addition to 
 
 '^ See /. St., i. 44, S. ; the first * So, at least, the author is called 
 
 two patalas, which have special re- in the colophons of two chapters in 
 
 ference to metre, have been edited MS. Chambers 220 [Catalogue of 
 
 and translated by me in /. St., viii. the Berlin MSS., p. 76]. 
 
 85-124. For Anubr(S,hmanin, °na, + Composed for his pupil, Vish- 
 see also A^v. &T., ii. 8. 1 1, and Sohol. 
 on T. S., i. 8. I. I. 
 
SUTRAS OF THE SAMAN. 83 
 
 the Pravacliaiia, i.e. (according to the commentary), Brah- 
 mana, of the Kalabavins and that of the ^tyayanins, I 
 found, on a cursory inspection, mention also of the Kau- 
 thumas. This is the first time that their name appears in 
 a work connected with Vedic literature. Some portions 
 of the work, particularly in the last books, are composed 
 in ilohas, and we have, doubtless, to regard it as a com- 
 pilation of pieces belonging to different. periods.^ In close 
 connection with it stands the S&ma-Tantra, coinposed in 
 the same maimer, and equally, unintelligible without a 
 commentary. It treats, in thirteen prapdphakas, of accent 
 and the accentuation of the separate verses. A commen- 
 tary on it is indeed extant, but at present only in a frag- 
 mentary form. At its close the work is denoted as the 
 vydkarana, grammar, of the Saman theologians.^ 
 
 Several other Sutras also treat of the conversion of 
 riclias into s&mans, &,g. One of these, the Panchavidhi- 
 S^tra (Pdnchavidhya, PaHehamdheyd), is only known to 
 me from quotations, according to which, as well as from 
 its name, it 'treats of the five different vidhis (modes) by 
 which" this process is effected. Upon a second, the Prati- 
 hdra-SiJutra, which is ascribed to Katyayana, a commentary 
 called ZJaiatoyi was composed by.Varadaraja, the above- 
 mentioned commentator of Ma^aka. It treats of the 
 aforesaid five vidhis, with particular regard to the one 
 called pratihdra. The Tariddlakshana, - SiMra is only 
 known to me by name, as also the tlpagrantha^S^tra* 
 both of which, with the two other works just named, are, 
 according to the catalogue, found in the Fort-William 
 
 83 In Dekhan MSS. the work is tram,' by which he explains the 
 called PhuUa-^Airsu, and is ascribed word uJethdrtha, which, according to 
 to Vararuchi, not to Gobhila ; see the Mahjtbhfehya, is at the fouuda- 
 Bumell, Catalogue, pp. 45, 46. On tion of aukthika, whose formation is 
 this and other points of difference, taught by Pinini himself (iv. 2. 60); 
 see my paper, Veber das SaptaiatOr see /. St,, xiii. 447. According to 
 kam des Hdla (1870), pp. 258, - 259. this it certainly seems very doubtful 
 I now possess a copy of the text and whether the • Silcialakshana men- 
 commentary, but have nothing of tioned by Kaiyata is to be identified 
 consequence to add to the above re- with the extant work bearing the 
 marks. same name. 
 
 ^ See also BurneU, Catalogiie, * Shadguru£shya, in the intro- 
 
 pp. 40, 41. — Ibid., p. 44, we find a duction to his commentary on the 
 
 ' Svaraparibhiishii, or Sdmalakshana,' Anukramani of the Rik, describes 
 
 specified. Kaiyata also mentions a Kdtydyana as ' upagranihaaya kd- 
 
 ' idmalahaha^am prdtiidhhyarri, ids- raka.' 
 
84 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 collection of MSS. By the anonymous transcriber of the 
 Berlin MS. of the Ma^aka-Stoa, who is of course a very 
 weak authority, ten ^ranta-Siitras for the Samaveda are 
 enumerated at the close of the MS., viz., besides Latyayana, 
 Anupada, Nidana, Kalpa, Tandalakshana, Panchavidheya, 
 and the Upagranthas, also the Kalpdnii^ada, Amistotra, 
 and the Kshvdras. What m to be understood by the three 
 last names must for the present remain undecided.^ 
 
 The Grihycp-MitTa of the Samaveda belongs to GobhUa, 
 the same to whom we also found a Srauta-Siitra and the 
 Pushpa-Siitra ascribed.^ His name has a very unvedic 
 ring, and nothing in any way coresponding to it appears 
 in the rest of Tedic literature.*^ In what relation this 
 work, drawn up in four prapdthakas, stands to the Grihya- 
 Sutras of the remaining Vedas has not yet been investi- 
 gated.^ A supplement (jpariiishta) to it is the Karma- 
 jrradipa of Katyayana. In its introductory words it ex- 
 pressly acknowledges itself to be such a supplement to 
 Gobhila ; but it has also been regarded both as a second 
 Grihya-Siitra and as a Smriti-Sastra. According to the 
 statement of Aiarka, the commentator of this Karma- 
 pradipa, the Grihya-Sutra of Gobhila is authoritative for 
 both the schools of the Samaveda, the Kanthumas as well 
 as the Eanayaniyas.,* — Is the EMdira-Grihya, which is 
 now and then mentioned, also to be classed with the 
 Samaveda ? ^ 
 
 '^ On the Panchavidhi-S^tra and drak^nta Tarkdlaipkilra, has been 
 
 the Kalpinupada, each in two pra- commenced ill the Bibl. Indica 
 
 pdthdkag, and the Kshaudra, in (1871) ; Wie fourth /oscicrtZtM (1873) 
 
 three prajidthdkas, seeyia^ieT, A. S. reaches to ii. 8. 12. See the sections 
 
 L., p. 210 ; Aufrecht, Catalogiig, p. relating to nuptial ceremonies in 
 
 377*. The Upagrantha-Stitra treats Haas's paper, /. St., v. 283, ff. 
 
 of expiations, prdyaichiUas, see Ed- * Among the authors of the 
 
 jendra L. M., Notices of Sanskrit Smriti-S^tras a Kuthiuni is also 
 
 MSS., ii. 182. mentioned. 
 
 ^* To him is also ascribed a Nai- *' Certainly. In Bumell's Cata- 
 
 geya-SAtra, "a description of the Zo^e, p^ 56, the Brihy^yana-Qrihya- 
 
 Metres of the Sdmaveda," see Colin Sfitra (in four patalas) is attributed 
 
 Browning, Catalogue of Sanskrit to Khddira. Budraskandasyimia 
 
 MSS. existing in Oude (1873), p. 4. composed a vritti on this work 
 
 '' A list of teachers belonging to also (see p. 80) ; and Vdmana is 
 
 the Gobhila school is contained in named as the author of 'kdrikds to 
 
 the Van^a-BrShmana. the Grihya -Sutras of Khddira,' Bur- 
 
 *' An edition of the Gobhila- nell, p. 57. To the Grihya-Stitras 
 
 Grihya-Slitra, with a very diffuse of the Sdmaveda probably belong 
 
 commentary by the editor, Chan- also Gautama's Pitrimedlia-S'Ura 
 
YAJURVEDA. 85 
 
 As representative of the last stage of the literature of 
 the_ Samayeda, we may specify, on the one hand, the 
 various Paddhatis (outlines) and commentaries, &c., which 
 connect themselves with the Siitras, and serve as an ex- 
 planation and further development of them ; and, on the 
 other, that peculiar class of short treatises bearing the 
 name of Pariiishtas, which are of a somewhat more inde- 
 pendent character than the former, and are to be looked 
 upon more as supplements to the Siitras* Among these, 
 the already mentioned Arsha, and Daivata — enumerations 
 of the Eishis and deities — of the Samhita in the Naigeya- 
 Sakha deserve prominent notice. Both of these treatises 
 refer throughout to a comparatively ancient tradition; 
 for example, to the Nairuktas, headed by Yaska and ^aka- 
 pdni, to the Naighantukas, to ^aunaka (i.e., probably to 
 his Anukramani of the Eik), to their ^own Brahmana, to 
 Aitareya and the Aitareyins, to the Satapathikas, to the 
 Pravachana Kathaka, and to A^valayana The Ddlbhya- 
 Pariiishta ought probably also to be mentioned here ; it 
 bears the name of an individual who appears several times 
 in the Chhandogyopanishad, but particularly often in the 
 Puranas, as one of the sages who conduct thie dialogue. 
 
 The Yajurveda, to which we now turn, is distinguished 
 above the other Vedas by the great number of different 
 schools which belong to it. Tins is at once a consequence 
 and a proof of the fact that it became pre-eminently the 
 subject of study, inasmuch as it contains the formulas for 
 the entire sacrificial ceremonial, and indeed forms its 
 
 (cf. Burnell, p. 57 ; the commenta- tary on the Grihya-Sdtra of the 
 
 tor Anantayajvan identifies the au- White Yajus, several times asoribes 
 
 thor with AkshapSida, the author of their authorship to a Kittyiyana 
 
 the NySya-Slitra), and the Oautama- (India OfEoe Library, No. 440, fol. 
 
 Z)A(irma-Siitra; see the section treat- 52*, S6», 58*, &c.); or do these quo- 
 
 ing of the legal literature. tations only refer to the above- 
 
 * Kstmakfishna, in his commen- named Karmapradipa? 
 
86 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 proper foundation; -whilst the Rigveda prominently, and 
 the Samaveda exclusively, devote themselves to a part of 
 it only, viz., to the Soma sacrifice. The Tajurveda divides 
 itself, in the first place, into two parts, the Blcuik and the 
 WhiU Yajus. These, upon the whole, indeed, have their 
 matter in common ; hut they differ fundamentally from 
 each other as regards its arrangement. In the Samhita of 
 the Black Tajus the sacrificial formulas are for the most 
 part immediately followed hy their dogmatic explanation, 
 &c., and by an account of the ceremonial belonging to 
 them ; the portion bearing the name of Brahmana differing 
 only in point of time from this Samhitd,, to which it must 
 be viewed as a supplement. In the White Yajus, on the 
 contrary, the sacrificial formulas, and their explanation 
 and ritual, are entirely separated from one another, the 
 first being assigned to the Samhita, and their explanation 
 and ritual to the Brahmana, as is also the case in the Rig- 
 veda and the Samaveda. A further difference apparently 
 consists in the fact that in the Black Yajus very great 
 attention is paid to the Hotar and his duties, which in the 
 White Yajus is of rare occurrence. By the nature of the 
 case in such matters, what is undigested is to be regarded as 
 the commencement, as the earlier stage, and what exhibits 
 method as the later stage ; and this view will be found to 
 be correct in the present instance. As each Yajus pos- 
 sesses an entirely independent literature, we must deal 
 with each separately. 
 
 First, of the Black Yajus. The data thus far known to 
 us concerning it open up such extensive literary perspec- 
 tives, but withal in such a meagre way, that investigation 
 has, up to the present time, been less able to attain to 
 approximately satisfactory results* than in any other field. 
 In the first place, the name " Black Yajus " belongs only 
 to a later period, and probably arose in contradistinction 
 to that of the White Yajus. While the theologians of the 
 Rik are called Bahvrichas, and those of the Saman Chhan- 
 dogas, the old name for the theologians of the Yajus is 
 Adhvaryus ; and, indeed, these three names are already so 
 
 * See /. St., i. 68, ff. [All the been published ; Bee the ensuing 
 texts, with the exception of the notes.] 
 Slitras relating to ritual, have now 
 
THE BLACK YAJUS. 87 
 
 employed in the Samhita of the Black Yajus and the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus. In the latter work the 
 designation Adhvaryus is applied to its own adherents, 
 and the Charakadhvaryus are denoted and censured as 
 their adversaries — an enmity which is also apparent in a 
 passage of the Samhita of the White Yajus, where the 
 Charakacharya, as one of the persons to he dedicated at 
 the Purushamedha, is devoted to Dushkrita, or "III deed." 
 This is all the more strange, as the term charaht is other- 
 wise always used in a good sense, for " travelling scholar ; " 
 as is also the root char, " to wander about for instruction." 
 The explanation probably consists simply in the fact that 
 the name Charakas is also, on the other hand, applied to 
 one of the principal schools of the Black Yajus, whence 
 we have to assume that there was a direct enmity between 
 these and the adherents of the White Yajus who arose in 
 opposition to them — a hostility similarly manifested in 
 other cases of the kind. A second name for the Black 
 Yajus is " Taittiriya," of which no earlier appearance can 
 be traced than that in its own Prati^akhya-Siitra, and in 
 the Sama-Sdtras. Panini* connects this name with a 
 Rishi called Tittiri, and so does the Anukramani to the 
 A.treya school, which we shall have frequent occasion to 
 mention in the sequel. Later legends, on the contrary, 
 refer it to the transformation of the pupils of Vailampa- 
 yana into partridges {tittiri), in order to pick up the yajiis- 
 verses disgorged by one of their companions who was 
 wroth with his teacher. However absurd this legend may 
 be, a certain amount of sense yet lurks beneath its sur- 
 face. The Black Yajus is, in fact, a motley, undigested 
 jumble of different pieces ; and I am myself more inclined 
 to derive the name Taittiriya from the variegated par- 
 tridge (tittiri) than from the Rishi Tittiri ; just as another 
 name of one of the principal schools of the Black Yajus, 
 that of the Khandikiyas, probably owes its formation to 
 
 * The rule referred to (iv. 3. 102) however, is several times mentioned 
 
 is, according to the statement of in the Bhiishya, see /. St., xiii. 442, 
 
 the Calcutta scholiast, not explained which is also acquainted with 'Tit- 
 
 in Patamjali's Bhiishya; possibly, tirirui prolctdh Uokdh,' not helou^mg 
 
 therefore, it may not be Pdnini's at to the Chhandas, see /. St., v. 41 ; 
 
 all, but may be later than Pataip- Goldstiicker, Pdnmi, p. 243.] 
 jali. [The name Taittiriya itself. 
 
88 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 this very fact of the Black Yajus being made up of 
 khwndas, fragments, althougli Panini,* as in the case of 
 Taittiriya, traces it to a Rishi of the name of Khandika, 
 and although we do really meet with a Khandika (Aud- 
 hhari) in the Brahmana of the White Yajus (xi. 8. 4. i). 
 
 Of the many schools which are allotted to the Black' 
 Yajus, aU probably did not extend to Samhita and Brah- 
 mana ; some probably embraced the Siitras only.f Thus 
 far, at least, only three different recensions of the Samhita 
 are directly known to us, two of them in the text itself, 
 the third merely from an Anukramanl of the text. The 
 two iirst are the TaittiHya-Samhitd, kut e^oj^v so called, 
 which is ascribed to the school of Apastamba, a subdivision 
 of the Khandifcfyas ; and the K&tJuika, which belongs to 
 the school of the Charakas, and that particular subdivision 
 of it which bears the name of Charayaniyas.J The Sam- 
 hita, &c., of the Atreya school, a subdivision of the Au- 
 khiyas, is only known to us by its Anukramani ; it agrees 
 in essentials with that of Apastamba, This is not the 
 case with the Kathaka, which stands on a more indepen- 
 dent footing, and occupies a kind of intermediate position 
 between the Black and the White Yajus, agreeing fre- 
 quently with the latter as to the readings, and with the 
 former in the arrangement of the matter. The Kathaka, 
 together with the Hdridravika — a lost work, which, how- 
 ever. Likewise certainly belonged to the Black Yajus, viz., 
 to the school of the Haridraviyas, a subdivision of the 
 Maitrayaniyas — ^is the only work of the Brahmana order 
 mentioned by name in Yaska's Nirukta. Panini, too, 
 makes direct reference to it in a rule, and it is further 
 alluded to in the Anupada-Siitra and Brihaddevata. The 
 name of the Kathas does not appear in other Vedie 
 writings, nor does that of Apastamba.§ 
 
 • The rule is the same as that for thala-Kathas ; tlie epithet of these 
 
 Tittiri. The remark in the previous last is found in Pdnini (viii. 3. 91), 
 
 note, therefore, applies here also. and Megasthenes mentions the 
 
 t As is likewise the case with the Ea/i/3£o'daXo( as a people in the Pan- 
 other Vedas. ]&h — lu the Fort- William Catalogue 
 
 X Besides the text, we have also a Kapish^hala-Saiphitd is mentioned 
 
 a Rishyanukramani for it. [see /. St., xiii. 375, 439. — At the 
 
 § In later writings several Kaphas time of the Mahftbhdshya J^he posi- 
 
 are distinguished, the Kathas, the tion of the Kaphas must have been 
 
 Friichya-Kathas, and the Kapish- one uf great consideration, since 
 
SAMHITAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 89 
 
 The Samhita of the Apastamba school consists of seven 
 books (called ashtahas !) ; these again are divided into 44 
 prahias, 651 anuvdkas, and 2198 kandikdSithe latter being 
 separated from one another on the principle of an equal 
 number of syllables to each.* Nothing definite can be ascer- 
 tained as to the extent of the Atreya recension ; it is like- 
 wise divided into kdndas, praJnas, and anuvdkas, the first 
 words of which coincide mostly with those of the corre- 
 sponding sections of the Apastamba school. The Kathaka 
 is quite differently divided, and consists of five parts, of 
 which the three first are in their turn divided into forty 
 sthdnakas, and a multitude of small sections (also pro- 
 bably separated according to the number of words); while 
 the fourth merely specifies the richas to be sung by the 
 Hotar, and the fifth contains the formulas belonging to the 
 horse-sacrifice. In the colophons to the three first parts, 
 the Charaka-Sakha is called Ithimikd', Madhyamihd, and 
 Orimikd, respectively: the first and last of these three 
 appellations are still unexplained.*^ The Brahmana por- 
 tion in these works is extremely meagre as regards the 
 ritual, and gives but an imperfect picture of it ; it is, how- 
 ever, peculiarly rich in legends of a mythological cha- 
 racter. The sacrificial formulas themselves are on the 
 whole the same as those contained in the Samhita of the 
 White Yajus; but the order is different, although the 
 
 tjjey — and their text, the Kdthaka constitutes the norm; fifty words, 
 
 are repeatedly mentioned ; see as a rule, form a kandikA; see I. St., 
 
 I. St., xiii. 437, £f. The founder of xi. 13, xii. 90, xiii. 97-99. — Instead 
 
 their school, Katha, appears in the of ashtaha, we find also the more 
 
 Mahiibhilshya as Vai&mp^yana'a correct name Jcdn^a, and instead of 
 
 pupil, and the Kathas themselves praina, which is peculiar to the 
 
 appear in close connection with the Taittiriya texts, the generally em- 
 
 K^Mpas and Kauthumas, both ployed term, prapdthaka; see /. St., 
 
 schools of the Sdman. IntheR^mi- xi. 13, 124.— TheTaitt. Brihm. and 
 
 yana, too, the Katha-Kiiliipas are the Taitt. Ar., are also subdivided 
 
 mentioned as being much esteemed into kandijcds, and these again into 
 
 in AyodhySt (ii. 32. 18, Sohlegel). very small sections; but the princi- 
 
 Haradatta's statement, " Bahvrickd- pie of these divisions has not yet 
 
 nam apyasti Kathaidkhd" (Bhattoji's been clearly ascertained. 
 
 Siddh. Kaum. e'd. Tir^ndtha (1865), "' Ithimiki is-to be derived from 
 
 vol. ii. p. 524, on Pdn., vii. 4. 38), heUhima{iiomhettkd,i.e.,adhastdt), 
 
 probably rests upon some misunder- and Orimikit from uvarima (from 
 
 standing ; see /. St., xiii. 438.] upari) ; see my paper, Ud>er die Bha- 
 
 5° It is not the number of sylla- gavati der Jaina, i. 404, n. 
 bias, but the number of words, that 
 
90 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 order of the ceremonial to which they belong is pretty 
 much the same. There are also many discrepancies with 
 regard to the words ; we may instance, in particular, the 
 expansion of the semi-vowels v and y after a consonant 
 into iiv and iy, which is peculiar to the Apastamba 
 schooL^^ As to data, geographical or historical, &c. (here, 
 of course, I can only speak of the Apastamba school and 
 the Kathaka), in consequence of the identity of matter 
 these are essentially the same as those which meet us in 
 the Samhita of the White Tajus. ( In the latter, however, 
 they are more numerous, formulas being also found here 
 for ceremonies which are not known in the former — ^the 
 pwrushanudha, for instance.) Now these data — to which 
 we must add some other scattered allusions * in the por- 
 tions bearing the character of a Brahmana — carry us back, 
 as we shall see, to the flourishing epoch of the Imigdom of 
 the Kuru-Panchalas,®* in which district we must there- 
 fore recognise the place of origin of both works. Whether 
 this also holds good of their final redaction is another 
 question, the answer to which, as far as the Apastamba- 
 Samhita is concerned, naturally depends upon the amount 
 of influence in its arrangement to be ascribed to Apa- 
 stamba, whose name it bears. The Kathaka, according to 
 what has been stated above, appears to have existed as an 
 entirely finished work even in Yaska's time, since he 
 quotes it; the Anukramanf of the Atreya school, on the 
 contrary, makes Yaska Paingi ^ (as the pupil of Vai^am- 
 payana) the teacher of Tittiri, the latter again the in- 
 
 "^ For further pajrticulars, see [This remaiiia correct, though the 
 
 /. St. , xiii, 104-106. position of the case itself is some- 
 
 * Amongst them, for example, what different ; see the notes above, 
 the enumeration of the whole of the p. 2 and p. 30. In connection with 
 lunar asterisms in the Apastamba- the enumeration of the Kakshatras, 
 Saiiihitsi, where they appear in an compare especially my essay, Die 
 order deviating from that of the vedischen Nachrichten von den Na- 
 later series, which, as I have pointed hihatra, ii. 299, ff.] 
 out above (p. 30), must necessarily " Of peculiar interest is the men- 
 have been fixed between 1472 and tion of Dhritardshtra Vaichitravirya, 
 536 B.C. But all that follows from as also of the contests between tiie 
 this, in regard to the passage in Failchdlas and the Kuntis in the 
 question, is that it is not earlier Kdthaka; see 7. St., iii. 469-472. 
 than 1472 B.C., which is a matter of ^* Bhatta Bhiiskara Mii^ra, on the 
 course; it nowise follows that it contrary, gives Yiljnavalka instead 
 may not be later than 536 B.C. So of Paiiigi ; see Burnell's Catalogue, 
 we obtain nothing definite here. p. 14. 
 
SAMHITAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 91 
 
 structor of Ukha, and Uklia the preceptor of Atreya* 
 This at least clearly exhibits its author's view of the 
 priority of Yaska to the schools and redactions of the 
 Black Yajus bearing the names of Tittiri and Atreya; 
 although the data necessary to prove the correctness of 
 this view are wanting. That, however, some sort of influ- 
 ence in the arrangement of the Samhita of the Black Yajus 
 is certainly to be attributed to Yaska, is evident further 
 from the fact that Bhatta Bhaskara Mi^ra, in an extant 
 fragment of his commentary on the Apastamba-Samliita,t 
 quotes, side by side with the views of Ka^akritsna and 
 Ekachiirni regarding a division of the text, the opinion of 
 Yaska also. 
 
 • Along with the Kathaka, the Mdinava and the Maitra 
 are very frequently quoted in the commentaries on the 
 Katfya-Siitra of the White Yajus. We do not, it is true, 
 find these names in the Siitras or similar works ; but at all 
 events they are meant for works resembling the Kathaka, 
 as is shown by the quotations themselves, which are often 
 of considerable length.- Indeed, we also find, although only 
 in later writings, the Maitrayaniyas, and, as a subdivision 
 of these, the Manavas, mentioned as schools of the Black 
 Yajus. Possibly these works may still be in existence in 
 India.J 
 
 * Atreya was the padakdra of his with Sfiyana'a complete commentary, 
 
 school; Kundina, on the contrary, was commenced by Roer (1854), con- 
 
 the vrittikdra. The meaning of tinned by Cowell and R^ma "S&ri,- 
 
 witti is here obscure, as it is also in yana, and is now in the hands of 
 
 Schol. to P^., iv. 3. 108 {mdcthuri Mahefechandra Nyiyaratna (the last 
 
 vrittih) [see /. St., xiii. 381]. part, No. z8, 1874, reaches to iv. 
 
 f We have, besides, a commen- 3. 11); the complete text, in Roman 
 
 tary by S^yana, though it is only transcript, has been published by 
 
 fragmentary; another is ascribed to myself in I. St., xi., xii. (1871-72). 
 
 a Bdlakrishna. [In Burnell'a Col- On the Kathaka, see /. jSt, iii. 451- 
 
 lectiou of MSS., see his Catalogue, 479.] 
 
 pp. 12-14, is found the greater por- J According to the Fort- William 
 
 tion of Bhatta Kau^ika Bhfekara Catalogue, the ' Maitr^yanl-^ikh^ ' 
 
 Milra's commentary, under the name is in existence there. [Other MSS. 
 
 Jn&nayajna ; the author is said to have since been found ; see Haug in 
 
 liave lived 400 years before SSiyana ; /. St., ix. 175, and his essay Brahma, 
 
 he quotes amongst others BhavasvSi- und die Brakmanen, pp. 31-34 
 
 min, and seems to stapd in special (1871), and Biihler's detailed survey 
 
 connection with the Atreyi school, of the works composing this ^^khd 
 
 A Paiddchahlidshya on the Black in /. Si., xiii. 103, 117-128. Acoord- 
 
 Yajus is also mentioned ; see 7. St., ing to this, the Maitr. Samhitd con- 
 
 ix. 176. — An edition of the Tait- sists at present of five Mndas, two 
 
 tirlya-Samhit^ in the Bihl. Indica, of which, however, are but later ad- 
 
92 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 Besides the SamMta so called, there is a Brahmana 
 recognised by the school of Apastamha, and also by that 
 of Atreya* which, however, as I have already remarked, 
 differs from the Samhitd, not as to the nature of its con- 
 tents, but only in point of time ; it is, in fact, to be regarded 
 merely as a supplement to it. It either reproduces the 
 formulas contained in the Samhita, and connects them 
 with their proper ritual, or it develops further the litur- 
 gical rules already given there ; or again, it adds to these 
 entirely new rules, as, for instance, those concerning the 
 pwrvshamedJia, which is altogether wanting in the Sam- 
 hita, and those referring to the sacrifices to the lunar 
 asterisms. Only the third and last book, in twelve -pra^itr- 
 thakas, together with Sayana's commentary, is at present 
 known.^^ The three last prapd^Tuikas, which contain four 
 different sections, relating to the manner of preparing cer- 
 tain peculiarly sacred sacrificial fires, are ascribed in the 
 Anukramanl of the Atreya school (and this is also con- 
 firmed by Sayana in another place) to the sage Katha. 
 Two other sections also belong to it, which, it seems, are 
 only found in the Atreya school, and not in that of Apa- 
 stamba; and also, lastly, the two first books of the Tait- 
 tiriya-Aranyaka, to be mentioned presently. Together 
 these eight sections evidently form a supplement to the 
 Kathaka above discussed; they do not, however, appear 
 to exist as an independent work, but only in ^connection 
 with the Brahmana and Aranyaka of the Apastamba- 
 (and Atreya-) schools, from which, for the rest, they can 
 be externally distinguished easily enough by the absence of 
 the expansion of v and y into wo and iy. The legend 
 quoted towards the end of the second of these sections 
 {prap. xi. 8), as to the visit of Nachiketas, to the lower 
 
 ditiona, viz., the Upanishad (see te- edited, with Sdyana's commentary, 
 
 low), which passes as kdmdii' ii., and in the BM. Ind. (1855-70), by Kd- 
 
 the last hSnda, called Khila.] jendra Lstla Mitra. The Hira^ya- 
 
 * At least as regards the fact, for ke^i^Skhiya - Brahmana quoted' by 
 
 the designation Sajphitd or BrSlh- Buhler, Catalogue of' Sanskrit JISS. 
 
 mana does not occur in its Anukra- from Gujardt, i. 38, is not likely to 
 
 mani. On the contrary, it passes depart much from the ordinary 
 
 without any break from the portions Apastamha text ; the respective 
 
 which belong in the Apastamha ^rauta-Sfitras at least agree almost 
 
 school to the Saiphit^, to those there literally with each other ; see Buhler, 
 
 belonging to the Brahmana. Apastamhiya-dharmasdtra, Pi-eface, 
 
 "' AU three books have been p. 6 (1868). 
 
BRAHMAN AS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 93 
 
 world, gave rise to an Upanisliad of the Atharvan whicli 
 bears the name of Eathakopanishad. Now, between this 
 supplement to the Kathaka and the Kathaka itself a con- 
 siderable space of time must have elapsed, as follows from 
 the allusions made in the last sections to Maha-Meru, 
 Krauncha, Mainaga ; to Vai^ampdyana, Vyasa Para^arya, 
 &c. ; as well as from the literature therein presupposed as 
 existing, the ' Atharvafigirasas,' Brahmanas, Itihasas, Pura- 
 nas, Kalpas, Gathas, and Naralansls being enumerated as 
 subjects of study (svddhy&ya). Further, the last but one 
 of these sections is ascribed to another author, viz., to the 
 Arunas, or to Aruna, whom the scholiast on Pdnini^* 
 speaks of as a pupU of Vai^ampayana, a statement with 
 which its mention of the latter as an authority tallies 
 excellently ; this section is perhaps therefore only errone- 
 ously assigned to the school of the Kathas. — The Tait- 
 tiriya/-Aranyaka, at the head of which that section stands 
 (as already remarked), and which belongs both to the 
 Apastamba and Atreya schools, must at all events be 
 regarded as only a later supplement to their Brahmana, 
 and belongs, like most of the Aranyakas, to the extreme 
 end of the Yedic period. It consists of ten books, the 
 first six of which are of a liturgical character : the first 
 and third books relate to the manner of preparing certain 
 sacred sacrificial fires ; the second to preparatives to the 
 study of Scripture; and the fourth, fifth, and sixth to 
 purificatory sacrifices and those to the Manes, correspond- 
 ing to the last books of the Samhita of the White Yajus. 
 The last four books of the Aranyaka, on the contrary, 
 contain two .Upanishads; viz., the seventh, eighth, and 
 ninth books; the TaittiriyopanisJiad, Kar e^oxh^ so called, 
 and the tenth, the Ydjniki- or Ndrdyaniyd-Upanishad. 
 The former, or Taittiriyopanishad, is in three parts. The 
 first is the Samhitopanishad, or SilishdvalU* which begins 
 with a short grammatical disquisition,^^ and then turns to 
 
 ^ Kaiyata on Pan., iv. 2. 104 * Valli means 'a creeper;' it is 
 
 (MaMbhdshya, f ol. ys", ed. Benares) ; perhaps meant to describe these Upa- 
 
 he calls him, however, Aruni in- nishads as ' creepers,' which' have 
 
 stead of Aruna, and ,derives from attached themselves to the Veda- 
 
 him the school of the Arunins (cited Sdkhil. 
 
 in the Bhilshya, ibid) ; the Anmis are ^ See above, p. 61; Miiller, A.S.L., 
 
 cited in the K^haka itseli'; see p. 113, ff. ; Haug, Ueber das Wescn 
 
 I. St., iii. 475. dcs vcdischen Accents, p. 54. 
 
94 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 the question of the unity of the world-spirit. The second 
 and third are the Anandavalli and Ekriguvalli, which 
 together also go by the name of Vdruni-Upanishad, and 
 treat of the bliss of entire absorption in meditation upon 
 the Supreme Spirit, and its identity with the individual 
 soul* If in these we have already a thoroughly systematised 
 form of speculation, we are carried even further in one 
 portion of the Tajniki-Upanishad, where we have to do 
 with a kind of sectarian worship of Narayana : the remain- 
 ing part contains ritual supplements. Now, interesting as 
 this whole Aranyaka is from its motley contents and evi- 
 dent piecing together of collected fragments of aU sorts, 
 it is from another point of view also of special importance 
 for us, from the fact that its tenth book is actually extant 
 in a double recension, viz., in a text which, according to 
 Sayana's statements, laelongs to the Dravidas, and in an- 
 other, bearing the name of the Andhras, both names of 
 peoples in the south-west of India. Besides these two 
 texts, Sayana also mentions a recension belonging to the 
 Karnatakas, and another whose name he does not give. 
 Lastly, this tenth bookt exists also as an Atharvopa- 
 nishad, and here again with many variations; so that there 
 is here opened up to criticism an ample field for researches 
 and conjectures. Such, certainly, have not been wanting 
 in Indian literary history ; it is seldom, however, that the 
 facts lie so ready to hand as we have them in this case, 
 and this we owe to Sayana's commentary, which is here 
 really excellent. 
 
 When we look about us for the other Brahmanas of the 
 Black Yajus, we find, in the first place, among the schools 
 
 * See a tranglatioD, &c., of the vii.-ix., see the previous note), in 
 
 Taitt. Upanishad in I.St., ii. 207- Bibl. Ind. (1864-72), by lUjendra 
 
 235. It has been edited, with Saiii- Ldla Mitra ; the text is the Dr^vida 
 
 kara's commentary, by Boer in BM. text commented upon by Sdyana, in 
 
 Indica, vol. vii. [; the text alone, as sixty-four anuvdJcas, the variuuB 
 
 a portion of the Taitt. Ar., by Bdj en- readings of the Andhra text (in 
 
 dra Litla Mitra also, see next note, eighty anuvdhu) being also added. 
 
 Koer'g translation appeared in vol. In Bumell's collection there is also 
 
 XV. of the Biiliotheca Indica]. a commentary on the Taitt. Ar., by 
 
 i- See a partial translation of it in Bhatta Bbiiskara Mi^ra, which, like 
 
 7. St. , ii. 7^100. [It is published that on the Samhitd, is entitled 
 
 in the, complete edition of the Jndnayajna ; see Bumell's Caia- 
 
 Taitt. Aranyaka, with SiCyana's com- loyue, pp. 16, 17.] 
 mentary thereon (excepting books 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 95 
 
 cited in the Sama-Siitras two which must probably be 
 considered as belonging to the Black Yajus, viz., the Eh&l- 
 lavins and the Sdtydyanins. The Brahmana of the £hdl- 
 lavins is quoted by the scholiast on Panini, probably fol- 
 lowing the Mahabhashya,^^ as one of the ' old ' Brahmanas : 
 we find it mentioned in the Brihaddevata ; Sure^varacharya 
 also, and even Sayana himself, quote passages from the 
 Bhallavi^ruti. A passage supposed to be borrowed from 
 the Bhallavi-TJpanishad is adduced by the sect of the 
 Madhavas in support of the correctness of their (Dvaita) 
 belief (As. Bes., xvi. 104). That the Bhallavins belong to 
 the Black Yajus is, however, stiU uncertain ; I only con- 
 clude so at present from the fact that Bhallaveya is the 
 name of a teacher specially attacked and censured in the 
 Brahmana of the White Yajus. As to the Sdtydyanins, 
 whose Brahmana is also reckoned among the ' old ' ones by 
 the scholiast on Panini,^^ and is frequently quoted, espe- 
 cially by Sayana, it is pretty certain that they belong to 
 the Black Yajus, as it is so stated in the Charanavyiiha, a 
 modern index of the different schools of the Vedas, and, 
 moreover, a teacher named Satyayani is twice mentioned 
 in the Brahmana of the White Yajus. The special regard 
 paid to them in the Sama-Siltras, and which, to judge 
 from the quotations, they themselves paid to the Saman, is 
 probably to be explained by the peculiar connection (itself 
 still obscure) which we find elsewhere also between the 
 schools of the Black Yajus and those of the Saman."" Thus, 
 the Kathas are mentioned along with the Saman schools 
 
 '8 This is not so, for in the Bhd- thority in this case either, for it does 
 
 shya to the particular sMra of Pin. not mention the Sdtydyanins in its 
 
 (iv. 3. 105), the Bhfflavins are not comment on the mira in question 
 
 mentioned. They are, however, (iv. 3. 105). But Kaiyata cites the 
 
 mentioned elsewhere in the work, at Brdhmanas proclaimed by Sdtysl- 
 
 iv. 2. 104 (here Kaiyata derives them yana, &c., as contemporaneous with 
 
 from a teacher BhaJlu : BkcUlund the YdjnavcU&dni Brdhmai^dni and 
 
 proktam adhiyate) ; as a BhdUaveyo (Sat/fctftAdni Br., which are mentioned 
 
 Maisyo rdjaputrah is cited in the in the Mahdbh&hya (see, however, 
 
 Anupada, vi. S, their home may /. iSi., v. 67, 68); and the Mahibhd- 
 
 have been in the country of the shya itself cites the Sdtydyanins along 
 
 Matsyas ; see I. St., xiii. 441, 442. with the Bhdllavins (on iv. 2. 104) ; 
 
 At the time of the Bhishika-Slitra they belonged, it would seem, to the 
 
 their Brdhmana text was still accen- north ; see I. St., xiii. 442. 
 
 tuated, in the same way as the Sata- '"" See on this /. St., iii. 473, xiii 
 
 patha ; see Kielhorn, /. St., x. 421. 439. 
 
 ^ The Mahibhilshya is not his au- 
 
96 VEDIC LIT ERA TURE. 
 
 of the Kalapas and Kautlmmas ; and along with the latter 
 
 the Laukakshas also. As to the ^akayanins,* Sayakayanins. 
 
 Kalahavins, and ^alankayanins,"i with whpm, as with the 
 
 Satyayanins, we are only acquainted through quotations, 
 
 it is altogether uncertain whether they belong to the Black 
 
 Yajus or not. The Ohhagalins, whose name seems to be 
 
 borne by a tolerably ancient Upanishad in Anquetil's 
 
 Oupnekhat, are stated in the Charanavyiiha"^ to form a 
 
 school of the Black Yajus (according to Panini, iv. 3. 109, 
 
 they are called Chhagaleyins) : the same is there said of 
 
 the ^vetdivataras. The latter gave their name to an 
 
 Upanishad composed in a metrical form, and called at its 
 
 close the work of a ^vetalvatara : in which the SAmkhya 
 
 doctrine of the two primeval principles is mixed up with 
 
 the Yoga doctrine of one Lord, a strange misuse beincf 
 
 here made of wholly irrelevant passages of the Samhita, 
 
 &c., of the Yajus ; and upon this rests its sole claim to be 
 
 connected with the latter. KapUa, the ori^atot of the 
 
 Samkhya system, appears in it raised to divine dignity 
 
 itself, and it evidently belongs to a very late period ; for 
 
 though several passages from it are quoted in the Brahma- 
 
 Siitra of Badarayana (from which its priority to the latter 
 
 at least would appear to foUow), they may just as well 
 
 have been borrowed from the common source, the Yajus. 
 
 It is, at all events, a good deal older than Samkara, since 
 
 he regarded it as Sruti, and commented upon it. It has 
 
 recentlybeen published, together with this commentary,* by 
 
 Dr. Eoer, in the BMiotheca Indica, voL vii. ; see also Ind. 
 
 Stud., i. 420, ff. — The Maitrdyana Upanishad at least bears 
 
 a more ancient name, and might perhaps be connected 
 
 • They are mentioned in the tion to thia ertent, that the Chara- 
 
 tenth book of the Brdhmana of the navytiha does not know the name 
 
 White YajuB [see also Kdthaka 22. Chhagalin at all (which is mentioned 
 
 7, I. St., iii. 472] ; as is also Sstyakil- by F^ni alone), but speaks only of 
 
 yana. Chhdgeyas or Chhdgaleyas ; see /. 
 
 Ml The ^dlankdyanas are ranked as iS«.,iii. 258; Miiller,^. S. £., p. 370. 
 
 Brdhmanas among the Vdhikas in On Anquetil's ' Tsehakli ' Upanishad 
 
 the Calcutta scholium to Pdn. v. 3. see now I. St., ix. 42-46. 
 JH{bhdshyenavydkhydtam). Vyll- * Distinguished by a great num- 
 
 sa's mother, Satyavati, Is called ber of sometimes tolerably long 
 
 Sitlankiiyanajit, and Pdnini himself quotations from the Furdnas, &c. 
 
 ^itlanki ; see /. St., xiii. 375, 395, [Roer's translation was published in 
 
 428, 429. the BiM. Ind., voL xv.] 
 
 ws This statement needs oorrec- 
 
BRAHMANAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 97 
 
 with the above-mentioned Maitra (Brahmana). Its text, 
 however, both in language and contents, shows that, com- 
 pared with the latter, it is of a very modern date. At pre- 
 sent, unfortunately, I have at my command only the four 
 first prap&thakas, and these in a very incorrect form,* — 
 whereas in Anquetil's translation, the Upanishad consists 
 of twenty chapters, — yet even these are sufficient clearly 
 to determine the character of the work. King Brihadra- 
 tha, who, penetrated by the nothingness of earthly things, 
 resigned, the sovereignty into the hands of his son, and 
 devoted himself to contemplation, is there instructed by 
 Sakayanya (see gaiia ' Kunja/ ) upon the relation of the 
 dtman (soul) to the world; Sakayanya communicates to 
 him what Maitreya had said upon this subject, who in his 
 turn had only repeated the instruction given to the Bala- 
 khUyas by Prajapati himself. The doctrine in question is 
 thus derived at third hand only, and we have to recognise 
 in this tradition a consciousness of the late origin of this 
 form of it. This late origin manifests itself externally 
 also in the fact that corresponding passages from other 
 sources are quoted with exceeding frequency in support of 
 the doctrine, introduced by " athd 'nyatrd 'py uhtam," " etad 
 apy uktam" " atre 'me ilohj, bhavanti," " atha yathe 'yam 
 Kautsdyanastutih." The ideas themselves are quite upon 
 a level with those of the fully developed Samkhya doc- 
 trine,+ and the language is completely marked off from the 
 
 * I obtained them quite recently, to the commentary, on the one 
 
 in transcript, through the kindness hand, the two last books aro to be 
 
 of Baron d'Eckstein, of Paris, to- considered as Tchilas, and on the 
 
 gether with the tenth adhydya of a other, the whole Upanishad belongs 
 
 metrical paraphrase, called AnaWiH- to a p&rvakdnda, in four books, of 
 
 iiprahiia, of this Upanishad, extend- ritual purport, by which most likely 
 
 ing, in 150 ilolcas, over these four is meant the MaitrSiyani-Sanihitit 
 
 prapdthakas. The latter is copied discussed by Biihler (see /. St., xiii. 
 
 from E. I. H., 693, and is probably 119, ff.), in which the Upanishad is 
 
 identical with the work of Vidy^- quoted as the second ( !) kdnda ; see 
 
 ranya often mentioned by Cole- I. u., p. 121. The transcript sent me 
 
 brooke. [It is really so ; and this by Eckstein shows manifold devia- 
 
 portion has since been published, tions from the other text ; its ori- 
 
 together with the Upanishad in full, ginal has unfortunately not been 
 
 by Cowell, in his edition of the discovered yet.] 
 
 Maitr. Upanishad, in seven prapd- f Brahman, Rudra, and Vishnu 
 
 tliakas, with Rdmatlrtha's commen- represent respectively the Sattva, 
 
 tary and an English translation, in the Tamas, and the Bajas elementE 
 
 the £ibl. Ind. (1862-70). According of Praj.'Ipati. 
 
 G 
 
98 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 prose of the Brahmanas, both by extremely long com- 
 ponnds, and by words entirely foreign to these, and only 
 belonging to the epic period (such as sura, yaksha, uraga, 
 hMdagafiui, &c.). The mention also of the graJvas, planets, 
 and of the motion of the polar star (dhruvasya praehcu- 
 lanam), supposes a period considerably posterior to the 
 Brahinana.i"* The zodiacal signs are even mentioned in 
 Anquetil's translation; the text to which I have access 
 does not unfortunately extend so far.^"* That among the 
 princes enumerated in the introduction as having met 
 their downfall, notwithstanding all their greatness, not one 
 name occurs belonging to the narrower legend of the 
 Maha-Bharata or Eamayana, is no doubt simply owing to 
 the circumstance that Brihadratha is regarded as the pre- 
 decessor of the Pandus. For we have probably to identify 
 him with the Brihadratha, king of Magadha, who accord- 
 ing to the Maha-Bharata (ii. 756) gave up the sovereignty 
 to his son Jarasamdha, afterwards slain by the Pandus, 
 and retired to the wood of penance. I cannot forbear con- 
 necting with the instruction here stated to have been given 
 to a Mng of Magadha by a Bdkdyanya the fact that it 
 was precisely in Magadha that Buddhism, the doctrine of 
 Sdhyamuni, found a welcome. I would even go so far as 
 directly to conjecture that we have here a Brahmanical 
 legend about Sakyamuni; whereas otherwise legends of 
 this kind reach us only through the adherents of the Bud- 
 diist doctrine. Maitreya, it is well known, is, with the 
 Buddhists, the name of the future Buddha, yet in their 
 legends the name is also often directly connected with 
 their Sakyamuni ; a Pdrna Maitrayaniputra, too, is given 
 to the latter as a pupil. Indeed, as far as we can judge at 
 
 '■" According to Cowell (p. 244), journeys (vi. 14; Cowell, pp. 119, 
 by graha we have here to under- 266) ; see on this /. St., is.. 363. 
 stand, once at least (i. 4), not the ^"^ The text has nothing of this 
 planets but idlagrahas (children's (vii. I, p. 198); but special mention 
 diseases); " Dhruvasya prachaianam is here made of Saturn, iani (p. 
 probably only refers to a pralaya ; 201), and where iukra occurs (p. 
 then even ' the never-ranging pole 200), we might perhaps think of 
 star' is forced to move." In a Venus. This last odAjdya through- 
 second passage, however (vi. 16, p. out clearly betrays its later origin ; 
 124), the grahas appear along with of special interest is the bitter polo- 
 the moon and the rikthai. Very mic against heretics and unbelievers 
 peculiar, too, is the statement as to (p. 206). 
 the stellar limits of the sun's two 
 
SUTRAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 99 
 
 present, the doctrine of this Upanishad stands in close 
 connection with the opinions of the Buddhists/"^ although 
 from its Brahmanical origin it is naturally altogether free 
 from the dogma and mythology peculiar to Buddhism. 
 We may here also notice, especially, the contempt for 
 ■writing {grantha) exhibited in one of the ilokas * quoted 
 in corroboration. 
 
 Neither the Chhagalins, nor the Svetalvataras, nor the 
 Maitrayaniyas are mentioned in the Siitras of the other 
 Vedas, or in similar works, as schools of the Black Yajus ; 
 stOl, we must certainly ascribe to the last mentioned a 
 very active share in its development, and the names 
 Maitreya and Maitreyl at least are not unfrequently 
 quoted in the Brahmanas. 
 
 In the case of the SUtras, too, belonging to the Black 
 Yajus, the large number of different schools is very 
 striking. Although, as in the case of the Brahmanas, we 
 only know the greater part of them through quotations, 
 there is reason to expect, not only that the remarkably 
 rich collection of the India House (with which I am only 
 very superficially acquainted) wiU be found to contain 
 many treasures in this department, but also that many of 
 them will yet be recovered in India itself. The Berlin 
 collection does not contain a single one. In the fii'st 
 place, as to the Srauta-S'&tras, raj only knowledge of the 
 Katha-S'idra,'\ the Manv^S'&tra, the Maitra-S'&tra, and 
 the Laugdhshi-S'&tra is derived from the commentaries on 
 the Katlya-Siitra of the White Yajus ; the second, how- 
 gygj.^106 stands in the catalogue of the Fort-WiUiam col- 
 
 "' BSina's Harshacharitra informs whether the word grantha ought 
 
 us of a ilaitrityanlya Divilkara who really d priori and for the earlier 
 
 embraced the Buddhist creed ; and period to be understood of written 
 
 Bhaa Daji (Journal Bombay Branch texts (of. /. St., xiii. 476), yet in 
 
 i?. A. S., X. 40) adds that even now this verse, at any rate, a different 
 
 Maitr. Brahmans live near Bhadg3,on interpretation is hardly possible ; 
 
 at the foot of the Vindhya, with see below.] 
 
 whom other Brahmans do not eat t Laug&shi and the ' Ldmahtya- 
 
 jn common ; ' the reason may have nindm BnUimanam ' are said to be 
 
 been the early Buddhist tendencies quoted therein. 
 
 of many of them.' '"^ On this, as well as on the con- 
 
 * Which, by the way, recurs to- tents and the division of the work, 
 
 gether with some others in precisely see my remarks in 1. St., v. 13-16, 
 
 the same form in the Amritavin- in accordance with communications 
 
 ■ du- (or Brahmavindu-) Upanishad. received from Professor Cowell ; cf. 
 
 [Though it may be very doubtful also Haug, ibid., ix 175. A Mdnava 
 
loo VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 lection, and of the last, whose author is cited in the 
 Katha-Siitra, as well as in the Katiya-Siitra, there is, it 
 appears, a copy in Vienna. Mahadeva, a commentator of 
 the Kalpa-Siitra of Satyashadha Hiranyake^i, when enu- 
 merating the Taittiriya-Siitras in successive order in his 
 introduction, leaves out these four altogether, and names 
 at the head of his list the Sutra of Bavdhiyana as the 
 oldest, then that of Bhd/radv&ja, next that of Apastamha, 
 next that of Hiranydkesi himself, and finally two names 
 not otherwise mentioned in this connection, Vddh'dna 
 and Vaikhdnasa, the former of which is perhaps a cor- 
 rupted form. Of these names, Bharadvaja is the only one 
 to be found in Vedic works ; it appears in the Brahmana 
 of the White Yajus, especially in the supplements to the 
 Vrihad-Aranyaka (where several persons of this name are 
 mentioned), in the Katiya-Siitra of the same Yajus, in the 
 Pratiiakhya-Siitra of the Black Yajus, and in Panini 
 Though the name is a patronymic, yet it iS possible that 
 these last citations refer to one and the same person, in 
 which case he must at the same time be regarded as the 
 founder of a grammatical school, that of the Bharadvajiyas. 
 As yet, I have seen nothing of his Siitra, and am acquainted 
 with it only through quotations. According to a state- 
 ment by the Mahadeva just mentioned, it treats of the 
 oblation to the Manes, in two prainas, and therefore shares 
 with the rest of the Sutras this designation of the sections, 
 which is peculiar to the Black Yajus.^"^ The Siitra of 
 Apastamba * is found in the Library of the India House, 
 and a part of it in Paris alsoj Commentaries on it by 
 
 Srauta-Sdtra is also cited in Biihler's Kumdrilasviimin was the author of 
 
 Catalogue of MSS. from Gujardt, i. the commentary seems still doubt- 
 
 l88 (1871) ; it is in 322 foU. The ful. 
 
 manuscript edited in facsimile by '"^ The BhslradTijlya - Sfitra has 
 
 Goldstucker under the title, ' Md- now been discovered by Biihler ; see 
 
 nava Kalpa-Sutra, being a portion of his Catal. of MSS. from Guj., i. 186 
 
 this ancient work on Vaidifc rites, to- (212 foil.) ; the Vaikhslnasa-SAtra is 
 
 gethcr with the Commentary of Ku- also quoted, ib. i. 190 (292 foil.) ; see 
 
 iiMt)'jfaTO(fmin'(l86i), gives but little also Haugin/. St., ix. 175. 
 
 of the text, the commentary quoting * According to the quotations, the 
 
 only the first words of the passages Vdjasaneyaka, Bahvricha-Bnthmana, 
 
 commented upon ; whether the con- and ^dtydyanaka are frequently men- 
 
 eluding words, ' Kumdrelabhdshyam tioned therein. 
 samdptam,' really indicate that 
 
SUTRAS OF THE BLACK YAJUS. 
 
 loi 
 
 DMrtasvamin and Talavrintanivasin are mentioned,^"^ also 
 one on the Siitra of Baiidhayana by Kapardisvamin.^"'' 
 The work of Satyashadha contains, according to Maha- 
 deva's statement,^^" twenty-seven praSnas, whose contents 
 agree pretty closely with the order followed in the Katiya- 
 Siitra ; only the last nine form an exce;^tion, and are quite 
 peculiar to it. The nineteenth and twentieth praSnas refer 
 to domestic ceremonies, which usually find a place in the 
 Grihya- and Smarta-Siitras. In the twenty- first, genealo- 
 gical accounts and lists are contained ; as also in a praJna 
 of the Baudhayana-Siitra * 
 
 Still scantier is the information we possess upon the 
 Grihya-S'dtras of the Black Yajus. The Kdthaha Grihya- 
 Sdtra is known to me only through quotations, as are also 
 the Siitras of Baudhdyana (extant in the Fort-William 
 
 '"8 On the Apastamba-Srauta- Sii- 
 tra and the commentarieB belonging 
 to it, by DhArtasv., Kapardiav^min, 
 Eudradatta, GurudevasTdimin, Ka- 
 raTindasv£[min, TillaT., Ahobalasiiri 
 (Adabila'in Buhler, I. c, p. 150, who 
 also mentions a Nrisinha, p. 152), 
 and others, see Burnell in his Cata- 
 logue, pp. 18-24, and in the Indian 
 Antiquary, i. 5> 6. According to 
 this the work consists of thirty 
 prasnas ; the first twenty-three treat 
 of the sacrificial rites in essentially 
 the same order (from darsapdrna- 
 mdsau to sattrdyanam) as in Hira^- 
 yake^, whose Stitra generally is 
 almost identical with that of Apa- 
 stamba ; see Biihler's preface to the 
 Ap. Dharma-SAtra, p. 6 ; the 24th 
 praina contains the general rules, 
 paribhdihds, edited by M. MUller in 
 Z. D. M. G., ix. (185s), a pravara- 
 hJumda and a haulrahi ; prainas 25- 
 27 contain the Grihya-Stitra ; prai- 
 nas 28, 29, the Dharma-SAtra, edited 
 by Biihler (1868); andfinally, prasna 
 30, the 6ulva-Stitra (^iidva, 'mea- 
 suring cord '). 
 
 '™ On the Baudhiyana-Slitra com- 
 pare likewise Bumell's Catalogue, pp. 
 24-30. Bhavasv^in, who amongst 
 others commented it, is mentioned 
 by Bhatta Bhdskara, and is conse- 
 quently' placed by BurneU (p. 26) in 
 
 the eighth century. According to 
 Kielhorn, Catalogue of S. MSS. in 
 the South Division of the Bombay 
 Pres., p. 8, there exists a commen- 
 tary on it by S^yana also, for whom, 
 indeed, it constituted the special 
 text-book of the Yajus school to 
 which he belonged ; see Burnel], 
 Vania-Brdhmana, pp. ix.-xix. In 
 Biihler's Catalogue of MSS. from 
 Gvj., i. 182, 184, Anantadeva, Na- 
 Tahasta, and Sesha are also quoted as 
 scholiasts. The exact compass of the 
 entire work is not yet ascertained ; 
 the Baudhdyana - Dharma - Siitra, 
 which, according to Buhler, Digest 
 of Hindu Law, i. p. xxi. (1867), 
 forms part of the Srauta-Slitra, as 
 in the case of Apastamba and Hiran- 
 yake£, was commented by Govinda- 
 sv^min ; see Burnell, p. 35. 
 
 "» M4tridattaandVffiche(ivara(!) 
 are also mentioned as commentators ; 
 see Kielhorn, I. c, p. 10. 
 
 * Such lists are also found in 
 AivaKyana's work, at the end, 
 though only in brief : for the Kdtiya- 
 Slitra, aPari^ishtacomes in. [Prai- 
 nas 26, 27, of Hiranyake^i treat of 
 dharmas, so , that here also, as in 
 the case of Apast. and Baudh.,'tlie 
 Dharma-Slitra forms part of the 
 Srautii- Siitra.] 
 
102 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 collection), of Bhdradvdja, and of Satydshddha, or Siran- 
 yaJceSi, unless in this latter case only the corresponding 
 'p^raSnas of the Kalpa-Siitra are intended."^ I have myself 
 only glanced through a Paddhati of the Grihya-Siitra of 
 the Maitrdyaniya school, which treats of the usual subject 
 (the siKteen samsMras, or sacraments). I conclude that 
 there must also have been a Grihya-Siitra^^ of the Mdnava 
 school, from the existence of the Code hearing that name,"^ 
 just as the Codes ascribed to AtrL Ap.astamba, Chhaga- 
 leya, Baudhayana, Laugakshi, and Satyayana are probably 
 to be traced to the schools of the same name belonging 
 to the Black Tajus, that is to say, to their Grihya-Sutras.^^* 
 Lastly, the Prdti^dkhyci-S'&tra has still to be mentioned 
 as a Siitra of the Black Tajus. The only manuscript with 
 which I am acquainted unfortunately only begins at the 
 fourth section of the first of the two prainas. This work 
 is of special significance from the number of very peculiar 
 names of teachers * mentioned in it : as Atreya, Kaundinya 
 (once by the title of Sthavira), and Bharadvaja, whom we 
 know already ; also Valmiki, a name which in this con- 
 nection is especially surprisiag; and further Agnive^ya, 
 Agnive^yayana, Paushkarasadi, and others. The two last 
 names, as well as that of Kaundinya,t are mentioned in 
 Buddhist writings as the names either of pupils or of con- 
 temporaries of Buddha, and Paushkarasadi is also cited 
 in the vdrttikas to Panini by Katyayana, their author. 
 Again, the allusion occurring here for the first time to the 
 Mimansakas and Taittiriyakas deserves to be remarked; 
 
 m This is really so. On Apa- shadvati and Sarasvati as the proper 
 
 stamba- and BhdradT^ja-Grihya, see home of the U^avas. This appears 
 
 Burnell, Catalogue, pp. 30-33. The somewhat too strict. At any rate, 
 
 sections of two 'prayogas,' of both the statements as to the extent of 
 
 texts, relating to birth ceremonial, the Madhyade^a which are found in 
 
 have been edited by Speijer in his the Pratijnd-Pari^ishta of the White 
 
 book De Ceremonia apud Indos qua Tajus point us for the latter more 
 
 vacatur jdtakarma (Leyden, 1872). to the east ; see my essay Ueber das 
 
 ^'^^ It is actually extant ; seeBiih- Praiijnd-Sutra {1872), pp. 101,105. 
 
 ler, Catalogue, i. 188 (80 foil.), and "* See Johantgen, I. c, p. 108, 
 
 Kielhorn, I. c, p. 10 (fragment). 109. 
 
 ^'^ Johantgen in his valuable tract * Their number is twenty; see 
 
 Ueber das Gesetsbuch des Manu Roth, Zur Litt. und Gesch., pp. 65, 
 
 (1863), p. 109, ff., has, from the geo- 66. 
 
 graphical data in Manu, ii. 17, ff., t See 7. St., i. 441 not. [xiii. 387, 
 
 fixed the territory between the Dri- ff., 41S]. 
 
THE WHITE YAJUS. 103 
 
 also the contradistinction, found at the close of the work, 
 of Ghhandas and Bhdshd, i.e., of Vedic and ordinary lan- 
 guage.^^5 The work appears also to extend to a portion of 
 the Aranyaka of the Black Yajus ; whether to the whole 
 cannot yet be ascertained, and is scarcely probable.^^^ 
 
 In conclusion, I have to notice the two Amikrwrrmtiis 
 already mentioned, theone belonging to the Atreya school, 
 the other to the Charayanlya school of the Kathaka. The 
 former ^^^ deals almost exclusively with the contents of the 
 several sections, which it gives in their order. It consists 
 of two parts. The first, which is in prose, is a mere no- 
 menclature ; the second, in thirty-four Slolms, is little more. 
 It, however, gives a few particulars besides as to the trans- 
 mission of the text. To it is annexed a commentary upon 
 both parts, which names each section, together with its 
 opening words and extent. The Anukramani of the Ka- 
 thaka enters but little into the contents ; it limits itself, 
 on the contrary, to giving the Rishis of the various sections 
 as well as of the separate verses ; and here, in the case of 
 the pieces taken from the Rik, it not unfrequently exhi- 
 bits considerable' divergence from the statements given in 
 the Anukramani of the latter, citing, in particular, a num- 
 ber of entirely new names. According to the concluding 
 statement, it is the work of Atri, who imparted it to 
 Laugakshi. 
 
 We now turn to the WhiU Tajus. 
 
 With regard, in the first place, to the name itself, it 
 probably refers, as has been already remarked, to the fact 
 that the sacrificial formulas are here separated from their 
 
 1^' In the passage in question Ar. or Taitt. Brfhm. is made in the 
 (xxiv. 5), ' chJiandoiJidshd ' means text itself ; on the contrary, it con- 
 rather 'the Veda language;' see fines itself exclusively to the Taitt. 
 Whitney, p. 417. S. The commentary, however, in 
 
 116 ^ye £ave now an excellent edi- some few instances goes beyond the 
 
 tion of the work by Whitney, Jour- T. S. ; see Whitney's special discus- 
 
 nal Am. Or. Soc, ix. (1871), text, sion of the points here involved, pp. 
 
 translation, and notes, together with 422-426; cf. also/. St., iv. 76-79. 
 a commentary called TribTutshyor '^' See /. St., iii. 373-401, xii. 
 
 ratna, by an anonymous author (or 350-357, and the similar statements 
 
 is his name Kdrttikeya?), a compila- from Bfaatta Bh^skara Ki^ra in Eur- 
 
 tion from three older commentaries nell's Caiidogue, p. 14. The Atreyl 
 
 by Atreya, Mdhisheya, and Vara- text here appears in a special rela- 
 
 ruohi. — No reference to the Taitt. tiasiU> 3, sd/rasoata pdtha. 
 
104 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 ritual basis and dogmatical explanation, and that we have 
 here a systematic and orderly distribution of the matter 
 so confusedly mixed up in the Black Yajus. This is the 
 way in which the expression ivM&ni yaj-Ahslii is explained 
 by the commentator Dviveda Ganga, in the only passage 
 where up till now it has been found in this Sense, namely, 
 in the last supplement added to' the Vrihad-Aranyaka of 
 the White Yajus. I say in the only passage, for though it 
 appears once under theform iukrayaj^nshi, in the Aranyaka 
 of the Black Yajus (5. 10), it has hardly the same general 
 meaning there, but probably refers, on the contrary, to the 
 fourth and fifth books of that Aranyaka itself. For in the 
 Anukramani of the Atreya school these books bear the 
 name iukriyakd/nda, because referring to expiatory cere- 
 monies ; and this name iukriya, ' expiating ' [probably 
 rather 'illuminating'?] belongs also to the correspond- 
 ing parts of the Samhita of the White Yajus, and even to 
 the sdma-ns employed at these particular sacrifices. 
 
 Another name of the White Yajus is derived from the 
 surname Vajasaneya, which is given to Yajnavalkya, the 
 teacher who is recognised as its author, in the supplement 
 to the Vrihad-Aranyaka, just mentioned. Mahidhara, at 
 the comcmencement of his commentary on the Samhita of 
 the White Yajus, explains Vajasaneya as a patronymic, 
 " the son of Vajasani." Whether this be correct, or whe- 
 ther the word vdjasani is to be taken as an appellative, it 
 at any rate signifies * " the giver of food," and refers to the 
 chief object lying at the root of all sacrificial ceremonies, 
 the obtaining of the necessary food from the gods whom 
 the sacrifices are to propitiate. To this is also to be traced 
 the name vd^'in, "having food," by which the theologians 
 of the White Yajus are occasionally distinguished.^* Now, 
 from Vajasaneya are derived two forms of words by which 
 the Samliita and Brahmana of the White Yajus are found 
 
 * In Mah^-Bhirata, xii. 1507, the by 'food'(ormo) is probably purely 
 
 word is an epithet of Krishna, a scholastic one.] 
 
 [Here also it is explained as above ; ^'' According to another explana- 
 
 for the Bik, however, according to tion, this is because the Sun as 
 
 the St. Petersburg Dictionary, we Horse revealed to Titjnavalkya the 
 
 hare to assign to it the meaning of aydtaydmamrpjruini yajMshi ; see 
 
 'procuring courage or strength, Vishnu-Purfca, iii. 5. 28; 'swift, 
 
 victorious, gaining booty or prize. ' courageous, horse,' are the f unda- 
 
 The explanation of the word vAja, mental meanings of the word. 
 
THE WHITE YAJUS. 105 
 
 sited, namely, Vdjasaneyaha, first used in the Taittiriya- 
 Siitra of Apastamba and the Katiya-Siitra of the "White 
 Yajus itself, and VdjasaTieyinas* i.e., those who study the 
 two works in question, first used in the Anupada-Siitra of 
 the Samaveda. 
 
 In the White Yajus we find, what does not occur in the 
 case of any other Veda, that Samhita and Brahmana have 
 been handed down in their entirety in two distinct recen- 
 sions ; and thus we obtain a measure for the mutual rela- 
 tions of such schools generally. These two recensions 
 agree almost entirely in their contents, as also in the dis- 
 tribution of them ; in the latter respect, however, there are 
 many, although slight, discrepancies. The chief difference 
 consists partly in actual variants in the sacrificial formulas, 
 as in the Brahmana, and partly in orthographic or orthoepic 
 peculiarities. One of these recensions bears the name of 
 the Kdnvas, the other that of the Mddhyamdinas, names 
 which have not yet been found in the Siitras or similar 
 writings. The only exception is the Prati^akhya-Siitra of 
 the White Yajus itself, where there is mention both of a 
 Kanva and of the Madhyamdinas. In the supplement 
 to the Vrihad-Aranyaka again, in the lists of teachers, a 
 Kanvi'putra (vi. 5 i) and a Madhyamdinayana (iv. 6. 2) at 
 least are mentioned, although only in the Kanva recension, 
 not in the other ; the former being cited among the latest, 
 the latter among the more recent members of the respec- 
 tive lists. The question now arises whether the two 
 recensions are to be regarded as contemporary, or if one is 
 older than the other. It is possible to adopt the latter 
 view, and to consider the Kanva school as the older one. 
 For not only is Kanva the name of one of the ancient 
 Rishi families of the Rigveda — and with the Rigveda this 
 recension agrees in the peculiar notation of the cerebral d 
 by I — ^but the remaining literature of the White Yajus 
 appears to connect itseK rather with the school of the 
 Madhyaindinas. However this may be,^^^ we cannot, at 
 
 * Occurs in the gana ' Saunaha.' vaka, a yellow (piiigala) K^ya, and 
 
 FThe Vijasaneyaka is also quoted by a K^vyityana, and also their pupils, 
 
 Laty^yana.] are mentioned ; see /. St., xiii. 417, 
 
 ^^^ The Mildhyamdinas are not 444. The school of the Kanvda 
 
 mentioned in Fataipjali's Mah^- Sauiravasds is mentioned in the 
 
 bh^hya, but the Kdnvas, the Kdn- Kdthaka, see on this'/. St., iii. 475, 
 
lo5 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 any rate, assume anything Hke a long interval between tie 
 two recensions ; they resemble each other too closely for 
 this, and we should perhaps do better to regard their 
 distinction as a geographical one, orthoepic divergencies 
 generally being best explained by geographical reasons. 
 As to the exact date to be ascribed to these recensions, it 
 may be, as has already been stated in our general survey 
 (p. lo), that we have here historical ground to go upon— 
 a thing which so seldom happens in this field. Arrian, 
 quoting from Megasthenes, mentions a people called 
 MaSiavSivoi, " through whose country flows the river An- 
 dhomati," and I have ventured to suggest that we should 
 understand by these the Madhyamdinas,^" after whom one 
 of these schools is named,, and that -therefore this school 
 was either then already in existence, or else grew up at 
 that time or soon afterwards.* The matter cannot indeed 
 be looked upon as certain, for this reason, that mddhyam- 
 dina, ' southern,' might apply in general to any southern 
 people or any southern school ; and, as a matter of fact, 
 we find mention of TnAdhyarnMTM-Kavbtlvwm&s, ' southern 
 Kauthumas.' f In the main, however, this date suits so 
 perfectly that the conjecture is at least not to be rejected 
 offhand. Prom this, of course, the question of the time 
 of origin of the White Tajus must be strictly separated; 
 it can only be solved from the evidence contained in the 
 
 andin the Apastamba-Dharma-Slitra quotes in the case of the Yajurreda 
 
 also, reference is sometimes made to the beginning of the Ydljas. S., and 
 
 a teacher Kanva or Kefnva. Kanva not that of the Taitt. S. (or BIdth.).] 
 and K^va appear ^further in the + [Vindyaka designates his Kau- 
 
 prweara section of A^vaUtyana, and shitaki-Briihmana-Bhiishya as Md- 
 
 in Fdnini himself (ir. 2. Ill), &o. dhywmdina - Kauthumdnugam ; but 
 
 120 The country of the T&aSiavSaiol does he not here mean the two 
 
 is situate precisely in the middle of schools so called (MSdhy. and 
 
 that 'Madbyadeia' the limits of Kauth.) ? They appear, in like man - 
 
 ■which are given in the Pratijnil-Pa- ner, side by side in an inscription 
 
 ri^ishta ; see my paper Veier das published by Hall, Journal Am. Or. 
 
 Pratijnd'Siitra, pp. 101-105. . Soc, vi. 539.] In the KsKik^ (to 
 
 * Whether, in that ease, we may Pdn. vii. i. 94) a grammarian, M^- 
 
 assume that all the works now com- dhyamdini, is mentioned as a pupil 
 
 prised in the M^dhyaipdina school of Vydghrapiid ( Tydghrapaddm vari- 
 
 had already a place in this redaction ih(hah) ; see Bbhtlingk, Pdaini, In- 
 
 is a distinct question. [An interest- trod., p. 1. On this it is to be re- 
 
 iug remark of Miiller's, Hist. A. S. marked, that in the Brdhmana two 
 
 ^■t P- 453> points out that the Qo- Vaiydghrapadyas and one Vjiiydgh- 
 
 patha-Brdhmana, in citing the first rapadlputra are mentioned, 
 words of the different Vedas (i. 29), 
 
SAMHITA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 107 
 
 work itself. Here our special task consists in separating 
 the different portions of it, -which in its present form are 
 bound up in one whole. Fortunately we have still data 
 enough here to enable us to determine the priority or pos- 
 teriority of the several portions. 
 
 In the first place, as regards the Samhita of the White 
 Yajus, the Vdjasaneyi-Samhitd, it is extant in both recen- 
 sions in 40 adhydyas. In the Madhyamdina recension 
 these are divided into 303 anuvdhas and 1975 TcandiMs. 
 The first 25 adhydyas contain the formulas for the general 
 sacrificial ceremonial ; ^^^ first (i., ii.) for the new and fuU- 
 moon sacrifice ; then (iii.) for the morning and evening fire 
 sacrifice, as well as for the sacrifices to be offered every 
 four months at the commencement of the three seasons ; 
 next (iv.-viii.) for the Soma sacrifice in general, and (ix., x.) 
 for two modifications of it ; next (xi.-xviii.) for the con- 
 struction of altars for sacred fires ; next (xix.-xxi.) for the 
 sautrdmani, a ceremony originally appointed to expiate 
 the evil effects of too free indulgence in the Soma drink ; 
 and lastly (xxii.-xxv.) for the horse sacrifice. The last 
 seven of these adhydyas may possibly be regarded as a 
 later addition to the first eighteen. At any rate it is cer- 
 tain that the last fifteen adhydyas which follow them are of 
 later, and possibly of considerably later, origin. In the 
 Anukramani of the White Yajus, which bears the name of 
 Katyayana, as well as in a Parilishta '^^ to it, and subse- 
 quently also in Mahidhara's commentary on the Samhita, 
 xxvi.-xxxv. are expressly called a Khila, or supplement, 
 and xxxvi.-xl., Suhriya, a name above explained. This 
 statement the commentary on the Code of Yajnavalkya 
 (called Mitakshara) modifies to this effect, that the Bukriya 
 begins at xxx. 3, and that xxxvi. i forms the beginning of 
 an Aranyaka.* The first four of these later added adhyd- 
 yas (xxvi.-xxix.) contain sacrificial formulas which belong 
 to the ceremonies treated of in the earlier adhydyas, and 
 
 1°^ A comprehensive but con- * That a portion of these, last 
 
 densed exposition of it has heen books is to be considered as an Aran- 
 
 commenced in my papers, Zur yaka seems to be beyond doubt ; 
 
 Kenntniss des vedischen Opferrituals, for xxxvii.-xxxix., in particular, 
 
 in I. St., X. 321-396, xiii. 217-292. this is certain, as they are explained 
 
 122 See my paper, Ueher das Pra- in the Aranyaka part of the Brdh- 
 
 tynd-Satra (1872), pp. 102-105. mana. 
 
io8 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 must be supplied thereto in the proper place. The ten 
 foUowirig adhydyas (xxx.— xxxLx.) contain the formulas for 
 entirely new sacrificial ceremonies, viz., the ^purushor^medJui 
 (human sacrifice),^^ the sarva-medha (universal sacrifice), 
 the pitri-medha (oblation to the Manes), and the pravargya 
 (purificatory sacrifice).^^ The last adhydya, finally, has no 
 sort of direct reference to the sacrificial ceremonial It is 
 also regarded as an Upanishad,* and is professedly designed 
 to fix the proper mean between those exclusively engaged 
 in sacrificial acts and those entirely neglecting them. It 
 belongs, at all events, to a very advanced stage of Specu- 
 lation, as it assumes a Lord (if) of the universe.1 — Inde- 
 pendently of the above-mentioned external testimony to 
 the later origia of these fifteen adhydyas, their posteriority 
 is sufficiently proved by the relation in which they stand 
 both to the Black Yajus and to their own Brahmana, as well 
 as by the data they themselves contain. In the Taittiriyar 
 SamJbita only those formulas appear which are found in 
 the first eighteen adhydyas^ together with a few of the inan- 
 tras belongiag to the horse sacrifice ; the remainder of the 
 latter, together with the rtvantras belonging to the sautrd- 
 mani and the human sacrifice; are only treated of in the 
 Taittiriya-Brahmana; and those for the universal and the 
 purificatory sacrifices, as well as those for oblations to the 
 Manes, only in the Taittiriya-Aranyaka. In like manner, the 
 first eighteen adhydyas are cited in full, and explained word 
 by word in the first nine books of the Brahmana of the 
 White Yajus ; but only a few of the formulas for the sait- 
 trdmani, the horse sacrifice, human sacrifice, universal 
 
 '^' See my essay, Z7cier ilferesclen- * Other parts, too, of the Vt 
 
 typftr bei den Indern der vedischen jas. S. haye in later times been 
 
 Zeit, in /. Str., i. 54, ff. looked upon as TJpanishads ; for ex- 
 
 ^^ This translation of the word ample, the sixteenth book {Sata- 
 
 pravwrgya is not a literal one (for rudriya), the thirty-first (Purusha- 
 
 this see the St. Petersburg Diet., lAkta), thirty-second {Tadeva), and 
 
 vmder root varj with prep, pro), the beginning of the thirty-fourth 
 
 but is borrowed from the sense and book (Sivasamkalpoi). 
 
 purpose of the ceremony in ques- •)• According to Hahidhara's com- 
 
 tion ; the latter is, according to mentary, its polemic is directed par- 
 
 HaugbnAit. Brihm., i. 18, p. 42, "a tially against the Bauddhas, that 
 
 preparatory rite intended for provid- is, probably, against the doctrines 
 
 ing the sacrificer with a heavenly which afterwards were called Sdqi'- 
 body, with which alone he is permit- 
 ted to enter theresidence of thegods." 
 
SAM HIT A OF THE WHITE YAyUS. 109 
 
 sacrifice, and oblation to the Manes (xix.-xxxv.) are cited 
 in the twelfth and thirteenth books, and that for the 
 most part only by their initial words, or even merely 
 by the initial words of the anuvdkas, without any sort 
 of explanation; and it is only the three last adhydyas 
 but one (xxxvii. - xxxix.) which are again explained 
 word by word, in the beginning of the fourteenth book. 
 In the case of the Tnantras, but slightly referred, to by 
 their initial words, explanation seems to have been con- 
 sidered unnecessary, probably because they were still 
 generally understood; we have, therefore, of course, no 
 guarantee that the writer of the Brahmana had them 
 before him in the form which they bear at present. As 
 to those mantras, on the contrary, which are not men- 
 tioned at all, the idea suggests itself that they may not yet 
 have been incorporated into the Samhita text extant when 
 the Brahmana was composed. They are, roughly speak- 
 ing, of two kinds. First, there are strophes borrowed 
 from the Rik, and to be recited by the Hotar, which 
 therefore, strictly speaking, ought not to be contained in 
 the Yajus at all, and of which it is possible that the Brah- 
 mana may have taken no notice, for the reason that it has 
 nothing to do with the special duties of the Hotar ; e.g., 
 in the twentieth, thirty-third, and thirty-fourth adhydyas 
 especially. Secondly, there are passages of a Brahmana 
 type, which are not, however, intended, as in the Black 
 Yajus, to serve as an explanation of mantras preceding 
 them, but stand independently by themselves ; e.g., in par- 
 ticular, several passages in the nineteenth adhydya, and 
 the enumeration, in the form of a list, of the animals to 
 be dedicated at the horse sacrifice, in the twenty-fourth 
 adhydya. In the first eighteen adhydyas also, there occur 
 a few sacrificial formulas which the Brahmana either fails 
 to mention (and which, therefore, at the time when it was 
 composed, did not form part of the Samhita), or else cites 
 only by their initial words, or even merely by the initial 
 words of the anuvdkas. But this only happens in the 
 sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth adhydyas, though 
 here with tolerable frequency, evidently because these 
 adhydyas themselves bear more or less the character of a 
 Brahmana. — With regard, lastly, to the data contained in 
 the last adhydyas, and testifying to their posteriority, these 
 
no VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 are to be sought more especially in the thirtieth and 
 thirty-niath adhydyas, as compared with the sixteenth. 
 It is, of course, only the Yajus portions proper which can 
 here be adduced, and not the verses borrowed from the Rik- 
 Samhita, which naturally prove nothing in this connection. 
 At most they can only yield a sort of measure for the time 
 of their incorporation into the Yajus, in so far as they 
 may be taken from the latest portions of the Eik, in which 
 case the existence of these at that period would necessarily 
 be presupposed. The data referred to consist in two facts. 
 First, whereas in the sixteenth book Eudra, as the god of the 
 blazing fire, is endowed mth a large number of the epithets 
 subsequently applied to Siva, two very significant epithets 
 are here wanting which are applied to bTm in the thirty- 
 ninth book, viz., iidTM and mahddeva, names probably 
 indicating some Mnd of sectarian worship (see above, 
 p. 45). Secondly,, the number of the mixed castes given 
 in the thirtieth is much higher than that given in the 
 sixteenth book. Those mentioned in the former can hardly 
 all have been in existence at the time of the latter, or we 
 shoidd surely have found others specified besides those 
 that are actually mentioned. 
 
 Of the forty books of the Samhita, the sixteenth and 
 thirtieth are those which bear most distinctly the stamp 
 of the time to which they belong. The sixteenth book, on 
 which, in its Taittiriya forni, the honour was afterwards 
 bestowed of being regarded as an TJpanishad, and as the 
 principal book of the Siva sects, treats of the propitiation 
 of Eudra; and (see /. St., ii. 22, 24-26) by its enumeration 
 and distinction of the many different kinds of thieves, 
 robbers, murderers, night-brawlers, and highwaymen, his 
 supposed servants, reveais to us a time of insecurity and 
 violence: its mention, too, of various mixed castes indi- 
 cates that the Indian caste system and polity were already 
 fully developed. Now as, in the nature of things, these 
 were not established without vigorous opposition from 
 those who were thrust down into the lower castes, and as 
 this opposition must have manifested itself chiefly in 
 feuds, open or secret, with their oppressors, I am inclined 
 to suppose that this Eudra book dates from the time of 
 these secret feuds on the part of the conquered aborigines, 
 as weE as of the Vratyas or unbrahmanised Aryans, after 
 
SAMHITA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. iii 
 
 their open resistance had been more or less crushed.^-^ At 
 such a time, the worship of a god who passes as the pro- 
 totype of terror and fury is quite intelligible.— The thirtieth 
 book, in enumerating the different classes of persons to be 
 dedicated at the purusha-medha, gives the names of most 
 of the Indian mixed castes, whence we may at any rate 
 conclude that the complete consolidation of the Brali- 
 manical polity had then been effected. Some of the names 
 here given are of peculiar interest. So, for example, the 
 mdgadka, who is dedicated iu v. 5 " atikrusJUdya." The 
 question arises. What is to be understood by mdgadha ? 
 If we take atikrushta in the sense of "great noise," the 
 most obvious interpretation of "mcJ^j'afZAa is to understand 
 it, with Mahidhara, in its epic sense, as signifying a 
 miustrel,* son of a Vai^ya by a Kihatriya. This agrees 
 excellently with the dedications immediately following (in 
 V. 6), of the siLhta to the dance, and of the ^ailiisha to song, 
 though not so well, it must be admitted, with the dedica- 
 tions immediately preceding, of the Miia (eunuch), the 
 ayog'ib (gambler?), and the purt/dchaM (harlot). The 
 mdgadha again appears in their company in v. 22,t and 
 they cannot be said to throw the best light upon his moral 
 character, a circumstance which is certainly surprising, 
 considering the position held by this caste in the epic; 
 though, on the other hand, in India also, musicians, 
 dancers, and singers (iailiishas) have not at any time 
 enjoyed the best reputation. But another interpretation 
 of the word mdgadha is possible.J In the fifteenth, the 
 
 12s By the Buddhist author Ya- sides, an express condition is laid 
 
 iomitra, scholiast of the Abhidhar- down that the four must belong 
 
 mako^, the Satarudriya is stated neither to the Sildra nor to the 
 
 to be a work by Vy&a against Brahmana caste. [By ayogH, may 
 
 Buddhism, whence, however, we also be meant an unchaste woman ; 
 
 have probably to conclude only see /. Str. , i. 76.] 
 
 that it passed for, and was used as, J Siyana, commenting on the 
 
 a principal support for Siva worship, corresponding passage of the Taitt. 
 
 especially in its detached form as a Brdhmana (iii. 4. i), explains the 
 
 separate Upanishad; see Burnouf's word atikrushtdya by atinindita- 
 
 Introduction d, V Histaire du Buddh- devdya, "dedicated to the very 
 
 isme, p. 568 ; 7. St., ii. 22. Blameworthy as his deity " [in lU- 
 
 * How he comes by this name is, jendra Lila Mitra's edition, p. 347] ; 
 
 it is true, not clear. this 'very Blameworthy,' it is true, 
 
 t Here, however, the kitava is might also refer to the bad moral 
 
 put instead of the ayogH, and be- reputation of the minstrels. 
 
1 1 2 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 so-called Vratya book* of the Atharva-SamMta, the Vratya 
 {i.e., the Indian living outside of the pale of Brahmanism) 
 is brought into very special relation to the punScJuiK and 
 the mdgadha ; faith is called his harlot, the mitra (friend T) ' 
 his mdgadha,; and similarly the dawn, the earth (?), the 
 lightning his harlots, the mmdra (formula), ha^sa (scorn ?), 
 the thunder his mdgadhas. Owing to the obscurity of the 
 Vratya book, the proper meaning of this passage is not 
 altogether clear, and it is possible, therefore, that here also 
 the dissolute minstrel might be intended. Still the con- 
 nection set forth in the Sama-Siitras of Latyayana and 
 Drahyayana, as well as in the corresp'onding passage of the 
 Katiya-Siitra between the Vratyas and the TnagadhadeHya 
 trakmahaTidhu}^'^ and the hatred with which the Magadhas 
 are elsewhere (see Eoth, p. 38) spoken of in the Atharva- 
 Samhita, both lead us to interpret the mdgadha of the 
 Vratya book as an heretical teacher. For the passages, 
 also, which we are more immediately discussing, this inter- 
 pretation vies with the one already given ; and it seems, 
 in particular, to be favoured by the express direction in 
 V. 22, that " the mdgadha, the harlot, the gambler, and the 
 eunuch" must neither be Siidras nor Brahmans, — an in- 
 junction which would be entirely superfluous for the mdga-, 
 dha at least, supposing him to represent a mixed caste, but 
 which is quite appropriate if the word signifies " a native 
 of the country Magadha." If we adopt this latter inter- 
 pretation, it follows that heretical (i.e., Buddhist) opinions 
 must have existed in Magadha at the time of the com- 
 position of this thirtieth adhydya. Meanwhile, however, 
 the question which of these two interpretations is the 
 better one remains, of course, unsolved. — The mention of 
 the nakshatradaria, "star-gazer," in v. 10, and of the 
 
 * Translated by Aufrecht, /. St., Mdgadha — explained by Sslyana as 
 
 i. I30,ff. [The St. Petersburg Diet., MagadhadeSotpanno ■ hrahmachkrl — 
 
 «. v., considers 'the praise of the is contemptuously introduced by 
 
 Vrdtya in Ath. xv. aa an idealising the SUtrakdra (probably Baudbd- 
 
 of the devout vagrant or mendicant yana ?) to T. S., vii. 5. 9. 4, in asso- 
 
 {parivrdjaka, &c.) ;' the fact of his ciation with a. punschaZi ; see /, St., 
 
 being specially connected with the xii. 330. — That there were good 
 
 punichali and the mdgadha remains, Brahmans also in Magadha appears 
 
 nevertheless, very strange, and even from the name Magadhmdsi, which 
 
 with this interpretation leads us to is given to Prdtibodhiputra, the 
 
 surmise suggestions of Buddhism.] second son of Hrasva Jlandiikeya, in 
 
 ■'-" In the very sime way, the Sinkh. Ar., vii. 14. 
 
SAMHITA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 113 
 
 ganaka, " calculator," in v. 20, permits us, at all events, to 
 conclude that astronomical, i.e., astrological, science was 
 then actively pursued. It is to it that, according to Mahi- 
 dhara at least, the "questions" repeatedly mentioned in v. 10 
 relate, although Sayana, perhaps more correctly, thinks 
 that they refer to the usual disputations of the Brahmans. 
 The existence, too, of the so-called Vedic quinquennial 
 cycle is apparent from the fact that in v. 15 (only in 
 xxvii. 45 besides) the five names of its years are enume- 
 rated; and this supposes no inconsiderable proficiency in 
 astronomical observation.^^^ — A. barren "wife is dedicated in 
 V. 1 5 to the Atharvans, by which term Sayana understands 
 the imprecatory and magical formulas bearing the name 
 Atharvan ; to which, therefore, one of their intended effects, 
 barrenness, is here dedicated. If this be the correct ex- 
 planation, it necessarily follows that Atharvan - songs 
 existed at the time of the thirtieth book. — The names of 
 the three dice in v. 18 (krita, tretd, and dvdpara) are 
 explained by Sayana, commenting on the corresponding 
 passage of the Taittiriya-Brahmana, as the names of the epic 
 yugas, which are identical with these — a supposition which 
 will not hold good here, though it may, perhaps, in the 
 case of the Taittiriya-Brahmana.* — The hostile reference 
 to the Charakacharya in v. 18 has already been touched 
 upon (p. 87).i28 
 
 In the earlier books there are two passages in particular 
 which give an indication of the period from which they 
 date. The first of these exists only in the Kanva recen- 
 sion, where it treats of the sacrifice at the consecration of 
 the king. The text in the Madhyamdina recension (ix. 
 40, X. 18) runs as follows : "This is your king, ye So and 
 So," where, instead of the name of the people, only the 
 indefinite pronoun ami is used; whereas iu the Kanva 
 
 ''^' Since sarnixUsara is here men- * Where, moreover, the fourth 
 
 tioned twice, at the beginning and name, hali, is found, instead of the 
 
 at the end, possibly we have here to dskanda given here [see I. Str., i. 
 
 do with a sexennial cycle even (of. 82]. 
 
 T. Br., iii. 10. 4. l) ; see my paper, ^^ Stiyana on T. Br., iii. 4. 16, p. 
 
 Die vedischen Nachrichten von den 361, explains (!)tlieword by 'teacher 
 
 Nakshatra, ii. 298 (1862). The of the art of dancing on the point 
 
 eailiest allusion to the quinquennial of a bamboo ; ' but the vansaTuwtin 
 
 yuga occurs in the Rik itself, iii. is introduced separately iu v. 21 (T. 
 
 55.18(1.25.8). ■ Br., iii. 4. 17). 
 
 U 
 
1 1 4 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 recension we read (xi. 3. 3, 6. 3) : " This is your king, ye 
 Kurus, ye Panchalas." * The second passage occurs in 
 connection with the horse sacrifice (xxui. 18). The ma- 
 hishi, or principal wife of the king, performing this 
 sacrifice, must, ui order to obtain a son, pass the night by 
 the side of the horse that has been immolated, placing its 
 iisna on her wpastha; with her fellow- wives, who are 
 forced to accompany her, she pours forth her sorrow in 
 this lament : " Amba, Ambika, AmbaKka, no one 
 takes me (by force to the horse) ; (but if I go not of myself), 
 the (spiteful) horse wUl lie with (another, as) the (wicked) 
 Subhadra who dwells in Kampila."f Kampala is a town 
 in the country of the Panchalas. Subhadra, therefore, 
 would SQem to be the wife of the king of that district,J 
 and the benefits of the aSvamedha sacrifice are supposed 
 to accrue to them, unless the mahisM consents voluntarily 
 to give herself up to this revolting ceremony. If we 
 are justified in regarding the mahisM as the consort of a 
 king of the Kurus, — and the names Ambika and Amba- 
 lika actually appear in this connection in the Maha- 
 Bhdrata, to wit, as the names of the mothers of Dhrita- 
 rashtra and Pandu, — ^we might then with probability 
 infer that there existed a hostile, jealous feeling on the 
 part of the Kurus towards the Panchalas, a feeling which 
 was possibly at that time only smouldering, but which 
 in the epic legend of the Maha-Bharata we fiid had burst 
 out into the flame of open warfare. However this may 
 be, the allusion to Kamplla at all events betrays that the 
 verse, or even the whole book (as well as the correspond- 
 
 * Sityana, on the corresponding mhhadrikdm IcdmpUavdsinim, are 
 
 passage of the Br^hmana (v. 3. 3. wanting in it. 
 
 11), remarks that Baudhfiyana reads j: As a matter of fact, we find in 
 
 esha DO Bharatd, rdjeti [thus T. S., the Mah^-Bh&ata a Subhadr^ as 
 
 i. 8. 10. 2 ; T. Br., 1. 7- 4- 2]. wife of Arjuna, the representative 
 
 Apastamba, on the contrary, lets us of the Panchalas ; on account of a 
 
 choose between Bharatd, Kuravo, Subhadri (possibly on account of 
 
 Panchdld, KwrupdHchdld, or jand her abduction, related in the Mahd- 
 
 rdjd, accoiding to the people to Bhiirata?) a great war seems to 
 
 whom the king belongs. [The have arisen, as appears from some 
 
 Kdth., XV. 7, has esha te janate words quoted several times by the 
 
 rdjd.] scholiast on Fdnini. Has he the 
 
 t The Brdhmana of the White authority of the MahdbhiCshya for 
 
 Yajua quotes only the beginning of this ? [the Mahibh^hya has nothing 
 
 this verse ; consequently the words about it]. 
 
SAM HIT A OF THE WHITE YAJUS. iij 
 
 ing passages of tlie Taitt. Brahmana), originated in the 
 region of tlie Panchalas; and this inference holds good 
 also for the eleventh book of the Kanva recension.^^* We 
 might further adduce in proof of it the use of the word 
 arjuna in the Madhyamdina, and of jphalguna in the 
 Kanva recension, in a formula ^^ relating to the sacrifice 
 at the consecration of the king (x. 21) : " To obtain intre- 
 pidity, to obtain food(, I, the offerer, ascend) thee(, 
 chariot,) I, the inviolate Arjuna (Phalguna)," i.e., Indra, 
 Indra-like. For although we must take both these words 
 in this latter sense, and not as proper names (see /. St., 
 i. 190), yet, at any rate, some connection must be assumed 
 between this use and the later one, where they appear as 
 the appellation of the chief hero of the Pandus (or Pan- 
 chalas ?) ; and this connection consists in the fact that 
 the legend specially appHed these names of Indra* to 
 that hero of the Pandus (or Panchalas?) whp was pre- 
 eminently regarded by it as an incamatioii of Indra. 
 
 Lastly, as regards the critical relation of the richas in- 
 corporated into the Yajus, I have to observe, that in general 
 the two recensions of the Kanvas and of the Madhyam- 
 dinas always agree with each other in this particular, and 
 that their differences refer, rather, to the Yajus-portions. 
 One half of the Vajasaneyi-Samhita consists of richas, or 
 verses; the other of yajtA,nshi, i.e., formulas in prose, a 
 measured prose, too, which rises now and then to a true 
 rhythmical swing. The greater number of these richas 
 
 , "9 In T. S., vii. 4. 19. i, Ksith. "o g^g y. S., x. 21 ; the paraUel 
 As'., iv. 8, there are two vocatives passages in T. S., i. 8, 15, T. Br., 
 instead of the two accusatives ; he- i. 7. 9. i, Kdth., xv. 8, have no- 
 sides, we have suhhage for suiftad- thing of this. 
 
 rdm. The vocative kdmpSavdsini * The Br^hmana, moreover, ex- 
 is explained by Sstyana, ' thou presaly designates arjuna as the 
 that art veiled in a beautiful gar- ' secret name ' {guhyatti ndma) of In- 
 vaent' (hdmpilaiaidenailtlghyovastra- dra [ii. I. 2. 11, v. 4. 3. 7]. How is 
 
 luchyate; see/. St., xii. 312). this to be understood? The com- 
 
 This explanation is hardly justifi- mentary remarks on it : arjuna 
 
 able, and Mahldhara's reference of iti hindraxya rahasyarn, ndma | ata 
 
 the word to the city of Kdmpila eoa hhalu tatputre Pdndavamadh- 
 
 must be retained, at least for the yame pravrittili. [What is the 
 
 wording of the text which we have reading of the Kdnva recension in 
 
 in the V. S. In the Pratijnfl- these passages ? Has it, as in the 
 
 Pari^ishta, Kdmpilya is given as the Sanihitd, so here also, not arjuna, 
 
 eastern limit of Madhyade^a; see "bui jihalguna?} 
 
 my PratijndsAtra, pp. 101-105. ' 
 
1 16 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 recur in the Rik-Samhita, and frequently with consider- 
 able variations, the origin and explanation of which I have 
 already discussed in the introduction (see above, pp. 9, 10). 
 Eeadings more ancient than those of the Rik are not found 
 in the Yajus, or at least only once in a while, which results 
 mainly from the fact that Rik and Yajus agree for the 
 most part with each other, as opposed to the Saman. We 
 do, however, find that verses have undergone later altera- 
 tions to adapt them to the sense of the ritual. And 
 finally, we meet with a large number of readings which 
 appear of equal authority with those of the Rik, especi- 
 ally in the verses which recur in those portions of the 
 Rik-Samhita that are to be regarded as the most modern. 
 
 The Vajasaneyi-Samhita, in both recensions, has been 
 edited by myself (Berlin, 1849-52), with the commentary 
 of Mahidhara,^^^ written towards the end of the sixteenth 
 century ; and in the course of next year a translation is 
 intended to appear, which will give the ceremonial belong- 
 ing to each verse, together with a full glossary.* Of the 
 work of XJata, a predecessor of Mahidhara, only fragments 
 have been preserved, and the commentary of Madhava, 
 which related to the Kanva recension,'^^^ appears to be 
 entirely lost. Both were supplanted by Mahidhara's work, 
 and consequently obliterated; an occurrence which has hap- 
 pened in a similar way in almost all branches of Indian 
 literature, and is greatly to be regretted. 
 
 I now turn to the Brdhmana of the White Yajus, the 
 Satapatha-Brdhmana, which, from its compass and con- 
 tents, undoubtedly occupies the most significant and im- 
 portant position of all the Brahmanas. First, as to its 
 
 ^^^ For whioli, unfortunately, no tary (lately again by Koer in the 
 
 sufficient manuscript materials were Bibliotheca Indica, vol. Tiii.) [and 
 
 at my disposal ; see Miiller, Preface vol. xv. — A lithographed edition of 
 
 to vol. vi. of his large edition of the the text of the Vdjas. Samhit^ with 
 
 Rik, p. xlvi. sqq. , and my reply in a Hindi translation of Mahidhara's 
 
 Literarisches Centralblatl, 1875, pp. commentary, has been published by 
 
 519, 520. Giriprasidavarman, lUija of Besma, 
 
 * [This promise has not been ful- 1870-74, in Besma]. 
 filled, owing to the pressure of other ^'^ Upon what this special state- 
 labours.] The fortieth adhydya, the ment is based I cannot at present 
 I^opanish^d, is in the Kfovarecen- show; but that Htidhava commented 
 sion commented by Sai;ikara ; it has the V. S. also is shown, for example, 
 been translated and edited several by the quotation in Mahidhara to 
 times together -with this commen- xiii. 45. 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 117 
 
 extent, — this is sufficiently denoted by its very name, 
 which describes it as consisting of 100 patlias (paths), or 
 sections. The earliest known occnrrence of this name is 
 in the ninth vdrttika to Pan. iv. 2. 60, and in the gana 
 to Pan. V. 3. 100, both authorities of very doubtful* anti- 
 quity. The same remark applies to the Naigeya-daivata, 
 where the name also appears (see Benfey's Sdmaveda, p. 
 277). With the single exception of a passage in the twelfth 
 book of the Maha-Bharata, to which I shall revert in the 
 sequel, I have only met with it, besides, in the commen- 
 taries and in the colophons of the MSS. of the work itself. 
 In the Madhyamdina school the ^atapatha-Brahmana con- 
 sists of fourteen kdndas, each of which bears a special 
 title in the commentaries and in the colophons : these 
 titles are usually borrowed from the contents ; ii. and vii. 
 are, however, to me inexplicable.f The fourteen kdndas 
 are together siibdivided into 100 adhydyas (or 68 pra- 
 pdthakas), 438 irdhmanas, and 7624 k'andikds}^^ In the 
 Kanva recension the work consists of seventeen kdndas, 
 the first, fifth, and fourteenth books being each divided 
 into two parts ; the first book, moreover, has here changed 
 places with the second, and forms, consequently, the second 
 and third. The names of the books are the same, but the 
 division into prapdthakas is altogether unknown: the adhy- 
 dyas in the thirteen and a half books that have thus far 
 been recovered * number 85, the irdhmanas 360, the kan- 
 dikds 4965. The total for the whole work amounts, accord- 
 ing to a list accompanying one of the manuscripts, to 104 
 adhydyas, 446 brdhmanas, 5866 kandikds. If from this 
 the recension of the Kanva school seems considerably 
 
 • The gana is an dkritigana, and Ekafddikd, that of the seventh Has- 
 
 the s^itra to which it belongs is, ao- tighata. 
 
 cording to the Calcutta edition, not ''' For statements disagreeing 
 
 explained in the Mahdbhiisiiya ; with this, which are found in the 
 
 possibly therefore it does not belong MSS., see note on pp. 119, 120. 
 
 to the original text of Pilnini. [The J Of the fourth book there exists 
 
 vdrttiha in question is, in point of only the first half ; and the third, 
 
 fact, explained in the Mahdbhdshya thirteenth, and sixteenth books are 
 
 (fol. 67"), and thus the existence of wanting altogether. [It is much to 
 
 the name satapatha, as well as shagh- be regretted that nothing has yet 
 
 tipatha (see p. 119), is guaranteed, been done for the Kdnva recension, 
 
 at least for the time when this work and that a complete copy has not 
 
 was composed ; see /. St., xiii. 443.] yet been recovered.] 
 
 f The name of the second book is 
 
1 1 8 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 shorter than that of the Madhyamdinas, it is so only in 
 appearance; the disparity is protably rather to be ex- 
 plained by the greater length of the TewndiMs in the for- 
 mer. Omissions, it is true, not unfrequently occur. For 
 the rest, I have no means of ascertaining vdth perfect 
 accuracy the precise relation of the Brahmana of the 
 Kanva school to that of the Madhyaindinas ; and what I 
 have to say in the sequel will therefore relate solely to the 
 latter, unless I expressly mention the former. 
 
 As I have already remarked, • when speaking of the 
 Samhita, the first nine M/ndas of the Brahmana refer to 
 the first eighteen books of the Samhita ; they quote the 
 separate verses in the same order* word for word, explain- 
 ing them dogmatically, and establishing their connection 
 with the ritual. The tenth Mwda, which bears the name 
 of Agni-rahasya ("the mystery of fire"), contains mystical 
 legends and investigations as to the significance, &c., of the 
 various ceremonies connected wjth the preparation of the 
 sacred fires, without referring to any particular portions of 
 the Samhita. This is the case likewise in the eleventh 
 Mnda, called from its extent Ashtddhydyi, which contains 
 a recapitulation of the entire ritual already discussed, with 
 supplements thereto, especially legends bearing upon it, 
 together with special particulars concerning the study of 
 the sacred works and the provisions made for this pur- 
 pose. The twelfth kdnda, called Madliywma, " the middle 
 one," treats of prdyaScMttas or propitiatory ceremonies 
 for untoward events, either previous to the sacrifice, dur- 
 ing, or after it ; and it is only in its last portion, where 
 the Sautramanl is discussed, that it refers to certain of the 
 formulas contained in the Samhita (xix.-xxi.) and relating 
 to this ceremony. The thirteenth kdnda, called Aivamedha, 
 treats at some length of the horse sacrifice ; and then with 
 extreme brevity of the human sacrifice, the universal sac- 
 rifice, and the sacrifice to the Manes ; touching upon the 
 relative portions of the Samhita (xxii.-xxxv.) but very 
 seldom, and even then very slightly. The fourteenth 
 kdnda, called Aranyaka, treats ia its first three adhydyas 
 
 * Only in the introduction doea of the new moon and full moon sac- 
 
 a variation occur, as the Brdhmana rifices, which is evidently more cor- 
 
 treats first of the morning and even- rect systematically, 
 ing sacrifices, aud not till afterwards 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 119 
 
 of the puiification of the fire.^^* and here it quotes almost 
 in their entirety the three last books hut one of the Sam- 
 hita (xxxvii-xxxix.) ; the last six adhydyas are of a purely- 
 speculative and legendary character, and form by them- 
 selves a distinct work, or Upanishad, under the name of 
 Vrihad-Aranyaka. This general summary of the con- 
 teats of the several Mndas of itself suggests the conjec- 
 ture that the first nine constitute the most ancient part 
 of the Brahmana, and that the last five, on the contrary, 
 are of later origin, — a conjecture which closer investiga- 
 ticn reduces to a certainty, both on external and internal 
 evidence. "With reference to the external evidence, in the 
 first place, we find it distinctly stated in the passage of 
 tha Maha-Bharata above alluded to (xii. 11734) that the 
 complete Satapatha comprises a Bahasya (the tenth lid/nda), 
 a Sa7f.graha (the eleventh kdnda), and a Pariiesha (the 
 twelfth, thirteenth, and fourteenth kdoidas).^ Further, in 
 the vdrttika already quoted for the name Satapatha, we 
 also meet with the word shashtipatha ^^^ as the name of a 
 wcrk ; and I have no hesitation in referring this name to 
 the first nine Tcdndas, which collectively number sixty 
 adhydyas. On the other hand, in support of the opinion 
 that the last five Mndas are a later addition to the first 
 nize, I have to adduce the term Madhyama {" the middle 
 one "), the name of the twelfth kdnda, which can only be 
 accounted for in this way, whether we refer it merely to 
 the last three kdndas but one, or to all the five* 
 
 ''* The pravargya concerns, ra- third adhydya (viz., of the hin4a), 
 
 tier, the lustration of the sacrificer so that xvi. and xvii. coincide. — [A 
 
 himself; see above note 124, p. 108. highly remarkable statement is found 
 
 '^' It is found in the Pratijni- in the MSS. of the Mildhyamdina 
 
 Pari^ishta also, and along with it recension at v. 3. i. i4,'to the effect 
 
 the name aMtipatha (!) ; iatajpaiha, that this point marks not only hdn- 
 
 on the contrary, is apparently want- dasyd 'rdham, with 236 kandihU, 
 
 ing there ; see my essay on the Pra- but also, according to a marginal 
 
 tijnd-Slitra, pp. 104, 105. gloss, iatapathasyd 'rdham, with 
 
 * In the latter case a difficiilty is 3129 handihds ; see p. 497 of my 
 
 caused bytheKdnva recension, which edition. As a matter of fact, the 
 
 subdivides the last Jcdnda into two preceding kandil'ds do amount to 
 
 parts (xvi., xvii.) ; this division, this latter number ; but if we fix it 
 
 however, seems not to have been as the norm for the second half, 
 
 generally received, since in the MSS. we are only brought down to xii. 7. 
 
 of ^amkara's commentary, at least, 3. 18, that is, not even to the close 
 
 the Upanishad (xvii.) is reckoned of the twelfth book ! The point 
 
 throughout as beginning with the which marks the exact half for the 
 
1 20 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 Now these last five Tcdndas appear to stand in the same 
 order in whicli they actually and successively originated ; 
 so that each succeeding one is to he regarded as less 
 ancient than the one that precedes it. This conjecture is 
 based on internal evidence drawn from the data therein 
 contained, — evidence which at the same time decides the 
 question of their being posterior to the first nine Jcdri4as. 
 In the first place, the tenth Mnda still connects itself 
 pretty closely with the preceding books, especially in its 
 great veneration for ^andilya, the priacipal authority upon 
 the building of altars for the sacred fires. The following 
 are the data which seem to me to favour the view that it 
 belongs to a different period from the first nine books, [n 
 i. 5. I, ff., all the sacrifices already discussed in the pre- 
 ceding books are enumerated in their proper order, aad 
 identified with the several ceremonies of the Agni-chayaia, 
 or preparation of the sacred fireplace. — Of the nanes 
 of teachers here mentioned, several end in -dyana, a ter- 
 mination of. which we find only one example in the 
 seventh, eighth, and ninth kdndas respectively : thus ive 
 meet here with a Eauhinayana, Sayakayana, Vamata- 
 kshayana (also in vii.), Eajastambayana, ^andilyayana (also 
 in ix.), Satyayani (also in viii.), and the ^akayanins. — The 
 Van^a appended at the close (i.e., the list of the teachers 
 of this book) differs from the general Van^a of the entire 
 Brahmana (at the close of the fourteenth book) in not 
 referring the work to Yajnavalkya, but to Sandilya, acd 
 also to Tura Kavasheya (whose ancestor Kavasha we find 
 on the banks of the Sarasvati in the Aitareya-Brahmana). 
 The only tribes mentioned are the Salvas and Kekayas 
 (especially their king, A^vapati Kaikeya), — two western 
 tribes not elsewhere alluded to in the Brahmanas. — The 
 
 present extent of the work (3812 i.) marking of the accents is earlier in 
 
 is at vl 7. I. 19, where also the date than the division of the text 
 
 MSS. repeat the above statement into Jcandikds. As, however, we 
 
 (p. 555). — It deserves special men- find exactly the same state of things 
 
 tion that the notation of the accents with regard to the final and initial 
 
 operates beyond the limits of the words of the individual brdhmanas 
 
 individual handikds, the accent at (see/enaeriite-aiMrsctiuresr, 1875, p. 
 
 the end of a kandiJcd being modified 314), we should also have to refer 
 
 by the accent of the first word of tbe brdhmana division to a later 
 
 the next kandihd. From this we date, and this is hardly possible], 
 might perhaps conclude that the 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 121 
 
 legends here as well as in the four succeeding Mndas are 
 mostly of an historical character, and are besides chiefly- 
 connected with individual teachers who cannot have lived 
 at a time very distant from that of the legends themselves. 
 In the earlier Mndas, on the contrary, the legends are 
 mostly of a mythological character, or, if historical, refer 
 principally to occurrences belonging to remote antiquity ; 
 so that here a distinct difference is evident.^The trayi 
 vidyd (the three Vedas) is repeatedly discussed in a very 
 special manner, and the number of the richas is stated to 
 be 12,000, that of the yajus-Y&isea 8000, and that of the 
 sdmans 4000. Here also for the first time appear the 
 names Adhvaryus, Bahvrichas, and Chhandogas side by 
 side ; * here, too, we have the first occurrence of the words 
 itpanisJiad (as sdra of the Veda), wpanishaddm ddeidh, 
 mimdnsd (mentioned once before, it is true, in the first 
 Jcdnda), adhidevaiam, adhiyajnam, adhydtmam ; ^^^ and 
 lastly, here for the first time we have the form of address 
 hhavdn (instead of the earlier bhagavdn). ISTow and then 
 also a Sloka is quoted in confirmation, a thing which occurs 
 extremely seldom in the preceding books. Further, many 
 of the technical names of the sdmans and Nostras are men- 
 tioned (this, however, has occurred before, and also in the 
 tenth book of the Samhita) ; and generally, frequent refer- 
 ence is made to the connection subsisting with the richas 
 and sd^nans, which harmonises with the peculiarly mys- 
 tical and systematising character of the whole Jcdnda. 
 
 That the eleventh Tcdndd is a supplement to the first 
 nine is sufficiently evident from its contents. The first 
 two adhydyas treat of the sacrifices at the new and full 
 moon; the four following, of the morning and evening sacri- 
 ficial fires, of the sacrifices at the three seasons of the year, 
 of the inauguration of the pupil by the teacher {dchdrya), of 
 the proper study of the sacred doctrines, &c. ; and the last 
 two, of the sacrifices of animals. The Rigveda, Yajurveda, 
 and Sdmaveda, the Atharvdfigirasas, the anusdsanas, the 
 vidyds, the vdJcovdkya, the itihaSapurdna, the ndrdsansis, 
 and the gdihds are named as subjects of study. We have 
 
 * Along with the ydtuvidas (those ^^^ M{mdnsd, adhidaivatam, and 
 
 skilful in witchcraft), sarpavidas adhydtmam occur several times in 
 
 (serpent - charmers), deuajanavidas, the earlier books. 
 &c. 
 
122 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 already met with tliis enumeration (see. p. 93) in the 
 second chapter of the Taitt. Aranyaka, although in a con- 
 siderably later form,* and we find a similar one in the 
 fourteenth Tidnda. In all these passages, the commen- 
 taries,t probably with perfect justice, interpret these ex- 
 pressions in this way, viz., that first the Samhitas are speci- 
 fied, and then the different parts of the Brahmanas ; so that 
 by the latter set of terms we should hare to understand, not 
 distinct species of works, but only the several portions 
 respectively so designated which were blended together in 
 the Brahmanas, and out of which the various branches of 
 literature were in course of time gradually developed. The 
 terms ami^dsana (" ritual precept " according to Sayana, 
 but in Vrihad-Ax., iL 5. 19, iv. 3. 25, Kathopan., 6. 15, 
 "spiritual doctrine"), mdyd, "spiritual doctrine," and 
 gdihd, " strophe of a song " (along with sloka), are in fact 
 so used in a few passages (gdthd indeed pretty freq^uently) 
 in these last five books, and in the Brahmanas or Upa- 
 nishads of the Rik and Saman. Similarly vdkovdh/a in the 
 sense of " disputation " occurs in the seventh kdnda, and 
 itihdsa at least once in the eleventh kd/nda itself (i. 6. 9). 
 It is only the expressions purdna and ndrdiansis that do 
 not thus occur ; in their stead — in the sense of narrative, 
 legend — ^we find, rather, the terms dkhydna, vydkhydna, 
 anvdkhydna, updkhydna. Vydkhydna, together with anu- 
 vydkhydna and upavydkhydna, also occurs in the sense of 
 " explanation." In these expressions, accordingly, we have 
 evidence that at the time of this eleventh kdnda certain 
 Samhitas and Brahmanas of the various Vedas, and even 
 the Atharva-Samhita itself, were in existence. But, fur- 
 ther, as bearing upon this point, in addition to the single 
 verses from the songs of the Rik, which are here, as in the 
 earlier books, frequently cited (by " tad etad rishind 'bhy- 
 anijyktam"), we have in the eleventh kdnda one very special 
 quotation, extending over an entire hymn, and introduced 
 by the words " tad etad uktapratyuktam panchadasarcham 
 Bahvrichdh prdhuh." It is an interesting fact for the 
 critic that in our text of the Rik the hymn in question 
 
 * From it has evidently originated + Here Sdya^a forms an excep- 
 
 a passage in Ydjuavalkya's Code (i. tion, as he at least states the other 
 
 45), which does not harmonise at all explanation also,, 
 with the rest of that work. 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 123 
 
 (mand. x. 95) numters not fifteen but eighteen richas. 
 Single ilohas are also frequently quoted as confirmation. 
 From one of these it appears that the care taken of horses 
 in the palace of Janamejaya had at that time passed into 
 a proverb : this is also the first mention of this king. 
 Eudra here for the first time receives the name of Maha- 
 deva * (v. 3. 5). — In iii. 3. i, if!, special rules are for the first 
 time given concerning the begging (hhikshd) of the hrahma- 
 chdrins, &c., which custom is besides alluded to in the 
 thirtieth book of the Samhita [v. 18]. — But what throws 
 special light upon the date of the eleventh kdnda is the fre- 
 quent mention here made, and for the first time, of Janaka, 
 king (samrdf) of Videha, as the patron of Yajnavalkya. 
 The latter, the Kaurupanchala Uddalaka Aruni and his 
 son Svetaketu, are (as in the Vrihad-Aranyaka) the chief 
 figures in the legends. 
 
 The twelfth kdnda alludes to the destruction of the 
 kingdom of the Srinjayas, whom we find in the second 
 kdnda at the height of their prosperity, and associated 
 with the KuiTis. This connection may still be traced here, 
 for it seems as if the Kauravya Valhika Pratipiya wished 
 to take their part against Chakra, their enemy, who was a 
 native of the country south of the Eeva, and priest of King 
 Dushtaritu of Da^apurushamrajya, but that his efforts 
 failed.- — The names VarkaH (i.e., Vashkali) and Naka 
 Maudgalya probably also point to a later period of time ; 
 the latter does not occur elsewhere except in the Vrihad- 
 Aranyaka and the Taittiriyopanishad. — The Rigveda, the 
 Yajurveaa, and the Samaveda are mentioned, and we find 
 testimony to the existence of the Vedic literature generally 
 in the statement that a ceremony once taught by Indra to 
 Vasishtha and formerly only known to the Vasishthas — 
 whence in former times only a Vasishtha could act ^s 
 brahman (high priest) at its performance — might now be 
 studied by any one who liked, and consequently that any 
 one might officiate as brahman thereat.^^^ — In ui. 4. i 
 occurs the first mention oi.purusha Ndrdyana. — ^The name 
 of Proti Kaulambeya Kausurubindi probably presupposes 
 the existence of the Panchala city Kau^ambi. 
 
 * In the sixth Mnda he is still ^^' See on this /. St., x. 34, 35. 
 called mahdn devah. 
 
124 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 The thirteenth Mmda, repeatedly mentions purusha N&- 
 rdyana. Here also Kuvera Vai^ravana, king of the Eaksh- 
 asas, is named for the first time. So, too, we find here 
 the first allusion to the s'&ktas of the Rik, the anuvdJcas * 
 of the Yajus, the daSats of the Saman, and the parvans of 
 the Atharvanas and Angirasas, which division, however, 
 does not appear in the extant text of the Atharvan. A 
 division into parvans is also mentioned in bonnection with 
 the Sarpavidya and the Devajanavidya, so that hy these 
 names at all events distinct works must be understood. 
 Of Itihasa and Purana nothing but the name is given ; 
 they are not spoken of as divided into parvans, a clear 
 proof that even at that time they were merely understood 
 as isolated stories and legends, and not as works . of any 
 extent.1^ — ^While ia the first niue books the statement 
 that a subject has been folly treated of already is expressed 
 by tasyokto handhuh [or, so 'sdv eva handhuh, and the like], 
 the same is expressed here by tasyoktam brdhmanam. — The 
 use in V. i. i8 of the words eJcavachana and bahuvachana 
 exactly corresponds to their later grammatical significa- 
 tion. — This Mnda is, however, very specially distinguished 
 by the number of gdthds, strophes of historical purport, 
 which it quotes at the close of the account of the horse 
 sacrifice, and in which are given the names of kuigs^who 
 celebrated it in earlier times. Only one of these gdthds 
 appears in the Rik-Samhita (mand. iv. 42. 8) ; the greater 
 number of them recur in the last book of the Aitareya- 
 Brahmana, and in the Maha-Bharata, xii. 910, ff., ia both 
 places with many variations.t The question here arises 
 whether we have to regard these gdthds as fragments of 
 more lengthy hymns, or if they must be looked upon 
 merely as separate memorial verses. The fact that in con- 
 nection with some of these names (if we take into account 
 
 * This term, however, occurs in terms in the Sdnkh. Sr., xvi. 2 ; At- 
 
 the preceding kdndas also, e.g., in val. Sr.,x. 7. 
 
 ix. I. I. 15. .f The passages in the Mahsi-Bfai- 
 
 138 Tiiis ig favoured alaO' by the rata evidently connect themselves 
 
 fact that they are here attributed to with the Satapatha-Brithmana, to 
 
 fishermen and fowlers ; with which which, as well as to its author Ystj- 
 
 may be compared the tale of the navalkya, and his patron Janata, 
 
 fishermaiden as mother of Vydsa, in special regard is had in this book of 
 
 the Mahd-Bhilrata. The whole state- theMahd-Bhitrata. [See also Sdiikh., 
 
 ment recurs in almost identical xvi. 8. 25-29. 32.] 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 125 
 
 tlie Aitareya-Brahmana also) two, three, four, five, and 
 even six verses are quoted, and always in the same metre, 
 in Sldkas, certainly favours the former view. Only one ex- 
 ception occurs where the first and fourth verses are MoJcas, 
 hut the second trishtuhh, the third not being quoted at all ; 
 it is, however, according to the commentary, understood by 
 implication, so that this instance tells, perhaps, with a very 
 special force in favour of the view in question. The ana- 
 logy of the gdthds or Mokas of non-historic purport quoted 
 elsewhere cannot be brought forward in support either of 
 the one view or of the other, for the very same uncertainty 
 exists respecting them. Moreover, these verses repeatedly 
 contain very old Vedic forms.* Again, their expressions 
 of eulogy are for the most part very hyperbolical, and they 
 might therefore perhaps be looked upon as the utterance 
 of a still fresh feeHug of gratitude ; so that we should have 
 to consider their origin as in part contemporary with the 
 princes they extol : otherwise this circumstance does not 
 readUy admit of explanation.f A passage in the thirteenth 
 kdnda itself directly favours this view (see /. St., i. 187). 
 Among the kings here named the following deserve special 
 mention: Bharata, son of Duhshanta and the Apsaras 
 Sakuntala, and descendant of Sudyumna — Satanika J Sat- 
 rajita, king of the Bharatas, and enemyof Dhritarashtra, 
 king of the Ka^is — Purukutsa § Aikshvaka — Paxa Atnara 
 Hairanyanabha Kausalya — but above all, Janamejaya 
 Parikshita, with the Parikshitiyas (his three brothers), Bhi- 
 masena, Ugrasena, and Srutasena, who by means of the 
 horse sacrifice were absolved from " all guilt, all brahma- 
 hatyd." The time when these last four Uved cannot be con- 
 sidered as very distant from that of thekdmia itself, since 
 their sacrificial priest Indrota Daivapa Saunaka (whom the 
 Maha-Bharata, xii. 5595, also specifies as such) is once 
 mentioned in it apparently as coming forward in opposi- 
 
 * And names too : thus, the king Still this is both in itself a very 
 
 o£ the Panchilas is called Kraivya, forcedexplanation, and besides many 
 
 the explanation given by the Brdh- of these veraes are of purely histori- 
 
 mana being that the Panchdlas were cal purport, and contain no allusion 
 
 ' formerly ' called Krivis. to the presents given to the priests. 
 
 + Unless these verses were merely J See Vdj. S., 34. 52 (not in the 
 
 invented by priests in order to sti- Rik). 
 
 raulate kings to copy and emulate § See Rik, mand. iv. 42. 8. 
 the liberality of their ancestors. 
 
1 26 VEDIC LITER A TUBE. 
 
 tion to Bliallaveya ; while his own opinion, differiag from 
 that of the latter, is in turn rejected by Tajnavalkya. On 
 account of the interest of the subject I -introduce here an- 
 other passage from the fourteenth book, from which we 
 may gather the same result. We there find a rival of 
 Yajnavalkya testing bini with a question, the solution of 
 which the former had previously obtained from a Gan- 
 dharva, who held in his possession the daughter of Kapya 
 Patamchala of the country of the Madras ; — ^the question, 
 namely, " Whither have the Parikshitas gone ? " the solu- 
 tion of which therefore appears to have been looked upon 
 as extremely difficult. Yajnavalkya answers: "Thither 
 where (all) oAvamMha sacnficers go." Consequently the 
 Parikshitas must at that time have been altogether 
 extinct. Yet their life and end must have been stOl 
 fresh in the memory of the people, and a subject of 
 general curiosity.* It almost seems as though their " guilt, 
 their brahmahatyd," had been too great for people to be- 
 lieve that it could have been atoned for by sacrifices were 
 they ever so holy ; or that by such means the Parikshitas 
 could have become partakers of the reward fixed for other 
 less culpable evil-doers. It appears further as if the Brah- 
 mans had taken special pains to rehabilitate their memory, 
 and in this undoubtedly they were completely successful. 
 Or was it, on the contrary, that the majesty and power of 
 the Parikshitas was so great and dazzling, and their end so 
 surprising, that it was difficult to believe they had really 
 passed away ? I prefer, however, the former explanation. 
 The fourteenth kdnda, at the beginning of its first part 
 (that relating to ritual), contains a legend of a contention 
 among the gods, in which Vishnu came off victorious, 
 whence it became customary to say, "Vishnu is the 
 Sreshtha (luckiest ?) of the gods." This is the first time 
 that we find Vishnu brought into such prominence; 
 indeed, he otherwise only appears in the legend of 
 the three strides, and as this representative of the 
 sacrifice itself, — a position which is, in fact, ascribed to 
 
 * The country of the Madras lies wife of Pitndu and mother of the 
 
 in the north-west, and is therefore two youngest Pslndavas, Nakula and 
 
 remote from the country of the Sahadeva, was a native of this re- 
 
 Kurus. According to the Mahd- gion, and Parikshit also had a Md- 
 
 Bhdrata, however, Mildrl, second dravati to wife. 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJIS. 127 
 
 Lim here also. Indra, as here related, afterwards strikes 
 off Ms head in jealousy .^^s The second part of this Mnda, 
 the VriJiad-Aranyaka, which consists of five prapdthakas, 
 or six adhydyas, is again divided into three Jcdndas, the 
 Madhukdnda, adhy. i. ii. (prap. i. i-ii. 5) ; the Ydjnaval- 
 Mya-hdnda, adhy. iii. iv. {prap. ii. 6-iv. 3) ; and the Khila- 
 Mnda, adhy. v. vi. (prap. iv. 4-v. 5). Of these three divi- 
 sions, each succeeding one appears to be later than that which 
 precedes it, and each closes with a Van^a or statement of 
 the line of teachers, carried back to Brahman, the primeval 
 source. The third brdhmana of the Madhu-kanda is an 
 explanation of three Mokas prefixed to it, a form of 
 which we have no previous example. The fifth (adhy. ii. 
 i) contains, as has already been stated (p. 51), another 
 recension of the legend related in the fourth adhydya of 
 the Kaushitaky-Upanishad, of Ajata^atru, the king of 
 Ka^i, who was jealous of Janaka's fame as a patrou of 
 learning. The eighth (adhy. ii. 4) contains another re- 
 cension of the closing legend in the Yajnavalkiya-kanda, 
 of Yajnavalkya's two wives, Maitreyi and Katyayani, — 
 this being the first mention we have of these names. 
 Here, as also in the eleventh kanda, we find an enumera- 
 tion of the subjects of Vedic study, namely, Rigveda, 
 Yajurveda, Sdmaveda, the Atharvdngirasas, itihdsa, pu- 
 rdna, vidyds, wpanishads, ilokas, siitras, anuvydkhydnas, 
 vydkhydnas.* The same enumeration recurs in the Yajna- 
 valklya-kanda (adhy. vi. 10). Samkara and Dvivedaganga, 
 the commentators of the Vrihad-Aranyaka, both. Eke 
 Sayana (on the eleventh kdnda), take the expressions 
 itihdsa, &c., to mean sections in the Brahmanas. They 
 are, in fact, as I have already pointed out (p. 122), used in 
 
 139 This is wrong. The gods send the Panch. Br. of Makha alone (ef. 
 
 forth ants to gnaw the bowstring of also T. S., iii. 2. 4. l). In the 
 
 Vishnu, who stands leaning on his Satapatha, Makha is only mentioned 
 
 bended bow ; the, string, snapping among the gods who assembled, 
 
 and springing upwards, severs his though, to be sure, he appears im- 
 
 head from his body. The same mediately before Vishnu, 
 
 legend recurs not only in the par- * The last five expressions take 
 
 allel passage of the Taitt. Ar. (v. here the place of anvMsana, vdko- 
 
 l), but also in the Pailch. Br., vii. 5. vdkya, ndrdJansis, and gdtkds in 
 
 6 ; but whilst in the ^at. Br. it, is the eleventh book. The latter are 
 
 related of Vishnu, the Taitt. Ar. clearly the more ancient, 
 tells it of Maklia Vaish^ava, and 
 
128 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 this sense in the Brahmanas themselves. It is only in 
 regard to siktra* that I am unable to prove a similar nse 
 (though Dvivedaganga pretty frequently calls certain 
 sentences by the name of sObtra, e.g., i. 2. 18, 22, 3. i, &c.); 
 and this term raises a doubt whether the opinion of the 
 commentators ought to hold good with reference to these 
 passages also, and their time. The ninth (which is the 
 last) brdhmana is evidently the one from which the 
 Madhu-kanda received its name. It treats of the intimate 
 relation existing between the four elements (earth, water, 
 fire, air), the sun, the quarters of the heavens, the moon, 
 lightning, thunder, dkdSa (ether), &c., on the one hand, 
 and all beings on the other ; this relation being set forth 
 by representing the one as the madhu (honey) of the 
 other. This doctrine is traced to Dadhyanch Atharvana, 
 as is also, in fact, done in the Bik-Samhita itself (i 116. 
 1 2, 1 17. 22). In -the beginning of the fourth Jcdnda of the 
 ^atap. Brahmana also (iv. i. 5. 18) we find the madhu 
 ndma brdhmanam mentioned expressly in this connection ; 
 Sayana, too, quotes ^dtydyana (- Vdjasaneyau) in support 
 of it. A very early date is thus guaranteed for the 
 name at least, and probably also for the contents of this 
 chapter; though its form, of course, cannot make any 
 pretension to high antiquity. The concluding Van^a here, 
 as elsewhere, varies very much in the two schools ; that 
 is, as regards the last twenty members or so back to Yaska 
 and Asurayana ; but from these upwards to the mythical 
 fountain-heads the two schools generally agree, Asura- 
 yana himself (consequently, also Yaska, who is recorded 
 as his contemporary) is here placed two stages after Asuri ; 
 at the end of the Khila-kanda he is even designated as 
 his pupil; Asuri, again, being set down as the pupil of 
 Yajnavalkya. The list closes, therefore, with about the 
 twenty-fifth member from the latter. It must Conse- 
 quently have been continued long after the Madhu-kanda 
 had been finally put into shape, since both the analogy of 
 the Vah^a contained in the last irdhmana but one of the 
 Khila-kanda and the very nature of the case forbid the 
 
 * The word s&tra is found several supreme Brahman itself, which, like 
 times here, but in the sense of a band, embraces and holds together 
 ' thread, baud,' only, to denote the eyerything. 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 129 
 
 conclusion that its redaction could have taken place so 
 late as the twenty-fifth generation from Yajnavalkya. The 
 commentators never enter into any explanation of these 
 Van^as; doubtless, therefore, they too regarded them as 
 supplements. The names themselves are naturally highly 
 interesting, and, as far at least as the later stages are con- 
 cerned, are prohahly strictly authentic. — The aim of the 
 YdJTw/oalMya-h&nda is the glorification of Yajnavalkya, 
 and it recounts how, at the court of his patron Janaka, 
 king of Videha, he silenced all the Brahmans* of the 
 Ktirupanchalas, &c., and gained his patron's full confidence 
 (like the corresponding legends in the twelfth book of the 
 Maha-Bharata). The legend narrated in the eleventh Tcdnda 
 (vi. 3. I. ff.) may perhaps have been the model; at least 
 the Yajnavalklya here begins in exactly the same manner, 
 and gives also, almost in the same words, the account of 
 the discomfiture and punishment of Vidagdha Sakalya, 
 which alone is given in the eleventh h&nda. It closes with 
 a legend already given in the Madhu-kanda, but with some 
 deviations. The expressions pdnditya, muni, and mauna, 
 occurring in this Jcdnda, are worthy of special notice as 
 being new^*" (iii. 2. i, iv. 2. 25); further, ekahansa, ira- 
 muna, tdpasa (iv. i. 12, 22), pravrdjin (iv. 2. 25, where 
 hhikshdcharya is recommended), and pratibuddha (iv. 2. 
 17 ; the verb pratibudh occurs in this, sense i. 2. 21), and 
 lastly, the names chdnddla and paidJcasa (iv. i. 22). I am 
 now of opinion t that it is to this Yajnavalkiya-kanda 
 that the vdrttika to Panini iv. 3. loj refers when it speaks 
 of the Ydjnavalkdni brdhmandni as not purdna-prokta, 
 but tulyakdla, " contemporaneous," i.e., with Panini. The 
 wording of the vdrttika does not necessarily imply that 
 
 * Among them Aivala, the king's hitd, viz., viii. 17. 14, and x. 136. 
 
 Hotar, Vidagdha ^ikalya, who lost 2-5." — First German edition. Errata, 
 
 his life for his impertinence, Kahola Paulkasa is found aJso in V. S. 30. 
 
 Kaushitakeya, and GitrgI Vdoha- 17. 
 
 knavi, who all four (the latter, at t Formerly I was of different 
 
 least, according to the Grihya-Slitra) opinion ; see /. St., i. 57. Many of 
 
 may be looked upon as representa- the views there expressed — especi- 
 
 tives of the Rik, towards which ally pp. 161-232 — have here either 
 
 therefore a kind of jealousy is here been further developed or modified 
 
 unmistakably exhibited. after careful consideration of the 
 
 uonrpjjg ^ord viuni occurs in various passages, as may be perceived 
 
 the later portions of the Rik -Sam- by comparison. 
 
 I 
 
I30 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 these Brahmanas originated from Yajnavalkya himself; 
 consequently they might bear his name simply because 
 treating of him. I prefer the latter view, for it appears to 
 me very hazardous to regard the entire Satapatha-Brah- 
 mana, or even its last books only, as directly bearing the 
 nanie of Yajnavalkya, — ^however fully it may embody his 
 system, — or to set it down as contemporaneous with, or 
 but little anterior to, Panini. In regard to the Yajnaval- 
 Wya-kanda, however, I have not the slightest hesitation in 
 doing the latter.'^f^ — ^Finally, the KhilaMmda, or last kdrjdd 
 of the Vrihad-lxanyaka, is xiniformly described by tie 
 commentators as such a hhUa, or supplement ; and as a 
 matter of fact it is clearly enough distinguished from the 
 other kdndas. Its first cuihydya — ^the fifth of the Vrihad- 
 Aranyaka — ^is made up of a number of small fragments, 
 which contain for the most part mystical plays upon words, 
 of the most clumsy description. The second adhydya con- 
 tains two Irdhmanas, parts of which, as I have already 
 remarked (p. 71), recur in precisely the same form in the 
 C!hhandogyopanishad vii. i, 3. Of the third hrdhrruma, 
 which contaios ritual injunctions, we also find another 
 recension, ibid. viL .2. It concludes with a Vania, not, 
 however, in the form of a list, but of a detailed account. 
 According to it, the first author of the doctrine here taught 
 was Uddalaka Aruni, who imparted it to Yajnavalkya, here 
 for the first time called Vajasaneya; * his pupil was Madh- 
 uka Paiugya, from whom the doctrine was transmitted to 
 Chiida Bhagavitti, then to Janaki Ayahsthiina, and lastly 
 to Satyakama Jabala. The name of the latter (a teacher 
 often alluded to in the Chhandogyopanishad) is in fact 
 borne in later works by a school of the White Yajus, so 
 
 ^*^ On thia subject compare Gold- nini. Although he here counts 
 
 Btiicker's detailed discussion in bis Yajnavalkya among the pu/rdnas, 
 
 Pinini, p. 132-140, and my special 'ancients,' — and this interpretation 
 
 rejoinder, /. St., v. 65-74. xiii 443, is required by the wording of the 
 
 444, /. Str., ii. 214. According to vArtt^a, — ^yet the Kd^ikS, on the 
 
 these expositions, the author of the contrary, expressly declares him to 
 
 vdrttikas must, on the one hand, have be "not chiralaXla." 
 considered the Tdjnavalkdni Bnih- * In the YiJjnaTalkiyakinda Ud- 
 
 maufdni as originally promulgated d^laka Aruni is, like the other Brah- 
 
 (prohta) by Ydjnavalkya ; but, on mans, silenced by Yiljnavalkya, no 
 
 the other hand, he must also have mention being made of his being 
 
 looked upon the recension then ex- the preceptor of the latter, 
 tant as contemporaneous with Pi- 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 131 
 
 tkat we might perhaps ascribe to him the final adjustment 
 of this doctrine in its existing form. The fourth and last 
 hrdhmarui of this adhydya is, like the third, surprisiag, 
 from the nature of its contents, which, consisting as they 
 do of the rites to be observed before, and at the time of, 
 coitus, as well as after the birth of a son, more properly 
 pertain to a Grihya-Siitra. It too closes with a Van^a,* 
 this time of quite unusual length, and distinguished, as far 
 as the more recent members axe concerned, by this peculi- 
 arity, that their names are formed by the addition oiputra 
 to the mother's name (see above p. 71), and that both 
 parts of the names are accentuated. Asuri is here called 
 the pupil of Yajnavalkya, and the latter the pupU of 
 Uddalaka. Then, having passed through ten more stages 
 and arrived at Aditya, the sun-god, as the original author, 
 we find the following words as the close of the whole 
 Brahmana : dditydni 'Tndm Sukldni yaj'AnsM Vdjasaneyena 
 Ydjnavallcyend "khydyante, ' these White Yajus-texts ori- 
 ginating t from Aditya are transmitted by , Vajasaneya 
 Yajnavalkya.' According to ^amkara and Dvivedaganga, 
 this Van^a does not refer to the KhQa-kanda, but to the 
 entire Pravachana, the entire Veda {i.e., the White Yajus). 
 This view is at all events favoured by the fact that the 
 Vania at the close of the tenth book (the only one which 
 appears in the whole of the Satapatha-Brahmana, besides 
 those of the Madhu-kanda, YajnavaUdya-kanda, and Khila- 
 kanda) J evidently refers to this Van^a, and presupposes 
 its existence when at its commencement it says : samdnam 
 d Sdmjiviputrdt, ' up to Sainjiviputra the teachers are the 
 same.' For, ascending from this Samjiviputra, there are 
 still in this Vania three steps up to Yajnavalkya, while in 
 the tenth book, as before remarked, the doctrine is not 
 traced up to the latter at aU, but from Samjiviputra 
 through five steps to ^andilya, and through two more to 
 Tura Kavasheya.§ — This latter circumstance suggests to 
 
 * In the Kdnva recension the Van^a here too at the close after 
 
 Vanfes inTariably form separate the words : Ydjnavalkyemi "khyd- 
 
 chapt«rs. yante. 
 
 + Or : ' these White Yajus-texts § Who is quoted in the Aitar. 
 
 are named by Vdijasaneya Y^jnaval- Br^mana as contemporaneous with 
 
 kya as originating from Aditya' (?). Janamejaya (as his sacrificial priest); 
 
 J The Kitnva recension adds this see /. St., i. 203, note. 
 
132 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 us, moreover, the possibility of yet another division of the 
 Satapatha-Brahmana with reference to the origin of the dif- 
 ferent kdndas. For in the first five and the last four Mndas 
 the name of Yajnavalkya meets us exclusively, and very fre- 
 quently, as that of the teacher whose opinion is appealed to 
 as the decisive authority, whose system consequently is in 
 any case there set forth* Further, if we except the Yajna- 
 valkiya-kanda and the gdthds in the thirteenth Mnda, races 
 settled in eastern or central Hiadustan are the only ones 
 mentioned in^ these kdindas, viz., the Kurupanchalas, Ko- 
 salavidehas, Sviknas, and Srinjayas. Once only the Pra- 
 chyas (eastern tribes) are opposed to the Vahikas (western 
 tribes) ; again there is once mention madeof theUdichyas (in- 
 habitants of the north) ; and lastly, the (southern) Nishadhas 
 are once alluded to iu the name of their king, Nala Naisha- 
 dha (or, as he is here called, Naishidha). From this the 
 remaining kdndas — the sixth to the tenth — differ palpably 
 enough. They recognise SandUya as the final authority f 
 instead of Yajnavalkya, whom they do not even name ; 
 neither do they mention any but north-western races, 
 viz., the Gandharas with their king Nagnajit, the Salvas, 
 and the Kekayas.J May not the above-mentioned Vaiiia 
 apply not only to the tenth book, but to these fiVe kdndas ? 
 Since the latter treat specially of the fire-ritual, of the 
 erection of the sacred fire-altars, their possible north- 
 
 ' The fact that this is so clear later times. Besides, his patron Ja- 
 may easily account for the circum- naka is mentioned at least iu the 
 stance that the Furdmas have here Kaushitaky - Upanishad. [In two 
 for once a statement in conformity sections of ,the Kaushltaki-, or, 
 with fact, as they cite Yajnavalkya S^kh^yana-Aranyaka, which, how- 
 as the author of the White Tajus. ever, are clearly of very late origin, 
 We may here mention that the name Yajnavalkya himself is actually 
 of Yajnavalkya occurs nowhere else cited (9. 7 and 13. i) ; but these 
 in Vedic literature, which might be passages are themselves direct quo- 
 explained partly by the difference of tations from Satap. Br. xiv. — In the 
 locality, partly by his having edited Gopatha-Br., which shows so many 
 the White Yajus after the text of special points of relationship to the 
 the other Vedas had been fixed ; Satapatha, Yiljuavalkya is never 
 though the latter reason seems in- mentioned.] 
 
 sufficient, since other teachers of •!■ So do the Sdma-Slitras ; SiCn- 
 
 the White Yajus are mentioned fre- dilya is mentioned besides in the 
 
 quently in later Vedic literature, as, Chhindogyop. only, 
 for instance, Aru^li, ^vetaketu, Satya- t ^he legend concerning these re- 
 
 kiima Jdbdla, &c., who are either curs the Chhdndogyop. 
 his contemporaries, or belong to even 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 133 
 
 western origin might be explained by the fact that the 
 doctrine upon this subject had, though differing from that 
 of the Persa- Aryans, been kept particularly pure in the 
 north-west owing to the proximity of this latter people* 
 However this may be, whether the north-western origin of 
 the doctrine of these five kdndas be well founded or other- 
 wise,"^ they at any rate belong, in their present form, 
 to the same period as (the tenth possibly to a somewhat 
 later period than) the first five Icdndas. On this point the 
 mention of Aruna Aupave^i, Aruni, ^vetaketu Aruneya, 
 and of Indradyumna (in the tenth book), as well as the 
 frequent reprehension of the Charakadhvaryus, is decisive. 
 That the various parts of the Brahmana were blended to- 
 gether by one arranging hand "^ is evident in particular 
 from the repeated occurrence of phrases intimating that a 
 subject has already been treated of in an earlier part, or is 
 to be found presented more in detail in a later part. A 
 closer investigation of the various instances where this 
 occurs has not as yet been within my power. 
 
 The number of deviations in regard to ritual or readings 
 cited in the Brahmana is very great. To these regard is 
 had here and there even in the Samhita itself, two differ- 
 ent mantras being quoted side by side as equally good. 
 Most frequently the citation of such variations in the 
 Brahmana is introduced by the words ity eke, or tad dhuh ; 
 yet pretty often the names of individual teachers are also 
 mentioned, who must here, in part at least, be looked upon 
 as representing the schools which bear their names. Thus 
 in addition to those already named we have : Ashadha 
 Savayasa, Barku Varshna, Aupoditeya, Panchi, Takshan, 
 Jivala Chailaki, Asuri, Madhuki, Kahoda Kaushitaki, Var- 
 shnya Satyayajna, Satyayajni, Tandya, Budila Alvatara^vi, 
 
 * Ought we to bring the ^iki,- ^" The strong censure passed up- 
 
 yanins into direct connection with on the residents on the seven western 
 
 the latter? But then what would rivers in ix. 3. 1.24 must be ascribed 
 
 become of the connection between to this ' arranging hand ; ' see 7. Si., 
 
 Siikdiyanya (in the Maitr£tyani-Upa- xiii. 267. — That the White Yajus 
 
 niehad) and the ^^kyas ? (!). was arranged in eastern HindnsUn, 
 
 1*^ See on this my detailed dis- seems to be proved by the statements 
 
 cussion in /. St., xiii. 265-269, where in the PratijnS-Parilishta respecting 
 
 I call special attention to various the extent of the Madhyadela ; see 
 
 differences in point of language be- my essay on the Pratijn^-Slitra, pp. 
 
 tweeu books i.-v. and vi.-ix. loi, 105. 
 
134 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 Eama Aupatasvini, Kaukiista, MaMtthi, Mudimbha* Au- 
 danya, Saumapau Manutantavyau, Satyakama Jabala, Sai- 
 lali, &c. Besides the Charakadlivaryus, BMllaveya in par- 
 ticular is regularly censured, from whicli I conclude, as 
 already stated (p. 95), that the BhaUavi-Brahmana should 
 be reckoned among those of the Black Yajus. By the 
 " eke" where these are found fault with, we should pro- 
 bably also understand (e.g., once for certain in the lirst 
 h&nda) the adherents of the Black Tajus. Once, however 
 (in the eighth hdrnda), a reading of the Kanva school is 
 quoted by "eke" and disputed. How the matter stands 
 in the Brahmana of the latter as to this passage, whether 
 it finds fault with the reading of the Madhyamdina school, 
 I am not able to say. A collection of passages of this 
 kind would naturally be of peculiar interest. 
 
 The legends interspersed in such numbers throughout 
 the Brahmana have a special significance. In some of 
 them the language is extremely antiquated, and it is pro- 
 bable therefore that before their incorporation into it they 
 possessed an independent form. The following deserve 
 special mention from their being treated in detaU, viz., the 
 legends of th^ Deluge and the rescue of Manu; of the 
 emigration of Videgha Mathava from the Sarasvati to the 
 Sadanira in the country of the Kosala-Videhas ; of the 
 restoration to youth of Chyavana by the Aiyins at the 
 request of his wife Sukanya, the daughter of Saryata Ma- 
 nava ; of the contest between Kadni and Suparni ; of the 
 love and separation of Purdravas and Urvaii, and others. 
 Many of them reappear as episodes in the epic, in a 
 metrical garb, and often very much altered. It is 
 obvious that we have here a much more intimate con- 
 nection with the epic than exists in the other Brah- 
 manas. The names Valhika, Janamejaya, and Nagnajit 
 have the most direct reference to the legend of the Maha-' 
 Bharata; as also the names already discussed above in 
 connection with the Samhita, Amba, Ambika, AmbaUka, 
 Subhadra, and the use there made of the words arjuna and 
 philgnna. In any case, we must look for the explanation 
 
 * Compare the Mutibhas in the Mstdhuki (or PaiOgya), and Kaushi- 
 Aitar. Br. — Of the above, only Bu- taki are mentioned elsewhere, 
 dlla, the Saumitpau, Satyakama, 
 
BRAHMANA OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 135 
 
 of this in the circumstance, that this Brahmana substan- 
 tially originated and attained its final shape "among the 
 tribes of the Kurupanchalas and the neighbouring Kosala- 
 Videhas. The king of the latter, Janaka, who is repre- 
 sented in it as the chief patron of the sacred doctrine it 
 embodies, bears the same name as the father of Sita and 
 father-in-law of Eama, in the Eamayana. This is, how- 
 ever, the only point of contact with the Eamayana legend 
 which can here be traced, and as the name Janaka seems 
 to have belonged to the whole family, it also virtually dis- 
 appears. Nevertheless I am inclined to identify the father 
 of Sita with this exceptionally holy Janaka, being of 
 opinion that Sita herself is a mere abstraction, and that 
 consequently she had assigned to her the most renowned 
 father possible. As regards the special relation in which 
 the Brahmana stands to the legend of the Maha-Bharata, 
 Lassen, it is well known, takes as the fundamental feature 
 of the latter a conflict between the Kurus and the Pan- 
 chalas, ending in their miitual annihilation, the latter being 
 led by the family of the Pandus, who came from the west. 
 Now at the time of the Brahmana, we find the Kurus and 
 the Pafichalas still in full prosperity,* and also united in 
 the closest bonds of friendship as one people.f Conse- 
 quently this internecine strife cannot yet have taken place. 
 On the other hand, in the latest portions of the Brahmana, 
 we find the prosperity, the sin, the expiation, and the faU 
 of Janamejaya Parikshita and his brothers Bhimasena, 
 Ugrasena, and Srutasena, and of the whole family of the 
 Parikshitas, apparently still fresh in the memory of the 
 people and discussed as a subject of controversy. In the 
 Maha-Bharata boundless confusion prevails regarding these 
 names. Janamejaya and his brothers, already mentioned, 
 are represented either as great-grandsons of Kuru, or else 
 as the great-grandsons of the Pandmd Arjuna, at whose 
 snake-sacrifice Vaiiampayana related the history of the 
 
 * Though certainly in the last por- f At least I am not able to offer 
 
 tions of the Br. the Kosala-Videhaa another explanation of the word 
 
 seem to have a certain preponder- Kurupanchdla ; it is, moreover, note- 
 
 ance; and there had perhaps existed worthy that no name of a king of the 
 
 as early as the time of the Samhitd Kurupanchalas is ever mentioned, 
 
 (see p. 1 14) a certain rivalry between Such names are quoted only for 
 
 the Kurus and Paiieliiilas. Kauravya- or Pitnchtilakings. 
 
136 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 great struggle between the Kurus and the Pandus. Adopt- 
 ing the latter view, which appears to be the better war- 
 ranted, from the fact that the part of the Maha-Bharata 
 which contains it is written in prose, and exhibits a pecu- 
 liarly ancient garb, the supposed great internecine conflict 
 between the Kurus and the Paflchalas, and the dominion 
 of the Pandavas, must have been long past at the time of 
 the Brahmana. . How is this contradiction to be explained ? 
 That something great and marvellous had happened in the 
 family of the Parikshitas, and that their end still excited 
 astonishment at the time of the Brahmana, has already 
 been stated. • But what it was we know not. After what 
 has been said above, it can hardly have been the overthrow 
 of the Kurus by the Panchalas ;• but at any rate, it must 
 have been deeds of guilt ; and indeed I am inclined to regard 
 this as yet unknown ' something ' as the basis of the legend 
 of the Maha-Bharata.^** To me it appears absolutely neces- 
 sary to assume, with Lassen, that the Pandavas did not 
 originally belong to the legend, but were only associated 
 with it at a later time,^*^ for not only is there no trace of 
 them -anywhere in the Brahmanas or Sutras, but the name 
 of their chief hero, Arjuna (Phalguna), is stiU employed 
 here, in the Satapatha-Brahmana (and in the Samhita), as 
 a name of Indra; indeed he is probably to be looked upon 
 as originally identical with In&ra, and therefore destitute 
 of any real existence. Lassen further (/. AK., i 647, £f.) 
 concludes, from what Megasthenes (in Arrian) reports of 
 the Indian Heracles, his sons and his daughter UavBaia, and 
 also from other accounts in Curtius, Pliny, and Ptolemy,* 
 that at the time when Megasthenes wrote, the mythical 
 association of Krishna (?) with the Pandavas already ex- 
 
 ^" See Indian Antiquary, ii. 58 I-4 (Ath., xx. 127. 7-10), serve; 
 
 (1873). I may add the following, as although in Ait. Br., vi. 22 (Sdnkh. 
 
 it possibly has a bearing here. Vrid- Br., xxx. 5), they are referred to 
 
 dhadyumna Abhipratdrina (see Ait. 'fire 'or 'year;' but see Gopatha- 
 
 Br., iii. 48) was cursed by a Brahman Er., xi. 12. Another legend re- 
 
 on account of improper sacrifice, to 3pecting Janamejaya F£u:ikshita is 
 
 the effect that : imam evaprati so- found in the 6opatha-Br., ii. 5. 
 
 maramKuravahKurukshetrdckchyo- '^ See my detailed discussion of 
 
 shyanta iti, ^^kh., xv. l5. 12 (and this in /. St., ii. 402-404. 
 
 so it came to pass). For the glorifica- * Curtius and Pliny wrote in the 
 
 tion of the Kauravya king Farikshit first, Arrian and Ptolemy in the 
 
 the four verses, Sitekh. Sr., xii. 17. second century a.d. 
 
BRAHMAN A OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 137 
 
 isted. But this conclusion, although perhaps in itself pro- 
 bable, is at least not certain ;* and even if it were, it would 
 not prove that the Pandavas were at that time already 
 associated with the legend of the Kurus. And if we have 
 really to assign the arrangement of the Madhyamdina re- 
 cension (see p. 106) to about the time of Megasthenes, it 
 may reasonably be inferred, from the lack of all men- 
 tion of the Pandavas in it, that their association with 
 the Kurus had not then been established; although, strictly 
 speaking, this conclusion has weight not so much for the 
 period when the arrgjagement of the work actually took 
 place, as for the time to which the pieces arranged belong. 
 ^ As with the epic legends, so also do we find in the 
 Satapatha-Brahmana several points of contact with the 
 legends of the Buddhists, on the one hand, and with the 
 later tradition concerning the origin of the Sarnkhya doc- 
 trine, on the other. First, as regards the latter. Asuri, the 
 name of one of its chief authorities, is at the same time the 
 name of a teacher frequently mentioned in the Satapatha- 
 Brahmana. Again, though only in the Yajnavalkiya-kanda, 
 we have mention of a Kapya Patamchala of the country of 
 the Madras as particularly distinguished by his exertions 
 in the cause of Brahmanical theology ; and in his name we 
 cannot but see a reference to Kapila and Patarajali, the 
 ti'aditional founders of the Sarnkhya and Yoga systems. 
 As regards the Buddhist legends, the Sakyas of Kapilavastu 
 (whose name may possibly be connected with the ^aka- 
 yanins of the tenth k&nda, and the Sakayanya of the 
 Maitrayana-Upanishad) called themselves Gautamas, a 
 family name which is particularly often represented among 
 the teachers and in the lists of teachers of the Brahmana. 
 It is, moreover, the country of the Kosalas and Videhas that 
 is to be looked^ upon as the cradle of Buddhism. — Sveta- 
 ketu (son of Aruni), one of the teachers most frequently 
 mentioned in the Satapatha-Brahmana, is with^ the Bud- 
 dhists the name of one of the earlier births of Sakyamuni 
 
 * The incest of Hercules with and Arjuna occur together in Pitn., 
 
 XiavSala must certainly be traced iv. 3. 98, cannot be considered as a 
 
 to the incest of Praj^pati and his proof of their being connected with 
 
 daughter, so often touched on in each other; see /.St., xiii. 349, ff.] 
 the Br^manas. [That VdsudeTa 
 
138 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 (see Irtd. Stud,., ii. ^6, note). — That the TnAgadha of the 
 Samhita may perhaps also he adduced in this connection is 
 a point that has already been discussed (pp. 1 1 1 , 1 1 2). — The 
 words arhant (iii 4. I. 3, ff.), iramana (VriL -At., iv. i. 22, 
 as weU as Taitt. Ax., ii 7, beside tdpasa), Tnahdbrdhmana * 
 (Vrih. At., ii. i. 19. 22), and pratibuddha, although by no 
 means used in their Buddhistic technical sense, yet indi- 
 cate how this gradually arose. — ^The name Chelaka also in 
 the Brahmana may possibly have some connection with 
 the peculiarly Buddhistic sense attached to the word chela. 
 Ajataiatru and Brahmadatta,+ on the.contrary, are probably 
 but namesakes of the two persons designated by the Bud- 
 dhists under these names as contemporaries of Buddha (?). 
 The same probably also applies to the Vatsiputriyas of the 
 Buddhists and the Vatsiputras of the Vrih. Arany. (v. 5. 
 3 1), although this form of name, being uncommon, perhaps 
 implies a somewhat closer connection. It is, however, the 
 family of the Katyayanaa, Katyayanfputras, which we find 
 represented with special frequency among the Buddhists 
 as well as in the Brahmana (although only in its very 
 latest portions). "We find the first mention J of this name 
 iu the person of one of the wives of Yajnavalkya, who is 
 called Katyayani, both in the Madhu-kanda and' the 
 Yajnavalkiya-kanda ; it also appears frequently in the lists 
 of teachers, and almost the whole of the Siitras belong- 
 
 * Beside maMr({/a, which is found Bee I. St., v. 6l, 63,64. A K^ty£i- 
 
 even earlier, i. 5. 3. 21, ii. 5. 4. 9. yaiih>atra JiCtlikarnya is quoted in 
 
 + With the surname Chaikitiineya theSdnkh. At., viii. 10. Fatamjaliin 
 Vrili, At. Miidhy., i. i. 26. — In the MahdbhSshya mentions several 
 Mah^Bh^rata, xii. 5136, 8603, a Kityas (/. St., xiiL 399, 407), and 
 Pdnchdlpo rdjd named Brahmadatta indeed the vdrttikaJcdra directly he- 
 is mentioned, who reigned in Kitm- longs to this family. In no other 
 pilya. — Chaikitineya is to be distin- Vedic texts hare I found either the 
 guished from ChaikitSiyana in the Katas or the K^tyas, Kfttydyanas, 
 Chb^ndogyopan,,iii. 8. — [On a curi- excepting in the prn«ira,section ap- 
 ous coincidence of a legend in the pendedattheendoftheAivalsiyana- 
 Trihad-Ar. with a Buddhist legend, 6rauta-S<itra, xii. 13-15, in which 
 see /. St., iii. 156, 157.] the Katas and the patronymic, 
 
 t In the tenth book of the Taitt. Kiiya, are mentioned several times. 
 
 Ar., Ksttyfiyana (instead of "nl) is a The Kuru-Katas are cited in the 
 
 name of Durgi j on this use see /. gana ' Garga,' and the family of the 
 
 St., ii. 192 [xiii. 422]. — In the Gana- Katas seems therefore to have been 
 
 pdiha to P^ini, KityiCyana is want- specially connected with the Kurus ; 
 
 ing. [But Kdtyityanl is to be gath- see /. St., i. 227, 228.] 
 ered from Pitnini himself, iv. i. 18 : 
 
SUTRAS OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 139 
 
 ing to the White Yajus beax this name as that of their 
 author. ^ 
 
 The Satapatha-Brahmana has been commented in the 
 Madhyamdina recension by Harisvamin and Sayana; but 
 their commentaries are so far extant only in a fragmentary 
 form."6 The Vrihad-Aranyaka has been explained by 
 Dviveda Ganga (of Gujarat) ; and in the Kdnva recension 
 by Samkara, to whose commentary a number of other 
 works by his pupils, &c., attach themselves. As yet only 
 the first kAnda, with extracts from the commentaries, has 
 been published, edited by myseE In the course of the 
 next three years, however, the work will be printed in its 
 entirety."^ The Vrihad-Aranyaka in the Kanva recension 
 has been edited by Foley, and recently by Eoer, together 
 with Samkara's commentary and a gloss tiiereon.^*^ 
 
 I now turn to the Sutras of the "White Yajus. The first 
 of these, the Srauta-StHtra of Kdty&yana, consists of 
 twenty-six adhydyas, which on the whole strictly observe 
 the order of the Brahmana. The first eighteen correspond 
 to its first nine hdndas; the Sautramani is treated of in 
 the nineteenth, the horse sacrifice in the twentieth adhy- 
 dya ; the twenty-first contains the human, universal, and 
 Manes sacrifices. The next three adhydyas refer, as before 
 stated (p. 80), to the ceremonial of the Samaveda, to its 
 several ekdhas, aMnas, and sattras; yet they rather specify 
 these in the form of lists than present, as the other adhy- 
 dyas do, acle9,r picture of the whole sacrificiaL proceedings. 
 The twenty-fifth adhydya treats of the prdyaAchittas, or 
 expiatory ceremonies, corresponding to the first part of the 
 twelfth Tcdnda ; and lastly, the twenty-sixth adhydya con- 
 tains the pravargya sacrifice, corresponding to the first part 
 of the fourteenth hdiida. — Only a few teachers are cited . 
 by name, and among these are two belonging to authors of 
 Sutras of the Black Yajus, viz., Laugakshi and Bharadvaja; 
 besides whom, only Jatiikarnya, Vatsya, Badari, Ka^a- 
 
 '^' And in Tery bad manuscripts. "* Eoer's translation (1856) in- 
 i* Thelastfasciculuswaapuhlished eludes the commentary of the first 
 in 1855. A translation of the first adhydya; he also gives several ex- 
 book, and also of some legends spa- tracts from it in the subsequent 
 cially mentioned above, is printeiin chapters, 
 vol. i. of my IndiscAe Streifen (1868). 
 
1 40 VEDIC LIT ERA TURE. 
 
 kritsni, and Karshnajini are named. We meet with the 
 three last of these elsewhere only "* in the Vedanta-Siitra 
 of Badarayana, Badari excepted, who appears also in the 
 Mimansd-Siitra of Jaimini. Vatsya is a name which oc- 
 casionally occurs in the Vanias of the Satapatha-Brah- 
 mana ; ^^^ and the same applies to Jatiikarnya, who appears 
 in the Vania of the Madhu- and Yajnavalkiya-kandas in 
 the Kanva recension as a pupil of Asurayana and of Taska. 
 (In the Madhyamdina recension, another teacher inter- 
 venes between the last-named and Jatiikarnya, viz., Bha- 
 radvaja.) He is also mentioned in the Aitareya-Aranyaka, 
 and repeatedly in the Prati^akhya-Siitra of the White Yajus. 
 Besides these, " eke" are frec[uently quoted, whereby refer- 
 ence is made to other Sakhas. One passage gives expression 
 to a certain hostility towards the descendants of the daugh- 
 ter of Atri (the Haleyas, Valeyas, Kaiidreyas, Saubhreyas, 
 Vamarathyas, Gopavanas) ; while the descendants of Atri 
 himself are held in especial honour. A similar hostility 
 is exhibited in other passages towards the descendants of 
 Kanva, Kalyapa, and Kautsa ; yet these three words, ac- 
 cording to the commentaries, may also be taken as appel- 
 latives, kanva as " deaf," kaiyapa as " having black teeth " 
 (Sydvadanta), and kautsa as " doing blamable things." 
 The first adhydya is of peculiar interest, as it . gives the 
 paribhdshds, or general rules for the sacrificial ceremoniaL 
 Otherwise this work, being entirely based upon the Brah- 
 mana, and therefore in no way an independent production, 
 contains but few data throwing light upon its probable 
 age. Amongst such we may reckon in particular * the 
 circumstance that the word vijaya, " conquest," sc. of the 
 
 '*' K^kritsni appears as a gram- pointing to later times ; it belongs 
 
 marian also ; he is possibly even to the same class as c^ni = 3, bhU, = 
 
 earlier than P^ini; see /. St., xiii. i, &o. [This is wrong; a little be- 
 
 398, 413. On a Vedic commentator fore, in xx. 5. 16, mention is made 
 
 Kji^akritsna, see above, pp. 42, gi. of loi manis, andin sx. 7. I we have 
 
 ^^ In addition to this there is simply a reference back to this. We 
 
 quoted in ix. 5. i. 62 the opinion of might rather cite gdyatrisampannd, 
 
 a teacher bearing this name ; , a &c., xx. 11. 21, ff., in the sense of 
 
 V^Ltsa is mentioned in the Aitar. Ar. 24, &c. , but there is this material dif - 
 
 and Sinkh. Ar. ference from the later use, that it is 
 
 * The use of matfi, xx. 7. I, to not5'<£yairialonewhichmeanB24,but 
 
 denote loi, may also be instanced as gdyatrUampanna 1 
 
SUTRAS OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 
 
 141 
 
 points of the compass,* is once used in the sense of " the 
 points of the compass " themselves (xx. 4. 26), which 'evi- 
 dently presupposes the custom of the dig-vijayas — ^probably 
 also poetical descriptions of them (1). The adhydyas relat- 
 ing to the Saman ceremonial (xxiL-xxiv.) are the richest 
 in this kind of data. They treat, for 'instance, hke the 
 Sama- Sutras, of the sacrifices on the Sarasvati, and also of 
 the Vratya-sacrifices, at -which we find the Mdgadhadeiiya 
 Irahmabandhu (xxii. 4. 22) occupying the same position as 
 in Latyayaua. 
 
 The Katyayana-Siitra has had many commentators, as 
 Yaioga,^^^ Pitribhiiti, Karka (quoted by Sayana, and there- 
 fore prior to him^^*), Bhartriyajna, Sri-Ananta, Devayaj- 
 nika (or Yajnikadeva), and Mahadeva. The works of the 
 three last,t and that of Karka are, however, the only ones 
 that seem to have been preserved. The text, with extracts 
 from these commentaries, will form the third part of my 
 edition of the White Yajus.^^ — To this Sutra a multitude 
 
 * See Lassen, /. AK., i. 542. 
 [According to the St. Petersburg 
 Dictionary, the word in the above 
 passage should only mean ' gain, the 
 thing conquered, booty ; ' but a re- 
 ference to locality is made certain by 
 the parallel passage, Ldty., ix. 10. 
 17 : vijUasya vd madhye yajet {yo 
 yasya deio vijitah sydt, sa tasya m. 
 y.) ; for the digvijayas, it is true, we 
 do not gain anything by this pas- 
 sage.] 
 
 isi This name must be read Ta4o- 
 gopi ; see my edition, Introd., p. vii. 
 
 ^'^ A DhUmrdyanasagotra Karlcd- 
 dJiydpaha occurs in aa inscription 
 published by Dowson in Journal i2. 
 A. S., i. 283 (1865), of Sridattaku- 
 ^alin (Pra^ntar^a), dated sam. 380 
 (but of what era ?). 
 
 f [They are, however, incom- 
 plete, in part exceedingly so.] The 
 earliest MS. hitherto known of the 
 vydkJiyd of Yijnikadeva is dated 
 aamrat 1639. — I have given the 
 names of these commentators in the 
 order in which they are cited by one 
 another ; no doubt there were other 
 commentators also preceding Ya^oga 
 [Ya^ogopi]. In the Foi-t William 
 
 Catalogue, under No. 742, a com- 
 mentary by Mahldhara is mentioned, 
 but I question provisionally the cor- 
 rectness of this statement. [The 
 correct order is : Karka, Pitribhuti, 
 Yafiogopi, Bhartriyajna. They are 
 so cited by Ananta, who himself 
 seems to have lived in the first half 
 of the sixteenth century, provided 
 he be really identical with the Sri- 
 madanantdkhyachdturmd s y a y £l j i n, 
 whom N^dyana, the author of the 
 Muhfirtamdrtanda, mentions as his 
 father; see my Catalogue of the 
 Berlin MSS., No. 879. Deva on i. 
 10. 13 quotes a Ndrdyanabhdshya ; 
 might not Ananta's son be its au- 
 thor ?] 
 
 >=^ This part was published 1856- 
 59 ; Deva's Paddhati to books i.-v. 
 is there given in full, also his com- 
 mentary on book 1 ; the extracts 
 from the scholia to books ii.-xi, 
 are likewise taken from Deva's com- 
 mentary: those to books ii.-v. there 
 exhibit, as to style, some differences 
 from the original wording, resulting 
 from abbreviations; the extracts 
 for books xii.-xxvi. come from the 
 scholium of Earka and from an ano- 
 
142 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 of Paddhatis (outlines), extracts, and similar works * attach 
 themselves, and also a large number of Pariiishtas (supple- 
 ments), which are all attributed to Katyayana, and have 
 found many commentators. Of these, we must specially 
 draw attention to the Nigama^Pariiishta, a kind of syno- 
 nymic glossary to Ihe White Tajus ; and to the Pravard- 
 dhy(iya,\ an enumeration of the different families of the 
 Brahmans, with a view to the proper selection of the sacri- 
 ficial priests, as well .as for the regulation of the inter- 
 marriages forbidden or permissible among them. The 
 ChMramir^vy'&hM, an account of the schools belonging to the 
 several Vedas, , is of little value. Its statements may for 
 the most part be correct, but it is extremely incomplete, 
 and from beginning to end is evidently quite a modem 
 compilation.^^ 
 
 The Siitra of Vaijamd/pa, to which I occasionally find 
 allusion iu the commentaries on the Katiya-Siitra, I am 
 incHned to class among the Sutras of the White Yajus, as 
 I do not meet with this name anywhere else except in the 
 Vanias of the Satap. Br. Here we have both a Vaijavapa 
 and a Vaijavapayana, both appearing among the most 
 recent members of the lists (in the Kanva recension I find 
 only the latter, and he is here separated by five steps only 
 from Yaska). A Grihya- Siitra of this name is also cited. 
 
 The K&tiya Grihya-SMra}^^ in three kdndas, is attri- 
 buted to Paraskara, from whom a school of the White 
 
 nymous epitome (sam^hiptajKira) of ff.), contain by far richer material. 
 
 Deva, the MS. of which dates from If all these schools actually existed 
 
 sanivat 1609. None of these com- — ^but there is certainly a great deal 
 
 mentaries is complete. of mere error and embellishment in 
 
 * By GadSdhara, Hariharami^ra, these statements — then, in truth, 
 
 Benudlkshita, Gang£Cdhara, &c. lamentably little has been left to us ! 
 
 ■)■ Printed, but unfortunately from *'* See Stenzler's account of its 
 
 a very bad codex, in my Catalogue contents in Z. D. M. G., vii. (1853). 
 
 of the Berlin MSS. , pp. 54-62. [See and his essay on the arghaddna 
 
 I. St., X. 88, ff.] (Pir., i. 8,_Breslaa, 1855).— The sec- 
 
 "* Edited in /. St., iii. 247-283 tions on marriage ceremonial have 
 
 (1854); see also Miiller, A. S. Z., been published by Haas, /. St, v. 
 
 p. 368, &., and R^jendra LSla Mitra 283, ff., whilst the sections on the 
 
 in the preface to his translation of jdtakarman have been edited by 
 
 the Chhindogyopanishad, p. 3. The Speijer (1872), together with critical 
 
 enumerations of the Vedie schools variants (pp. 17-23) to the MS. of 
 
 in the Vishnu-Puritna, iii. 4, and the whole text which was used by 
 
 especially in the Vdyu-Purina, chap. Stenzler. 
 Ix. (see Aufrecht's Catalogua, p. 54, 
 
SUTJiAS OF THE WHITE YAJUS. 14,3 
 
 Yajus also (according to the Charanavyiiha) derived its 
 name. The word Paraskara is used as a samjnd, or proper 
 name — ^but, according to the gana, to denote a district — 
 in thfc Siitra of Panini ; hut I am unable to trace it in 
 Vedic literature. To this Grihya-Siitra there are stiU ex- 
 tant a Paddhati by Vasudeva, a commentary by Jayarama, 
 and above aR a most excellent commentary by Eama- 
 krishna under the title of SavyskAra-gamupati, which ranks 
 above all similar works from its abundant quotations and 
 its very detailed and exhaustive handling of the various 
 subjects. In the introduction, which deals with the Veda 
 in general and the Yajurveda in particular, Eamakrishna 
 declares that the Kanva school is the best of those belong- 
 ing to the Yajus. — Under the name of Paraskara there 
 exists also a Smriti-^astra, which is in all probability 
 based upon this Grihya-Siitra. Among the remaining 
 Smriti-Sastras, too, there are a considerable number whose 
 names are coimected with those of teachers of the White 
 Yajus; for instance, Yajnavalkya, whose posteriority to 
 Manu quite corresponds to the posteriority of the White 
 Yajus to the Black Yajus — and no doubt also to that of 
 the Katiy a- Siitra to the Manava-Siitra ; — further, Katy^.- 
 yana (whose work, however, as we saw,^ connects itself 
 with the Samaveda), Kanva, Gautama, SandUya, Jabah, 
 and Para^ara. The last two names appear among the 
 schools of the White Yajus specified in the Charanavyiiha, 
 and we also find members of their families named in the 
 Van^as of the Satapatha-Brahmana, where the family of 
 the Para^aras is particularly often represented* 
 
 The PrdtiSdkhya-S'&tra of the White Yajus, as well as 
 its Anukramani, names at its close Katyayana as its author. 
 In the body of the work there is mention, first, of three 
 grammarians, whom we also find cited in the Prati^akhya 
 of the Eik, in Yaska, and in Panini, viz., Sakatayana, 
 Sakalya, and Gargya; next, of Kaiyapa, likewise men- 
 tioned by Panini; and, lastly, of Dalbhya, Jatiikarnya, 
 Saunaka (the author of the Rik-Pratilakhya ?), Aupa^ivi, 
 
 * [See /. St., i. 156-] Pitnini, iv. cants. [The PdrdUanno hhihhavah 
 
 3. 1 10 (a rule which possibly does are mentioned in the Mah^bhstahya 
 
 not belong to him), attributes to a also, and besides a Kalpa by Pari- 
 
 Pir^arya a Bhikshu-Slitra, t.e., a &ra; see 7. St., xiii. 340, 445.] 
 compendium for religious mendi- 
 
144 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 Kanva, and the Madhyamdinas. The distinction in i r. 
 1 8, 19 between -oeda and Ihdshya, i.e., works in bhdshd, 
 — which corresponds to the use of the latter word in Paniai, 
 — ^has abeady heen mentioned (p. 57). The first of the 
 eight adhydyas contains the samjnds and parihhdshds, i.e., 
 technical terms * and general preliminary remarks. The 
 •second adhy. treats of the accent; the third, fourth, and 
 fifth of samskdra, i.e., of loss, addition, alteration, and 
 constancy of the letters with reference to the laws of 
 euphony ; the sixth of the accent of the verb in the sen- 
 tence, &c. ; the eighth contains a table of the vowels and 
 consonants, lays down rules on the manner of reading ^^^ 
 (svddhydya), and gives a division of words corresponding 
 to that of Yaska. Here, too, several Mokas are quoted re- 
 ferring to the deities of' the letters and words, so that I am 
 almost inclined to consider this last adhydya (which is, 
 moreover, strictly speaking, contained in the first) as a 
 later addition.t We have an excellent commentary on 
 this work by tTvata, who has been repeatedly mentioned, 
 under the title of Mdfrimodaka.^^ 
 
 The A.nukramani of Katyayana contains, in the first 
 place, in the first four adhydyas (down to iv. 9), an index 
 of the authors, deities, and metres of the several iukldni 
 yaj'dnshi "White Yajus-formulas" contained in the "Mddh- 
 yamdiniye VdjasaTwyake Yajurvedd/mnd/ye sarve [?] sakhile 
 saiukriye," which the saint Yajnavalkya received from 
 Vivasvant, the sun-god. For their viniyoga, or liturgical 
 use, we are referred to the Kalpakara. As regards the 
 names of authors here mentioned, there is much to be re- 
 marked. The authors given for the richas usually agree 
 with those assigned to the same verses in the Rig-anukra- 
 mani ; there are, however, many exceptions to this. Very 
 often the particular name appears (as is also the case in 
 
 * Among them tin, Jsrit^ taddhUa, lation, with critical introduction and 
 
 and upadlid, terms quite agreeing explanatory notes, in /. St., iv. 65- 
 
 with Pdnini's terminology. 160, 177-331, Goldstiicker in his 
 
 '^ Bather : ' reciting ; ' because Pcinini, pp. 186-207, started a spe- 
 
 here too we must dismiss all idea cial controversy, in which inter alia 
 
 af writing and reading. he attempts in particular to show 
 
 •j- In that case the mention of the that the author of this work is iden- 
 
 Miidhyamdinaa would go for nothing, tical with the author of the vtirttihas 
 
 *'' In connection with my edition to Psinini ; see my detailed rejoinder 
 
 of this Prdti^dkhya, text and trans- in /. St., v. 91-124. 
 
A THAR VA-SAMHITA. 145 
 
 the Rig-anukramani) to be borrowed from some word 
 occurring in the verse. In the case where a passage is 
 repeated elsewhere, as very often happens, it is frequently- 
 assigned to an author different from the one to whom it 
 had previously been attributed. Many of the Rishis here 
 mentioned do not occur among those of the Rik, and be- 
 long to a later stage than these ; among them are several 
 even of the teachers mentioned in the Satapatha-Brahmana. 
 The closing part of the fourth adhydya* contains the 
 dedication of the verses to be recited at particular cere- 
 monies to their respective Eishis, deities, and metres, to- 
 gether with other similar mystical distributions. Lastly, 
 the fifth adhydya gives a short analysis of the metres 
 which occur. In the excellent but unfortunately not alto- 
 gether complete Paddhati of Srihala to this Anukramani 
 we find the liturgical use of each individual verse also 
 given in detail. 
 
 The Yajus recension of the three works called Vedangas, 
 viz., Siksha, Chhandas, and Jyotisha, has already been dis- 
 cussed (p. 6o).t 
 
 We come now to the Atharvaveda. 
 
 The Samhitd of the Atharvaveda contains in twenty 
 kdndas ^^ and thirty-eight jarapdthakas nearly 760 hymns 
 and about 6000 verses. Besides the division into prapd- 
 thakas, another into anuvdkas is given, of which there are 
 
 * Published together with the into twenty books is attested for the 
 
 fifth adhydya, and the beginning of period of the author of the vdrttikas, 
 
 the work, in my edition of the Viija- and also by the 6opatha-Br£[hmana 
 
 saneyi - Samhitd, introduction, pp. i 8 ; see I. St., xiii. 433 ; whereas 
 
 Iv.-lviii. both the Ath. S. itself (19. 22, 23) 
 
 t For particulars I refer to my and the Ath. Par. 48. 4-6 still con- 
 Catalogue of the Berlin MSS., pp. tain the direct intimation that it 
 96-100 [and to my editions, already formerly consisted of sixteen books 
 mentioned, of these three tracts]. only ; see /. St., iv. 432-434. 
 
 "8 This division of the Ath. S. 
 
145 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 some ninety. The division into parvans, mentioned in the 
 thirteenth book of the ^atapatha-Brahmana, does not ap- 
 pear in the manuscripts ; neither do they state to what 
 school the existing text belongs. As, however, in one of 
 the Pariiishtas to be mentioned hereafter (the seventh), the 
 richas Tjelonging to the ceremony there in question are 
 quoted as Paippalddd mxvnir&h, it is at least certain that 
 there was a Samhita belonging to the Paippalada school, 
 and possibly this may be the Samhita now extant.^^ Its 
 contents and principle of division are at present unknown ^^ 
 in their details. We only know generally that " it prin- 
 cipally contains formulas intended to protect against the 
 baneful influences of the divine powers,* against diseases 
 and noxious animals ; cursings of enemies, invocations of 
 healing herbs ; together with formulas for all maimer of 
 occurrences in every-day life, prayers for protection on 
 journeys, luck in gaming, and the like " f — all matters for 
 which analogies enough are to be found in the hymns of 
 the Rik-Samhita. But in the Rik the instances are both 
 less numerous, and, as already remarked in the introduc- 
 tion (p. ii), they are handled in an entirely different 
 manner, although at the same time a not inconsiderable 
 portion of these songs reappears directly in the Rik, par- 
 ticularly in the tenth mandala* As to the ceremonial for 
 which the hymns of the Atharvan were used, what corre- 
 
 ^59 According to a tract recently riage, xv. of the glorification of 
 published by Roth, 7>er 4 <A<ir»o»eda Vrftya, xvi., xvii. of certain con- 
 in Kashmir (1875), this is not the jurations, xviii. of burial and the 
 case ; the extant Sainhitd seems festival of the Manes. Book xix. is 
 rather to belong to the school of o, mixtvire of supplementary pieces, 
 the Saunakas, whilst the Paippalada- part of its text being in a rather 
 Saiiihit^ has come down to us in a corrupt condition ; book xx. con- 
 second recension, still preserved in tarns, — with one peculiar exception, 
 Kashmir. the so-called kuntdpasUktoi, — only 
 
 1™ The arrangement in books i.- complete hymns addressed to Indra, 
 
 vii. is according to the number of which are borrowed directly and 
 
 verses in the different pieces ; these without change from the Rigveda. 
 
 have, on an average, four verses in Neither of these two last books is 
 
 book i., five in ii., six in iii., seven noticed in the Atharva-Fr^tiidkhya 
 
 in iv., eight to eighteen in v., three (see note 167), and therefore they did 
 
 in vi., and only one in viL Books not belong to the original text at 
 
 viii.-xiii. contain longer pieces. As the time of this work, 
 to the contents, they are indiscrimi- * Of the stars, too, t.e., of the 
 
 nately mixed up. Books xiv.-zviii., lunar asterisms. 
 on the contrary, have all a uniform + See Roth, Zur Litt. und Gach, 
 
 subject-matter ; xiv. treats of mar- des Weda, p. 12. 
 
A THAR VA-SAMHITA. 147 
 
 spends to it in the other Vedas is found, not in the Srautar 
 Siitras, hut with few exceptions in the Grihya-Svitras only ; 
 and it appears therefore (as I have likewise already re- 
 marked) that this ceremonial in its origin belonged rather 
 to the people proper than to the families of priests. As 
 in the Shadvrri^a-Brahmana and in the Sama-Siitras we 
 actually meet with a case (see p. 78) where an imprecatory 
 ceremony is borrowed from the Vratinas, or Aryans who 
 had not adopted the Brahmanical organisation, we may 
 further reasonably conjecture that this was not a solitary 
 instance ; and thus the view naturally presents itself that, 
 though the Atharva-Samhita origiaated for the most part 
 in the Brahmanical period, yet songs and formulas may also 
 have been incorporated into it which properly belonged to 
 these unbrahmanical Aryans of the west * And as a mat- 
 ter of fact, a very peculiar relation to these tribes is unmis- 
 takably revealed in the fifteenth Mnda, where the Supreme 
 Beiug is expressly called by the name of Vratya,"i and is 
 at the same time associated with the attributes given in 
 the Samaveda as characteristics of the Vratyas. In the 
 same way, too, we find this word Vratya employed in the 
 Atharva-Upanishads in the sense of " pure, in hamself " to 
 denote the Supreme Being. The mention of the Tndgadha 
 in the Vratya-book, and the possibility that this word may 
 refer to anti-brahmanical Buddhist teachers, have already 
 been discussed (p. 112). In a passage communicated by 
 Eoth, op. G. p. 38, special, and hostile, notice is taken of the 
 Angas and Magadhas in the East, as well as of the Gan- 
 dharis, Miijavants, Siidras, Mahavrishas, and Valhikas in 
 the North-West, between which tribes therefore the Brah- 
 manical district was apparently shut in at the time of 
 the composition of the song in question. Intercourse 
 with the West appears to have been more active than 
 with the East, five of the races settled in the West 
 being mentioned, and two only of those belonging to the 
 
 * In the Vishnu-Pur^a the Sain- the Chdlikopauishad, v. 1 1 (see I. 
 
 dhavas, Saindhavdyanas are men- St., i. 445, 446, iz. 15, 16). Ac- 
 
 tioned as a school of the Atharvan. cording to Roth, on the contrary 
 
 isi This explanation of the con- (see above p. 112, note), the purpose 
 
 tents of this book and of the word of the book is rather " the idealising 
 
 vrdtya is based upon its employment of the devout vagrant or mendicant 
 
 in the Pra^nopanishad 2. 7, and in {pai-ivrdjaka, &c.)." 
 
148 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 East. In time it will certainly be possible, in the Atharva- 
 Samhita also, to distinguish between pieces that are older 
 and pieces that are more modem, although upon the whole 
 geographical data are of rare occurrence. Its language 
 exhibits many very peculiar forms of words, often in a 
 very antique although prakritized shape. It contains, 
 in fact, a mass of words used by the people, which from 
 lack of occasion found no place in the other branches of the 
 literature. The enumeration of the lunar asterisms in the 
 nineteenth kdnda begins with hrittikd, just as in the Tait- 
 tiriya-Samhita, but otherwise it deviates considerably from 
 the latter, and gives for the most part the forms of the 
 names used in later times.^*^ Ko direct determination of 
 date, however, can be gathered from it, as Colebrooke ima- 
 gined. Of special interest is the mention of the Asura 
 Krishna * Kelin, from the slaying of whom Krishna (Afigi- 
 rasa ?, Devaldputra) receives the epithets of Kelihan, Keii- 
 siidana in the Epic and in the Puranas. In those hymns 
 which appear also in the Rik-Samhita (mostly in its last 
 mandala), the variations are often very considerable, and 
 these readings seem for the most part equally warranted 
 with those of the Bik. There are also many points of 
 contact with the Yajus. 
 
 The earliest mention of the Atharvan-songs occurs under 
 the two names "Atharvanas" and "Angirasas," names 
 which belong to the two most ancient RisM-families, or to 
 the common ancestors of the Indo- Aryans and the Persa- 
 Aryans, and which are probably only given to these songs 
 in order to lend aU the greater authority and holiness 
 to the incantations, &c., contained in them.f They are 
 also often specially connected with the ancient family 
 of the Bhrigus.^^^ Whether we have to take the " Athar- 
 
 1*^ The piece in question proves, and if, according to the Bhavishya- 
 
 on special grounds, to be a later Bup- Purdna (Wilson in Reinaud's Mtm. 
 
 plement ; see /. St., iv. 433, li. sur VJnde, p. 394), the Parsls (Magas) 
 
 * An Asura Krishna we find even have four Vedaa, the Vada (! Yas- 
 
 in the Rik-Samhitit, and he plays a na ?), Vi^vavada (Vi^pered), Vidut 
 
 prominent part in the Buddhist (Vendidad), and ngirasa, this is a 
 
 legends (in which he seems to b« purely Indian view, though indeed 
 
 identified with the Krishna of the very remarkable. 
 
 epic(??). 18' See my essay Zwei vedische 
 
 + See /. St., i. 295, ff. That these Texte iiber Omina and Porlenta, pp. 
 
 names indicate any Persa- Aryan in- 346-348. 
 fluence is not to be thought of; 
 
ATHARVA-SAMHITA. 149 
 
 vanas" in the thirtieth hook of the Vaj. Samhita as 
 Atharvan-songs is not yet certain ; but for the period to 
 which the eleventh, thirteenth, and foniteenth hooks of 
 the Satapatha-Brahmana, as well as the Chhandogyopa- 
 nishad and the Taittiriya-Aranyaka (ii. and viii.), helong, 
 the existence of the Atharvan-songs and of the Atharva- 
 veda is fully established by the mention of^ them in 
 these works. The thirteenth book of the Satapatha- 
 Brahmana even mentions a division into parvans* which, 
 as already remarked, no longer appears in the manuscripts. 
 In the eighth book of the Taittiriya-Aranyaka, the ddeia, 
 i.e., the Brahmana, is inserted between the three other 
 Vedas and the " Atharvangirasas." Besides these notices, 
 I find the Atharvaveda, or more precisely the "Athar- 
 vanikas," only mentioned in the Mdana-Siitra of the 
 Samaveda (and in Panini). The names, too, which belong 
 to the schools of the Atharvaveda appear nowhere in 
 Vedic literature,t with the exception perhaps of Kau^ika; 
 still, this patronymic does not by any means involve a 
 special reference to the Atharvan.J Another name, which 
 is, however, only applied to the Atharvaveda in the later 
 Atharvan-writings themselves, viz., in the Pari^ishtas, is 
 " Brahma- veda." This is explained by the circumstance that 
 it claims to be the Veda for the chief sacrificial priest, the 
 Brahman,^^ while the other Vedas are represented as those 
 of his assistants only, the Hotar, TJdgatar, and Adhvaryu, 
 
 * Corresponding to the siMas, aiJiarvdilgiraslh, as magic formulas ; 
 
 anuvdkas, and daiats of the Rik, in the Rimiyaaa likewise only once 
 
 Yajus, and S^man respectively. ii. 26. 20 (Gorr.) the mantras 
 
 + Members of the family of the cJidtliarvands (the latter passage I 
 
 Atharvans are now and then men- overlooked in /. St., i. 297). [In 
 
 tioned ; thus especially Dadhyalich Patamjali's Mahibhiiahya, however, 
 
 Ath., Kabandha Ath., whom the the Atharvau is cited at the head 
 
 Vishnu-iPurana designates as a pupil of the Vedas (as in the Rig-Grihyas, 
 
 of Sumantu (the latter we met in the see above, p. 58), occasionally even 
 
 Grihya-Sutras of the Rik, see above, as their only representative ; see 
 
 p.' 57), and others. ' /. St., xiii. 431-32.] 
 
 J It seems that even in later '^* This explanation of the name, 
 
 times the claim of the Athaxvan to though the traditional onp, is yet 
 
 rank as Veda was disputed. Yij- very likely erroneous ; by Brahma- 
 
 navalkya (i. lOl) mentions the two veda (a name which is first meis- 
 
 separately, veddtharva; though in tioned in the Sstokh. Grihya, i. 16) 
 
 another passage (i. 44) the " Athar- we have rather to understand 'the 
 
 vtogirasas" occur silong with Rich, Yeia of brahmdni,' of prayers, i.e., 
 
 Sdman and Tajus. In Manu's here in the narrower sense of ' in- 
 
 Code we only once find the 4rut(r cantations.' (St. Petersburg Diet.) 
 
1 50 VEDIC LITER A TURK. 
 
 — a claim wliich has probably no other foundation than 
 the circumstance, cleverly turned to account, that there 
 was, in fact, no particular Veda for the Brahman, who 
 was bound to know aU three, as is expressly required 
 in the KaushitaM-Brahmana (see /. St., ii. 305). Now 
 the weaker these pretensions are, the more strongly are 
 they put forward in the Atharvan- writings, which indeed 
 display a very great animosity to the other Vedas. To- 
 wards one another, too, they show a hostile enough spirit ; 
 for instance, one of the Pari^ishtas considers a Bhargava, 
 Paippalada, and Saunaka alone worthy to act as priest to 
 the king,* while a Mauda or Jalada as purdhita, would 
 only bring misfortune. 
 
 The Atharva-Samhita also, it seems, was commented 
 upon by Sayana. Manuscripts of it are comparatively 
 rare on the Continent. Most of them are distinguished by 
 a peculiar mode of accentuation.f A piece of the Samhita 
 of some length has been made known to us in text and 
 translation by Aufrecht (I. St.,i. 121-140); besides this, 
 only some fragments have been published.^** 
 
 The Brahmana-stage is but very feebly represented in 
 the Atharvaveda, viz., by the GopathM-Brdhmana, which, 
 in the manuscript with which I am acquainted (E. I. H., 
 2 142), comprises a p'&rva- and an wtora-portion, each con- 
 taining five prapdthakas ; the MS., however, breaks off 
 with the beginning of a sixth (i.e., the eleventh) prapd- 
 
 * Y^jnavalkya (i. 312) also re- Karhmir (1875). In the Gopatha- 
 
 quires that such an one be well Brdhmana (i. 29), and in Patamjali's 
 
 versed cUharvdngirase. Mahdbh^sbya (see /. St., xiil 433 ; 
 
 t Dots are here used instead of although, according to Bumell, In- 
 
 lines, and the svarita stands mostly trod, to Van^a-Br^mana, p. xxii., 
 
 beside, not above, the ahshara. the South Indian MSS. omit the 
 
 18' The whole text has been quotation from the Atharvaveda), 
 
 edited long since (1855-56) by Roth the beginning of the Saiphitd, is given 
 
 and Whitney. The first two books otherwise- than in our text, as it 
 
 have been translated by me in /. commences with i. 6, instead of i. I. 
 
 St., iv. 393-430, and xiii. 129-216, It is similarly given by Bhanolarkar, 
 
 and the nuptial formulas contained Indian Antiquary, iii. 132 ; and two 
 
 in the fourteenth book, together MSS. in Haug's possession actually 
 
 with a great variety of love charms begin the text in this manner ; see 
 
 and similar formulas from the re- Haug's Brahman und die Brahma- 
 
 maining books, ihid., v. 204-266. nen, p. 45. — Bumell (Introd. to 
 
 For the criticism of the text see Varila-Br., p. xxi.) doubts whether 
 
 ^oHi'a tTAata, Ueber den Atha/naveda the Ath. S. was commented by 
 
 (1856), and Der Atharvaveda in SiJyana. 
 
SUTRAS OF THE ATHARVAN. 151 
 
 thaka. In one of the Parilishtas the work is stated to 
 have originally contained 100 prapdthaJcas. The contents 
 are entirely unknown to me. According to Colebrooke's 
 remarks on the subject, Atharvan is here represented as a 
 Prajapati who is appointed by Brahman as a Demiurge ; 
 and this is, in fact, the position which he occupies in the 
 Pari^ishtas and some of the Upanishads. The division of 
 the year into twelve (or thirteen) months consisting of 
 360 days, and of each day into thirty muhi!i,rtas, which 
 Colebrooke points out as remarkable, equally appears in 
 the Brahmanas of the Yajus, &c.^^ 
 
 Departing from the order hitherto followed I will add 
 here what I have to say about the S'Atras of the Atharva- 
 veda, as these are the only other writings which have 
 reference to the Samhita, whereas the remaining parts of 
 the Atharvan-literature, corresponding to the Aranyakas 
 of the other Vedas, have no reference to it whatever. 
 
 In the first place, I have to mention the Saunakiyd 
 chatur - adhydyikd^^^^ a kind of Prati^akhya for the 
 Atharva-Samhita, in four adhydyas, which might possibly 
 go back to the author of the Rik-Pratiiakhya, who is 
 also mentioned in the Prati^akhya of the White Yajus. 
 The Saunakas are named in the Charanavyiiha as a school 
 of the Atharvan, and members of this school are re- 
 peatedly mentioned in the Upanishads. The work bears 
 here and there a more generally grammatical character 
 than is the case with the remaining Prati^akhyas. Saka- 
 
 ^^ M. Miiller fii-st gave us some of which appear in the same form as 
 
 information as to the Gopatha- in the Satapatha-Br^hmana, xi. xii., 
 
 Brdhmana in his Si'sJory 0/4. S. L., and are therefore probably simply 
 
 p. 445-455 ; and now the work itself copied from it. The second half 
 
 has been published by B^jendra Lilla contains a brief exposition of a 
 
 Mitra and Harachandra Vidyibhfi- variety of points connected with the 
 
 shana in the Bibl. Indica (1870- ^rauta ritual, specially adapted, as 
 
 72). According to this it consists it seems, from the Aitar. Br. Very 
 
 of eleven (i.e., 5 + 6) prapdthakas remarkable is the assumption in i. 
 
 only. We do not discover in it any 28 of a doshapaU, lord of evil (! ?), 
 
 special relation to the Ath. S., apart who at the beginning of the Dv^- 
 
 fromseveralreferences thereto under para (-yuga) is supposed to have 
 
 different names. The contents are acted as 'risAinam ekadeiah.' This 
 
 a medley, to a large extent derived reminds us of, and doubtless rests 
 
 from other sources. The first half upon, the MStra of the Buddhists, 
 ia essentially of speculative, cos- ^^^ The form of name in the 
 
 mogonio import, and is particularly MS. is : chatwddhydyiha. 
 rich in legends, a good number 
 
1 52 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 tayana and other grammatical teachers are mentioned. 
 In the Berlin MS. — the only one as yet known — each rule 
 is followed by its commentary.^*' 
 
 An Awukrwmani to the Atharva-Samhita is also ex- 
 tant ; it, however, specifies for the most part only diyine 
 beings, and seldom actual Rishis, as authors. 
 
 The Kauiika-S'Mra is the sole existing ritual Siitra of 
 the Atharvaveda, although I am acquainted with an 
 Atharvana-Grihya through quotations.^^ It consists of 
 fourteen adhydyas, and in the course of it the several 
 doctrines are repeatedly ascribed to Kau^ika. In the intro- 
 duction it gives as its authorities the Mantras and the 
 Brahmanas, and failing these the sampraddya, i.e., tradi- 
 tion, and in the body of the work the Brahmana is likewise 
 frequently appealed to (by iti hr.) ; whether by this the Go- 
 patha-Brahmana is intended I am unable to say. The style 
 of the work is in general less concise than that of the other 
 Sutras, and more narrative. The contents are precisely 
 those of a Grihya-Siitra. The third adhydya treats of the 
 ceremonial for Nirriti (the goddess of misfortune); the 
 fourth gives hhaishajyas, healing remedies ; the sixth, &c., 
 imprecations, magical spells ; the tenth treats of marriage ; 
 the eleventh of the Manes-sacrifice; the thirteenth and 
 fourteenth of expiatory ceremonies for various omens and 
 portents (like the Adbhuta-Brahmana of the Samaveda).^®* 
 
 '^ Of this Priti^khya also Whit- "' By which is doubtless _meant 
 
 ney has given us an ezceUeDt edition just this Eau^ika-Stitra. ASrauta- 
 
 in Journal Am. Or. Soc, vii. (1862), S<itra belongihg to the Atharvaveda 
 
 X. 156, ff. (1872, additions). See also has recently come to light, under 
 
 my remarks in /. St., iv. 79-82. the name of Vaitina - Sritra ; see 
 
 According to Whitney, this work Haug, /. St., ix. 176; Biihler, 
 
 takes no notice of the two last books Cat. of MSS. from Gujardt, i. 190, 
 
 of the existing Ath. text, which it and Monatsberichte of the Berl. 
 
 otherwise follows closely; since Acad." 1 871, p. 76 ; and some fuller 
 
 therefore the Atharva-Samhiti in accounts in Roth's Atharvaveda in 
 
 Fatamjali's time already comprised Kashmir, p. 22. 
 
 twenty books, we might from this ^® These two sections are pnb- 
 
 directly infer the priority of the lished, with translation and notes, 
 
 Saun. chat.; unless Fatamjali's state- in my essay, Zinei vedische Texte 
 
 ment refer not to our text at all, iiber Omina und Portenia (1859); 
 
 but rather to that of the Paippa- the section relating to marriage 
 
 Mda school ; see Roth, Der Atharva- ceremonies is communicated in a 
 
 veda in Kathmir, p. 15. — Biihler has paper by Haas, Veber die ffeirathsge- 
 
 discovered another quite different brduche der alien Inder in /. St., v. 
 
 Ath. Pnltisitkhya ; see Monatsber. 378, ff. 
 of the Berl. Acad. 1871, p. 77. 
 
VPANISHADS OF THE ATH ARYAN. 153 
 
 To this Siitra belong further five so-called Kalpas: the 
 Nahshatra-Kalpa, an astrological compendium relating to 
 the lunar mansions, in fifty kandikds ; the Sdnti-Kalpa, 
 in twenty-five kandikds, which treats likewise of the ador- 
 ation of the lunar mansions/™ and contains prayers ad- 
 dressed to them; the Vitd/na-KaVpa, the Samhitd-Kalpa, 
 and the AbhicMra-Kalpa. The Vishnu-Purana and the 
 Charanavyuha, to be presently mentioned, name, instead 
 of the last, the Angirasa-Kalpa. Further, seventy-four 
 smaller Pari^ishtas ^^ also belong to it, mostly composed in 
 Slokas, and in the form of dialogues, like the Puranas. 
 The contents are Grihya-subjects of various kinds ; astro- 
 logy,'^^^ magic, and the doctrine concerning omens and por- 
 tents are most largely represented. Some sections corre- 
 spond almost literally to passages of a like nature in the 
 astrological Samhitas. Among these Pari^ishtas, there is 
 also a Gharana,-vy'&ha;whi'^ states the number of the fichas 
 in the Athaxva-Samhita at 12,380, that of the parydyas 
 (hymns) at 2000; iDut the number of the Kauiikoktdni 
 pariSishidni only at 70. Of teachers who are mentioned the 
 following are the chief : first, Brihaspati Atharvan, Bhaga- 
 vant Atharvan himself, Bhrigu, Bhargava, Angiras, Angi- 
 rasa, Kavya (or Kavi) TJianas; then Saunaka, Narada, 
 Gautama, Kamkayana, Karmagha, Pippalada, Mahaki, 
 Garga, Gargya, Vriddhagarga, Atreya, Padmayoni, Kraush- 
 tuki. "We meet with many of these names again in the 
 astrological literature proper. 
 
 I now turn to the most characteristic part of the lite- 
 rature of the Atharvan, viz., the Vpanishads. Whilst the 
 Upanishads kut' e^o^^v so called, of the remaining Vedas 
 all belong to the later, or even the latest, portions of these 
 
 I'O An account of the contents of kind are quoted even in the Mahd- 
 
 both texts is given in my second bhitshya ; see /. St., xiii. 463. 
 
 essay on the Nakshatras, pp. 390- ''" One of the Pari^ishtas relating 
 
 393 (1862) ; Hang in /. St., ix. 174, to this subject has been communi- 
 
 mentions an Aranyaka- Jyotisha, dif- cated by me in /. St., x. 317, ff. ; it is 
 
 ferent from the Nakshatra-Kalpa. the fifty-first of the series. The state- 
 
 •'1 Haug, I. t., speaks of 72 ; ments found therein concerning the 
 
 amongst them is found a Nighantu, planets presuppose the existence of 
 
 which is wanting in the Berlin MS. Greek influence; cf. ibid., p. 319, 
 
 Compare the Nigama-Pari^ishta of viii. 413. 
 
 the White Yajus. — Texts of this » 
 
1 54 VEDIC LITER A TURE. 
 
 Vedas, they at least observe a certain limit which they 
 never transgress, that is to say, they keep within the range 
 of inquiry into the nature of the Supreme Spirit, with- 
 out serving sectarian purposes. The Atharvan Upani- 
 shads, on the contrary, come down as far as the time of the 
 Puranas, and in their final phases they distinctly enter the 
 Lists in behalf of sectarian views. Their number is as yet 
 undetermined. Usually only fifty-two are enumerated. 
 But as among these there are several which are of 
 quite modern date, I do not see why we should separate 
 these fifty-two Upanishads from the remaining similar 
 tracts which, although not contained in the usual list, 
 nevertheless call themselves Upanishads, or Atharvopani- 
 shads ; more especially as this list varies in part accord- 
 ing to the different works where it is found, and as the 
 manuscripts mix up these fifty-two with the remaining 
 Upanishads indiscriminately. Indeed, with regard to the 
 Upanishad literature we have this peculiar state of things, 
 that it may extend down to very recent times, and 
 consequently the number of writings to be reckoned as 
 belonging to it is very considerable. Two years ago, in 
 the second part of the Indische Studien, I stated the num- 
 ber at ninety-five, including the Upanishads contained in 
 the older Vedas.* The researches instituted by Walter 
 EUiot in Masulipatam among the Telingana Bralunans on 
 this subject have, however, as Dr. Eoer writes to me, 
 yielded the result that among these Brahmans there are 
 
 * This number is wrong ; it ought vopanishad) being different from 
 
 to be ninety-three, I there counted tte former. — The number now 
 
 the Anandavalli and Bhriguvalll here finally arrived at — ninety- 
 
 twioe, first among the twenty-three Bix — is obtained (i) by the addi- 
 
 AtJiontopanUhads omitted by An- tion of six new UpanisUads, viz., 
 
 quetil, and then among the nine the Bhillavi-Upanishad, the Sam- 
 
 tTpanishadsborrowed from the other vartop., the second Mahopanishad, 
 
 Vedas which are found in his work, and three of the Upanishads con- 
 
 The number would further have to tained in the Atharva^iras (Gana. 
 
 be reduced to ninety-two, since I pati, SArya, Devi) ; (2) by the 
 
 cite Colebrooke's Amritavindu and omission of two, the Kudropanishad 
 
 Anquetil's Amritansida as distinct andtheAtharvaniya-Rudropanishad, 
 
 Upanishads, whereas in point of fact whichj are possibly identical with 
 
 they are identical ; but then, on the others of those cited ; and (3) by 
 
 other hand, two Upanishads identi- counting the MahdniCriyanopanighad 
 
 fied by me ought to be kept distinct, as only one, whereas Colebrooks 
 
 viz., Colebrooke's Fr^^gnihotra and counts it as two. 
 Anquetil's Franou, the latter(rra9a- 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE ATH ARYAN. 155 
 
 123 Upanishads actually extant; and if we include those 
 which they do not possess, hut which are contained in my 
 list just referred to, the total is raised to 147* A list of 
 these 123 is given in two of them, viz., in the Mahavak- 
 yamuktava,H and in the Muktikopanishad, and is exactly 
 the same in both. According to the statement given 
 above, there must be among these 123 fifty-two f in 
 aU which are wanting in my own list, and these include the 
 two names just mentioned. — A Persian translation made 
 in 1656 of fifty Upanishads is extant in Anquetil du Per- 
 ron's Latin rendering. 
 
 If now we attempt to classify the Upanishads so 
 far known, the most ancient naturally are those (i- 
 12) which are found in the three older Vedas only.| 
 I have already remarked that these never pursue sectarian 
 aims. A seeming — but only a seeming — exception to this 
 is the Satarvdriya ; for although the work has in fact been 
 used for sectarian purposes, it had originally quite a 
 different significance, which had nothing to do with the 
 misapplication of it afterwards made ; originally, indeed, it 
 was not an Upanishad at all.§ A real exception, however, 
 is the Svetddvataropanishad (13), which is in any case 
 wrongly classed with the Black Yajus ; it is only from its 
 having incorporated many passages of the latter that it has 
 been foisted in here. It belongs to about the same rank 
 and date as the Kaivalyopanishad. Nor can theMaitrdyana- 
 ?7pamsAa<^(i4)reasonablyclaim to be ranked with theBlack 
 
 * According to the previous note. Since then many new names have 
 
 only 145. been brought to our knowledge by 
 
 + According to last note but one, the Catalogues of MSS. published by 
 only fifty. [In the list published by Burnell, Biihler, Kielhorn, IWjendra 
 W. Elliot of the Upanishads in the Ldla Mitra, Haug {BraJiman und die 
 Muktikopan., see Journal As. Soc. Brdhmanen, pp. 29-31), &c.; so that 
 Beng., 1851, p. 607, ff., 108 names at present I count 235 Upanishads, 
 are directly cited (and of these 98 many of which, however, are pro- 
 are analysed singly in Taylor's Cata- bably identical with others, as in 
 logue (i860) of the Oriental MSS. of many cases the names alone are at 
 Fart St. George, ii. 457-474). But present known to us.] 
 to these other names have to be J Namely, Aitareya, Kaushitaki, 
 added which are there omitted ; see V^hkala, Chh^ndogya, Satarudriya, 
 /. St., iii. 324-326. The alphabe- ^ikshilvalli or Taitt. Sainhitopani- 
 tical list published by M. MiiJler in shad, Chh^galeya (?), Tadeva, Siva- 
 Z. J). M. Q., xix. 137-158 (1865), sainkalpa, Purushasdkta, \ii,, Vri- 
 brings the number up to 149 (170, had-Aranyaka. 
 Bumell, Indian Antiquai-y, ii. 267). § See on this /. St., ii. 14-47. 
 
156 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 Yajus; it belongs rather, like the Svetaivataropanishad, only 
 to the Toga period. Still it does not, at least in the part 
 known to me,^'* pursue any sectarian aim (see pp. 96-99). 
 
 Apart from the two last-named Upanishads, the transi- 
 tion to the Atharvopanishads is formed on the one hand 
 by those Upanishads which are found in one of the other 
 three Vedas, as well as in a somewhat modified form in an 
 Atharvan-recension, and on the other hand by those Upa- 
 nishads of which the Atharvan-recension is the only one 
 extant, although they may have formerly existed in the 
 other Vedas as well. Of the latter we have only one 
 instance, the Kdthalca-Upanishad (15, 16); of the former, 
 on the contrary, there are several instances (17-20), viz., 
 Kena (from the Samaveda), BhriguvalH, Anandavalli, and 
 Brihanndrdyana (Taitt. Ar., viiL— ix.). 
 
 The Atharvopanishads, which are also distinguished ex- 
 ternally by the fact that they are mostly composed in 
 verse, may themselves be divided into three distinct 
 classes, which in their beginnings follow the earlier Upani- 
 shads with about equal closeness. Those of the first class 
 continue directly to investigate the nature of Atman, or the 
 Supreme Spirit ; those of the second deal with the subject 
 of absorption (yoga) in meditation thereon, and give the 
 means whereby, and the stages in which, men may 
 even in this world attain complete union with Atman; 
 and lastly, those of the third class substitute for Atman 
 some one of the many forms under which Siva and 
 Vishnu, the two principal gods, were in the course of 
 time worshipped. 
 
 Before proceeding to discuss these three classes in their 
 proper order, I have to make some observations on the 
 Atharvan-recensions of those Upanishads which either 
 belong at the same time to the other Vedas also, or at any 
 rate originally did so. 
 
 The Atharvan-text of the Kenopanishad, in the first 
 place, differs but very little from its Saman-text. The 
 reason why this Upanishad has been incorporated into the 
 Atharvan collection seems to be the fact that Uma Hai- 
 mavati is here (and for the first time) mentioned, as she 
 
 "' In the remaining parte also there is nothing of the kind to ba 
 found. 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE ATHARVAN. 157 
 
 was probably understood in the sense of the Siva sects. 
 With the Atharvan-text both of the Anandavalli and of 
 the BhrigTivalll * I am unacquainted. Of the Brihannara- 
 yanop. f also, which corresponds to the Narayanlyop. of 
 the Taitt. Aranyaka, only a few data are known to me ; 
 these, however, sufficiently show that the more ancient 
 and obscure forms have here throughout been replaced 
 by the corresponding later and regular ones.J — The two 
 Kathavallis, for the most part in metrical form, are extant 
 in the Atharvan-text only.§ The second is nothing but a 
 supplement to the first, consisting as it does almost exclu- 
 sively of quotations from the Vedas, intended to substan- 
 tiate more fully the doctrines there set forth. The first is 
 based upon a legend (see pp. 92, 93) related in the Taitt. 
 Brahmana [iii. 11. 8]. N"achiketas, the son of Aruni,|| asks 
 Death for a solution of his doubt whether man exists after 
 death or not. After much reluctance, and after holding 
 out enticements of allkinds,.whichE'achiketas withstands. 
 Death at length initiates him into the mystery of exist- 
 ence. Life and death, he says, are but two different phases 
 of development ; true wisdom consists in the perception of 
 identity with the Supreme Spirit, whereby men are ele- 
 vated above life and death. The exposition in this first part 
 is really impressive : the diction, too, is for the most part 
 antique. A few passages, which do not harmonise at all 
 with the remainder, seem either to have been inserted at 
 a later time, or else, on the contrary, to have been retained 
 
 * Two lists of the Atharvopani- || Two other names, which are 
 
 shads in Chambers's Collection (see given to the father of Nachiketas, 
 
 my Catalogue, p. 95) cite after these viz., Auddflaki and V^jairavasa, 
 
 two ooZZis (39, 40), also amodA^aBoZft conflict with the usual accounts, 
 
 and an uttaravalli (41, 42) ! Vdjasravasa appears also in the pas- 
 
 t By Colebrooke it is reckoned as sage above referred to of the Tait- 
 
 two Upanishads. tiriya-Brdhmana ; whether Audd^- 
 
 J Thus we have vimsarja instead laki does so likewise I am unable to 
 
 oiin/a-cha-saija; KanydJcumdrim in- say. [Audd^laki is wanting in the 
 
 stead of °ri; Kdtydyanyaimstesid oi T.Br., as also the whole passage 
 
 oyandya, &o. , itself.] Benfey (in the GUlinger 
 
 § See /. St., ii. 195, fE, where the Odehrte Anzeigm, January 1852, p. 
 
 various translations and editions are 129) suggests that we should refer 
 
 cited. Since then this Upanishad Auddilaki Aruni to Nachiketas ; but 
 
 has appeared in a new edition, with the incompatibility of the two names 
 
 Samkara's commentary, in the Bibl. is not thereby removed. Aruni is Ud- 
 
 Indica, vol. viii., edited by Dr. Roer dillaka, and AuddiUaki is Aruneya. 
 [and translated in vol. xv.]. 
 
I5S VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 from a former exposition drawn up more for a liturgical 
 purpose. Its polemics against those holding different 
 opinions are very sharp and bitter. They are directed 
 against tarka, " doubt," by which the Samkhyas and Baud- 
 dhas are here probably intended. The sacredness of the 
 ■word om as the expression for the eternal position of things 
 is very specially emphasised, a thing which has not occurred 
 before in the same way. The gradation of the primeval 
 principles (in iii. lo, ii) exactly corresponds to the system 
 of the deistical Toga, whereas otherwise the exposition 
 bears a purely Vedantic character. 
 
 Of the Atharvopanishads proper the Mundaka- and 
 Pragma - TTpanishads (21, 22) connect themselves most 
 closely with the Upanishads of the older Vedas and with 
 the Vedanta doctrine;"* indeed, in the Vedanta-Siitra 
 of Badarayana reference is made to them quite as often 
 as to these others. The Mwndahar-Upani^wid, mostly in 
 verse, and so called because it " shears " away, or frees 
 from, all error, is very like the Kathakop. with regard 
 to doctrine and style ; it has, in fact, several passages in 
 common with it. At the outset it announces itself as an 
 almost direct revelation of Brahman himself. For Angiras, 
 who communicates it to ^aunaka, has obtained it from 
 Bharadvaja Satyavaha, and the latter again from Angir,* 
 the pupU of Athstrvan, to whom it was revealed by Brah- 
 
 17* The list of the Atharvopani- following Up. to other ^i[khi£s. But 
 
 shads begins, as a rule, with the N^fdyana, with whom, as regards 
 
 Mundakopanishad ; and, according the order of the first twenty-eight 
 
 to the statements in If^yanabhat- names, Colebrooke agrees in the 
 
 ta's scholium on the smaller Ath. main (from this point their state- 
 
 Upanishads now being edited (since ments differ), also quotes the i^uno- 
 
 1872) in the BM. Ivdica by Rtoa- higranthavistara for the Brahma- 
 
 maya Tarkaratna, a settled order of vindu No. i8, and the sdkhd 
 
 these Upanishads must still have Saunakavartitd for the Atmopani- 
 
 been in existence in the time of shad No. 28, as authority for these 
 
 N^r^yanabhatta, since he denotes numbers, or places, of the two Up- 
 
 the individual Upanishads as, e.g., anishads. The Gop^at^pani, how- 
 
 the seventh, the eighth, &c., reckon- ever, is marked by him as the forty- 
 
 ing from the Mundaka. This order sixth ' Atharva-Paippale,' a.nd the 
 
 is occasionally ascribed by him to V&udevopanishad as the forty-ninth 
 
 the ^aunaka-school. Compare as to ' kshudragranthagane ; ' see Rdjen- 
 
 this the remarks of Colebrooke, Jfisc. dra Ldla Mitra, Notices of Samkrit 
 
 Est., i. 93, according to which the MS8., i. 18 (1870). 
 first fifteen Upanishads only would * Angir is a name which occurs 
 
 belong to the Saunakiyas, and the nowhere else. 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE ATHARVAN. 159 
 
 man himself. Shortly afterwards, Vedic literature is op- 
 posed, as the inferior science, to speculation. The former 
 is stated to consist of the four Vedas, and of the six 
 Vedangas, which are singly enumerated. Some manu- 
 scripts here insert mention of the itihAsa-purdna-ny&ya- 
 mimdnsd-dharmaidstrdni ; but this is evidently a later 
 addition. Such additions are also found in other passages 
 of this Upanishad in the manuscripts. This enumeration 
 (here occurring for the first time) of the different Vedangas 
 is of itself sufficient to show that at that time the whole 
 material of the Yedas had been systematically digested, 
 and that out of it a new literature had arisen, which no 
 longer belongs to the Vedic, but to the following period. 
 We may furSier conclude from the mention of the Treta 
 in the course of the work that the Yuga-system also had 
 already attained its final form. On the other hand, we 
 here find the words kdli (the dark one) and Teardli (the 
 terrible one) still reckoned among the seven tongues of 
 fire, whereas in the time of the dramatic poet Bhavabhiiti 
 (eighth century a.d.) they are names of Durga — the wife of 
 Siva, developed out of Agni (and Eudra) — who under these 
 names was the object of a bloody sacrificial worship. Since 
 evidently a considerable time is required for the transition 
 from the former meaning to the latter, the Mundakop. 
 must be separated by a very wide interval from the date 
 of Bhavabhiiti, — a conclusion which follows besides from 
 the circumstance that it is on several occasions turned to 
 account in the Vedanta-Siitra, and that it has been com- 
 mented by ^amkara. — The FraJnopanishad, in prose, seems 
 to be borrowed from an Atharva-Brahmana, viz., that of 
 the Pippalada-schooL* It contains the instruction by 
 Pippalada of six different teachers, amongst whom the 
 following names are especially significant in regard to the 
 date of the Upanishad : Kaulalya A^valayana, Vaidaibhi 
 Bhargava, and Kabandhin Katyayana. In the course of 
 
 * In the colophons, at least, it is PippaUda is jprobablj to be traced 
 
 once so described ; by Samkara, too, to the conception found in the first 
 
 at the beginning of his commentary, verse of the Mundaka iii. I (taken 
 
 it is called brdhmma, although this from Rik mand. i. 164. 2o)_(?). The 
 
 proves but little, since with him all same verse recurs in the Svet^v^a- 
 
 the Upanishads he comments pass taropanishad iv. 6 and in Nir xiv. 
 
 a;, imti and hrdhmana. — The name 30. 
 
1 60 VEDIC LITER A TURE.. 
 
 the work Hiranyanabha, a prince of the Koialas, is also 
 ineationed, — ^the same doubtless who is specially extoUed 
 in the Puranas. As in the Mundakopan., so here also some 
 interpolated words are found which betray themselves as 
 such by the fact that they are passed over by Samkara in 
 his commentary. They refer to Atharvan himself, and to 
 the half mdtrd (mora), to which the word om, here appear- 
 ing in its full glory, is entitled in addition to its three morse 
 (a, u, m), and are evidently a later addition by some one 
 who did not like to miss the mention of these two subjects 
 in an Atharvopanishad, as in these they otherwise invari- 
 ably occur. Both Mundaka and Pra^na have been several 
 times edited and translated, see /. St., L 280, ff., 439, £f., 
 again recently by Dr. Koer in vol. viii. of the Bibliotheca 
 Indica, together with ^amkara's commentary."* — The name 
 of Pippalada is borne by another Upanishad, the Crarbha- 
 Upanishad (23), which I add here for this reason, although 
 in other respects this is not quite its proper place. Its 
 contents differ from those of all the other Upanishads, and 
 relate to the human body, to its formation as embryo and the 
 various parts of which it is composed, and the number and 
 weight of these. The whole is a commentary on a tri- 
 shtubh strophe prefixed to it, the words of which are passed 
 in review singly and further remarks then subjoined. The 
 mention of the names of the seven musical notes of the 
 present day, as well as of the weights now in use (which 
 are found besides in Varaha Mihira), brings us to a toler- 
 ably modern date ; so also the use of Devadatta iu the 
 sense of Gaius. A few passages ia which, among other 
 things, mention is made, for iustance, of Narayana as 
 Supreme Lord, and of the Samkhya and Yoga as the 
 means of attaining knowledge of him, reappear in the 
 fourteenth book — -a supplementary one — of Taska's Nir- 
 ukti. Whether Samkara expounded this Upanishad is 
 as yet uncertain. It is translated in Ind. Stud., ii. 65- 
 71."^ — In the Brahmuypanishad also (24), Pippalada ap- 
 pears, here with the title hJiagavdn Angirds ; he is thus 
 identified with the latter, as the authority for the particular 
 
 ■''' Roer's translation is published 1872 ; in his introduction described 
 
 invol. XV. of the5iit /7idi(;a(i853). as pamchakhandd 'shtamdn (read 
 
 176 Edited with Ndrdyana's com- °mJ/) Munddi PaippaMddbhidhd 
 
 mentary iu the Bibliotheca Indica, tathd. 
 
VPANISHADS OF THE ATHARVAN. i6i 
 
 doctrine here taught which he imparts to Saunaka (malid- 
 iAld), exactly as is the case in the Mundakopanishad. 
 There is, for the rest, a considerable difference hetween 
 this TJpanishad^" and the Mundaka and Pra^na; it be- 
 longs more to the Yoga-TJpanishads properly so called. 
 It consists of two sections : the first, which is in prose, 
 treats, in the first place, of the majesty of Atman ; and 
 later, on, in its last portion, it alleges Brahman, Vishnu, 
 Eudra, and Akshara to be the four p&das (feet) of the 
 nirvdnam hrahma ; the first eleven of the nineteen verses 
 of the second section discuss the subject of the Yogin 
 being allowed to lay aside his yajnopavita, or sacred thread, 
 as he stands in the most intimate relation to the s'ibtra, or 
 mundane thread; the whole therefore amounts to a mere play 
 upon words. The last eight verses are borrowed from the 
 Svetalvataropanishad, Mundakopanishad, and similar Upa- 
 nishads, and again describe the majesty of the One.— The 
 Mdnd'&hyopanishad (25-28) is reckoned as consisting of 
 four Upanishads, but only the prose portion of the first of 
 these, which treats of the three and a half mdtrds of the 
 word om, is to be looked upon as the real Mandiikyopani- 
 shad, all the rest is the work of Gaudapada,* whose pupil 
 Govinda was the teacher of Samkara ; it dates therefore 
 from about the seventh century A.D. Similarly, there are 
 two works by Samkara himself specified among the Upa- 
 nishads, viz., the Aptavajras'&cM (29), in prose, and the 
 Tripuri (30), likewise in prose ; both composed in a Ve- 
 danta sense. The former treats at the outset of what 
 makes a JBrdhmana a Brdhmana; it is not jdti (birth), 
 varna (colour), pdnditya, (learning) ; but the Brahmavid 
 (he who knows Brahnvm) is alone a Brd'h'rrMna.\ Then 
 it passes to the different definitions of mdksha (liberation), 
 
 ''^ Edited with Nilrfyana's comm. entire Mdndiikyopanishad together 
 
 in Bibl. Ind. 1873 ; in the introduc- with Samkara's comm. in Bibl. Ind. 
 
 tiou described aa chatushhharj.dd vol. viii., also a translation of sect. 
 
 dtdaml; the two sections of the i in vol. xv.] 
 
 text seem to have been transposed + This portion has been used by 
 
 in some of the MSS. a Buddhist (Aivaghosha), almost 
 
 * As such, it has been commented literally, against the system of caste 
 
 on by^aiilkara under the titledjfoma- in general, in the tract of the same 
 
 idslra. For particulars see /. St., ii. title which is given by Gildemeister, 
 
 100-109. [Roer has published the Bill. S., Praef. p. vi. not. ;.see also 
 
l62 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 stating the only correct one to be tlie perception of the 
 oneness oijiva (the individual soul) zmA paraTnesvara (the 
 AE-Soul), and lastly, distinctly rejecting all sects, it ex- 
 pounds the two highly important words tat (the Absolute) 
 and tvam (the Objective). The Trvpuri treats of the rela- 
 tion of Atman to the world, and stands as fourth prdkarana 
 in a series of seven little Vedanta writings attributed to 
 Samkara.^^* The Sarvopanishatsdropanishad (3 1 ), in prose, 
 may be considered as a Mnd of catechism of these doctrines; 
 its purpose is to answer several queries prefixed to it as an 
 introduction.^™ The same is the case with the Nirdlam,- 
 bopanishad (32),^** which, however, exhibits essentially 
 the Toga standpoint. The Atmqpanishad (33), in prose, 
 contains an inquiry by Angiras into the three factors 
 (purushas), the body, the soul, and the All-Soul.* The 
 Prdndgnihotropanishad (34), in prose, points out the rela- 
 tion of the parts and functions of the body to those of the 
 sacrifice, whence by implication it follows that the latter 
 is unnecessary. At its conclusion it promises to him who 
 reads this Upanishad the same reward as he receives 
 who expires in Varanasi, viz., deliverance from transmigra- 
 tion.^^i The ArsMkopanishad (? 35) contains a dialogue 
 on the nature of Atman between Vi^vamitra, Jamadagni, 
 Bhaiadvaja, Gautama, and Vasishtha, the last of whom, 
 appealing to the opinion of "K'hak" (? another MS. in 
 Anquetil has " Kapl " = KapUa ?), obtains the assent of the 
 others.^^ 
 
 Bumoiif, Introd. a I'Hist. du Buddh. '^ See Edjendra LiSla Mitra, iL 95. 
 
 Ind., p. 215. [Text and translation Taylor, Catalogue of Oriental MSS. 
 
 see now in my essay Die Yajraguchi of the College Port St. George, ii. 
 
 des Ahaglwsha (i860). By Haug, 462. 
 
 Bralanan und die Brdhmanen, p. 29, * Translated in I. St., ii. 56, 57. 
 
 the Upanishad is described as sdrrM- [Text and Kfirayana's comm. in Bihl. 
 
 ledoJctd.] Ind. 1873; described in the introd. as 
 
 ^" See my Catalogue of the Berlin hhandatraydnvitd | aalMvinU gran- 
 
 JISS., p. 180. By Eiljendra Ldla thasaTnglie sdkhd Saunakavartitd.'\ 
 Mitra, however {Notices of Sanskrit '*' Text and Ndniyana's comm. in 
 
 MSS., i. 10, 11), a different text is B-ibl. Ind. 1873; described in the 
 
 cited as the irlmachhamkardjclidrya- introd. as ekddasi Saunahiye ; ses 
 
 lirachitd trijmi-yupanishad. Taylor, ii, 472. Riijendra L. M. i. 
 
 "' See /. St., i. 301 ; edited with 49. Bumell, Catalogue, p. 63. 
 Ndrdyana's comm. in 5t6Z. /nd. 1874; i'- See /. St., ix. 48-52. The 
 
 de.=!cribed in the introd. as Taitlirl- name of the Upanishad is not yet 
 
 yahc I san'opanishaddm surah sapta- cei-tain. 
 triiUe chaturdaie (! ?). 
 
UPAXISHADS OF THE ATIIARVAN. 163 
 
 The second class of the Atharvopanishads, as above 
 stated, is made up of those whose subject is Yoga, or 
 absorption in Atman, the stages of this absorption, and the 
 external means of attaining it. These last chiefly consist 
 in the giving up of all earthly connections, and in the 
 frequent repetition of the word om, which plays a most 
 prominent part, and is itself therefore the subject of deep 
 study. Yajnavalkya is repeatedly named in the Upani- 
 shads of this class as the teacher of the doctrines they set 
 forth;* and indeed it would seem that we ought to look upon 
 him as one of the chief promoters of the system of religious 
 mendicancy so intimately associated with the Yoga-doctrine. 
 Thus, in the Tdrakopanishad (36) he instructs Bharadvaja 
 as to the saving and sin-dispelling ef&eacy of the word 
 OTO,^^ and similarly in the SdkalyopanisJiad (37)* Sakalya 
 as to true emancipation.^^ The one, however, in which he 
 stands out most prominently is the JdMlopanishad (38), 
 in prose, which, moreover, bears the name of a school of 
 the White Yajus, although no doubt wrongly, as it must 
 in any case be considered as merely an imitation of the 
 Aianyaka of this Veda (see I. St., ii. 72-77). Still, it 
 must have been composed before the Badarayana-Siitra, 
 as several passages of itf seem to be given in the 
 latter, (unless these passages have been borrowed from 
 a common source?). Of special importance with regard 
 to the mode of life of the Paramahansas, or religious 
 mendicants, are also, in addition to the Upanishad just 
 mentioned, the KathaAruti (39; Colebrooke gives the 
 name incorrectly as Kanthairutt), in prose, and the 
 Arunikcrpanishad (40), likewise in prose ; % both are to be 
 
 ^-"2 Seo I. St., is, 46-48. jendra L. M. i. 92 (Commentary by 
 
 * This name seems to result as SanikareLnanda). There are, besides, 
 
 the most probable one from com- quite a number of other TJpanishads 
 
 parison of the variants in Anquetil. bearing the name of Jilbiila, viz., 
 
 ^"^ See I. St., ii. 170. Bjihajjitbala, MahdjibiOa, Laghu- 
 
 + They presuppose the name Vd- j^b^la, BhasEaa°, Eudra°, Rudrji- 
 
 rdnasl for Benares. [The text of- kshi".] 
 
 the Jdbdlopanishad -with tairijana.'a J ^Translated in /. St., ii. 176- 
 
 comm. appeared in Bibl. Ind. 1874; 181. [Text and Ndrayana's oomm. 
 
 it is described in the introd. as in £ibl. Jnd., 1872 ; described in 
 
 ydjuski and ekadtatvdriniatlami (the the introd. as paiichavinsl. There 
 
 latter, however, is said of the is also a commentary upon it by 
 
 Kaivalyopanishad also!); see also SamUarilnajida ; see Riijendra L. M. 
 
 Buruell, p. 61, Taylor ii. 474, Ha- i. 92. — The Ealhai,-uti, also, is 
 
164.. VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 regarded as supplements to the Aranyaka of the Black 
 YaJTis, as the Jabalopanishad is to that of the White 
 Yajus. The BJiMlam-Upanishad (41) also belongs to this 
 class, to judge by quotations from it, and so does the 
 Samvartairuti (42) ; similarly the Samnydsopanishad (43) 
 and the Paramahansopanishad (44), both in prose * The 
 Hahsopanishad (45) I have not yet met with; but from 
 its name it probably also belongs to this place.^^ The 
 Airamopanishad (46), iu prose, gives a classification of 
 the four Indian orders — ^the Brahmacharins, Grihasthas, 
 Vanaprasthas, and Parivrajakas. It is even quoted by 
 Samkara, and the names applied in it to the several classes 
 are now obsolete. The ^rimaddattopanishad (47) consists 
 of twelve ilokas put iato the mouth of one of these reli- 
 gious mendicants, and uniformly concluding with the 
 refrain: tasyd 'ha/ni panehamdiramam, "1 am his, i.e., 
 hrahman's, fifth ASrama." Apart from the two Upanishads 
 already mentioned, the Mandiikya and the Taraka, the 
 investigation of the sacred word om is principally con- 
 ducted in the AtharvaiikM (48), in prose (explained by 
 Samkara), in which instruction is given on this subject by 
 Atharvan to Pippalada, Sanatkumara, and Angiras; + 
 further, ia the Brahmavidyd, (49), in thirteen Mokas, now 
 and then quoted by Samkara ; % and lastly, iu the ^avMoka 
 
 edited in Bibl. Ind. (1873), with anuvdJcas of the Ath. S. (xviii.) ; 
 
 Ndrfyana's commentary; although their text is therefore given by the 
 
 tinder the name Kantha°, it is clear editor in the scholium, and that in 
 
 from NifeCya^'s words in his intro- a double form aco. to two MSS. (pp. 
 
 duotion, Tajurvede iu Charahd dwir 131-175) ; see also Bdljendra L. M. 
 
 daiai'shdhant}uUrayaA{l) | scmmyd- i 54, Taylor, ii. 469.] 
 
 aopamshattulydchoclMhichanddlmita{\) ^ Text and Nitr.'s comm.in SHI. 
 
 srutih II that this mode of spelling Ind., 1874 ; described in the introd. 
 
 here, as well as in Burnell's Cata- as ashtat/riniattami \ diharvatj.e. By 
 
 logue, p. 60, is a mere mistake, and R^jendral^., i. 90, a comm. by 
 
 that N^r^yana himself connected ^amkan(nanda is specified ; see be- 
 
 the Upanishad with the Kathas ; see sides Bumell, p. 65. 
 
 also Biihler, CalaXogue of MSS. from, + See /. St., ii. 55. — Here, there- 
 
 Guj., i. 58.] fore, we have Pippa&da andABgiras 
 
 * The Paramaliansopaniahad is appearing side by side (see above, 
 
 translated in /. St., ii., 173-176. p. 160). [Text and Nir.'s comm. 
 
 [Text with Ndr.'s comm. in Bihl. in Bibl. Ind., 1S73 ; described in 
 
 Ind., 1874; described in the introd. as the introd. as saptami munddt.'] 
 
 trikhandd 'tharvaUhhare cltatvdrin- J Translated in /. St., ii. 58. 
 
 iattami. — The Samnydsopanishad, [Text and Ndr.'s comm. in Bibl. 
 
 too, is printed ibid., 1872 ; we there Ind., 1873.] 
 find a direct reference made to four 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE ATHARVAN. 165 
 
 (so) and the Pranava (51). These two are found in 
 Anquetil only.i8« The various stages of gradual absorp- 
 tion into Atman form the contents of the following 
 Upanishads (52-59): Sansandda (in prose), KshwriM 
 (24 ildkas), Nddavindu (20 ilohcLs), Brahmavi-ndu (22 
 ilohas; also caRed AmritaviTidu), AmritaviTidu (38 ^lokas; 
 also called Amritandda), Dhydnavindu (23 Mohas), Yoga- 
 iikhd (lo ilokas), and Togatattva (15 Slokas); while the 
 majesty of Atman himself is depicted in the Ch-dliM 
 (60, in 21 ilokas) and Tejovindu (61, in 14 Slokas ) : * in the 
 former direct reference is repeatedly made to the doctrine 
 of the Atharvans. The range of ideas and the style are 
 quite identical in all the Upanishads just enumerated. 
 The latter frequently suffers from great obscurity, partly 
 because there occur distinct grammatical inaccuracies, 
 partly because the construction is often very broken and 
 without unity. Many verses recur in several of them; 
 many again are borrowed from the Sveta^vataropanishad 
 or Maitrayanopanishad. Contempt for caste as well as 
 for writing (grantha) is a trait which appears again and 
 again in almost all these Upanishads, and one might 
 therefore be inclined to regard them as directly Buddhistic, 
 were they not entirely free from aU Buddhistic dogma. 
 This agreement is to be explained simply by the fact that 
 Buddhism itself must be considered as having been origi- 
 nally only a form of the Samkhya-doctrine. 
 
 The sectarian Upanishads have been set down as form- 
 ing the third class. They substitute for Atman one of the 
 forms of Vishnu or Siva, the earlier ones following the 
 Yoga-doctrine most closely, whilst in those of a modern 
 date the personal element of the respective deities comes 
 
 ^^ See I. St., ix. 52-53 and 49- yana'a comm. (1872-73), exeep- 
 
 52; the Pranavopanishad is men- tmgthsMansanddopanishad,y!bieb, 
 
 tioned by Taylor, ii. 328. however, seems to be identical with 
 
 * For the jETansandda see I. St., the Hansopanishad printed ibid. 
 
 i. 385-387 ; the Kshurikd is trans- In the Introductions to the comm. 
 
 lated, ii., ii. 171-173; likewise^jnW- CkAlikd is described as panchami; 
 
 tamndu, ii. S9-62 ; Tyovindu, ii. Brahmavindu as oshtddaM Sauna- 
 
 62-64; Dhydnavindu, ii. 1-5; ^o- hagramthamstare ; Dhydnavindu as 
 
 ffoUhhd [so we ought to read] and vindd (vin4i/) ; Tqovindu as ekavin- 
 
 Togatattva, ii. 47-50, lAmritandda, iam; YogaHIehdas granthas:andoke{l) 
 
 ix. 23-28; ChiilUxi, is, 10-21. All dvdtrindatitami {pToha.hlj meant tor 
 
 these Upanishads are now published dvdvini' !) ; Togatattva as trayovinsd 
 
 in the £ibUotheca Indica with TS&ri.- (°iO]. 
 
1 66 VEDIC LIT ERA TV RE. 
 
 more and more into the foreground. A special charac- 
 teristic of this class are the unmeasured promises usually 
 held out at the close of the work to him who reads and 
 studies it, as also the quotation and veneration of sacred 
 formulas containing the name of the particular deity. 
 
 Eirst, as regards the Upanishads of the FYsAwM-sects, — 
 the oldest form under which Vishnu is worshipped ia 
 Ndrdyana. We find^ this name for the first time in the 
 second part of the Satapatha-Brahmana, where, however, 
 it is not ia any way connected with Vishnu; it rather 
 stands, as at the commencement of Manu and the Vishnu- 
 Purana, in the sense of Brahman (mascul.). This is aJso 
 the case in the Narayaniyopanishad of the Taittiriya- 
 Aranyaka, and in its Atharvan-recension as Brihannara- 
 yanopanishad, although in the latter he is at least called 
 Hari, and in one passage brought into direct relation to 
 Vasudeva and Vishnu. It is in the MaJid-Upanishad 
 (62), — a prose tract, which* in its first part contains 
 the emanation of the universe from Narayana, and in its 
 second a paraphrase of the principal passage of the Nara- 
 yaniyopanishad, — ^that Narayana first distinctly appears as 
 the representative of Vishnu, since Siilapani (Siva) and 
 Brahman proceed from him, and Vishnu is not mentioned at 
 all. In the Ndrdyanffpanishad (64, in prose),^^^ on the 
 contrary, Vishnu also emanates from him, exactly as in the 
 Narayana section t of the twelfth book of the Maha-Bha- 
 rata (a book which in other respects also is of special sig- 
 nificance in relation to the Samkhya- and Yoga-doctrines). 
 The sacred formula here taught is : om namo Ndrdyaii&ya. 
 There exists of this Upanishad another, probably a later, 
 recension which forms part of the Atharva^iras to be men- 
 tioned hereafter, and in which Dpvakiputra Madhusiidana 
 is mentioned as particularly brahmanya, pious, as is also 
 the case in the Atmaprdbodha-Upanishad (65), which like- 
 
 * Translated in /. St., ii. 5-8 [see ^^ See also Eijendra L. M. i. 12, 
 also Taylor, ii. 468, B^jendra L. M. 91 (comm. by ^amkardnanda). 
 i. 25]; besides it there must have + At the time of the (last?) ar- 
 existed another Mahdr Vpan. (63), rangement of the present text of the 
 which is cited by the adherents of the Mahd - Bh^ata, NfCriyana worship 
 Mddhava sect as a warrant for their must have been particularly flourish- 
 belief in a personal soul of the uni- ing. 
 verse, distinct from the soul of man. 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE AT H ARYAN. 167 
 
 ■wise celebrates Narayana as the Supreme Lord ; ^^ see /. 
 St., ii. 8, 9. He (Narayana) is named, besides, in the 
 same quality in the Garbhopanishad (in a passage re- 
 curring in the Nirukti, xiv.) and in the Sakalyopanishad. 
 
 The second form under "which we find Vishnu wor- 
 shipped is Nrisinha. The earliest mention of him hitherto 
 known appears in the Taitt. Ar., x. i. 8 (in the Narayani- 
 yop.), under the name of Narasinha, and with the epithets 
 vajranahha and tihsknadanshtra. The only Upanishad in 
 which he is worshipped is the Nrisiiihatdpaniyopanishad 
 (in prose). It is relatively of considerable extent, and 
 is also counted as six separate Upanishads (66-71), as it 
 consists of two parts,* the first of which is in turn subdi- 
 vided into five distinct Upanishads. The first part treats 
 of the Anushtubh-formula f sacred to Nrisinha, the Tnan- 
 trardja ndrasinha dnushtubha, with which the most won- 
 drous tricks are played ; wherein we have to recognise the 
 first beginnings of the later Malamantras with their Tan- 
 tra-ceremonial. A great portion of the Mandiikyopanishad 
 is incorporated into it, and the existence also of the Athar- 
 vaiikha is presupposed, as it is directly quoted. The 
 contents of the second part are of a more speculative 
 character ; but in respect of mystical trifling it does not 
 yield to the first part. In both, the triad — Brahman, 
 Vishnu, and Siva — is repeatedly mentioned. As regards 
 language, the expression huddhk for the supreme Atman, 
 which occurs (along with nitya, iuddlia, satya, mukta, &c.) 
 in. the second part, is of peculiar interest ; and the expres- 
 sion is stni retained in Gaudapada and Samkara; originally 
 it belongs evidently to the Samkhya school (see above, pp. 
 27, 129). 
 
 This Upanishad has been interpreted by Gaudapada 
 and Samkara J and in addition to much that is quite 
 modern, it presents a great deal that is ancient. It pro- 
 bably dates from about the fourth century a.d., as at that 
 
 W^ See also Ed,jendra L. M., iii. num jvcUantam aarvatomvlcham | 
 
 36 ; Taylor, ii. 328. nrisiikham hhlshanam hhadram 
 
 * The above-mentioned lists of mrityumrUyum namdmy aham, || " I 
 
 Upanishads in the Chambers eollec- worship the terrible, powerful, 
 
 tion admit a, Madhyatdpini also [see mighty Vishnn, the flaming, the om- 
 
 my Catalogue, p. 95]. nipresent; Nrisinha, the dread, the 
 
 f It runs ugram vlram mahAmsh- holy one, the death of death." 
 
l68 VEDIC LITERATURE. 
 
 time the Nrisinlia worship flourished on the westem coast 
 of India, while otherwise we find no traces of it.^® 
 
 The BdmiMtdpaniyopanishad (72, 73), in which Eama is 
 worshipped as the Supreme God, shows a great resemblance 
 to the Nrisinhatapamyop., especially in its second part. 
 This second part, which is in prose, is, properly speaking, 
 nothing but a collection of pieces from the Tarakopanishad, 
 Mandiikyopanishad, Jabalopanishad, and Nrisiiihopani- 
 shad, naturally with the necessary alterations. Yajnar 
 valkya here appears as the proclaimer of the divine glory 
 of Eama. A London MS. adds at the close a long passage 
 which is unknown to the commentator Anandavana (a 
 native of the town Kundina). The crowning touch of the 
 sectarian element in this TJpanishad is found in the cir- 
 cumstance that Eama is implored by Siva (Samkara) him- 
 self to spare those a second birth who die in Manikarnika 
 or in the Gafiga generally, the two principal seats of the 
 ^iva worship. The first part, in ninety-five ilohas, contains 
 at the beginning a short sketch of Eama's life, which bears 
 a great similarity to that at the beginning of the Adhyat- 
 maramayana (in the Brahmanda-Purana). The Mantraraja 
 is next taught by the help of a mystical alphabet, speci- 
 ally invented for the purpose.* This Upanishad evidently 
 belongs to the school of Eamanuja, possibly to Eamanuja 
 himself, consequently its earliest date would be the 
 eleventh century a.d.^^ 
 
 Under the names Vishnu, Pnrushottama, and Vasudeva, 
 Vishnu is mentioned as the supreme Atman in several 
 
 189 See text and translation of this shad (1864); text and Ndriiy.'s 
 
 Upanishad in /. St., ix. 53-173 ; and comm. in Bihl. Ind. also (1873) ; in 
 
 specially on the chronological qnes- the introdnctiuns the two sections are 
 
 tion, pp. 62, 63. In the Bihl. In- called paflcJuUrinhttama and sluit- 
 
 dica also, this Upanishad has been trinia respectively. The time of 
 
 published by Bdmamaya Tarkaratna composition is probably even later 
 
 (1870-71), with ^amkara'scommen- than above supposed. In the first 
 
 tary (it is, however, doubtful whe-, place, according to Nfisinha's state- 
 
 ther the commentary on the second ments in his Smrityarthasdra (see 
 
 part belongs to &ipkara), together Aufrecht, Cato/osri«, pp. 285'', 286*), 
 
 -with the small (iVtinmriAa) <%a^c&z%- Sdmdnuja flourished as late as the 
 
 ropanishad and N^rttyana's comm. twelfth century {kike 1049 := A.D. 
 
 on it. 1127). But further, the Eiimatdpani 
 
 * The Ndrasinha- and a VdKtha- displays still closer relations to Bdmd- 
 
 Mantra are also mentioned. nanda, who is supposed to have lived 
 
 ™° See text and translation in my towards the end of the fourteenth 
 
 essay Die Udma - Tdpantya • Vpsni- century ; see my essay, p. 382. 
 
UPANISHADS OF THE ATHARVAN. 169 
 
 Upanishads;* Krishna Devakiputra appears likewise in 
 some of them (the Atmaprabodha and Narayana), not, 
 however, as supreme Atman, but merely, as in the Chhan- 
 dogyop., as a particularly pious sage. It is in the Qo- 
 pdlat&paniyopanishad (74, 75) that we first find him ele- 
 vated to divine dignity. Of this Upanishad, the second 
 part at least, in prose, is known to me.f It treats 
 first of the gopis of Mathura and Vraja, then it passes to 
 the identification of Mathura with Brahmapura, &c. ; and 
 it belongs without doubt to a very modern period, as it ex- 
 hibits hardly any points of contact with other Upanishads 
 in regard to contents and language.^^^ The Gqpichandano- 
 panishad {y6) also probably belongs to this place : ^^^ I 
 know it only by name. 
 
 At the head of the Upanishads belonging to the Siva- 
 sects stands, according to the use that has been made of 
 it, the Satarvdriya. I have already remarked, however, 
 that this ^ is nothing but an abuse. In its germs the wor- 
 ship of Siva may be traced even in the later portions of 
 the Yajus.J He appears very prominently as Mahadeva 
 in a portion of the Narayaniyopanishad, and here he is 
 already associated with his spouse. The Svetalvataropani- 
 shad also pays homage to him. Among the Atharvo- 
 panishads the most ancient in this regard is the Kaivalyo- 
 panishad {77), a mixture of prose and ilohas, in which 
 hhagavdn maJiddevaJi himself instructs A^valayana con- 
 cerning his own majesty ; in a similar way he acts as his 
 own herald § in the Atharvafiras (78), in prose. The latter 
 
 * And also, in particular, under as shatchatvdriniaii cha pdrnd chd 
 
 the name V4sudeT», in the writings 'thanapaippalc. — See an analysis of 
 
 ascribed to Samkara. the second section in Taylor, ii. 472. 
 
 -|- The lists in the Chambers collec- '^^ So also according to Estjen- 
 
 Wonspicifj a Oopdlatdpinl,Madhyar- dral., i. 20 (comm. by Niir.), 60; it 
 
 tdpini, Uttaratdpini, and Brihadut- is specially " a treatise on the merits 
 
 taratdpini I of putting on sectaiial marks on the 
 
 ^^ The text of this Upanishad, forehead with an ochrous earth, 
 
 ■with Visve^vara's commentary, is called goplchandana." 
 
 printed in the Bill. Indica (1870), J As in the Atharva-Sanihitil and 
 
 edited by Harachandra Vidydbhu- in the Silnkh^yana-Brdhmana (see 
 
 shana and Vi^vaniitha&Istrin. Oc- pp. 45, no). 
 
 casionally extracts are added from § Like Krishna in the Bhagavad- 
 
 the commentaries by Ntolyana and glU. The Kaivalyopanishad is 
 
 JIvagoBvdmin. According to Kdjen- translated /. St., ii. 9-14 ; onAthar- 
 
 dral., i. 18, its first section is de- vadiras see ibid., i. pp. 382-385. 
 
 scribed in Nardyana's introduction [Text of, and two commentaries on, 
 
17° 
 
 VEDIC LITERA TURE. 
 
 Upanishad has been expounded by Samkara. Under the 
 same title, " head of Atharvan," — a name that is also borne 
 by Brahman himself, although in a different relation, — 
 there exists a second Upanishad, itself a conglomeration of 
 five different Upanishads referring to the five piincipal 
 deities, Ganapati (79), Narayana, Eudra, Siirya (80), and 
 Devi (81).* Its N^arayana-portion is a later recension of 
 the Narayanopanishad (64, see above, p. 166), and the 
 liudra-portion follows the first chapter of the Atharvaiiras 
 proper. AU five have been translated by Vans Kennedy. 
 In the Maha-Bharata (i. 2882), and the Code of Vishnu, 
 where the Atharvaiiras is mentioned along with the EhA- 
 rund&iii sdmdni, and in Vishnu also, where it appears beside 
 the Satarudriya (as the principal means of expiation), the 
 reference probably is to the Upanishad explained by Sam- 
 kara (?). — The Rvdrop.sjiA.Atharvaniya-Bvdr(yp. are known 
 to me only through the Catalogue of the India Office Library. 
 Possibly they are identical with those already named ; I 
 therefore exclude them from my list. The Mrityvlangh- 
 anopanishad (82) t is quite modern, and with it is wor- 
 
 the Kaivalyopanishad printed ia 
 Bibl. Ind., 1874; the first commen- 
 tary is that of Niriyana ; the second 
 is described by the editor as that of 
 Samkara, in the colophon as that of 
 Samkar^nanda ; it follows, however, 
 from Rjijendra Ldla Mitra's Cata- 
 logue, 1. 32, that it is different from 
 the commentary written by the lat- 
 ter ; and according to the same 
 authority, ii. 247, it is identical 
 rather with that of Vidy&anya. In 
 If^rdyana's introduction this Upa- 
 nishad is described (exactly like the 
 Jib^Iop. !) as ekachatvdriniattami. 
 The §iras- or Athaiiicairai - Upani- 
 shad is likewise printed in Bibl. 
 ]nd. (1872), with Niriyana's comm., 
 which describes it as rudrddhydyah 
 saptaJchandah. See also B^jendral., 
 i. 32 (comm. by ^amkar^nanda), 
 48.] 
 
 * See /. <St.,ii. 53, and Vans Ken- 
 nedy, Researches into the Nature and 
 Affinity ofSindu and Ancient Mytho- 
 logy, p. 442, &c. [Taylor, ii. 469- 
 471. By Rdjendral., i. 61, a Gdna- 
 
 patyapllrvatdpanfyopanisluid is men- 
 tioned ; by Biihler, Oat. of MSS. 
 from Chij., i. 70, a GanapaiipdrvaM- 
 pinl and a Ganeiatdpini ; and by 
 Kielhorn, Sanskrit MSS. in theSovth- 
 em Dimsion of the Bombay Preg. 
 (1869), p. 14, a Ganapatipurvatdr 
 paniyopanishad.'] 
 
 + So we have probably to under- 
 stand Anquetil's Amrat Lankovl, 
 since he has also another form, Mrat 
 Lanhoun ; instead of, id est ' halitus 
 mortis,' we ought to read ' salitus 
 mortis.' [See now I. St., ix. 21-23 ; 
 according to this it is doubtful whe- 
 ther the name ought not to be writ- 
 tan Mrityuldngllla{^. An Upanishad 
 named Mrityulanghana is mentioned 
 by Biihler, Cat. of MSS. from Guj., 
 i. 120 ; a Mrityul^ngtila, however, 
 appears as 82d Upanishad in the 
 Catalogue of Pandit Eftdh^krishna's 
 library. Pinallx, Burnell, in pub- 
 lishing the text in the Indian Anti- 
 quary, ii. 266, gives the form Mrii- 
 yuldiigala.^ 
 
UPAXISJIADS OF THE ATHARVAN. 171 
 
 tliily associated th.Q Kdldgnirudropanisliad {^i)^^^ iu prose, 
 of whicli there are no less than three different recensions, 
 one of which belongs to the Nandike^vara-Upapurana. 
 The Tripuropanishad (84) also appears from its name — 
 otherwise it is unknown to me — to belong to this divi- 
 sion ;i^ it has been interpreted by Bhatta Bhaskara 
 Mi^ra. The SkandopanisJiad (85), in fifteen kokas, is also 
 Siva-itic ^^^ (likewise the Amritanddopanishad). The ado- 
 ration of Siva's spouse, his Sakti, — the origin of which may 
 be traced back to the Kenopanishad and the ITarayaniyo- 
 panishad, — is the subject of the Sundaritdpaniyopanishad 
 (known to me by name only), in five parts (86-90), as well 
 as of the Devi-Upanishad (79), which has already been 
 mentioned.^ The Kaulopanishad (91), in prose, also be- 
 longs to a Sakta sectary* 
 
 Lastly, a few Upanishads (92-95) have to be mentioned, 
 which are known to me only by their names, names which 
 do not enable us to draw any conclusion as to their con- 
 tents, viz., the Pindopanishad, Nilaruhopaniskad (Cole- 
 brooke has NUarudra), Paingalopanishad, and Dar^ano- 
 vanishad}^ The Garudopanishad (96), of which I know 
 two totally different texts, celebrates the serpent-destroyer 
 Garuda,t and is not without some antiquarian interest. 
 
 ^^^ It treats specially of the tri- saptamndatipiirani, the latter as sho- 
 
 fundravidhi ; see Taylor, i. 461 ; daM: it is addressed to Radra (see 
 
 Kijendr., i. 59 ; Bumel), p. 61. also Eijendral., i. 51), and consists 
 
 iM See on it Taylor, ii. 470 ; Bur- only of verses, which closely follow 
 
 iiell, p. 62. those contained in V^j. S. xvi. On 
 
 "5 "" Identifies Siva with Vishnu, the Paingalop. and Dar^anop., see 
 
 and teaches the doctrines of the Taylor, ii. 468-471. 
 
 Advaita school." Taylor, ii. 467 ; f As is done iu the Ndrdyaniyo- 
 
 Burnell, p. 65. panishad also, and more especially 
 
 * In the Tejovindu (61) also, ia the Suparnddhydy a, vhich is con- 
 
 Irahman is described as dnava, idm- sidered to belong to the Rik [edited 
 
 hhava, idUa. ' ty Elimar Grube, 1875 ; see also /. 
 
 isf The Pindop. and the Ntlarud- St., xiv. I, ffi — The Odi-udopanisliad 
 
 rop. this is its proper name — are is now printed in Bill. Ind. (1874), 
 
 now printed in £U>1. Ind. (1873), with NiiHiyana's commentary; in 
 
 with NirStyana's comm. ; the former, the introduction it is described as 
 
 which treats of the pindas to the chatuidiatvarinkittami.} 
 pretas, is described by Ndrdyana as 
 
SECOND PERIOD. 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
( I7S ) 
 
 SECOND PERIOD. 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 Having thus followed the first period of Indian literature, 
 in its several divisions, down to its close, we now turn to 
 its second period, the so-called Sanskrit literature. Here, 
 however, as our time is limited, we cannot enter so much 
 into detail as we have hitherto done, and we must there- 
 fore content ourselves with a general survey. In the case 
 of the Vedic literature, details were especially essential, 
 both because no full account of it had yet been given, and 
 because the various works still lie, for the most part, shut 
 up in the manuscripts ; whereas the Sanskrit literature 
 has already been repeatedly handled, partially at least, and 
 the principal works belonging to it are generally accessible. 
 
 Our first task, naturally, is to fix the distinction between 
 the second period and the first. This is, in part, one of 
 age, in part, one of subject-matter. The former distinction 
 is marked by the language and by direct data ; the latter 
 by the nature of the subject-matter itself, as well as by 
 the method of treating it. , 
 
 As regards the language, in the first place, in so far as 
 it grounds a distinction in point of age between the two 
 periods of Indian literature, its special characteristics in 
 the second period, although apparently slight, are yet, in 
 reahty, so significant that it appropriately furnishes the 
 name for the period ; whereas the earlier one receives its 
 designation from the works composing it. 
 
 Among the various dialects of the different Indo-Aryan 
 tribes, a greater unity had in the course of time been 
 established after their immigration into India, as the natural 
 result of their intermingling in their new homes, and ox 
 
170 ^A^VCiJiKJJ l^iUtLli/il Ul^£.. 
 
 their combination into larger communities. The gram- 
 matical * study, moreover, which hy degrees became neces- 
 sary for the interpretation of the ancient texts, and which 
 grew up in connection therewith, had had the effect of 
 substantially fixing the usage ; so that a generally re- 
 cognised language, known as the hhdshA, had arisen, that, 
 namely, in which the Brahmanas and Sutras are com- 
 posed.t Now the greater the advance made by the study 
 of grammar, the more stringent and precise its precepts 
 and rules became, and all the more difficult it was for 
 those who did not occupy themselves specially therewith 
 to keep in constant accord with grammatical accuracy. 
 The more the language of the grammatically educated 
 gained on the one hand in purity, and in being purged of 
 everything not strictly regular, the more foreign did it 
 become on the other hand to the usage of the majority of 
 the people, who were without grammatical training. In 
 this way a refined language gradually disconnected itself 
 from the vernacular, as more and more the exclusive pro- 
 perty of the higher classes of the people ; % the estrange- 
 
 * Respecting the use of the verb 
 vydJeri in a grammatical signification, 
 Sdyana in his introduction to the 
 Rik (p. 35. 22 ed. Miiller) adduces 
 a legend from a BrShmana, which 
 represents Indra as the oldest gram- 
 marian. (See Lassen, /. AK., ii. 
 475. ) [The legend is taken from the 
 TS. vi. 4. 7. 3. All that is there 
 stated, indeed, is that vdc7i was 
 vydhritd by Indra ; manifestly, how- 
 ever, the later myths which do actu- 
 ally set up Indra as the oldest gram* 
 marian connect themselves with this 
 passage. ] 
 
 + SkdsJdha-svara in Klitystyana, 
 Srauta-Stitra, i. 8. 17, is expressly 
 interpreted as hrdAmana-svara ; see 
 Vdj, Swmh. Specimen, ii. 196, 197. 
 [/. St., X. 428-429, 437.] Yfcka 
 repeatedly opposes ihdshdydm and 
 wnvadhyAyanii {i.e., 'in the Veda 
 reading,' ' in the text of the hymns ') 
 to each other ; similarly, the Pr^ti- 
 (SSkhya - Stitras employ the words 
 hhdshd and hhdshya as opposed to 
 chhandaa and veda, i.e., sa/mhitd (see 
 above, pp. 57, 103, 144). The way in 
 
 which the word hJidshya is used in 
 the Grihya-Sutra of Silnkh^yana, 
 namely, in contradistinction to Siitra, 
 shows that its meaning had already 
 by this time become essentially mo- 
 dified, and become restricted, pre- 
 cisely as it is in F^nini, to the extra- 
 Vedic, so to say, profane literature. 
 (The A^val^yana-Grihya gives in- 
 stead of iJidshya, in the correspond- 
 ing passage, bhdrata-mahdbhdraia- 
 dharma.) [This is incorrect ; rather, 
 in the passage in question, these 
 words follow the word hhdshya ; see 
 the note on this point at p. 56.] lu 
 the same way, in the Nir. xiii. 9, 
 mantra, kaZpa, brdhmat^a, and the 
 vydvaJidnki (sc. hhdshA) are opposed 
 to each other (and also ^ik, Tajus, 
 Sdman, and the vydvaJul/riki). 
 
 t Ought the passage cited in Nir. 
 xiii. 9 from a Brdhmana [cf. Kdth. 
 xiv. 5], to the effect that the Brah- 
 mans spoke both tongues, that of 
 the gods as well as that of men, to 
 be taken in this connection ? or has 
 this reference merely to a conception 
 resembling the Homeric cue ? 
 
SANSKRIT LITER A TV RE. 177 
 
 ment between the two growing more and more marked, as 
 the popular dialect in its turn underwent further develop- 
 ment. This took place mainly under the influence of 
 those aboriginal inhabitants who had been received into 
 the Brahmanic community ; who, it is true, little by little 
 exchanged their own language for that of their conquerors, 
 but not without importing into the latter a large number 
 of new words and of phonetic changes, and, in particular, 
 very materially modifying the pronunciation. This last 
 was all the more necessary, as the numerous accumulations 
 of consonants in the Aryan hhdsM presented exceeding 
 difficulties to the natives; and it was all the easier, as 
 there had evidently prevailed within the language itself 
 from an early period a tendency to clear away these trouble- 
 some encumbrances of speech, — a tendency to which, in- 
 deed, the study of grammar imposed a limit, so far as the 
 educated portion of the Aryans was concerned, but which 
 certainly maintained itself, and by the very nature of the 
 case continued to spread amongst the people at large. 
 This tendency was naturally furthered by the native inhabi- 
 tants,- particularly as they acquired the language not from 
 those who were conversant with grammar, but from inter- 
 course and association with the general body of the people. 
 In this way there gradually arose new vernaculars, proceed- 
 ing directly from the common IMsM* and distinguished 
 from it mainly by the assimilation of consonants, and by 
 
 * And therefore specially so called oeediBg in common from.' The term 
 down even to modem times ; where- directly opposed to it ia not som- 
 as the grammatically refined hhdskd ikrUa, but vailcrita ; see, e.g., Ath. 
 afterwards lost this title, and sub- 7a.T\h.i,<^.l,''vm^6jnp(i,'i-vamv!j6k'hyd- 
 stituted for it the name SamikrUa- sydinah prdhritd ye cha vaihritdh,"] 
 bhdshd, 'the cultivated speech.' The earliest instances as yet known 
 The name Prdkrita-bhdshd, which of the name Samslerit as a deaigna- 
 was at the same time applied to the tion of the language occur in the 
 popular dialects, ia derived from the Mrichhakati (p. 44. 2, ed. Stenzler), 
 word prakriU, 'nature,' 'origin,' and in Var^ha-Mihira's Bfihat-Sanx- 
 and probably describea these as the hit^, 85. 3. The following passages 
 ' natural,' ' original ' continuations also of the Eto^ana are doubtless 
 of the ancient hhdshd: or does prd- to be understood in this sense, viz., 
 krita here signify 'having a prakriti v. 18. 19, 29. 17, 34 (82. 3), vi. 104. 
 or origin,' i.e., 'derived'? [Out of 2. Psinini ia familiar with the word 
 the signification 'original,' 'lying at Sa/mslcrita, but does not use it in 
 the root of ' {prakriti-hlviHa), ' un- this sense ; though the Pdniniyd- 
 modified,' arose that of 'normal,' ^iksh^ does so employ it (v. 3), in 
 then that of ' ordinary,' ' communis,' contradistinction to prdkrita. 
 ' vulgaris,' and lastly, that of ' pro- 
 
 M 
 
i'78 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 the curtailment or loss of terminations. Not unfrequently, 
 however, they present older forms of these than are found 
 in the written language, partly because the latter has rigo- 
 rously eliminated all forms in any way irregular or obso- 
 lete, but partly also, no doubt, from the circumstance that 
 grammar was cultivated principally in the north or north- 
 west of India, and consequently adapted itself specially to 
 the usage there prevailing. And in some respects {e.g., in 
 the instr. plur. of words in a?)^^' this usage may have 
 attained a more developed phase than appears to have 
 been the case in India Proper,* since the language was not 
 there hampered in its independent growth by any external 
 influence ; whereas the Aryans who had passed into India 
 maintained their speech upon the same internal level 
 on which it stood at the time of the immigration,-|- how- 
 
 ^'' This example is not quite per- 
 tinent, as the instr. plur. in -dis is 
 of very ancient date, being reflected 
 not only in Zend, but also in Sla- 
 vonic and Lithuanian ; see Bopp, 
 Vergl. Gram., i. 156^ (159'). 
 
 * The difference in usage between 
 the Eastern and Western forms of 
 speech is once touched upon in the 
 BrShmana of the White Yajus, 
 where it is said that the Y^hikag 
 style Agni Bhava, while the Pr^oh- 
 yas, on the contrary, call him &arva. 
 Y&ka (ii. 2) opposes the ^ambojas 
 (the Persa- Aryans ?) totheAryas (the 
 Indo-Aryans?), statingthat the latter, 
 for instance, possesB derivatives only 
 of thfe root hi, whereas the Kam- 
 bojas possess it also as a verb. 
 (Grammarians of the Kambojas are 
 hardly to be thought of here, as 
 Roth, Zur Lit., p. 67, supposes.) 
 Y&ka further opposes the Prfchyaa 
 and the Udlchyas, and the same is 
 done by P^uini. According to the 
 Br^hmana, the Udichyas were most 
 conversant with grammar [see 7. 
 -Sfi!., i. 153, ii. 309, 3:0, xiii. 363, ff. 
 Burnell's identification of the Kam- 
 bojas here, and in the other earlier 
 passages where they are mentioned, 
 with Cambodia in Farther India, see 
 his Elements of South Indian Palaeo- 
 graphy, pp. 31, 32, 94, is clearly a 
 mistake, for the time of the V&\i 
 
 AbhidhSnappadipikdl (v. Childers, 
 Pdli Diet. ) this identification may 
 perhaps be correct ; but the older 
 Fill texts, and even the inscriptions 
 of Piyadasi {e.g., most distinctly the 
 facsimile of the Khdlsi inscription 
 in Cunningham's Archwological Sv/r- 
 vey, i. 247, pi. xli., line 7), intro- 
 duce the Kambojas in connection 
 with the Yavanas ; and this of itself 
 determines that the two belonged 
 geographically to the same region 
 in the north-west of India; see 
 /. Str., ii. 321. In addition to 
 this we have the name Kabujiya = 
 Ka/Mpiaris, and therewith all the 
 various references to this latter 
 name, which point to a very wide 
 ramification of it throughout Irin ; 
 see I. Str., ii. 493. To Farther 
 India the name Kamhoja evidently 
 found its way only in later times, 
 like the names Ayodhyil, Indra- 
 prastha, Ir^vati, Champ^; though 
 it certainly remains strange that 
 this lot should have fallen precisely 
 to it. Perhaps causes connected 
 with Buddhism may have helped to 
 bring this about. See on this point 
 the Jenaer Literaturzeitung, 1875, 
 p. 418 ; Indian Antiquary , iv. 244.] 
 t Much as the Germans did, who 
 
 in the middle ages emigrated to 
 
 Transylvania. 
 
SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 179 
 
 ever considerable were the external modifications ■which it 
 underwent. 
 
 The second period of Indian literature, then, commences 
 with the epoch when the separation of the language of 
 the educated classes — of the written language — from the 
 popular dialects was an accomplished fact. It is in the 
 former alone that the literature is presented to us. Kot 
 tUl after the lapse of time did the vernaculars also in their 
 turn produce literatures of their own, — in the first instance 
 under the influence of the Buddhist religion, which ad- 
 dressed itself to the people as such, and whose scriptures 
 and records, therefore, were originally, as for the most part 
 they stni are, composed in the popular idiom. The epoch 
 in question cannot at present he precisely determined; 
 yet we may with reasonable certainty infer the existence 
 of the written language also, at a time when we are in a 
 position to point to the existence of popular dialects ; and 
 with respect to these we possess historical evidence of a 
 rare order, in those rock-inscriptions, of identical purport, 
 which have been discovered at Girnar in the Gujarat 
 peninsula, at Dhauli in Orissa, and at Kapur di Giri ^^* in 
 Kabul. J. Prinsep, who was the first to decipher them, and 
 Lassen, refer them to the time of the Buddhist king A^oka, 
 who reigned from B.C. 259 ; but, according to the most 
 recent investigations on the subject — ^by Wilson, in the 
 "Journal of the Eoyal Asiatic Society," xii., 1850 (p. 95 of 
 the separate impression) — they were engraved " at some 
 period subsequent to B.C. 205," * and are are stUl, there- 
 fore, of uncertain date. However this question may be 
 settled, it in any case results' with tolerable certainty 
 
 198 Tjiia name ought probably, to * And tbat not much later ; as is 
 
 be written Ka^ardigiri? See my vouched for by the names of the 
 
 paper on the Satruipjaya Msihitmya, Greek kings therein mentioned — 
 
 p. 118. In these inscriptions, more- Alexander, Antigonus, Magas, Pto- 
 
 over we have a text, similar in pur- lemy, Antiochus. These cannot, it 
 
 port, presented to us in three distinct is true, be regarded as contempora- 
 
 dialects. .Seefurther on this subject neous with the inscriptions ; but 
 
 Burnouf's admirable discussion of their notoriety in India can hardly 
 
 these inscriptions in his Lotus de la have been of such long duration 
 
 lonne Loi, p. 652, ff. (1852) ; /. St., that the inscriptions can have been 
 
 iii. 467, ff. ( 1 855 ) ; and Kern, De Ge- composed long after their time. See 
 
 denhstuTcken van Moha den Buddhist Wilson, I. c. 
 (1873, particularly p. 32 ff., 45 ff.). 
 
i8o SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 that these popular dialects were in existence in the third 
 century B.C. But this is by no means to be set down as 
 the lim it for the commencement of their growth ; on the 
 contrary, the form in which they are presented to us suifi- 
 ciently shows that a very considerable period must have 
 elapsed since their separation from the ancient ITidshd. 
 This separation must therefore have taken place compara- 
 tively early, and indeed we find allusions to these vernacu- 
 lars here and there in the Brahmanas themselves.* 
 
 The direct data, attesting the posteriority of the second 
 period of Indian literature, consist in these facts : first, 
 that its opening phases everywhere presuppose the Vedic 
 period as entirely closed ; next, that its oldest portions are 
 regularly based upon the Vedic literature ; and, lastly, that 
 the relations of life have now all arrived at a stage of de- 
 velopment of which, in the first period, we can only trace 
 the germs and beginning. Thus, in particular, divine wor- 
 ship is now centred on a triad of divinities, Brahman, 
 Vishnu, and ^iva ; the two latter of whom, again, in course 
 of time, have the supremacy severally allotted to them, 
 under various forms, according to the different sects that 
 grew up for this purpose. It is by no means implied that 
 individual portions of the earlier period may not run on 
 into the later ; on the contrary, I have frequently endea- 
 voured in the preceding pages to show that such is the 
 case. For the rest, the connection between the two periods 
 is, on the whole, somewhat loose : it is closest as regards 
 those branches of litera1;ure which had already attained a 
 definite stage of progress in the first period, and which 
 merely continued to develop further in the second, — 
 Grammar, namely, and Philosophy. In regard to those 
 branches, on the contrary, which are a more independent 
 
 * Thua in the second part of the tnans are warned against such forma 
 
 Aitareya-Brilhrnana the Sydparnas, a of speech ; " tasmdd hrdhmano na 
 
 clan (?) of the western Salvaa, are mlechhet." — I may remark here in 
 
 mentioned as " pHtdyai vAchovadi- passing that M. Miiller, in hiaedi- 
 
 tdrah," ' speaking a filthy tongue ; ' tion of the Rik, in S^yana's intro- 
 
 and in the PafiohaTifi^a-Br^hmana, duction, p. 36. 21, erroneously 
 
 the Vrittyas are found fault with writes helayo as one word : it stands 
 
 for their debased language. The for he 'layo, — the Aaura corruption 
 
 Asuraa are similarly censured in the of the battle-cry Ac 'royo {arayo) : 
 
 ^atapatha-Br^hmana (iii. 2. 1. 24), according to the ^atapatha-Brdli- 
 
 where, at the same time, the Bi-ah- maija, it even took the form he 'lavo. 
 
SANSKRIT LITER A TURE. 1 8 1 
 
 growtli of the second period, the difficulty of connecting 
 them with the earlier age is very great. We have here a 
 distinct gap which it is altogether impossible to fill up. 
 The reason of this lies simply in the fact, that owing to 
 the difficulty of preserving literary works, the fortunate 
 successor almost always wholly supplanted the predecessor 
 it surpassed : the latter thus became superfluous, and was 
 consequently put aside, no longer committed to memory, 
 no longer copied. In all these branches therefore — unless 
 some other influence has supervened — we are in possession 
 only of those master- works in which each attained its cul- 
 minating point, and which in later times served as the 
 classical models upon which the modern literature was 
 formed, itself more or less destitute of native productive 
 energy. This fact has been already adduced as having 
 proved equally fatal in the case of the more ancient Brah- 
 mana literature, &c. ; there, much to- the same extent as 
 here, it exercised its lamentable, though natural influence. 
 In the Vedic literature also, that is to say, in its Sakhas, 
 we find the best analogy for another kindred point, namely, 
 that some of the principal works of this period are extant 
 in several — generally two^recensions. But along with 
 this a further circumstance has to be noted, which, in con- 
 sequence of the great care expended upon the sacred lite- 
 rature, has comparatively slight application to it, namely, 
 that the mutual relation of the manuscripts is of itself such 
 as to render any certain restoration of an original text fox 
 the most part hopeless. It is only in cases where ancient 
 commentaries exist that the text is in some degree certain, 
 for the time at least to which these commentaries belong. 
 This is evidently owing to the fact that these works were 
 originally preserved by oral tradition ; their consignment 
 to writing only took place later, and possibly in different 
 localities at the same time, so that discrepancies of all sorts 
 were inevitable. But besides these variations there are 
 many alterations and additions which are obviously of a 
 wholly arbitrary nature, partly made intentionally, and 
 partly due to the mistakes of transcribers. In reference to 
 this latter point, in particular, the fact must not be lost 
 sight of that, in consequence of the destructive influ- 
 ence of, the climate, copies had to be renewed very fre- 
 quently. As a rule, the more ancient Indian manuscripts 
 
l82 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 are only from three to four himdred years old ; hardly any 
 will be found to date more than five hundred years hack.^*^ 
 Little or nothing, therefore, can here he effected by means 
 of so-called diplomatic criticism. We cannot even depend 
 upon a text as it appears in quotations, such quotations 
 being generally made from memory, — a practice whichj of 
 course, unavoidably entails mistakes and alterations. 
 
 The distinction in point of subject-matter between the 
 first and second periods consists mainly in the circum- 
 stance that in the former the various subjects are only 
 handled in their details, and almost solely in their relation 
 to the sacrifice, whereas in the latter they are discussed in 
 their general relations. In short, it is not so much a prac- 
 tical, as rather a scientific, a poetical, and artistic want that 
 is here satisfied. The difference in the form under which 
 the two periods present themselves is in keeping with this. 
 In the former, a simple and compact prose had gradually 
 been developed, but in the latter this form is abandoned, 
 and a rhythmic one adopted in its stead, which is employed 
 exclusively, even for strictly scientific exposition. The 
 only exception to this occurs in the grammatical and phi- 
 losophical Siitras ; and these again are characterised by a 
 form of expression so condensed and technical that it can- 
 not fittingly be termed prose. Apart from this, we have 
 only fragments of prose, occurring in stories which are now 
 and then found cited in the great epic ; and further, in the 
 fable literature and in the drama ; but they are uniformly 
 interwoven with rhythmical portions. It is only in the 
 Euddhist legends that a prose style has been retained, the 
 
 IS*' Regarding the age, manner MSS. in Biihler's possession, the 
 of preparation, material, and condi- Ava.4yaka-Slitra, dated Samvat 1 189 
 tion of text of Indian MSS., see Rij. (a.d. 1 132), is annexed to the aboTe- 
 Lila Mitra's excellent report, dated mentioned report : " it is the oldest 
 15th February 1875, »" tlie searches Sanskrit MS. that has come to no- 
 instituted by him in native libraries tioe," Edj. L. Mitra, Notices, iii. 68 
 down to the end of the previous (1874). But a letter from Dr. Rest 
 year, which is appended to No. IX. (19th October 1875) intimates that 
 of his Notices of Sanskrit MSS. in one of the Sanskrit MSS. that 
 Quite recently some Devandgarl have lately arrived in Cambridge 
 MSS. of Jaina texts, written on from Nepdl, he has read the date 
 broad palm-leaves, have been dis- 128 of the Nepfl era, t.e., A.D. lOoS. 
 covered by Buhler, which date two Further confirmation of this, of 
 centuries earlier than any previously course, still remains to be given, 
 known. A facsimile of one of these 
 
EPIC POETRY. 183 
 
 language of which,. however, is a very peculiar one, and is, 
 moreover, restricted to a definite field. In fact, as the re- 
 sult of this neglect, prose-writing was completely arrested 
 in the course of its development, and declmed altogether. 
 Anything more clumsy than the prose of the later Indian 
 romances, and of the Indian commentaries, can hardly be ; 
 and the same may be said of the prose of the inscriptions. 
 
 This point must pot be left out of view, when we now 
 proceed to speak of a classification of the Sanskrit litera- 
 ture into works of Poetry, works of Science and Art, and 
 works relating to Law, Custom, and Worship. All alike 
 appear in a poetic form, and by ' Poetry ' accordingly ia 
 this classification we understand merely what is usually 
 styled helles-lettres, though certainly with an important 
 modification of this sense. For while, upon the one hand, 
 the poetic form has been extended to all branches of the 
 literature, upon the other, as a set-off to this, a good deal 
 of practical prose has entered into the poetry itself, im- 
 parting to it the character of poetry ' with a purpose.' Of 
 the epic poetry this is especially true. 
 
 It has long been customary to place the Epic Poetry at 
 the head of Sanskrit literature; and to this custom we 
 here conform, although its existing monuments cannot 
 justly pretend to pass as more ancient than, for example, 
 Panini's grammar, or the law-book which bears the name 
 of Manu. "We have to divide the epic poetry into two 
 distinct groups : the Itihdsa-Furdims and the Kdvyas. We 
 have already more than once met with the name Itihasa- 
 Purana in the later Brahmanas, namely, in the second part 
 of the Satapatha-Brahmana, in the Taittirfya-Aranyaka, 
 and in the Chhandogyopanishad. We have seen that the 
 commentators uniformly understand these expressions to 
 apply to the legendary passages in the Brahmanas them- 
 selves, and not to separate works ; and also that, from a 
 passage in the thirteenth book of the Satapatha-Brahmana, 
 it results with tolerable certainty that distinct works of 
 this description cannot then have existed, inasmuch as the 
 division into parvans, which is usual in the extant -writings 
 of this class, is there expressly attributed to other works, 
 and is not employed in reference to these Itihasa-Puranas 
 themselves. On the other hand, in the Sarpa-vidya (' ser- 
 pent-knowledge ') and the Devajana-vidya (' genealogies of 
 
1 84 SANSKRIT LITERA TURE. 
 
 the gods ') — to which, in the passage in question, the dis- 
 tribution iato parvans, that is to say, existence in a distinct 
 form, is expressly assigned — we have in all prohahUity to 
 recognise mythologies accounts, which from their nature 
 naught very well he regarded as precursors of the epic. 
 We have likewise already specified as forerunners of the 
 epic poetry, those myths and legends which are found in- 
 terspersed thi'oughout the Brahmanas, here and there, too, 
 in rhythmic form,* or which lived on elsewhere in the 
 tradition regarding the origin of the songs of the Rik. 
 Indeed, a few short prose legends of this sort have been 
 actually preserved here and there in the epic itself. The 
 Gathas also — stanzas iu the Brahmanas, extolling indivi- 
 dual deeds of prowess — have already heen cited in the like 
 connection : they were sung to the accompaniment of the 
 lute, and were composed in honour either of the prince of 
 the day or of the pious Mngs of old (see /. St., L 187). 
 As regards the extant epic — the MahA-Bh&raia — specially, 
 we have already pointed out the mention in the Taittiriya- 
 Aranyaka, of Vyasa Paralarya^^ and Vaiiampayana,^"" 
 who are given in the poem itself as its original authors ; 
 and we have also remarked (p. 143) that the family of the 
 
 * As, for instance, the story of cial relation to the transmission of 
 
 Hariichandra in the second part of the Tajnr-Veda. By P&iini, it is 
 
 the Aitareya-BrSihmana. true (iv. 3. 104), he is siniply cited 
 
 19» Vyfea PirSi^arya is likewise generally as a Vedic teacher, but the 
 mentioned in the vania of the Sdma- Mah^bh^hya, commenting on this 
 vidhina-Brithmana, as the disciple of passage, describes him as the teacher 
 Vishvaksena, and preceptor of Jai- of Kat^a and KaUtpin. In the Cal- 
 mini ; see /. St., iv. 377. — The Ma- cutta Scholium, again, we find fur- 
 hdbhishya, again, not only contains ther particulars (from what source ? 
 frequent allusiona to the legend of cf.TdrdnitliaonjSi(i(iA.S'oam.,i59o), 
 the Mahd-Bhiirata, and even metri- according to which (see 7. St., xiii. 
 cal quotations that connect them- 440) nine Vedic schools, and among 
 selves with it,_but it also contains them two belonging to the Sitma- 
 the name of Suka Yaiyfisaki ; and Veda, trace their origin to him. In 
 from this it is clear that there was the Rig-Grihya he is evidently re- 
 then already extant a poetical ver- garded (see above, pp. 57, 58), after 
 sion of the Mahd-Bhdrata story ; see the manner of the Vishnu-Purdna, 
 /. St, xiii. 357. Among the prior as the special representative of the 
 births of Buddha is one (No. 436 Tajur-Veda; and so he appears in 
 in Westergaard's Caialogus, p. 40), the Anukr. of the Atreyl school, at 
 bearing the name Kaijiha-Dipilyana, the head of its list of teachers, spe- 
 t.e., Kyishna-Dvaip^ana! oially as the preceptor of Ydska 
 
 '"" Vaisampiiyana appears else- Faingi. 
 where frequently, but always in spe- 
 
THE MAHA-BHARA TA. 1 85 
 
 Para^aras is represented with especial frequency in the 
 vanias of the White Yajus.* We also find repeated allu- 
 sions in the Brahmanas to a Naimishlya sacrifice, and, on 
 the authority of the Maha-Bharata itself, it was at such a 
 sacrifice that the second recitation of the epic took place in 
 presence of a Saunaka. But, as has likewise been remarked 
 above [pp. 34, 45], these two sacrifices must be kept distinct, 
 and indeed there is no mention in the Brahmanas of a Sau- 
 naka as participating in the former. Nay, several such sacri- 
 fices may have taken place in the Naimisha forest [see p. 34] ; 
 or it is possible even that the statement as to the recitation 
 in question may have no more foundation than the desire 
 to give a peculiar consecration to the work. For it is 
 utterly absurd to suppose that Vyasa Para^arya and Vai- 
 ^ampayana— teachers mentioned for the first time in the 
 Taittiriya-Aranyaka — could have been anterior to the sac- 
 rifice referred to in the Brahmanas. The mention of the 
 "Bharata" and of the "Maha-Bharata" itself in the 
 Grihya-Siitras of A^valayana [and Saflkhayana] we have 
 characterised [p. 58] as an interpolation or else an indica- 
 tion that these Sutras are of very late date. In Panini 
 the word " Maha-Bharata " does indeed occur ; not, how- 
 ever, as denoting the epic of this name, but as an appel- 
 lative to designate any individual of special distinction 
 among the Bharatas, like Maha-Jabala,-Hailihila (see /. St., 
 ii. 73). Still, we do find names mentioned in Panini which 
 belong specially to the story of the Maha-Bharata — namely, 
 Yudlushthira, Hastinapura, Vasudeva, Arjuna,-!" Andhaka- 
 Vrishnayas, Drona (?) ; so that the legend must in any case 
 have been current in his day, possibly even in a poetical 
 shape ; however surprising it may be that the name 
 PanduJ is never mentioned by him. The earliest direct 
 
 * This renders Lassen's reference Mahd-BMrata and in the works rest- 
 
 (7. AK., i. 629) of the name PiW- ing upon it. Yet the Buddhists 
 
 ^arya to the astronomer or chrono- mention a mountain tribe of Pdnda- 
 
 loger PartUiara, highly questionable, vas, as alike the foes of the ^£[kyas 
 
 f A worshipper of V&udeva, or {i.e., the Ko.4alas) and of the in- 
 
 of, Arjuna, is styled 'Vdsudevaka,' ' habitants of XJjjayini; see Schief- 
 
 'Arjunaka.' Or is Arjuna here still ner, ieften des j?^%amK»8, pp. 4,40 
 
 a name of Indra ? [From the con- ^in the latter passage they appear to 
 
 text he is to be understood as a be connected with TakshiUil^?), and, 
 
 Kshatriya ; see on this, 7. St., xiii. further, Lassen, 7. AR., ii. 100, ff. ; 
 
 349, ff. ; Ind. Antiq. iv. 246.] Foucaux, Jlgya Cher Rol Pa, pp. 
 
 + This name only occurs in the 228, 229 (25, 26). 
 
1 86 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 evidence of the existence of an epic, with the contents of 
 the Maha-Bharata, comes to us from the rhetor Dion 
 Chrysostom, who flourished in the second half of the first 
 century a.d. ; and it appears fairly prohable that the infor- 
 mation in question was then quite new, and was derived 
 from mariners who had penetrated as far as the extreme 
 south of India, as I have pointed out in the Ivdische 
 Stiidien,:!. 161-165* Since Megasthenes says nothing of 
 this epic, it is not an improbable hypothesis that its origin 
 is to be placed in the interval between his tioae and that 
 of Chrysostom; for what ignorant-]- sailors took note of 
 would hardly have escaped his observation ; more espe- 
 cially if what he narrates of Herakles and his daughter 
 Pandaia has reference really to Krishna and his sister, the 
 wife of Arjuna, if, that is to say, the Pandu legend was 
 already actually current in his time. With respect to this 
 latter legend, which forms the subject of the Maha-Bharata, 
 we have already remarked, that although there occur, in 
 the Yajus especially, various names and particulars having 
 an intimate connection with it, yet on the other hand 
 these are presented to us in essentially different relations. 
 Thus the Kuru-Paiichalas in particular, whose internecine 
 feud is deemed by Lassen to be the leading and central 
 feature of the Maha-Bharata, appear in the Yajus on the 
 most friendly and peaceful footing: Arjuna again, the 
 chief hero of the Pandus, is still, in the Vajasaneyi-Sam- 
 hita and the Satapatha-Brahmana, a name of Indra : J and 
 lastly, Janamejaya Parilcshita, who in the Maha-Bharata 
 :s the great-grandson of Arjuna, appears, in the last part 
 of the Satapatha-Brahmana, to be still fresh in the me- 
 .nory of the people, with the rise and downfall of himself 
 and his house. I have also already expressed the con- 
 jecture that it is perhaps in the deeds and downfall of this 
 Janamejaya that we have to look for the original plot 
 
 * It ia not, however, necessary to , t In the thirteenth book of the 
 
 suppose, as I did, I. c, that they Satapatha - Brdhmana, Indra also 
 
 brought this intelligence from the bears the name Bharma, which in 
 
 south of India itself : they -might the Mahsi-Bh^rata is especially as- 
 
 bave picked it up at some other part sooiated with Yudhishthira him- 
 
 of their voyage. self, though only in the forms 
 
 t That they were so appears from dJuirma-rdja, dkarma-putra, &o. 
 their statement as to the Great Bear, 
 l.c. 
 
THE MAHA-BHARA TA. 187 
 
 of the story of the Maha-Bharata ; * and, on the other 
 hand, that, as in the epics of other nations, and notably 
 in the Persian Epos, so too in the Maha-Bharata, the 
 myths relating to the gods became linked with the popu- 
 lar legend. But so completely have the two been inter- 
 woven that the unravelling of the respective elements 
 must ever remain an impossibility. One thing, however, 
 is clearly discernible in the Maha-Bhdrata, that it has as 
 its basis a war waged on the soil of Hindustan between 
 Aryan tribes, and therefore belonging probably to a time 
 when their settlement in India, and the subjugation and 
 brahmanisation of the native inhabitants, had already been 
 accomplished. But what it was that gave rise to the con^ 
 flict — whether disputes as to territory, or it may be reli- 
 gious dissensions — cannot now be determined. — Of the 
 Maha-Bharata in its extant form, only about one-fourth 
 (some 20,000 MoTcas or so) relates to this conflict and the 
 myths that have been associated with it;^"'- while the 
 elements composing thp remaining three-fourths do not 
 belong to it at all, and have only the loosest possible con- 
 nection therewith, as well as with each other. These later 
 additions are of two kinds. Some are of an epic character, 
 and are due to the endeavour to unite here, as in a single 
 focus, all the ancient legends it was possible to muster, — 
 and amongst them, as a matter of fact, are not a few that 
 are tolerably antique even in respect of form. Others are 
 of purely didactic import, and have been inserted with 
 the view of imparting to the military caste, for which the 
 work was mainly intended, all possible instruction as to 
 its duties, and especially as to the reverence due to the 
 priesthood. Even at the portion which is recognisable as 
 the original basis — that relating to the war — many genera- 
 tions must have laboured before the text attained to an 
 approximately settled shape. It is noteworthy that it is 
 precisely in this part that repeated allusion is .made to the 
 Yavanas, Sakas, Pahlavas,^"^' and other peoples ; and that 
 
 * Which of course stands in glar- to the work (i. 81) the express inti- 
 
 ing contradiction to the statement mation is still preserved that it 
 
 that the Mahd-Bh^rata was recited previously consisted of 8800 iloTcas 
 
 in his presence. only. 
 
 ^"^ And even of this, two-thirds '"'" In connection with the word 
 
 will have to be sifted out as not Pahlava, Th. Noldeke, in a com- 
 
 orieinal, since in the introduction munication dated 3d November 
 
i88 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 these, moreover, appear as taking an actual part in the 
 conflict — a circumstance which necessarily presupposes 
 that at the time when these passages were written, colli- 
 sions with the Greeks, &c., had already happened.^"^ But 
 as to the period when the final redaction of the entire 
 work in its present shape took place, no approach even to 
 a direct conjecture is in the meantime possible ; ^^ but at 
 any rate, it must have been some centuries after the com- 
 mencement of our era* An interesting discovery has 
 
 1875, mentions a point which, if 
 confirmed, will prove of the highest 
 importance for determining the date 
 of composition of the Mahl-Bh^rata 
 and of the Rdm^yana (see my Essay 
 on it, pp. 22, 25), as well as of Manu 
 (see X. 44). According to this, there 
 exists considerable doubt whether 
 the word Palilav, which is the basis 
 of Pahlava, and which Olshauseu 
 (v. sup., p. 4, note) regards as having 
 arisen out of the name of the Par- 
 thavas, Farthians, can have origi- 
 nated earlier than the first century 
 A.D. This weakening of th to K is 
 not found, in the case of the word 
 Mithra, for example, before the 
 commencement of our era (in the 
 MIIPO on the coins of the Indo- 
 Scythians, Lassen, /. AK., ii. 837, 
 and in Meherdfites in Tacitus). As 
 the name of a people, the word 
 Pahlav became early foreign to the 
 Persians, learned reminiscences ex- 
 cepted : in the Pahlavi texts them- 
 selves, for instance, it does not 
 occur. The period when it passed 
 over to the Indians, therefore, would 
 have to be fixed for about the 2d- 
 4th century a.d. ; and we should 
 have to understand by it, not directly 
 the Persians, who are called Pdra- 
 sikas, rather, but specially the Arsa- 
 cidan Parthians. 
 
 2™ Of especial interest in this con- 
 nection is the statement in ii, 578, 
 579, where the Yavana prince Bha- 
 fradatta (ApoUodotus (i), according 
 to von Qutschmid's conjecture ; reg. 
 after B.C. 160) appears as sove- 
 reign of Maru (Marwar) and Naraka, 
 aa ruling. Varuna-like, the west, 
 
 and as the old friend of Tudhi- 
 shthira's father ; see I. St., v. 152. — 
 In the name of the Tavana prince 
 Kaserumant, we appear to have a 
 reflex of the title of the Eomaa 
 Csesara ; see Ind. Shie.^p. 88, 91 ; 
 of. L. Feer on the Kesari-ndma- 
 samgrdmuh of the Avad^na-Sataka 
 in the Siances de I'Acad. des Inter. 
 (1871), pp. 47. 56, 60. 
 
 ^' With regard to the existence, 
 so early as the time of the Mah^bhi- 
 shya, of a poetical version of the 
 Mahk-Bhirata legend, see /. St., 
 xiii. 356 fiF. "Still this does not 
 in the smallest degree prove the 
 existence of the work in a form 
 at all resembling the shape in which 
 we now have it ; and as the final 
 result, we do not advance materially 
 beyond the passage in Dion Chry- 
 sostom (7. St., ii. 161 ff.), relating 
 to the ' Indian Homer.' For the 
 statements of the Greek writer 
 themselves evidently date from an 
 earlier time ; and although not 
 necessarily derived, as Lassen sup- 
 poses,from Megasthenes himself,yet 
 they at any rate take us back to a 
 period pretty nearly coincident with 
 that of the Bhfehya." 
 
 * We have a most significant 
 illustration of the gradual growth of 
 the Mahd-Bhflrata in an episode 
 commented upon by Samkara, which 
 by the time of Nilakaiitha (t.e., in 
 the course of 6 or 7 centuries) had 
 become expanded by a whole chapter 
 of 47 ilohas ; see my Catal. of the 
 Sanskrit MSS. in the Berlin Lib., 
 p. 108. 
 
THE MAHA-BHARATA. 
 
 189 
 
 recently been made in the island of Bali, near Java, of the 
 Kavi translation of several parvans of the Maha-Bharata, 
 ■which in extent appear to vary considerably from their 
 Indian form.^"* A special comparison of the two would 
 not be without importance for the criticism of the Maha- 
 Bharata. For the rest, in consequence of the utter medley 
 it presents of passages of widely different dates, the work, 
 in general, is only to be used with extreme caution. It 
 has been published at Calcutta,^^ together with the Hari- 
 vania, a poem which passes as a supplement to it.* — 
 Eespecting the Jaimini-Bh&rata, which is ascribed, not to 
 Vyasa and Vai^ampayana, but to Jaimini, we have as yet 
 no very precise information: the one book of it with 
 which I am acquainted is wholly different from the cor- 
 responding book of the ordinary Maha-Bharata.f 
 
 ^* See the observations, following 
 R. Friederich's account, in /. St., ii. 
 136 fF. 
 
 ^"^ 1834-39 in four vols.; recently 
 also at Bombay (1863) with the 
 commentary of NUakantha. Hip- 
 polyte Fauche'a incomplete French 
 translation (1863-72, ten vols.) can 
 only pass for a translation in a very 
 qualified sense ; see as to this /. Str., 
 ii. 410 S. Individual portions of 
 the work have been frequently 
 handled : e.g.. Pa vie has translated 
 nine pieces (Paris, 1844) andFoucaux 
 eleven (Paris, 1862). Bopp, it is 
 well known, early made the finest 
 episodes accessible, beginning with 
 the NcHa (London, 1819), whereby 
 he at the same time laid the founda- 
 tion of Sanskrit philology in Europe. 
 For the criticism of the Mahii- 
 Bhirata, the ground was broken 
 and important results achieved by 
 Lassen in his Indische Alterthums- 
 Tcunde (vol. i. 1847). For the con- 
 tents of the work, see Monier Wil- 
 liams's Indiam Epic Poetry (1863), 
 and Indian Wisdom (1875). 
 
 * In Albirdnl's time, the nth 
 century, it passed as a leading autho- 
 rity ; see jvurn. Asiat., Aug. 1844, 
 p. 130. [Subandhu, author of the 
 Vdsavadatt^, had it before him, in 
 
 the 7th century ; see /. Sir., i. 380. 
 A French translation by A. Langlois 
 appeared in 1834.] 
 
 t See my Catal. of the Sanskrit 
 MSS. in the Berl. Lib., pp. 1 1 i-i 18 : 
 according to Wilson (Mach. Coll., ii. 
 I ), this book would appear to be the 
 only one in existence ; see also 
 Weigle in Z. B. M. <?., ii. 278. 
 [This book, the divamedhiha/m, jxi/na, 
 was printed at Bombay in 1863 ; ac- 
 cording to its concluding statements 
 as they appear in this edition, 
 Jaimini's work embraced the entire 
 epos ; but up to the present, apart 
 from this 13th book, nothing further 
 is known of it; see as to this my 
 paper in the Monatsberichte der Berl, 
 Acad., 1869, p. 10 fil A Kandrese 
 translation of this book is assigned 
 to the beginning of the 13th century 
 iihid., pp. 13, 35) ; quite recently, 
 however, by Kittel, in his Preface 
 to N^gavarma'a I^osody, pp. vi. 
 Ixxi., it has been relegated to the 
 middle of the i8th (!) century. 
 The peculiar colouring of theKrishna 
 sect, which pervades the whole book, 
 is noteworthy ; Christian legendary 
 matter and other Western influences 
 are unmistakably present; Monatsb., 
 Z. c, p. 37ff. Agoodpart of the con- 
 tents has been communicated by 
 
igo SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 Side by side with the Itihasa we find the Purdna men- 
 tioned ia the Brahmanas, as the designation of those 
 cosmogonic inquiries which occur there so frequently, and 
 which relate to the 'agra' or 'beginning' of things. 
 When in course of time distinct works bearing this name 
 arose, the signification of the term was extended ; and these 
 works came to comprehend also the history of the created 
 world, and of the families of its gods and heroes, as well 
 as the doctrine of its various dissolutions and renovations 
 in accordance with the theory of the miindane periods 
 (yicgas). As a rule, five such topics are given as forming 
 their subject (see Lassen, /. AK., i. 479), whence the epi- 
 thet Fancha-lakshana, wldch is cited in Amara's lexicon 
 as a synonym of Purana. These works have perished, and 
 those that have come down to us in their stead under the 
 name of Puranas are the productions of a later time, and 
 belong all of them to the last thousand years or so. They 
 are written (cf . Lassen, I. c.) in the interests of, and for the 
 purpose of recommending, the Siva and Vishnu sects ; and 
 not one of them corresponds exactly, a few correspond 
 slightly, and others do not correspond at all, with the de- 
 scription of the ancient Puranas preserved to us in the 
 Scholiasts of Amara, and also here and there in the works 
 themselves. " For the old narratives, which are in part 
 abridged, in part omitted altogether, have been substituted 
 theological and philosophical doctrines, ritual and ascetic 
 precepts, and especially legends recommending a particular 
 divinity or certain shrines" (Lassen, /. AK., i. 481). Yet 
 they have unquestionably preserved much of the matter 
 of these older works ; and accordingly it is not uncommon 
 to meet with lengthy passages, similarly worded, in several 
 of them at the same time. Generally speaking, as regards 
 the traditions of primitive times, they closely follow the 
 Maha-Bharata as their authority; but they likewise ad- 
 vert, though uniformly in a prophetic tone, to the historic 
 
 Talboys Wheeler in his Sistory of the title Bdla-Bhdrata, — in 44 sor- 
 
 India, vol. i. (1867), where, too, gas of 6550 anuslitiibh verses, — 
 
 there is a general sketch of the and which appeared in the Benares 
 
 contents of the Mahd - BhiCrata it- Pondii (1869 ff.), edited by Vechana 
 
 self ; see /. Str., ii. 392.— It remains lUma^&trin. This work belongs 
 
 further to mention the re-cast of probably to the nth century, see 
 
 the Mah^-Bhdrata by the Jaina Z. D. M. 0., xxvii. 170. 
 Amarachandra, whichisextantunder 
 
PURANAS—RAMA YANA. 191 
 
 lines of kings. Here, however, they come into the most 
 violent conflict, not only with each other, hut with chro- 
 nology in general, so that their historical value in this 
 respect is extremely small. Their number is considerable, 
 amounting to eighteen, and is doubled if we reckon the 
 so-called Upapur&nas, in which the epic character has 
 been thrust still more into the background, while the ritual 
 element has come quite to the front. Up to this time only 
 one single Purana, the Bhagavata-Purana, has been pub- 
 lished — the greater part of it at least — edited [and trans- 
 lated] by Burnouf : but of the others we have excellent 
 notices in Wilson's translation of the Vishnu-Purana.^^ 
 
 As the second group of Epic Poetry we designated the 
 Kdvyas, which are ascribed to certain definite poets (kavis); 
 whereas the Itihasas and Puranas are attributed to a my- 
 thical personage, -Vyasa, who is simply AtaaKeurj (Kedac- 
 tion) personified.* At the head of these poems stands the 
 Bdmdyana of Valmiki, whose name we found cited among 
 the teachers of the Taittirfya-Prati^akhya.-|- In respect of 
 language, this work is closely related to the war-portion of 
 the Maha-Bharata, although in individual cases, where the 
 poet displays his full elegance, it bears plainly enough on 
 its surface, in rhyme and metre, the traces of a later date. In 
 
 *"* As also in the separate analy- appearing in the same series (begun 
 
 ses of various Purttnas, now collected 1870; caps. 1-214 thus far). An 
 
 in vol. i. of Wilson's Essays on San- impression of the Kallci-Purdna ap- 
 
 skrit Literature (ed. Eost, 1864). peared at Calcutta in 1873; and 
 
 Above all, we have here to mention, lithographed editions of the Lingo- 
 
 further, the minute accounts given /'■tir(fna(l858)aDdof portions of the 
 
 of the Fur£[nas by Aufrecht in his Padma, Skanda, Gamda, Brahma- 
 
 Caial. Cod. Sansc. JBibl. Bodl., pp. «at»a)-ta, and other Purtinas have ap- 
 
 7-87. The Vishnu-Purdifa has been peared at Bombay ; see /. Str., ii. 
 
 recently published at Bombay, with 245 fF., 301 ff. 
 
 the commentary of Ratnagarbha- * The words leavi, in the sense of 
 
 bhatta (1867) ; Wilson's translation ' singer, poet,' and kdvya, in that of 
 
 of it has been republished, edited by ' song, poem,' are repeatedly used in 
 
 Fitzedward Hall in five vols. (1864- the Veda, but without any technical 
 
 1870), with ma,terial additions and application ; see Vdjas. Samh. Spec, 
 
 corrections. There are now also ii. 187 {trayi vai vidyd hdvyam 
 
 several editions of the Bhdgavata- chAandas, Sat., viii. 5. 2. 4]. 
 Purdna ; amongst them, one with t Whether by this name we have 
 
 the comm. of Sridharasvtoin (Bom- to understand the same person is of 
 
 bay, i860). The MdrhaVideya-Pu- course not certain, but considering 
 
 rdna has been edited in the BiJ>l, the singularity of the name, it is at 
 
 Indica by K. M. Banerjea (1855- least not improbable. 
 1862) ; and the Agni-Purdi}a is now 
 
192 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 regard to contents, on the contrary, the difference between 
 it and this portion of the Maha-Bharata is an important 
 one. In the latter human interest everywhere preponder- 
 ates, and a munber of well-defined personages are intro- 
 duced, to whom the possibility of historical existence 
 cannot be denied, and who were only at a later stage asso- 
 ciated with the myths about the gods. But in the Eama- 
 yana we find ourselves from the very outset in the region 
 of allegory ; and we only move upon historical ground in 
 so far as the allegory is applied to an historical fact, 
 namely, to the spread of Aryan civilisation towards the 
 south, more especially to Ceylon. The characters are not 
 real historic figures, but merely personifications of certain 
 occurrences and situations. Sita, in the first place, whose 
 abduction by a giant demon, and subseq[uent recovery by 
 her husband Eama, constitute the plot of the entire poem, 
 is but the field-furrow, to which we find divine honours 
 paid in the songs of the Rik, and stiU more in the Grihya 
 ritual. She accordingly represents Aryan husbandry, 
 which has to be protected by Eama — ^whom I regard as 
 originally identical with Balarama "halabhrit," "the 
 plough-bearer," though the two were afterwards separated 
 — against the attacks of the predatory aborigines. These 
 latter appear as demons and giants ; whereas those natives 
 who were well disposed towards the Aryan civilisation are 
 represented as monkeys, — a comparison which was doubt- 
 less not exactly intended to be flattering, and which rests 
 on the striking ugliness of the Indian aborigines as com- 
 pared with the Aryan race. Now this allegorical form of 
 the Eamayana certainly indicates, d priori, that this poem 
 is later than the war-part of the Maha-Bharata; and we 
 might fairly assume, further, that the historical events 
 upon which the two works are respectively based stand to 
 each other in a similar relation. For the colonisation of 
 Southern India could hardly begin until the settlement of 
 Hindustan by the Aryans had been completed, and the feuds 
 that arose there had been fought out. It is not, however, 
 altogether necessary to suppose the latter ; and the warfare 
 at least which forms the basis of the Maha-Bharata might 
 have been waged concurrently with expeditions of other 
 Aryan tribes to the south. Whether it was really the Ko- 
 ialas, as whose chief Eama appears in the Eamayana, who 
 
THE RAMAYANA. 193 
 
 effected the colonisation of the south,* as stated in the 
 poem; or whether the poet merely was a Ko^ala, who 
 claimed this honour for his people and royal house, is a 
 point upon which it is not yet possible to form a judg- 
 ment. He actually represents Sita as the daughter of 
 Janaka, king of the Videhas, a tribe contiguous to the 
 Ko^alas, and renowned for his piety. The scanty know- 
 ledge of South India displayed in the Eamayana has been 
 urged as pro-ving its antiquity ; since in the Maha-Bharata 
 this region appears as far more advanced in civilisa- 
 tion, and as enjoying ample direct communication with 
 the rest of India. But in this circumstance I can only see 
 evidence of one of two things : either that the poet did not 
 possess the best geographical knowledge; whereas many 
 generations have worked at the Maha-Bhirata, and made 
 it their aim to magnify the importance of the conflict 
 by grouping roimd it as many elements as possible : or 
 else — and this is the point I would particularly empha- 
 sise — that the poet rightly apprehended and performed the 
 task he had set himself, and so did not mix up later con- 
 ditions, although familiar to him, with the earlier state of 
 things. The whole plan of the Eamayana favours the 
 assumption that we have here to do with the work, the 
 poetical creation, of one man. Considering the extent 
 of the work, which now numbers some 24,000 ilokas, this 
 is saying a great deal ; and before epic poetry could have 
 attained to such a degree of perfection, it must already 
 have passed through many phases of development.-)* Still, 
 
 * It was by them also — by Bhaglra- compass. The term Chdnardta still 
 
 tha, namely — that, according to the remains unintelligible to me ; see 
 
 Eim^yana, the mouths of the Gau- /. St., i. 153. (For the rest, as 
 
 ges were discovered. Properly, they stated by the Calcutta scholiast, 
 
 were the Eastern rather than the thisrule,Ti. 2. 103, is not interpreted 
 
 Southern foreposts of the Aryans. in the Bhdshya of Fatamjali ; it 
 
 •)• Of these phases we have pro- may possibly therefore not be Vi,- 
 
 bably traces in the grmnHmh Sisu- nini's at all, but posterior to the time 
 
 hrandlyah [to this Goldstiicker in of Patainjali.) — The word grantha 
 
 his Pdnini, p. 28, takes exception, may have reference either to the 
 
 doubtless correctly ; see /. St., v. outward fastening (like the German 
 
 27], YamasahMyah, Indrajananiyah, Seft, Band) or to the inner compo- 
 
 mentioned by P^ini, iv. 3. 88 ; and sition : which of the two we have 
 
 in the Akhydnas and Chdnardtas, to suppose remains still undecided, 
 
 which, according to Pinini, vi. 2. 103, but I am inclined to pronounce for 
 
 are to be variously designated ac- the former. [See above pp. 15, 99, 
 
 cording to the different points of the 165. ] 
 
 N 
 
194 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 it is ty no means implied that the poem was of these 
 dimensions from the first : here, too, many parts are cer- 
 tainly later additions ; for example, all those portions in 
 ■which Eama is represented as an incarnation of Vishnu, 
 all the episodes ia the fiist book, the whole of the seventh 
 book, &c. The poem was originally handed down orally, 
 and was not fixed in writing unti afterwards, precisely 
 like the Maha-Bharata. But here we encounter the further 
 peculiar circumstance — which has not yet been shown to 
 apply, in the same way at all events, to the latter work — 
 namely, that the text has come down to us in several 
 distinct recensions, which, while they agree for the most 
 part as to contents, yet either follow a different arrange- 
 ment, or else vary throughout, and often materially, in the 
 expression. This is hardly to be explained save on the 
 theory that this fixing of the text ia writing took place 
 independently in different localities. "We possess a com- 
 plete edition of the text by Gr. Gorresio, containing the 
 so-called Bengali recension, and also two earlier editions 
 which break off with the second book, the one published 
 at Serampore by Carey and Marshman, the other at Bonn 
 by A. W. von Schlegel. The manuscripts of the Berlin 
 library contain, it would seem, a fourth recension.* 
 
 * See my Catalogue of these MSS., in its earliest shape in Buddhist 
 p. 119. [Two complete editions of legends, underwent in the hands of 
 the text, with Rdma's Commentary, VsQmiki, rest upon an acquaintance 
 have since appeared in India, the with the conceptions of the Trojan 
 one at Calcutta in 1859-60, the cycle of legend; and I have like- 
 other at Bombay in 1859; respecting wise endeavoured to determine more 
 the latter, see my notice in /. iSSr., accurately the position of the work 
 ii. 235-245- Gorresio's edition was in literaiy history. The conclusion 
 completedby the appearance in 1867 there arrived at is, that the date 
 of the text, and in 1870 of the trans- of its composition is to be placed 
 lation, of the Uttara-kdnda. Hip- towards the commencement of the 
 polyte Fauche's French translation Christian era, and at all events in 
 follows Gorresio's text, whereas an epoch when the operation of 
 Griffith's metrical English version Greek influence upon India had 
 (Benares, 1870-74, in 5 vols.) fol- already set in. This elicited ci re- 
 lows the Bombay edition. In my joinder from Kashinath Trimbak 
 Essay, Veber das Edmdyanam, 1870 Telang (1873), entitled. Was the 
 (an English translation «f which ap- Sdmdyana copied from Somer ; as 
 peared in the Indian Antiquary for to which see Ind. Ant., ii. 209, /. 
 1872, also separately at Bombay in jSi., xiii. 336, 480. The same writer 
 1873), I have attempted to show afterwards, in the Ind. Ant., iii. 
 that the modifications which the 124, 267, pointed out a half £o/ta 
 stoi-y of Edma, as known to us which occure in the Yuddka-Mnifa 
 
THE ARTIFICIAL EPIC. 195 
 
 Between the Eamayana and the remaining Kavyas there 
 exists a gap similar to that between the Maha-Bharata 
 and the extant Puranas. Towards filling up this hlank 
 we might perhaps employ the titles of the Kavyas found in 
 the Kavi language in the island of Bali,^"' most of which 
 certainly come from Sanskrit originals. In any case, the 
 emigration of Hiadiis to Java, whence they subsequently 
 passed over to Bali, must have taken place at a time when 
 the Kavya literature was particularly flourishing ; other- 
 wise we could not well explain the peculiar use they have 
 made of the terms Trnvi and k&vya. Of the surviving 
 Kavyas, the most independent in character, and on that 
 account ranking next to the Eamayana — passably pure, 
 too, in respect of form — are two works * bearing the name 
 of Kalidasa, namely, the Baghu-vm'Ja and the Kumdra- 
 samhhava (both extant in Kavi also). The other Kavyas, 
 on the contrary, uniformly follow, as regards their subject, 
 the Maha-Bharata or the Eamayana; and they are also 
 plainly enough distinguished from the two just mentioned 
 by their language and form of exposition. This latter 
 abandons more and more the epic domain and passes into 
 the erotic, lyrical, or didactic-descriptive field ; while the 
 language is more and more overlaid with turgid bombast. 
 
 and also twice in Patamjali's Mahd- * They have been edited by 
 
 bhfishya. But the verse contains a Stenzler, text with translation [and 
 
 mere general reflection (etijivantam repeatedly in India since, with or 
 
 dnando naram varahasatdd api), and without the commentary of Malli- 
 
 need not therefore have been de- ndtha. To the seven books of the 
 
 rived from the Rdmsiyana. In it- Kumdra-sambhava, which were the 
 
 self, consequently, it proves nothing only ones previously known, ten 
 
 as to the priority of the poem to others have recently been added ; 
 
 Patainjali, and this all the less, as it on the critical questions connected 
 
 is expressly cited by Vdlmlki himself with these, see, e.g., Z. D. M. <?., 
 
 merely as a quotation. On this and xxvii. 174-182 (1873). From the 
 
 some other kindred points see my astrological data contained in both 
 
 letter in the Ind. Ant., iv. 247 ff. works, H. Jacobi has shown, in the 
 
 (1875).] Monatsber. dcr Berl. Acad., J873, p. 
 
 2°' See Friederich, I. c, I. St., ii. 556, that the date of their com* 
 
 l39fF. The numerous traces which position cannot be placed earlier 
 
 are contained in Patainjali's Mahd- than about the middle of the 4th 
 
 bbdshya of epic or narrative poems century a.d. The Raghu-van^a was 
 
 then actually extant, and which ap- most probably composed in honour 
 
 pear in that work as direct quota- of a Bhoja prince ; see my Essay on 
 
 tions therefrom, take us back to a the Riim. Titp. Up., p. 279, /. Str., 
 
 far earlier time ; see /. St., xiii. i. 312]. 
 463 ff. 
 
196 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 until at length, in its latest phases, this artificial epic re- 
 solves itself into a wretched jingle of words. A pretended 
 elegance of form, and the performance of difficult tricks 
 and feats of expression, constitute the main aim of the 
 poet; while the subject has become a purely subordinate 
 consideration, and merely serves as the material which 
 enables him to display his expertness in manipulatnig the 
 language.^* 
 
 Next to the epic, as the second phase in the develop- 
 ment of Sanskrit poetry, comes the Drama. The name 
 for it is N&taica, and the player is styled Nata, literally 
 ' dancer.' Etymology thus points us to the fact that the 
 drama has developed out of dancing, which was probably 
 accompanied, at first, with music and song only, but in 
 course of time also with pantomimic representations, pro- 
 cessions, and dialogue. We find dancing repeatedly men- 
 tioned in the songs of the Eik {e.g., in i 10. i, 92. 4, &c.), 
 but with special frequency in the Atharva-Samhita and 
 the Tajus,* though everywhere still under the root-form 
 
 ^"^ Six of these artificial epics 
 are specially entitled Mahakd/oyna. 
 These are, in addition to the Saghii- 
 vaiiia and Kwm&ra - swmbhava : — 
 
 (1) the Bhatti-Jedm/a, in 22 aargas, 
 composed in Yalabhi under king 
 Sri-Dharasena (xxii. 35), in the 6th 
 or 7th cent, therefore ; it deals with 
 the story of K^ma, and is written 
 with a special reference to grammar : 
 
 (2) the Mdgha-kdvya or SUupdla- 
 badha of Mdgha, the son of Dattaka, 
 in 22 sargas (Suprabhadeva, grand- 
 father of the poet, is described as 
 the minister of a king Srl-Dharraa- 
 ndbha), and (3) the Kirdtdrjuniya 
 of Bhdravigin 18 swrgas, — both prior 
 to Haldyudha (end of the loth 
 cent.), see /. St., viii. 193, 195, 
 196 : (4) the Naishadhiya of Sri- 
 Harsha, in 22 sargas, of the 12th 
 cent, (see Biihler in the Journal 
 Bombay Br. £. A. S., x. 35). The 
 Sdghavapdndai/iya of Kavinija, 
 in any case later than the loth 
 cent, (see /. Str., i. 371), enjoys a 
 high esteem ; it handles, in the 
 seU-same words, at once the story 
 of the lUmityana and that of the 
 
 Mahil-Bhdrata, and, like the Nalc- 
 daya, in 4 sargat, which is even 
 ascribed to K^lid^a (edited so long 
 ago aa 1830 by Ferd. Benary), is 
 one of the most characteristically 
 artificial pieces of this class of 
 poetry. All these works have been 
 frequently published in India, and 
 to them are to be added many 
 other similar productions. — The 
 Frdkrit poem Setu-handha or SA- 
 vana-batOia, which relates to the 
 story of Kibna, and is reputed to 
 be by Kdlid^isa, also merits special 
 mention here. Of this Paul Giold- 
 schmidt has already published two 
 chapters (Gottingen, 1873); andSieg- 
 fried Goldschmidt is engaged on au 
 edition of the entire text 
 
 * With various kindsof musical ac- 
 companiment, according to the Yaj. 
 Samh. XXX., where we meet with 
 quite a number of musicians and 
 dancers, as well as with the name 
 Sailtisha itself, which, at a later 
 time, at all events, belongs specially 
 to actors; see /. Str., i. 76, 83. 
 According to the scholium on Kitty, 
 xxii 4. 3, by those " vrdtyaganasya 
 
THE DRAMA. 197 
 
 •arit. The prakritized form iMt occurs for the first time 
 in Panini, who, besides, informs us of the existence of dis- 
 tinct Nata-siitras,* or manuals for the use of inntas, one of 
 which was attributed to Silalin, and another to KriM^va, 
 their adherents being styled ^aUaJinas and Krila^viaas 
 respectively. The former of these names finds an ana- 
 logue, at least, in the patronymic ^aUali, which occurs in 
 the thirteenth Icdnda of the Satapatha-Brahmana;^ and it 
 may also, perhaps, be connected with the words SaHiisha 
 and Ku^ilava, both of which denote 'actor' (?).f The 
 latter name, on the contrary, is a very surprising one in 
 this connection, being otherwise only known to us as the 
 name of one of the old heroes who belong in common to 
 the Hindiis and the Parsis.J Beyond this allusion we 
 have no vestige of either of these works. Panini further 
 cites § the word ndtyam in the sense of ' natdndm dharma 
 dmndyo vd.' In both cases, we have probably to under- 
 stand by the term the art of dancing, and not dramatic 
 art. — It has been uniformly held hitherto that the Indian 
 drama arose, after the manner of our modern drama in the 
 Middle Ages, out of religious solemnities and spectacles 
 (so-called 'mysteries'), and also that dancing originally 
 subserved religious purposes. But in support of this latter 
 assumption, I have not met with one single instance in 
 the Srauta- or Grihya-Siitras with which I am acquainted 
 (though of the latter, I confess, I have only a very super- 
 
 ye sampddayeyuh," as tLe text has corrupt, looBe morals of those so 
 it, we have to understand specially designated ; and the same must 
 teachers of dancing, music, and apply to ^il^la, if this be a cog- 
 singing. " In the man who dances nate word. The derivation from 
 and sings, women take delight," Ku^a and Lava, the two sons of 
 ^at., iii. 2. 4. 6. lUma, at the beginning of the 
 
 * The two rules in question, iv. Bdm^yana, has manifestly been in- 
 
 3. 1 10, III, according to the Cal- vented in order to escape the odium 
 
 cutta scholiast, are not explained in of the name ' Jeu-Hlava.' 
 
 the Bhfchya of Patamjali ; possibly, J Ought we here to understand 
 
 therefore, they may not be Fiinini's the name literally, as, perhaps, a 
 
 at all, but posterior _to the time of kind of mocking epithet to express 
 
 Pataipjali. [The SaildXino natdh poverty, with at the same time, 
 
 are mentioned in the Bh&hya to iv. possibly, a direct ironical reference 
 
 2. 66; in the Anupada-stitra, the to the renowned Kri^va of old f? 
 
 Saildlinah are cited as a ritual § iv. 3. 129 : this rule, also, is not 
 
 school ; see /. St., xiii. 429.] explained in the Bh&hya; perhaps 
 
 •f- These terms are probably de- therefore it is not Pstnini's, but 
 
 rived from sila, and refer to the later than Patarnjali, 
 
igS SANSKRIT LITERA TURE. 
 
 ficial knowledge).^"^ The religious significance of dancing 
 is thus, for the older period at least, still questionable ; 
 and since it is from dancing that the drama has evidently 
 sprung, the original connection of the latter with religious 
 solemnities and spectacles becomes doubtful also. Besides, 
 there is the fact that it is precisely the most ancient dramas 
 that draw their subjects from civil life ; while the most 
 modern, on the contrary, almost exclusively serve religious 
 purposes. Thus the contrary, rather, would seem to be 
 the case, namely, that the employment of dancing * and 
 of the drama at religious solemnities was only the growth of 
 a later age.^" This does not imply, however, that dancing 
 was excluded from those great sacrificial festivals which 
 were now and then celebrated by princes ; but only that 
 it did not itself constitute part of the sacred rite or reli- 
 gious ceremony, and could only, and did only, find a place in 
 the intervals. The name applied to the stage-manager in 
 the dramas themselves, ' Siitra-dhara,' is referred, and no 
 
 "" Even now I am acquainted 
 with but little from these sources 
 bearing on this point. Amongst 
 other things, at the pitrimedJia we 
 find dancing, music, and song, 
 which represent the three forms 
 of iilpa or art (Sinkh. Br. 29. 5), 
 prescribed for the whole day, 
 K^ty., 21. 3. II. But H Sndtaim 
 might not participate in any Such 
 performance, either actively or 
 passively, Pir. ii. 7. On the day 
 preceding the departure of a bride, 
 four or eight married women (un- 
 widowed) performed a dance in her 
 house, ^iinkh. Gri. i. II. 
 
 • It is known in the Megha-d6ta, 
 V. 35. 36. 
 
 ''" Through the unexpected light 
 shed by the Mahibhfehya of Patam- 
 jali on the then flourishing condi- 
 tion of theatrical representation, 
 this question has recently taken a 
 form very favourable to the view of 
 which Lassen is the principal ex- 
 ponent, and which regards the 
 drama as having originated in re- 
 ligious spectacles resembling our 
 mysteries. The particulars there 
 given regarding the performance of 
 
 a KansavadJia and VcUibandha by so- 
 called iaubhikas — (comp. perhaps the 
 sauihikas in Hdrdvali, 151, though 
 these are explained as indrajilikas, 
 'jugglers,' cf. S(Mta, sdbhanagaraka, 
 I. St., iii. 153) — ^lead us directly ti> 
 this conclusion ; see /. St., xiii 354, 
 487 ff. " But between the dramatic 
 representations known in the Bhd- 
 shya, which bear more or less the 
 character of religious festival-plays, 
 and the earliest real dramas that 
 have actually come down to us, we 
 must of course suppose a very con- 
 siderable interval of time, during 
 which the drama gradually rose to 
 the degree of perfection exhibited 
 in these extant pieces ; and here I 
 am still disposed to assign a certain 
 influence to the witnessing of Greek 
 plays. The Indian drama, after 
 having acquitted itself brilliantly in 
 the most varied fields — notably too 
 as a drama of civil life — ^finally re- 
 verted in its closing phases to essen- 
 tially the same class of subjects with 
 which it had started — to representa- 
 tions from the story of the gods.".— 
 Ibid., pp. 491, 492. 
 
THE DRAMA. , 199 
 
 doubt rightly, to the original sense of ' (measuring) line- 
 holder,' ' carpenter ;'* since it appears to have been one of 
 the duties of the architect at these, sacrificial celebrations, 
 over and above the erection of the buildings for the recep- 
 tion of those taking part in the sacrifice, likewise to con- 
 duct the various arrangements that were to serve for their 
 amusement. (See Lassen, I. AK, ii. 503.) Whether the 
 natas and nartakas mentioned on such occasions are to be 
 understood as dancers or actors, is at least doubtful; but 
 in the absence of any distinct indication that the latter are 
 intended, I hold in the meantime to the etymological sig- 
 nification of the word ; and it is only where the two appear 
 together (e.g., in Eamay. i. 12. 7 Gorr.) that nata has cer- 
 tainly to be taken in the sense of ' actor.' Buddhist legend 
 seems, indeed, in one instance — in the story of the liie of 
 Maudgalyayana and Upatishya, two disciples of Buddha — 
 to refer to the representation of dramas in the presence of 
 these individuals.f But here a question at once arises as 
 to the age of the work in which this reference occurs ; this 
 is the main point to be settled before we can base any 
 conclusion upon it. Lassen, it is true, says that " in the 
 oldest Buddhistic writings the witnessing of plays is spoken 
 of as something usual ; " but the sole authority he adduces 
 is the passage from the Dulva indicated in the note. The 
 Dulva, however, that is, the Vinaya-Pitaka, cannot, as is 
 well known, be classed amongst the " oldest Buddhistic 
 writiugs ; " it contains pieces of widely different dates, in 
 part, too, of extremely questionable antiquity. In the 
 LaUta-Vistara, apropos of the testing of Buddha in the 
 
 * And therefore has probably their mutual addresses after the 
 
 nothing to do with the Nata-slitras shows are over." By 'spectacle' 
 
 mentioned above ? For another ap- must we here necessarily understand 
 
 plication of the word by the Bud- ' dramatic spectacle, drama ' ? ? 
 
 dhists, see Lassen, /. AK., ii. 81. [Precisely the same thing applies to 
 
 Of a marionette theatre, at all the word visHJca, which properly 
 
 events, we must not think, though only signifies ' merrymaking ' in the 
 
 the Javanese puppet-shows might Svttas of the Southern Buddhists, 
 
 tempt us to do so. where the witnessing of such ex- 
 
 ■|- Csoma Kbrosi, who gives an hibitions {tis'djea-dassana) is men- 
 account of this in As. Res. xx. 50, tioned among the reproaches direct- 
 uses these phrases : "They meet on ed by Bhagavant against the' worldly 
 the occasion of a festival at Rija- ways of the Brahmans ; see Bur- 
 griha : . . . their behaviour during nouf , Lotus de la Bonne Loi, p. 465 ; 
 the several exhiMtions of spectacles — /. St.. m 152-154.] 
 
20O SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 various arts and sciences (Foucairx, p. 1 50), -ndtya must, 
 undoubtedly, be taken in the sense of ' mimetic art ' — and 
 so Foucaux translates it; but this does not suppose the 
 existence of distinct dramas. The date, moreover, of this 
 particular work is by no means to be regarded as settled ; 
 and, in any case, for the time of Buddha himself, this 
 examiuation-legend carries no ■weight whatever. 
 
 With respect, now, to the surviving dramas, it has 
 hitherto been usual to follow what is supposed to be the 
 tradition, and to assign the most ancient of them, the 
 Mrichhakatl and Kalidasa's pieces, to the first century B.C.; 
 while the pieces next following — ^those of Bhavabhiiti — 
 belong to a time so late as the eighth century a.d. Be- 
 tween Kalidasa and Bhavabhiiti there would thus be a 
 gap of some eight or nine centuries — a period from which, 
 according to this view, not one single work of this class has 
 come down to us. Now this is in itself in the highest 
 degree improbable ; and were it so, then surely at the very 
 least there ought to be discernible in the dramas of the 
 younger epoch a very different spirit, a very different man- 
 ner of treatment, from that exhibited in their predecessors 
 of an age eight or nine hundred years earlier.* But this 
 is by no means the case ; and thus we are compelled at 
 once to reject this pretended tradition, and to refer those 
 sffi-disant older pieces to pretty much the same period as 
 those of Bhavabhiiti. Moreover, when we come to examine 
 the matter more closely, we find that, so far as Kalidasa 
 is concerned, Indian tradition does not really furnish any 
 ground whatever for the view hitherto accepted : we only 
 find that the tradition has been radically misused. The 
 tradition is to the effect that Kalidasa lived at the court 
 of Vikramaditya, and it is contained in a memorial verse 
 which says that Dhanvantari, Kshapanaka, Amarasioha, 
 ^afiku, Vetalabhatta, Ghatakaxpara, Kalidasa, Varahami- 
 hira, and Vararuchi -f- were the ' nine gems ' of Vikrama's 
 
 * I have here copied Holtzmann's krajna-charitra {Joum. Asiat. Mai, 
 
 words, referring to Amara, in his 1 844, p. 356). [This recension — 
 
 excellent little treatise, Ucber den ascribed to Vararuchi — of the Sin- 
 
 yriechischen Urfprung dcs indischen hdsana-dviitrinsikii is actually ex- 
 
 y/iicj-iTo'scs, Karlsruhe, 1841, p. 26. tant ; see Aufrecht, Ciit. of Sansl: 
 
 t This is obviously the Vriracha MSS. Libr. Trin. CM. Camb., p. 11, 
 
 who is mentioned by the Hindustani and Westergaard, Catal. Codd. Or. 
 
 chronicler as the author of the Vi- Bibl. Beg. ffaunicnsis, p. 100.] 
 
DATE OF KALIDASA. 201 
 
 court. Now it is upon tliis one verse — a mere waif and 
 stray, that has come, like Schiller's ' Madchen aus der 
 Fremde,' from nobody knows where,* and which is, in any 
 case, of the most questionable authority — that the assump- 
 tion rests that Kalidasa flourished in the year 56 B.C.! 
 For people were not satisfied with hastily accepting as 
 genuine coin the tradition here presented — and this not- 
 withstanding the fact that they at the same time impugned 
 to some extent the trustworthiness of the verse embody- 
 ing it ■)• — they at once rushed to the conclusion that the 
 Vikrama here named must be the, Vikramaditya, whose era, 
 still current in our own day, commences with the year 56 
 B.C. But then, we know of a good many different Vikramas 
 and Vikramadityas : J and, besides, a tradition which is 
 found in some modern works,§ and which ought surely, in 
 the first instance, to have been shown to be baseless before 
 any such conclusion was adopted, states expressly (whether 
 correctly or not is a question by itself) that king Bhoja, 
 the ruler of Malava, who dwelt at Dhara and Ujjayini, was 
 the Vikrama at whose court the ' nine gems ' flourished ; 
 and, according to an inscription,!] this Idng Bhoja lived 
 
 * It is alleged to be taken from lin'a Sanskrit Anthology, pp. 483, 
 
 the Vikrama-charitra ; but Eoth, in 484. 
 
 his analysis of this work in the yo«m. II See Lassen, Zeitgch. fwr die 
 Asiat, Octob. 1845, p. 278 fF., says Kunde des Morg., vii. 294 ff. ; Cole- 
 nothing of it. [And in fact it occurs brooke, ii. 462. According to Rein- 
 neither there nor in any of the other and in the jowrn, Asiat., Sept. 1844, 
 recensions of the Sinhiisana-dTiltrin- p. 250, Bhoja is jnentioned some 
 ^ikS to which I have access. It is, years earlier by Albirdni, who wrote 
 however, found embodied both in in a.d. 1031, as his contemporary ; 
 the Jyotirvid-dbharana, of about the and Otbi alludes to him earlier still, 
 sixteenth century (22. 10, see Z. D. in A.D. 1018, as then reigning ; see 
 M. G., xxii. 723, 1868), and in a Eeiuaud, Mim. sur VInde, p. 261. 
 Singhalese MS. of the so-called According to a later HindustsJnl 
 Navaratna (with Singhalese, com- chronicler, he lived 542 years after 
 mentary) cited in Westergaard's Vikramitditya (see Journ. Asiat. 
 Caial. Codd. Or. Bill. Reg. Haun., Mai, 1844, p. 354), which would 
 p. 14 (1846).] make the date of the latter about 
 
 + Partly on erroneous grounds. A.D. 476. Upon what this very pre- 
 
 It was asserted, namely, that the cise statement rests is unfortunately 
 
 word Ghatakarpara in the verse was uncertain ; the Vikrama-charitra 
 
 only the name of a work, not of a does not fix in this definite way the 
 
 person : this, however, is not the interval of time between Bhoja and 
 
 case, as several poems, besides, are Vikrama. Eoth, at all events, in 
 
 found ascribed to him. his analysis of the work (Journ. 
 
 J 'Sun of might' is quite .<. Asiat., Sept. 1854, p. 281) merely 
 
 general title, and not a name. says, "hicn des annees ajjres {la mart 
 
 § See, for instance, also Haeber- de Yihramdditya) Bhoja panint au 
 
203 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 about 1040-1090 A.D. On the other hand, there exists no 
 positive ground whatever for the opinion that the Vikrama 
 of the verse is the Vikramaditya whose era hegins in B.C. 
 56. Nay, the case is stronger stiU ; for up to the present 
 time we have absolutely no authentic evidence * to show 
 whether the era of Vikramaditya dates from the year of 
 his birth, from some achievement, or from the year of his 
 death, or whether, in fine, it may not have been simply 
 introduced by him for astronomical reasons If "To assign 
 him to the first year of his era might be quite as great a 
 mistake as we should commit in. placing Pope Gregory 
 XIII. in the year one of the Gregorian Calendar, or even 
 Julius Csesar in the first year of the Julian period to which 
 his name has been given, i.e., in the year 47 1 3 B.C." (Holtz- 
 mann, op. cit., p. 19). 
 
 souverain pouvoir." [The text has 
 simply: "bahiini varslidni gatdni." 
 Nor does any definite statement of 
 the kind occur in any of the various 
 other recensions of the Sinh&ana- 
 A^&trirSki, although a considerable 
 interval is here regularly assumed 
 to have elapsed between the rule of 
 Vikrama at Avanti and that of Bhoja 
 at Dhirii.] — ^To suppose two Bhojas, 
 as Reinaud does, I. c, and Mim. sur 
 I'Inde, pp. 113, 114, is altogether 
 arbitrary. We might determine the 
 uncertain date of Vikramslditya by 
 the certain date of Bhoja, but we 
 cannot reverse the process. The date 
 3044 of Yudhishthira's era is, J. As., 
 I. c, p. 357, assigned to the aooes- 
 sibn of Vikramaditya ; but it does 
 not appear whether this is the actual 
 
 Sinhdsana-dv^trinSik^, which, how- 
 ever, in the MS. before me (Trin. 
 Coll., Camb.), yields no definite 
 chronological data. — After all, 
 the assumption of several Bhojas 
 has since turned out to be fully 
 warranted; see, e.g., K^jendraKla 
 Mitra in joum. A. S. Beng. 1863, 
 p. 91 ff., and my /. Sir., i. 312.] 
 
 * See Colebrooke, ii. 475 ; Lassen, 
 /. AK., ii. 49, 50, 398 ; Reinaud, 
 Mim. sur I'Inde, pp. 68 ff., 79 ff. ; 
 Bertrand in the Joum. Asiat., Mai, 
 1844, p. 357. 
 
 t We first meet with it in the 
 astronomer Var^ha-Mihira in the 
 fifth or sixth century, though even 
 this is not altogether certain, and, as 
 in the case of Brahmagnpta in the 
 seventh century, it might possibly 
 
 .tradition of the Hindustani ohroni- be the era of ^^Uvsifaana (beg. A.D. 
 
 eler, or merely an addition on the 
 .part of the translator. Even in the 
 former case, it would still only prove 
 that the chronicler, or the tradition 
 he followed, mixed up the common 
 assertion as to the date of Vikrama 
 
 78). Lassen does, in fact, suppose 
 the latter (/. AK., i. 508), but see 
 Colebrooke, ii. 475, — Alblrdnl gives 
 particulars (v. Reinaud, /owr-n.^stoi., 
 Sept. 1844, pp. 282-284) *3 to ''•^^ 
 origin of the Saka era ; but regard- 
 
 with the special statement above~=ing the basis of the Samvat era of 
 
 referred to. [To the statements 
 of the Hindustani chronicler, Mir 
 Cher i Ali Afsos, no great impor- 
 tance, probably, need be attached. 
 They rest substantially on the recen- 
 sion attributed to Vararuchi of the 
 
 Vikrama he does not enlarge. [Even 
 yet these two questions, which are 
 of such capital importance for Indian 
 chronology, are in an altogether 
 unsatisfactory state. According to 
 Kern, Introd. to his edition of tha 
 
DRAMAS OF KALIDASA. 203 
 
 The dramas of Kalidasa — that one of the 'nine gems' with 
 whom we are here more immediately concerned — furnish 
 in their contents nothing that directly enables us to 
 determine their date. Still, the mention of the Greek 
 female slaves in attendance upon the king points at least 
 to a time not especially early ; while the form in which 
 the popular dialects appear, and which, as compared with 
 that of the inscriptions of Piyadasi, is extraordinarily 
 degraded, not unfrequently coinciding with the present 
 form of these vernaculars, brings us down to a period at 
 any rate several centuries after Christ. But whether the 
 tradition is right in placing Kalidasa at the court of Bhoja 
 in the middle of the eleventh century. appears to me very 
 questionable ; for this reason in particular, that it assigns 
 toi-the same court other poets also, whose works, compared 
 with those of Kalidasa, are so bad, that they absolutely 
 must belong to a later stage than his — for example, 
 Damodara Mi^ra, author of the Hanuman-nataka. More- 
 over, Kalidasa has allotted to him such a large number of 
 works, in part too of wholly diverse character, that we 
 cannot but admit the existence of several authors of this 
 name ; and, in point of fact, it is a name that has continued 
 in constant use down to the present time. Nay, one even 
 of the three dramas that are ascribed to Kalidasa would 
 seem, fi-om its style, to belong to a different author from 
 
 Brihat-Saniliit^ of Varfha-Mihira, taken the same view, /. R. A. S. , vii. 
 
 5 ff. (l866), the use of the so-called 382 (1875). According to Eggeling 
 
 Samvat era is not demonstrable for (Triibner's Amer. and Or. Lit. Eec, 
 
 early times at all, while astronomers special number, 1875, p. 38), one of 
 
 only begin to employ it after the the inscriptions found in Sir Walter 
 
 year 1000 or so. According to Elliot's copies of grants dates as 
 
 Westergaard, Om de indiake Kejser- far back as the year SaTca 169 (a.d. 
 
 houee (1867), p. 164, the grant of 247). Bumell, however, declares it 
 
 Dantidurga, dated Salca 675, Samvat to be a forgery of the tenth century. 
 
 811 (a.d. 754), is the earliest certain Pergusson, too. On the i&aha, Sam- 
 
 instance of its occurrence; see also vat, and Gupta Eras, pp. 11-16, is 
 
 Burnell, Elem. of South. Ind. Pal., p. of opinion that the so-called samvat 
 
 55. Others, on the contrary, have era goes no farther back than the 
 
 no hesitation in at once referring, tenth century. For the present, 
 wherever possible, every Samvat- or ■ therefore, unfortunately, where 
 
 Samvatsare-iB,iedL inscription to the there is nothing else to guide us, it 
 
 Samvat era. Thus, e.g.. Cunning- must generally remain an open ques- 
 
 ham in his Archwol. Survey of India, tion which era we have to do with 
 
 iii. 31, 39, directly assigns an in- in a particular inscription, and what 
 
 Bcription dated Sa/mv. 5 to the year date consequently the inscription 
 
 L.o. 52 : Dowson, too, has recently bears.] 
 
204 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 the other two.^^^ And this view is further favoured by 
 the circumstance, that in the introduction to this play 
 Dhavaka, Saumilla, and Kaviputra are named as the 
 poet's predecessors; Dhavaka being the name^of a poet 
 ■who flourished contemporaneously with king Sri-Harsha 
 of Kashmir, that is, according to Wilson, towards the 
 beginning of the twelfth century a.d.^? There may, it is 
 
 '" In the introduction to my 
 translatioa of this drama, the M£- 
 lavikilgnimitra, I have specially ex- 
 amined not only the question of its 
 genuineness, but also that of the 
 date of Kstlidisa. The result ar- 
 rived at is, in the first place, that 
 this drama also really belongs to 
 him, — and in this view Shankar 
 Pandit, in his edition of the play 
 (Bombay, 1869), concurs. As to 
 the second point, internal evidence, 
 partly derived from the language, 
 partly connected with the phase of 
 civilisation presented to us, leads 
 me to assign the composition of 
 K£lidd)sa's three dramas to a period 
 from the second to the fourth cen- 
 tury of our era, the period of the 
 Gupta princes, Chandragupta, ho., 
 "whose reigns correspond best to 
 the legendary tradition of the glory 
 of Vikrama, and may perhaps be 
 gathered up in it in one single focus." 
 Lassen has expressed himself to 
 essentially the same effect (/. AK., 
 ii. 457, 1158-1160) ; see also /. St., 
 ii. 148, 415-417. Kem, however, 
 with special reference to the tradi^ 
 tion which regards K^liddsa and 
 Var^ha-Mihira as contemporaries, 
 has, in his preface to Var^faa's 
 Brihat-Saiphiti, p. 20, declared 
 himself in favour of referring the 
 * nine gems ' to the first half of the 
 sixth century A.D. Lastly, on the 
 ground of the astrological data in 
 the Kumilra-sambhava and Raghu- 
 van^a, Jaoobi comes to the con- 
 clusion (Jdonatabsr. der Berl. A cad., 
 1873, p. 556) that the author of 
 these two poems cannot have lived 
 before about A.D. 350 ; but here, of 
 course, the preliminary question 
 remains whether he is to be identi- 
 
 fied with the dramatist. Shankar 
 Pandit, in Triibner's Am. and Or. 
 Lit. Rec.^ 1875, special No., p. 35, 
 assumes this, and fixes Kdlid&a's 
 date as at all events prior to the 
 middle of the eighth century. For 
 a definite chronological detail which 
 is perhaps furnished by the Megha- 
 dtita, see note 219 below. By 
 the Southern Buddhists K^liddsa 
 is placed in the sixth century ; 
 Knighton, Hist, of Ceylon, 105 ; 
 Z. D. M. 0., xxii. 730. With modern 
 astronomers, the idea of a triad of 
 authors of this name is so fixed, 
 that they even employ the term 
 Kdlid^sa to denote the number 3 ; 
 see Z. D. M. G., xxii. 713. 
 
 2" The date of ^ri-Harsha, of 
 whom Dhdvaka is stated in the 
 Kdvya-prakil^a to have been the 
 protdg^ — Kashmir is not here in 
 question — has since been fixed by 
 Hall (Intrbd. to the Vdsavadattd) 
 for the seventh century, rather. 
 Hall, moreover, questions the exis- 
 tence of Dhavaka altogether (p. 17), 
 and is of opinion that he "never 
 enjoyed any more substantial 
 existence than that of a various 
 reading." — This conjecture of Hall's 
 as to the name of the author of the 
 Ratntlvali, in which Buhler also 
 concurred, has since been brilliantly 
 verified. According to Biihler's letter 
 from Srinagara (publ. in /. St., xiv. 
 402 ff.), all the Kashmir MSS. of 
 the Kdvya-prabd^a read, in the pas- 
 sage in question, Bdna, not Dha- 
 vaka, the latter name being alto- 
 gether unknown to the Pandits 
 there : " As Mammata was a native 
 of Kashmir, this reading is un- 
 doubtedly the correct one." — Comp. 
 note 218 below. 
 
MRICHHAKATI— LATER DRAMAS. 205 
 
 true, have been more Dhavakas than one ; another MS., 
 moreover, reads Bhasaka ; "^^ and besides, these introduc- 
 tions are possibly, in part, later additions. In the case of 
 the Mrichhakatx at least, this would appear to be cer- 
 tain, as the poet's own death is there intimated.* This 
 last-mentioned drama, the Mrichhakati — whose author, 
 Sudraka, is, according to Wilson, placed by tradition prior 
 to Vikramaditya ^1* (i.e., the same Vikrama at whose 
 court the 'nine gems' flourished?) — cannot in any case 
 have been written before the second century A.D. Por it 
 makes use of the word n&naka as the name of a coin ; f 
 and this term, according to Wilson {Ariana Antigua, p. 
 364), is borrowed from the coins of Kanerki, a king who, 
 by the evidence of these coins, is proved to have reigned 
 until about the year 40 a.d. (Lassen, /. AK., ii. 413). But 
 a date long subsequent to this will have to be assigned to 
 to the Mrichhakati, since the vernacular dialects it intro- 
 duces appear in a most barbarous condition. Besides, we 
 meet with the very same flourishing state of Buddhism 
 which is here revealed in one of the dramas of Bhava- 
 bhiiti, a poet whose date is fixed with tolerable certainty 
 for the eighth century a.d. The Eamayana and the war- 
 part of the Maha-Bharata must, to judge from the use 
 
 21s 'X'he passage ezhibits a great whom CMnakya is to destroy. To 
 
 numberofvariousreadings;aeeHaag, Vikramiditya, on the other hand, 
 
 Zur Texteskntii; u. Erhldrimg von is assigned the date ^aZi 4000, i.e., 
 
 Kdliddsa's Mdlavihdgnimiira (iS'jl), a.d. 899 (!) ; see the text in feva- 
 
 pp. 7, 8. Hall, I. c, prefers the raohandra Vidy&Sigara's Marriage 
 
 readings Bhdsdka, Sdmila, and Sau- of Hindoo Widows, p. 63 (Calo. 
 
 mJZa y Haag, on the contrary, B/i(isa, 1856), and in my Essay on the 
 
 Saumilla, Kavipvira. In Bsina's B^mdyana, p. 43. 
 Harsha - charita, Introd., v. 15, t According to the Vi4va-kosha, 
 
 Bbdsa is landed on account of his quoted by Mabldhara to Vdj. Samh. 
 
 dramas : indeed, his name is even 23. 9, it is a synonym of r'Apa 
 
 put before that of Kitlidfea. (= rupee?). Yilinavalkya (see 
 
 * Unless Siidraka-rSiia, the re- Stenzler, Introd., p. xi.) and Vrid- 
 
 puted author, simply was the patron dha-Gautama (see Dattaka Mimdns^, 
 
 of the poet ? It is quite a common p. 34) are also acquainted witli 
 
 thing in India for the actual author ndnalea in the sense of ' coin. ' 
 
 to substitute the name of his patron [Both Lassen,/. AK., ii. 57S> ^"^^ 
 
 for his own. Miiller, A. S. L., p. 331, dispute 
 
 ^" In a prophetic chapter of the the conclusions drawn from the 
 
 Skanda-Purdna, for instance, he is occurrence of the word ndtfalca, but 
 
 placed in the year Kali 3290 {i.e., I cannot be persuaded of the cogency 
 
 A.D. 189), but at the same time only of their objections.] 
 twenty years before the Nandas 
 
2o6 SANSKRIT LITERATURK 
 
 made of their heroes in the Mrichhakati, abeady havd 
 heen favourite reading at the time when it was composed ; 
 while, on the other hand, from the absence of allusion 
 to the chief figures of the present Puranas, we may 
 perhaps infer with Wilson that these works were not yet 
 in existence. This latter inference, however, is in so far 
 doubtful as the legends dealt with in these younger 
 Puranas were probably, to a large extent, already contained 
 in the dlder works of the same name* The two remain- 
 ing dramas of Bhavabhiiti, and the whole herd of the later 
 dramatic literature, relate to the heroic tradition of the 
 Eamayana and Maha-Bharata, or else to the history of 
 Krishna ; and the later the pieces are, the more do they 
 resemble the so-called 'mysteries' of the Middle Ages. 
 The comedies, which, together with a few other pieces, 
 move in the sphere of civil life, form of course an excep- 
 tion to this. A peculiar class of dramas are the philo- 
 sophical ones, in which abstractions and systems appear as 
 the dramatis personce. One very special peculiarity of the 
 Hindu drama is that women, and persons of inferior rank, 
 station, or caste, are introduced as speaking, not in Sanskrit, 
 but in the popular dialects. This feature is of great 
 importance ^^ for the criticism of the individual pieces ; 
 the conclusions resulting from it have already been ad- 
 verted to in the course of the discussion. 
 
 * Besides, tlie Blaying of Sumbha certainly to a later stage. Ought 
 
 and Nii^umbha by Devi, which forms the 6lidraka who is mentioned in 
 
 the subject of the Devi-Mdhittmya, this work, p. Il8, ed. Wilson, to be 
 
 v.-x., in the Mdrkand. -Purina, is identified, perhaps, with the reputed 
 
 referred to in the Mrichhakati, p. author of the Mrichhakati ? 
 
 105.22 (ed.Stenzler). — Whether.jjid. ^^ For example, from the rela- 
 
 104.18, Karataka is to be referred tion in which the Prdkrit of the 
 
 to the jackal of this name in the several existing recensions of the 
 
 PaSichatantra is uncertain. — At ^akuntald stands to the rules of 
 
 page 126.9 Stenzler reads gaUaklca, the PnSkrit grammarian Varaiuohi, 
 
 but Wilson [Hindu Theatre, i. 134) Pjechel has drawn special arguments 
 
 reads maUaka, and considers it not in support of the view advocated by 
 
 impossible that by it we have to him in conjunction with Stenzler, 
 
 understand the Arabic mdiik!- — In that of these recensions the Bengdll 
 
 regard to the state of manners de- one is the most ancient ; see Kuhn's 
 
 pioted, the Mrichhakati is closely Beitrdge sur vergV. Sprachforseh., 
 
 related to the Da^a-kumdra, al- viii. 129 ff. (1874), and my observa- 
 
 though the latter work, written in tions on the subject in /. St., xiv. 
 
 the eleventh century [rather in the 35 if. 
 sixth, see below, p. 213], belongs 
 
POSSIBLE GREEK INFLUENCE ON DRAMA. 207 
 
 From the foregoing exposition it appears that the drama 
 meets us in an already finished form, and with its best pro- 
 ductions. In almost all the prologues, too, the several 
 works are represented as new, in contradistinction t© the 
 pieces of former poets ; but of these pieces, that is, of the 
 early beginnings of dramatic poetry, not the smallest rem- 
 nant has been preserved.^^^ Consequently the conjecture 
 that it may possibly have been the representation of Greek 
 dramas at the courts of the Grecian kings in Bactria, in 
 the Panjab, and in Gujarat (for so far did Greek supremacy 
 for a time extend), which awakened the Hindii faculty of 
 imitation, and so gave birth to the Indian drama, does not 
 in the meantime admit of direct verification. But its his- 
 torical possibility, at any rate, is undeniable,^" especially as 
 the older dramas nearly all belong to the west of India. 
 No internal connection, however, with the Greek drama 
 exists. ^^* The fact, again, that no dramas are found either 
 
 2" See Cowell in /. St., v. 475 ; 
 and as to the Kansa-vadha and Vali- 
 bandba, the note on p. 198 above. 
 
 ^" Cf. the Introduction to my 
 translation of the MEilavikd, p. xlvii., 
 and the remarks on YavaniJed in Z. 
 J). M. G., xiv. 269 ; also /. St., xiii. 
 492. 
 
 218 TJie leading work on the In- 
 dian dramas is still Wilson's Select 
 Specimens of the Theatre of the Hin- 
 dus, l83SS 1871'. The number of 
 dramas that have been published in 
 India is already very considerable, 
 and is constantly being increased. 
 Foremost amongst thdm still remain: 
 . — the MrichhakatiJed of ^lidraka, the 
 three dramas of Kdliddsa {iSahuntald, 
 UrvaB, and Mdlavikd), Bhavabhtiti's 
 three {Mdlatl-mddhava, Mahd-vira- 
 charitra, and Uttara-rdma-charitra); 
 — the Hatndvali of King Sri-Harsha- 
 deva, composed, according to Wil- 
 son's view, in the twelfth century, 
 and that not by the king himself, 
 but by the poet Dbdvaka, who lived 
 at his court, but according to Hall, 
 by the poet Edna in the beginning of 
 the seventh century ; see Hall, In- 
 troduction to the Vilsavadattii, p. 
 15 ff. (cf. note 212 above), /. Str., i. 
 
 356), Lit. Cent. Bl., 1872, p. 614; — 
 the Ndgdnanda, n. Buddhistic sen- 
 sational piece ^ascribed to the same 
 royal author, but considered by 
 Cowell to belong to Dhdvaka (see, 
 however, my notice of Boyd's trans- 
 lation in Lit. G. B., 1872, p. 615) ; — 
 the Yeni-samh&ra of Bhatta-ndri- 
 yana, a piece pervaded by the colour- 
 ing of the Krishna sect, written, 
 according to Grill, who edited it in 
 1871, in the sixth, and in any case 
 earlier than the tenth century (see 
 Lit. C. B., 1872, p. 612);,— the 
 Viddlia-idlahhanjikd of Edja-Sekha- 
 ra, probably prior to the tenth 
 century (see I, Str., i. 313) ; — the 
 Mudrd-rdkshasa of Vi^dkhadatta, a 
 piece of political intrigue, of about 
 the twelfth century ; and lastly, the 
 Prdbodha-ehandrodaya of Krishna- 
 mi&'a, which dates, according to 
 Goldstiicker, from the end of the 
 same century. — Two of Kdliddsa'a 
 dramas, the ^akuntald and Urva^i, 
 are each extant in several recensions, 
 evidently in consequence of their 
 having enjoyed a very special popu- 
 larity. Since the appearance of 
 Pisohel's pamphlet, JDc Kdliddsae 
 Sdkuntali Secensionibus (Breslau, 
 
2o8 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 in the literature of the Hindiis, who emigrated to the 
 island of Java about the year 500 A.D. (and thence subse- 
 quently to Bali), or among the Tibetan translations, is per- 
 haps to be explained, in the former case, by the circumstance 
 that the emigration took place from the east coast of India,* 
 where dramatic, literature may not as yet have been spe- 
 cially cultivated (?). But in the case of the Tibetans the 
 fact is more surprising, as the Meghadiita of KaUdasa and 
 other similar works are found among their translations. 
 
 The Lyrical branch of Sanskrit poetry divides itself, 
 according to its subject, into the Eeligious and the Erotic 
 Lyric. With respect to the former, we have already seen, 
 when treating of the Atharva-Samhita, that the hymns of 
 this collection are no longer the expression of direct reli- 
 gious emotion, but are rather to be looked upon as the 
 utterance of superstitious terror and uneasy apprehension^ 
 and that in part they bear the direct character of magic 
 spells and incantations. This same character is found 
 faithfully preserved in the later religious lyrics,, throughout 
 the Epic, the Puranas, and the Upanishads, wherever 
 prayers of the sort occur ; and it has finally, within the 
 last few centuries, found its classical expression in the 
 Tantra literature. It is in particular by the heaping up of 
 titles under which the several deities are invoked that 
 their favour is thought to be won; and the 'thousand- 
 name-prayers' form quite a special class by themselves. 
 To this category belong also th6 prayers in amulet-form, 
 to which a prodigious virtue is ascribed, and which enjoy 
 the very highest repute even in the present day. Besides 
 these, we also meet with prayers, to ^iva -f- especially, which 
 
 1870), in which he contends, with this Kavi literature, moreover, we 
 
 great confidence, for the greater au- have actually extant^ in the Smara- 
 
 thentioity of the so-called Bengali dahana, a subsequent version of the 
 
 recension, the questions connected Kumdra-sambhava, and in the ^u- 
 
 herewith have entered upon a new mana-santaka (?) a similar version 
 
 stage. See a full discussion of this of the Eaghu-vai^a, i.e., works which, 
 
 topic in /. St., xiv. 161 ff. To in their originals at least, bear the 
 
 Pischel we are also indebted for our name of Kdlid([sa ; see /. St., iv. 133. 
 
 knowledge of the Dekhan recension 141.] Do the well-known Javanese 
 
 of the Urva^I : it appeared in the puppet-shows owe their origin to the 
 
 Monat^w. der Berl. Acad., 1875, pp. Indian drama? 
 
 609-670. + Whose worship appears, in the 
 
 * Yet the later emigrants might main, to have exercised the most fav- 
 
 have taken some with them! [In curable influence upon his followers, 
 
LYRICAL POETRY. 
 
 209 
 
 for religious fervour and childlike trust will bear compari- 
 son with the best hymns of the Christian Church, though, 
 it must be admitted, their number is very small. 
 
 The Erotic Lyric commences, for us, with certain of the 
 poems attributed to KaUdasa. One of these, the Megha- 
 Mta, belongs at all events to a period ^^ when the temple 
 worship of Siva Mahakala at IJjjayinl was in its'prime, 
 as was still the case at the time of the first Muhammadan 
 conquerors. Together with other matter of a like sort, it 
 has been admitted, and under Kalidasa's name, into the 
 Tibetan Tandjur,* from which, however, no chronological 
 deduction can be drawn, as the date of the final completion 
 of this compilation is unknown. The subject of the Megha- 
 duta is a message which an exile sends by a cloud to his 
 distant love, together with the description of the route the 
 cloud-messenger is to take — a form of exposition which has 
 been imitated in a considerable number of similar poems. 
 A peculiar class is composed of the sentences of Bhartrihari, 
 
 225 volumes. It is divided into the 
 jRgyud and the Mdo (Tantra and 
 Sdtra classes, in Sanskrit). The 
 Rgyud, mostly on tantriJea rituals 
 and ceremonies, makes 87 volumes. 
 The Mdo, on science and literature, 
 occupies 136 volumes. One separate 
 volume contains (58) hymns or 
 praises on several deities or saints, 
 and one volume is the index for the 
 whole.— The Rgyud contains 2640 
 treatises of different sizes : they treat 
 in general of the rituals and cere- 
 monies of the mystical doctrine of 
 the Buddhists, interspersed with 
 many instructions, hymns, prayers, 
 and incantations. — The Mdo treats 
 in general of science and literature 
 in the following order : theology, 
 philosophy " (these two alone make 
 94 volumes), "logic or dialectic, 
 philology or grammar, rhetoric, 
 poesy, prosody, synonymies, astro- 
 nomy, astrology,medicine and ethics, 
 some hints to the mechanical arts 
 and histories. " See further, in par- 
 ticular, Anton Sohiefner's paper, 
 Ueier die logischen und grammati- 
 schen Werhe im Tandjur, in the Bul- 
 letin of the St. Petersburg Academy 
 (read 3d September 1847). 
 
 
 whereas it is the worship of Kjishna 
 that has chiefly countenanced and 
 furthered the moral degradation of 
 the Hindlis. 
 
 2^' A very definite chronological 
 detail would be furnished by v. 14, 
 provided MallinStha's assertion is war- 
 ranted, to the effect that this verse 
 is to be taken in a double sense, i.e., 
 as referring at the same time to 
 DiflnSga, a violent opponent of Kii- 
 lid&a. For iu that case we should 
 in all probability have to understand 
 by Diunilga the well-known Bud- 
 dhist disputant of this name, who 
 lived somewhere about the sixth cen- 
 tury ; see my discussion of this point 
 in Z. D. M. G., xxii. 726 fl'. 
 
 * Considering the scarcity of the 
 Asiatic Researches, I here give 
 Csoma Korosi's account of the Tan- 
 djur, contained in vol. xx., 1836, in 
 some detail. " The Bstan-Hgyur is 
 a compilation in Tibetan of all sorts 
 of literary works " (in all some 3900), 
 "written mostly by ancient Indian 
 Pandits and some learned Tibetans 
 in the first centuries after the intro- 
 duction of Buddhism into Tibet, 
 commencing with the seventh cen- 
 tury of our era. The whole makes 
 
2 1 o SANSKRIT LITER A TURK. 
 
 Amaru, &c., which merely portray isolated situations, with- 
 out any connection as a whole. A favourite topic is the 
 story of the loves of Krishna and the shepherdesses, the 
 playmates of his youth. It has already been remarked that 
 the later Kavyas are to be ranked with the erotic poems 
 rather than with the epic. In general, this love-poetry is of 
 the most unbridled and extravagantly sensual description; 
 yet examples of deep and truly romantic tenderness of feel- 
 ing are not wanting. It is remarkable that, in regard to 
 some of these poems, we encounter the same phenomenon 
 as in the case of the Song of Solomon : a mystical interpre- 
 tation is put upon them, and in one instance at least, the 
 Gita-Groviada of Jayadeva,^'-'* such a mystical reference 
 appears really to have been ii^tended by the poet, however 
 incompatible this may at first sight seem with the particu- 
 larly Wanton exuberance of fancy which is here displayed. 
 Of the Ethico-Didactic Poetry — the so-called Ifiti-Sds- 
 tras — but little has isurvived in a complete form (some 
 pieces also in the Tibetan Tandjur), no doubt because the 
 great epic, the Maha-Bharata, in consequence of the char- 
 acter of universality which was gradually stamped upon 
 it, is itself to be regarded as such a Mti-^astra. Still, 
 relics enough of the aphoristic ethical poetry have been 
 preserved to enable us to judge that it was a very favourite 
 form, and achieved very excellent results.^^" Closely allied 
 
 219a ^jj,_ to Biililer (letter Sep. Muir's Religious and Moral Senti- 
 
 1875), Jayadeva, who does not ap- ments from Sanshrit Writers (1875). 
 
 pear in the Sarasv.-kanthstbh., flou- Regarding an anthology which, both 
 
 rished under king Lakshmanasena of in extent and antiquity, surpasses 
 
 Gauda, of whom there is extant an that of Sitrngadhara, viz., the Sad- 
 
 insoriptiou of the year 1 116, and uhti - TcarnAmrita of ^rldharadisa, 
 
 whose era, still current in Mithilil, compiled .Saie 1127 (a.d. 1205), and 
 
 begins, aoo. to Ind. Ant. iv. 300, in comprising quotations from 446 
 
 A.D. 1170. poets, see the latest number of Edj. 
 
 ^-'' See BbhtUngk's critical edition Ldla Mitra's Notices, iii. 134-149. 
 
 of these aphorisms, Indische Spriiche, The statement at the close of the 
 
 3 vols., 1863-65 (with 5419 vv.), 2d work respecting the era of king 
 
 edition, 1870-73 (with 7613 vv.), Lakshmanasena, in whose service the 
 
 and Aufrecht's analysis, in the Z. poet's father was, is both in itself 
 
 D. M. O., xxvii. I flf. (1873), of the obscure, and does not well harmonise 
 
 Sdriigadhara-Paddhati, of the four- with our other information on the 
 
 teenth century, — an anthology of point. On account of the numerous 
 
 about 6000 vv. culled from 264 dif- examples it quotes we may also here 
 
 ferent authors and works. Compare mention the Sarasvati-karflhdhhara- 
 
 also Joh. Klatt, Be Trecentis Chdna' na, a treatise on poetics attributed 
 
 hjae Sententiis (1S73), and Dr. John to king Bhoia-deva, and therefore 
 
'beast-fable: 
 
 2ir 
 
 to it is the literature of the ' Beast-Fable,' which has a very- 
 special interest for us, as it forms a substantial link of 
 connection with the West. We have already pointed 
 out that the oldest animal-fables known to us at pre- 
 sent occur in the Chhandogyopanishad. Nor are these 
 at all limited there to the representation of the gods as 
 assuming the forms of animals, and in this shape associat- 
 ing with men, of which we have even earlier illustrations,* 
 but animals are themselves introduced as the speakers and 
 actors. In Panini's time, complete cycles of fables may 
 possibly have already existed, but this is by no means 
 certain as yet.t The oldest fables, out of India, are 
 those of Babrius, for some of which at least the Indian 
 original may be pointed out.^^^ But the most ancient book 
 
 belonging probably to the eleventh 
 century ; see on it Aufreeht, Cata- 
 log us, pp. 208, 209. — To this class 
 also belongs, thougitt its contents are 
 almost entirely erotic, the Prstkrit 
 anthology of Hdla, consisting pro- 
 perly of only 700 verses (whence its 
 name Sapta-iataka)^ which, how- 
 ever, by successive recensions have 
 grown to I I0O-I2OO. It was the pro- 
 totype of the Sapta-iati of Govardha- 
 na, a work of about the twelfth cen- 
 tury, which in its turn seems to have 
 served as the model for the Satta- 
 sai of the Hindi poet Bih^ri Lai ; see 
 my Essay on the Sapta-^ataka of 
 Hdla (1870), pp. 9, 12, and Z. D. M. 
 (?., xxviii. 345 £f. (1874), and also 
 Garrez in the Jowm. Asiat., August 
 1872, p. 197 if. 
 
 * For instance, the story of Manu 
 and the fish, Indra's metamorphosis 
 into the birds ma/rleata and hapinja- 
 la, his appearance in ths form of a 
 ram, &c. In the Rik the sun is fre- 
 quently compared to a vulture or 
 falcon hovering in the air. 
 
 •f- The words cited in support of 
 this are not Panini's own, but his 
 scholiast's (see p. 225). [But, at 
 all events, they occur directly in 
 the Mahibh^shya ; see /. St., xiii. 
 486.1 
 
 '*' In my paper, Ueher den Zu- 
 sammerihang mdischer Fabeln mit 
 
 {I. St., iii. 327 ff.)j as 
 the result of special investigations 
 bearing upon A. Wagener's Efisay 
 on the subject (1853), I arrived at 
 exactly the opposite conclusion ; for 
 in nearly every instance where a 
 Greek fable was compared with the 
 corresponding Indian one, the marks 
 of originality appeared to me to be- 
 long to the former. In all proba- 
 bility the Buddhists were here the 
 special medium of communication, 
 since it is upon their popular form 
 of literacy exposition that the Indian 
 fable and fairy-tale literature is spe- 
 cially based. Otto Keller, it is true, 
 in his tract, Ueber die Gesckichte der 
 griech. Fabel (1862), maintains, in 
 opposition to my view, the Indian 
 origin of the fables common to India 
 and Greece, and suggests an ancient 
 Assyrian channel of communication. 
 His Inain argument for their Indian 
 origin is derived from the circum- 
 stance that the relation existing in 
 Greek fable between the fox and 
 the lion has no real basis in the na- 
 ture of the two animals, whereas 
 the jackal does, as a matter of 
 fact, stand to the lion in the rela- 
 tion portrayed in Indian fable. But 
 are jackals, then, only found in In- 
 dia, and not also in countries inha- 
 bited by Semitic peoples? And is 
 not the Greek animal-fable precisely 
 
213 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 of fables extant is the Pancha-tantra. The original text 
 of this work has, it is true, undergone great alteration and 
 expansion, and cannot now be restored with certainty; 
 but its existence in the sixth century a.d. is an ascertained 
 fact, as it was then, by command of the celebrated Sas- 
 sanian king Niishirvan (reg. 531-579), translated into 
 Pahlavi. From this translation, as is well known, sub- 
 sequent versions into almost all the languages of Asia 
 Minor and Europe have been derived.^^ The recension 
 of the extant text seems to have taken place in the 
 Dekhan ; ^^ while the epitome of it known as the Hito- 
 j)adeia was probably drawn up at Palibothra, on the 
 Ganges. The form of the Hindii collections of fables is 
 a peculiar one, and is therefore everywhere easily recog- 
 nisable, the leading incident which is narrated invariably 
 forming a framework within which stories of the most 
 diverse description are set * — Allied to the fables are the 
 
 a Semitic growth ? That the Indians 
 should turn the fox of the Greek 
 fable back again into the jackal 
 necessarily followed from the very 
 nature of the case. The actual state 
 of things, namely, that the jackal 
 prowls about after the lion, had in- 
 deed early attracted their attention ; 
 see, e.g. , Rik, x. 28. 4 ; but there is 
 no evidence at all that in the older 
 period the knowledge was turned to 
 the use to which it is put in the fable, 
 the only characteristics mentioned 
 o£ the jackal being its howling, its 
 devouring of carrion, and its enmity 
 to the dog. (In Satap., xii. 5. 2. Si 
 the jackal is, it is true, associated 
 with the word vidagdha, and this is 
 certainly noteworthy ; but here the 
 term simply signifies ' burnt ' or 
 'putrid.') Keller's views as to the 
 high antiquity of the Indian authors 
 he cites are unfounded. 
 
 ^^^ See on this Benfey's transla- 
 tion (1859) of the Pailcha-tautra, 
 which follows Kosegarten's edition 
 of the text {1848). Here there is a 
 full exposition of the whole subject 
 of the later diffusion of the mate- 
 rials of Indian fable throughout the 
 Wfst. Kielhorn and Biihler have 
 published a new edition o£ the text 
 
 in the Bombay Sanskrit Series (l868 
 ff.). 
 
 223 From Benfey's researches, it 
 appears that, in this recension, the 
 original text, which presumably 
 rested on a Buddhistic basis, under- 
 went very important changes, so 
 that, curiously enough, a German 
 translation made in the last quarter 
 of the fifteenth century from a 
 Latin rendering, which in its turn 
 was based upon a Hebrew version, 
 represents the ancient text more 
 faithfully than its existing Sanskrit 
 form does. Of this, for the rest, two 
 or more other recensions are extant ; 
 see 7. Sir., ii. 166. For the 14th 
 chap, of the Kalila wa Dimua, no 
 Indian original had been known to 
 exist ; but quite recently a Tibetan 
 translation of this original has been 
 discovered by Anton Schiefner ; see 
 his Bharatae Responsa, St. Peters- 
 burg, 1875. On a newly discovered 
 ancient Syriac translation of the 
 groundwork of the Paftcha-tantra, 
 made, it is supposed, either from the 
 Pahlavi or from the Sanskrit itsel f, 
 see Benfey in the Augshurger Ally. 
 Zeit. for July 12, 1871. 
 
 * Precisely the same thing takes 
 place in the Malu-t-Bhilrata also. 
 
FAIRY TALES, ETC.— HISTORY, GEOGRAPHY. 213 
 
 Fairy Tales and Eomances,^^ in -wMch the luxuriant 
 fancy of the Hindus has in the most wonderful degree put 
 forth all its peculiar grace and charm. These too share 
 with the fables the characteristic form of setting just re- 
 ferred to, and thereby, as well as by numerous points of 
 detail, they are sufficiently marked out as the original 
 source of most of the Arabian, Persian, and Western fairy 
 tales and stories; although, in the meantime, very few 
 of the corresponding Indian texts themselves can be 
 pointed out. 
 
 As regards the last branch of Indian poetry, namely. 
 Geography and History, it is characteristic enough that the 
 latter can only fittingly be considered as a branch of poetry ; 
 and that not merely on account of its form — for the poetic 
 form belongs to science also — but on account of its subject- 
 matter as well, and the method in which this is handled. 
 "We might perhaps have introduced it as a division of the 
 epic poetry ; but it is preferable to keep the two distinct, 
 since the works of the class now in question studiously 
 avoid all matter of a purely mythical description. We 
 have already remarked that the old Puranas contained 
 historical portions, which, in the existing Puranas, are con- 
 fined to the mere nomenclature of dynasties and kings; 
 and that here they clash violently, not only with one 
 another, but with chronology generaUy. We meet with 
 the same discrepancies in all works of the class we are 
 now considering, and especially in its leading representa- 
 tive, Kalhana's Rdja-taramgini, or history of Kashmir, 
 which belongs to the twelfth century a.d. Here, it is 
 
 "" Here, before all, is to be Kashmir, pub. in 7. iS<. , xiv. 402 ff. ) 
 
 mentioned SomadeTa's Kathd-sarit- he lived under king Ananta (1028- 
 
 sdj'ara, of the twelfth century, edited 1080), and wrote 1020-1040). — The 
 
 by Herm. Brockhaus (1839-66). Of Scda-hwrndra-chwrita of Dandin, be- 
 
 the Vrihat-lcathd of Gu^ddhya, be- longing to about the sixth century, 
 
 longing to about the sixth century — was edited by Wilson in 1846, and by 
 
 a work which is supposed to have Buhlerin 1873: Subandhu's Fiiscroa- 
 
 been written in the Paiddchi hhdslid, dattd (seventh century ?) was edited 
 
 and which is the basis of the work by Hall, with an excellent critical in- 
 
 of SoDiadeva,- — a recast by Kshe- troduction, in 1859 {Bibl. Ind.) : 
 
 maipkara has recently been dis- Buna's Kddamhari, of about the 
 
 covered by Burnell and Biihler, see same date, appeared at Calcutta in 
 
 Ind. Antiq., i. 302 ff. (Kshemam- 1850. For an account of these last 
 
 kara is also called Kshemendra ; three works see my I. Sir., i. 308- 
 
 according to Biihler (letter from 3S6. 
 
214 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 true, we have to do with something more than mere bald 
 data ; but then, as a set-off to this, we have also to do 
 with a poet, one who is more poet than historian, and who, 
 for the rest, appeals to a host of predecessors. It is only 
 where the authors of these works treat of contemporary 
 subjects that theit statements possess a decided value; 
 though, of course, precisely with respect to these, their judg- 
 ment is in the highest degree biassed. But exceptions like- 
 wise appear to exist, and in particular, in some princely 
 houses, family records, kept by the domestic priests, appear 
 to have been preserved, which, in the main,* seem to be 
 passably trustworthy .^^^ — As for Geography, we repeatedly 
 
 * Only the family pedigree must 
 not enter into the question, for these 
 genealogical tables go back almost 
 regularly to the heroic families of 
 the epic. 
 
 ^^ Certain statements in the astro- 
 logical treatise Qdrgi Samhitd, cap. 
 Tuga Purdna, in which the relations 
 of the Tavanas with India are 
 touched upon (see Kern, Pref. to 
 Brihat-Saiphiti, p. 33 ff.), appear to 
 have a real historical significance. 
 Bitna's Sarsha-charrita, too, seems 
 to be a work embodying some good 
 jntormation ; see Hall, Pref. to the 
 VisaTa-dattS, p. 12 ff. (1859). And 
 the same remark applies to the 
 Tikrarruimha-charita by Bilhana of 
 Kashmir, in 18 mrgas, composed 
 about A.D. 1085, just edited with 
 a very valuable introduction by 
 Btthler. This work supplies most 
 important and authentic informa- 
 tion, not only regarding the poet's 
 native country, and the chief cities 
 of India visited by him in the course 
 of prolonged travels, but also as to 
 the history of the Chdlukya dynasty, 
 whose then representative, Tribhu- 
 vana-malla, the work is intended to 
 exalt. In Buhler's opinion, we may 
 hope for some further accession to 
 our historical knowledge from the 
 still existing libraries of the Jainaa, 
 and, I might add, from their special 
 literature also, which is peculiarly 
 rich in legendary works (charUra). 
 The Satrmnjaya-mdMtmya of Dha- 
 
 ne^ara, in 14 sargae, composed in 
 Valabhi, under king Sil^ditya, at 
 the end of the sixth century, yields, 
 it is true, but scant historical ma- 
 terial, and consists for the most part 
 merely of popular tales and legends ; 
 see my paper on it (1858), p. 12 ff. 
 (Biihler, I. c, p. 18, places this work 
 as late as the thirteenth century ; 
 similarly, Lassen, /. AK., iv. 761, 
 but see my Essay on the Bhagavati, 
 i. 369.) Still, a great variety 
 of information has been preserved 
 by the Jainas, which deserves 
 attention ; for example, respecting 
 the ancient kings Yikram^ka and 
 S^liv^hana, though, to be sure, 
 they, too, have become almost wholly 
 mythical figures. The Vira-charUra 
 of Ananta, lately analysed by H. 
 Jacob! in /. St., xiv. 97 ff., describes 
 the feuds between the descendants 
 of these two kings; introducing a 
 third legendary personage, S^idraka, 
 who, aided by the Mdlava king, the 
 son of YikramiCrka, succeds in oust- 
 ing the son of Silivihana from Pra- 
 tishth£ina. It is written in a fresh 
 and graphic style, but, to all ap- 
 pearance, it has only a very slight 
 really historical nucleus ; indeed, it 
 expressly claims to be an imitation 
 of the lUmSyaiia ! The Sinhdsana- 
 dvdtnnsikd, too, a work extant in 
 several recensions, of which one, 
 the Tikrama-chariira (see above, 
 p . 200), is attributed to Vavaruchi, 
 i> almost solely, as the Vetdla-pan- 
 
INSCRIPTIONS AND GRANTS. 
 
 2rs 
 
 find, in the various Puranas, jejune enumerations of moun- 
 tains, rivers, peoples, and the like.^^* But modern works, 
 also, upon this subject are quoted: these, however, are 
 known only by name. — A leading source, besides, for 
 history and geography, is supplied by the exceediugly 
 numerous inscriptions and grants,* which, indeed, being 
 often of very considerable extent, might almost pass as a 
 special branch of the literature. They are usually drawn 
 up in prose, though mostly with an admixture of verse. 
 Of coins the number is comparatively smaR; yet they 
 have furnished surprisingly rich information regarding a 
 period previously quite unknown in its details, the period 
 of the Grecian kings of Bactria.^^^ 
 
 From this general view of Sanskrit poetry, we now 
 turn to the second division of Sanskrit literature, to the 
 works of Science and Art. 
 
 cJiavinseUi is exclusively, made up of 
 matter of the fairy-tale description. 
 The stories in the Bhoja-prabandha 
 of king Bhoja and his court of 
 poets, are mere fanciful inventions. 
 — Biihler, in his letter from Kash- 
 mir (/. St., xiv. 404, 405), states that 
 he has now also discovered the 
 NUa-Tiuita which was used by Eal- 
 bana, as also the Taramginis of 
 Kshemendra and Hel&dja' ; for the 
 Rija-taramginI itself there is thus 
 the prospect of important correc- 
 tions. 
 
 ^^ Of special interest, in this re- 
 gard, are the sections styled KHrma- 
 vibhdga in the astrological texts ; 
 see Kern, Pref. to Brih. Scmk., p. 
 32, and in /. St., x. 209 ff. Cun- 
 ningham's otherwise most merito- 
 rious work, Aneient Oeography of 
 India (1871), has unfortunately 
 taken no account of these. 
 
 * On metal plates, first men- 
 
 tioned in Y^jnavalkya's law-book 
 and in the Paftcha-tantra : in Manu's 
 Code they are not yet known. [See 
 the special accounts given of these 
 inBurnell's Elem. ofS. Ind. Palceog., 
 p. 63 £f.] 
 
 '^ Wilson's Ariana Antiqta (1841 ) 
 and Lassen's Indische Alterthums- 
 hinde (1847-61) still form the chief 
 mine of information and basis of 
 research in the field of Indian his- 
 tory. In the department of Nu- 
 mismatics and Inscriptions, Burgess, 
 Burnell, Cunningham, Dowson, Eg- 
 geling, Fergusson, Edw. Thomas, 
 Vaux, Bhandarkar, and Edjendra 
 L^Ia Mitra have of late done emi- 
 nent service. In connection with 
 the so-called cave-inscriptions, the 
 names of Bhiiu DSyi, Bird, Steven- 
 son, E. W. and A. A. West, Wes- 
 tergaard, and J. Wilson, amongst 
 others, may -be mentioned. 
 
2 1 6 SANSKRIT LITER A TURE. 
 
 "We give the precedence to the Science of Language,^^ 
 and take Grammar first. 
 
 We have already had frequent occasion to allude to the 
 early heginnings and gradual development of grammatical 
 science. It grew up in connection with the study and 
 recitation of the Vedic texts ; and those works which were 
 specially devoted to it, protected by the sacredness of their 
 subject, have, in part, survived. But, on the other hand, 
 we have no records of the earlier stages of that gram- 
 matical study which was directed to and embraced the 
 entire range of the language ;* and we pass at once into 
 the magnificent edifice which bears the name of Panini as 
 its architect, and which justly commands the wonder and 
 admiration of every one who enters.f Panini's grammar 
 is distinguished above aU similar works of other countries, 
 partly by its thoroughly exhaustive investigation of the 
 roots of the language, and the formation of words ; partly 
 by its sharp precision of expression, which indicates with 
 an enigmatical succinctness whether forms come under the 
 same or different rules. This is rendered possible by the 
 employment of an algebraic terminology of arbitrary con- 
 trivance, the several parts of which stand to each other in 
 the closest harmony, and which, by the very fact of its 
 sufficing for all the phenomena which the language pre- 
 sents, bespeaks at once the marvellous ingenuity of its 
 inventor, and his profound penetration of the entire ma- 
 terial of the language. It is not, indeed, to be assumed 
 that Panini was altogether the inventor of this method ; 
 for, in the first place, he directly presupposes, for example, 
 a collection of primary affixes (Un-ddi) ; and, in the second 
 place, for various grammatical elements there occur in his 
 work two sets of technical terms, the one of which is 
 peculiar to himself, while the other, as testified by his 
 
 -™ The general assertion in the * Only in Ydska's Nirukti are 
 
 MahiibhiUhya to i. I. i {. 44a {chhan- beginnings of the kind preserved ; 
 
 dovat sitrdi^i WiavaiUi) which as- yet here etymology and the investi- 
 
 cribes Vedic usage to Stitras in gation of roots and of the formation 
 
 general, is explained by Kaiyata in of words are still in a very crude 
 
 the sense that, not the vaiieshiia- stage. 
 
 stUrdni, for example, but only the + S-g-, of PJre Pons so long ago 
 
 vydkarana-xAtrdni are here meant, aa l']^'i,\n Vae Letires£difia-iiUs, 26. 
 
 since these latter belong to the Veda 224 (I'aris). 
 as aiiga; see /. St., xiii. 453. 
 
PANINI'S GRAMMAR. 217 
 
 commentators, is taken from the Eastern grammarians* 
 But at any rate, it seems to have heen he who generalised 
 the method, and extended it to the entire stock of the 
 language. Of those of his predecessors whom he men- 
 tions directly by name, and whose names recur in part in 
 Yaska's Nirukti, the Prati^akhya-Siitras, or the Aranyakas, 
 some may possibly have worked before him in this field ; 
 in particular, Sakatayana perhaps, whose grammar is sup- 
 posed (Wilson, Mack. Coll., i. 160) to be stiU in existence, 
 although nothing definite is known about it.^^^ 
 
 The question now arises. When did Panini live ? Boht- 
 lingk, to whom we owe an excellent edition of the gram- 
 mar, has attempted to fix his date for the middle of the 
 fourth century B.C., but the attempt seems to be a failure. 
 Of the reasons adduced, only one has any approach to 
 plausibility, which is to the effect that in the Katha-sarit- 
 sagara, a collection of popular tales belonging to the 
 twelfth century, Panini is stated to have been the disciple 
 of one Varsha, who lived at Pataliputra in the reign of 
 Nanda, the father of Chandragupta {SavSpoKvirro^). But 
 not only is the authority of such a work extremely ques- 
 tionable in reference to a period fifteen centuries earlier ; 
 the assertion is, besides, directly contradicted, both as to 
 time and place, by a statement of the Buddhist Hiuan 
 Thsang, who travelled through India in the first half of 
 the seventh century. Por Hiuan Thsang, as reported by 
 Eeinaud {M4m. sur I'Inde, p. 88), speaks of a double exist- 
 ence of Panini, the earlier one belonging to mythical times, 
 while the second is put by him 500 years after Buddha's 
 
 * See Bohtlingk in the Introduc- himself a Jaina, in his introduction 
 
 tion to his Pdnini, p. xii., and in describes ^dkatdj'ana also as such — 
 
 Iris tract, Ueber den Accent im San- namely, as ' mahd-iramana-samghd- 
 
 lirit, p. 64. dhipati ;' see also /. St., xiii. 396, 
 
 '^ In Benfey's Orient und Occi- 397. In Burnell's opinion, Vani5a- 
 
 rfcn*, ii. 691-706 (1863), and iii. 181, BriShm., p. xli., many of ^akatil- 
 
 182 (1864), 6. Biihler has given an yana's rules are, on the contrary, 
 
 account of a commentary {chintd- based upon Panini, or even on the 
 
 mani-vritti) on the Sabddnvddsana of Vdrttikas, nay, even on the further 
 
 Siikatstyana, according to which (p. interpretations in the Mahtlbhilshya. 
 
 703) Pdnini's work irould appear to Might not these contradictions be 
 
 be simply "an improved, completed, explained by supposing that the ex- 
 
 and in part remodelled edition" isting form of the work combines 
 
 of that of SKkatdyana. The author both old and new constituents ? 
 of this commentary, Yakshavarman, 
 
2lS 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 death, i.e., lOO years later than the reign of king Kanishka, 
 •who lived, as he says, 400 years after Buddha* As Kani- 
 shka is proved by coias to hav6 reigned down to a.d. 40 
 (Lassen, /. AK., ii. 413), Panini, accordiag to this, woidd 
 have to be placed not earlier than a.d. 140. A statement so 
 precise, obtained by Hiuan Thsang on the spot, can hardly 
 be a mere invention ; while no significance need be attached 
 to the earlier mythical existence, nor to the circumstance 
 that he makes Panini a Buddhist.^^ As Phonini's birth- 
 place he mentions Pholotoulo, some six miles north-west of 
 the Indus, and this agrees with the name ' ^alaturiya,' the 
 formation of which is explained by Panini, and which in 
 later writings is an epithet applied to the grammarian 
 himself ; ' f^alatura,' the basis of the name, being phone- 
 tically identical + with the Chinese ' Pholotoulo.' That 
 Panini belonged to precisely this north-western district of 
 
 * The text of Hiuan Thsang is 
 unfortunately not yet accessible : it 
 seems to be much more important 
 than the description of Fa Hian'a 
 travels, and to enter considerably 
 more into detail. [This blank has 
 since been filled up by Stan. Jalien's 
 translation of the biography and 
 memoirs of Hiuan Thsang (1857 ff., 
 3 vols.). From this it now appears 
 that the above statement, communi- 
 cated from the text by Eeiuaud, is 
 not quite exact. The real existence 
 of Pinini is not there placed 500 
 years after Buddha at all : all that 
 is said is, that at that date there 
 still existed in his birthplace a 
 statue erected in his honour (see 
 Siyuki, i. 127) ; whereas he himself 
 passed as belonging ' dans une haute 
 antiquity'] 
 
 23» The true state of the case is, 
 rather, that with regard to F^ini's 
 date there is no direct statement at 
 all : a legend merely is communi- 
 cated of a Buddhist missionary who 
 had taken part in the council under 
 king Kanishka, and who came from 
 it to P^uinl's birthplace. Here he 
 intimated to a Brahman, whom he 
 found chastising his son during a 
 lesson in grammar, that the youth 
 was Pslniai himself, who, for hia 
 
 heretical tendencies in his former 
 birth, had not yet attained emanci- 
 pation, and had now been born again 
 as his son ; see /. St., v. 4- 
 
 t The commentators make S^ld- 
 tura the residence of Pdnini's an- 
 cestors, and this is, in fact, the sense 
 in which Panini's rule is to be taken. 
 But the Chinese traveller, who ob- 
 tained his information on the spot, 
 is assuredly a better authority, especi- 
 ally as it has to be remarked that 
 the rule in question (iv. 3. 94), ac- 
 cording to the Calcutta scholiasts, is 
 not explained in the Bhdshya, and 
 may possibly, therefore, not be Pdni- 
 ni's at all, but posterior to the time 
 of Patanyali. [The name Ssiittnriya 
 does not, in fact, occur in the Bh^hya ; 
 but, on the other hand, Panini is there 
 styled Diiksbipntra, and the family 
 of the Dikshis belonged to the VS- 
 hlkas in the North- West ; see /. St. , 
 ^"- 39S. 367- The name Ssilanki 
 also, which is bestowed on him in 
 later writings, and which actually 
 occurs in the Bh&hya, though it 
 does not clearly appear that he is 
 meant by it, leads us to the VSihlkas; 
 see/.jS(.,xiii. 395,375, 429. Hiuan 
 Thsang expressly describes PSnini 
 as belonging to the Gandh^ras 
 (rdj/Sa/joi).] 
 
DATE OF PANINI. 219 
 
 India, rather than to the east, results pretty plainly from 
 the geographical data contained in his work;* stiU he 
 refers often enough to the eastern parts of India as well, 
 and, though born ia the former district, he may perhaps 
 have settled subsequently in the latter. Of the two re- 
 maining arguments by means of which BohtHngk seeks to 
 determine Panini's date, the one, based on the^posteriority 
 of Amara-sinha, " who himself lived towards the middle 
 of the first century B.C.," falls to the ground when the 
 utter nullity of this latter assumption is exposed. The 
 other is drawn from the Eaja-taramgini, a rather doubtful 
 source, belonging to the same period as the Katha-sarit- 
 sagara, and rests, moreover, upon a confusion of the 
 Northern and Southern Buddhist eras, consequently upon 
 a very insecure foundation. In that work it is related 
 that the Mahabhashya, or great commentary on Panini, 
 which is ascribed to Patamjali, was, by the command of 
 king Abhimanyu, introduced into his dominions by 
 Chandra, who had himself composed a grammar. Now 
 the Northern Buddhists agree in stating that Kanishka, 
 the immediate predecessor of Abhimanyu, lived 400 years 
 after Buddha's death. If, therefore, with the Southern 
 Buddhists, we place this event in the year B.C. 544, then, 
 of course, the date to be assigned to Kanishka would be 
 B.C. 144, and to Abhimanyu B.C. 120, or thereabouts.t 
 But upon the evidence of coins, which are at all events 
 a sure authority,! Kanishka (Kanerki) reigned until a.d. 
 40 (Lassen, /. AK., u. 413); and Abhimanyu himself 
 therefore must have reigned 160 years later than the 
 date derived from the previous supposition — according to 
 Lassen {I. c), tiU a.d. 65. Consequently, even admitting 
 Bohtlingk's further reasoning, we should still have to fix 
 Panini's date, not for B.C. 350 or thereabouts, as his result 
 gives, but 160 years later at any rate. But in view of 
 
 * The circumstance that the only 21 (1872), also /. St., xiii. 302, 
 
 two works containing legends con- 366.] 
 
 cerning him and the commentary f As Bohtlingk, op. cit., p. xvii., 
 
 upon his grammar-^the Kathd-sarit- xviii., supposes; see also Beinaud, 
 
 ssigara and the Eiya-taramgini — Mem. sur I'lnde, p. 79. 
 
 were both written in Kashmir, also J Of these Bohtlingk could not 
 
 tells in favour of this view. [On avail himself, as they only came to 
 
 the geographical data in Pdnini, our knowledge some years after his 
 
 Bee Bha^darkar in Ind. Antiq., i., edition of Pi^ini appeared. 
 
220 SANSKRIT LITER A TURE. 
 
 Hiuan Thsang's assertion, uo credit whatever need at pre- 
 sent be attached to the statement in the Eaja-taramgini. 
 If Panini did not really flourish until loo years after 
 Kanishka, i.e., A.D. 140,^^ it is self-evident that the com- 
 mentary upon his work cannot have been in existence, 
 and stOl less have been introduced into Kashmir, under 
 Abhimanyu, Kanishka's immediate successor ! — But, apart 
 altogether from the foregoing considerations, we have, in 
 Panini's work itself, a very weighty argument which goes 
 to show that the data to be assigned to him can by no 
 means be so early as BohtUngk supposes (about B.C. 350). 
 For in it Panini once mentions the Yavanas, i.e., 'Idove?, 
 Greeks,* and explains the formation of the word yavan&ni 
 
 ^' But no such inference is de- 
 ducible from Hiuan Thsang's ac- 
 count, now that Tre are in possession 
 of its exact tenor (see note 230 
 above) : the statement of the RiEja- 
 taramgini is thus in no way im- 
 pnsjned by it. 
 
 * Lassen (7. AK., i. 729) asserts 
 that the most ancient meaning 
 of the word yavana was probably 
 'Arabia,' because incense, which 
 came from Arabia, was termed yir 
 vana; but this assertion is distinctly 
 erroneous. So far as we know at 
 present, this latter term first occurs 
 in the Amara-kosha, and there along 
 with turushlea, which can scarcely be 
 a very ancient word. It may con- 
 sequently either date from the time 
 of the commercial intercourse of the 
 Indians with Arabia shortly before 
 Muhammad, or even with the Mu- 
 hammadan Arabs ; or else — like 
 yavaneshta, 'tin' [Hemach., IQ41, 
 according to Bohtlingk-Kieu, ' lead,' 
 not 'tia'ljand yavana-priya, 'pep- 
 per,' the chief articles of traffic with 
 the Greeks of Alexandria — it may 
 possibly have been named, not from 
 the Arabs, but from the Greeks, who 
 brought incense as well as tin and 
 pepper from India (Lassen, 7. AK., 
 286 n.) ! Wherever we find the 
 Yavanas mentioned in the epic, or 
 other similar ancient writings, only 
 the Greeks can be meant. [The 
 almost constant association of them 
 
 with the Kambojas, ^akas, &:c., ia 
 conclusive as to this ; see I. Str., ii. 
 321 ; 7. St., xiii. 371. The name 
 Yavana was then in course of time 
 transferred to the political successors 
 of the Greeks in the empire of 
 Western India, that is, to the Indo- 
 Scythians themselves, to the Per- 
 sians (F^rasikas, whose women, for 
 example, are termed Yavanis by 
 Kdlid^a in Saghuv., iv. 61), and, 
 lastly, to the Arabs or Moslems ; see 
 7. St., xiii. 308. Recently, it is true, 
 Ejtjendra L^la Mitra, in the Jourrt. 
 As. Soc. Beng., 1874, p. 246 ff., has 
 pronounced against the view that 
 the Greeks were originally meant by 
 the Yavanas ; but his arguments are 
 in great part of a very curious kind. 
 Of. further on this point my letter 
 in the Ind. Antiq., iv. 244 ff. (1875), 
 where, in particular, I point out that 
 the name Yavana first became popu- 
 larised in India through Alexander, 
 Le., through his Persian interpreters, 
 although it may possibly have been 
 known previously through the me- 
 dium of the Indian auxiliaries who 
 eervedinthe army of Darius.] — There 
 is a remarkable legend in the Pu- 
 r^as and the twelfth book of the 
 Mahd - BhSrata, of the fight of 
 Krishna with K41a- Yavana, 'the 
 Black Yavana,' so called, it would 
 appear, in contradistinction to the 
 (White) Yavanas? Ought we here 
 to understand African or dark Sem- 
 
DATE OF PANINI—' YAVANAXL' 
 
 221 
 
 — to which, according to the Vdrttika, the word Upi, 
 ' writing/ must be supplied, and which therefore signifies 
 'the writing of the Yavanas.'^ — In the Pancha-tantra, 
 Panini is said to hare been killed hy a lion ; but, inde- 
 pendently of the question whether the pai-ticular verse 
 containing this allusion belongs to the original text or not, 
 no chronological inference can be drawn from it.^*^ 
 
 itic races that had come into colli- 
 sion with the Indians? At the 
 time of the Daia-kumfira, the name 
 KiJla-Yavana (as well as Yavana 
 itself) does, in point of fact, ex- 
 pressly designate a seafaring people 
 — supposed by Wilson to be the 
 Arabs. In the legend in the Fu- 
 rnas and the Mahd-Bbiirata, on the 
 contrary, no reference to the sea 
 is traceable ; and Wilson therefore 
 (Vishnu-Pur., 565, 566) refers it to 
 the Greeks, that is, those. of Bactria. 
 This view is perhaps confirmed by 
 the circumstance that this ££la- 
 Tavana is associated with a Gdrgya ; 
 since it is to Garga, at least, who 
 uniformly appears as one of the 
 earliest Indian astronomers, that a 
 verse is ascribed, in which the Ya- 
 vanas (here unquestionably the 
 Greeks) are highly extolled. Pos- 
 sibly this is the very reason why 
 Gdrgya is here associated with Ksila- 
 Yavana. 
 
 ^^^ For the different explanations 
 that have been attempted of this 
 word, see /. St., v. 5-8, 17 ff. ; 
 Burnell, Mem. of S. Ind. Pal., p. 7, 
 93: the latter regards it as "not 
 unlikely that lipi has been introduced 
 into Indian from the Persian dipL" 
 Benfey also, in his Geschichte der 
 Sjarachwissenschqft, p. 48 (1869), 
 understands by Yavandni 'Greek 
 writing ; ' but he places the comple- 
 tion of Panini's work as early as E. c. 
 320. In that case, he thinks, FiSnini 
 "had already had theopportunity dur- 
 ing six years of becoming acquainted 
 with Greek writing in his own im- 
 mediate neighbourhood without in- 
 terruption, Alexander having, as is 
 well known, established satrapies in 
 India itself and in the parts adjoin- 
 
 ing" — in the vicinity of the Indus, 
 namely, near which Psinini's birth- 
 place was. But to me it is very 
 doubtful indeed that a space so short 
 as six years should have sufficed to 
 give rise to the employment by the 
 Indians of a special term and affix 
 to denote Greek writing — (which 
 surely in the first years after Alex- 
 ander's invasion can hardly have 
 attracted their attention in so very 
 prominent away!) — so that the mere 
 expression ' the Greek ' directly 
 signified ' the writing of the Greeks!^' 
 and Piinini found himself obliged to 
 explain the formation of the term in 
 a special rule. " The expression 
 could ■ only have become so very 
 familiar through prolonged and fre- 
 quent use — a thing conceivable and 
 natural in P^ni's native district, 
 in those provinces of North- Western 
 India which were so long occupied 
 by the Greeks. But this of course 
 presupposes that a lengthened period 
 had intervened since the time of 
 Alexander." — /. St., iv. 89 (1857). 
 
 ''^^ Since the above was written 
 the question of Pdnini's date has 
 been frequently discussed. Max 
 Miiller first of all urged^ and rightlj", 
 the real import of Hiuan Thsang's 
 account, as opposed to my argument. 
 Apart from this,however,I still firmly 
 adhere to the reasoning in the text ; 
 see /. St., iv. 87, v. 2 ff. To the 
 vague external testimony we need 
 hardly attach much importance. 
 Fdnini's vocabulary itself (cf. ya- 
 randni) can alone yield us certain 
 information. And it was upon this 
 path that Goldstiicker proceeded in 
 his Panini, his place in Sanskrit 
 Literature (September 1861) — a 
 work distinguished in an eminent 
 
222 
 
 SA NSKRIT LITER A TURE. 
 
 Panini's work lias continued to be tlie basis of gramma- 
 tical research and the standard of usage in the language 
 down even to the present time. Owing to its frequent 
 obscurity it was early commented upon, and — a circum- 
 stance to which there is no parallel elsewhere in the lite- 
 rature — some of these earliest interpretations have come- 
 down to us. At their head stand the ParibhAsh&s, or 
 explanations of single rules, by unknown authors ; next 
 come the Vdrttikas (from vritti, ' explanation ') of Katya- 
 yana ; * and after these the Mahdihdshya of Patamjali. 
 With regard to the date of Katyayana, the statement of 
 Hiuan Thsang, to the effect that 300 years after Buddha's 
 death, i.e., in B.C. 240,t " le doctev/r Kia to yan na" lived at 
 Tamasavana in the Panjab, is by Bohtlmgk referred to 
 this Katyayana ; but when we remember that the same 
 traveller assigns to Panini's second existence a date so late 
 as 500 years after Buddha, such a reference of course 
 becomes highly precarious. Besides, the statement is in. 
 
 degree by truly profound investiga- 
 tion of this aspect of the question as 
 well as of the literature immediately 
 bearing upon it. The conclusion he 
 aiTives at is that Pitnini is older 
 than Buddha, than the Frdtisdkhyas, 
 than all the Vedic texts we possess, 
 excepting the three Saqihit^ of the 
 Rik, Siman, and Black Yajus — 
 older than any individual author in 
 whatever field, with the single ex- 
 ception of Y&ka (p. 243). In May 
 1861, before the separate publication 
 of this work, which had previously 
 (Nov. i860) appeared as the preface 
 to Goldstiicker's photo-lithographed 
 edition of the Mdnava-Kalpa-Stitra, 
 I endeavoured — and, as I believe, 
 successfully — in a detailed rejoinder 
 in I. St., V. 1-176, to rebut these 
 various deductions, point by point. 
 For the post-Buddhistic date of 
 Fdnini, compare in particular the 
 evidence adduced, pp. 136-142, 
 which is excellently supplemented 
 by Biihler's paper on ^ikatdyana 
 (1863, see note 229 above). To the 
 mention of the 'TavaniCni' has to 
 be added a peculiar circumstance 
 which Burnell has recently noticed 
 
 {Mem. S. Ind. Pal., p. 96) : The 
 denoting of numbers by the letters 
 of the alphabet in their order (i=2), 
 to which Goldstiicker (Pdnini, p. 53) 
 first drew attention, and which, ac- 
 cording to the Bh&hya, is peculiar 
 to F^ini, occurs in his work only, 
 and is "precisely similar to the 
 Greek and Semitic notation of 
 numerals by letters of the alphabet." 
 If, further, the Greek aceoants of 
 the confederation of the 'O^vdpdKai 
 and MaXXoC be correct ; if, that is to 
 say, their alliance first took place 
 through fear of Alexander, whereas 
 they had up till then lived, in con- 
 stant enmity, then in all probability 
 Api^ali, and d fortiori Pdnini also, 
 would have to be set down as subse- 
 quent to Alexander ; see /. St., xiii. 
 37Sn. 
 
 * Who there mentions several of 
 these Faribhdshfls. 
 
 + That is, if we adopt the chrono- 
 logy of the Southern Buddhists ; but, 
 rather, only B.C. 60, since Kanishka, 
 whose date, as we saw, is fixed by 
 coins for a.d. 40, is by Hiuan Thsang 
 placed 400 years after Buddha's 
 death. 
 
EARLY COMMENTARIES ON PAN INI. 223 
 
 itself an extremely indefinite one, tlie " docteur " in ques- 
 tion not being described as a grammarian at all, but simply 
 as a descendant of the Katya famUy.^^ Even admitting, 
 however, that the reference really is to him, it would still 
 be in conflict with the tradition — in itself, it is true, of no 
 particular authority — of the Katha-sarit-sagara, which not 
 only represents Katyayana as the contemporary of Panini, 
 but identifies him with Vararuchi, a minister of King 
 Nanda, the father of Chandragupta (SavSpoKvirTos;), ac- 
 cording to which, of course, he must have flourished about 
 B.C. 350. As regards the age of the Mahabhashya,^^^ we 
 have seen that the assertion of the Eaja-taramgini as to 
 its introduction into Kashmir in the reign of Abhimanyu, 
 the successor of Kanishka, i.e., between a.d. 40 and 65, is, 
 for the reasons above assigned, in the meantime discre- 
 dited.^^ For the present, therefore, we are without infor- 
 mation as to the date of those interpretations, just as we 
 are regarding the date of Panini himself. But when once 
 they are themselves in our hands, it wiU certainly be pos- 
 sible to gather from their contents, by means of the great 
 number of words they contain, a tolerably clear image of 
 the time when they originated,^^ in the same way as we 
 
 ^* It is this only that has weight ; to understand Patamjali himself ; 
 
 whereas no importance whatever is and the same applies to the name 
 
 to be attached, as we have already Gonikflputra ; see on this /. St., v. 
 
 seen (note 230), to the second exist- 155, xiii. 316, 323, 403. 
 
 ence of Pdnini. On the various "'^ By no means ; see note 231. 
 
 Kdtyas, Ksitydyanas, at the time of ''' Onthebasisof thelithographed 
 
 the Bhsishya itself, for instance, see edition of the Mahjlbbilshya, pub- 
 
 /. 5{., xiii. 399. lished at Benares in 1872 by Bdjd- 
 
 235 The name Patamjali (we should rdma^trin and Bstla^ilstrin, with 
 
 expect Pat°.) is certainly somehow Kaiyata's commentary (of about the 
 
 connected with that of the Patam- seventh century (?), see /. St., v. 
 
 chala Kiipya of the land of the Ma- 167), I have attemptedin I. St., xiii. 
 
 dras, who appears in the YsCjnaval- 293-502, to sketch such an outline, 
 
 kiya-k^nda of the ^atap. Br. It The first section of the work, with 
 
 occurs again (see below, p. 237) as Kaiyata,'and Niigefe's gloss, belong- 
 
 the name of the author of the Toga- ing to the eighteenth century, was 
 
 Sdtras. Patamjali appears as name published so long ago as 1856 by 
 
 of one of the prior births of Buddha Ballantyne. A photo-lithographed 
 
 (No. 242, in Westergaard's Cata- issue of the entire Bbitshya, pre- 
 
 ?o^MS, p. 39). In the Pravarddhydy a, pared under Goldstttcker's supervi- 
 
 § 9 (Yajuh-Pari^.), the Patainjalis sion, at the expense of the Indian 
 
 are classed as belonging to the family Government; has recently appeared 
 
 of Vii5vdmitra. — According to later in London, in 3 vols. (vol. i., the 
 
 .iccounts, by Gonardiy.i, who is cited Blidshya ; vol. ii., Bhdshj-a with 
 
 four times in the Ehdsbya, we have Kaiyata's Comm. ; vol. iii., Ndgoji- 
 
224 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 can even now attempt, although only in broad outline, a 
 picture of the time of Panini* "With regard to the 
 latter, the condition of the text, in a critical point of view, 
 forms a main difficulty. A few of the Siitras found in it are 
 already notoriously acknowledged not to be Panini's ; and 
 there is the further peculiar circumstance, that, according 
 to the scholiasts of the Calcutta edition, fully a third of 
 the entire Sutras are not interpreted in the Mahabhashya 
 at aU.t The question then arises whether this is merely 
 
 bhatta's Schol. on Kaiyata). Gold- 
 stucker, in his Pdnini, p. 228 £f., 
 mainly upon the ground of the state- 
 ment in the Bh&hya " arunad Ta- 
 vanah Sdketam," which he connects 
 with an expedition of Menander 
 (B.C. 144-120) against Ayodhy^ 
 fixed the date of the composition of 
 the work for the period of this ex- 
 pedition, or specially for B.C. 140- 
 120. The objections urged by me 
 (/. St., V. 151) against this assump- 
 tion were, in the first place, mate- 
 rially weakened by a remark of 
 Kern's in his Preface to the Brih. 
 Samh. of Var^ha-Mihira, p. 37, ac- 
 cording to which the statement in 
 the same passage of the Bh^hya 
 "arunad Yavano Mddhyamikdn" is 
 not necessarily to be referred to the 
 Buddhistic school of this name, first 
 founded by NiSgiriuna, but may 
 possibly have reference to a tribe 
 called M^dhyamika, mentioned else- 
 where. In the next place, Bhandar- 
 kar, in the Ind. Antiq., i. 299 S., 
 ii. 59 S., attempted to prove that 
 Patamjali wrote the particular sec- 
 tion where he speaks in the above 
 terms of Menander (who is assumed, 
 on Goldstiicker's authority, to be 
 meant by *Yavana') between a,d. 
 144 and 142, seeing that be there at 
 the same time speaks of sacrifices as 
 $till being performed for Pushpa- 
 mitra (a.d. 178-142). In my reply 
 in /. St., xiii. 305 ff., I emphasised 
 these points : first, that the iden- 
 tity of the Tavana and Menander is 
 by no means made out ; next, that 
 it does not at all necessarily follow 
 from the passage in question that 
 
 Patamjali and Pushyamitra (this is 
 the correct form) were contempora- 
 ries ; and, lastly, that Pataznjali may 
 possibly have found these examples 
 already current, in which case they 
 cannot be used to prove anything 
 with regard to him, but only with 
 regard to his predecessors — ^it may 
 be, even Pdnini himself. And al- 
 though I am now disposed, in pre- 
 sence of Bhandarkar's further objec- 
 tions, to admit the historical bearing 
 of the statement referring to Push- 
 yamitra(but see Bohtlingk's opposite 
 view in Z. D. M. G., xxix. 183 ff.), 
 still, with respect to all the examples 
 here in question, I must lay special 
 stress on the possibility, just men- 
 tioned, that they may belong to the 
 classof m'&rdJidbhishikta illustrations 
 {ibid., p. 315). We must for the 
 present rest satisfied, therefore (p. 
 319), with placing the date of the 
 composition of the Bh&hya between 
 B.C. 140 and A.D. 60, — a result which, 
 considering the wretched state of the 
 chronology of Indian literature gene- 
 rally, is, despite its indefiniteness, 
 of no mean importance. 
 
 * See I. St., i. 141- 157. [The 
 beginning here made came to a stand- 
 still for want of the MahabhiSshya. ] 
 
 + In the case of some of these, it 
 is remarked that they are not ex- 
 plained Tiere, or else not separately. 
 Acquaintance with the Mabdbb^by a 
 itself will alone yield us satisfactory 
 information on this point. [From 
 Aufrecht's accounts in his CataK 
 Codd. Sansh Bihl. Bodl., it appeared 
 that of Pdnini's 3983 rules only 1720 
 are directly discussed ; and Gold- 
 
GANAPATHA, ETC. 225 
 
 because these particular Siitras are clear and intelligible of 
 themselves, or whether we may not also here and there 
 have to suppose cases where the Siitras did not yet form 
 part of the text at the time when this commentary was 
 composed. The so-caUed ganas, or lists of words which 
 follow one and the same rule, and of which, uniformly, 
 only the initial word is cited in the text itself, are for the 
 present wholly without critical authenticity, and carry no 
 weight, therefore, in reference to Panini's time. Some such 
 lists must, of course, have been drawn up by Panini ; but 
 whether those now extant are the same is very problema- 
 tical : indeed, to some extent it is simply impossible that 
 they can be so. Nay, such of them even as chance to be 
 specified singly in the Mahabhashya can, strictly speaking, 
 prove nothing save for the time of this work itself.* ' Here, 
 too, another word of caution is necessary, — one which 
 ought, indeed, to be superfluous, but unfortunately is not, 
 as experience shows,— namely, that care must be taken 
 not to attribute to words and examples occurring in the 
 scholia, composed so recently as fifty years ago, of the 
 Calcutta edition of Panini, any validity in reference to the 
 time of Panini himself. No doubt such examples are 
 usually derived from the Mahabhashya; but so long as 
 this is not actually proved to be the case, we are not at 
 liberty at once to assume it ; and besides, even when it is 
 clear that they are actually borrowed from the Maha- 
 bhashya, they are good only for the time of this work 
 itself, but not for that of Panini. ^^ 
 
 stucker then showed that the Bhi- Bhilshya has itself a special name 
 
 shya is not so much a commentary for these, such examples being 
 
 on Pdnini as rather a defence of him styled mUrdhdhhishikta ; see /. St., 
 
 against the unjust attacks of Kjltyd- xiii. 315. Unfortunately, however, 
 
 yana, the author of the vdrttikas; we have not the slightest clue (/.jS(r., 
 
 see/. jS«., xiii. 297 fF.]. ii. 167) to enable us to decide, in 
 
 * See /. St., i. 142, 143, 151. [xiii. individual instances, whether an ex- 
 
 298, 302, 329]. ample belongs to this class of murdh. 
 
 "■'^^ This is not quite strictly to the or not. — On the other hand — as re- 
 purpose. Max MiiUer was the first to suits not only from the data in the 
 point out that Pdnini's Sutras were Riija-taramgini, but also, in parti- 
 evidently from the beginning ac- cular, from the statements at the 
 companied by a definite interpreta- closeof the second book of Hari'eVil- 
 tion, whether oral or written, and kyapadlya, which were first cited by 
 that a considerable proportion of the Goldstiicker, and have lately been 
 examples in the Bhilshya must have published in a corrected form by 
 come from this source; nay, the Kielhorninthe/nii. jlni!?., iii. 2S5- 
 
 P 
 
226 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 In addition to Panini's system, there grew up in course 
 of time several other grammatical systems, having their 
 own peculiar terminology ; and grammatical literature in 
 general attained to a most remarkably rich and extensive 
 development.^^ The Tibetan Tandjur likewise embraces 
 
 2S7 — ^the Bhfehya has undergone 
 manifold vicissitudes of fortune, has 
 been more than once mckhirma, and 
 arranged afresh, so that the possi- 
 bility of considerable changes, addi- 
 tions, and interpolations cannot be 
 denied. Strictly speaking, there- 
 fore, in each individual case it re- 
 mains, d, priori, uncertain whether 
 the example is to be credited to 
 Patagijali himself, or to these sub- 
 sequent remodellings of the text 
 (or, reversely, to Patamjali*s pre- 
 decessors, or even to F^ini himself); 
 see /. St., xiii. 320, 329 ; Ind. Antiq., 
 iv. 247. Kielhorn, it is true, in 
 Ind. Antiq., iv. 108, has protested 
 very strongly against the view " that 
 at some time or other the text of 
 the Mab^bh&hya had been lost, 
 that it had to be reconstructed," 
 &c. He will only "perhaps allow 
 a break so far as regards its tradi- 
 tional interpretation," while we are 
 for the time being bound "to re- 
 gard the text of the MahsCbh&hya 
 as given by our MSS. to be the 
 same as it existed about 2000 years 
 ago." Let us, then, await the ar- 
 guments he has to offer in support 
 of this ; for his protest alone will 
 hardly suffice in the face of the 
 statements on the subject that are 
 stiU preserved in the tradition it- 
 self. On three separate occasions, 
 the epithets vipldvita, hhraahta, 
 vichhinna are employed of the 
 work. And there is the further 
 circumstance that, according to 
 Burnell's testimony (Pref. to VanSa- 
 Br^h., p. xxii. n.), the South Indian 
 MSS. of the text appear to vary 
 materially ; see also Burnell's Elem. 
 S. Ind. Pal., pp. 7, 32. 
 
 239 The Vdh/apadiya of Hari, the 
 editing of which has now been 
 undertaken by Kielhorn, connects 
 itself specially with the Mah^ 
 
 bh^hya. — The KdMlcd of Y^mana, 
 a direct commentary on P^ini, is 
 at present being edited by B^la- 
 &kstrin in the Benares Pandit. Ac- 
 cording to him, it was composed in 
 the thirteenth century, as Gold- 
 stiickerhad already hinted ; whereas 
 the date previously assigned to it, 
 in accordance with Bohtlingk's view, 
 was towards the eighth century ; 
 Bee /. St., V. 67 ; Cappeller's Introd. 
 to Vftmana's Kdvydlamkaravritti, 
 pp. vii., viii. — To Aufrecht we owe 
 an edition (Bonn, 1859) of Dj- 
 jvaladatta's Commentary (of the 
 thirteenth century or so) on the 
 Unddi-SMras, which are perhaps 
 (see /. Str., ii. 322) to be ascribed 
 to S^kat^yana ; and Jul. Eggeling is 
 engaged on an edition of the Gana- 
 ratna-mahodadhi of Yardham^na. 
 — Of Bhattoji-Dikshita's Siddhdnta^ 
 haumudi (seventeenth century) we 
 have now a new and good edition by 
 Tdr^n^tha Yiichaspati (Calc, 1864- 
 1865). — A highly meritorious work 
 is the edition, with English version, 
 &c., of Yaxa.iaisi,la.'& Laghu-lcaumudi 
 by J. R. Ballantyne (originally pub- 
 lished at Mirzapore, 1849). — Siinta- 
 nava's Pkit-SAtras were edited by 
 Kielhorn in 1866 ; and to him we 
 also owe an excellent edition of 
 Ndgoji-bhatta's Paribhdshendu - &- 
 hhara^ a work of the last century 
 (Bombay, 1868-74). — Of gramma- 
 tical systems which proceed on their 
 own lines, departing from P^ini, 
 we have Yopadeva's Miigdha-bodha, 
 of the thirteenth century, in an edi- 
 tion, amongst others, by Bohtlingk 
 (St. Petersburg, 1847): the5(£rosi'a«a 
 of Anubhtiti - svardpdchirya ap- 
 peared at Bombay in 186 1 in a 
 lithographed edition; the Kdtantra 
 of Sarvavarman, with Durgasinha's 
 Commentary, is being edited by 
 " ling iu the Bibl. Indica (in 
 
LEXICOGRAPHY. 
 
 227 
 
 a tolerable number of grammatical ■writings, and these for 
 the most part works that have been lost in India itself.^" 
 As regards Lexicography — ^the second branch of the 
 science of language — we have already pointed out its first 
 beginnings in the Nighantus, collections of synonyms, &c., 
 for the elucidation of the Vedic texts. But these were of 
 a practical character, and wholly confined to the Veda : 
 the need of collections towards a dictionary of Sanskrit, 
 being, on the contrary, more a scientific one, was naturally 
 only awakened at a much later time. Here, too, the earliest 
 attempts in this direction have perished, and the work of 
 Amara-siiiha, the oldest of the kind that has come down 
 to us, appeals expressly in the introduction to other 
 Tantras, from which it was itself compiled. Its com- 
 mentators also expressly mention by name as such Tantras 
 the Trikanda, the Utpalini, and the works of Eabhasa, 
 Katyayana, Vyadi,* and Vararuchi, the two latter as 
 authorities for the gender of words. 
 
 1874 it bad reached to iv. 4. 50). 
 The system of this grammar is of 
 peculiar interest on this account, 
 that a special connection appears to 
 exist between it and the Pili gram- 
 mar of Kaohoh^yana, particularly in 
 regard to the terminology employed. 
 According to Eiihler's letter from 
 Kashmir (pub. in /. St., xiv. 402 £f.), 
 the Kitantra is the special grammar 
 of the K^miras, and was there, 
 frequently commented upon in the 
 I2th— l6th centuries. Of older 
 grammatical texts, he has further 
 discovered the Pwnblidshds of Vy^di 
 and Chandra, as also the Varna- 
 Satras and Shad-ihdshd-chandrihd 
 of the latter ; likewise an Avyaya- 
 tfitti and Dhdtu-taramgini by 
 Kshira (Jay^pida's preceptor), and a 
 very beautiful bhii,rja-iiS. of the 
 K^^ikd. In one of these MSS. this 
 last-named work is ascribed to 
 Vimana and Jaydditya (Jaydpida?), 
 whereby the earlier view as to its 
 date again gains credit. — For a list 
 of "Sanscrit- Grammars," &c., see 
 Colebrooke's Mnc. Ess., ii. 38 ff., 
 ed. Cowell. — It remains still to 
 mention here Cowell's edition of 
 the Prdhrita-prakdia of Vararuchi 
 
 (1854, 1868) ; further, an edition 
 recently (1873) published at Bom- 
 bay of Hemachandra's (according to 
 BhiJu DSji, A.D. 1088-1172, see 
 Joum. Bombay Br. R. A. S., ix. 224) 
 PrSikrit Grammar, which forms the 
 eighth book of his great treatise on 
 Sanskrit grammar, the Sabddnu- 
 Msana ; and lastly, Pischel's valu- 
 able dissertation De Grammaticis 
 Pracriticis (1874), which supple- 
 ments the accounts in Lassen's /»- 
 stitut. Zinguce PracriticcB (Bonn, 
 1837) with very important material. 
 
 "'"' See Schiefner's paper on the 
 logical and grammatical writings in 
 the Tandjur, p. 25, from the BvUetin 
 de la Classe hist. phU. de VAcad. 
 Imp. des Sc. de St. Petershourg, iv. , 
 Kos. 18, 19 (1847), from which it 
 appears that the Chandra- VydJca- 
 rana-Sitra, the Kaldpa-SMra, and 
 the Sarasvati- Vydkarana^Sutra, in 
 particular, are represented there. 
 
 * A Vyddi is cited in the Rik- 
 PriCti^&hya [and in Goldstiicker's 
 Pdvj/ini he plays a very special part. 
 The Samgraha, several times men- 
 tioned in the Bh&hya, and there 
 assigned to Bdhshdyana, is by NiC- 
 ge^a — who describes it as a work in 
 
228 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 The question now is to determine the age of Amara- 
 sinha — ^a question which, in the first instance, exactly 
 coincides with the one already discussed as to the date of 
 Kalidasa, for, like the latter, Amara is specified hy tradi- 
 tion among the ' nine gems ' of the court of Viliama — 
 that Vikrama whom Indian tradition identifies with king 
 Bhoja (A.D. 1050), but to whom European criticism has 
 assigned the date B.C. 56, because — an era bearing this name 
 commenceg with that year. The utter groundlessness of 
 this last assumption has been already exposed in the 
 case of Kalidasa, though we do not here, any more than 
 there, enter the lists in defence of the Indian tradition. 
 This tradition is distinctly contradicted, in particular, by 
 a temple-inscription discovered at Buddhagaya, which is 
 dated 1005 of the era of Vikramaditya {i.e., A.D. 949), 
 and in which Amara- deva is mentioned as one of 
 the 'nine jewels' of Vikrama's court, and as builder 
 of the temple in question. This inscription had been 
 turned to special account by European criticism in sup- 
 port of its view; but Holtzmann's researches {op. cit., 
 pp. 26-32) have made it not improbable that it was put 
 there in the same age in which Amara-sinha's dictionary 
 was written, seeing that both give expression to precisely 
 the same form of belief, a combination, namely, of Bud- 
 dhism with Vishnuism — a form of faith which cannot 
 possibly have continued very long in vogue, resting as it 
 does on a union of directly opposite systems. At all 
 events, inscription and dictionary cannot lie so much as 
 1000 years apart, — that is a sheer impossibility. Unfor- 
 tunately this inscription is not known to us in the original, 
 and has only survived in the English translation made by 
 Ch. WOkins in 1785 (a time when he can hardly have 
 been very proficient in Sanskrit !) : the text itself is lost, 
 
 100,000 MoJeas — attributed to a generations" prior to the latter. 
 
 Vy^di, meaning in all likeliliood the And on this he grounds a specific 
 
 same Vy^i who is elsewhere men- "historical argument" for the de- 
 
 tioned in the Bh^hya. Now upon termination of PiJnini's date ; for i£ 
 
 the strength of this, Goldstiicker Tyddi, P^ini's descendant collat- 
 
 sets up a direct relation of kiu- erally, is cited in the Rik-Pr., then 
 
 ship between Piiiini, who is desig- of course this work must be later 
 
 nated Ddhshlpuira in the Bh&hya, than Piinini ; see against all this I, 
 
 and this (Vyddi) Ddkshdyana ; only St., v. 41, 127-133, xiii. 401]. 
 the former must be "at least two 
 
DATE OF AMARASINHA. ^29 
 
 with the stone on which it was incised. That the dic- 
 tionary belongs, in any case, to a period considerably later 
 than the first century B.C. — the date commonly assigned 
 to it—is sufficiently indicated by data furnished by the 
 work itself. For, in the first place, it enumerates the 
 signs of the zodiac, which were unquestionably borrovsed 
 by the Hindiis from the Greeks ; and, according to Le- 
 tronne's investigations, the completion of the zodiac did 
 not take place among the Greeks themselves before the first 
 century A.D. ; so that, of course, it cannot have become 
 known to the Hindiis till one or several centuries later. 
 Again, in the Amara-kosha, the lunar mansions are enu- 
 merated in their new order, the fixing of which was due 
 to the fresh life infused into Indian astronomy under 
 Greek influence, the exact date being uncertain, but hardly 
 earlier than a.d. 400. Lastly, the word dindra occurs 
 here,* which, as pointed out by Prinsep, is simply the 
 Latin denarius (see Lassen, I. AK., ii. 261, 348). The use 
 of the term tantra in the sense of ' text-book ' may perhaps 
 also be cited in this connection, as it belongs only to a 
 definite period, which is probably the fifth or sixth cen- 
 tury, the Hindiis who emigrated to Java having taken the 
 word with them in this sense.^^ — ^All this, of course, yields 
 us no direct date. If it be correct, as stated by Eeinaud 
 {Mdm. sur I'Inde, p. 114), that there existed a Chinese 
 translation of the work, "redig(5e au vi* si^cle," this 
 would give us something tolerably definite to go by. But 
 Stan. Julien does not, it would seem, in the passage cited 
 by Eeinaud as his authority, express himseJf in quite such 
 definite terms; as he merely speaks of the "traduction 
 chinoise de I'Amarakocha, qui paralt avoir ete publife 
 . . . " : i" nor are the positive grounds he adduces in sup- 
 port of this view directly before us, so that we might test 
 
 * It also oocura in the Paftoha.. 5, cited by Colebrooke, Misc. Ess., 
 
 tantra, in a, legend of Buddhistic i. 314' (339^) ; Gildemeister in 
 
 origin. — I may here also remark in Z. D. M. G. , xxviii. 697. 
 passing, that the word dramma, i.e., t The meaning of paraitre, how- 
 
 Spax/iifl, is employed in the twelfth ever, is doubtful ; it can signify 
 
 century by Bhdskara, as well as in in- either 'seem' or 'be clear' (ac- 
 
 scriptions [cf. Z. D. M. O., vi. 420]. cording to all evidence),— in the 
 
 ^' Of special interest also is the latter sense like the Latin apparere, 
 
 Arabico-Persian word pilu for ele- and the English ' appear,' heivag in- 
 
 phant ; cf. Kunidrila on Jaim,, i. 3. deed derived from apparescei'e. 
 
230 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 them. Of the Tibetan translation of the work in the 
 TandjuT no particulars are known. How great the difficulty 
 is of arriving at any sort of decision in this matter is 
 shown by the example of one of the most celebrated of 
 living Indianists, H. H. Wilson. For while, in the pre- 
 face to the first edition of his Sanskrit Dictionary (1819), 
 he rather inclined to the view that Amara-sinha flourished 
 in the fifth century A.D., and whUe again, in the second 
 edition of the work (1832), under the word ' Vararuchi,' 
 he expressly transfers the 'nine gems' to the court of 
 Bhoja (A.D. 1050), — ^in the preface (p. vi.) to his transla- 
 tion of the Vishnu-Purana (1840), on the contrary, he 
 makes Amara-sinha live " in the century prior to Chris- 
 tianity ! " — But, independently of all that has hitherto 
 been advanced, the mere circumstance that the other 
 dictionaries we possess, besides the Amara-kosha, all 
 belong to the eleventh, twelfth, and following centuries, 
 constrains us to come to a conclusion similar to that 
 which was forced upon us in regard to the drama — 
 namely, that as the Ainara-kosha is in no way specifically 
 distinguished in character from these other productions, 
 so it cannot be separated from them by a very wide inter- 
 val of time. (Holtzmann, p. 26.)^^ 
 
 Besides the dictionaries, we have also to mention a class 
 of lexical works quite peculiar to the Hindiis — ^namely, 
 the lists of roots styled Dh&tu-pdrdyanas or Dhdtu- 
 pdthas : * though these belong rather to the province of 
 grammar. They are written partly in prose and partly in 
 slokas. The latter is the form adopted in all the dic- 
 tionaries, and it supplies, of course, a strong guarantee of 
 the integrity of the text, the interlacing of the different 
 verses rendering interpolation well-nigh impossible, f 
 
 ^^^ Since the above was written^ and by Aufrecht (London, i86l) of 
 nothing new has appeared on this Haldyudha's Abhidhdnorratna-nuSld, 
 question. To the editions of the Ipelonging to about the end of the 
 Amara-kosha then already pub- eleventh century. A PSli redaction 
 lished, those, namely, of Colebrooke of the Amara-kosha by Moggalldna 
 (1808) and of Loiseleur Deslong- belongs to the close of the twelfth 
 champs (Paris, 1839, 1845), various century ; see /. Str., ii. 330. 
 new ones have since been added in * For the literature of these, see 
 India. Of other vocabularies we Westergaard's preface to his ex- 
 may mention the editions, by Boht- cellent Radices Linguce Sanscritce 
 lingk and Rieu (1847) of Hema- (Bonn, 1841)-. 
 Chandra's AlhidMna - cliintdmaifi, + See Holtzmann, o^). cU., -p. 17. 
 
METRIC, POETICS, RHETORIC. 23; 
 
 Lastly, as a third phase of the science of language, we 
 have to consider Metric, Poetics, and Ehetoric. 
 
 With the beginnings of Prosody we have already become 
 acquainted in connecti9n with the Veda (see p. 23). The 
 treatise ascribed to Pingala even appears as an appendage 
 to the Veda itself, however little claim it has to such a 
 position, specifying as it does the most highly elaborated 
 metres, such as were only used in later times (see p. 60). 
 The tradition which identifies Pingala with Patamjali, the 
 author of the Mahabhashya and the Yoga-Sastra, must 
 answer for itself ; for us there exists no cogent reason for 
 accepting it.^^ The other existing treatises on metre are 
 likewise all modern: they superseded the more ancient 
 works ; and the same is the case, in an equal degree, with 
 the writings on poetics and rhetoric. Of the Alamkdra- 
 Sdstra of Bharata, which is often cited as the leading 
 authority on these subjects, only the few quoted passages 
 would seem to have survived, although, according to one 
 commentary,* the work was itself but an extract from the 
 Agni-Purana. A. W. von Schlegel in his Riflexions sur 
 V Etude des Langii.es Asiat., p. 1 1 1, speaks of a manuscript, 
 preserved in Paris, of the Sdhitya-darpana, another leading 
 work on this subject, as dated Sake 949, i.e., a.d. 1027 ; and 
 this, if correct, would naturally be of the highest import- 
 ance for the age of the works therein quoted. But d, priori 
 I am firmly persuaded that this statement rests on a mis- 
 take or misunderstanding;^** for the oldest manuscripts 
 with which I have had any opportunity of becoming ac- 
 quainted are, as already mentioned (p. 182), not so much 
 
 2*3 Cf. on this /. St., viii. 158 ff. the banks of the Brahmaputra; see 
 
 * See mj Catal. of the Sansh Mf'S. Jagan-mohana-sarman in the pie- 
 
 iniheBerl. Lib., 'p. 227. [Respect- face to his edition of the drama 
 
 ing the Ndtya - Sdstra of Bharata Chanda-KavMka, p. 2. It has al- 
 
 fuller information was first supplied ready been edited several times in 
 
 by Hall in his edition of the Daia- India, amongst others by Eoer in 
 
 ripa (1865), at the close of which the Bihl. Indica (1851, vol. x.). 
 
 he has given the text of four chap- Ballantyne's translation, iftici., isun- 
 
 ters of the work (18-20, 34) ; see fortunately not yet entirely printed, 
 
 also "W. Heyniann's account of it in and reaches only to Rule 575; for 
 
 the Goltinger Oel. Anzeigen, 1874, p. the close of the work, however, from 
 
 86 ff.] Rule 631, we have a translation by 
 
 2" The Sdhitya-darpana was only PramadsiDilsaMitra, which appeared 
 
 composed towards the middle of the in the Pandit, Nos. 4-28. 
 fifteenth century in E. Bengal, on 
 
SANSKRIT UTERATURE. 
 
 as 500 years old, and it will be difficult to find any of a 
 yet greater age. — For the rest, in the field of rhetoric and 
 poetics, the Hindii miad, so fertile in nice distiactions, has 
 had free scope, and has put forth all its power, not seldom 
 in an extremely subtle and ingenious fashion.^" 
 
 We now come to the consideration of Philosophy, as the 
 second branch of the scientific Sanskrit literature. 
 
 I rank it here after the science of language, not because 
 I regard it as of later origin, but because the existing 
 text-books of the philosophical systems seem to me to be 
 posterior to the text-book of grammar, the Siitra of Panini, 
 since they appear, to some extent, to presuppose the exist- 
 ence of Upanishads, writings which, in their extant form, 
 manifestly belong to a very late period, comparatively 
 speaking. 
 
 The beginnings of philosophical speculation go back, 
 as we have already mote than once seen (see espe- 
 cially pp. 26, 27), to a very remote age. Even in the 
 Samhita of the Rik, although only in its later portions, 
 we find hymns that bespeak a high degree of reflection. 
 Here, too, as with all other peoples, it was especially the 
 question as to the origin of the world that more imme- 
 
 ^* Dandiu's KAvyidauria, of the example, adopted the Vaidarbha-riti; 
 
 Bixth century, and Dhanaipjaya's see Biihler, Yikramdnka-char., i. 9. 
 
 Daia-r&'pa, of the middle of the tenth ^ — VSmana's Kdvy&itnhiira-vritti has 
 
 century, have been published in the lately been edited by Cappeller (Jena, 
 
 Bibl. Indica, the former edited by 1875), and belongs, he thinks, to the 
 
 Premachandra Tarkavdgi^a (1863), twelfth century. Mammata's/fcfB^o- 
 
 the latter by Hall (1865). From prakdia, several times published in 
 
 these we learn, amongst other things, India, belongs, in BUhler's opinion, 
 
 the very important fact that in to the same date, since Mammata, 
 
 Dandin's day two definite, provin- according to Hall (/ntrod.ioFasatio., 
 
 cially distinguished, varieties of p. 55), was the maternal uncle of 
 
 style {Hli) were already recognised, the author of the Naishadhiya ; see 
 
 namely, the Oauda style and the Biihler in/oai-». £om6. j6r. ^. ^. S., 
 
 Vaidarbha style, to which in course x. 37, my I. Sir., i. 356, and my Essay 
 
 of time four others, the PdnchdM, on Hila's Sapta-^ataka, p. 11. Cf. 
 
 Zdti, Avantikd, and Mdgadhi, were here also Aufrecht's account of the 
 
 added ; cf. my Kssay on the 'R&mi- Sarasvatl - kanthstbharana (note 220 
 
 yana, p. 76, and /. St., xiv. 65 if. above). — A rich accession to the 
 
 Edna passes for the special repre- AlaijikSra literature also will result 
 
 ssntative of the PalichSla style ; see from Biihler's journey to Kashmir : 
 
 Aufrecht in Z. D. M. O., xxvii. 93 ; 1he works range from the ninth to 
 
 whereas the KiWmlra Bilhana, for the thirteenth century. 
 
PHILOSOPHY. 233 
 
 diately gave rise to philosophical contemplation. The 
 mystery of existence, of being, and of life forces itself 
 directly upon the soul, and along with this comes the 
 question, how the riddle is to be solved, and what is its 
 cause. The idea that most readily presents itself, and 
 which is therefore, in fact, everywhere recognisable as the 
 earliest one, is that of an eternal matter, a chaotic mass, 
 into which order and system are gradually introduced, 
 whether — and here we have two distinct views, each of 
 which has its intrinsic warrant, and which must therefore 
 have been early opposed to each other — by virtue of an 
 indwelling capacity of development, or by impulse from 
 without, whereby of course an object or Being existing 
 outside of this chaotic mass is m ipso postulated. This 
 point reached, the idea is then a very natural one to 
 regard this Being, whence the impulse proceeds, as higher 
 and more exalted than the primary chaotic matter itself ; 
 and, as speculation advances, this primary matter continues 
 to sink to a more and more subordinate position, till at 
 length its very existence appears as dependent upon the 
 wiU of this Being, and so the idea of a creation arises. 
 The steps of this gradation may actually be followed with 
 tolerable distinctness in the Vedic texts. In the more 
 ancient portions the notion everywhere still is that the 
 worlds were but ' fixed,' ' arranged ' (stahhita, skahhita *), by 
 the aid of the metres (it is thus that the harmony of the 
 universe is explained) ; only at a later stage is the idea 
 developed of their sarjana, 'emission' or creation. As 
 time goes on, the creative Being is conceived as more 
 and more transcendental and supernatural, so that as a 
 means of communication between him and the real uni- 
 verse intermediate grades of beings, demiurges, are required, 
 by classifying and systematising whom speculation strives 
 
 * It is interesting that the Qer- of the word grown up independently 
 
 man word schaffm is derived from with both peoples ? Perhaps the 
 
 this root stdbh, skabh, 'estabhsh;' 'yawning gulf of chaos, 'gaha- 
 
 originally therefore it had not the natp, gamikiram,' ' ginunga gap,'' 
 
 sense in which it is now used. The might also be instanced as a similar 
 
 idea of the ' establishment,' ' ar- primitive notion ? [The connection 
 
 rangement ' of the worlds may pos- here supposed between schaffen and 
 
 sibly therefore date from the epoch slabh, skabh, cKriirTcw, is very ques- 
 
 when Teutons and Indians still tionable ; the word seems rather to 
 
 dv.elt together ; or has the same use belong to schaben, scabere, aK&Treiy.} 
 
334 SANSKRIT LITERA TURE. 
 
 to introduce order, but naturally only witli the result of 
 producing greater confusion. We have thus three dis- 
 tinct views as to the origin of the world — that of its 
 ' development/ that of its ' arrangement/ and that of its 
 ' creation.' The two former agree in so far as the theory 
 of development requires an ' arranger ' also I they are, 
 however, sufiBciently distinguished by the circumstance 
 that in the former this Power is regarded as the first pro- 
 duction of the capacity of development residing in primary 
 matter ; in the latter, on the contrary, as an independent 
 Being existing outside of it. The theory of a creation 
 starts generally with a desire on the part of the Creator^to 
 be no longer alone, the expression of which desire is imme- 
 diately followed by the emanation itself. Either it is a 
 female being that first proceeds from the Creator, in con- 
 nection with whom, by a process of begetting,* he then 
 accomplishes the further work of creation ; or it is the 
 breath of life that .first of all emanates, and in its turn 
 produces all the rest ; or again, the mere expression of the 
 desire itself involves creation, v&ch or speech here appear- 
 ing as its immediate source ; or the process is conceived in 
 a variety of other ways. The notion that the world is but 
 Illusion only belongs to the latest phase of this emanation 
 theory. — It is impossible at present to attempt even an 
 approximate sketch of the gradual growth of these three 
 different theories into complete philosophical systems; 
 the Brahmanas and Upanishads must first be thoroughly 
 studied. IsTor until this has been done will it be possible 
 to decide the question whether for the beginnings of Greek 
 philosophy any connection with Hindii speculation can be 
 established — with reference to the five elements in par- 
 ticular,t a point which for the present is doubtful.J I 
 have already stated generally (p. 29) the reasons which 
 lead me to assign a comparatively late date to the existing 
 text-books (Sutras) of the Hindu philosophical systems.^^ 
 
 * By inoeet therefore: the story vi. iSfF. [Cf. my review of Sohlii- 
 
 iu Megasthenes of the incest of the ter's book, Aristotdc^ Metaphysik 
 
 Indian Herakles with his daughter dne Tocktcr der Siinkkyalehrcin.Lit. 
 
 refers to this. Cent. M., 1874, p. 294.] 
 
 + And the doctrine of metempsy- '■'^ Cf.CoweU'snotetoColebrooke's 
 
 chosis ! Misc. Ess., i. 354. " The Stitras ua 
 
 i See Max Miiller in Z. D. M. G., we have them cannot be tlie original 
 
PHILOSOPHY: THE SAMKHYA SYSTEM. 235 
 
 Unfortunately we are not yet in possession of the treatises 
 themselves ; * and for what follows I have had to depend 
 mainly upon Colebrooke's Essays on the subject.^^ 
 
 The most ancient philosophical system appears to be the 
 Sdmhhya theory, which sets up a primordial matter as the 
 basis of the universe, out of which the latter is by succes- 
 sive stages evolved. The M'ord Sdmkhya itself occurs first 
 in the later TJpanishadsjt while in the earlier TJpanishads 
 and Brahmanas the doctrines afterwards belonging to the 
 Samkhya system still appear in incongruous combination 
 with doctrines of opposite tendency, and are cited along 
 with these under the equivalent designations of Mimdnsd 
 {>J man, speculation), AdeSa (doctrine), Upanishad (sit- 
 ting), &c. I am especially induced to regard the Samkhya 
 as the oldest of the existing systems by the names of those 
 who are mentioned as its leading representatives : Kapila, 
 Panchalikha, and Asuri.^ The last of these names occurs 
 very frequently in the Satapatha-Brahmana as that of an 
 important authority for sacrificial ritual and the like, and 
 also in the lists of teachers contained in that work (namely. 
 
 form of the doctrines of the several 
 schools . They are rather a recapi- 
 tulation of a series of preceding de- 
 velopments which had gone on in 
 the works of successive teachers." 
 
 * Onlytwoof themhavethusfarap- 
 peared in India ; but of the edition of 
 the Vediinta-Siitra with ^ainkara's 
 commentary I have not yet been able 
 to see a copy ; only the edition of the 
 Nystya-Stitra is known to me. The 
 whole of these texts are at present 
 being edited in India by Dr. Bal- 
 lantyne, with English translation. 
 [These editions, entitled Aphorisms 
 of the Sdnhhya, Teddnla, Yoga, &c., 
 extend to all the six systems, each 
 sAtra being regularly followed by 
 translation and commentary ; but 
 unfortunately only a few numbers of 
 each have appeared.] 
 
 ^*^ In the new edition of Cole- 
 brooke's Ilssays (1873), these are 
 accompanied with excellent notes by 
 Professor Cowell. Since the above 
 was written, much new material has 
 been added by thelaboursofEoer,Bal- 
 lantye. Hall, Cowell, Miiller, Gough, 
 
 K. M. Baneijea,' Barth. St. Hilaire. 
 In the Bibl. Indica and the Benares 
 Pandit many highly important edi- 
 tions of texts have appeared, and we 
 are now in possession of the Sutras 
 of all the six systems, together with 
 their leading commentaries, three 
 of them in translation also. See 
 also in particular the Sana-daHana- 
 samgraha of Mddhava in the_ Bibl. 
 Ind. (1853-58), edited by Kvara- 
 chandra Vidyslsdgara, and Hall's 
 JBibliographical Index to the Ind. 
 PhU. Syst. {1859). 
 
 + Of the Taittiriya and Atharvan, 
 as also in the fourteenth book of the 
 Nirukti, and in the Bhagavad-gitii. 
 As regards its sense, the term is 
 rather obscure and not very signi- 
 ficant ; can its use have been in any 
 way influenced and determined by 
 its association with the doctrine of 
 ^dkya? or has it reference purely 
 and solely to the twenty-five prin- 
 ciples? [The latter is really the 
 case ; see 7. St., ix. 17 if. Kapilas 
 tattva-samkhydtd, Bhig. Pur., iii. 
 25. I.] 
 
236 SANSKRIT LITERA 7 URE. 
 
 as disciple of Yajnavalkya, and as only one or a few gene- 
 rations prior to Yaska). Kapila, again, can hardly be 
 unconnected witli the Kapya Patamchala whom we find 
 mentioned in the TajnavalMya-kanda of the Vrihad- 
 Axanyaka as a zealous representative of the Brahmanical 
 learning. Kapila, too — what is not recorded of any other 
 of these reputed authors of Siitras — was himself afterwards 
 elevated to divine rank ; and in this quality we meet with 
 him, for example, in the Sveta^vataropanishad.* But it is 
 above all the close connection of his tenets with Buddhism^* 
 — the legends of which, moreover, uniformly speak both 
 of him and of Panchaiikha as long anterior to Buddha — 
 which proves conclusively that the system bearing his name 
 is to be regarded as the oldest.^® The question as to the 
 possible date of Kapila is thus closely linked with that of 
 the origin of Buddhism generally, a point to which we 
 shall revert in the sequel, in connection with our survey 
 of the Buddhistic literature. Two other leading doctors 
 of the Sanxkhya school as such appear towards the sixth 
 century of our era, Kvara- Krishna and Gaudapada: the 
 former (according to Colebrooke, i. 103) is expressly stated 
 
 * In the invocations of the Pitris explanation of this, when he says 
 
 which (seeabove, pp. 55, 56) form part that the existing Sutras of Kapila 
 
 o,f the ordinary ceremonial, Kapila, are " of later date, posterior, not 
 
 Asuri, Panchaiikha (and vfith them anterior, to Buddha." On the sub- 
 
 a Vodha or Bodha), uniformly oc- ject itself, see specially /. St., iii. 
 
 copy a very honourable place in later 132, 133. 
 
 times ; whereas notice is more rarely ^'^ In the sacred texts of the 
 
 taken of the remaining authors of Jainas also, not only is the Satthi- 
 
 philosophical SiitraB, &c. This too tanta {Shashti-tantra, explained by 
 
 proves that the former are more the comm. as KdfUa-Sdslra) speci- 
 
 ancient than the latter. fied along with the four 
 
 ^■'* This relates, according to Wil- and their Angas, but in another 
 
 son, to the community of the funda- passage the name Kdvila appears 
 
 mentalpropositions of both in regard along with it, the only other Brah- 
 
 to " the eternity of matter, the prin- manical system here mentioned lie- 
 
 ciples of things, and the final extinc- ing the Baisesiya (Vaiseshika). (The 
 
 tion" (Wilson, Works, ii. 346, ed. order in which they are given is 
 
 Rost.V In opposition to this, it is Baisesiya, Buddha -Siisana, Kdvila, 
 
 true,MaxMiillerexpressljdeniesany Logiiyata, Satthi-tanta.) So also in 
 
 special connection whatever between a similar enumeration in the Lalita- 
 
 Kapila's system, as embodied in the vistara, after Siimkhya Yoga, only 
 
 Stiitras, and Buddhist metaphysics Vaiseshika is further specified. See 
 
 (Chips from, u, German Worksluip, i. my paper on the BhagavatI of the 
 
 226, 1870) ; yet he himself imme- Jainas, ii. 246-248, 
 diately afterwards gives the correct 
 
PHILOSOPHY: THE YOGA SYSTEM. 
 
 237 
 
 to be the author of the existing Samkhya-Siitra, while the 
 latter embodied its doctrine in several Upanishads.^^" 
 
 Connected with the Samkhya school, as a further deve- 
 lopment of it, is the Toga system of Patamjali,^^ whose 
 name describes him as in all probability a descendant of 
 the Kapya Patamchala of the Vrihad-Aranyaka. Along 
 with him (or prior to him) Yajnavalkya, the leading 
 authority of the Satapatha-Brahmana, is also regarded as a 
 main originator of the Yoga doctrine, but this only in later 
 writings* Whether Patamjali is to be identified with the 
 
 2s» The Siitras of Kapila, the Bo- 
 called Sdmkhya-pravachana, are now 
 published, with the commentary of 
 Vijniina-bhikshu in the Bibl. Ind., 
 edited by Hall (1854-56) ; a trans- 
 lation by Ballantyne also appeared 
 in the same series, 1862-65. In 
 his preface to the S. Prav., as well 
 as in the preface some years later 
 to his edition of Vijn^na-bhikshu's 
 Sdrnlchya-sdra, Hall gives a special 
 account, with which, however, he is 
 himself by no means satisfied (see his 
 note to Wilson's Vishnu-Pur.,iii. 301 ), 
 of Kapila and the leading works ex- 
 tant of the Samkhya system. He re- 
 gards the Simkhya-pravachana as a 
 very late production, which may here 
 and there even "be suspected of occa- 
 sional obligation to the Kirikfe of 
 Hvarakrishna " (Sstinkhya-sdra, Pre- 
 face, p. 12). Of course this does not 
 affect either the antiquity of Kapila 
 himself or his "alleged connection 
 with the Sdrakhya " (p. 20). Cowell, 
 too (Colebrooke, Misc. Ess., i. 354, 
 note), regards the Sdmkhya school 
 itself "as one of the earliest," while 
 the Sdtras, on the contrary, are of 
 late origin, inasmuch as they not 
 only "refer distinctly to Veddnta 
 texts," but also "expressly mention 
 the Vai^eshika in i. 25, v. 85 ; for 
 the JTydya, cf. v. 27, 86, and for 
 the Yoga, i. 90." Besides the Vai- 
 ^eshikas (i. 25), only Paneha^ikha 
 (v. 32, vi. 68) and SanandanSiehdrj'a 
 (vi. 69) are actually mentioned by 
 name. An interesting detail is the 
 opposing of the names Srughna and 
 
 Pdtalipntra (i. 28) as an illustration 
 of separate locality (similarly in the 
 Mahitbhsishya, see /. St., xiii. 37S). 
 
 ^*' The Toga - Sdtra ascribed to 
 Pataipjali (likewise called Sdmkhya- 
 prasachana- Sutra), with extracts 
 from Bhoja's commentary upon it, 
 was edited, text with translation, to 
 the extent of one-half, by Ballantyne 
 in his Aphorisms ; the second half 
 appeared in the Pandit, Nos. 28-68, 
 edited by Govinda-deva-^trin. — 
 An Aryd-p<mchdiiti by Sesha (whom 
 the editor identifies with Pataipjali), 
 in which the relation of prahriti and 
 purushais elucidated in a Vaishnava 
 sense, was edited by BiilaiSdstrin i n 
 No. 56 of the Pandit; there exists 
 also a ^aiva adaptation of it by Abhi- 
 navagupta; see Z. I). M. (?., xxvii. 
 167. According to Biihler's letter 
 (/. St., xiv. 402 ff.), Abhinavagupta 
 is supposed to have died in a.d. 982 ; 
 but Buhler has not himself verified 
 the date, which is stated to occur in 
 the hymn written by Abhinava on 
 his deathbed. 
 
 * Particularly in the twelfth book 
 of the Mah£-Bhdrata, where, with 
 Janaka, he is virtually descrilsed as 
 a Buddhist teacher, the chief out- 
 ward badge of these teachers being 
 precisely the hdskdya - dhdranam 
 maundyam (M.-Bh., xii. 11898, 566). 
 It appears, at all events, from the 
 Ydjnavalkiya-kdnda that both gave 
 a powerful impulse to the practice 
 of religious mendicancy : in the 
 Atharvopanishads, too, this is clearly 
 shown (see p. 163). [In the Yajua- 
 
238 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 author of the Mahabhashya remains for the present a c[ues- 
 tion. The word yoga in the sense of 'union with the 
 Supreme Being/ '.absorption therein by virtue of medita- 
 tion,' first occurs in the later Upanishads, especially in the 
 tenth book of the Taittiriya-Axanyaka and in the Kathako- 
 panishad, where this very doctrine is itself ehunciated.^^^ 
 As there presented, it seems to rest substantially upon a 
 dualism, that is, upon the 'arrangement' theory of the 
 universe ; in this sense, however, that in the Kathakopani- 
 shad at least, purusJm, primeval soul, is conceived as exist- 
 ing prior to avyakta, primordial matter, from the union of 
 which two principles the mahdn dtmd, or spirit of life, 
 is evolved. For the rest, its special connection with the 
 Samkhya system is still, in its details, somewhat obscure, 
 however well attested it is externally by the constant 
 juxtaposition of ' Samkhya- Yoga,' generally as a com- 
 pound. Both systems appear, in particular, to have coun- 
 tenanced a confounding of their purusJia, iivara with the 
 chief divinities of the popular religion, Eudra and Krishna, 
 as may be gathered from the Sveta^vataropanishad,^^ the 
 Bhagavad-gita, and many passages in the twelfth book of 
 the Maha-Bharata.* One very peculiar side of the Yoga 
 
 valkya-Smriti, iii. no, Y. describes of view of literary chronology no 
 
 himself ostensibly as the author of forcible objection can be brought 
 
 the Aranyaka as well as of the Yoga- against this ; some of the points, 
 
 Sfetra.] too, which he urges are not without 
 
 ^^^ It is in these and similar Upa- importance ; but on the whole he 
 
 nishads, as also in Manu's Dharma- has greatly over-estimated the scope 
 
 Sdstra (cf . Johantgen'e Essay on the of his argument : the question ia 
 
 Law-Book of Manu, 1863), that we still suijudice. 
 
 have to look for the earliest germs * More particularly with regard 
 
 and records of the atheistic Samkhya to the BhSgavata, P^chardtra, and 
 
 and the deistio Yoga systems. P^upata doctrines. [A Sdtra of 
 
 252a In my paper on the Svetd^va- thePdaohardtraschool,that,namely, 
 
 taropanishad I had to leave the point of Sdndilya (ed. by Ballantyne in the 
 
 undetermined whether, for the Jiibl. Indica, 1861), is apparently 
 
 period to which this work belongs, mentioned by ^arpkara, Veddnta-S. 
 
 and specially as regards the mono- Bh. ii. 2. 45. It rests, seemingly, 
 
 theistio Yoga system it embodies, an upon the Bhagavad-gltd, and lays 
 
 acquaintance with the corresponding special stress upon faith in the Su- 
 
 doctrines of Christianity is to be premeBeing(57iai(ir&ai"e); seeonit 
 
 assumed or not ; see /.' St., i. 423. Cowell's note in Colebrooke's Misc. 
 
 Lorinser, on the other hand, in his £'ss.,i.438. Onthedevelopmentof the 
 
 translation of the Bhagavad-gitd doctrine of bhakti, Wilson surmises 
 
 (Breslau, 1869), unreservedly as- Christian conceptions to have had 
 
 sumes such an acquaintance in the some influence ; seemy paper on the 
 
 case of this poem. From the point Edm. Tip. Up., pp. 277, 360. The 
 
PHILOSOPHY: THE TWO MIMANSAS. 239 
 
 doctrine — and one which was more and more exclusively 
 developed as time went on — is the Yoga practice ; that is, 
 the outward means, such as penances, mortifications, and 
 the like, whereby this absorption into the supreme God- 
 head is sought to be attained. In the epic poems, but 
 especially in the Atharvopanishads, we encounter it in full 
 force : Panini, too, teaches the formation of the term yogi%. 
 
 The most flourishing epoch of the Samkhya-Yoga be- 
 longs most probably to the first centuries of our era, the 
 influence it exercised upon the development of Gnosticism 
 in Asia Minor being unmistakable; while further, both 
 through this channel and afterwards directly also, it had 
 an important influence upon the growth of the Siifi philo- 
 sophy * Albinini translated Patamjali's work into Arabic 
 at the beginning of the eleventh century, and also, it would 
 appear, the Sarp.khya-Sutra,t though the information we 
 have as to the contents of these works does not harmonise 
 with the Sanskrit originals. 
 
 The doctrines of the two Mimdnsds appear to have been 
 reduced to their present systematic shape at a later period 
 than those of the Samkhya ; ^^ and, as indicated by their 
 respective names, in the case of the PiUrva-Mirndfisd earlier 
 than in the case of the Uttara-Mimdnsd. The essential 
 purpose of both Mimansas is to bring the doctrines enun- 
 ciated in the Brahmanas or sacred revelation into harmony 
 and accord with each other. Precepts relating to practice 
 form the subject of the Purva-Mimansa, which is hence also 
 styled Karma - 3Iimdnsd ; while doctrines regarding the 
 essence of the creative principle and its relation to the 
 
 K^rada-Panoharitra (edited in Bibl. very questionable. Besides, as we 
 Ind. by K. M. Banerjea, 1861-65) i* shall presently see, in both the 
 aritual,notaphilosophioal,Vaishnava Mlm^nsd-SlitraB teachers are repeat- 
 text-book.] edly cited who are known to us from 
 
 * See [Lassen,'/. 4^., iii. 379 ff.] the Vedio Stitra literature; while 
 
 Gildemeister, Script. Arab, de reb. nothing of the kind occurs in either 
 
 Ind., p. ll2flF. of the SStpkhya-pravachana-Stitras. 
 
 t Eeinaud in the Journ. Adat., This does not of course touch the 
 
 1S44, pp. 121-124 ; H. M. Elliot, point of the higher antiquity of the 
 IHbl. Index to the Hist, of Mnham- ' doctrines in question ; for the names 
 
 medan India, i. 100. Kapila, Patainjali, and Y^jnavalkya 
 
 253 jfo^ t]2at the antiquity of the distinctly carry us back to a far 
 
 extant form of the SSirnkhya-Slitras, earlier time than do the names 
 
 according to Hall, has become so Jaimini and Bidar^yana — namely, 
 
 exceedingly doubtful, the view above into the closing phases of the Brdh- 
 
 cxpressed also becomes in its turn mana literature itself. 
 
240 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 universe form the subject of the Uttara-Mimansa, which 
 is hence also designated Brahma - Mimdnsd, ^driraka- 
 Mimdhsd (' doctrine of embodied spirit '), or also Veddnta 
 (' end of the Veda '). The term ' Mimansa ' originally de- 
 notes merely speculation in general ; it occurs frequently 
 in this sense in the Brahmanas, and only became a technical 
 expression later,^^* as is probably the case also with ' Ve- 
 danta,' a word first occurring in the later Upanishads, in 
 the tenth book of the Taittiriya-Aranyaka, the Kathako- 
 panishad, Mundakopanishad, &c. 
 
 The Karma -Mimdnsd-Sli,tra is ascribed to Jaimini, 
 who is mentioned in the Puranas as the revealer of the 
 Samaveda, though we search in vain in Vedic literature 
 for any hint of his name* StUl, of the teachers who 
 
 ''* In the Mahsibh&hya, mimdn- 
 saha, aooording to Eai;ata, is to be 
 taken in the sense of mlTndnsdin 
 adkite ; and as the term also occurs 
 therein contradistinction to aw^iAit&a, 
 it might, in point of fact, refer to the 
 sub] ect of the Prirva-Mim^s^. Still 
 the proper word here for one speci- 
 ally devoted to such studies would 
 rather seem to be ydjniJca; see /. 
 St., xiii. 455, 466. 
 
 * With the exception of two 
 probably interpolated passages in 
 the Grihya-Siitras of the Rik (see 
 pp. 56-58). — Nor is there anything 
 bearing on it in the Ganap£(tha of 
 Pilniui — of which, indeed, for the 
 present, only a negative use can be 
 made, and even this only with pro- 
 per caution. But as the word is ir- 
 regularly formed (from Jeman we 
 should expect Jaimani), this circum- 
 stance may here, perhaps, carry some 
 weight. [Apparently it is not found 
 in the Mah^bh&hya either ; see /. 
 St., xiii. 455. On the other hand, the 
 name Jaimini occurs in the concluding 
 vanSa of the Sdma-vidhiSna-BriShni. 
 (v. I. St. ,iv. 377), and here the bearer 
 of it is described as the disciple of 
 Vydsa PdrsKarya, and preceptor of a 
 Paushpindya, which answers exactly 
 to the statement in the Vishriu-Pur. , 
 iii. 6. I, 4, where he appears as the 
 teacher of Paushpiniji (of. also Ua- 
 
 ghuv., 18. 32, 33). The special re- 
 lation of Jaimini to the S^ma-Veda 
 appears also from the statements in 
 the Rig-Gyihyas (see note 49 above), 
 which agree with Vishnu-Pur., iii. 
 4. 8, 9. Indeed, the Charana-vytiha 
 specifies a Jaiminiya recension of 
 the Sslman ; and this recension ap- 
 pears to be still in existence (see 
 note 60 above). In the Pravara 
 section of the A^val.-Srauta-S., xii. 
 10, the Jaiminis are classed as be- 
 longing to the Bhrigus. — All this, 
 however, does not afford us any 
 direct clue to the date of our Jai- 
 mini above, whose work, besides, 
 is properly more related to the 
 Yajur- than to the Sdma-Veda. 
 According to the Paiichatantra, the 
 ' Mlmdnsilkrit ' Jaimini was killed 
 by an elephant — a statement which, 
 considering the antiquity of this 
 work, is always of some value ; al- 
 though, on the other hand, unfortun- 
 ately, in consequence of the many 
 changes its text has undergone, we 
 have no guarantee that this parti- 
 cular notice formed part of the orig- 
 inal text which found its way to 
 Persia in the sixth century (of. /. St., 
 viii. 159). — There is also an astro- 
 logical (Jdtaka) treatise which goes 
 by the name of Jaimini-SAtra ; see 
 Catal. of Sh: MSS. N. W. Pro. 
 (1874), PP- 508, 5io> 514. S32-] 
 
PHILOSOPHY : KARMA-MIMANSA. 241 
 
 are cited in this Siitra — Atreya, Badari, Badarayana, 
 Labukayana (1),^^* Aiti^ayana — the names of the first and 
 second, at all events, may be pointed out in the Taittin'ya- 
 Prati^akhya and the Srauta-Siitra of Katyayana respec- 
 tively ; while we meet with the family of the Aita^ayanas 
 in the KausMtaki-Brahmana.* Badarayana is the name 
 of the author of the Brahma-Mimansa-Siitra ; hut it 
 by no means follows from the mention of him here that 
 his Siitra is older than the Siitra of Jaimini ; for not only 
 may the name, as a patronymic, have designated other 
 persons besides, but in the Siitra of the Brahma-Mfmansa 
 the case is exactly reversed, and Jaimini in his turn is 
 mentioned there. All that results from this, as well as 
 from the fact of each Siitra frequently citing its own 
 reputed author, is rather that these Siitras were not really- 
 composed by these teachers themselves, but only by their 
 respective schools.t The name Badarayana is not to be 
 found " in Panini," as has recently been erroneously as- 
 serted,J but only in the gana-pdtha to Panini, not a very 
 sure authority for the present. — As leading expounders of 
 the Jaimini-Siitra we have mention of Sabara-svamin,^^ 
 and, after him, of Kumarila-bhatta ; ^^"^ the latter is said 
 to have flourished prior to Sainkara.§ 
 
 ^°' In the passage in question (vi. ^^' This commentary of ^abara- 
 7. 37) ought we not to read L^ma- BvStmin, which is even cited by 
 k^yana? This is the name of a Sanxkara (Teddnta-SiXtra-hTi., iii, 3. 
 teacher who is several times men- 53)> with the text of Jaimini itself, 
 tioned in the S^ma-Slitras ; see /. is at present still in course of publi- 
 St., iv. 384, 373. — The apparent cation in the Bihl, Ind., ed. by Ma- 
 mention of Buddha in i, 2. 33 {bud- he&ohandra Ny^yaratna (begun in 
 dha-idsirdt) is only apparent ; here 1863 ; the last part, 1871, brings it 
 the word 'buddha' has nothing down to ix. I. 5). — MEtdhava's Jai- 
 whatever to do with the ,name miniya-nydya-m^U-vistara, edited by 
 'Buddha.' — To the above names Goldstiioker (1865 ff.), is also still 
 must, however, be added Kfchnd- unfinished; see my 7. )S*c. , ii. 376 ff. 
 jini (iv. 3. 17, vi. 7. 35) and Kimu- ^^"' Who appears also to have 
 kdlyana (xi. I. 51) > tlis former of borne the odd name of Tutslta or even 
 these is found also in Kdtydyana and Tutdtita. At all events, Tautitika, 
 in the Vedinta - Stitra, the latter or Tautitita, is interpreted by the 
 only in the 5'ona 'Nada.' scholiast of the Prabodha-chandro- 
 
 * xxs. 5, where they are charae- daya, 20. 9, ed. Brockhaus, to mean 
 
 terised as the scum of the Bhrigu Kumdrila ; and the same explana- 
 
 line, " pdpiahthd BhrigHndm." tion is given by Aufrecht in his 
 
 f See Colebrooke, i. 102, 103, 328, Catalopus, p. 247, in the case of the 
 
 and above p. 49. Tautdtitae mentioned in Mddhava'a 
 
 J By Max Miiller in his otherwise Sarva-darfena-sarngraha. 
 
 most valuable contributions to onr § See Colebrooke, i. 298 : yet the 
 
 knowledge of Indian philosophy in tolerably modern title bliatfa awak- 
 
 the Z. D. M. ff., vi. 9. ens some doubt as to th s : it inny 
 
 Q 
 
242 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 The Brahma-SMra * belongs, as we have just seen, trt 
 Badarayana. The notion that creation is but Illusion, and 
 that the transcendental Brahman is alone the Eeal, but 
 throning in absolute infinitude without any personal exist- 
 ence, is the fundamental doctrine of this system. The 
 attempt is here made to demonstrate that this doctrine 
 is the end and aim of the Veda itself, by bringing all Vedio 
 passages into harmony with this monotheistic pantheism, 
 and by refuting the various views of the Samkhya, or 
 atheistic, the Yoga, or theistic, and the Nyaya, or deistic 
 schools, &c. The notice thus taken of the other systems 
 would of itself seem to prove the posteriority of the Brahma- 
 Sutra; stUl, it is for the present uncertain whether its 
 polemic is in fact directed against these systems in the 
 form in which we now have .them, or merely perhaps 
 against the original tenets out of which these systems 
 have sprung. The teachers' names, at least, which are 
 mentioned in the Brahma-Siitra recur to a large extent in 
 the ^rauta-Siitras ; for example, A^marathya in Aivalaya- 
 na ; f Badari, Karshnajini and Kaiakritsni in Katyayana 
 [see above, p. 139], and, lastly, Atreya in the Taittiriya- 
 Prati^akhya. The name Audulomi belongs exclusively 
 to the Brahma- Siitra.^' The mention of Jaimini and of 
 Badarayana himself has been already touched upon. — 
 Windischmann in his excellent "Samkara" (Bonn, 1832) 
 
 not have belonged to him originally example of the new Kalpas, in con- 
 perhaps ? [According to Cowell, tradistinction to the earlier ones, 
 note to Colebrooke's Misc. Ess,, i. and so is regarded as of the same 
 323, there actually occur in Samkara age with P^ini. If, as is likely, 
 "allusions to Kumdrila-bhatta, if the scholiast took this illustration 
 no direct mention of him ; " the from the Mahdbhdshya [but this is 
 title hhatta belongs quite specially not the case ; v. /. St., xiii. 455], 
 to him: "he is emphatically de- then this statement is important, 
 signed byhis title Bhatta." Forthe I may mention in passing that Aima- 
 rest, this title belongs likewise to rathya occurs in the gana ' Garga ; ' 
 Bhatta-Bhdskara-Misra and Bhattot- Audulomi in the gana 'Bilhu ; ' Krish- 
 pala, and therefore is not by any ndjina in the ganas ' Tika ' and ' Upa- 
 means ' tolerably modern. '] ka;' in the latter also Kd.4akritsna. 
 
 * This name itself occurs in the The Gana-pdtha, however, is a most 
 
 Bhagavad-gltd, xiii. 4, but here it uncertain authority, and for Pi^ini'a 
 
 may be taken, as an appellative rather time without weight, 
 
 than as a proper name. ^'' It is found in the Mahitbhdshya 
 
 + We, have already seen (p. 53) also, on Pinini, iv. I. 85, 78; see 
 
 that the Asmarathalj Kalpah is in- /. St., xiii. 415. 
 stanced bv Pdnini's scholiast as an 
 
PHILOSOPHY: BRAHMA-MIMANSA. 
 
 243 
 
 has attempted directly to fix the age of the Brahma- Siitra. 
 For Badarayana bears also the additional title of Vyasa, 
 whence, too, the Brahma-Siitra is expressly styled Vyasa- 
 Siitra. Now, in the Samkara-vijaya — a biography of the 
 celebrated Vedanta commentator ^amkara, reputed to be 
 by one of his disciples — we find it stated (see Windisch- 
 mann, p. 85 ; Colebrooke, i. 104) that Vyasa was the name 
 of the father of ^uka, one of whose disciples was Gauda- 
 pada, the teacher of Govindanatha, who again was the 
 preceptor of Samkara ; ^^^ so that the date of this Vyasa 
 might be conjecturally set down as from two to three 
 centuries prior to Samkara, that is, between 400 and 500 
 A.D. But the point must remain for the present undeter- 
 mined,* since it is open to question whether this Vyasa 
 ought really to be identified with Vyasa Badarayana, 
 though this appears to me at least very probable.^^' 
 
 ■■iss See now in Aufrecht's Cata- 
 logus, p. 255'', the passage in ques- 
 tion from M^dhava's (!) Samkara- 
 vijaya, V. 5 (rather v. 105, according 
 to the ed. of the work published at 
 Bombay in 1864 with Dhanapati- 
 s^ri's commentary), and ibid., p. 
 227'', the same statements from 
 another work. The Samkara-vijaya 
 of Anandagiri, on the contrary, 
 Aufrecht, p. 247 ff. (now also in the 
 Biil. Ind., edited by Jayan^riLyana, 
 1864-1868), contains nothing of 
 this. 
 
 * Samkara, on Brahma-Slitra, iii. 
 3. 32, mentions that Apdntaratanias 
 lived as Krishna-Dvaipiiyana at the 
 time of the transition from the Kali 
 to the Dvdpara yuga ; and from the 
 fact of his not at the same time ex- 
 pressly stating that this was Vyfca 
 BSidariyana, author of the Brahma- 
 Sfitra, Windischmanu concludes, 
 and justly, that in ^amkara's eyes 
 the two personages were distinct. 
 In the Mahd-Bhitrata, on the con- 
 trary, xii. 12158 ff., Suka is expressly 
 given as the son of Krishna Dvai- 
 psCyana (Vysisa Psird^arya). But the 
 episode in question is certainly one 
 of the very latest insertions, as is 
 clear from the allusion to the Chi- 
 
 nas and Htinas, the Chinese and 
 Huns. 
 
 "*' In the meantime, the name 
 B^dar^yana is only known to occur, 
 besides, in the closing vania of the 
 Sima-Vidhdna-Br. ; see I. St., iv. 
 377 ; and here the bearer of it ap- 
 pears as the disciple of PdrJisary^ya- 
 na, four steps later than Vyfea fdrd- 
 iarya, and three later than Jaimini, 
 but, on the other hand, as the 
 teacher (!) of Tdndin and Sdty^yanin. 
 Besides being mentioned in Jaimini, 
 he is also cited in the Ssindilya-Sdtra. 
 In Yarilha-Mihira and Bhattotpala 
 an astronomer of this name is re- 
 ferred to ; and he, in his turn, ac- 
 cording to Aufrecht {Catalogus, p. 
 329*), alludes, in a, passage quoted 
 from him by Utpala, to the ' Yavana- 
 vnddhds,' and, according to Kern, 
 Pref. to Brih. Samh., p. 51, "ex- 
 hibits many Greek words." — The 
 text of the Brahma-Slitra, with 
 Samkara's commentary, has now 
 been published in the Bibl. Ind., 
 edited by Koer and (from part 3.) 
 R^ma N&^yana Vidyfatna (1854- 
 1863) : of the translation of both by 
 K. M. Banerjea, as of that in Ballan-, 
 tyne's AphoiHsms, only one part has 
 appeared (1870). 
 
244 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 In respect of their reduction to systematic shape, the 
 logical Sutras of Kanada and Gotama appear to rank 
 last. But this by no means indicates that these logical 
 inquiries are themselves of later origin — on the contrary, 
 the other Sutras almost uniformly begin with such — but 
 merely that the formal development of logic into two philo- 
 sophical schools took place comparatively late. Neither 
 of the schools restricts itself to logic alone; each em- 
 braces, rather, a complete philosophical system, built up, 
 however, upon a purely dialectical method. But as yet 
 little has been done to elucidate the points of difference 
 between the two in this regard.^^ The origin of the world 
 is in both derived from atoms, which combine by the wUl 
 of an arranging Power.^ — Whether the name of the 
 TIpd/jLvai, who are described by Strabo as contentious 
 dialecticians, is to be traced to the word pramdna, ' proof,' 
 as Lassen supposes, is doubtful. The word tarlca, ' doubt,' 
 again, in the Kathakopanishad, ought rather, from the 
 context, to be referred to the Samkhya doctrines, and 
 should not be taken in the sense, which at a later period 
 is its usual one, of ' logic' In Manu too (see Lassen, I. 
 AK., i. 83s), according to the traditional interpretation, 
 tarkin still denotes ' one versed in the Mimansa logic' ^^ 
 Yet Manu is also acquainted with logic as a distinct 
 
 ^^'' In this respect, Roer in parti- edited, in the BM. Ind., the NySlya- 
 
 calar has done excellent service : in dar&na of Gotama with the com- 
 
 the copious notes to his translation . mentary of Vitsydyana (Pakshila- 
 
 of the Vai^eshika - Sdtra he has svdmin). The earlier edition (1828) 
 
 throughout special regard to this was accompanied with the com- 
 
 very point (in Z. D. M. G. , vols, mentary of Viivandtha. The first 
 
 xxi. xxii. 1867, 1868). Before four books have been translated by 
 
 him, Muller, with some of Ballan- Ballantyne in his Aphorisms. 
 
 tyne's writings as u, basis, had al- ^ei -^g g^j ^jj^ atomic theory es- 
 
 ready taken the same line (in vols, pecially developed among the Jainas, 
 
 vi. and vii. of the same journal, and that in a materialistic form, 
 
 1852, 1853). The text of the yet so, that the atomic matter and 
 
 Vai^eshika-Siitras, with the com- the vital principle are conceived 
 
 mentary, called Upaskira, of Sam- to be in eternal intimate connec- 
 
 kara-mi^ra, appeared in Sibl. Ind. in tion ; see my Essay on the Bhaga- 
 
 1860, 1861, edited, with a gloss of vati of the Jainas, ii. 168, 176, 190, 
 
 his own, by Jaya Ndr^yana Tarka- 236. We have a mythological ap'- 
 
 panchdnana. In the Pandit (Nos. plication of it in the assumption of 
 
 32-69) there is a complete transla- a prajdpati Marichi ; see /. St., ix. 9. 
 
 tion of both text and commentary 2™ In Pslrask., ii. 6 ("vidliir 
 
 by A. E. Gough.— Jaya Nsirtiyaiia vidheyas tarkai cha vrdah"), tarka 
 
 has also since then (1864-65) ia equivalent to artliavdda, mimdnsd. 
 
PHILOSOPHY : NYAYA—VAISESHIKA. 245 
 
 science, as well as with the three leading methods of proof 
 which it teaches, though not under the names that were 
 afterwards usual. According to the most recent investiga- 
 tions on the subject,* " the terms naiydyika and kevala- 
 TiaiydyiJca (Pan., il i. 49) would point to the Nyaya system 
 as antecedent to Panini:" these words, however, do not 
 occur in the text of Panini at all (which has merely the 
 word hevala!), but only in his scholiast. f — Kanada's 
 system bears the name Vai^eshika-SjAira, because its ad- 
 herents assert that viSesha, ' particularity,' is predicable of 
 atoms ; the system of Gotama, on the other hand, is styled 
 Nydya-Sij,(ra, kut i^cy^vv. Which of the two is the older 
 is still uncertain. The circumstance that the doctrines of 
 the Vai^eshikas are frequently the subject of refutation 
 in the Vedanta-Sdtra, — whereas Gotama's teaching is no- 
 where noticed, either in the text or in the commentaries 
 upon it, as stated by Colebrooke (i. 352), — tells d priori 
 in favour of the higher antiquity of the former ; ^^^ 
 but whether the author of the Vedanta had these ' doc- 
 trines of Kanada' before him in their systematised form, 
 as has recently been assumed^ is a point still requiring 
 investigation.^®* — For the rest, these two systems are at 
 
 * By Max Miiller, I. c, , p. 9. as we know at present, is first men- 
 
 + This is one of the oases of tioned by Mddhava. Their patro- 
 
 which I have already spoken (p. nymics, Kd^yapa and Qautama (this 
 
 225). form is preferable to Gotama) date, 
 
 '■'^■' In the S^nikhya-Siitra they it is true, from a very early time, 
 
 are even expressly mentioned by but, beyond this, they tell us nothing, 
 
 name (see p. 237) ; also in the sacred Of interest, certainly, although 
 
 texts of the Jainas (v. note 249). — without decisive weight, ia the iden- 
 
 The circumstance that the Gotama- tification — occurring in a late com- 
 
 Sdtra does not, like the other five mentator (Anantayajvan) on the 
 
 philosophical text-books, begin with Pitrimedha-Sitra of Gautama, be- 
 
 the customary Sdtra-formula, 'athd longing to the Sima-Veda — of this 
 
 'ta^,' may perhaps also be regarded latter Gautama with Akshap^a ; 
 
 as a sign of later composition. see Burnell's Catalogue, p. 57. — 
 
 J M. Miiller, I. c, p. 9 : " Whereas From Cowell's preface to his edition 
 
 Kandda's doctrines are there fre- of the Kusumiiiijali (1864) it ap- 
 
 quently discussed." pears that the commentary of Pa- 
 
 25* In neither of the Sutras are there kshila-svdmin, whom he directly 
 references to older teachers whose identifies with Vitsydyana, was corn- 
 names might supply some chro- posed prior to Dinniga, that is to 
 nological guidance. As regards the say (see note 219 above), somewhere 
 names of their authors themselves, about the begiiming of the sixth 
 Kandda or Kanabhuj (Kanabhaksha) century. Uddyotakara, who is men- 
 is mentioned by Vardha-Mihira and tioned by Subandhu in the seventh 
 Samkara, while Akshapdda, so far century, wrote against Diilndga, and 
 
246 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 present, and have been for a long time past, those most in 
 favour in India ; and it would also appear that among the 
 philosophical writings contained in the Tibetan Tandjur, 
 logical works are the most numerously represented. 
 
 Besides these six systems, all of which won for them- 
 selves a general currency, and which on the whole are 
 regarded as orthodox — however slight is the title of the 
 Samkhya theory, for instance, to be so esteemed — we have 
 frequent mention of certain heterodox views, as those of 
 the Gharvakas, Laukayatikas,^^ Barhaspatyas. Of this 
 last-mentioned school there must also have existed a com- 
 plete system, the Barhaspatya-Siitra ; but of all this 
 nothing has survived save occasional quotations, intro- 
 duced with a view to their refutation, in the commentaries 
 of the orthodox systems. 
 
 We now come to the third branch of the scientific lite- 
 rature. Astronomy, with its auxiliary sciences.* We have 
 already seen (pp. 112, 113) that astronomy was cultivated 
 to a considerable extent even in Vedic times; and we 
 found it expressly specified by Strabo (see pp. 29, 30) as a 
 favourite pursuit of the Brahmans. It was at the same 
 time remarked, however, that this astronomy was stUl in a 
 very elementary stage, the observations of the heavens 
 being still wholly confined to a few fixed stars, more espe- 
 cially to the twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar asterisms, 
 and to the various phases of the moon itself.^^ The cir- 
 cumstance that the Vedic year is a solar year of 360 days. 
 
 BO did Ydchaspati - mi^ra in the A Bhdguri appears among the 
 
 tenth, and Udayana, the author ot teachers cited in the Brihad-devata. 
 
 the Kusumdnjali, in the twelfth The Lokdyatas are also repudiated 
 
 century ; see also Cowell's note to by the Buddhists, Northern as well 
 
 Colebroote's Misc. Ess., i. 282. Gan- as Southern ; v. Burnonf, Lotus de 
 
 ge^a's Nydya-chiutdmani, the most la bonne Loi, pp. 409, 470. The 
 
 important work of the later Nydya Jainas, too, rank their system only 
 
 literature, is also placed in the with loiya- {laukika) knowledge ; 
 
 twelfth century ; see Z. D. M. O., see above, note 249. — On the Chdr- 
 
 xxvii. 168. Aultikya, given by ydkas, see the introduction of the 
 
 Mjidhava as a name for the tenets Sarya-darsana-saipgraha. 
 
 of Kandda, rests on a play upon * See /. St., ii. 236-287. 
 
 the word TcdnAda, ' crow - eater ' = -^ The cosmical or astronomical 
 
 "ii/siio. data met with in the Brdhmanas are 
 
 ^"5 In the Mahdbhdshya there is all of an extremely childish and naive 
 
 mention of a "vamiM, Bhdgurl description; see /. St., ix. 35S ff, 
 lokdi/atasya ; " see 7. St., xiii. 343. 
 
ASTRONOMY : THE LUNAR ASTERISMS. 247 
 
 and not a lunar year, does indeed presuppose a tolerably 
 accurate observation and computation of the sun's course ; 
 but, agreeably to what has just been stated, we can hardly 
 imagine that this computation proceeded upon the pheno- 
 mena of the nocturnal heavens, and we must rather assume 
 it to have been based upon the phenomena of the length 
 or shortness of the day, &c. To the elaboration of a quin- 
 quennial cycle with an intercalary month a pretty early 
 date must be assigned, since the latter is mentioned in the 
 Rik-Sainhita. The idea of the four mundane ages, on the 
 contrary — although its origin, from observation of the 
 moon's phases, may possibly be of extreme antiquity ^®^ — 
 can only have attained to its complete development to- 
 wards the close of the Vedic period : Megasthenes, as we 
 know, found the Yuga system flourishing in full perfection. 
 That the Hindii division of the moon's path into twenty- 
 seven (or twenty-eight) lunar mansions is of Chinese origin, 
 as asserted by Biot (Jmirnal des Savants, 1840, 1845 ; see 
 Lassen, /. A£^., i. 742 £f.), can hardly be admitted.^^ 
 Notwithstanding the accounts of Chinese writers, the 
 contrary might equally well be the case, and the system 
 might possibly have been introduced into China through 
 the medium of Buddhism, especially as Buddhist writings 
 adhere to the ancient order of the asterisms — commencing 
 with Krittikd — precisely as we find it among the Chinese.^* 
 
 ^^ Roth disputes this origin in his Courtes Ohservations sur qudquea 
 
 Easay, Die Lehre von den vier Weltal- Points dtVHistoire de V Astronomie 
 
 teTi(i86o, Tiibingen). (1863) ; and, lastly, Whitney in the 
 
 ^^ On the questions dealt with second vol. of his Oriental and Lin- 
 
 in what follows, a special discussion guistic Studies (1874). To the views 
 
 was raised between J. B. Biot, my- expressed above I still essentially 
 
 self, and Whitney, in which A. S^- adhere ; Whitney, too, inclines to- 
 
 dillot, Stein Schneider, E. Burgess, wards them. In favour of Chaldsea 
 
 and Max Miiller also took part. Cf . having been the mother - country 
 
 ihe Journal des Savants ior iS^g, and of the system, one circumstance, 
 
 Biot's posthumous Etudes sur VAs- amongst others, tells with especial 
 
 tronomie Indienne et Chinoise (1862); force, viz., thatfrom China, India, and 
 
 my two papers. Die VediscJien Nach- Babylon we have precisely the same 
 
 richten, von den Nakshatra (i860, accounts of the length of the longest 
 
 1862), as also /. Str., ii. 172, 173 ; day ; whilst the statements, e.g., in 
 
 /. St., ix. 424 fF. (1865), X. 213 £F. the Bundehesch, on this head, exhi- 
 
 (1866) ; Whitney in Joum. Am. Or. bit a total divergence ; see Wiudisch- 
 
 Soc, vols. vi. and viii. (i860, 1864, mann {Zoroastrische Studien, p. 105). 
 
 1865); Burgess, ihid.; Steinsohnei- '^' This assertion of Biot's has not 
 
 der in Z. D. M. G., xviii. (1863) ; been confirmed; the Chinese list 
 
 Miiller in Pref. to vol. iv. of his edi- commences with Chitri (i.e., the 
 
 tion of the Rik (1862); S^dillot, autumnal equinox), or UttarSlshiJdbiia 
 
248 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 To ine, however, the most probahle view is that these lunar 
 mansions are of Chaldsean origia, and that from the Chal- 
 daeans they passed to the Hindus as well as to the Chinese. 
 For the /li'PTD of the Book of Kings, and the J1i>J0 of the 
 Book of Joh,^™ which the Biblical commentators errone- 
 ously refer to the zodiac, are just the Arabic Jjll*, ' man- 
 sions ; ' and here even Biot will hardly suppose a Chinese 
 origin. The Indians may either have brought the know- 
 ledge of these lunar mansions with them into India, or else 
 have obtained it at a later time through the commercial 
 relations of the Phcenicians with the Panjab. At all events, 
 they were known to the Indians from a very early period, 
 and as communication with China is altogether inconceiv- 
 able at a time when the Hindus were perhaps not even 
 acquainted with the mouths of the Ganges, Chinese influ- 
 ence is here quite out of the question. The names of some 
 of these asterisms occur even in the Rik-Samhita (and that 
 under peculiar forms); for example, the Aghds, i.e., Maghds, 
 and the Arjunyau, i.e., Phalgunyau — a name also applied 
 to them in the Satapatha-Br^mana — ^in the nuptial hymn, 
 mandala x. 85. 13; further, Tishya ia' mandala v. 54. 13, 
 which, however, is referred by Sayana to the sun (see also 
 X. 64. 8). The earliest complete enumeration of them, with 
 their respective regents, is found in the Taittiriya-Sam- 
 
 (the winter solstice), both of which nomy in Chaldsea, Wassiljew 00m- 
 rather correspond to an arrangement pares with Zoroaster, but in which 
 in which Revati passes as the sign of I am inclined rather to look for 
 thevernaleqainoz;seemyfirst Essay the Kraushtuki whose acquaint- 
 on the Nakshatras, p. 300. — Cf. here ance we make in the Atharva-Parii 
 also the accountof the twenty-eight (see I4t. C. Bl., 1S69, p. 1497) — 
 lunar asterisms, contained in a letter who arranged the constellations in 
 from Wassil jew to Schiefner (see the the order quoted in the Dictionary 
 latter's German translation of the in question, that is, beginning with 
 Preface to Wassiljew's Russian ren- Krittitcd. Afterwards there came 
 dering of Tdransitha's history of Bud- another Rishi, Killa (Time !), who 
 dhism, pp. 30-32, 1869), and commu- set up a new theory in regard to the 
 nicated, according to the commentary motion of the constellations, and so 
 on the Buddhistic Lexicon Hah^ in course of time Chitni came to be 
 Tyutpatti, from the book Sannipilta named as the first asterism. To all 
 (Chinese Ta-tsiking). According appearance, this actually proves the 
 to this account, it was the astrono- late, and Buddhistic, origin of the 
 mer Kharoshtha (ass's-lip) — a name Chinese Kio-list ; see NaJahatrai, i. 
 which, as well aa that of Xarustr, 306. 
 
 who, as Armenian authorities state, *'" On this point see specially /. 
 
 originated the science of astro- St., z. 217. 
 
ASTRONOMY : THE PLANETS. 240 
 
 liita ; a second, which exhibits considerable variation in 
 the names, betokening a later date, occurs in the Atharva- 
 Samhita and the Taittiriya-Brahmana ; the majority of the 
 names are also given in Panini. This latter list contains 
 for the most part the names employed by the later astro- 
 nomers ; and it is precisely these later ones that are enu- 
 merated in the so-called Jyotisha or Vedic Calendar (along 
 with the zodiacal signs too !). To this latter treatise an 
 importance has hitherto been attributed to which its con- 
 tents do not entitle it. Should my conjecture be confirmed 
 that the Lagadha, Lagata, whose system it embodies, is 
 identical with the Lat who is mentioned by Albinini as 
 the author of the ancient Siirya-Siddhanta [see, however, 
 p. 258 n.], then it would fall in the fourth or fifth century 
 of our era ; and even this might almost seem too high an 
 antiquity for this somewhat insignificant tract, which has 
 only had a certain significance attached to it on account 
 of its being ranked with the Veda.* 
 
 A decided advance in astronomical science was made 
 through the discovery of the planets. The earliest men- 
 tion of these occurs, perhaps, in the Taittiriya-Aranyaka, 
 though this is still uncertain ; ^^ beyond this, they are not 
 noticed in any other work of the Yedic period.^'^ Manu's 
 
 * This is why it adheres to the old on the Jyotisha, p. 10, /. >S(. , is. 363, 
 order of the lunar asterisms, as is 442, x. 239, 240. — The two Rik pas- 
 done even at the present day in writ- sages which are thought by Alf. 
 ings that bear upon the Veda. [Ac- Ludwig, in his recently published 
 cording to the special examination of Nachrichten, des Rig- und Atltai'va- 
 the various points here involved, in Veda uber Oeographie, etc., des alttn 
 the introduction to my Essay on the Jndiens, to contain an allusion to the 
 Jyotisha (1862), it somewhat earlier planets (i. 105. 10, x. 55. 3), can 
 term is possible ; assuming, of course, hardly have any such reference, 
 as I there do, that those verses which Neither the ^^ty^yauaka, cited by 
 betoken Greek influence do not S^yana to i. 105. 10, nor S^yana 
 really belong to the text as it origi- himself,hasanythoughtof theplanets 
 ually stood. The author appears here (see/. St., ix. 363 n.). For the 
 occasionally also under the name ' divieJiard grahdh' ot Ath. S. , l^. g. 
 Lagadiichirya ; see above, p. 61, 7, the Ath. Pariiishtas ofl^er other 
 note.] parallels, showing that here too the 
 
 ^1 The passages referred to are, in planets are not to be thought of, 
 
 fact, to be understood in a totally especially as immediately afterw.-irds, 
 
 difTerent sense ; see /. St., ix. 363, x. in v. 10, the 'graJidd chdndramasdh 
 
 271. . . ddiiydh . . rdhund' sltb enwcae- 
 
 ^'' The MaitrtEyani-Up. forms the rated, where, distinctly, the allusion 
 
 single exception, but that only in its is only to eclipses. This particular 
 
 last two books, described as ijiila ; section of the Ath. S. (19. 7) is, 
 
 see above, notes 103, 104. On the moreover, quite a late production ; 
 
 subject itself, see further my Essay see /. St., iv. 433 n. 
 
250 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 law-book is unacquainted with them ; Yajnavalkya's Code, 
 however — and this is significant as to the difference in 
 age of these two works — inculcates their worship ; in the 
 dramas of Kalidasaj in the Mrichhakatl and the Maha- 
 Bharata, as well as the Eamayana, they are repeatedly 
 referred to.* Their names are peculiar, and of purely 
 Indian origin ; three of them are thereby designated as 
 sons respectively of the Sun (Saturn), of the Earth (Mars), 
 and of the Moon (Mercury) ; and the remaining two as 
 representatives of the two oldest families of Rishis, — An- 
 giras (Jupiter) and Bhrigu (Venus). The last two names 
 are probably connected with the fact that it was the adhe- 
 rents of the Atharva-Veda — which was likewise specially 
 associated with the Rishis Angiras and Bhrigu — who at this 
 time took the lead in the cultivation of astronomy and 
 astrology.t Besides these names others are also common ; 
 Mars, for example, is termed ' the Eed ;' Venus, ' the White' 
 or ' Beaming ; ' Saturn, ' the Slow-travelling ; ' this last 
 being the only one of the names that testifies to any real 
 astronomical observation. To these seven planets (sun 
 and moon being included) the Indians added two others, 
 Eahu and Ketu, the ' head ' and ' tail ' respectively of the 
 monster who is conceived to be the cause of the solar 
 and lunar eclipses. The name of the former, Eahu, first 
 occurs in the Chhandogyopanishad,^^^ though here it can 
 hardly be taken in the sense of ' planet ; ' the latter, on the 
 contrary, is first mentioned in Yajnavalkya. But this num- 
 ber nine, is not the original number, — ^if indeed it be to the 
 planets that the passage of the Taittiriya-Aranyaka, aboi{e 
 instanced, refers — as only seven {sapta s'A,rydh) are there 
 mentioned. The term for planet, graha, ' the seizer,' is 
 evidently of astrological origin ; indeed, astrology was the 
 focus in which astronomical inquiries generally converged, 
 and from which they drew light and animation after the 
 practical exigencies of worship had been once for all satis- 
 fied. Whether the Hindiis discovered the planets inde- 
 
 * In Pitij., iv. 2. 26, iuhra might nify • an astrologer ; ' see Da&- 
 be referred to the planet Sukra, but kuiu^ra, ed. Wilson, p. 162. 11. 
 it is preferable to take it in the sense ^^ Cf. also Eithula as the name of 
 of Soma-juioe. Buddha's son, who, however, also 
 
 t Whence Bh^rgava came to sig- appears as Lstghula ; see 7. St., iii 
 
 130, 149. 
 
ASTRONOMY: GREEK INFLUENCE. 251 
 
 pendently, or whetlier the knowledge came to them from 
 "without, cannot as yet be determined ; hut the systematic 
 peculiarity of the nomenclature points in the meantime to 
 the former view.^'* 
 
 It was, however, Greek influence that first infused a real 
 life into Indian astronomy. This occupies a much more 
 important position in relation to it than has hitherto been 
 supposed; and the fact that this is so, eo ipso implies 
 that Greek influence affected other branches of the litera- 
 ture as well, even though we may be unable at present 
 directly to trace it elsewhere.^'^ Here it is necessary to 
 insert a few particulars as to the relations of the Greeks 
 with the Indians. 
 
 The invasion of the Panjab by Alexander was followed 
 by the establishment of the Greek monarchies of Bactria, 
 whose sway, in the period of their prime, extended, al- 
 though only for a brief season, over the Panjab as far 
 as Gujarat.^'^ Concurrently therewith, the first Seleu- 
 cidse, as well as the Ptolemies, frequently maintained 
 direct relations, by means of ambassadors, with the court 
 of Pataliputra ; * and thus it comes that in the inscriptions 
 
 ''* Still it has to be remarked that to whom the name was afterwards 
 
 in the Atharva-Pari^ishtag, which, transferred ; see /. St., xiii. 306, 
 
 with the Jyotisha, represent the 307 ; also note 202 above, 
 oldest remains of Indian astrology, * Thus Megasthenes was sent by 
 
 the sphere of influence of the planets Seleucus to Chandragupta (d. B.C. 
 
 appears in special connection with 291); Deimachus, again, by An- 
 
 their Greek names ; see /. St., viii. tiochus, and Dionysius, and most 
 
 413, X. 319. probably Basilis also, by Ptolemy II. 
 
 ^'' Cf. my paper, Indische Beitrage to 'A/urpoxdrTis, Amitraghdta, son 
 
 eur Geschichte der Aussprache des of Chandragupta. [Antiochus con- 
 
 GriechischenintheMonatsberichteder eluded an alliance with ^u^iaya- 
 
 5e)'?, jlcad., 1871, p. 613, translated (rii^as, Subhagasena (?). Seleucus 
 
 in Ind. Antiq., ii. 143 ff., 1873. even gave Chandragupta his daugh- 
 
 276 According to Goldstiioker, the ter to wife; Lassen, /. AK., ii. 
 
 statement in the Mahdbbiishya as to 208 ; Talboys Wheeler, History of 
 
 a then recent siege of Silketa (Oude) 7»idia (1874), p. 177. Intheretinue 
 
 by a Yavana prince has reference to of this Qreek princess there of 
 
 Menander ; while the accounts in course came to Pdtaliputra Greek 
 
 the Yuga-Purdna of the Gdrgl Sam- damsels as her waiting-maids, and 
 
 hitil even speak of an expedition of these must have found particular 
 
 the Yavanaa as far as Piltaliputra. favour in the eyes of the Indians, 
 
 But then the question arises,whether especially of their princes. For not 
 
 by the Yavanas it is reiilly the only are irapBivoi eieiSeh irpbs iraX- 
 
 Greeks who are meant (see /. Str., \aKlav mentioned as an article of 
 
 ii. 348), or possibly merely their traffic for India, but in Indian in- 
 
 Indo-Scythian or other successors, scriptions also we find Yavana girls 
 
252 SANSKRIT LITERA TURE. 
 
 of Piyadasi we find mention of th'e names of Antigonus, 
 Magas, Antiochus, Ptolemy, perhaps even of Alexander 
 himself (cf. p. 179), ostensibly as vassals of the king, 
 which is of course mere empty boasting. As the result 
 of these embassies, the commercial intercourse between 
 Alexandria and the west coast of India became particu- 
 larly brisk ; and the city of Ujjayini, 'O^r/v^, rose in con- 
 sequence to a high pitch of prosperity. Philostratus, in 
 his life of ApoUonius of Tyana — a work written in the 
 second century A.D., and based mainly on the accounts of 
 Damis, a disciple of ApoUonius, who accompanied the 
 latter in his travels through India about the year 50 a.d. — 
 mentions the high esteem in which Greek literature was 
 held by the Brahmans, and that it was studied by almost 
 all persons of the higher ranks. (Reinaud, M^m. sur I'Inde, 
 pp. 85, 87.) This is not very high authority, it is true 
 [cf. Lassen, I. AK., iii. 358 ff.]; the statement may be an 
 exaggeration, but stiU it accords with the data which we 
 have now to adduce, and which can only be explained 
 upon the supposition of a very lively intellectual inter- 
 change. For the Indian astronomers regularly speak of 
 the Yavanas as their teachers : but whether this also ap- 
 plies to Para^ara, who is reputed to be the oldest Indian 
 astronomer, is stUl uncertain. To judge from the quota- 
 tions, he computes by the lunar mansions, and would 
 seem, accordingly, to stand upon an independent footing. 
 But of Garga,* who passes for the next oldest astronomer, 
 
 Bpecified as tribute; while in Indian * The name of ParsMara, as well 
 
 literature, and especially in Kdli- aa that of Garga, belongs only to 
 
 diiaa, we are informed that Indian the last stage of Vedic literattire, to 
 
 princes were waited upon by Ya- the Aranyakas and the Sutras : in 
 
 vanis ; Lassen, /. AK., ii. 551, 9S7> the earlier works neither of the two 
 
 1 159, and my Preface to the Mdla- names is mentioned. The family 
 
 viki, p. xlvii. The metier of these of the Pard^aras is represented with 
 
 damsels being devoted to Eros, it particular frequency in the later 
 
 is not a very far-fetched conjecture members of the vanias of the Sata- 
 
 that it may have been owing to patha-Brdhmana : a Garga and a, 
 
 their influence that the Hindi god PardiSara are also named in the 
 
 of Love, like the Greek Eros, bears Anukramani as Rishis of several 
 
 a dolphin {makara) on his banner, hymns of the Rik, and another 
 
 and, like him, is the son of the Pardsara appears in Pitnini as author 
 
 goddess of Beauty ; see Z. D. M. <?., of the Bhikshu-Siitra; see pp. 143, 
 
 xiv. 269. (For makara — dolphin, 185. [The Gargas must have played 
 
 see Journ. Bomi. Br. R. A. S., v. a very important part at the time of 
 
 33> 34; ^- Sl/i:, ii. 169); and cf. the Mahdbhdshya, in the eyes of the 
 
 further /. St., is. 380.] author at all events; for on almost 
 
ASTRONOMY: GREEK INFLUENCE. 
 
 253 
 
 an oft-c[uoted verse has come down to us, in ■which he 
 extols the Yavanas on account of their astronomical 
 knowledge. The epic tradition, again, gives as the earliest 
 astronomer the Asura Maya, and asserts that to him the 
 sun-god himself imparted the knowledge of the stars. I 
 have already elsewhere (Z St., ii. 243) expressed the con- 
 jecture that this 'Asura Maya' is identical with the 
 ' Ptolemaios ' of the Greeks ; since this latter name, as we 
 see from the inscriptions of Piyadasi, became in Indian 
 ' Turamaya,' out of which the name ' Asura Maya ' might 
 very easily grow; and since, by the later tradition (that 
 of the Jnana-bhaskara, for instance) this Maya is dis- 
 tinctly assigned to Eomaka-pura* in the West. Lastly, 
 of the five Siddhantas named as the earliest astronomi- 
 cal systems, one — the Eomaka-Siddhanta — ^is denoted, by 
 its very name, as of Greek origin; while a second — the 
 Paulila-Siddhanta — is expressly stated by Albininif to 
 have been composed by Paulus al Yiinani, and is accord- 
 ingly, perhaps, to be regarded as a translation of the 
 Elaarytayij of Paulus Alexandrinus.^'^ The astronomers 
 
 every occasion when it is a question 
 of a patronymic or otlier similar 
 affix, their name is introduced 
 among those- given as examples ; 
 see /. St., xiii. 410 £F. In the 
 Atharva-Pari^ishtas, also, we find 
 Garga, GSrgya, Vriddha-Garga cited: 
 these latter Gargas are manifestly 
 very closely related to the above- 
 mentioned Garga the astronomer. 
 See further Kern, Pref. to Var^ha- 
 Mihira's Brih. Samh., p. 31 flf. ; /. 
 Str., ii. 347.] 
 
 * See my Catal. of the Sansle. 
 MSS. in the Berl. Lib., p. 288. In 
 reference to the name Romaka, I 
 may make an observation in passing. 
 Whereas, in MabS-Bh^rata xii. 
 10308, the Eaumyas are said to 
 have been created from the roma- 
 hipas ('hair-pores') of Vlrabhadra, 
 at the destruction of Daksba's sac- 
 rifice, at the time of Eto^yana i. 
 55. 3, their name must have been 
 still unknown, since other tribes 
 are there represented, on a like 
 bccasidn, as springing from the 
 roma-Mpas. Had the author been 
 
 acquainted with the name, he would 
 scarcely have failed to make a 
 similar use of it to that found in the 
 Mah^-Bbdrata. [Cf. my Essay on 
 the Eiimdyana, p. 23 ff.] 
 
 f Albinini resided a considerable 
 time in India, in the following of 
 Mahmtid of Ghasna, and acquired 
 there a very accurate knowledge of 
 Sanskrit and of Indian literature, of 
 which he has left us a very valuable 
 account, written a.d. 1031. Ex- 
 tracts from this highly important 
 work were communicated byEeinaud 
 in the Journ. Asiat. for 1844, and 
 in bis M4m. sur I'Inde in 1849 [also 
 by Woepcke, ibid., 1863] : the text, 
 promised so long ago as 1843, and 
 most eagerly looked for ever siUce, 
 has, unfortunately, not as yet ap- 
 peared. [Ed. Sachau, of Vienna, is 
 at present engaged in editing it; and, 
 from his energy, we may now at 
 length expect that this grievous 
 want will be speedily supplied.] 
 
 -'' Such a direct connection of 
 the PuMa - Piddhanta with the 
 'Elaa-yuiyi] is attended with difficulty, 
 
25 + 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 and astronomical -works just instanced — Garga, Maya, tlie 
 Komaka-Siddhanta, and the Pauli^a-Siddhanta — are, it' 
 is true, known to us only througli isolated quotations; 
 and it might stUl be open to doubt, perhaps, whether 
 in their case the presence of Greek influence can really 
 be established ; although the assertion, for instance, tha,t 
 Pulila, in opposition to Arj-abhata,^^* began the day at 
 midnight, is of itself pretty conclusive as to his "Western 
 origin. But all doubt disappears when we look at the 
 great mass of Greek words employed- in his writings by 
 Varaha-Mihira, to whom Indian astronomers assigned, in 
 Albiriini's day, as they still do in our own,* the date 504 
 A.D. — employed, too, in a way which clearly indicates that 
 they had long- been in current use. N"ay, one of his works 
 ■ — the Hora-Sastra — even bears a Greek title (from mprf) ; 
 and in it he not only gives the entire list of the Greek 
 names of the zodiacal signs and planets,+ but he also 
 directly employs several of the latter — namely, Ara, 
 Asphujit, and Kbna — side by side with the Indian names, 
 and just as frequently as he does these. The signs of the 
 
 from the fact that the quotations 
 from Pulifo do not accord with it, 
 being rather of an a-stronomicai than 
 an astrological description. That 
 the Biira7uyi), however, was itself 
 knowntotheHindtis,in some form or 
 other, finds support in the circum- 
 stance that it alone contains nearly 
 the whole of the technical terms 
 adopted by Indian astronomy from 
 the Greek ; see Kern's Preface to 
 his edition of Var^ha - Mihira's 
 Brihat-Samh., p. 49. — Considerable 
 interest attaches to the argument 
 put forward by H. Jacobi in his 
 tract, De Astrologice IndiccB Hard 
 AppellatcB Originibus (Bonn, 1872), 
 to tbe effect that the system of the 
 twelve mansions occurs first in Fir- 
 raicus Maternus '(a.d. 336-354)1 and 
 that consequently the Indian Horil- 
 texts, in which these are of such 
 fundamental significance, can only 
 have been composed at a still later 
 date. 
 
 "'^ This, and not Aryabhatta, is 
 the proper spelling of his name, as 
 is shown by the metre in his own 
 
 work [Ganita-pdda, v. i). This 
 was pointed out by Bhiu Ddjl in 
 J. R. A. S., i. 392 (1864). 
 
 ■* See Colebrooke, ii. 461 (415 ed. 
 Cowell). 
 
 H" These are the following : Kriya 
 Kpi6s, TdvuH raOpos, Jituma SlSvjios, 
 Kidlra KoKovpos ■ (I), Leya \4tiiv, Pd- 
 thona irapBivos, Jiika ^vybv, Kav/rpya 
 (TKopirtos, Tauhshiha T0^6Tr]s, Akokera 
 alydKepas, Hridroga idpoxios, Ittha 
 iyfiii ; further, Heli "HXios, Himna 
 "Slpp.'qs, Ara 'ApTis, Kona Kpdvos, 
 Jyau Zeis, Asphujit 'A^/joSIttj. 
 These names were made known so 
 long ago as 1827 by C. M. -Whish, 
 in the first part of the Transactions 
 of the Literary Society of Madras, 
 and have since been frequently pub- 
 lished ; see in particular Lassen, in 
 Zeilsch. f. d. Kunde des Morg., iv. 
 306, 318 (1842) ; lately again in my 
 Catal. of the Sansk. MSS. in the 
 Berl. Lib., p. 238. — Sard and hen- 
 dra had long previously been iden- 
 tified by P6re Pons -with &piii and 
 K(vrpov ; see Lettres Edif,, 26. 236, 
 237, Paris, 1743. 
 
ASTRONOMY: GREEK TECHNICAL TERMS, ETC. 255 
 
 zodiac, on the contrary, he usually designates by their 
 Sanskrit names, which are translated from the Greek. 
 He has in constant use, too, the following technical terms, 
 all of which are found employed in the same sense in 
 the Elaaymy^ of Paulus Alexandrinus, viz.,* drikdna = 
 BeKav6<;, lipid = XeTTTJ?, anaphd = ava<pi], sunaphd = 
 crvvatf>i], durudhard = Sopv^opia, kemadruma (for krema- 
 dtcma) = 'xprjtiaTia^o^^''^ vek — ^a<7i^,kendra = xevrpov, 
 dpoklima = airoKXifMa, panaphard = eirava^opd, trikona 
 = rpiycovoi;, kibuka = v-jroyeiov, Jdmitra = Sidf/,eTpov, 
 dyutam = Svtov, meshdrana = fitaovpdvqfia. 
 
 Although most of these names denote astrological re- 
 lations, still, on the other hand, in the division of the 
 heavens into zodiacal signs, decani, and degrees, they com- 
 prise all that the Hindus lacked, and that was necessary 
 to enable them to cultivate astronomy in a scientiiic spirit. 
 And accordingly we find that they turned these Greek 
 aids to good account ; rectifying, in the first place, the 
 order of their lunar asterisms, which was no longer in ac- 
 cordance with reality, so that the two which came last in 
 the old order occupy the two first places in the new ; and 
 even, it would seem, in some points independently ad- 
 vancing astronomical science further than the Greeks 
 themselves did. Their fame spread in turn to the West ; 
 and the Andubarius (or, probably, A?*dubarius), whom the 
 Chronicon Paschalef places in primeval times as the 
 earliest Indian astronomer, is doubtless none other than 
 Aryabhata, the rival of Puli^a, who is lilcewise extolled 
 by the Arabs under the name Arjabahr. For, during the 
 eighth and ninth centuries, the Arabs were in astronomy 
 the disciples of the Hindus, from whom they borrowed 
 the lunar mansions in their new order, and whose Sid- 
 dhantas (Sindhends) they frequently worked up and 
 translated, — in part under the supervision of Indian astro- 
 nomers themselves, whom the Khalifs of Bagdad, &c., 
 invited to their courts. The same thing took place also 
 
 * See 7. St., ii. 254. nally dates from the time of Con- 
 ^^ Rather = KevoSpofies, accord- stantius (330) ; it underwent, bow- 
 ing to Jaoobi, I. c. To this list be- ever, a fresh recension under Hera- 
 longs, further, the word harija = clius (610-641), and the name 
 opliav; Kern, /. c, p. 29. Andubarius may have been intro- 
 t The Chronicon Pascltcde nomi- duced then. 
 
256 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 in regard to Algebra and Arithmetic in particular, in both 
 of which, it appears, the Hindiis attained, quite indepen- 
 dently,^^" to a high degree of proficiency .^^^ It is to them 
 also that we owe the ingenious invention of the numerical 
 symbols,* which in like manner passed from them to the 
 
 2®' But of. Colebrooke in his 
 famous paper On the Algebra of the 
 Sindus (i8|7) in Misc. lies., ii. 446, 
 401 ed. Ciiwell. Woepoke, indeed 
 {Mim. sur la propagation^ des Chiffres 
 Indiens, Paris, 1863, pp. 75-91), is 
 of opinion that, the account in the 
 Lalita - Vistara of the problem, 
 solved by Buddha on the occasion 
 of his marriage-examination, rela- 
 tive to the number of atoms in. the 
 length of a yojana, is the basis 
 of the ' Arenarius ' of Archimedes 
 (b.o. 287-212). But the age of the 
 Lalita - Vistara is by no means so 
 well ascertained that the reverse 
 might not equally well be the case; 
 see I. St., viii. 325, 326 ; Reiuaud, 
 MSm. sur I'Inde, p. 303. 
 
 "81 The oldest known trace of 
 these occurs, curiously, in Pingala's 
 Treatise on Prosody, in the last chap- 
 ter of which (presumably a later addi- 
 tion), the permutations of longs and 
 shorts possible in a metre with a 
 fixed number of syllables are set 
 forth in an enigmatical form ; see 
 J. St., viii. 425 ff., 324-326. — On 
 geometry the Sulva-Siitras, apper- 
 taining to the Srauta ritual, furnish 
 highly remarkable information ; see 
 Thibaut's Address to the Aryan 
 Section of the London International 
 Congress of Orientalists, in the 
 special number of Trilbner's Ameri- 
 can and Oriental Literary Record, 
 1874, pp. 27, 28, according to which 
 these SAtras even contain attempts 
 at squaring the circle. 
 
 * The Indian figures from 1-9 
 are abbreviated forms of the initial 
 letters of the numerals themselves 
 [cf. the similar notation of the 
 musical tones] ; the zero, too, has 
 arisen out of the first letter of the 
 word Hnyd, ' empty ' [it occurs even 
 in Pingala, I. c. It is the decimal 
 
 place-value of these figures which 
 gives them their special significance. 
 Woepcke, in his above-quoted Mim. 
 sur la propag. des Chiffres Indiens 
 (Jawm. Asiat., 1863), is of opinion 
 that even prior to their adoption by 
 the Arabs they had been obtained 
 from India by the Neo-Pythagoreans 
 of Alexandria, and that the so- 
 called Gobar figures are traceable to 
 them. But against this it has to be 
 remarked that the figures in ques- 
 tion are only one of the latest stages 
 of Indian numerical notation, and 
 that a great many other notations 
 preceded them. According to Ed- 
 ward Thomas, in the Journ. Asiat. 
 for the same year (1863), the earliest 
 instances of the use of these figures 
 belong to the middle of the seventh 
 century ; whereas the employment 
 of the older numerical symbols is 
 demonstrable from the fourth cen- 
 tury downwards. ' See also /. St., viii. 
 165, 256. The character of the 
 Valabhi Plates seems to be that 
 whose letters most closely approach 
 the forma of the figures. Burnell 
 has quite recently, in his Elem. S. 
 Ind. Pal., p. 46 ff., questioned alto- 
 gether the connection of the figures 
 with the first letters of the nume- 
 rals ; and he supposes them, or 
 rather the older ' Cave Numerals,' 
 from which he directly derives 
 them, to have been introduced from 
 Alexandria, "together with Greek 
 Astrology." In this I cannot in the 
 meantime agree with him ; see my 
 remarks in the Jenaer Lit. Z., 1875, 
 No. 24, p. 419. Amongst other 
 things, I there call special attention 
 to the circumstance that Hermann 
 Hankel, in his excellent work (pos- 
 thumous, unfortunately), Zixr Ge- 
 schichte der Mathemaiih (1874), p. 
 329 ff'., declares Woepcke's opinion 
 
ASTRONOMY : ARYABHATA. 
 
 257 
 
 Arabs, and from these again to European scholars.^^ By 
 these latter, who were the disciples of the Arabs, frequent 
 allusion is made to the Indians, and uniformly in terms of 
 high esteem ; and one Sanskrit word even — uchcha, signi- 
 fying the apex of a planet's orbit-^has passed, though in 
 a form somewhat difficult to recognise {aiujc, genit. augis), 
 into the Latin translations of Arabian astronomers ^^^ (see 
 Eeinaud, p. 325). 
 
 As regards the age and order of sequence of the vari- 
 ous Indian astronomers, of whom works or fragments of 
 works still survive, we do not even here escape from the 
 uncertainty which everywhere throughout Indian literature 
 attends questions of the kind. At their head stands the 
 Aryabhata already mentioned, of whose writings we possess 
 at present only a few sorry scraps, though possibly fuller 
 fragments may yet in course of time be recovered.^^ He 
 appears to have been a contemporary of Pulila ; and, in 
 any case, he was indebted to Greek influence, since he 
 reckons by the zodiacal signs. According to Albiruni, he 
 
 to the effect that the Neo-Pytha- 
 g^reana were acquainted with the 
 new figures having place-value, and 
 with the zero, to be erroneous, and 
 the entire passage in Boethius on 
 which this opinion is grounded to 
 he an interpolation of the tenth or 
 eleventh century]. 
 
 ^^^ See also Woepcke, Swr V Intro- 
 duction de V ArithmUique Indienne 
 en Occident (Rome, 1859). 
 
 ^'^ As also, according to Eeinaud's 
 ingenious conjecture {p. 373 ff.), the 
 name of Ujjayiui itself — through a 
 misreading, namely, of the Arabic 
 
 J '.^ as Arin, Arim, whereby the 
 ' meridian of Ujjayini ' became the 
 "coiipole d'Arin.' 
 
 284 The researches of Whitney in 
 Jour. Am. Or. Soc, vi. 560 ff. (i860), 
 and of Ehdu Ddjl in /. R A. S., i. 
 392 ff. (1865), have brought us full 
 Sght upon this point. From these 
 it appears that of Aryabhata there 
 are still extant the bahgUi-SHtra 
 and the Arydshtaiata, both of which 
 have been already edited by Kern 
 (1874) under the title ArydbJiatlya, 
 
 together with the commentary of 
 Paramddl^vara ; cf . A. Earth in the 
 Remie Critique, 1875, pp. 241-253. 
 According to his own account therein 
 given, Aryabhata was born a.d. 476, 
 hved in Eastern India at Kusuma- 
 pura (Palibothra), and composed this 
 work at the early age of twenty -three. 
 In ithe teaches, amongstotherthings, 
 a quite peculiar numerical notation 
 by means of letters. — The larger work 
 extant under the title Arya-Sid- 
 dhdnta in eighteen adhydyas is. evi- 
 dently a subsequent production ; see 
 Hall in Journ. Am. Or. Soc, vi. 
 556 (i860), and Aufrecht, Calcdogus, 
 pp. 325, 326 : Bentley thinks it was 
 not composed until a.d. 1322, and 
 Bh^u DAjl, I. c, pp. 393, 394, be- 
 lieves Bentley "was here for once 
 correct." — Wilson, Mach. Coll., i. 
 119, and Lassen, /. AJC., ii. 1136, 
 speak also of a commentary by Arya- 
 bhata on the Stirya-Siddhdnta : this 
 is doubtless to be ascribed to Laghu- 
 Aryabhata (Bh^u D^ji, p. 405). See 
 also Kern, Pref. to Brih. Samh., p. 
 59 f- 
 
 E 
 
253 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 was a native of KusumapuTa, i.e., Pataliputra, and belonged 
 consequently to the east of India. Together with Mm, 
 the authors of the following five Siddhantas are looked 
 upon as ancient astronomers — ^namely, the unknown* 
 author of the Brahma-Siddhdnta or Paitdmdha-SiddhAnta ; 
 next, the author of the Saura-Siddhdnta, who is called 
 Lat by Albinim, and may possibly be identical with the 
 Lagata, Lagadha mentioned as author of the Vedanga 
 treatise Jyotisha, as well as with Ladha, a writer occasion- 
 ally quoted by Brahmagupta ;t further, Puli^a, author of 
 the FauliSa-Siddhdnta ; and lastly, Srishena and Vishnu- 
 chandra, to whom the Bomaka-Siddhdnta and the Vasishtha- 
 Siddhdnta — works said to be based upon Aryabhata's 
 system ^^ — ^are respectively attributed. Of these five Sid- 
 dhantas, not one seems to have survived. There exist 
 works, it is true, bearing the names Brahma-Siddhanta, 
 Vasishtha-Siddhanta, Siirya-Siddhanta and Romaka-Sid- 
 dhanta ; but that these are not the ancient works so en- 
 titled appears from the fact that the quotations from the 
 latter, preserved to ns by the scholiasts, are not contained 
 in them.2^ In point of fact, three distinct Vasishtha-Sid- 
 dhantas, and, similarly, three distinct Brahma-Siddhantas, 
 
 * Albinini names Brahmagupta the present only the Sfirya-Siddb^ta 
 
 as the author of this Brahma-Sid- has been published, with Bangani- 
 
 dhdnta ; but this is erroneous. Per- tha's commentary, in the Bibl. Ind. 
 
 haps Beinaud has misunderstood the (1854-59), ed. by Fitzedward Hall 
 
 passage (p. 332). and Bipi Deva S&trin ; alsoatrans- 
 
 + Litdha may very well have arisen lation by the latter, ibid, (i860, 
 
 out of Lagadha; [the form Ldta, 1861). Simultaneously there ap- 
 
 however, see Kern, Pref. to Brih. peared in the Joum. Am. Or. Soc., 
 
 Samh., p. 53» points rather to Aa/Km}]. vol. vi., a translation, nominally by 
 
 ^"^ As also upon Lita, Yasishtfaia, Eb. Burgess, with an excellent and 
 
 and Vijayanandin, according to very thorough commentary by W. 
 
 Bhiu T)4,}1, I. c, p. 408. In the D. Whitney, who has recently (see 
 
 latter's opinion the Bomaka-Sid- Oriental and Linguistic Studies, ii. 
 
 dh^nta is to be assigned to &ake 427 360) assumed " the entire responsi- 
 
 (a.d. 5°5)> *°<i w^ "composed in bility for that publication in aU its 
 
 accordance with the work i>f some parts." In his view, p. 326, the 
 
 Eoman or Greek author." Bhattot- Sdrya-Siddhinta is "one of the 
 
 pala likewise mentions, amongst most ancient and original of the 
 
 others, a YavaneSvara Sphujidhvaja works which present the modern 
 
 (or Asph°), a name in which Bhiu astronomicalBcienceof the Hindus;" 
 
 DSji looks for a Speusippus, but but how far the existing text "is 
 
 Kern (Pref. to Brih. Saqih., p. 48) identical in substance and extent 
 
 for an Aphrodisius. with that of the original Slirya-Sid- 
 
 '*" See on this point Kern, Pref. dhdnta " is for the present doubtful, 
 
 to Brih. Saiph., pp. 43-50. Up to Cf. Kern, I, c, pp. 44-46. 
 
ASTRONOMY: VARAHA-MIHIRA. 
 
 259 
 
 are cited. One of these last, which expressly purports to 
 be a recast* of an earlier work, has for its author Brahma- 
 gupta, whose date, according to Albiriini, is the year a.d. 
 664, which corresponds pretty closely with the date assigned 
 to him by the modern astronomers of Ujjayini, A.D. 628.^^ 
 To him also belongs, according to Albinini,t a work named 
 Ahargana, corrupted by the Arabs into Arkand. This 
 Arkand, the Sindhends (i.e., the five Siddhantas), and the 
 system of Arjabahr (Aryabl^ata) were the works which, 
 as already remarked, were principally studied and in part 
 translated by the Arabs in the eighth and ninth centuries. 
 — On the other hand, the Arabs do not mention Varaha- 
 Mihira, although he was prior to Brahmagupta, as the 
 latter repeatedly alludes to him, and although he gathered 
 up the teaching of these five Siddhantas in a work which 
 is hence styled by the commentators Panchasiddhdntikd, 
 but which he himself calls by the name Karana. This work 
 seems to have perished,^^ and only the astrological works 
 of Varaha-Mihira have come down to us — namely, the 
 Samhitd I and the Sord-Sdstra. The latter, however, is 
 
 * Albirdni gives a notice of the 
 contents of this recast : it and the 
 Pauli^a-SiddhSnta were the only two 
 of these Siddhintas he was able to 
 procure. 
 
 ^^ This latter date is based on 
 his own words in the Brahma Sphuta- 
 Siddbdnta, 24. 7, 8, which, as there 
 stated, he composed 550 years after 
 the Saha-nripdUa Cpdnta?), at the 
 age of thirty. He here calls him- 
 self the son of Jishnu, and he lived 
 under ^rl - Vydghramukha of the 
 Sri-Ch^pa dynasty ; Bhiu Diiji, I. c. , 
 p. 410. Prithlidakasv^min, his 
 scholiast, describes him, curiously, 
 as Bhilla-Milavakslch^rya; see Z. 
 D. M. O., XXV. 659 ; /. St., xiii. 316. 
 Chaps, xii. {ganita, arithmetic) and 
 xxviii. {kuttajca, algebra) of his 
 work have, it is well known, been 
 translated by Colebrooke (1817). 
 
 •)■ Eeinaud, Mim. sur VInde, p. 
 322. 
 
 288 "Yesterday I heard of a se- 
 cond MS. of the Pafichasiddhdntiki " 
 
 Biihler's letter of 1st April 1875. 
 See now Biihler's special report on 
 the FanchasiddbiCutik^ in Ind. Antiq., 
 iy. 316. 
 
 ij: In a doable edition, as Brihal- 
 Sarnhitd and as Samdsa-Samhiid. Of 
 the former Alblrtini gives us some 
 extracts ; see also my Catal. of the 
 SansJc. MSS. in tTie Bcrl. Lib., pp. 
 238-254. [For an excellent edition 
 of the Bribat-Samhitd (Bibl. Ind., 
 1864—65), we are indebted to Kern, 
 who is also publishing a translation 
 of it (chaps, i.-lxxxiv. thus far) in the 
 Jeum. S. A. S., iv.-vi. (1870-74). 
 There also exists an excellent com- 
 mentary on it by Bbattotpala, drawn 
 up i§ahe 888 (a.d. 966), and distin- 
 guished by its exceedingly copious 
 quotations of parallel passages from 
 Vartiha - Mihira's predecessors. In 
 the Brihaj-J^taka, 26. 5,, the latter 
 calls himself the son of AdiLyad&a, 
 and an Avantika or native of Avanti, 
 i.e., Ujjayini.] 
 
26o 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 incomplete, only one- third of it being extant.* He men- 
 tions a great number of predecessors, whose names are in 
 part only known to us through him ; for instance, Maya 
 and the Yavanas (frequently), Para^ara, Manittha,^ Sak- 
 tipiirva, Vishnugupta.f Devasvamin, Siddhasena, Vajra, 
 Jivaiarman, Satya,^'" &c. Of Aryabhata no direct mention 
 is made, possibly for the reason that he did nothing for 
 astrology : in the Karana he would naturally be men- 
 tioned.^^ While Aryabhata still computes by the era of 
 Yudhishthira, Varaha-Mihira employs the ^aka-kdla, 
 Saka-hMipar-kdla, or Sakendra-kdla, the era of the Saka 
 king, which is referred by his scholiast to Vikrama's era.^*^ 
 Brahmagupta, on the contrary, reckons by the ^aka-nri- 
 pdnta — which, according to him, took place in the year 
 3179 of the Kali age — that is to say, by the era of SaHva- 
 hana. — The tradition as to the date of Varaha-Mihira has 
 already been given : as the statements of the astronomers 
 of to-day correspond with those current in Albininfs time, 
 we may reasonably take them as trustworthy, and accord- 
 
 * Namely, the Jiltaka portion 
 (that relating to nativities) alone ; 
 and this in a double arrangement, 
 as Laghu-Jdtaha and as Brihaj- 
 Jdtdka : the former was translated 
 by Albirdnl into Arabic. [The text 
 of the first two chaps, was published 
 by me, with translation, in I. St., ii. 
 277 : the remainder was edited by 
 Jacobi in his degree dissertation 
 (1872). It was also published at 
 Bombay in 1867 with Bhattotpala's 
 commentary ; similarly, the Brihaj- 
 Jiitaka at Benares and Bombay; 
 Kern's Pret., p. 26. The text of 
 the first three chaps, of the Tdtrd 
 appeared, with translation, in /. St. , 
 X. 161 ff. The third part of the 
 Hortt-^dstra, the Vivdha-patcUa, is 
 still inedited.] 
 
 289 This name I conjecture to re- 
 present Manetho, author of the 
 Apotelesmata, and in this Kern 
 agrees with me (Pref. to Brih. Samh., 
 
 P- 52)- 
 
 + This is also a name of Chdna- 
 kya ; Da^akum. 183. 5i ed. Wilson. 
 [For a complete list and examination 
 
 of the names of teachers quoted in 
 the Brihat-Sainhitd, among whom 
 are Bidariyana and Ka^abhuj, see 
 Kern's Preface, p. 29 ff.] 
 
 ^'^ Kern, Preface, p. 51, remarks 
 that, according to Utpala, he was 
 also called Bhadatta ; but Aufrecht 
 in his Catalogut, p. 329*, has Bha- 
 danta. In the Jyotirvid-iibharana, 
 Satya stands at the head of the 
 sages at Vikrama's court ; see Z. D. 
 M. (?., xxii. 722, xxiv. 400. 
 
 ^^ And as a matter of fact we find 
 in Bhattotpala a quotation from this 
 work in which he is mentioned ; see 
 Kern, J. R. A. S., xx. 383 (1863); 
 Bbdu Ddji, I. c, 406. In another 
 such quotation Varitha-Mihira refers 
 to the year 427 of the Saka-kstla, 
 and also to the Komaka-Siddhdnta 
 and PauliiSa ; Bhdu Diiji, p. 407. 
 
 ^^ This statement of Colebrooke's, 
 ii. 47S (428 ed. Cowell), cf. also 
 Lassen, /. AK., ii. 50, is unfounded. 
 According to Kern, Preface, p. 6 
 ff., both in Vardha-Mihira and Ut- 
 pala, only the so-called era of ^Slivd- 
 hana is meant. 
 
ASTRONOMY : BHASKARA. 261 
 
 ing to these he flourished in a.d. 504.^' Now this is at 
 variance, on the one hand, with the tradition which re- 
 gards him as one of the ' nine gems ' of Vikrama's court, 
 and which identifies the latter with king Bhoja,^^* who 
 reigned about a.d. 1050;^^ and, on the other hand, also 
 with the assertion of the astronomer ^atananda, who, in 
 the introduction to his Bhasvati-karana, seemingly ac- 
 knowledges himself to be the disciple of Mihira, and at 
 the same time states that he composed this work &ake 
 102 1 ( = A.D. 1099). This passage, however, is obscure, 
 and may perhaps refer merely to the instruction drawn 
 by the author from Mihira's writings;* otherwise we 
 should have to admit the existence of a second Varaha- 
 Mihira, who flourished in the middle of the eleventh cen- 
 tury, that is, contemporaneously with Alblninl. Strange 
 in that case that the latter should not have mentioned him 1 
 After Varaha-Mihira and Brahmagupta various other 
 astronomers distinguished themselves. Of these, the most 
 eminent is Bhaskara, to the question of whose age, how- 
 ever, a peculiar difficulty attaches. According to his own 
 account, he was born ^ake, 1036 (a.d. i i 14), and completed 
 the Siddhanta-^iromani ^ahe, 1072 (a.d. 1150), and the 
 Karana-kutiihala Sake 1 105 (a.d. i 183) ; and with this the 
 modern astronomers agree, who assign to him the date 
 &ake, 1072 (A.D. 1 1 50).^^ But Albiriini, who wrote in a.d. 
 
 ^' Kern, Preface, p. 3, thinks Lfh., p. 234)-.-seemB to speak of 
 
 this is perhaps his hlrth year : the himself as living 130^917 (a.d. 995). 
 
 year of his death being given by How is this contradiction to be ex- 
 
 Amardja,ascholia8t on Brahmagupta, plained? See Colebrooke, ii. 390 
 
 as ^ake 509 (a.d. 587). [341 ed. Cowell. The passage in 
 
 2'* This identification fails of question probably does not refer to 
 
 course. If Variiha - Mihira really the author's lifetime ; unfortunately 
 
 was one of the ' nine gems ' of Vi- it is so uncertain that I do not under- 
 
 krama's court, then this particular stand its real meaning. As, how- 
 
 Vikrama must simply have reigned ever, there is mention immediately 
 
 in the sixth century. But the pre- before of Kali 4200=a.d. 1099, ex- 
 
 liminary question is whether he was actly as in Colebrooke, this date is 
 
 one of these 'gems.' See the state- pretty well established. — The allu- 
 
 ments of the Jyotirvid-Sibharana, sion to Mihira might possibly, as 
 
 I. e. indicatedbytheschdiastBalabhadra, 
 
 2'^ See, e.g., Autreoht, Catalogus, not refer to Variha-Mihira at all, 
 
 p. 327'', 328*. but merely to mihira, the sun !] 
 
 * Moreover, SatJlnanda, at the -'° This also agrees vrith an in- 
 close of his work — in a fragment of scription dated Sake llzS, and re- 
 it in the Chambers collection (see lating to a grandson of Bhifekars, 
 my Caial. of the Sansk, MSS. Berl. whose SiddhiInta-&omanii is here 
 
262 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 103 1 (that is, 83 years before Bhaskara's Tjirtli !), not merely 
 mentions him, but places his work — here called Karana- 
 sara — 132 years earlier, namely, in a.d. 899; so that there 
 is a discrepancy of 284 years between the two accounts. 
 I confess my inability to solve the riddle ; so close is the 
 coincidence as to the personage, that the IJi^ of Albi- 
 nini is expressly described, like the real Bhaskara, as the 
 son of Mahadeva* But notwithstanding this, we have 
 scarcely any alternative save to separate Albinini's Bash- 
 har, son of Mahdeb, and author of the Karana^sdra, from 
 Bhdskara, son of MaJvddeva, and author of the Karanor- 
 hut'&halaP^'' — more especially as, in addition to the dis- 
 crepancy of date, there is this peculiar circumstance, that 
 whereas Albinini usually represents the Indian bh by b-h 
 
 also mentioned in terms of high 
 honour ; see BhSiu Diji, I. c, pp. 41 1, 
 416. Again, in a passage from the 
 SiddhSnta-^iromani, which is cited 
 by M^hava in the E^Ia-nimaiya, 
 and which treats of the years having 
 three intercalary months, the year 
 of this description which fell Saka- 
 kdle 974 (a.d. 1052) is placed in the 
 past; the year IIIJ, on the con- 
 trary (and also 1256, 1378), in the 
 future. — Bh&ikara's LIUvati (arith- 
 metic) and Vlja-ganita (algebra) 
 have, it is well known, been trans- 
 lated by Colebrooke (181 7) ; the 
 former also by Taylor (1816), .the 
 latter by Straehey (1818). The 
 GanitidyStya has been translated by 
 Eoer in the Joum. As. S. Bengal, ix. 
 153 ff. (Lassen, /. AK., iv. 849) ; of 
 the Golddhyiya there is a translation 
 by Lancelot Wilkinson in the £ibl. 
 Jnd. (1861-62). To Wilkinson we 
 .also owe an edition of the text of 
 the Golddhydya and Ganitddhydya 
 (1842). The Lildvati 'and Vija- 
 ganita appeared in 1832, 1834, like- 
 wise at Calcutta. Bdpti Deva Sds- 
 trin has also issued a complete edi- 
 tion (?) of the Siddhflnta-^iromani 
 (Benares, 1866). Cf. also Herm. 
 Brockhaus, Ueber die Algebra des 
 Bhdtkara, Leipzig, 1852, vol. iv. of 
 the Berichte der Kon. Sachs. Gcs. del' 
 Wissensch., pp. 1-45. 
 
 * Beinaud, it is true, reads Mahd- 
 
 datta with c- i instead of t_j ; but 
 
 in Sanskrit this is an impossible 
 form of name, as it gives no sense. 
 [At the close of the Golddhydya, xiii. 
 61, as well as of the Karana-kutii- 
 hala, Bhdskara calls his father, not 
 Hahddeva, but Mahe^vara (which of 
 course is in substance identical) ; 
 and he is likewise so styled by Bbds- 
 kara's scholiast Lakshmidhara ; see 
 my Catal. of the Berl. Sansk. MSS., 
 pp. 235, 237.] 
 
 ^' This is really the only possible 
 way out of the dilemma. Either, 
 therefore, we have to think of that 
 elder Bhdskara "who was at, the 
 head of the commentators of Arya- 
 bhata, and is repeatedly cited by 
 Fritb^dakasvdmin, who was himself 
 anterior to the author of the Siro- 
 mani," Oolebrooke, ii. 470 (423 ed. 
 Cowell) ; or else under lieiuaud's 
 
 jAijJ (PP- 335. 337) there lurks not 
 a Bhdskara at all, but perhaps a 
 Fushkara. It is certainly stranfre, 
 however, that he should be styled 
 
 lUSa^ ..f) and author of a Ka- 
 rana-sdra. Can it be that we have 
 here to do with an interpolation in 
 Alblrdni ? 
 
ASTRONOMY : LATER PERIOD. 263 
 
 {e.g., l-huj — hh'drja, halb-hadr — bcdabhadra), and for the 
 most part faithfully preserves the length of the vowels, 
 neither of these is here done in the case of Bashkar, where, 
 moreover, the s is changed into sh. 
 
 Bhaskara is the last star of Indian astronomy and 
 arithmetic. After his day no further progress was made, 
 and the astronomical science of the Hindus became once 
 more wholly centred in astrology, out of which it had 
 originally sprung. In this last period, under the influence 
 of their Moslem rulers, the Hindiis, in their turn, became 
 the disciples of the Arabs, whose masters they had formerly 
 been.* The same Alkindi who, in the ninth century, had 
 written largely upon Indian astronomy and arithmetic 
 (see Colebrooke, ii. 513; Eeinaud, p. 23) now in turn 
 became an authority in the eyes of the Hindus, who 
 studied and translated his writings and those of his suc- 
 cessors. This results indisputably from the numerous 
 Arabic technical expressions which now appear side by 
 side with the Greek terms dating from the earlier period. 
 These latter, it is true, still retain their old position, 
 and it is only for new ideas that new words are intro- 
 duced, particularly in connection with the doctrine of the 
 constellations, which had been developed by the Arabs to 
 a high degree of perfection. Much about the same time, 
 though in some cases perhaps rather earlier, these Arabic 
 works were also translated into another language, namely, 
 into Latin, for the benefit of the European astrologers of 
 the Middle Ages ; and thus it comes that in their writings 
 a number of the very same Arabic technical terms may be 
 pointed out which occur in Indian works. Such termini 
 technici of Indian astrology at this period are the foUow- 
 
 ing:+ mukdrind XiiUU cf conjuaction, mukdvild ^SLUu! <^ 
 opposition, taravi ■^^J> D quartile aspect, tasdi u^AmJ 
 
 * Thence ia even taken the name translations, as no Arabic texts on 
 
 for astrology itself in this period, — astrology have been printed, and the 
 
 namely, tdjika, tdjika-idstra, which lexicons are very meagre in this 
 
 is to be traced to the Persian . ;lj respect. [Cf. now Otto Loth's meri- 
 
 , ""V torious paper, Al-Kindt ah Astrolog 
 
 = 'Arabic' 
 + See /. J 
 these Arabic 
 meantime only from mediaeval Latin 
 
 i '" ''^^ Jkorgenldndische Forschungen, 
 + See /. St., 11. 263 ff. Most of jg^^^ pp 263-309, published in 
 these Arabic terms I know m the honour of Fleischer's jubilee.] 
 
264 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 * sextile aspect, taili cLoJIJ Z^ trine aspect; further, 
 IwddM ^ /radio, muiallaha *srt3U<, ikhavdU JUiJ per- 
 fectio, induvdra, .\jj[ deteriorafio, itthisdla and muthaUla 
 JLsjI and J,a\f coniunctio, isarapha and musaripha 
 
 j_jLe| and i_i-,£t« disjunctio, nakta (for nakla) \gj trans- 
 
 latio, yamayd it*-- congregatio, Tuana^ »Jui prokiintio, 
 
 kamv^la A^u receptio, gairikamiyidd Jjjj^^ inreceptio, 
 
 sahama ^,^ sors, inthihd and munthahd e.\^\ and ^jJJuo 
 
 terminus, and several others that cannot yet be cer- 
 tainly identified. 
 
 The doctrine of Omens and Portents was, T/ith the 
 Indians, intimately linked with astrology from the earliest 
 times. Its origin may likewise be traced back to the 
 ancient Vedic, nay, probably to some extent even to the 
 primitive Indo-Germanic period. It is found embodied, 
 in particular, in the literature of the Atharva-Veda, as 
 also in the Grihya-Siitras df the other Vedas.^* A pro- 
 minent place is also accorded to it in the Samhitas of 
 Varaha-Mihira, Narada, &c. ; and it has, besides, prodticed 
 an independent literature of its own. The same fate has 
 been shared in aU respects by another branch of supersti- 
 tion — the arts, namely, of magic and conjuration. As the 
 religious development of the Hindus progressed, these found 
 a more and more fruitful soil, so that they now, in fact, reign 
 almost supreme. On these subjects, too, general treatises 
 exist, as well as tracts on single topics belonging to them. 
 Many of their notions have long been naturalised in the 
 "West, through the medium of the Indian fables and fairy 
 tales which were so popular in the Middle Ages — ^those, for 
 instance, of the purse (of Fortimatus), the league-boots, the 
 magic mirror, the magic ointment, the invisible cap, &c.*^ 
 
 ^^ Cf . my paper, Zwei Vedische cap, for instance, are probably to be 
 
 Texte titer Omina und Portenta traced to old mythological supersti- 
 
 (1859), containing the Adbhuta- tious notions of the primitive Indo- 
 
 Brdhmana and adky. xiii. of the Germanic time. In the S{ima- 
 
 Kani5ika-Stitra. Vidh!lna-Brithmana(cf. Burnell,Pref., 
 
 '^ Some of these, the invisible p. xxv.), we have the purse of Fortu- 
 
MEDICAL SCIENCE : CHARAKA, SUSRUTA, ETC. 265 
 
 We have now to notice Medicine, as the fourth branch of 
 the scientific literature. 
 
 The beginnings of the healing art in Vedic times have 
 been already glanced at (pp. 29, 30). Here, again, it is 
 the Atharva-Veda that occupies a special position in rela- 
 tion to it, and in whose literature its oldest fragments are 
 found — fragments, however, of a rather sorry description, 
 and limited mostly to spells and incantations.^"® The 
 Indians themselves consider medicine as an Upaveda, 
 whence they expressly entitle it Ayur- Veda, — by which 
 term they do not understand any special work, as has been 
 supposed. They derive it, as they do the Veda itself, 
 immediately from the gods: as the oldest of human 
 writers upon it they mention, first, Atreya, then Agnivela, 
 then Charaka,^"^ then Dhanvantari, and, lastly, his disciple 
 
 iiatus, p. 94; see Ht. C. JBl., 1874, 
 pp. 423,424.— Magic, further, stands 
 ia a special relation to the sectarian 
 Tantra texts, as well as to the Yoga 
 doctrine. A work of some extent 
 on this subject bears the name of 
 Nilgilrjuna, a name of high renown 
 am jng the Buddhists ; see my Catal. 
 of (he Berl. Sansk. MSS., p. 270. 
 
 ^™ See Virgil Grohmann's paper, 
 Medicinisches aus demAtharva- Veda 
 mit besonderem Bezug auf den, Tah- 
 man in /. St., ix. 381 ff. (1865). 
 — Sarpa-mdyd (serpent-science) is 
 mentioned in ^atap. Br. xiii., as a 
 separate Veda, with sections enti- 
 tled panxin ; may it not have treated 
 of medical matters also ? At all 
 events, in the Aival. Sr., Visha- 
 vidyd (science of poisons) is directly 
 coupled with it. As to the con- 
 tents of the Vayo-vidyd (bird- 
 science), mentioned in the same 
 passage of the Sat. Br., it is difficult 
 to form a conjecture. These Vidyd- 
 texts are referred to elsewhere also 
 in the ^at. Br. (in xi. xiv.), and 
 appear there, like the Vaidyaka in 
 the Mahilbhiishya, as ranking beside 
 the Veda. A Vdrttiha to Pstu. iv. 
 2. 60, teaches a. special affix to de- 
 note the study of texts, the names 
 of which end in -vidyd oi-lakshanaj 
 and we might almost suppose that 
 
 F^ni himself was acquainted with 
 texts of this description. From 
 what Patamjali states, besides birds 
 and serpents, cattle and horses also 
 formed the subject of such works. 
 All the special data of this sort in 
 the Mahdbh&hya point to practical 
 observations from the life ; and out 
 of these, in course of time, a litera- 
 ture of natural history could have 
 been developed; see I. St., xiii. 
 459-461. The laksha^a sections in 
 the Atharva-Fari^ishtas are either 
 of a ceremonial or astrological-me- 
 teorological purport ; while, on the 
 other hand, the astrological Samhitsi 
 of Vardha-Mihira, for instance, con- 
 tains much that may have been 
 directly derived from the old vidyds 
 and lakshanas. 
 
 3"i In the Charaka-Samhit^ itself 
 Bharadv£lja (Funarvasu) Kapishthala 
 heads the list as the disciple of Indra. 
 Of his six disciples — Agnivefe, Bhe- 
 la, Jatlikarna, Far^ara, Hdrita, 
 Kshirapini — Agnive^a first com- 
 posed his tantra, then the others 
 theirs severally,, which they there- 
 upon recited to Atreya. To him the 
 narration of the text is expressly 
 referred ; for after the opening words 
 of each adhydya {'atlidto . . . vyd- 
 Jchydsydmah') there uniformly fol- 
 lows the phrase, "Hi ha smdlia hha- 
 
266 SANSKRIT LITERA TURE. 
 
 Su^ruta. The first three names belong specially to the 
 two divisions of the Yajus, hut only to the period of the 
 Siitras and the school-development of this Veda.^"^ The , 
 medical works bearing these titles can ia no case there- 
 fore be of older date than this. How much later they 
 ought to be placed is a point for the determination of 
 which we have at present only the limit of the eighth 
 century A.D., at the close of which, according to Ibn Beithar 
 and Albinini (Reinaud, p. 316), the work of Charaka, and, 
 accoi;ding to Ibn AM U^aibiah, the work of Su^ruta also, 
 were translated into Arabic. That Indian medicine had 
 in Panini's time already attained a certain degree of culti- 
 vation appears from the names of various diseases specified 
 by him (iiL. 3. 108, v. 2. 129, &c.), though nothing definite 
 results from this. In the gwna ' Kartakaujapa ' (to Panini, 
 vi. 2. 37) we find the ' Sau^rutaparthavas ' instanced 
 among the last members; but it is uncertain what we 
 have to understand by this expression. The ganas, more- 
 over, prove nothing in regard to Panini's time ; and besides, 
 it is quite possible that this particular Sutra may not be 
 Panini's at all, but posterior to Patamjali, in whose Maha- 
 bhashya, according to the statement of the Calcutta scho- 
 liast, it is not interpreted.^^ Dhanvantari is named in 
 Manu's law-book and in the epic, but as the mythical 
 physician of the gods, not as a human personage.^** In 
 the Panchatantra two physicians, Salihotra and Vatsya- 
 
 gavdn Atreyah." Quite as uniformly, vii.), Kri^a, S^kfity^yana, Kdfikii- 
 however, it is stated in a closing yana, E|rishn£treya. 
 verse at the end of each adhydya '"' ' Sauhuta ' occurs in the Bhi- 
 that the work is a tantra composed shya ; is, however, expressly derived 
 by Agniveila and rearranged (jprati- from stdi-ut, not from - Su^ruta. 
 lam^lcrita) by Charaka. Consequently neither this name nor 
 ""2 The same thing applies sub- the Kutapa-Sau^ruta mentioned in 
 stantially to the names mentioned another passage has anything to do 
 in Charaka (see last note) — ^Bharad- with the Su,4ruta of medical writers ; 
 Vilja, Agnive^ (Hutsi^ave^a !), Ja- see I. St., xiii. 462, 407. For the 
 ttikarna, PariKara, Hitrita. And time of the author of the Vdrttikas 
 amongst the names of the sages who we have the fact of the three hum- 
 there appear as the associates of ours, vdta, pitta^ Ueshman, being 
 Bbaradvitja, we find, besides those already ranked together, i. c, p. 462. 
 of the old Rishis, special mention, 204 As such he appears in the verse 
 amongst others, of i^valdj'ana, Bd- so often mentioned already, which 
 dardjana, Kdtyiyana, Baijavilpi, 4i0. specifies him as one of the 'nine 
 As medical authorities are further gems' at Vikrama's court, together 
 cited, amongst others (see the St. with Kdlidiisa and Varsilia-Mihira ; 
 Petersburg Diet. Supplement, vol. see Jyotirvid-dbharana, I. c. 
 
MEDICAL SCIENCE .- A GE OF EXTANT WORKS. 267 
 
 jana,* whose names are still cited even in our own day, are 
 repeatedly mentioned:*"^ tut although this work was 
 translated into Pahlavi in the sixth century, it does not 
 at all follow that everything now contained in it formed 
 part of it then, unless we actually find it in this transla- 
 tion (that is, in the versions derived from it).+ I am not 
 aware of any other references to medical teachers or works; 
 I may only add, that the chapter of the Amarakosha (ii. 6) 
 on the human hody and its diseases certainly presupposes 
 an advanced cultivation of medical science. 
 
 An approximate determination of the dates of the ex- 
 isting works ^°^* will only be possible when these have 
 been subjected to a critical examination both in respect of 
 their contents and language.J But we may even now dis- 
 
 * This form of name points us 
 to the time of the production of the 
 Sutraa, to Vdtsya. [It is found in 
 Taitt. Ar., i. 7. 2, as patronymic of 
 a Pii&ehaparna.] 
 
 '^"^ Sdlihotra's specialty is here 
 veterinary medicine (his name itself 
 signifies 'horse'); that of VdtsySi- 
 yana the ars amandi. Of the for- 
 mer's work there are in London two 
 different recensions ; see Dietz, 
 Analecta Medica, p. 153 (No. 63) and 
 p. 1156 (No. 70). According to Sir 
 H. M. Elliot's Sibl. Index to the Hist, 
 oj Muh. Ind., p. 263, a work of the 
 kind hy this author was translated 
 into Arabic in a.d. 1361. Q'he 
 Kitma-Siitra, also, of Vdtsyiiyana, 
 which by Madhustidana Sarasvati in 
 the Prasthdna - bheda is expressly 
 classed with Ayur-Veda, is still ex- 
 tant. This work, which, judging 
 from the accoun t of its contents given 
 by Aufrecht in his Catalogus, p. 215 
 ff., is of an extremely interesting 
 character, appeals, in majorem glori- 
 am,to most imposing ancientauthori- 
 ties — namely, Audddlaki, Svetaketu, 
 Bdbhravya PiacliSila, Gonardlya (i.e., 
 Patamjali, author of the Mahstbhii- 
 shya ?), Gonikilputra, &c. It is also 
 cited by Suhandhu, and Sarnkara 
 himself is said to have written a 
 commentary on it ; see Aufrecht, 
 Catalogus, p. 256a. 
 
 ~ + This was rightly insisted upon 
 by Bentley in opposition to Cole- 
 brooke, who had adduced, as an 
 argument to prove the age of Va- 
 rdha-Mihira, the circumstance that 
 he is mentioned in the Pa&chatantra 
 (this is the same passage which is 
 also referred to in the Vikrama- 
 Charitra; see Roth, Joum. Asiat., 
 Oct.. 1845, p. 304.) [Kern, it is true, 
 in his Pref. to the Brih. SarphitsI, 
 pp. 19,20, pronounces very decidedly 
 against this objection of Bentley's, 
 but wrongly, as it seems to me ; for, 
 according to Benfey's researches, 
 the present text of the Pafichatantra 
 is a very late production ; cf. pp. 
 221, 240, above.] 
 
 s"^" According to Tumour, Malid- 
 vansa, p. 254, note, the medical 
 work there named in the text, by the 
 Singhalese king Buddhad£isa (a.s. 
 339), entitled Sdrattha-Saqigaha, is 
 still in existence (in Sanskrit too) in 
 Ceylon, and is used by the native 
 medical practitioners ; see on this 
 Davids in the Tran$actions of the 
 Philol. Society, 1875, pp. 76, 78. 
 
 J The Tibetan Tandjur, according 
 to the accounts given of it, contains 
 a considerable number of medical 
 writings, a circumstance not with- 
 out importance for their chronology. 
 Thus, Csoma Korbsi in the loum. 
 As. Soc. Beng., January 1825, gives 
 
268 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 miss, as belonging to the realm of dreams, the naive vie^vs 
 that have quite recently heen advanced as to the age, for 
 example, of the work bearing Su^ruta's name.* In language 
 and style, it and the works resembling it with which I 
 am acquainted manifestly exhibit a certain affinity to the 
 writings of Varaha-Mihira.^"* "If then" — here I make 
 use of Stenzler'sf words — "internal grounds should render 
 it probable that the system of medicine expounded in 
 Sulruta has borrowed largely from the Greeks, there would 
 be nothing at all surprising in such a circumstance so far 
 as chronology is affected by it."^"^ But in the mean- 
 time, no such internal grounds whatever appear to exist : 
 on the contrary, there is much that seems to tell against 
 the idea of any such Greek influence. In the first place, 
 the Tavanas are never referred to as authorities; and 
 amongst the individuals enumerated in the introduction 
 as contemporaries of Sulruta, J there is not one whose name 
 has a foreign sound.§ Again, the cultivation of medicine 
 
 the contents of a Tibetan work on 
 medicine, which is put into the 
 mouth of ^^yamuni, and, to all 
 appearance, is a translation of Su- 
 lruta or some similar work. 
 
 * To wit, by VuUers and Hessler ; 
 by the former in an essay on Indian 
 medicine in the periodical Janus, 
 edited by Henschel ; by the latter in 
 the preface to hia so-called transla- 
 tion of Sulruta [1844-50]. 
 
 3°6 The Charaka - Samhiti has 
 rather higher pretensions to anti- 
 qnity ; its prose here and there re- 
 minds us of the style of the ^rauta- 
 Stitras. 
 
 •(■ From his examination of Vul- 
 lers's view in the following number 
 of Janus, ii. 453. I may remark here 
 that Wilson's words, also quoted by 
 Wise in the Preface to his System of 
 Hindu Medicine (Calc. 1845), p. 
 xvii., have been utterly misunder- 
 Btood by TuUers. Wilson fixes " as 
 the most modern limit of our con- 
 jecture " the ninth or tenth century, 
 i.e., A.D., but Vullers takes it to he 
 B.O. ! ! [Cf. now Wilson's W(»-ks, 
 iii. 273, ed. Host.] 
 
 '"' 'I'his is evidently Roth's opinioa 
 
 also (see Z. D. M. G., xxvi. 441, 
 1872). Here, after expressing a 
 wish that Indian medicine might be 
 thoroughly dealt with by competent 
 scholars, he adds the remark, that 
 "only a comparison of the prin- 
 ciples of Indian with those of Greek 
 medicine can enable ns to judge of 
 the origin, age, and value of the 
 former;" and then further on (p. 
 448), apropos of Charaka's injunc- 
 tions as to the duties of the physi- 
 cian to his patient, he cites some 
 remarkably coincident expressions 
 from the oath of the Asklepiads. 
 
 J Hessler, indeed, does not per- 
 ceive that they are proper names, 
 but translates the words straight off. 
 
 § With the single exception per- 
 haps of PaushkaUvata, a name 
 which at least seems to point to the 
 North-West, to TlcvKeXaQn-K. [We 
 are further pointed to the North- 
 West of India (cf. the Ka/ijSio-floXoi) 
 by the name of Bharadv^ja Kapi- 
 shthala in the Charaka-Samhitd, 
 which, moreover, assigns to the neigh- 
 bourhood of the Himavant (pdrfoe 
 Simavatah hibhe) that gathering 
 of sages, out of which came the 
 
MEDICAL TEXTS: NUMBER AND VALUE. 269 
 
 is by Su^ruta himself, as well as by other writers, expressly 
 assigned to the city of Ka^l (Benares) — in the period, to 
 be sure, of the mythical king Divodasa Dhanvantari,* an 
 incarnation of Dhanvantari, the physician of the gods. 
 And lastly, the weights and measures to be used by the 
 physician are expressly enjoined to be either those em- 
 ployed ia Magadha or those current in Kalinga ; whence we 
 may fairly presume that it was in these eastern provinces, 
 which never came into close contact with the Greeks, that 
 medicine received its special cultivation. 
 
 Moreover, considerable critical doubts arise as to the 
 authenticity of the existing texts, since in the case of some 
 of them we find several recensions cited. Thus Atri, whose 
 work appears to have altogether perished, is also cited as 
 to^'Ai)- Atri. 6riAa«Z- Atri; Atreya, similarly, as &riAacZ-Atreya, 
 vriddha - Atreya, madhyama - Atreya, Jcanishtha - Atreya ; 
 Su^ruta, also as vriddhaSuirata ; Vagbhata, also as widdha- 
 Vagbhata ; Harita, also as vriddha-^inta. ; Bhoja, also as 
 vriddha-Bh.QJ& — a state of things to which we have an exact 
 parallel in the case of the astronomical Siddhantas (see pp. 
 258, 259, and Colebrooke ii. 391, 392), and also of the legal 
 literature. The number of medical works and authors is 
 extraordinarily large. The former are either systems 
 embracing the whole domain of the science, or highly 
 special investigations of single topics, or, lastly, vast com- 
 pilations prepared in modern times under the patronage of 
 kings and princes. The sum of knowledge embodied in 
 their contents appears really to be most respectable. Many 
 of the statements on dietetics and on the origin and diag- 
 nosis of diseases bespeak a very keen observation. I-n 
 surgery,. too, the Indians seem to have attained a special 
 
 instruction of BIiaradTstja by Indra. expressly termed Tdhika-bhisliaj. 
 
 Again, Agnivefe is himself, ihid. , i. We have already met with his name 
 
 13 comm., described as Chdndrabhii- (p. 153 abore) amongst the teachers 
 
 gin, and so, probably (cf. gana 'ha- of the Atharva-Pari^ishtas.] 
 hvddi' to Pi&jini, iv. I. 45) asBoci- * Su^ruta is himself said, in the 
 
 ated with the Chandrabhdgii, one of introduction, to have been a disciple 
 
 the great rivers of the Panjdb. And of his. This assertion may, how- 
 
 lastly, there is also mentioned, ibid., ever, rest simply on a confusion of 
 
 i. 12, iv. 6, an ancient physician, this Dhanvantari with the Dhan- 
 
 Kdnkdyana, probably the Kanbah or vantari who is given as one of the 
 
 Kiitka of the Arabs (see Reinaud, ' nine gems ' of Vikrama's court. 
 Mem. siir I'Inde, p. 314 ff.), who is 
 
270 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 proficiency,^^ and in this department European surgeons 
 might perhaps even at the present day stiU learn some- 
 thing from them, as indeed they have akeady borrowed 
 from them the operation of rhinoplasty. The iidformation, 
 again,regarding the medicinal properties of minerals (especi- 
 ally precious stones and metals), of plants, and animal sub- 
 stances, and the chemical analysis and decomposition of 
 these, covers certainly much that is valuable. Indeed,, the 
 branch of Materia Medica generally appears to be handled 
 with great predilection, and this makes up to us in some 
 measure at least for the absence of investigations in the 
 field of natural science.'"^ On the diseases, &c., of horses 
 and elephants also there exist very special monographs. 
 For the rest, during the last few centuries medical science 
 has suffered great detriment from the increasing prevalence 
 of the notion, in itself a very ancient one, that diseases are 
 but the result of transgressions and sins committed, and 
 from the consequent very general substitution of fastings, 
 alms, and gifts to the Brahmana, for real remedies. — An 
 excellent general sketch of Indian medical science is given 
 in Dr. Wise's work. Commentary on the Hindu System, of 
 Medicine, which appeared at Calcutta in 1845.^^' 
 
 The influence, which has been ah-eady glanced at, of 
 Hindii medicine upon the Arabs in the first centuries of 
 the Hijra was one of the very highest significance ; and 
 the Khalifs of Bagdad caused a considerable number of 
 works upon the subject to be translated.* Now, as Ara- 
 
 ^"s See now as to this Wilson, the editor, it makes but slow pro- 
 
 Worlcs, iii. 380 ff., ed. Rest. gress. (Part 2, 1871, breaks off at 
 
 "" Cf. the remarks in note 300 on adhy. 5.) It furnished the occasion 
 
 the vidyds and the vaidydka. for Both's already mentioned mono- 
 
 31° New ed. i860 (London). Cf. graph on Charaka, in which he corn- 
 also two, unfortunately short, papers municates a few sections of the 
 by Wilson On the Medical and Sur- work, iii. 8 (' How to become a doc- 
 gical Science of the Hindus, in vol. i. tor") and i. 29 ('The Bungler') in 
 of his Essays on Sanskrit Literature, translation. From the Bhela-Sam- 
 coUected by Dr. Rost (1864, Works, hit<i (see note 301 above), Burnell, 
 vol. iii.). Up to the present only in his Mem. of S. Ind. PaX., p. 94, 
 Susrnta has been published, by quotes a verse in a way (namely, as 
 MadhuBtidana Gupta (Calc. 1835-36, 31. 4) which clearly indicates that 
 new ed. 1868) and by Jivdnanda he had access to an entire work of 
 Vidy&agara (1873). An edition of this name. 
 
 Charaka has been begun by Gangd- * See Gildemeister, Script. Arab. 
 
 dhara Kavirdja (Calc. 1868-69), de re6jM /nrficis, pp. 94-97. [Plugel, 
 
 but unfortunately, being weighted following the Pihrist al-uMm in Z. 
 
 with a very prolix commentary by D. M. G., xi. 148 ff., 325 ff. (1857).] 
 
ART OF WAIi— MUSIC. 271 
 
 tian medicine constituted the chief authority and guiding 
 principle of European physicians down to the seventeenth 
 century, it directly follows — ^just as in the case of astro- 
 nomy — that the Indians must have been held in high 
 esteem by these latter ; and indeed Charaka is repeatedly 
 mentioned in the Latin translations of Avicenna (Ibn Sina), 
 Ehazes (Al Easi), and Serapion (Ibn Serabi).* 
 
 Besides Ayur-veda, medicine, the Hindiis specify three 
 other so-called Upavedas — Dhanur-veda, Gdndharva-veda, 
 and Artha-ddstra, i.e., the Art of War, Music, and the For- 
 mative Arts or Technical Arts generally ; and, like Ayur- 
 veda, these terms designate the respective branches of 
 literature at large, not particular works. 
 
 As teacher of the art of war, Vi^vamitra is mentioned, 
 and the contents of his work are fully indicated ; ^^^ the 
 name Bharadvaja also occurs.^^^ But of this branch of 
 literature hardly any direct monuments seem to have been 
 preserved.t Still, the Niti-Sastras and the Epic comprise 
 many sections bearing quite specially upon the science of 
 war ; ^^^ and the Agni-Purana, in particular, is distinguished 
 by its very copious treatment of the subject.^^* 
 
 Music was from the very earliest times a favourite pur- 
 suit of the Hindiis, as we may gather from the numerous 
 allusions to musical instruments in the Vedic literature ; 
 but its reduction to a methodical system is, of course, of 
 later date. Possibly the Nata-Siitras mentioned in Panini 
 (see above, p. 197) may have contained something of the 
 
 * See Eoyle On the Antiquity of K£(jendra L^la Mltra in the Bibl. 
 Hindu Medicine, 1838. 7n5. (1849-61), with extracts, whicl), 
 ^" By Madhue6dana Sarasvati in however, only reach as far as the 
 the Prasthdna-bheda, /. St., i. 10, ninth chap., from the commentary 
 21. entitled ' Upddhyiya - nirapekshd ; ' 
 312 Where Bharadvaja can appear in style and matter it reminds us o£ 
 in such a position, I am not at pre- the Byihat-Samhitsi of Var£tha-Mi- 
 sent aware ; perhaps we ought to hira. A work of like title and sub- 
 read Bhdradvdja, i.e., Drona ? ject was taken to Java by the Hin- 
 t With the exception of some diis who emigrated thither, see /. 
 works on the rearing of horses and St., iii. 14S ; but whether this emi- 
 elephants, which may perhaps be gration actually took place so early 
 classed here, although they more as the fourth century, as Rij. L. 
 properly belong to medicine. M. supposes, is still very question- 
 sis The Kdmandakiya Kiti-^fctra able, 
 in nineteen chaps., to which this espe- si4 ggg ■Wilson ' On tTie A rt of 
 cially applies, has been published by War ' (Works, iv. 290 ff.). 
 
272 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 kind, since music was specially associated with dancing. 
 The earliest mention of the names of the seven notes of the 
 musical scale occurs, so far as we know at present, in the 
 so-called Vedangas— in the Chhandas ^^^ and the Siksha ; ^^^ 
 and they are further mentioned in one of tlje Atharvo- 
 panishads (the Garbha), which is, at least, not altogether 
 modern. As author of the Gandharva-veda,* i.e., of a 
 treatise on music, Bharata is named, and, besides him, also 
 iivara, Pavana, Kalinatha,^" Mrada ; ^^^ but of these the 
 only existing remains appear to be the fragments cited in 
 
 816 See on this /. St., viii. 259-272. 
 The designation of the seven notes 
 by the initial letters of their names 
 is also found here, in one recension 
 of the text at least, ibid., p. 256. 
 Acoording to Von Bohlen, Das alte 
 IniMen, ii. 195 (1830), and Benfey, 
 Indien, p. 299 (in Ersch and Gruier's 
 Encyclopce&ie, vol. xvii., 1840), this 
 notation passed from the Hiudtis to 
 the Persians, and from these again 
 to the Arabs, and was introduced 
 into European music by Guido d' 
 Arezzo at the beginning of the ele- 
 venth century. Corresponding to 
 the Indian so, ri ga ma pa dha ni we 
 have in Persian, along with the de- 
 signation of the notes by the first 
 seven letters of the alphabet (A — G), 
 the scale da re m/i fa sa la he ; see 
 Bichardson and Johnson's Pers. 
 Diet. s. V. Durr i mufassal. — Does the 
 word gamma, ' gamut,' Fr. gamm,e, 
 which has been in use since the time 
 of Guido d' Arezzo to express the 
 musical scale, itself come from the 
 equivalent ■ Sanskrit term grdrna 
 {I'rikr. gdma), and so exhibit a direct 
 trace of the ladian origin of the 
 seven notes ? See Ludwig Geiger's 
 precisely opposite conjecture in his 
 Ursprungder Sprache, i. 458 (1868). 
 The usual explanation of the word 
 is, of course, that it is derived from 
 the r (gamma) which designates the 
 first of the twenty - one notes of 
 Guide's scale, and which was 
 "known and iu common, if not uni- 
 versal, use for more than a cen- 
 tury before his time ; " see Ambros, 
 
 Oesehiclite der Mmih, ii. 151 (1864). 
 " There being already a G and a, g in 
 the upper octaves, it was necessary 
 to employ the equivalent Greek letter 
 for the corresponding lowest note." 
 The necessity for this is not, how- 
 ever, so very apparent ; but, rather, 
 in the selection of this term, and 
 again in its direct employment in the 
 sense of ' musical scale ' a remini- 
 scence of the Indian word may ori- 
 ginally have had some influence, 
 though Guido himself need not have 
 been cognisant of it. 
 
 *^^ And this not merely in the 
 ^iksh^L attributed to Fdi^iini, but in 
 the whole of the tracts belonging to 
 this category ; see my Essay on the 
 Pratijnii-Stltra, pp. 107-109; Haug, 
 Accent, p. 59. 
 
 * This title is derived from the 
 Gandharvas or celestial musicians. 
 
 ^" This name is also written Kalli- 
 n£Ltba (Kapila in Lassen, /, AK., 
 iv. 832, is probably a mistake), by 
 Sir W. Jones, On the Musical Modes 
 of the Hindus, in As. Res., iii. 329, 
 and by Aufrecht, OakUogus, p. 210". 
 Biihler, however, Oatal. of MSS. 
 from Guj., iv. 274, has the spelling 
 given in the text. But, at any rate, 
 instead of Pavana, we must read 
 'Hanumant, son of Pavana.' For 
 Bharata, see above, p. 231. 
 
 ^^ See the data from the Ni£- 
 rada-^iksbfi in Haug, Ueier des Wesen 
 des Ved. Accents, p. 58. The 'gan- 
 dharva Nfirada ' "is probably origi- 
 nally only Cloud personified ; see 
 I. St., i. 204, 483, ix. 2. 
 
PAINTING AND SCULPTURE. 
 
 273 
 
 the scholia of the dramatic literature. Some of these 
 writings were translated into Persian, and, perhaps even 
 earlier, into Arabic. There are also various modern 
 works on music. The whole subject, however, has been 
 but little investigated.^1^ 
 
 As regards the third Upaveda, Artha-^dstra, the Hindiis, 
 as is well known, have achieved great distinction in the 
 technical arts, but less in the so-called formative arts. 
 The literature of the subject is but very scantily repre- 
 sented, and is for the most part modern. 
 
 Painting, in the first place, appears in a very rudiment- 
 ary stage. Portrait-painting, for which perspective is not 
 required, seems to have succeeded best, as it is frequently 
 alluded to in the dramas.™' In Sculpture, on the con- 
 trary, no mean skill is discernible.^^" Among the reliefs 
 carved upon stone are many of great beauty, especially 
 those depicting scenes from Buddha's life, Buddha being 
 uniformly represented in purely human shape, free from 
 mythological disfigurement. — There exist various books of 
 
 '^' Besides Sir W. Jones, I. c, see 
 also Patterson in vol. iz. of the As. 
 Res., Lassen, 7. AK., iv. 832, and 
 more particularly the special notices 
 in Aufrecht's CatcUogus, pp. 199-202. 
 ^&ngadeva, author of the Sangi- 
 taratnsikara, cites as authorities 
 Abhinavagupta, Kirtidhara, Kohala, 
 Some^vara ; he there treats not only 
 of music, especially singing, but also 
 of dancing, gesticulation, &o. 
 
 3191V On modern painting, see my 
 Essay, Ueter Krishna's Qeburtsfest, 
 p. 341 ff. — It is noteworthy that the 
 accounts of 'the manner of origin 
 of the production of likenesses ' 
 at the close of T&an^tha'a hist. 
 of Buddhism (Schiefner, p. 278 
 ff. ) expressly point to the time 
 of A^oka and Niigilrjuna as the 
 most flourishing epoch of the Ya- 
 ksha and N^ga artists. In an ad- 
 dress recently delivered to the St. 
 Petersburg Academy (see the Bul- 
 letin of zsth Nov. 187s), Schiefner 
 communicated from the K^gyur 
 some 'Anecdotes of Indian Artists,' 
 
 in which, among other things, special 
 reference is made to the Yavanas as 
 excellent painters and craftsmen. 
 On pictorial representations of the 
 fight between Kansa and Krishna, 
 see the data in the Mahdbhishya, /. 
 St., xiii. 354, 489 ; and on likenesses 
 of the gods for sale in P^nini's time, 
 Goldstucker's Pdnini, p. 228 S. ; /. 
 St., V. 148, xiii. -331. 
 
 320 Through the recent researches 
 of Fergusson, Cunningham, and Leit- 
 ner the question has been raised 
 whether Greek influence was not 
 herealsoanimportantf actor. Highly 
 remarkable in this regard are, for 
 example, the parallels between an 
 image of the sun-god in his car on a 
 column at Buddhagay^ and a well- 
 known figure of Phoebus Apollo, as 
 shown in Plate xxvii. of Cunning- 
 ham's Archceological Survey of India, 
 vol. iii. 97 (1873). The same type 
 is also exhibited on a coin of the 
 Bactrian king Plato, lately described 
 by W. S. W. Vaux in the Numism. 
 Chronicle, xv. 1-5 (1875). 
 
274 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 instructions and treatises on the subject : '^^ according tb 
 the accounts given of them, they deal for the most part 
 with single topics, the construction of images of the gods, 
 for example ; hut along with these are others on geometry 
 and design in general. 
 
 A far higher degree of development was attained by 
 Architecture, of which some most admirable monuments 
 stUl remain : it received its chief cultivation at the hands of 
 the Buddhists, as these required monasteries, topes {st'dpas), 
 and temples for their cult. It is not, indeed, improbable 
 that our Western steeples owe their origin to an imita- 
 tion of the Buddhist topes. But, on the other hand, in the 
 most ancient Hindii edifices the presence of Greek influ- 
 ence ^^^° is unmistakable.^^^ (See Benfey, Indien, pp. 300- 
 305.) Architecture, accordingly, was often systematically 
 
 ^^^ S.g., also in Varfha-Mihira's 
 Brihat - Samhit^, one ' chapter of 
 •which, on the con'struotion of statues 
 of the gods, is communicated from 
 Albirtinl by Reinaud in his MSm. 
 ««)■ I'Inde, p. 419 ff. See also /. St., 
 xiii. 344-346. 
 
 321" In the fifth vol., which has 
 just appeared, of his Archceological 
 Survey of India, p. 185 ff., Cunning- 
 ham distinguishes an Indo-Fersian 
 style, the prevalence of which he 
 assigns to the period of the Persian 
 supremacy over the valley of the 
 Indus(5oo-33o), and. three Indo-Gre- 
 cian styles, of which the Ionic pre- 
 vailed in Takshila, the Corinthian in 
 Gandfa^ra, and the Doric in Kash- 
 mir. R^jendra L^la Mitra, it is true, 
 in vol. i. of his splendid work. The 
 Antiquities of Orissa (1875), holds 
 out patriotically against the idea of 
 any Greek infliienoe whatever on the 
 development of Indian architecture, 
 ■ &c. (At p. 25, by the way, my con- 
 jecture as to the connection between 
 the Asura Maya, Turamaya, and 
 Ptolemaios, see above, p. 253, /. St., 
 ii. 234, is stated in a sadly distorted 
 form.) Looking at his plates, how- 
 ever, we have a distinct suggestion 
 of Greek art, for example, in the two 
 
 fountain-nymphs in Plate xvi., No. 
 46 ; while the Bayadere in Plate 
 xviii.. No. 59) from the temple of 
 Bhuvane^vara, middle of seventh 
 century (p. 31), seems to be resting 
 her right hand on a dolphin, beside 
 which a Cupid (?) is crouching, and 
 might therefore very well be an imi- 
 tation of some representation of 
 Venus. (Cf. Rij. L. M., p. 59.) 
 
 ^'^ This does not mean that the 
 Indians were not acquainted with 
 stone-building prior to the time of 
 Alexander — -an opinion which is 
 confuted by Cunningham, I. c, iii. 
 98. The painful minuteness, indeed, 
 with which the erection of brick- 
 altars is described in the Vedic sac- 
 rificial ritual (of. the 6ulva-Siitras) 
 might lead us to suppose that such 
 structures were still at that time 
 rare. But, on the one hand, this 
 would take us back to a much earlier 
 time than we are here speaking of ; 
 and, on the other, this scrupulous 
 minuteness of description may 
 simply be due to the circumstance 
 that a specifically sacred structure 
 is here in question, in connection 
 with which, therefore, every single 
 detail was of direct consequence. 
 
ARCHITECTURE— TECHNICAL ARTS. 
 
 2-75 
 
 treated of,^^^ and we find a considerable number of such 
 works cited, some of which, as is customary in India, pur- 
 port to proceed from the gods themselves, as from Vi^vakar- 
 man,^^ Sanatkumara, &c. In the Samhita of Varaha-Mihira, 
 too, there is a tolerably long chapter devoted to architec- 
 ture, though mainly in an astrological connection. 
 
 The skill of the Indians in the production of delicate 
 woven fabrics, in the mixing of colours, the working of 
 metals and precious stones, the preparation of essences,^^^ 
 and in all manner of technical arts, has from early times 
 enjoyed a world-wide celebrity : and for these subjects also 
 we have the names of various treatises and monographs. 
 Mention is likewise made of writings on cookery and every 
 kind of requirement of domestic life, as dress, ornaments, 
 the table; on games of every description, dice,* for ex- 
 
 323 See Lassen, I. AK., iv. 877. 
 H^iu Edz'a Essay on the Architecture 
 of the ffindus (1834) is specially 
 based on the Minasfra in fifty-eight 
 adhydyas, presumably composed in 
 S. India (p. 9). M^yamata (Maya's 
 system, on which see Eaj. L. M., 
 Notices, ii. 306), K^yapa, Vaikhd- 
 nasa, and the SakaMdhik^ra ascribed 
 to Agastya, were only secondarily 
 consulted. The portion of the Agni- 
 Purfeia published in the Bibl. Ind. 
 treats, int. al., of the building of 
 houses, temples, &c. The Eatha- 
 S&tra and the V^atu- Vidy^ are given 
 by ^ankha (Sohol. on K^ty., i. I. 
 1 1) as the special rules for the ratha- 
 hdra. The word Ssiira-dAdra, 'mea- 
 suring-line holder,' ' builder,' signi- 
 fies at the same time 'stage-man- 
 ager ; ' and here perhaps we have to 
 think of the temporary erections 
 that were required for the actors, 
 spectators, &c., during the perform- 
 ance of dramas at the more import- 
 ant festivals. In this latter accept- 
 ation, indeed, the word might also 
 possibly refer to the 'Sa.ta.-Siitras, 
 the observance of which had to be 
 provided for by the SMra-dhdra ? 
 See above, pp. 198, 199. 
 
 324 On a Vi^va-karma-praki^a and 
 a Vi^vakarmiya-^lpa, see E^jendra 
 Ldla Mitra, Notices of Sansle. MSS., 
 ii. 17, 142- 
 
 32^ The art of perfumery appears 
 to have been already taught in a 
 special S<itra at the time of the 
 Bh^shya ; of. the observations in /. 
 St., ziii. 462, on chdndanagandhiJea, 
 F&a.. iv. 2. 65 ; perhaps the Sdrrmstam 
 ('n&ma i&stram,' Kaiyata) Bhdshya 
 to P^. iv. 2. 104, belongs to this 
 class also. 
 
 * In /. (Si., i. 10, 1 have translated, 
 doubtless incorrectly, the expression 
 chatuhshashti-kald-idslra (cited in 
 the Frasth£Lna-bheda as part of the 
 Artha-^&tra) by 'treatise on chess,' 
 referring the 64 koMs to the 64 
 squares of the chess-board ; whereas, 
 according to .45. i2e«. i. 341 (Schlegel, 
 Bijlex. sur I'Eivdedes Langues Asiat., 
 p. 112), it signifies 'treatise on the 
 64 arts ' ? In the Da^akum^ra, 
 however (p. 140, ed. Wilson), the 
 chatuhshashti-lcaldgama is expressly 
 distinguished from the Artha-^istra. 
 — See an enumeration of the 64 
 hilds, from the Siva-tantra in R^dhsl- 
 k^ntadeva's ^aida-Jealpa-druma, s. 
 v. [On the game of Chatur-afiga 
 see now my papers in the Monats- 
 her. der Berl. Acad., 1872, pp. 60 
 fi:, 502 ff.; 1873, p. 70s flF.; 1874, 
 p. 21 ff. ; and also Dr. Ant. van der 
 Linde's beautiful work, Geschichte 
 des Schachspiels (1874, 2 vols.). 
 
276 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 ample ; nay, even on the art of stealing — an art which, 
 in fact, was reduced to a regular and complete system [cf. 
 Wilson, Da^akum., p. 6g, on Karnlsuta, and Hindu Theatre, 
 i. 63]. A few of these writings have also been admitted 
 into the Tibetan Tandjur, 
 
 Prom Poetry, Science, and Art, we now pass to Law, 
 Custom, and EeHgious Worship, which are aU three com- 
 prehended in the term ' Dharma,' and whose literature is 
 presented to us ia the Bha.rma-a&strous or Smvriti-a6Mr(is. 
 The connection of these works with the Grihya-Siitras 
 of Vedie literature has already been adverted to in the 
 introduction (see pp. 19, 20), where, too, the conjecture 
 is expressed that the consignment of the principles of 
 law to writing may perhaps have been called forth by 
 the growth of Buddhism, with the view of rigidly and 
 securely fixing the system of caste distinctions rejected by 
 the new faith, and of shielding the Brahmanical polity gene- 
 rally from innovation or decay. In the most ancient of 
 these works, accordingly — the Law-Book of Manu — we en- 
 counter this Brahmanical constitution in its full perffection. 
 The Brahman has now completely attained the goal from' 
 which, in the Brahmanas, he is not Y&rf far distant, and 
 stands as the born representative of Deity itself ; while, 
 upon the other hand, the condition of the Sudra is one 
 of the utmost wretchedness and haidship. The circum- 
 stance that the Vaidehas and the Lichhavis (as Lassen, no 
 doubt rightly, conjectures for Nichhivis) are here num- 
 bered among the impure castes, is — as regards the 
 former — certainly a sign that this work is long pos- 
 terior to the Satapatha-Brahmana, where the Vaidehas 
 appear as the leading representatives of Brahmanism. The 
 position allotted to this tribe, as well as to the Lichhavis, 
 may, perhaps, further be connected with the fact that, ac- 
 cording to Buddhist legends, the Vaidehas, and especially 
 
DHARMA-SASTRAS : CODE OF MANU. 277 
 
 this Lichhavi family of them, exercised a material influ- 
 ence upon the growth of Buddhism. The posteriority of 
 Manu to the whole hody of Vedic literature appears, 
 besides, from many other special indications ; as, for in- 
 stance, from the repeated mention of the several divisions 
 of this literature ; from the connection which subsists with 
 some passages in the Upanishads ; from the completion of 
 the Yuga system and the triad of deities; as well as, 
 generally, from the minute and nicely elaborated distribu- 
 tion and regulation of the whole of life, which are here 
 presented to us. 
 
 I have likewise already remarked, that for judicial pro- 
 cedure proper, for the forms of justice, the connectrag link 
 is wanting between the Dharma-^astra of Manu and Vedic 
 literature. That this code, however, is not to be regarded 
 as the earliest work of its kind, is apparent from the very 
 nature of the case, since the degree of perfection of the 
 judicial procedure it describes justifies the assumption 
 that this topic had been frequently handled before.* The 
 same conclusion seems, moreover, to follow from the fact 
 of occasional direct reference being made to the views of 
 predecessors, from the word ' Dharma-Sastra ' itself being 
 famUiar.f as also from the circumstance that Patamjali, 
 in his Mahabhashya on Panini, is acquainted with works 
 bearing the name of Dharma-Sutras.^^^ Whether remains 
 of these connecting links may yet be recovered, is, for the 
 present at least, doubtful.J For the domestic relation? 
 of the Hindus, on the contrary — for education, marriage, 
 household economy, &c. — ^it is manifestly in the Grihya- 
 Siitras that we must look for the sources of the Dharma- 
 Sastras; and this, as I have also had frequent occasion 
 
 * See Sfcenzler in J. S., i. 244ff. with the precepts of Mann. So 
 
 + Yet neither circumstance is also, for example, a verse in Yfeka's 
 
 strictly conclusive, as, considering Kirukti, iii. 4, concerning the dis- 
 
 the peculiar composition of the^ ability of women to Inherit, which, 
 
 work, the several passages in ques- besides, directly appeals to ' Manulj 
 
 tion might perhaps be later addi- Svdyambhuvah.' This is the first 
 
 tions. , time that the latter is mentioned 
 
 3-s See now on this /. St., xili. as a lawgiver. ,[See also Sdnkh. 
 
 458,459- Grih., li. 16; Apast., ii. 16. i, 
 
 J Allusions to judicial cases are of ed. Biihler. On Vedic phases of 
 
 very rare occurrence within the criminal law, see Burnell, Pref. to 
 
 range of Vedic literature ; but where Sama-vidhdna-Br., p. xv. ; Lit. 0. 
 
 they do occur, tliey mostly agree Bl., 1874, p. 423.] 
 
278 
 
 SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 to observe (pp. 58, 84, 102, 143), is tlie explanation of the 
 circumstance that most of the names current as authors of 
 Grihya- Sutras are at the same time given as authors of 
 Dharma-Sastras.* The distinction, as a commentator f re- 
 marks, is simply this, that the Grihya-Siitras confine 
 themselves to the points^ of difference of the various schools, 
 whereas the Dharma-Sastras embody the precepts and 
 obligations common to all.^^' 
 
 * In the case of Manu, too, there 
 would seem to hare existed a 
 M^nava Grihya-Stitra as its basis (?), 
 and the reference to the great an- 
 cestor Manu would thus appear to 
 be only a subsequent one (?). [This 
 surmise of mine, expressed with 
 di£&dence here, above at pp. 19, 102, 
 and in /. St., i. 69, has since been 
 generally accepted, and will, it is 
 hoped, find full confirmation in the 
 text of the Miln. Grihya^., which has 
 meanwhile actually come to light. 
 I have already pointed out one in- 
 stance of agreement in language with 
 the Yajus texts, in the word ahhini- 
 mrvMa; see I. Str., ii 209, 210.] 
 
 t M&tka, on the Karma-pradlpa 
 of K^tydyana. 
 
 '^ In his Hist, of Anc. Sansk. 
 Lit. (1859), Max Miiller gave some 
 jiccount of the Dharma-Stitra of 
 Apastamba, vrhich is extant under 
 the title Sdmaydchdrika-Siltra. He 
 also characterised three of the Dhar- 
 ma-^dstrag printed at Calcutta (the 
 Gautama, Vishnu, and Vasishtha) 
 as being Dhanna-Stitras of a similar 
 kind ; expressing himself generally 
 to the effect (p. 134) that all the 
 metrical Dharma-Siistras we possess 
 are but "more modern texts of 
 earlier Stltra-works or Rula-dbarmas 
 belonging originally to certain Vedic 
 Charanas." (The only authority 
 cited by him is Stenzler in /. St., i. 
 232, who, however, in his turn, re- 
 fers to my own earlier account, ibid. 
 PP- 57. 69. I43)' Johantgen, in 
 his tract, Ueber das Gesctzbuch del 
 Manu (1863), adopted precisely the 
 same view (see, e.g., p . 1 1 3). Biihler, 
 finally,' in the Introduction to the 
 
 Digest of Hindu Law, edited by 
 him, jointly with E. West (vol. i., 
 1867], furnished us for the first time 
 with more specific information as 
 to these Dharma-Slitras, which 
 connect themselves with, and in 
 part directly belong to, the Vedic 
 Slitra stage. In the appendix to 
 this work he likewise communicated 
 various sections on the law of in- 
 heritance from the four Dharma- 
 Stitras above mentioned, and that of 
 Baudh^yana. He also published 
 separately,, in 1868, the entire 
 S<itra of Apastamba, with extracts 
 from Haradatta's commentary and 
 an index of words (1871). This 
 Slitra, in point of fact, forms (see 
 above, notes 108 and 109) two 
 praSnas of the Ap. Srauta-Stitra ; 
 and a similar remark applies to the 
 Sutra of Baudhiyana. According 
 to Biihler's exposition, to the five 
 Sdtras just named have to be added 
 the small texts of this class, consist- 
 ing of prose and verse intermingled, 
 which are ascribed to Usanas, Ka- 
 ^yapa, and Budha; and, perhaps, also 
 the Smritis of Hsirita and Safikha. 
 All the other existing Smritis, on 
 the contrary, bear a more moderu 
 character, and are either (l) metri- 
 cal redactions of ancient Dharma- 
 SUtras, or fragments of such redac- 
 tions (to these belong our Manu and 
 Ydjnavalkya, as well as the Smritis 
 of Ndrada, Pard&tra, Brihaspati, 
 Samvarta), — or (2) secondary redac- 
 tions of metrical Bharma-Sdstras, — 
 or (3) metrical versions of the Grihya- 
 S<itras, — or lastly, (4) forgeries of the 
 Hindft sects. — The material in vol. i. 
 of Buliler and West's work has been 
 
DHARMA-SASTRAS : CODE OF MANU. 279 
 
 As regards tlie existing text of Manu, it cannot, ap- 
 parently, have been extant in its present shape even at 
 the period to which the later portions of the Maha- 
 Bharata belong. Por although Manu is often cited in the 
 epic in literal accordance with the text as we now have it, 
 on the other hand, passages of Manu are just as often 
 quoted there which, while they appear in our text, yet do 
 so with considerable variations. Again, passages are there 
 ascribed to Manu which are nowhere found in our collec- 
 tion, and even passages composed in a totally different 
 metre. And, lastly, passages also occur frequently in the 
 Maha-Bharata which are not attributed to Manu at all, 
 but which may nevertheless be read verbatim, in our text.* 
 Though we may doubtless here assign a large share of the 
 blame to the writers making, the quotations (we know from 
 the commentaries how often fliistakes have crept in through 
 the habit of citing from memory), still, the fact that our 
 text attained its present shape only after having been, 
 perhaps repeatedly, recast, is patent from the numerous 
 inconsistencies, additions, and repetitions it contains. In 
 support of this conclusion, we have, further, not only the 
 fabulous tradition to the effect that the text of Manu con- 
 sisted originally of 100,000 &,dkas, and was abridged, first 
 to 12,000, and eventually to 4000 Mokasf — a tradition 
 which at least clearly displays a reminiscence of various 
 remodellings of the text — but also the decisive fact that 
 in the legal commentaries, in addition to Manu, a Vriddha- 
 Manu and a JBrihan-Msum are directly quoted,J and must 
 therefore have been still extant at the time of these coni- 
 mentaries. But although we cannot determine, even ap- 
 proximately, the date when our text of Manu received its 
 present shape,^^® there is little doubt that its contents, 
 
 utilised critically, in its legal bear- t Our present text contains only 
 
 ing, by Aurel Mayr, in his work. Das 2684 Uokaa. 
 
 indische Erbrecht (Vienna, 1873) ; J See Stenzler, I. c, p. 235. 
 
 see on it Lit. C. Bl., 1874, p. ^^ Johiintgen (pp. 86, 95) assumes 
 
 ■lAo ff. as the latest limit for its composition 
 
 * See Holtzmann, Ueber den the year b. c. 350, and as the earliest 
 
 griechischen Ursprung des indiscJien limit the fifth century. But this 
 
 Thierhrems, p. 14. [As to Manu's rests in great part npon his further 
 
 position in Vardha-Mihira, see Kern, assumption (p. 77) that the Bi-ith- 
 
 Pref. to Brih. Samh., pp. 42, 43, manas, Upanishads, &c , known 
 
 and on a Psili edition of Manu, to us are all of later date — an 
 
 Host in I. ;S(., i. 315 fT.] assumption which is rendered in 
 
28o SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 compared with those of the other Dharma-Sastras, are, on 
 the whole, the most ancient, and that, consequently, it has 
 been rightly placed by general tradition * at the head of 
 this class of Hterature. The nirmber of these other 
 Dharma-Sastras is considerable, amounting to fifty-six, 
 and is raised to a much higher figure — namely, eighty — 
 if we reckon the several redactions of the individual works 
 that have so far come to our knowledge, and which are 
 designated by the epithets laghii, madhywma,, hrihat, 
 vriddha.^^ When once the various texts are before us, 
 their relative age will admit of being determined without 
 great difficulty. It will be possible,t in particular, to 
 characterise them according to the preponderance, or the 
 entire absence, of one or other of the three constituent 
 elements which make up the gubstance of Indian law, that 
 is to say, according as they fthiefly treat of domestic and 
 civil duties, of the administration of justice, or of the regu- 
 lations as to purification and penance. In Manu these 
 three constituents are pretty much mixed up, but upon 
 the whole they are discussed with equal fulness. The 
 code of Tajnavalkya is divided into three books, accord- 
 ing to the three topics, each book being of about the same 
 extent. The other works of the class vary. 
 
 With regard to the code of Yajnavalkya, just men- 
 tioned — ^the only one of these works which, with Manu, is 
 as yet generally accessible — its posteriority to Manu fol- 
 lows plainly enough, not only from this methodical distri- 
 bution of its contents, but also from the circumstance J that 
 
 the highest degree doubtful by the these, however, we have still to add, 
 remarks he himself makes, in agree- for example, from his Catalogue of 
 ment with Miiller and myself, upon MSS. from Gujardt, vol. iii., the 
 the probable origin of the work Smiritis of Eokila, Gobhila, S^ry£- 
 from a 6rihra-S6tra of the Mdnara runa, laghu- and vriddha-ViLrihoca, 
 school of the Black Tajns, as well laghu - Brihaspati, laghu ■ Sannaka ; 
 as upon the various redactions it while to the collective titles pur- 
 has undergone, and the relation of posely omitted by him from his 
 the work itself and the various list — Chaturvin^ti, Shattrin^at (ex- 
 schools of the Yajus to Buddhism tracts from 24 and 36 Sinritis), and 
 (pp. 112, 113); see /. Sir., ii. 278, Saptarshi — we have probably to add, 
 279. from the same source, the Shadaiitl 
 
 * Which those Hindis who emi- and Shannavati ? The Aruna-Sinfiti 
 
 grated to Java also took with them, is also specified in the Oatal. Sims. 
 
 a^ Buhler, I. c, p. 13 ff., enu- MSS., N.W. Prov., 1874, p. 122. 
 merates 78 Smritis and 36 different + See Stenzler, I. c, p. 236. 
 redactions of individual Smritis, — J See Stenzler in the Pref. to his 
 
 in all, a total of 114 such texts. To edition of Yajnavalkya, pp. ix.-xi. 
 
DHARMA-SASTRAS : CODE OF VAJNAVALKYA. 281 
 
 it teaches the worship of Gane^a and the planets, the execu- 
 tion, upon metal plates, of deeds relating to grants of land, 
 and the organisation of monasteries — all subjects which 
 do not occur in Manu ; while polemical references to the 
 Buddhists, which in Manu are at least doubtful,^^" are here 
 unmistakable.^^^ In the subjects, too, which are common 
 to both, we note in Yajnavalkya an advance towards 
 greater precision and stringency; and in individual in- 
 stances, where the two present a substantial divergence, 
 Yajnavalkya's standpoint is distinctly the later one. The 
 earliest limit we can fix for this work is somewhere about 
 the second century a.d., seeing that the word n&naka 
 occurs in it to denote ' coin,' and this term, according to 
 Wilson's conjecture, is taken from the coins of Kanerki, 
 who reigned until A.D. 40.* Its latest limit, on the other 
 hand, may be fixed about the sixth or seventh century, as, 
 according to Wilson, passages from it are found in in- 
 scriptions of the tenth century in various parts of India, 
 and the work itself must therefore date considerably 
 earlier. Its second book reappears literally in the Agni- 
 Purana; whether adopted into the latter, or borrowed 
 from it, cannot as yet be determined. Of this work also 
 two recensions are distinguished, the one as hrihad- 
 Yajnavalkya, the other as vrit^tZAa- Yajnavalkya (see also 
 Colebrooke, i. 103). As to its relation to the remaining 
 
 3'° If by the pravrajUds in viii. De Astrologies Indicm Originibus, p. 
 363, Buddhist brakmachdrinis be 14, the statement in Tijnavalkya, 
 really meant, as asserted by KulMka, i. 80, that coitus must take place 
 then this particular precept — which 'susthe indau,' rests upon an ao- 
 puts the violation of their persons quaintanoe with the Greek astro- 
 on the same footing with violence logical doctrine of the ' twelve 
 done to " other public women," and houses' (and, in fact, this is the 
 punishes the offence with a small sense in which the Mit^sharSi under- 
 fine only — is to be taken not merely, stands the passage) ; so that, in his 
 as Talboys Wheeler takes it {Hist, of opinion, Ydjnavalkya cannot be 
 India, ii. 583), as a bitter sarcasm, placed earlier than the fourth cen- 
 but also as evidence that the work tury of our era. This interpreta- 
 was composed at a time when the tion, however, is not absolutely 
 Buddhist nuns had already really forced upon us, as sustha might 
 deteriorated ; cf. the remarks in a equally well refer to one of the 
 similar instance in regard to Pitnini, lunar phases or mansions which 
 /. St., V. 141. from an early period were re- 
 '^' Cf. Johantgen, pp. 112, 113. garded as auspicious for procreation 
 * See above, p. 205 : the same ap- and birth; see Lit, C. Bl., 1873, 
 plies also to the Vriddha-Gautama p. 787.] 
 Uw-book. [According to Jaoobi, 
 
282 SANSKRIT LITERA TUBE. 
 
 codes, Stenzler, from the preface to whose edition the 
 foregoing information is taken, is of opinion that it is an- 
 tecedent to all of them,^^^ and that, therefore, it marks the 
 next stage after Manu.* 
 
 But in addition to the Dharma-^astras, which form the 
 basis and chief part of the literatm-e dealiag with Law, 
 Custom, and Worship, we have also to rank the great hulk 
 of the epic poetry — ^the Maha-Bharata, as well as the 
 Eamayana — as belonging to this branch of literature, since 
 in these works, as I remarked when discussing them, the 
 didactic element far outweighs the epic. The Maha-Bharata 
 chiefly embraces instruction as to the duties of kings and of 
 the military class, instruction which is given elsewhere also, 
 namely, in the Niti-Sastras and (apparently) in the Dhanur- 
 Veda ; but besides this, manifold other topics of the Hindu 
 law are there discussed and expounded. The Puranas, on 
 the contrary, chiefly contain regulations as to the worship 
 of the gods by means of prayers, vows, fastings, votive 
 offerings, gifts, pious foundations, pilgrimages, festivals, 
 conformably to the shape which this worship successively 
 assumed ; and in this they are extensively supported by 
 the Upapuranas and the Tantras. 
 
 Within the last few centuries there has further grown 
 up a modern system of jurisprudence, or scientific legal 
 literature, which compares and weighs, one against another, 
 the different views of the authors of the Dharma-Sastras. 
 In particular, extensive compilations have been prepared, 
 in great measure by the authority and under the auspices 
 of various kings and princes, with a view to meet the prac- 
 
 "'' Miiller has, it is true, claimed Biihler's opinion (p. xxvii.), Manu 
 
 (see above, note 327) for the Dharma- and Y^jnavalkya, although only 
 
 S&tras of Viahiiu, G-autama, and " Tersifications of older Stitras," may 
 
 Va^ish^ha the character of Dharma- yet very well be of higher antiquity 
 
 Stitras; and Biihler (pp. xxi.-xxv.) "than some of the Sritra works 
 
 expressly adds to the list the similar which have come down to our 
 
 texts attributed to Ui^anas, Ka^yapa, times." 
 
 and Budha, and also, though with * This, to be sure, is at variance 
 
 a reservation, those of Hilrita and with i. 4, 5, where twenty different 
 
 Sankha (Va,4ishtha belongs pro- Dharma - ^d^tra authors are enu- 
 
 bably to the Drihyiiyana school of merated (amongst them Yiljnaval- 
 
 the Sitma-Veda, see pp. 79, 85 kya himself) : these two verses are 
 
 —the Veda with which Gautama perhaps a later addition (?). 
 is likewise associated). Still, in 
 
LATER LEGAL LITERATURE. 283 
 
 tical want of a sufficient legal code.=«8 The English them- 
 selves, also, have had a digest of this sort compiled, from 
 which, as is well known, the commencement of Sanskrit 
 studies dates. These compilations were mostly drawn up 
 in the Dekhan, which from the eleventh century was the 
 refuge and centre of literary activity generally. In Hin- 
 dustan it had been substantially arrested by the inroads 
 and ravages of the Muhammadans ; * and it is only within 
 the last three centuries that it has again returned thither, 
 especially to 'SMi (Benares) and Bengal. Some of the 
 Mogul emperors, notably the great Akbar and his two suc- 
 cessors, Jehangir and Shah Jehanf — who together reigned 
 1556-1656 — were great patrons of Hindii literature. 
 
 This brings us to the close of our general survey of 
 Sanskrit literature ; but we have still to speak of a very 
 peculiar branch of it, whose existence only became known 
 some twenty or thirty years ago, namely, the Buddhistic 
 Sanskrit works. To this end, it is necessary, in the first 
 place, to premise some account of the origin of Buddhism 
 itself.33* 
 
 333 See Colebrooke's account of verse from another Dharma-^^stra : 
 
 these iu his two prefaces to the " Tindhyasya daJeshine ihdge yatra 
 
 Digest of Hindu Law (1798) and the GoddvaH sthitd | tatra vedds cha ya- 
 
 Two Treatises on the Hindu Law of jndi cha bhavishyanti Jcalau yuge."\\ 
 
 Inheritance (1810), now in Cowell's " In the Kali age the Vedas and 
 
 edition of the Misc. Ess., i. 461 fF. ; sacrifices will have their home to 
 
 also Biihler's Introduction, I. c, p. the south of the Vindhya, in the 
 
 iii. if. region where flows the Godiivarf." 
 
 * This finds expression, e.g., in Similar expressions occur in the 
 
 thefoUowing UoJcaoi Vydsa : "Sam- Law-book of Atri and in the Jagan- 
 
 prdpte tu kalau Mle Vindhyddrer mohana. 
 
 •uttare sthitd^ | hrdhmand yajnara- f As well as the latter's son, Ddra 
 
 hitd jyotih- sdstra-pardnmujc7idn."\[ Shakoh. 
 
 "In the Kali age, the Brahmans ^'^* Gf. C. F. Koppen's expellent 
 
 dwelling north of the Vindhya are work, Die Heligion des Buddha 
 
 deprived of tbe sacrifice and averse (1857, 1859, 2 vols.), 
 from Jyotih'&Istra : " and in this 
 
284 B UDDHJSTJC SANSKRIT LITER A TURE. 
 
 Of the original signification of the word ImddJui, ' awak- 
 ened ' (so. from error), ' enlightened/ as a complimentary 
 title given to sages in general,* I have already more than 
 once spoken (pp. 27, 167). I have also already remarked 
 that the Buddhist doctrine, was originally of purely philo- 
 sophical tenor, identical with the system afterwards de- 
 nominated the Samkhya, and that it only gradually grew 
 up into a religion in consequence of one of its representa- 
 tives having turned with it to the people.f Buddhist 
 tradition has itself preserved in individual traits a remini- 
 scence of this origin of Buddha's doctrine, and of its poste- 
 riority to and dependence upon the Samkhya philosophy.^^ 
 Thus it descrihes Buddha as born at Kapila-vastu, 'the 
 abode of Kapila,' and uniformly assigns to Kapila, the 
 reputed founder of the Samkhya system, a far earlier date. 
 Again, it gives Maya-devi as the mother of Buddha, and 
 here we have an unmistakable reference to the Maya of 
 the Samkhya.^^'* Further, it makes Buddha, in his prior 
 birth among the gods, bear the name ^vetaketu ^^ — a name 
 which, in the ^atapatha-Brahmana, is borne by one of the 
 contemporaries of Kapya Patamehala, with whom Kapila 
 ought probably to be connected. And, lastly, it distinctly 
 ranks Pancha^ikha, one of the main propagators of Kapila's 
 doctrine, as a demigod or Gandharva. Of the names be- 
 longing to the teachers mentioned in Buddhist legend as 
 contemporaries of- Buddha, several also occur in Vedic 
 
 * The name bhagwoant, which is there might perhaps actually be here 
 
 also applied to Buddha in particular, an early complimentary allusion to 
 
 is likewise a general title of honour, iRuddha ! A "PSrihshir (!)bhikshur 
 
 still preserved among the Brahmans AJreyah " is named shortly after, 
 
 to designate Rishis of every kind, ''"' Mdyd, however, belongs not 
 
 and is bestowed very specially on to the Sdmkbya, but specially to 
 
 Vishnu or Krishna ; while in the the Veddnta doctrine, 
 
 contracted form, bhavant, it actually '^^ Can the legend in the Mahd- 
 
 supplies the place of the pronoun of 'Ehiiats,, xii. 2056, have any oonnec- 
 
 the second person [/. St., ii. 231, tion herewith — to the effect that 
 
 xiii. 351, 352]. Svetaketu was disowned by his fa- 
 
 t See/. Si., i. 435, 436, and above, ther Udddlaka because of his being 
 
 pp. " mithyd viprdn upacharan " ? — ^The 
 
 *'' In the list of ancient sages at name Svetaketu further occurs 
 
 the beginning of the Charaka-Sam- among the prior births of Buddha, 
 
 hit!j,wefindmention,amongstothers, No. 370 in Westergaard's Catalogus, 
 
 of a "Gautamah Sstjjikhyalj " — an p. 40; but amongst these 539 
 
 expression which the modern editor jdtakas pretty nearly everything ap- 
 
 interprets, " Baiiddhavi4esha-Gau- pears to be mentioned ! 
 tama-vydvf ictaye t " But in truth 
 
ORIGIN OF BUDDHISM. 285 
 
 literature, but only in its third or Siitra stage, €.g., Katya- 
 yana, Katyayaniputra, KaUndinya, Agnive^ya, Maitraya- 
 nlputra, Vatsfputra,* Paushkarasadi ; but no names of 
 teachers belonging to the Brahmana period are found in 
 these legends.^^ This is all the more significant, as Bud- 
 dhism originated in the same region and district to which 
 we have to allot the ^atapatha-Brahmana, for instance — 
 the country, namely, of the Kosalas and Videhas, among 
 the Sakyas and Lichhavis. The Sakyas are the family of 
 which Buddha himself came: according to the legend.f 
 they had immigrated from the west, from Potala, a city 
 on the Indus. Whether this tradition be well founded or 
 not, I am, at aU events, disposed to connect them with the 
 Sakayanins who are referred to in the tenth book of the 
 Satapatha-Brahmana, and also with the ^akayanyas of the 
 Maitrayana-Upanishad, which latter work propounds pre- 
 cisely the Buddhistic doctrine of the vanity of the world, 
 &c. (see above, pp. 97, 137).^^ Among the Kosala- Videhas 
 this doctrine, and in connection with it the practice of 
 subsistence upon alms as Pravrajaka or Bhikshu, had been 
 thoroughly disseminated by Yajnavalkya and their king 
 Janaka ; and a fruitful soil had thei'eby been prepared for 
 Buddhism (see pp. 137, 147, 237). The doctrines promul- 
 gated by Yajnavalkya in the Vrihad-Aranyaka are in fact 
 completely Buddhistic, as also are those of the later Athar- 
 vopanishads belonging to the Yoga system. Nay, it 
 would even seem as if Buddhist legend itself assigned Bud- 
 
 * To these names in -patra, which Ariaiw, Antiq., p. 212 : "The truth 
 
 are peculiar to Buddhist legend and of the legend may be questioned, 
 
 the vania of the ^atapatha-Br£ih- but it not improbably intimates 
 
 mana, belongs also, in the former, some connection with the ^akas or 
 
 the name ^^riputra, ^d^rik^putra. Indo-Soythians, who were masters 
 
 337 Unless Buddha's preceptor of Pattalene subsequent to the Greek 
 
 Ardda may have something to do princes of Bactria." The legend 
 
 with the Ardlhi Saujita of the Ait. may possibly have been invented in 
 
 Br.,vii. 22(?). The special conclusion the time of Kanerki, one of these 
 
 to be based upon these name-syn- 6aka kings, with a view to flatter 
 
 chronisms is that the advent of Bud- him for the zeal he displayed on 
 
 dha is to be set down as contempor- behalf of Buddhism, 
 
 aueous with the latest oifsets of the ^^ So, too, Johantgen, Ueher das 
 
 Brsihmana literature, i.e., with the Gesetzluch des Maim, p. 112, refers 
 
 jfranyakas and older Stitras ; /. St., the traces of Buddhistic notions 
 
 iii. 158 ff. exhibited in that work specially to 
 
 f See Csoma Korbsi, Journ. As. the school of the M^navas, from 
 
 Soc. Beng., Aug. 1833 ; Wilson, which it sprang. 
 
286 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 dlia to a period exactly coincident with that of Janaka, and 
 consequently of Yajnavalkya also ; for it specifies a king 
 Ajataiatru as a contemporary of Buddha, and a prince 
 of this name appears in the Vrihad-Aranyaka and the 
 KausMtaki-Upanishad as the contemporary and rival of 
 Janaka.^^ The other particulars given in Buddhist legend 
 as to the princes of that epoch have, it is true, nothing' ana- 
 logous to them in the works just mentioned ; the Ajataiatru 
 of the Buddhists, moreover, is styled prince of Magadha, 
 whereas he of the Vrihad-Aranyaka and the KausMtakL- 
 TJpanishad appears as the sovereign of the Kalis. (The 
 name Ajataiatru occurs elsewhere also, e.g., as a title 
 of Yudhishthira.) StiU, there is the further circumstance 
 that, ia the fifth kd/nda, of the ^atapatha-Brahmana, Bhad- 
 rasena, the son of Ajataiatru, is cursed by Axuni, the 
 contemporary of Janaka and TajnavaJkya (see /. St., i. 
 213); and, as the Buddhists likewise cite a Bhadrasena — 
 at least, as the sbcth successor of Ajataiatru — we might 
 almost be tempted to suppose that the curse in question 
 may have been called forth by the heterodox anti- 
 brahmanical opinions of this Bhadrasena. Nothing more 
 precise can at present be made out ; and it is possible that 
 the two Ajatalatrus and the two Bhadrasenas may simply 
 be namesakes, and nothing more — as may be the case also 
 with the Brahmadatta of the Vrihad-Aranyaka and the 
 two kings of the same name of Buddhist legend. — It is, at 
 any rate, significant enough that ia these legends the name 
 of the Kuru-Panchalas no longer occurs, either as a com- 
 pound or separately ; ^^ whilst the Pandavas are placed in 
 Buddha's time, and appear as a wild mountain tribe, Uving 
 by marauding and plunder.* Buddha's teaching was 
 mainly fostered in the district of Magadha, which, as an 
 extreme border province, was perhaps never completely 
 
 ''' Highly noteworthy also is the mentioned by the Southern Bud- 
 peculiar agreement between Bud- dhists ; see /. St., iii. 160, 161. 
 dhist legends and those of the * The allusion to the five FinduB 
 Vrihad-Aranyaka in regard to the in the introduction of the Lalita- 
 six teachers whom Ajita&itru and Vistara (Foucaux, p. 26) is probably, 
 Janaka had before they were in- with the whole passage in which 
 structedby Buddha and Yijnayalkya it occurs, an interpolation, being 
 respectively; see /. St., iii. 156, totally irreconcilable with the other 
 
 references to the Fiindavas contained 
 
 'S^i, 
 
 The Kurus are repeatedly in the work. 
 
TRADITION AS TO BUDDHA'S AGE. 287 
 
 brahmanised ; so that the native inhabitants always re- 
 tained a kind of influence, and now gladly seized the 
 opportunity to rid themselves of the brahmanical hier- 
 archy and the system of caste. The hostile allusions to 
 these Magadhas in the Atharva-Samhita (see p. 147 — and 
 in the thirtieth book of the Vajasaneyi-Samhita ? pp. 1 1 1, 
 112) might indeed possibly refer to their anti-brahmanical 
 tendencies in times antecedent to Buddhism : the similar 
 allusions in the Sama-Siitras, on the contrary (see p. 79),^^ 
 are only to be explained as referring to the actual flourish- 
 ing of Buddhism in Magadha.* 
 
 With reference to the tradition as to Buddha's age, the 
 various Buddhist eras which commence with the date of 
 his death exhibit the widest divergence from each other. 
 Amongst the Northern Buddhists fourteen difi'erent ac- 
 counts are found, ranging from B.C. 2422 to B.C. 546 ; the 
 eras of the Southern Buddhists, on the contrary, mostly 
 agree with each other, and all of them start from B.C. 544 
 or 543. This latter chronology has been recently adopted 
 as the correct one, on the ground that it accords best with 
 historical conditions, although even it displays a dis- 
 crepancy of sixty-six years as regards the historically 
 authenticated date of Chandragupta. But the Northern 
 Buddhists, the Tibetans as well as the Chinese — inde- 
 pendently altogether of their era, which may be of later 
 origin than this particular tradition + — agree in placing 
 the reign of king Kanishka, Kanerki, under whom 
 the third (or fourth) Buddhist council was held, 400 
 years after Buddha's death ; and on the evidence of coins, 
 this Kanishka reigned down to a.d. 40 (see Lassen, /. AK., 
 ii. 412, 413), which would bring down the date of Buddha's 
 death to about the year B.C. 370. Similarly, the Tibetans 
 place Nagarjuna — who, according to the Eaja-taramgini, 
 was contemporaneous with Kanishka — 400 years after 
 the death of Buddha; whereas the Southern Buddhists 
 make him live 500 years after that event. Nothing like 
 
 3*^ And on another occasion, in to the Buddhistic names of the 
 
 the Baudh^yana - SAtra also ; see mountains about R^jagpha, the 
 
 note 126. capital of Magadha, found in Mah£i- 
 
 * For other points of contact in Bhirata, ii. 799. 
 
 the later Vedic literature, see pp. + Which is met with so early aa 
 
 129, 138 [98, 99, 151]. Lassen has the seventh century A.D., in Hiuan 
 
 drawn attention, in /. AK., ii. 79, Thsang. 
 
288 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 positive certainty, therefore, is for the present attain- 
 able.^^ A ■priori, however, it seems probable that the 
 council which was held in the reign of king Kanerki, and 
 from which the existing shape of the sacred scriptures of 
 the Northern Buddhists nominally dates, really took place 
 400, and not so much as 570, years after Buddha's death. 
 It seems probable also that the Northern Buddhists, who 
 alone possess these Scriptures complete, preserved more 
 authentic information regarding the circumstances of the 
 time of their redaction — and consequently also regarding 
 the date of Nagarjuna — than did the Southern Buddhists, 
 to whom this redaction is unknown, and whose scriptures 
 exist only in a more ancient form which is alleged to 
 have been brought to Ceylon so early as B.C. 245, and 
 to have been there committed to writing about the year 
 B.C. 80 (Lassen, I. AK., ii. 435). — Of these various eras, 
 the only one the actual employment of which at an early 
 period can at present be proved is the Ceylonese, which, 
 like the other Southern eras, begins in B.C. 544. Here 
 the period indicated is the close of the fourth century 
 A.D. ; since the Dipavansa, a history of Ceylon in Pali 
 verse, which was written at that date, appears to make use 
 of this era, whereby naturally it becomes invested with a 
 certain authority. 
 
 If, now, we strip the accounts of Buddha's personality 
 of all supernatural accretion, we find that he was a king's 
 son, who, penetrated by the nothingness of earthly things, 
 forsook his- kindred in order thenceforth to live on alms, 
 and devote himself in the first place to contemplation 
 and thereafter to the instruction of his fellow-men. His 
 doctrine was,* that " men's lots in this life are conditioned 
 and regulated by the actions of a previous existence, that 
 no evil deed remains without punishment, and no good deed 
 without reward. From this fate, which dominates the in- 
 dividual within the circle of transmigration, he can only 
 
 '*^ Nor have the subsequent dis- any definite result ; ct. my /. Str. , 
 
 cussionsof this topic byMaxMiiller ii. 216; Lit. C. BL, 1874, p. 719. 
 
 (1859), Sist. A. S. L., p. 264 ff., by * Though it is nowhere set forth 
 
 Westergaard (i860), Udier Buddha's insosuccinctaform; itTe3ults,how- 
 
 Todesjahr (Breslau, 1862), and by ever, as the sum and substance of 
 
 Kern, Over de Jaartdling der Zuidel. the various legends. 
 Buddhiaten (1874), so far yielded 
 
BUDDHA 'S DOCTRINE. 289 
 
 escape * by directing his will towards the one thought of 
 liberation from this circle, by remaining true to this aim, 
 and striving with steadfast zeal after meritorious action 
 only; whereby finally, haAdng cast aside all passions, 
 which are regarded as the strongest fetters in this prison- 
 house of existence, he attains the desired goal of complete 
 emancipation from re-birth." This teaching contains, in 
 itself, absolutely nothing new ; on the contrary, it is en- 
 tirely identical with the corresponding Brahmanical doc- 
 trine ; only the fashion in which Buddha proclaimed and 
 disseminated it was something altogether novel and un- 
 wonted. For while the Brahmans taught solely in their 
 hermitages, and received pupils of their own caste only, he 
 wandered about the country with his disciples, preach- 
 ing his doctrine to the whole people,t and — although still 
 recognising the existing caste-system, and explaining its 
 origin, as the Brahmans themselves did, by the dogma of 
 rewards and punishments for prior actions — receiving as 
 adherents men of every caste without distinction. To 
 these he assigned rank in the community according to 
 their age and understanding, thus abolishing within the 
 community itself the social distinctions that birth en- 
 tailed, and opening up to all men the prospect of eman- 
 cipation from the trammels of their birth. This of itself 
 sufficiently explains the enormous success that attended 
 his doctrine: the oppressed aU turned to him as their 
 redeemer.^ If by this alone he struck at the root of 
 the Brahmanical hierarchy, he did so not less by declar- 
 
 * See Schmidt, Daanglun der minority. My idea is that the strict 
 
 Weise und der Thor, Pref., p. morality required by Buddhism of 
 
 xxxiii. ff. its adherents became in the long run 
 
 t See Lassen, I. AK., ii.. 440, irksome to the people; the original 
 
 441 ; Burnouf, Introd. d VHistoire cult, too, was probably too simple. 
 
 du jBuddhisme Indien, pp. 152- The Brahmans knew how to turn 
 
 212. both circumstances to the best ad- 
 
 J Under these circumstances, it vantage. Krishna- worship, as they 
 
 is indeed surprising that it should organised it, offered far more satis- 
 
 have been possible to dislodge Bud- faction to the sensual tastes of the 
 
 dhism from India. The great num- people ; while the various cults of 
 
 bers and influence of the Brahman the ^aktis, or female deities, most 
 
 caste do not alone completely ac- likely all date from a time shortly 
 
 count for the fact ; foi', in proper- preceding the expulsion of the Bud- 
 
 tion to the whole people, the Brah- dhists from India, 
 mans were after all only a very small 
 
ago BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 ing sacrificial worsliip — tlie performance of which was 
 the exclusive privilege of the Brahmans — to be utterly 
 unavailing and worthless, and a virtuous disposition and 
 virtuous conduct, on the contrary, to be the only real 
 means of attaining final deliverance. He did so, further, 
 by the fact that, whoUy penetrated by the truth of his 
 opinions, he claimed to be in possession of the highest 
 enlightenment, and so by implication rejected the vafidity 
 of the Veda as the supreme source of knowledge. These 
 two doctrines also were in no way new ; till then, how- 
 ever, they had been the possession of a few anchorites; 
 never before had they been freely and publicly proclaimed 
 to all. 
 
 Immediately after Buddha's death there was held, ac- 
 cording to the tradition, a council of his disciples in 
 Magadha, at which the Buddhist sacred scriptures were 
 compiled. These consist of three divisions (Pitdkas), 
 the first of which — the S-Atras* — comprises utterances 
 and discourses of Buddha himself, conversations with his 
 hearers ; while the Vinaya embraces rules of discipline, and 
 the Abhidharma, dogmatic and philosophical discussions. 
 A hundred years later, according to the tradition of the 
 Southern, but a hundred and ten according to that of the 
 Northern Buddhists, a second council took place at Patali- 
 putra for the purpose of doing away with errors of dis- 
 cipline which had crept in. With regard to the third 
 council, the accounts of the ITorthern and Southern Bud- 
 dhists are at issue. (Lassen, /. AK., iL 232.) According 
 to the former, it was held in the seventeenth year of the 
 reign of Aloka, a year which we have to identify with B.C. 
 246 — ^which, however, is utterly at variance with the 
 equally traditional assertion that it took place 218 years 
 after Buddha's death, i.e., in B.C. 326. At this council the 
 precepts of the law were restored to their ancient purity, 
 and it was at the same time resolved to send forth mission- 
 aries to propagate the doctriaes of Buddha. The Northern 
 Buddhists, on the contrary, place the third council 400 
 years after Buddha's death, in the reign of Kanishka, one 
 
 * This name alone might suggest the Slitra, not in the Bnihmai^a, 
 that Buddha himself floui-ished in period. 
 
REDACTION OF THE BUDDHISTIC SCRIPTURES. 291 
 
 of the TnrusKka (Saka) kings of Kashmir, who, as we have 
 seen, is established, on numismatic evidence, to have reigned 
 until A.D. 40. The sacred scriptures of the Northern Bud- 
 dhists, which are alleged to have been fixed at this council, 
 are still extant, not merely in the Sanskrit originals them- 
 selves, which have recently been recovered ia Nepal,* but 
 also in a complete Tibetan translation, bearing the name 
 Kdgyur, and consisting of one hundred volumes ; t as well 
 as, partially at least, in Chinese, Mongolian, Kalmuck, and 
 other translations. The scriptures of the Southern Bud- 
 dhists, on the contrary, are not extant in Sanskrit at aU. 
 With reference to them, it is alleged that one year after 
 their arrangement at the third council, that of A^oka (i.e., 
 in the year B.C. 245), they were brought by Mahendra, the 
 apostle' of Ceylon, to that island, and by him translated 
 
 * By the British Resident there, 
 B. H. Hodgson, who presented MSS. 
 of them to the Asiatic Societies of 
 Calcutta, London, and Paris. The 
 Paris collection was further enriched 
 in 1837 with copies which the Sociiti 
 Askstigue caused to be made through 
 Hodgson's agency. This led Bur- 
 nouf to write his great work, Intro- 
 duction A VHistoire du BvMhisme 
 Indien, Paris, 1844 [followed in the 
 end of 1852 by his not less important 
 production, the translation of the 
 Lotus de la Sonne Loi; see /. St., iii. 
 13s ff., 1864. The British Museum 
 and the University Library in Cam- 
 bridge are now also in possession of 
 similar MSS. A catsJogue, com- 
 piled by Cowell and Eggeling, of 
 the Hodgson collection of Buddhist 
 Sanskfit MSS. in the possession of 
 the Koyal Asiatic Society has just 
 appeared.] 
 
 f Regarding the compass and con- 
 tents of this Tibetan translation, our 
 first (and hitherto almost our sole) 
 information was supplied by a Hun- 
 garian traveller, Csoma Kbrosi, the 
 Anquetil du Perron of this century, 
 a man of rare vigour and energy, who 
 resided for a very long time in Tibet, 
 and who by his Tibetan grammar 
 and dictionary has conquered this 
 
 language for European science. Two 
 pretty extensive works from the 
 K%yur have already been edited 
 and translated : the baanglun in St. 
 Petersburg by Schmidt, and the 
 Rgya Cher Sol Pa (Lalita-Vistara) 
 in Paris by Foucaus. [Since then 
 L. Feer, especially, has rendered 
 valuable service in this field by his 
 Textes tiris du Kandjov/r ( 1 864-7 ' > i ' 
 parts) ; also Schiefner, e.g., by his 
 editions of the Viinala-proMottara- 
 ratnamdld (1858) — the Sanskrit text 
 of which was subsequently edited by 
 Fouoaux (of. also /. Str., i. 210 fF.)^— 
 and of the JBharatce Seaponsa (1875). 
 Schiefner has further just issued a 
 translation from the Kslgyur of a 
 group of Buddhist tales, under the 
 title, Mahdkdtydyana und Konig 
 Tschanda Pradjota. The ninth of 
 these stories contains (see p. vii. 26 
 ff.) what is now probably the oldest 
 version of the so-called 'Philoso- 
 pher's Ride,' which here, as in the 
 Pafichatantra (iv. 6), is related of 
 the king himself; whereas in an 
 Arabian tale of the ninth century, 
 communicated in the appendix (p. 
 66) and in our own medissval version, 
 it is told of the king's wise coun- 
 sellor. 
 
292 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 into the native Singhalese.^ Not until some 165 yeats 
 later (i.e., in B.C. 80) were they consigned to -writing in 
 that language, having been propagated in the interval by 
 oral transmission only.^ After a further period of 500 
 years (namely, between A.D. 410 and 432) they were at 
 length rendered into the sacred PaJi tongue (cf. Lassen, 
 7. AK., iL 435), in which they are now extant, and from 
 which in turn translations into several of the languages of 
 Farther India were subsequently made.* As to the relation 
 of these scriptures of the Southern Buddhists to those of 
 their Northern co-religionists, little is at present known 
 beyond the fact that both present in common the general 
 division into three parts {S-Htra, Vinaya, Abhidkarma). 
 In extent they can hardly compare with the latter,^^ nor 
 even, according to the foregoing exposition,t in authen- 
 ticity.^^ Unfortunately but little information has as yet 
 
 '*' It was not the Pdli text itself, 
 but only the oral commentary (attha- 
 kathd) belonging to it, which was 
 translated into Singhalese. (See the 
 following notes.) So at least it is 
 stated in the tradition in the Mahi- 
 vansa. For the rest, it is extremely 
 doubtful how much of the present 
 Tipitaka may have actually been in 
 existence then. For if we compare 
 the statements contained in the 
 Bhabra missive — addressed by king 
 Piyadasi to the synod of Magadha, 
 which was then engaged in the ac- 
 commodation of schisms that had 
 sprung up — relative to the sacred 
 texts {dhamma-paliydydm) as they 
 then stood, a mighty difference be- 
 comes apparent ! See Burnouf, 
 Lotus, p. 724 ff. ; /. St., iii. 172 ff. 
 
 **• See Mahftvansa, chap, xxxiii. 
 p. 207 ; Tumour, Preface, p. xxix. ; 
 Muir, Orig. Sansk. Texts, ii. 69, 70 
 (57=) ; /. St., V. 26. 
 
 * That is to say, translated back 
 again(?); for this sacred languagemust 
 be the same that Mahendra brought 
 with him ? [Not the texts them- 
 selves, only their interpretation {at- 
 tkalcatJui) was now rendered back 
 again into Pdli, namely, by Buddha- 
 ghosha, who came from Hagadha, and 
 resided a number of years in Ceylou.] 
 
 ^ The extent of the Pffi Tipitaka 
 is also very considerable; see the 
 accounts in Hardy's Eastern Mona- 
 chism, pp. 167-170. On the ear- 
 liest mention of the name Tipitaka 
 in a Sanskrit inscription of Buddha- 
 ghosha at Kanheri (in the Joum. 
 Bombay Br. JR. A. S., v. 14), see /. 
 St., V. 26. 
 
 t If indeed the case be as here 
 represented ! I can in the mean- 
 while only report. [Unfortunately, 
 I had trusted to Lassen's account, 
 in the passage cited in the text, 
 instead of referring to Tumour him- 
 self (pp. xxix. XXX.) ; the true state 
 of the case (see the preceding notes) 
 I have set forth in /. St., iii. 254.] 
 
 *** The question which of the two 
 redactions, that of the Northern or 
 that of the Southern Buddhists, is 
 the more original has been warmly 
 debated by Tumour and Hodgson. 
 (The latter's articles on the subject 
 are now collected in a convenient 
 form in his Essays on Languages, 
 Lit. and Eel. of Nepal and T&et, 
 1S74.) Burnouf, also, has discussed 
 the question in his Lotus de la Bonne 
 Loi, p. 862 ff., and has decided, in 
 principle no doubt rightly, that both 
 possess an equal title. Compare 
 here /. St., iii. 176 ff., where certain 
 
SCRIPTURES OF SOUTHERN BUDDHISTS. 293 
 
 ■been imparted regarding their contents, &c.* Sonttern 
 Buddhism, however, supplies us with copious and pos- 
 sibly trustworthy accounts of the first centuries of its 
 existence, as well as of the growth of the Buddhist faith 
 generally, a Pali historical literature having grown up in 
 Ceylon at a comparatively early period,^* one of the most 
 important works of which — the Mahavansa of Mahanama, 
 composed towards a.d. 480 — ^has already been published, 
 both in the original text and in an English version. 
 
 doubts are urged by me against some 
 of his assumptions, as also specially 
 with regard to Buddhaghosha's 
 highly significant part in the shap- 
 ing of the P^li Tipitaka. Kern has 
 recently, in his Essay Over de Jaar- 
 teUing der zaidelijke £.uddhisten,gone 
 far beyond those objections of mine ; 
 but, as it seems to me, he goes fur- 
 ther than the case requires ; see Lit. 
 C. SI., 1874, p. 719. At any rate, 
 even fully acknowledging the part 
 belonging to Buddhaghosha, it ap- 
 pears to me now that the claim of 
 the Pffi TipitaJta to superior origi- 
 nality is, after all, far stronger than 
 that of the Sanskrit texts of the 
 Northern Buddhists, from which, as 
 from the sacred writings of the jai- 
 nas, it is distinguished, greatly to its 
 advantage, by its comparative sim- 
 plicity and brevity. Cf . also S. Beal's 
 very pertinent observations in the 
 Ind. Antiq., iv. 90. 
 
 * The most authentic information 
 as yet is to be found in the Intro- 
 duction to G. Tumour's edition of 
 the Mahavansa (1835, Ceylon) and 
 in the scattered essays of this scholar; 
 also, though only in very general 
 outline, in Westergaard's Catalogue 
 of the Copenhagen Indian MSS. 
 (1846, Havnise), which comprise a 
 tolerable number of these Pffi works, 
 purchased by the celebrated Bask 
 in Ceylon. Clough's writings, too, 
 contain much that bears upon this 
 subject : also Spiegel's Anecdota 
 Palica, Exceedingly copious infor- 
 mation regarding Southern Bud- 
 dhism is contained in a work that 
 has just reached me, by E. Speuoe 
 
 Hardy, Eastern Monachism, an Ac- 
 count of the Origin, Laws, tie., of the 
 Order of Mendicants founded by Go- 
 tama Buddha, London, 1850, ^'i^ pp. 
 The author was twenty years a Wes- 
 leyan missionary in Ceylon, and ap- 
 pears to have employed this time to 
 excellent purpose. [This was fol- 
 lowed in 1853 by his Manual of 
 Buddhism, also a very valuable work. 
 — The study of Pili and its litera- 
 ture has recently taken a great spring, 
 particularly through the labours of 
 V. Fausbbll (Dhammapada, 1855 ; 
 Five Jatahas, 1861 ; Dasarathajd- 
 taka, 1871 ; Ten J&takas, 1872 ; The 
 Jdtaka, together with its Commentary, 
 Pt. i., 1875), James de Alwis {Intro- 
 duction to Eachchdy ana's Grammar, 
 1863 ; Attana.galuvan.sa, 1866), P. 
 Grimblot {Extraits du Paritta, 1870), 
 L. Peer (Daharasutta and others of 
 these PfUi-suttas in his Textes tiria 
 du Kandjour, 1869 ff.), Joh. Jli- 
 nayefif {Pdtimokhhasutta and Vutto- 
 daya, 1869; Grammaire Palie, 1874, 
 Russian edition 1872), E. Kuhn 
 (KoAihchdyanappakarance Specimen, 
 1869, 1871 ; Beitrdge zur PdM-Gram- 
 mutih, 187s), ^' Seuart (Orammaire 
 de Eachchdyana, 1 871), R. Childers 
 {EhuddaJcapdfha, 1869 ; Dictionary 
 of the Pdli Language, 1872-75), M. 
 Coom&ra, Swimj [Suttanipdta, 1874); 
 to which may be added the gram- 
 matical writings of W. Storck {1858, 
 1862) and Fr. Miiller (1867-69). 
 
 84fe Northern Buddhism has like- 
 wise found its historians. The 
 Tibetan Tdrandtha (see note 350) 
 cites as his precursors Bhataghatl, 
 Indradatta, Kshemendrabhadra. 
 
294 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 With respect now to the scriptures of the Northern 
 Buddhists, the Sanskrit originals, namely — for it is these 
 alone that concern us here — we must, in the first place, 
 keep in view that, even according to the tradition, their 
 existing text belongs only to the first century of oxir era; 
 so that, even although there should he works among them 
 dating from the two earlier councils, yet these were in 
 any case subjected to revision at the third. In the next 
 place, it is d priori improbable — nor is it indeed directly 
 alleged — that the whole of the existing works owed their 
 origin to this third council, and amongst them there must 
 certainly be many belonging to a later period. And lastly, 
 we must not even assume that all the works translated in 
 the Tibetan Kagyur were already in existence at the time 
 when translations into Tibetan began to be made (in the 
 seventh century) ; for the Kagyur was not completed all 
 at once, but was only definitively fixed after a prolonged 
 and gradual growth.* Prom these considerations alone, 
 it is abundantly plain how cautious we ought to be in 
 making use of these works. But there is stiU. more to be 
 borne in mind. For even supposing the origin of the most 
 ancient of them really to date from the first and second 
 councUs,^^ still, to assume that they were recorded in 
 writing so early as this is not only prima fade question- 
 able, but is, besides, distinctly opposed to analogy, since we 
 are expressly informed that, with the Southern Buddhists, 
 the consignment to writing only took place in the year 
 B.C. 80, long subsequent to both councils. The main pur- 
 pose of the third council under Kanishka may possibly 
 just have been to draw up written records; had such 
 records been already iu existence, Buddhism could hardly 
 have been split up thus early into eighteen different secte, 
 as we are told was the case in Kanishka's time, only 400 
 years after Buddha's death. Why, during all the eighteen 
 centuries that have since elapsed no such amount of schism 
 has sprung up, evidently because a written basis was then 
 . secured. Lastly, one important point which must not be 
 
 * According to Csoma Korosi, the Bhabra missive as to the dhamrrui- 
 Tibetan translations date from the paliyiiydni as they then stood render 
 seventh to the thirteenth centuries, such a supposition extremely doubt- 
 principally from the ninth. ful here, just as in the case of the 
 
 3-" The data contained in the PiUi Tipitaka (see note 343). 
 
LANGUAGE OF BUDDHISTIC SCRIPTURES. 295 
 
 lost sight of in estimating the authenticity of the existing 
 Buddhist scriptures is the circumstance that the sources 
 from which they were drawn were in a different language. 
 True, we cannot make out with absolute certainty in what 
 language Buddha taught and preached ; but as it was to 
 the people he addressed himself, it is in the highest degree 
 probable that he spoke in the vernacular idiom. Again, 
 it was in Magadha * that the first council of his disciples 
 assembled, and it was doubtless conducted in the dialect 
 of this country, which indeed passes as the sacred language 
 of Buddhism. The same remark applies to the second 
 council, as well as to the one which, according to the 
 Southern Buddhists, is the third, both of which were like- 
 wise held in Magadha.f Mahendraj who converted Cey- 
 lon in the year following this third cotmcil, took with him 
 to that island the Magadhf language, afterwards called 
 Pali : \ this, too, is the dialect in which the inscriptions of 
 this period, which at least bespeak Buddhistic influence, 
 are composed.^* At the last council, on the contrary, 
 which falls some 300 years later, and at which the existing 
 scriptures of the Northern Buddhists are alleged to have 
 
 * In the old capital (lUjagriha). down to us officially under the name 
 + In the new capital (PsLtaliputra). of Migadhi, and which presents 
 % That Pdli could have been de- special features of resemblance to 
 veloped in Ceylon from an imported that dialect, rather, which is em- 
 Sanskrit is altogether inconceivable, pjoyed in the inscriptions of Girnar. 
 3^ The edicts of Piyadasi present Thequestionhasthereforebeenraised 
 themselves to us in three distinct whether P^li is really entitled to the 
 dialects. One of these, that of name M^gadhi, which in the Pstli 
 Dhauli, exhibits a number of the literature is applied to it, or whether 
 pecuUarities which distinctively be- it may not have received this title 
 long to the Ardhamiigadhi of the merely from motives of ecclesiastical 
 Jainas, and the dialect designated policy, having reference to the sig- 
 Magadhi by the Prrtkrit grammari- nificance of the land of Magadha in 
 ans. It is in it that the Bhabra mis- the history of Buddhism. Wester- 
 sive addressed to the third council gaardevensurmises(C(sJ«-dendteteji. 
 is composed — a circumstance which ZeitTaii/m der indischen Geschichte, p.- 
 conclusively proves that it was then 87 n., 1862) that P^li is identical 
 the official language of Buddhism, with the dialect of Ujjayini, the 
 and, in point of fact, Mdlgadhi (since mother-tongue of Mahendra, who 
 Dhauli belongs geographically -10 was born there ; and Ernst Kuhn 
 this district) ; see /. St., iii. l8o, and {Seitrdge zur PdU-Orammatik, p. 7, 
 my Essay on the BhagavatI of the 1875) adopts this opinion. But 
 Jainas, i. 396. But then, on the Pischel {Jenaer Lit. Zeit., 1875, p. 
 other hand, this dialect displays a 316) and Childers (Pdli Vict., Pre- 
 particularly marked divergence from face, p. vii. ) pronounce against it. 
 Pilli, the language which has come 
 
296 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITER A TURE : 
 
 been compiled, tlie language employed for this purpose 
 was not MagadU, but Sanskrit, although not the purest. 
 The reason of this lies simply in the locality. For this 
 concluding coimcil was not held in Magadha, nor even in 
 Hindustan at aU, whose rulers were not then favourahly 
 disposed towards Buddhism, hut in Kashmir, a district 
 which — ^partly no doubt in consequence of its being peopled 
 exclusively by Aryan tribes,* but partly also (see pp. 26, 
 45, 178) because, like the North-West of India generally, 
 it has to be regarded as a chief seat of the cultivation of 
 Indian grammar — had preserved its language purer than 
 those Aryans had been able to do who had emigrated to 
 India, and there mingled with the native inhabitants. 
 Those priests,t therefore, who here imdertook the compila- 
 tion and recording in writing of the sacred scriptures were, 
 if not accomplished grammarians, yet in all probability 
 sufficiently conversant with grammar to be able to write 
 passable Sanskrit.J 
 
 Agreeably to what has just been set forth,^^ it is in the 
 highest degree risky to regard, as has hitherto been done. 
 
 * The Greeks and Scythians were 
 both too scanty in numbers, and too 
 short a time in close contact with 
 the natives, to exercise any influence 
 in the way of modifying the lan- 
 guage. 
 
 + And it was evidently prie^, 
 educated men therefore, who formed 
 the third council. In the first two, 
 laymen may have taken part, but 
 the Buddhistic hierarchy had had 
 time to develop sufiSciently in the 
 interval. 
 
 X Burnouf thinks differently, fltsf. 
 dv, Buddh., pp. 105, 106, as also 
 Lassen, I. AE., ii. 9, 491-493 [but 
 see /. St., iii. 139, 179 ff.]. 
 
 ^^ Beside the two branches of 
 Buddhistic literature discussed in 
 the foregoing pages — the Pffi texts 
 of the Southern and the Sanskrit 
 texts of the Northern Buddhists — 
 there stands a third group, occupy- 
 ing, from its original constitution, 
 a kind of intermediate place between 
 the other two — namely, the Ardha- 
 nidgadhl texts of the jainas. The 
 sect of the Jainas is in all probability 
 
 to be regarded as one of the schis- 
 matic sects that branched off from 
 Buddhism in the first centuries of 
 its existence. The legendary nar- 
 ratives of the personal activity of 
 its founder, Mahivira, not only re- 
 fer it exclusively to the same dis- 
 trict which Buddhism also recognises 
 as its holy land, but they, moreover, 
 display so close an affinity to the 
 accounts of Buddha's ministry that 
 we cannot but recognise in the two 
 groups of narratives merely varying 
 forms of common reminiscences. 
 Another indication that the Jaina 
 sect arose in this way out of Bud- 
 dhism — although by some it has even 
 been regarded as of pre-Buddhistic 
 origin — is afforded by the circum- 
 stance, amongst others, that its sacred 
 texts are styled, not Siltras, but 
 Angas, and consequently, in contra- 
 distinction to the oldest Buddhist 
 texts, which date from the Vedic 
 SiUra period, belong rather to the 
 Anga stage, that is to say, to the 
 period when the Aflgas or Vediiigaa, 
 works posterior to the Vedic Sutras, 
 
DOUBTFUL AUTHORITY FOR BUDDHA'S AGE. 297 
 
 the data yielded by a Buddhistic literature fashioned iu 
 this way as valid for the epoch of Buddha himself, which 
 is removed from the last council by an interval of four, 
 or, if we accept the Southern chronology, of nearly six, 
 centuries. Oral traditions, committed to writing in a 
 different language, after such a series of years, and more- 
 over only extant in a mass of writings that lie several 
 centuries apart, and of which the oldest portions have still 
 to be critically sifted out, can only be used with extreme 
 caution; and d priori the data they furnish serve, not 
 so much to characterise the epoch about which they tell, 
 as rather the epoch, in particular, in which they received 
 their present shape. But however doubtful, according to 
 
 were produced. But there is a 
 further circumstance which is quite 
 conclusive as to this point — namely, 
 that the language in which these 
 texts are composed, and which, ac- 
 cording to the scholiasts, is Ardha- 
 mfigadhi, exhihits a more de- 
 veloped and considerably later 
 phase than the language of the 
 PSli texts, to which, in its turn, 
 the Piili scholia expressly apply 
 the designation Mdgadhi, (At the 
 same time, there are also dia- 
 lectic differences between the two.) 
 See my paper on the Bbagavatl 
 of the Jainas, pp. 441, 373, 396 
 ff., 416. To the eleven principal 
 Angas have to be added a large 
 number of other writings, styled 
 Vpdnga, MAla-SHtra, Kalpa-Sitra, 
 &c. An enumeration of the entire 
 set, showing a, total of fifty works, 
 consisting of about 600,000 ilokas, 
 may be seen in Bfljendra L^Ia 
 Mitra's Notices of Sanshrit MSS., 
 iii. 67 ff., 1874. Of these texts — 
 oar knowledge of the Jainas is 
 otherwise derived from Brahmanic 
 sources only — all that has hitherto 
 been published is a fragment of 
 the fifth Anga or Bhagavati-Stitra, 
 dating perhaps from the first cen- 
 turies of our era, edited by myself 
 (1866-67). In 7. St., X. 254 ff. 
 (1867), I have also given an account 
 of the Siirya-prajnapti, or seventh 
 Updnga - S^tra, a commentary on 
 
 which is said to have been composed 
 by Bhadrab^husvilmin, author of 
 the Kalpa-Slitra, «■ work seemingly 
 written in the seventh century. 
 Lastly, there is a translation by 
 Stevenson (1848) of this Kalpa- 
 ,S<itra itself, which stands thirtieth 
 in the list of the sacred texts. Cf. 
 also S.J. Warren, Over de godsdienst- 
 ige en. wijsgeerige Begrippen der 
 Jcdnas, 1875. Thanks to G. Biihler's 
 friendly exertions, the Royal Library 
 in Berlin has lately acquired posses- 
 sion of nearly all these fifty sacred 
 texts, with or without commen- 
 taries, and in good old MSS., so 
 that we may hope soon to be 
 better informed regarding them. — 
 But the Jainas have also a great sig- 
 nificance in connection with Sanskrit 
 literature, more especially for gram- 
 mar and lexicography, as well as on 
 account of the historical and legend- 
 ary matter which they have preserved 
 (see above, p. 214, and cf. my 
 paper on the ^atrumjaya Mdhdtmya, 
 1858). One of their most honoured 
 names is that of Hemachandra, who 
 flourished in the time of the Gur- 
 jara prince Kumdrapstla (1088-1 1 72). 
 Under the title Toga-Sdstra he com- 
 posed a compendium of the Jaiua 
 doctrines in twelve pralcdias, the 
 first four of which, treating of their 
 ethics, have recently been edited 
 and translated by Ernst Windisch 
 (Z. D. M. G.,xxviii., 185 ff., 1874). 
 
298 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 this view, are the validity and authority of these writings 
 in reference to the subjects which they have hitherto been 
 taken to illustrate, they are nevertheless important, on 
 the other hand, for the history of the inner development 
 of Buddhism itself ; though even here, of course, their trust- 
 worthiness is altogether relative. Por the many marvel- 
 lous stories they recount both of Buddha himself and of 
 his disciples and other adherents, as well as the extravagant 
 mythology gradually developed in them, produce upon the 
 whole the impression of a wild and formless chaps of fan- 
 tastic inventions. 
 
 Our chief object must now, of course, be to establish a 
 relative chronology and order of sequence amongst these 
 various writings — a task which Burnouf, whoge researches 
 are our sole authority on the subject,* also set himself, 
 and which he has executed with great judgment and 
 tolerable conclusiveness. And, first, of the Sidras, or 
 accounts of Buddha himself. Burnouf divides these into 
 two classes : the simple SMras, and the so-called Mahd- 
 vaipulya- or MaM/y&na-S'&tras, which he declares to be 
 the more modern of the two in point of language, form, 
 and doctrine. As far as the latter point is concerned, he 
 is no doubt riglit. For, in the first place, in the Maha- 
 vaipulya-Siitras Buddha appears almost exclusively sur- 
 rounded by gods and BodMsattvas (beings peculiar to the 
 Buddhistic mythology) ; whereas in the simple Siitras it 
 is human beings who mostly form his following, with 
 whom gods are only now and then associated. And, in 
 the second place, the simple Siitras do not exhibit any 
 trace of those doctrines which are not common Buddhistic 
 property, but belong to the Northern Buddhists only, as, 
 for exainple, the worship of Amitabha, Mafiju^ri, Avaloki- 
 tesvara, Adibuddha,t and the Dhyanibuddhas ; and further, 
 do not contain any trace of mystic spells and magic 
 formulas, all of which are found, and in abundance, in the 
 
 * I cannot refrain from express- ture death is an irreparable loss to 
 
 ing here, in a few words at least, learning, as well as to all who kuew 
 
 my sincere and profound sorrow him, and, which is the same thing, 
 
 that now, as these sheets, which I revered and loved him. 
 
 would so gladly have submitted to + The word is found in a totally 
 
 his judgment, are passing through different sense in those portions of 
 
 the press, Eugfene Burnouf has been the Minddkyopaniahad which aie 
 
 taken from among us. His prema- due to Gaud ipdJa. 
 
SUTRA-PITAKA. 
 
 299 
 
 Maliavaipulya-Siltras only. But whether the circumstance 
 that the language of the lengthy poetical pieces, which 
 are inserted with special frequency in these last, appears 
 in a much more degenerated form — to wit, a medley of 
 Sanskrit, Prakrit, and Pali — than is the case with the 
 prose portions, is to be taken as a proof of the posteriority 
 of the Mahavaipulya-Siitras, does not seem to he quite so 
 certain as yet. Do these poetical portions, then, really 
 agree so completely, in form and substance, with the 
 prose text in respect to the several points just instanced, 
 that they may be regarded as merely an amplification or 
 recapitulation of it ? Or are they not rather distinguished 
 from it precisely in these points, so that we might regard 
 them as fragments of older traditions handed down in 
 verse, exactly like the analogous pieces which occur so 
 often in the Brahmanas ? * In the latter case we should 
 have to regard them as proof, rather, that the Buddhist 
 legends, &c., were not originally composed in Sanskrit, 
 but in vernacular dialects. From the account of the 
 
 * We must be content with simply 
 putting the question, as we are still 
 unfortunately without the Sanskrit 
 text of even a single one of these 
 Stitras ; the sole exception being an 
 insignificant fragment from the 
 Zalita-vistara, one of the MahiiTai- 
 pulya- Stitras, communicated by Fou- 
 caux at the end of his edition of the 
 Tibetan translation of this work. 
 [The entire text of the Lalita- 
 vistara, in twenty-seven chapters, 
 has since appeared in the £ibl. Ind., 
 edited by E^jendra Lila Mitra 
 (1853 if.); the translation breaks 
 off at chapter iii. Poucaux pub- 
 lished the fourth chapter of the 
 Sad-dharma-ipmfdarika in 1852, and 
 Leon Feer an Avadiina, named 
 Pratihdrya, in 1867. Lastly, the 
 Kdvanda-vyHka, a terribly inflated 
 Mahsiyina-Siitra, in honour of Ava- 
 lokite^vara, has been edited by 
 Satyavrata S^md^rami (Calc, 1873). 
 A translation of the Lalita-vistara, 
 begun by S. Lefmann in 1874, 
 embraces, so far, the first five 
 chapters, and is accompanied with 
 
 very copious notes. — The conjecture 
 expressed above as to the poetical 
 portions had previously been ad- 
 vanced — although when I wrote I 
 was not aware of the fact — in the 
 Joum. As. Soc. Beng., 1 851, p. 283, 
 see /. St., iii. 140. It was subse- 
 quently worked out in greater 
 detail by E^jendra L. Mitra, in a 
 special essay on the dialect of these 
 Q&ihia, likewise in Joum. As. Soc. 
 Beng. (1854, No. 6). Here the date 
 of their composition is even carried 
 back to the period immediately suc- 
 ceeding Buddha's death, see Muir, 
 Orig. S. Texts, ii.^ 115 flf. Kern, 
 Over de Jaartellmg, p. 108 ff. , does 
 not see in these G^th^ any peculiar 
 dialect, but merely later versions of 
 stanzas originally composed in pure 
 Prakrit. Lastly, Edward MiiUer, in 
 his tract, Der Dialekt der Gdthd des 
 Lalita-vistara (Weimar, 1874) per- 
 ceives in them the work of poets 
 who were not quite aj home in 
 Sanskrit, and who extended to it 
 the laxness of their own verna- 
 cular. 
 
30O BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 Chinese traveller, Pa Hian, who made a pilgrimage from 
 China to India and back in a.d. 399-414, it would ap- 
 pear that the Mahavaipulya-Siitras were then already 
 pretty widely diffused, since he mentions several of the 
 doctrines peculiar to them as extensively studied.^* 
 
 Of the simple Sutras, it is at least possible, in the ab- 
 sence of evidence, that such as are concerned solely with 
 Buddha's persoAality may be more ancient than those 
 relating also to persons who lived some hundreds of years 
 later; but beyond this we cannot at present determine 
 anything. Their contents are of a somewhat multifarious 
 description, and for the several divisions we also find spe- 
 cial technical designations.* They contain either simple 
 legends, styled Ityukta and Vy&karana (corresponding to 
 
 360 The accounts of Fa Hian are 
 far surpassed in moment by those 
 of Hiuan Thsang, who travelled 
 over India in the years 629-645 a.d. 
 Of special importance also are the 
 Chinese translations of Buddhistic 
 works, which are nearly all based 
 upon the texts of the Northern 
 Buddhists, and some of which pro- 
 fess to be very ancient. Of four 
 such translations of the Lalita- 
 vistara, the first is said to have 
 been made at a date so early as 
 A.D. 70-76, the second in A.D. 308, 
 and the third in 652; see on this 
 /. St., iii. 140, viii. 326. Similarly, 
 the Sad-dharma-pundarika is said to 
 have been thrice translated; first 
 in A.D. 280, next in a.d. 397-402, 
 and again in A.D. 6oi-€o5. Beal, in 
 the/n(2»m^ti<i3.,iv.90, 91, mentions 
 not only a translation of the Brah- 
 majdiorSlitra of the year a.d. 420, 
 but also a whole set of fifty Slltras 
 (amongst them, e.g., the SiinajiUaka) 
 "translated at different dates, from 
 A.D. 70 to 600, and by various 
 scholars, all of them from Sanskrit 
 or Pili," — all, therefore, from the 
 Indian original, — whereas the trans- 
 lations of later times were mostly 
 derived through the medium of the 
 Tibetan. For the criticism of the 
 respective tests, fuller particulars 
 of these, in part so aneient, transla- 
 
 tions, would of course be of great 
 importance. Of one of these works, 
 a version of the AVhinUhhramana- 
 SMra, a complete translation has 
 recently been published by Beal, 
 under the title. The Romantic Le- 
 yend of SdJcya Svddha, iSjS. The 
 special points of relation here found 
 to Christian legendsare very striking. 
 The question which party was the 
 borrower Beal properly leaves un- 
 determined, yet in all likelihood we 
 have here simply a similar case to 
 that of the appropriation of Christian 
 legends by the worshippers of Krish- 
 na. — Highly important for the his- 
 tory of Northern Buddhism is 
 W. Wassiljew's work, drawn from 
 Tibeto-Chinese sources, Der Bud- 
 dkismus, i860, as also Tdran^tha's 
 History of Buddhism in India, a 
 work composed so late as 1608, but 
 resting upon older, and in part 
 Sanskrit, authorities : rendered into 
 Bussian • by Wassiljew, — Tibetan 
 text, with Qerman version, by 
 Schiefner, 1 869; cf. also Lassen, 
 /. AK., ii. 6, note. 
 
 * According to Spiegel, in his re- 
 view, of which I have frequently 
 availed myself here, of Burnouf's 
 work, in the Jahrh. fiir wUs. Kritih, 
 1845, p. 547> most of these names 
 are also found among the Southern 
 Buddhists, 
 
SUTRA-riTAKA. 301 
 
 the Itihasa-Puranas in the Brahmanas) ; or legends in the 
 form of parables, styled Avaddna, in which we find many 
 elements of the later animal-fables ; ^^^ or further, tales of 
 presages and wonders, Adhhuta-dharma ; or again, single 
 stanzas or songs of several stanzas (Geya and Gdfhd) serv- 
 ing to corroborate previous statements ; or lastly, special 
 instruction in, and discussion of, definite topics, denomi- 
 nated UpadeSa and Niddna. All these reappear in a 
 similar way, only in a much more antique guise and under 
 different names,* in the Brahmanas and Aranyakas, as 
 well as in the prose legends interspersed here and there 
 throughout the Maha-Bharata, which in style also (though 
 not in language) offer the greatest resemblance to these 
 Buddhistic Siitras. Quite peculiar to these latter,t how- 
 ever, are the passages called Jdtakas, which treafr-of the 
 prior births of Buddha and the Bodhisattvas. 
 
 Now those data in the Stitras which have hitherto been 
 taken as valid for Buddha's time, but which we can only 
 consider as valid, primarily, for the time when the Siitras 
 were composed, are chiefly of a kind bearing upon the his- 
 tory of the Indian religion. For just as Buddha recog- , 
 nised the existence of caste, so, too, he naturally recognised 
 the then existing Hindu Pantheon.J But it must not by 
 any means be imagiued that in Buddha's time this Pan- 
 theon had attained to that phase of development which 
 we here find in the Siitras, assuming that we follow the 
 
 '^^ From the Chiaese translation legends stand distinctly related to 
 
 Stan. Julien has published quite a corresponding Brahmanio popular 
 
 collection of such stories, for the tales and legends, which they have 
 
 most part very short {Les Avaddnas, ' simply transformed [or conversely, 
 
 Contes et Apologues Indiens, 1859). into which they have themselves 
 
 The high importance of these, as been transformed] to snit the object 
 
 well as of the Buddhistic Jfltaka and in view. 
 
 other stories generally, in the lite- J Lassen's assertion (/. AK., ii. 
 
 rature of the fable and fairy-tale, is 453) that " Buddha recognised no 
 
 shown in full relief by Benfey in the gods " refers only to the circum- 
 
 introduotion to his translation of the stance that they too are regarded by 
 
 Panchatantra. him as subjected to the eternal suc- 
 
 * Only GsJthjt and TJpadei5a (Ade& cession of existence ; their existence 
 
 at least) occur also in the Briih- itself he in no way denied, for in the 
 
 manas. ■ doctrines put into his mouth there 
 
 t Although connecting links are is constant reference to them. [He 
 
 found here and there in the Mahit- abolished their significance, how- 
 
 Bhilrata also, especially in the twelfth ever, as he did that of caste.] 
 book. Indeed, many of the Buddhist 
 
302 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 Southern chronology and place Buddha in the sixth cen- 
 tury B.O., that is, doubtless, in the period of the Brahmanas, 
 — works in which a totally different Pantheon prevails. 
 But if, on the other hand, he did not teach until the fourth 
 century B.C., as must be the case if the assertion of the 
 Tibetans and Chinese be correct, to the effect that the 
 third council took place under Kanishka (who lived a.d. 
 40), four hundred years after Buddha's death — and this 
 view is favoured by the circumstance that of the names of 
 teachers who are mentioned as contemporaries of Buddha, 
 such as reappear in the Brahmanical writings all belong 
 to the literature of the Vedic Siitras, not to that of the 
 Brahmanas — there would at least be a greater possibility, 
 d priori, that the Pantheon found in the Buddhistic Sutras, 
 together with similar data, might have some validity 
 for the time of Buddha, which on this supposition would 
 be much nearer to them. The details of the subject are 
 briefly these. The Takshas, Garudas, Kinnaras,^^ so often 
 mentioned in these Siitras, are still quite unknown in 
 the Brahmanas: the name Danava, too, occurs but sel- 
 dom (once as an epithet of Vritra, a second time as an epi- 
 thet of Sushna), and never in tlie plural to designate 
 the Asuras generally ;^^ nor are the gods ever styled 
 Suras there.^^ The names of the Nagas and Mahoragas 
 are never mentioned,* although serpent-worship itself 
 {sarpa-vidyd) is repeatedly referred to;t the Kumbhan- 
 
 3B2 Where the Kinnaras and their mention of the term in Nir., iii. 8, 
 
 wives appear as ' heavenly choris- is patently an interpolation, as it is 
 
 ters,' as, e.gr., in the Meghadfita, Ka- quite foreign to the Vedic texts, 
 
 ghuvan^a, and Mahi-Bhfirata, I con- * " In the sense of elephant the 
 
 jecture the word to be a popular word wdgra occurs once in the Vrihad- 
 
 etymological adaptation from the Aranyaka, Midhy., i. i. 24" (Er- 
 
 Greek nwpii, although the latter is rata, first German ed.). [Also in the 
 
 properly only used of mournful, Ait. Br., viii. 22 ; whereas in the 
 
 plaintive tones : Idmnara itself is 6at. Br., xi. 2. 7. 12, mahdndga is 
 
 formed after the model of Tdm- better interpreted, with SSyana, as 
 
 purusha. 'serpent.' The antiquity of this 
 
 ^* This is a mistake : the D^nus, latter meaning is favoured by ety- 
 
 Ddnavas, appear even in the Rik ; mology, cf. Engl, snake ; see Kuhn's 
 
 nay, the former in the Avesta as Zeiischrift, ix. 233, 234.] 
 
 ■well; see AbdnYes}U,%'jy, Farvard. fin the Atbarva - Samhit^ in 
 
 ^- > § 37. 38 (here as earthly foes ?) particular, many prayers are ad- 
 
 '" Sura is a bastard formation dressed to the Sarpas ; in the 6at. 
 
 from asura, resting on a misunder- Br. they are once identified with the 
 
 standing of the word, which was lokas : can the term have originally 
 
 wrongly analysed into asura. Tlie denoted ' the stars ' and other spirits 
 
SUTRA-PITAKA. 
 
 303 
 
 das * too, are absent. This lack of allusion in the Brahmanas 
 to any of these genii might be explained by supposing them 
 to have been principally the divinities of the inferior classes 
 of the people, to which classes Buddha specially addressed 
 himself, and to whose conceptions and range of ideas he 
 was therefore obliged to have particular regard. In this 
 there may be a great deal of truth, but the remaining cycle 
 of deities, also, which appears in the Buddhistic Siitras, 
 is completely that belonging to the epic poetry. In the 
 Brahmanas, on the contrary, the name of Kuvera, for in- 
 stance, is only mentioned once f (and that in the Brahmana 
 of the White Tajus) ; ^^ ^iva and ^amkara only occur along 
 with other appellative epithets of Eudra, and are never 
 employed alone as proper names to denote him ; the name 
 of Narayana, again, is of extremely rare occurrence, whilst 
 Sakra,^^^ Vasava,^' Hari, Upendra, Janardana, Pitamaha, 
 are totally unknown. We thus perceive that the Buddhistic 
 Siitras, in all of which these names are prevalent, repre- 
 sent precisely the same stage as the Epic literature.| The 
 
 of the air? [Serpent-worship has 
 unquestionably mythological, sym- 
 bolical relations ; but, on the other 
 hand, it has also a thoroughly real- 
 istic background.] The Maitrilyani- 
 Upanishad does, indeed, mention 
 the Suras, Yakshas, and Uragas ; but 
 this Upanishad belongs (see p. 98) 
 altogether to the later period. It is 
 allied to these Buddhistic Stitras in 
 contents, and probably also in age. 
 
 * A kind of dwarfs with 'testicles 
 as large as jars ' (?). In the later 
 Brahmanioal writings they are 
 styled Kushwdndas, KHshmdndas 
 ( ' gourd ' ? ) j see also Mahidhara 
 on Vdj. Samh., xx. 14. [Cf. the 
 Kumbha-mushJcas in Ath., viii. 6. 15, 
 xi. g. 17, and perhaps also the Hsna- 
 devas in Rik, vii. 21. S, x. 99. 3 ; 
 EothonNir.,p.47.], 
 
 + The Taittirlya-Aranyaka, which 
 contains several of these names, can- 
 not exactly be ranked with the Brdh- 
 mana literature. 
 
 ^^5 Also in the parallel passages in 
 the Rik Siitraa, and once besides in 
 the Ath. S. (viii. 10. 28). 
 
 "S" As an appellative epithet of 
 
 Indra, 6akra occurs in the Rik even, 
 but it is there employed of other 
 gods as well. 
 
 "' As an epithet of Indra (but 
 not as a name for him) Ydsava oc- 
 curs onee in Ath. S., vi. 82. i. In 
 the Nirukti also, xii. 41, it appears 
 in direct connection with him, but at 
 thesametimealsowithAgni; indeed, 
 it is with Agni and not with Indra 
 that the Vasus are chiefly associated 
 in the Brahmanas ; see /. St., v. 240, 
 241. 
 
 + The Mira so frequently mention- 
 ed would almost appear to be a purely 
 Buddhistic invention ; in Brflhma- 
 nical writings I have nowhere met 
 with him. [Minayeff's conjecture, 
 in the introduction to his Grammaire 
 Ptilic, trad, par Stan. Guyard, p. viii., 
 that the name Mdra is directly re- 
 lated to Mairya, an epithet of Ahri- 
 man in the Avesta, and in such a 
 way that both "remontent iv une 
 epoque antirieure A la separation des 
 Iraniens et des Eindous," is rendered 
 extremely doubtful by the mere 
 circumstance that nothing of the 
 sort occurs anywhere in the Veda 
 
304 B UDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITER A TURK. 
 
 non-mention of Krishna ^^ proves nothing to the contrary, 
 the worship of Krishna as a divinity being of altogether 
 uncertain date : ^ besides, it is still a question whether we 
 have not really to understand him by the Asura Krishna 
 who is repeatedly referred to in these Sutras (see p. 148). 
 — Although — ^to notice other points besides the Pantheon 
 — the lunar asterisms in the Siitras begin .with Krittikd, 
 that is to say, still retain their old order, we cannot 
 adduce this as proof that a comparatively h^h antiquity 
 ought to be assigned to these writings, for the new order 
 of the asterisms probably only dates from the fourth or 
 fifth century a.d. ; all that results from this iS, that the 
 particular passages are earlier than this last-mentioned 
 date. As an indication, on the contrary, of a date not 
 specially ancient, we must certainly regard the mention of 
 the planets, as also the occurrence of the word difuira 
 (from denariiis), which Burnouf (p. 424, n.) has twice met 
 with in the older Siitras (see Lassen, /. AK, ii. 348). 
 
 As regards the second division of the Buddhist scrip- 
 tures, the Vinaya-Pitaka, or precepts concerning discipline 
 and worship, these are almost entirely wanting in the 
 Paris collection, doubtless because they are looked upon 
 as peculiarly holy, and are therefore kept as secret as pos- 
 sible by the priests, being indeed specially intended for 
 
 (6opatha-Br., i. 28, see note 166, is that of Krishna" (7. ,5*., iii. i6i), is 
 
 only an apparent exception, due unfortunately not before us in the 
 
 probably to Buddhistic influence), original text : might not the passage 
 
 If, therefore, a direct connection simply mean, " Tour hair is yet 
 
 really exists between Mdra and Aura black ? " The fact of Ejishna 
 
 Mainyu, it can only have come about appearing in the Abhidhdnappadi- 
 
 in historic times; and for this there pikd as a name of Vishnu proves, of 
 
 is nowhere any analogy. course, just as little for the ancient 
 
 "* Whether the Southern Bud- texts as the patronymics Kanhi, 
 
 dhists are acquainted with Krishna Kanh^yana in the schol. on Kachch., 
 
 is not yet clear. Buddha's prior v. 2. 4 (Senart, pp. 185, 186), which 
 
 birth as Kanha has, according to the have necessarily to be referred to the 
 
 text published in Pausboll's edition, epic or divine personality of Krishna, 
 
 p. 194, nothing to do with Krishna ; ^' On the significance of the data 
 
 the Jdtaka as Mahslkanha (No. 461 contained in the Mah^bhdshya on 
 
 in Westergaard's CataZ., p. 41), can this point, see /. St., xiii. 349; for 
 
 hardly have any reference to him the earliest occurrence of Krishna in 
 
 either ; but what of the Jdtaka as an inscription, see Bayley in Joum. 
 
 Keaavaf (No. 341 in Westergaard's As. Soc. Beng., 1854, p. 51 ff., with 
 
 Catal., p. 40). The expression in which of. /. Str., ii. 81, and my 
 
 Hardy, East. Mon., p. 41, "You -Essay Ueber Krishna's Geburtsfesi, 
 
 are yet a youth, your hair is like p. 318. 
 
VINA YA-PITAKA. 
 
 305 
 
 the clergy. — Like the Buddhist mythology, the Buddhist 
 hierarchy was a thing of gradual growth. Buddha, as we 
 have seen, received all without distinction as disciples, and 
 when ere long, in consequence of the great numbers, and 
 of the practice of living constantly together, except in the 
 winter season, some kind of distribution of rank was re- 
 quired, it was upon the principle of age * or merit t that 
 this took place. As the Buddhist faith spread more and 
 more, it became necessary to distinguish between those 
 who devoted themselves entirely to the priestly calling, 
 the bhikshus,X monks, and hhihshunis, nuns, on the one 
 
 * The aged were called sthavira, 
 --■ word not unfrequently added to 
 a proper name in the Brahmanioal 
 Sdtras to distingnish a particular 
 person from younger namesakes : 
 points of connection herewith are to 
 be found in the Brdhmanas also. 
 [Regarding the winter season, see 
 Childers, PdU Diet., s. v. vassoJ] 
 
 t The venerable were styled arJi,- 
 ant (fipxui'), also a title bestowed 
 upon teachers in the Brdhma.nas. 
 
 t When P&iini speaks of Bhikshu- 
 Stitras, and gives as their authors P^- 
 ri^arya and Karmanda, teaching (iv. 
 3. no, III) that their respective ad- 
 herents are to be styled Pdr^arinas 
 and Karmandinas, and (iv. 2. 80) 
 that the Sritra of the former is called 
 Pdrtisariya, the allusion must be to 
 , Brahmanical mendicants, sincethese 
 names are not mentioned in Bud- 
 dhistic writings. By Wilson, too, in 
 the second edition of his Dictionary, 
 karmaniMn is given as ' beggar, reli- 
 gious mendicant, member of the 
 fourth order.' [According to the St. 
 Petersburg Dictionary, from Amara, 
 ii. 7. 41, and Hemachandra, 809.] 
 But the circumstance must not be 
 overlooked that, according to the 
 Calcutta scholiasts, neither of these 
 two rules of Pdnini is explained in 
 the Mahstbhiishya, and that possibly, 
 therefore, they may not be P&ini's 
 at all, but posterior to the time of Pa- 
 tainjali. [The ' P^rd^arino bhiksha- 
 vah,' at least, are really mentioned 
 in the Bhilshya to iv. 2. 66 ; see /. 
 St., liii. 340.] — That mendicant 
 
 monks must, as a matter, of fact, 
 have been particularly numerous in 
 PSnini's time is apparent from the 
 many rules he gives for the forma- 
 tion of words in this connection, e.g., 
 hhikshdchaira, iii. 2. 17 ; hhiksliAka, 
 iii. 2. 155 ; Ihikshu, iii. 2. 168 ; 
 hhaiksha from hhikshd in the sense of 
 hhikshdndTii samUhas, iv. 2. 38. Com- 
 pare, in particular, also ii.i. 70, where 
 the formation of the name for f emal e 
 mendicants {Sramand, and, in the 
 ga^a, pravrdjitd) is treated of, which 
 can only refer ti/ Buddhistic female 
 mendicants. [This last rule, which 
 gives the epithet ' virgin ' as a special 
 (not as an indispensable) quality 
 of the ^ramatfd, taken in connec- 
 tion with iv. I. 127, can hardly 
 be said to throw a very favourable 
 light on the ' virginity ' of the class 
 generally; cf. Manu, viii. 363, note 
 330 above. The words sandnnlna, 
 V. 2. 9, and kaukhatika, iv. 4. 6, 
 likewise exhibit a very distinct Bud- 
 dhistic colouring ; on this see /. St., 
 Y. 140 ff. On Buddhistic mendi- 
 cants at the time of the Bb^shya, 
 see the data collected in I. St., xiii. 
 340 ff.] — The entire institution oi 
 the fourth order rests essentially on 
 the S^khya doctrine, and its ex- 
 tension was certainly due to a large 
 extent to Buddhism. The red or red- 
 dish-yellow garment (kaslidyavasana) 
 and the tonsure {maundya) are the 
 principal badges of the Buddhist 
 bhikshus; see above, pp. 78, 237. 
 On a commentary, extant in India, 
 on a Bhikshu-Siitra, see /. St., i. 470. 
 U 
 
3o6 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 hand, and the Buddhist laity on the other, wpdsakas and 
 wpdsiMs* Within the priesthood itself, again, nume- 
 rous shades of distinction in course of time grew up, 
 until at length the existing hierarchy arose, a hierarchy 
 which differs vejy essentially from the Brahmanical 
 one, inasmuch as admission to the priestly order is 
 stiQ, as in Buddha's time, allowed to members of the 
 lowest castes on the same conditions as to any one else. 
 Among the laity the Indian castes still continue to exist 
 wherever they existed in the past ; it is only the Brahman 
 caste, or priesthood by birth, that has been abolished, and 
 in its place a clergy by choice of vocation substituted. 
 The Buddhist cult, too, which now is second to none in 
 the world for solemnity, dignity, pomp, and specialities, 
 was originally exceedingly simple, consisting mainly in 
 the adoration of the image of Buddha and of his relics. 
 Of the latter point we are first informed by Clemens Alex- 
 andrinus. Afterwards the same honour was paid to the 
 relics of his most eminent disciples also, and likewise to 
 princes who had deserved specially well of Buddhism. 
 The story of the ashes of Menander, related by Plutarch 
 (see Wilson, Ariana, p. 283), is doubtless to be understood 
 in this sense.! Now this reHc-worship, the building of 
 steeples — traceable, perhaps, to the topes (stiUpas) which 
 
 * Or specially buddhopdsaia, bud- bha, who is uniformly placed in the 
 
 dhopdsihd, as we find it several times western country Sukhavatl, may be 
 
 in the Mrichhakati. identical with Amyntas, whose name 
 
 f For I regard Menander, who on appears as Amita on his coins ; in 
 
 his coins is called Minanda, as iden- the name Basili, too (in Schmidt's 
 
 tical with Milinda, king o£ S^gala Dsanglun, p. 331), he discovers the 
 
 (Sdkala), respecting whom see Tur- word /3airtXei5s. [But Schief ner calls 
 
 nour in the Journ. As. Soc Seng., my attention to the circumstance, 
 
 V. 530 S. ; Burnouf, I. c, p. 621 j that as far back as 1852, in his 
 
 and Catal. MSS, Or. £ibl. Haun. , Ergdnsungen und BericMigungen zw 
 
 p. 50. (From an article by Spiegel in Schmidts Ausgaie des Dsanglun, p. 
 
 the KieUr AUgemeine Monatsschrift, 56, to p. 256, 1. 3 of the Tibetan 
 
 July 1852, p. 561, which has just text, he withdrew the identification 
 
 reached me while correcting these of Basili with paaiKeis : his connec- 
 
 sheets, I sec that Benfey has already tion, too, of Amita with Amyntas, 
 
 identified Menander with Milinda which had been questioned by Kop- 
 
 [see the Berlin Jahrbilcher fUr wis- pen, ii. 28, note 4, he now regards 
 
 sertsch. Kritik,lS4.2.p.87^J.) — Sehief- as doubtful.] The legend of the 
 
 ner in his notice, Ueber Indra's Western origin of the Ssikyas I have 
 
 DonnerkeU, p. 4 of the separate im- already characterised (p. 285) as per- 
 
 pression, 1848, has expressed the hapsi invented as a compliment to 
 
 conjecture that the Buddha Amltd- 'Kauiehka^ . .. , 
 
ABHIDHARMA-PITAKA. 307 
 
 owe their origin to this relic-worship — the system of mona- 
 chism, the use of bells and rosaries,* and many other 
 details, offer such numerous features of resemblance to 
 Christian ritual, that the question whether Christianity 
 may not perhaps have been here the borrowing party is 
 by no means to be summarily negatived, particularly as 
 it is known that Buddhist missionaries penetrated at an 
 early period, possibly even in the two centuries preceding 
 our era, into Western countries as far as Asia Minor. This 
 is stUl, however, an entirely open question, and requires 
 investigation.^™ 
 
 The third division of the Buddhist sacred scriptures, the 
 Ahhidharma^Pitaka, contains philosophical, and especially 
 metaphysical, discussions. It is hardly to be imagined 
 that Buddha himself was not clearly cognisant of the 
 philosophical basis of his teaching, and that he simply 
 adopted this latter from his predecessorsi so that the 
 courage and energy pertaimng to its public promulgation + 
 constituted his sole merit. But it seems just as certain 
 that he was not concerned to propagate a philosophical 
 system, and that his aim was purely a practical one, to 
 
 * Afterwards adopted by the fected the growth of Buddhist ritual 
 
 Br^hmana also. [The very name and worship, as they did that of the 
 
 rosary has possibly arisen from a con- Buddhist legends, by any means to 
 
 fusion of the two Indian words ./opa- he dismissed out of hand. Indeed, 
 
 maid and japdmdld ; see my paper, quite apart from the oft-ventilated 
 
 Ueier Krishna's Oeburtsfest, pp. 340, question as to the significance of 
 
 341 ; Koppen, Die Religion des Bud- such influences in the further de- 
 
 dha, ij. 319; and also my letter in velopment of Krishna- worship, there 
 
 the Indiam Antig., iv. 250.] are legends connected with the ^iva 
 
 2^° See Ind. Shh., p. 64 (1857), cult also, as to which it is not at all 
 
 and the data from the Abb^ Hue's a far-fetched hypothesis that they 
 
 Travels in Tibet in Koppen, i. 561, have reference to scattered Christian 
 
 ii. 116. According to the interest- missionaries; see /. St., i. 421, ii. 
 
 ing discovei-y made by Laboulaye 398 ; Z. D. M. O., xxvii. 166 (v. 
 
 (see Mttller, Ohips, iv. 1S5) and F. 263). — That Western influence has 
 
 Liebrecht with regard to Barlaam played a part in Tibet, finds support 
 
 and Josaphat, one of the saints of in a letter of Schiefner's, according to 
 
 the Catholic Church stands at length which, in a work of Dsaja Pandita, 
 
 revealed as Bodhisattva himself — a Galen is mentioned as the physician 
 
 discovery to which Eeinaud's ingeni- of the Persians, and is said to have 
 
 oas identification of Ttiasaf, Ytidasf, been consulted by the first Tibetan 
 
 with Btidsatf {Mem. sur I'Inde, p. 91) ting, along with a celebrated Indian 
 
 might alone have led ; see Z. D. M. and a celebrated Chinese physician. 
 O., xxiv. 480. — But neither is the + In this courage the circumstance 
 
 contrary supposition, namely, that that he belonged by birth to the 
 
 Christiaa influences may have af- military caste fiuds expression. 
 
3o8 BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 awaken virtuous actions and dispositions. This is in 
 accord with the circumstance, that, whereas the Buddhists 
 allege of the Siitra-Pitaka and the Viuaya-Pitaka that they 
 were delivered by Buddha himself, in the case of the 
 Abhidharma-Pitaka, on the contrary, they start with the 
 admission that it is the production of his disciples. Ac- 
 cording to Burnouf, the doctrines of the Abhidharma are 
 in reality only a further development or continuation of 
 the views here and there propounded in the Sutras ; in- 
 deed, the writiugs' in question often merely add single 
 words to the thoughts expressed in the Sutras : " but in 
 any case there exists an interval of several centuries be- 
 tween the two, and that difference which distinguishes a 
 doctrine stiU in its earliest beginnings from a philosophy 
 which has arrived at its furthest development." * In the 
 Brahma -Siitra of Badarayana doctrines are repeatedly 
 combated which, on Samkara's testimony, belong to two 
 distinct schopls of Buddhist philosophy, and consequently 
 both of. these, and perhaps also the other two schools 
 which are ranked with them, belong to a period preceding 
 the composition of this Brahma-Sutra. — The doctrines 
 themselves cannot be recognised with perfect distinctness, 
 and their affinity, although undeniable, to the doctrines of 
 the Samkhya system is still enveloped in some obscurity .^^ 
 On this point, however, so much is clear, that, although 
 Buddha himself may actually have been in full harmony 
 with the doctrines of Kapila, as they then existed.f yet his 
 adherents developed these in their own fashion; in the 
 
 * Whether now, after these words of individual existence was certainly 
 
 of Burnouf 's, loc. cit., p. 522, Las- the goal to which Buddha aspired; 
 
 sen's view {I. AK., ii. 458) is ten- hardly, however, the resolving of this 
 
 able — to the effect that "although, existence into nothing, but only its 
 
 in the collection bearing the name return to the same state of ai-idyd, or 
 
 of Abhidharma, there are writings of unconsciousness which belonged to 
 
 various dates, yet they must all be primeval matter before it attained 
 
 assigned to the period preceding the to development at all," LU. C. 
 
 third council " (this third council in Bl., 1857, p. 770 (/. Str., ii. 132). 
 
 B.C. 27s being here expressly dis- Childers thinks differently, Pdii 
 
 tinguished from the fourth under Diet., s. v. nirvana. 
 
 Kanishka)— appears to me in the + Were he really to be identified 
 
 very highest degree doubtful. with the ^dHyanya of theMaitrStyani 
 
 »<" Cf. for this /. St., iii. 132; Upanishad(seep. 97),weshouldhave 
 
 Max Duncker, Gesckichte dcr Aria; In this work tolerably direct evidence 
 
 p. 234 ff. (1867) ; Koppen, i. 214 ff.— to the above effect. 
 " The extinction, the 'blowing out' 
 
ABHIDHARMA-PITAKA. 
 
 309 
 
 same way as the followers of Kapila also pursued their 
 own path, and so eventually that system arose which is 
 now extant under the name Samkhya, and which differs 
 essentially from the Buddhist philosophy * To the four 
 schools into which, as we have just seen, this philosophy 
 was split up at a comparatively early period, four others 
 were afterwards added — or perhaps these superseded the 
 former — but neither have the doctrines of these later 
 schools been as yet set forth with anything like sufficient 
 certainty.362 -The question, too, whether Buddhistic con- 
 ceptions may not perhaps have exercised a direct influence 
 on the development of Gnostic doctrines,t particularly 
 those of Basilides, Valentinian, and Bardesanes, as well as 
 of Manes, must for the present be regarded as wholly un- 
 determined ;^^^ it is most intimately bound up with the 
 question as to the amount of influence to be ascribed to 
 Indian philosophy generally in the shaping of these doc- 
 trines. The main channel of communication in the case 
 of the latter was through Alexandria ; the Buddhist mis- 
 sionaries, on the contrary, probably mostly came from the 
 Panjab through Persia. 
 
 Besides the three Pitakas, the Sanskrit ma,nuscripts 
 that have been procured from Nepal contain other works 
 also, consisting, in part, of a large number of commen- 
 taries on and elucidations of the Pitakas, in part, of a 
 
 * Whether vv. 9-1 1 of the l^o- special work on Tibetan and Chinese 
 
 panishad are to be taken, with the Buddhism. See on this point Lit. 
 
 commentator, as specially referring C. Bl., 1875, p. 550. 
 to the Buddhists, as I assume in t See F. Nfeve, L'Antiquiti Ghri- 
 
 I. St., i. 298, 299, appears to me tienne en Orient, p. 90, Louvain, 
 
 doubtful now : the polemic may 1852. 
 
 simply be directed against the S^- ^ Cf. now Lassen, /. AK., iii. 
 
 khya tenets in general. 387-416 ; my Ind. SMs., p. 64 ; 
 
 ^^ Our information regarding Renan, Sist. des Lang. Sim., 2d ed., 
 them is derired exclusively from 1858, pp. 274, 275. That their in- 
 Hodgson's Essays (now collected, see fluence upon the growth of the doc- 
 note 345). Their names, Svslbhi- trines of Manes in particular was a 
 vika, Ai^varika, Kdrmika, Yd^tnika, most important one is shown, for 
 are so far unsupported by any other example, by this circumstance alone, 
 literary evidence. Only for the that the formula of abjuration for 
 names Sautr^ntika, Vaibh^hika, those who renounced these doctrines 
 Mddhyamika, Yog^ch^ra, is such expressly specifies Bo55a and the 
 testimony found. T&a'ns£tha, for 2/cu3^iacos (seemingly a separation of 
 example, is acquainted with these 'Buddha S^yamuni' into two) — • 
 latter only, and they are also the Lassen, iii. 415. — Cf. also Beal, J. 
 only ones known to Wassiljew in his B, A. S., ii. 424 (i860). 
 
3IO BUDDHISTIC SANSKRIT LITERATURE. 
 
 most peculiar class of ■writings, the so-called Tantras, which 
 are looked upon as especially sacred, and which stand pre- 
 cisely upon a level with the Brahmanical works of the 
 same name. Their contents are made up of invocations of 
 various Buddhas and Bodhisattvas, as also of their Saktis, 
 or female energies, with a motley admixture of Sivaitic 
 deities; to which are added longer or shorter prayers 
 addressed to these beiugs, and directions how to draw the 
 mystic diagrams and magic circles that secure their favour 
 and protection.^^ 
 
 ^^ Cf. Emil Schlagintweit's Bvd- poetry ; as to which see Klatt in 
 dkigm in Tibet (1863, with a folio the preface to his edition of the 
 atlas of twenty plates). — Recently sentences of ChiCnakya, taken there- 
 there have also come from Nepil from (1873). 
 Sanskrit MSS. containing works of 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 p. 9, 36 £f. (and 64, 29 ff.)- Burnell, in his preface to the 
 Arsheya-Br. (Mangalore, 1876), p. xvi. ff., and Aufrecht, 
 HymTien des Rigveda (Bonn, 1877), Pref. pp. xvi, xvii., 
 dispute the superior antiquity of the readings of the Sama- 
 Samhita, as compared with those of the Rik-Samhita. 
 
 P. 25, note ^^, and p. 67, note ^. On the Sikshas see 
 Kielhorn's paper in the Iiid. Antiq., v. 141 ff., 193 £f., and 
 my comments thereon, ihid., p. 253. 
 
 P. 32, note ^. On the Vashkalas somewhat more light 
 has now been cast. In the first place, from a comparison 
 of the kdrikd quoted in my Catal. of the Berlin Sansk. 
 MSS., p. 314, ' Sdkaldndm samdni va ity riehd 'nfyd 
 "hutir hhavet \ Bdshhaldndm tu tachhamyor ity richd 'ntyd- 
 hutir bhavet,' it results that the citation in the forty-eighth 
 Atharva-pariiishta (see /. St., iv. 431) of the SamyuvdJca 
 as the concluding verse of the Rik-Samhita has reference 
 to the Vashkala-recension of the latter. Next, it becomes 
 evident that this recension stood in a special relation to 
 the Sankhayana texts, since in the ^ai^h. Grih., 4. 5. 9, 
 the same verse is cited as the concluding one of the Sam- 
 hita, and this expressly as the view of Kaushitaki. In 
 addition to this we have the fact that the pratilca of the 
 whole section to which this verse belongs, and which 
 forms the last hhila — samjndna — ^in the vulgate recension 
 of the Rik-Samhita, is found cited in the Safikhay.-Srauta- 
 Siitra, 3. 6. 4, but is wanting in the parallel passage, A^val., 
 2, 1 1. And, lastly, we shall probably also have to allot to 
 the Vashkalas the eleven hymns — ^ten Aivindni and one 
 Aindrdvarunam s'&Tctain — which, as Eud. Meyer has re- 
 cently pointed out (Rigvidhana, Praef., p. xxiv.), are cited 
 
314 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 in the Brihaddevata, 3. 24, between Rik-Samk, i. j^ and 
 74. Por, according to Meyer, their pratikas prove to be 
 identical with those given by the scholiast on Sankh. Sr., 
 9. 20. 14, for the ' trUatam suparnam ' there mentioned in 
 the text, which again is specified under this name in the 
 §ankh. Br. itself (18. 4) as part of the A^vina-lastra. 
 Probably, too, the other portions of text, which, as stated 
 by Meyer {I. c, p. xxv. ff.), appear in the Brihaddevata 
 as well as in the Eigvidhana, as belonging to the Rik- 
 Samhita, whereas they are found neither in the vrdgate — 
 the Sakala-Samhita — itself, nor in its hhila portions, will 
 have to be assigned to the Vashkalas. In point of fact, 
 the sarnjndna khila also, to which (see above) the con- 
 cluding verse of the Vashkala-Samluta belongs, is men- 
 tioned in both texts (Meyer, p. xxii.). An exact comparison 
 of the Rik-verses cited in the Sankhayana texts wfll pro- 
 bably throw full light upon this point. — In Buhler's letter 
 from Kashmir (published in /. St., xiv. 402 ff.) the in- 
 teresting information was given that he had there dis- 
 covered an excellent hhiirja-MS., some five to six hundred 
 years old, of the Rik-Samhita in the ^akala recension. 
 This MS. is accentuated, whereas the Kashmir Vedic 
 MSS. are not wont to be so, but the accent is denoted in a 
 totally different manner from that customary in India, the 
 vddbtta alone being marked by a perpendicular line, pre- 
 cisely as, according to Haug, is usual in one of the two 
 schools of the Maitrayanl Samhita, and as we ourselves 
 do; cf. my remarks in the Jenaer Lit. Zeit., 1875, p. 315. 
 On this MS. see now the detailed report of Biihler's journey 
 in the Journal Bomb. Br. B. A. S., 1877, extra No., pp. 35, 36. 
 
 ^P- 35; 36, note §. See also Myriantheu^, IHe AMns 
 (Munich, 1876), and James Darmesteter, Ormazd et AAri- 
 man (Paris, 1877). 
 
 P. 41, note ^ See Alfred TTillebrandt, Varwna und 
 Mitra, ein Beitrag zur Exegese des Veda (Breslau, 1877). 
 
 P. 43, note *2. Max MtiUer's issue of the text alone of 
 the Rik has now appeared in a second edition (London, 
 1877). Samhitd-pdtha and pada-pdtha are here printed 
 on opposite pages. Respecting the latter it has to be 
 remarked that, as in Miiller's previous editions, so again 
 in this one the so-called galitas are in no way marked, 
 the text which a particular passage shows the first time 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 315 
 
 it occurs being uniformly simply repeated, without any 
 reference to what is done in the MSS. themselves in these 
 cases. ' This is aU the more surprising as, after I had 
 pointed out this defect, in my review of the last volume of 
 his large edition in the lAt. Gent. Blatt, 17th April 1875, 
 Miiller himself, in an article which appeared in the same 
 periodical a year and a half later (i6th December 1876) 
 fully recognised the critical importance of the galitas. — 
 Aufrecht's edition has also been reprinted (Bonn, 1877) : 
 the preface (comp. desideratum at note 28) contains a 
 variety of critical remarks. — Complete translations of the 
 Rik-Samhita, by Alfred Ludwig (Prag, 1876) and Hermann 
 Grassmann (Leipzig, 1876-77) have appeared. — Very meri- 
 torious, also, is the edition of the Rik-Samhita which is 
 appearing in monthly numbers at Bombay, under the title 
 ' Vedarthayatna,' with English and Mahrathf translation, 
 as well as with Mahrathf commentary: the latest No. 
 brings it down to i. 100. The name of the excellent 
 editor, Shankar Pandit, is an open secret. — Lastly, there 
 remains to be mentioned M. Haug's Vedische Bathselfragen 
 und Rdthselspruche (Rik, i. 164, 1876). 
 
 P. 48, note ^^\ Edjendra Ldla Mitra's edition, in the 
 Bill. Indica, of the Aitareya-Aranyaka with Sayana's com- 
 mentary, has now been completed. A MS. acc[uired by 
 Biihler in Kashmir shows a number of variations ; see his 
 Report of Journey, I. c, p. 34. 
 
 P. 50, 6 (cf. p. 285). Panchalachanda appears in a Pali 
 Sutta among the mahdsend/patis of the Takkhas ; for the 
 conclusions to be drawn from this see Jenaer Lit. Zeit., 
 7th April 1877, p. 221. 
 
 P. 56, 8. The Sankh. Grih. (4. 10. 3) inserts between 
 Vi^vdmitra and Vamadeva, the two representatives of the 
 third and fourth mandcdas, the name of Jamadagni, to 
 whom in the Anukramanl to the Sakala-Samhita only the 
 last three verses of the third Tnwndala (ni. 62, 16-18) are 
 in this place ascribed, — ^but in addition to these, also 
 five entire hymns and four separate verses in the last three 
 "matidalcLS. Have we here also to do with a divergence of 
 the Vashkala school? (In Sankh. Grih., 4. 5. 8, however, 
 there is no trace of this variation from the vulgate; rather, 
 the verse ui. 62. 18 appears there as the concluding verse 
 of the third mandala) 
 
3i6 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 P. 58, note ^. The Safiklt. Grihya has been pubEshed, 
 with translation and notes, by Herm. Oldenberg; see 
 /. 5if.,xv. 1-166. There exists also another recension of it, 
 which is designated as Kaushitaka-Grihya, but which, 
 according to Oldenberg, is rather to be understood as 
 Sambavya-G-rihya. Its text is 'nowise identical' with 
 the Sankh. Grih., 'but it has borrowed from the latter by 
 far the greatest part both of its matter and form.' The 
 last two books of the Sankh. Grih. are not used in it, and 
 a great deal is lacking besides. 
 
 P. 61, note *. On the Jyotisha a very meritorious work 
 has just appeared by G. Thibaut. 
 
 P. 62, 6, 25 ff. On the Brihaddevata and Rigvidhana see 
 E. Meyer's edition of the latter work (BerUn, 1877). 
 
 P. 65, 28. The forty-eighth Atharva-parilishta, see /. 
 St., iv. 432, gives indeed the same beginning, but a different 
 concluding verse to the Sama-Samhita, namely, the last 
 verse but one of the first part of the vulgate ; accordingly, 
 it did not reckon the second part as belonging to the Sam- 
 hita at all, while for the first part also it presents the 
 discrepancy stated. 
 
 P. 65, note '^. The Aranya-Samhita, with Say ana's 
 commentary, has been edited by Satyavrata Sama^ramiu, 
 and that in a double form, namely, separately (Calcutta, 
 1873), and also in the second part of his large edition of 
 the Sama-Samhita, p. 244 fit 
 
 P. 66, note ®\ This edition of the Sama-Samhita, in 
 the Bihl. Indica,, has now reached, in its fifth volume, as 
 far as 2. 8. 2. 5. 
 
 Pp. 73, 74. The Talavakara- or Jaiminiya-Brahmana, 
 to which the Kenopan. belongs, has been recovered by 
 Burnell (letter of 19th April). Also a Samaveda-Pra- 
 ti^akhya. 
 
 Pp. 74, 75, notes '^, '^. The Axsheya-Brahmana and 
 Samhitopanishad-Brahmana have also been edited by Bur- 
 nell (Mangalore, 1876, 1877); the former with a lengthy 
 introduction containing an iuquiry iato the Ganas, the 
 secondary origia of the Samhita from these, the chanting 
 of the sdmans, &c. On this' compare A. Earth's detailed 
 notice in the Beviie Critique, 21st July 1877, pp. 17-27. 
 The Arsheya-Brahmana has, further, just been issued a 
 second time by BurneU, namely, in the text of the Jai- 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 317 
 
 miniya school, which he had meanwhile recovered (Man- 
 galore, 1878). 
 
 Pp. 99-101. According to the catalogue (1876) of M. 
 Haug's collection of MSS., there are now in the Eoyal 
 Library at Munich, with which this collection was incor- 
 porated in the spring of 1877, not only two MSS. of the 
 Maitrayani Samhita, but also several more or less com- 
 plete, but, unfortunately, in great part modern, copies of 
 Apastamba, Manava, Bharadvaja, Baudhayana, Vaikha- 
 nasa, Hiranyake^in. — The description ^(in notes 108, 109) 
 of the Dharma-Siitras as part of the Srauta-Siitras is not 
 quite correct ; rather both are portions, possessing an equal 
 title, of a collective Sutra-whole, to which in each case 
 there also belonged a Grihya- and a Sulva-Siitra, and which 
 we might perhaps designate by the name of Kalpa-Siitra. 
 — [The North-Western origin of the Katha achool (cf. 
 Kddaia, I. St., xiii. 439) is. also, in a certain measure, 
 attested by the fact that, according to Biihler's letter from 
 Kashmir (dated September 1875, published in /. St., xiv. 
 402 ff.) on the results of his search for MSS. in that pro- 
 vince, this school is still in the present day the prevailing 
 one in Kashmir. The Brahmans there call themselves, it 
 is true, chaturvedi, but they follow the rules of the Ka- 
 thaka-Grihya-Siitra of Laugakshi. Besides portions of aU 
 the Vedas, the Bhattas learn by heart the Paddhati of 
 Devapala, the commentary and prayoga to the Kathaka- 
 Grihya. ' Of these Grihyas I have acquired several MSS., 
 among them an old one on Hh'in.rja. To the Kathaka-Siitra 
 are attached a Pravaradhyaya, an Arsha, the Charayaniya 
 Siksha, and several other ParHishtas.' — Additional note in 
 second German edition^ According to Biihler, Z. D. M. G., 
 xsii. 327, the Dharma-Siitra of the Kathaka school is iden- 
 tical with the Vishnu-Smriti. On this, and on the Ka- 
 thaka school in Kashmir generally, see now Biihler, Eeport 
 of Journey, I. c, pp. 20, 36, 37. 
 
 P. 103, note 1^". The Taitt. Prati^akhya has also been 
 edited in the BM. Indica by Eajendra Lala Mitra (1872). 
 
 Pp. 1 17, 1 18. The forty-eighth Atharva-Pari^ishta spe- 
 cifies a recension of the Vaj. Samh., which begins with 
 I. I, but which ends with 23. 32 ! See /. St., iv. 432. 
 
 P. 114. Per. the formula Amhe amUTce 'mbdlike, 
 which differs in all three Yajus texts, Panini (vi. 7. 118) 
 
3i8 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 has a fourth reading; on this and the other points of con- 
 nection hetween Panini and the vocabulary of the Yajus 
 texts, see /. St., iv. 432. 
 
 P. 138, 23. According to Mahavanga, p. 9. 12, 15, the 
 name of Buddha's wife was Bhadda- or Suhhadda-Kach- 
 chana ! 
 
 P. 139, note "I Satap., 3. I, 1-2. 2, is translated in 
 Bruno Lindner's dissertation, Ueber die Dikshd (Leipzig, 
 1878); other portions inDelbriick's^^f'iwrf. Wortfolge(i8yS). 
 
 P. 142, note ^^. The Paraskara has been edited by 
 Stenzler (1876). 
 
 P. 150, note ^^^. In the forty-eighth Atharva-Pari- 
 ^ishta, the commencement of the Atharva-Samhita is given 
 just as in the published recension, but it ends there with 
 Book xvi. ; see /. iSt, iv. 432. 
 
 P. 151, note ^^. With the doshapati compare the pdp- 
 man dsura m the Nrisinhop. ; see /. St., ix. 149, 150. 
 
 P. 153 ff. Cf. Paul Eegnaud, Mat^riaiue pour servir d 
 VHistoire de la Fhilosophie de I'lnde, 1876, and my review 
 of this work in the Je7iaerJ/it. Zeit. of 9th February 1878. 
 
 P. 182, note ^'*. The dates of the Nepalese MSS. appa- 
 rently reach back as far as a.d. 883 ! "See Dan. Wright, 
 History of Nepal, 1877, Jenaer Lit Zeit., 1877, p. 412. 
 
 Pp. 187, 188, note ™^^. On Olshausen's explanation of 
 the word Pahlav — ^the basis of the Indian PaMava — from 
 Parthava, ' Parthians,' see now also Th. Nbldeke in Z. D. 
 M. (?., xxxi. 557 ff. 
 
 P. 189, note ^ According to Kern, Over de oud- 
 JavaanscheVertalingvan'tMahdibhdrata(AmsteTdaja,i87y), 
 p. 7 ff., the Kavi translation of the Adi-parvan, from which 
 he there communicates the text of the Paushyaeharita, 
 dates from the beginning of the eleventh century. 
 
 P. 189, note ^"^ For the criticism of the Maha-Bharata, 
 Holtzmann's researches (Jndisehe Sagen, Preface, Stuttgart, 
 1854) are also of great importance. 
 
 P. 191, note =»«. The Index to Hall's edition of Wilson's 
 translation of the Vishnu-Purana (vol. v. part ii.) appeared 
 in 1877. The edition of the Agni-Purana in the Bibl. Imd. 
 has now reached adhy. 294. 
 
 P- 1 95 > IS- The identity of the author of the Eaghu- 
 vafi^a and Kumara-sambhava with the dramatist KaUdasa 
 is contended for by Shankar Pandit in the TransactionA 
 
SUPPLEMENTAR Y NO T£S. 3 1 9 
 
 of the London Congress of Orientalists (London, 1 876), p. 
 227 ff. 
 
 P. 196, note ^''^- Bharavi and Kalidasa are mentioned 
 together in an inscription of Pulake^i II., ' in the Saka 
 year 507 (a.d. 585-6) ;' at that date, therefore, they must 
 have been already famous. See Bhau Daji in Journ. 
 Bomb. Br. JR. A. S., ix. 315, and J. F. Fleet in Ind. Antiq., 
 V. 68. — On the Kashmir poets Chandraka and Mentha, of 
 about the fifth (?) century, Eatnakara of the ninth, Kshe- 
 mendra and Bilhana of the eleventh, Somadeva, Mankha, 
 Kalhana, &c., of the twelfth century, see Biihler, Eeport 
 of Journey, I. c, p. 42 ff. 
 
 P. 199, note f. For the text of these Suttas see now 
 Grimblot, Sept suttas Pdlis (Paris, 1 876), p. 89 ; ' nachcham 
 gitam vdditarrb pekJcham aJckhdnam . . iti vd iti evaru/pd 
 vis'&kadassand' (exhibitions, p. 65, spectacles, pp. 179, 
 215). From this it appears that the word here properly 
 in question is not so much the general term vis'Aha as 
 rather, specially, peklcha (jpreJcshya), ' exhibition,' ' spec- 
 tacle,' translated by 'theatricals,' pp. 65, 179, 'representa- 
 tions dramatiques,' p. 215; comp. prekshanaha as the name 
 of a species of drama in Bharata (Hall, Da^ariipa, p. 6), 
 and drUya in the Sahitya-darpana as the name of dramatic 
 poetry in general. 
 
 Pp. 200, 12, 205, 20. According to Hall, Vasavad., In- 
 trod., p. 27, Bhavabhiiti would have to be placed earlier 
 than Subandhu, and if so, of course, cb fortiori, earlier than 
 Bana : the latter, however, does not allude to him in the 
 classic passage in the introduction to the Harsha-charita, 
 where he enumerates his predecessors (Hall, iMd., pp. 13, 
 14). See also Ind. Streifen, i. 355. 
 
 P. 201, note ||. According to Lassen, I. AK., m.. 855, 
 1 163, Bhoja died in 1053. -^'i inscription of his in the 
 Ind. Antiq., 1877, p. 54, is dated in the year 1022. 
 
 P. 203, note. According to Biihler, Ind. Antiq., v. 112 
 (April, 1876), a grant of King Jayabhata is ' older than 
 the year 445 A.D., and dated in the Vikrama era.' 
 
 P. 204, note 211. In Z. D. M. G., xxx. 302, Jacobi cites 
 from the Urva^i a (chronometrical) datum betokening 
 Greek influence. 
 
 P. 207, note ^^*- Of new publications, &c., of Indian 
 dramas have to be mentioned : Bhandarkar's edition of the 
 
320 S VPPLEMENTAR Y NO TES. 
 
 Malati-madhava (BomlDay, 1876), Cappeller's edition of the 
 Eatnavall (1877, in the second edition of Bohtlingk's 
 Sanskrit-Ohrestomathie), the Bengali recension of the Sa- 
 kuntaia, edited by Pischel (see Cappeller in the Jenaer 
 Lit. Ze.it., 1877, p. 121), the two latter dramas translated 
 by Ludw. Fritze; lastly, Eegnaud's translation of the 
 Mrichhakatika (Paris, 1876). — On the question as to the 
 various recensions of Kahdasa's Sakuntala — discussed in 
 /. St., xiv. 161 ff. — see also Biihler's Eeport of Journey, 
 I. c, p. Ixxxv. ff., where the first act of the'Kashmir recen- 
 sion of this drama is printed. 
 
 P. 210, note ™'. To this place also belongs ^rivara's 
 Subhashitavali of the fifteenth century, containing quota- 
 tions from more than 350 poets ; see Biihler, Eeport of 
 Journey, I. c, p. 61 £f. ; further, the Subhashita-ratnakara 
 by Krishna Shastri Bhatavadekar (Bombay, 1872). — Here, 
 too, have to be mentioned the four papers Zur Kritik UTid 
 Erklarung verscMedener indischer Werke, published by O. 
 Bohtlingk ia vols. vii. and viii. of the Mdianges Asiatigues 
 of the St. Petersburg Academy (1875-76). 
 
 P. 212, note ^^^. Oomp. Benfey's Introduction to Bick- 
 ell's edition and translation of the ' Kalilag und Damnag' 
 (Leipzig, 1876). It now appears doubtful whether the 
 ancient Pahlavl version really rested upon one individual 
 work as its basis, or whether it is not rather to be re- 
 garded as an epitome of several independent texts ; see my 
 notice of the above work in Lit. 0. Bl., 18^6, !N"o. 31, 
 Biihler, Eeport of Journey, p. 47 ; Prym in the Jenaer Lit. 
 Zeit., 1878, Art. 118. 
 
 P. 213, note ^^. Eead 'recast by Kshemendra.' . It is 
 only to Kshemendra that the statements from Biihler's 
 letter, given in the next sentence, refer. Biihler now 
 places him in the second and third quarter of the eleventh 
 century, Eeport of Journey, I. c, p. 45 ff. 
 
 P. 213. On the Eaja-taramgini see now Biihler, Eeport 
 of Journey, pp. 52-60, Ixvi.-lxxxii. (where an amended 
 translation of i. 1-107 is given ) ; and on the Nila-mata, of 
 about the sixth or seventh century, ibid., p. 38 ff., Iv. ff. 
 
 P. 214, note ^ The Harsha-charita appeared at Cal- 
 cutta in 1876, edited by Jivananda. — On the Sifihasana- 
 dvatrifi^ika see now my paper in /. St., xv. 185 ff. 
 
 P. 215, note ^^l In the interpretation of Indian inscrip- 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 321 
 
 tions, Biililer and Fleet also, in particular, have of late done 
 very active service (especially in Ind. Antiq., vols, v., vi.). 
 
 P. 221, note ^^. Goldstiicker's ' facsimile' (comp. note 
 ^^^ p. 100) edition of the Manavakalp. is not ' photo-Htho- 
 graphed/ but lithographed from a tracing. 
 
 P. 226, note ^^. Kielhorn has come forward with great 
 vigour in defence of the Mahabhashya, first, in a lengthy 
 article in the Ivd. Antiq., v. 241 (August 1876), next in 
 his Essay, K&ty&yaTm avid Patamjali (Bombay, December 
 1876), which deals specially with the analysis of the work 
 into its component parts ; and, lastly, in his edition of the 
 work itself, which exhibits the text critically sifted, in 
 direct reference thereto (the first number, Bombay, 1878, 
 gives the navdhnikam). Cf., further, two articles by Bhan- 
 darkar. On the Relation of K&ty&ywna to Pdmini and of 
 Patamjali to Kdfydyana in. Ind. Antiq.,v. 345 ff. (December 
 1876), and on Goldstiicker's Theory about Pdnimi's Technical 
 Terms (reprint of an earlier review of G.'s Pdnini), ibid., 
 vi. 107 ff. To this place also belongs an article on the 
 Mahabhashya, which was sent off by me to Bombay on 9th 
 October 1876, but which only appeared in the Ind. Antiq., 
 vi. 301 ff,in October 1877. 
 
 P. 226, note ^^^. On the antiquity of the Ka^ika see 
 now Buhler's Eeport of Journey, p. 72. The issue of the 
 work in the Pandit is perhaps by this time completed. It 
 is to be hoped that it, will appear in a separate edition. — 
 Buhler's information regarding Vyadi, the Mahabhashya, 
 Katantra, &c., is given in detail in his Eeport of Journey. 
 — On BurneU's essay. On the Aindra School of Sanskrit 
 Grammarians (1875), which contains rich materials, see 
 my critique in the Jenaer Lit. Zeit., March 1876, p. 202 ff. 
 — Of Hemachandra's Prakrit-Grammar Pischel has given 
 us a new edition (Halle, 1877, text and good index of 
 words). 
 
 P. 229, note t. This note, according to Barth, Beviie 
 Critique, 3d June 1876, is to be cancelled, osparaitre can 
 only have the sense of ' seem ' (scheinen). 
 
 P. 231, note ^^ On Kshemendra's Loka-praka^a see 
 Biihler, Eeport of Journey, p. 75. 
 
 P. 231, 29- See note above to p. 182. 
 
 P. 23 1, note ^. The translation of the Sahitya-darpana 
 in the £iU. Indica is now finished. — For the rich informa- 
 
 X 
 
322 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 tion supplied by Biihler regarding the Alainkara literature 
 in Kashmir, see his Eeport of Journey, p. 64 ff. Accord- 
 ing to this, the Alamkara-lastra of Bhatta Udbhata dates 
 from the time of Jayapida (779-813), whose sabhdpati the 
 author was. Vamana, too, in Biihler's opinion, belongs to 
 the same period. Anandavardhana and Eatnakara belong 
 to the ninth century, Mukula to the tenth, Abhinavagupta 
 to the beginning, Kudrata to the end, of the eleventh, while 
 Euyyaka flourished at the commencement, and Jayaratha 
 at the close, of the twelfth century ; Mammata is to be 
 placed still later. 
 
 P. 23 s, note ^^. Of the Sarva-darlana-samgraha there 
 is now a translation, by CoweU and Gough, in the Pandit, 
 1875 ff. 
 
 P. 237, note ^". The Samkhya-tattva-pradipa has been 
 translated by Govindadevaiastrin in the Pandit, N"os. 98 ff. 
 
 P. 237, note ^^. Abhiaavagupta was stiU living in 
 A.D. 1015 ; Biihler, Eeport of Journey, p. 80. — The ^aiva- 
 lastra ia Kashmir, iMd., pp. 77-82, is divided into two 
 groups, of which the one connects itself with the Spanda- 
 ^astra of Vasugupta (854), the other with the Praty- 
 abhijna-iastra of Somananda (ab. 900) and Utpala (ab. 930J. 
 It is of the latter — which appears to rest upon Samkara — 
 that Abhinavagupta is the leadiag representative. 
 
 P. 24 1 , note ^. The last number of this edition of Saba- 
 rasvamin brings it down to 10. 2. 73 ; the edition of the 
 Jaiminiya-nyaya-mala-vistara has just been completed by 
 CoweU. The Jaimini-siitra is being published in the 
 Bombay monthly periodical, ' Shaddar^ana-chintanika,' 
 begun in January 1877 — text and commentary with a 
 double translation, in English and Mahrathi. 
 ^ P. 243, note ^^- Vachaspatimi^ra's Bhamati, a gloss on 
 Samkara's commentary on the Vedanta-sutra, is in course 
 of publication in the £il)l. Ind. edited by Balaiastrin, — 
 commenced ia 1876. — In the Pandit for 1876, p. 113, in 
 the Preface to his edition of Sn'nivasadasa's Yatindramata- 
 dipika, Eamami^ralastrin cites a passage from Eamanuja's 
 Brahmasiitra-bhashya, in which the latter mentions the 
 lhagavad-'EoShi.ja.ua. as his predecessor therein, and as 
 separated from him by several generations oip-ArvdcMryas. 
 As such p^rvdcMryas Eamami^ra gives the names of 
 Dramida, Guhadeva, and Brahmanandi, at the same time 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 323 
 
 designating them by the epithets maharsM and suprdcM- 
 natama. By Srinivasadasa himself (p. 115) the teachers 
 are mentioned in the following order : Vyasa, Bodhayana, 
 Guhadeva, Bharuchi, Brahmanandi, Dravidacharya, Sri- 
 Paranku^anatha, Yamunamuni, Yatilvara. — Here is also 
 to be mentioned the edition in the Pandit, by Vechana- 
 rama^astrin, of two commentaries on the Vedanta-siitra, 
 viz., the ^aiva-bhashya of Srikantha Sivacharya (see Z. D. 
 M. Q., xxvii. 166), and the Vedanta-kaustubha-prabha of 
 Ke^ava Ka^mirabhatta. — Further, in the second edition of 
 his Sanskrit-Ghrestomathie (1877) Bohtlingk has given a 
 new translation of the Vedanta-sara ; and the Vidvan- 
 manoranjinf of Eamatirtha, a commentary thereon, has 
 been published, text with translation, in the Pandit by 
 G-ough and Govindadfeva^astrin. In the same journal has 
 also appeared the Advaita-makaranda of Lakshmidhara. 
 
 P. 245, note ^^. A translation, by Kelava^astrin, of the 
 Nyaya-dar^ana and of Vatsyayana's commentary thereon, 
 has begun to appear in the Paijdit (new series, vol. ii.). 
 The fourth book of Gange^a's Nyaya-chintamani, with the 
 commentary of Euchidatta, has also been edited, ibid. 
 (Nos. 66-93) ^y Balalastrin. 
 
 P. 247, note ^ *0f importance are the names, com- 
 municated to me from Albinini by Ed. Sachau, of the 
 mevdzil in Soghd and Khvarizm, the list of which begins 
 with thurayyd, i.e., with hrittiM, &-D.6. that under the name 
 parvi; by this is evidently meant parviz, i.e., the name 
 which stands third in the Bundehesh, whence it neces^- 
 sarily follows that the list of names in the latter is the 
 modern one, commencing with dsvini; see Jenaer Lit. Zeit., 
 1877 (7th April), p. 221. Some of the names here cited 
 by Albinini are distinctly Indian, as frsMbdth, i.e., pro- 
 shthapdda, the ancient form of name, consequently, (not 
 Ihadrapadd). Here, too, presumably, as in the case of 
 China, the Buddhists were the channel of communication. 
 
 Pp. 250, 251, note ^^*. The proposition laid down by 
 H. Jacobi va. Z. D. M. G., xxx. 306, that no Indian 
 writings, which enumerate the planets in the order — Sun, 
 Moon, Mars, &c. — can have been composed earlier than 
 the third century A.D., has application to Yajnavalkya, as 
 well as to the Atharva-pari^ishtas, which in point of fact 
 already observe this order; see I. St., x. 317. 
 
324 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 P. 2 S 3, note *. The absence of mention of the Eomakas 
 in the Edmayana may perhaps also rest upon geographical 
 grounds, namely, on the prohable origin of the poem in 
 the east of India, iq the land of the Koialas, whereas the 
 'war-part' of the Maha-Bharata was in all likelihood 
 composed in Central, if not in Western India. 
 
 P. 256, note ^- Cf. Thibaut's paper ' On the Sulva- 
 sutras' IQ the Jmm. As. Soc. Bengal, 1875 (minutely dis- 
 cussed by Mor. Cantor in the hist. lit. div. of the Zdtsch. 
 fii/r Math, und Physih, voL xxii.), and his edition of the 
 Sulva-siitra of Baudhayana with the commentary of Dva- 
 rakanathayajvan (text with translation) in the PandU, 
 May, 1875-77. 
 
 P. 256, note *. The explanation of the Indian figures 
 from the initial letters of the numerals has recently been 
 rudely shaken, see Biihler in Ivd. Ant, vi. 48, — ^through 
 the deciphering, namely, of the ancient ' Nagaxf numerals ' 
 by Pandit Bhagvanlal Indraji, ibid., p. 42 fi". These, it 
 appears, turn out to be other letters, yet the derivation of 
 the later figures from them can hardly be called in ques- 
 tion. Wliat principle underlies these ancient numerals is, 
 for the rest, still obscure : the zero has not yet a place 
 among them; there are letter-symbols for 4-10 (1-3 
 being merely represented by strokes) for the tens up to 
 90, and for the himdreds up to 1000. Comp. pp. 222, 
 note ^^, and 257, note ^ 
 
 P. 260, note * The remainder of the Yatra has now 
 been edited by Kern in I. St., xiv. and xv. 
 
 P. 266 ffi In complete opposition to the former dreams 
 about the high antiquity of Indian medicine, Haas has 
 recently, in Z. D. M. G., xxx. 617 £f. and xx xj . 647 £f., 
 characterised even the most ancient of the Indian medical 
 texts as quite modern productions, to be traced to Arabian 
 sources. In the accounts given by the Arabs themselves 
 of the high repute in which Indian medicine stood with 
 them, and of the translation of works of the kind, which 
 are specified by name, from Sanskrit into Arabic, he recog- 
 nises hardly any value. As regards the latter point, how- 
 ever, there exists absolutely no ground for throwing doubt 
 upon statements of so definite a character made by the 
 old Arab chroniclers; while, with respect to the former 
 point, the language of Suiruta, Charaka, &c., is distinctly 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 325 
 
 opposed to tlie assignment to them of so late a date. At 
 tlie same time, every real proof of the presence of Greek 
 (or even Arabian) conceptions in the works in question, 
 will have to be thankfully received. But the early 
 existence of medical knowledge in India would in no way 
 be prejudiced thereby, as its beginnings are well attested 
 by evidence from the Vedic" period, especially from the 
 Atharvaveda. 
 
 P. 270, note ^1". Charaka, as Biihler informs me, has 
 now also been printed at Bombay, edited by Dr. Anna 
 Mureshvar Kunte, Grant Medical College. 
 
 P. 271, note 81*. The Kavi translation of the Kaman- 
 daki-niti probably belongs, at the earliest, to about the 
 same date as the translation of the Maha-Bharata ; see 
 remark above to note ^^. — Progress has been made with 
 the printing of Nirapeksha's commentary in the Bill. 
 Indica. 
 
 P. 273, note 81*. On modern Indian music, see now the 
 numerous writings of Sourindro Mohun Tagore, Calcutta, 
 1875 ff., cf. Jenaer Lit. Zeit., i^yj, p. 487. — It is possible 
 that the investigation of the gdnas of the Sama-veda, in case 
 these are still in actual use and could be observed, might 
 yield some practical result for the ancient laukika music 
 also. 
 
 P. 274, note 821°. For such representations of Venus, 
 supported on the tail of a dolphin, or with a dolphin and 
 Cupid behind her, see J. J. Bernouilli, Aphrodite (Leipzig, 
 1873), pp. 245, 370, 405. See also numerous representa- 
 tions of the kind in the Musie de Sculpture par le Comte 
 F. de Glarac (Paris, 1836-37), vol. iv., pi. 593, 607, 610, 
 612, 615, 620, 622, 626-628, 634. 
 
 P. 278, note 8^^ Biihler has also published a transla- 
 tion of Apastamba : it is now being reprinted in the series 
 of ' Sacred Books of the East ' which is appearing under 
 Max Mtiller's direction. — Gautama has been edited by 
 Stenzler (London, 1876), and is also comprised in Jiva- 
 nanda's large collection ' Dharmashastrasamgraha ' (Cal- 
 cutta, 1876), which, all inaccuracies notwithstanding, is 
 yet a very meritorious publication, on account of the 
 abundance of material it contains. It embraces 27 large 
 and small Smriti-texts, namely, 3 Atris, 2 Vishnus, 2 
 Haritas, Yajnavalkya, 2 U^anas', Angiras, Yama, Apa- 
 
326 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 
 
 stamba, Samvarta, Katyayana, Brihaspati, 2 Paralaras, 
 2 Vyasas, ^ankha, Likhita, Daksha/ 2 Gautamas^ and 
 2 Vasishthas. — Narada's Smriti has been translated by 
 Jolly (London, 1876); see also his papers, TJeber die, recht- 
 liche StelluTig der Fravsn lei den Indern (Munich, 1876), 
 and Ueber das indische Schuldrecht (Munich, 1877). 
 
 P. 280, note ^^. The Aruna-Smriti, Biihler informs me, 
 is quite a late production, probably a section of a Purana. 
 
 P. 28 1 . As Yaj navalkya enumerates the planets in their 
 Greek order (i. 295) the earliest date we can assign to this 
 work is the third century a.d. (see remark above to p. 251, 
 note ^^*, following Jacobi). 
 
 P. 284, s. See remark on Panchalachanda above, note 
 to p. so. 
 
 P. 288. E. Senart, in his ingenious work. La L4gende 
 dv, Bouddha (Paris, 1875), traces the various legends that 
 are narrated of Buddha (and in part, identically, of Krishna 
 also) to ancient solar myths which were only subsequently 
 applied to Buddha ; comp. my detailed notice and partial 
 rejoinder in the Jeriaer Lit. Zeit, 1 876 (29th April), p. 282 ff. 
 
 P. 291, note -f-. Schiefner's 'Indische Erzahlungen,' 
 from the Kagyur, in vols. vii. and viii. of the Milanges 
 Asiatiques of the St. Petersburg Academy, embrace already 
 forty-seven such legends. 
 
 P. 292, note ***. Whether the Buddhaghosha of this in- 
 scription is, as Stevenson assumes (p. 1 3), to be identified 
 with the well-known B. must stiU appear very doubtful, 
 as the princes mentioned in the rest of these inscriptions 
 belong to a far older period; see Bhandarkar in the 
 Transactions of the London Congress of Orientalists (1876), 
 p. 306 ff. 
 
 P. 293, note *. Sept suttas Pdlis, tirds du Bighanikdya, 
 from the papers of Paul Grimblot, were published by his 
 widow in 1876 (Paris), text with translation. — The 
 second part of Fausboll's edition of the Jataka appeared 
 in 1877. — The Mahaparinibbana-sutta was edited in 1874 
 by Childers in the Journal B. A. S., vols. vii. and viii. : a 
 separate impression of it has just appeared. The same 
 journal also contains an edition of the Patimokkha by 
 Dickson. An edition of the whole Vinaya-pitaka by 
 Herm. Oldenberg is in the press. 
 
 P. 297, note ^». A collected edition of the sacred Angas 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. 327 
 
 of the Jainas was published last year (1877) at Calcutta 
 by Dhanapatisifihajl: the text is accompanied with the 
 commentary of Abhayadeva and a JMsM-explanation by 
 Bhagvan Vijaya. 
 
 P. 300, note ^^. On this compare also S. Beal, The, 
 Buddhist Trijpitaka as it is known in China and Japan 
 (Devonport, 1876). 
 
 P. 303, note J. On possible points of connection between 
 the Avesta and Buddhism see Jenaer Lit. Zeit., 1877, p. 
 221. 
 
 P. 305, note |. In Gautama the word Ihikshu appears 
 expressly as the name of the third of the four dSramas ; 
 in place of it Manu has yati. 
 
 Berlin, 2^th May 1878. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 Akahap^da, 85. 245. 
 akshara, ' syllable,' ij. 16. 
 
 — pfailos., 161. 
 Agastya, 53. 275 (archit.). 
 Agni, 31. 40. 63. 159. 178. 303. 
 
 — cJiayana, I20. (274). 
 
 — Purdna, 191. 231. 271. 275. 281. 
 318. 
 
 — rahasya, 118. 120. 
 Agnive^a, 265. 266. 269 (med.). 
 Aguisv^min, 79. 
 
 agra, 190. 
 
 aghds, 248. 
 
 Ar^a, 25. 216 (s. Veddmga). 296. 
 
 297. 326, 327 (Jain.). 
 Afigae, 147. 
 Aflgir, 158. 
 Angiras, 31. S3- IS3- 158. 160. 162. 
 
 164. 250. 325 {Smriti). 
 
 — (Jupiter) 250. 
 Angirasas, 124. 148 S, 
 Ajfltaiatru, 51. 127. 138. 286 (his 
 
 six teachers). 
 
 — comm., 82. 
 atihrushta, iii. 
 atthakaOid, 292, 
 
 Atri, 31. 38. 53. 102. 103. 140 Ved. 
 
 — 102. 283. 325 (jur.). 
 
 — 269 med. 
 
 — daughter of, 38. 140. 
 
 — irihad', 269 (med.). 
 
 — laghu", 269 (med.). 
 Atharvan, 151 (as prajdpati), 153 
 
 {brihaspati and hhagavant). 158. 
 164. 
 
 — (= Aih. Veda), 78. 
 Atharva-ParUishtas, 249. 251. 253. 
 
 265. 
 
 — the forty-eighth Aih. Par., 313. 
 316. 317. 318. 
 
 Aiharva-ParUishta, Greek order of 
 the planets in iheAth. ParUishtas, 
 323. 
 
 — Paifppdle, 158. 169. 
 
 — PrdtUdhhya, 146. 151. 
 
 — Veda, 8. 22. 29. 145 ff. 249. 265. 
 
 — Hkhare, 164. 
 
 — Hkhd, 164. 167. 
 AthmrvaMras, 154. 166. 169. 170. 
 Atharva-Samhitd, II. 208. 318. 
 Atharvdmgirasas, il. 72. 93. 121. 
 
 127. 149. 150 ("rasa sing.) 
 Atharvdnas, 113. 124. 148. 149. 
 Atha/rvopanishads, 28. 153 ff. 239. 
 ath& 'tah, 245. 265. 
 AdUiutadharma, 301 (Buddh.). 
 Adbhuta-Brdhmana, 69. 152. 
 advaita, 171. 
 Advaita-malearanda, 323. 
 adhidevatam, 121. 
 I, 121. 
 
 adhydtmam, 121. 
 Adhydtmardmdyana, 168. 
 adhydya, 14. 31. 32. 107. 117. 
 adhydyddin, 66. 
 adhvaryu, 14. 80. 149. 
 adhvaryus (pi.), 8. 80. 86. 87. 121. 
 Ananta, 141 (comm.). 
 Anantadeva, loi. 
 Anantayajvan, 85. 245. 
 wnaphd, 255 (Greek). 
 Anuh-amanU, 24. 32. 33. 6l. 64. 65. 
 
 74. 83. 85. 87. 88. 90. 103. 104. 
 
 107. 143. 144. 145. 152. 
 Anupada-Satra, So. 81. 84. 88. 95, 
 Anubrdhmana, 12. 82. 
 anubrdJimanin, 82. 
 AnubhiitipraMia, 97. 
 Anubh^tisvartipiichdrya, 226. 
 
33° 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 anuLamba, 68. 
 
 anuvdia, 31. 33. 88. 94. 107. 109. 
 124. 145. 
 
 — °hdnukramai!.i, 32. 61. 
 anuvydkhydnai 122. 127. 
 amiMsana, 121. 122. 127. 
 amntotra, 84. 
 anilchdTia, 78. 
 Andhaka-Vrishnayas, 185. 
 Andhomati, 106. 
 anvadhydya, 57. 176. 
 anvdhhy&na, 122. 
 Ap^ntaratamas, 243. 
 Apsaras, 125. 
 Abhayadeva, 327. 
 Ahhichdra-Kalpa, 153. 
 Abhidharma ^uddh.). 290. 292. 
 
 307 ff. 
 AhhidhAnorchintdmani, 230. 
 
 — ratnaTiiMd, 230. 
 Abhinavagupta, 237. 273. 322. 
 dbhinimrulcta, 278. 
 AiTiinidikra'numa-Siitra, 300. 
 Abhimanyu, 219. 220. 223. 
 abhiyajna-gdthds, 45. 
 Abhira, 3. 
 
 ahhyaniikta, 122. 
 
 Ama/rakosha, 220. 229 ff. 267. 
 
 Amarachandra, 190. 
 
 Amaradeva, 228. 
 
 Amarasinha, 200. 219. 227 ff. 
 
 Amaru, 210. 
 
 Amita, 306. 
 
 Amit^bha, 298. 306. 
 
 Amitragh^ta, 251. 
 
 Amritanddopa/imhad, 154. 165. 171. 
 
 AmrUamndiipanithad, 99. 154. 165. 
 
 Ambi, 114. 134. 317. 
 
 Ambiki, 39. 114. 134. 317. 
 
 Amb^lifet, 39. 114. 134. 317. 
 
 ayana, 66. 
 
 ayogH, iii. 
 
 Ayodhyi, 89. 178. 224. 
 
 Aruna, 133. "nas, 93. 
 
 — Smriti, 280. 326. 
 Aruni, 93 (and plur.) 
 ArkaliuaB, 33. 
 
 wrjuna, Arjuna (and Indra), 37. 50. 
 
 114. 115. 134. 135. 136. 137. 185. 
 
 186. 
 arjunyau, 248. 
 ArthaMstra, 271. 273. 275. 
 ardha, 73 (inhabited place). 
 ardhanidgadki, 295. 296. 297. 
 arhant, 78. 138. 305. 
 AlaipMra&Utra, 231. 322. 
 
 Avaddna, 299. 301 (Buddh.). 
 Avalokite^vara, 298. 299. 
 avyaMa, 238. 
 AvyayavriUi, 227. 
 aMti/patha, 119. 
 Aioka, 179. 273. 290. 291. 
 Aivaghosha, 161. 162. 
 Aivapati, 71. 120. 
 asvamedJia, 54. 114. 126. 
 
 — °hdnda, 118. 
 Aivala, 53. 129. 
 Ash^ha, 133. 
 
 aahtaka, 31. 32. 42. 43. 89. 
 
 ashtddhydyi, 118. 
 
 asura, 302 (sura formed from). 
 
 — language of the A.'s, 180. 
 
 — Erishna, 148. 304. 
 
 — Maya, 253, 274. 
 ahargana, 258. 
 ahi, 36. 
 
 ahina, 66. 76. 79. 80. 139. 
 Ahobalasliri, loi. 
 dktUa, 128. 
 dkohera, 254. 
 dkhydna, 122. 193. 
 
 — vidas, 45. 
 Agamaidstra, 161. 
 •jgnlve^a, 102. 285. 
 Agnive^yiyana, 49. 53. 102. 
 dgneyam parva, 66. 
 Aflgirasa, 71. 148. 153. 
 AngirasakaVpa, 153. 
 dchdrya, 73. 77. 81. 121. 
 .ntn^ra, 68. 125. 
 
 dnava, 171. 
 
 dtman, 97. 156. 161 ff. 
 
 — {mahdn), 238. 
 Atmaprabodhopanishad, 166. 167. 
 
 , 169. 
 Atmilnanda, 42. 
 
 ftmopanidiad, 158. 162. 
 treya, 87-89. 91. 92. 93. 102. 103. 
 Taitt., 153. Ath., 241. 242. (phil.). 
 265. 269. (med.). 
 
 — hanishtha", 269. (med.). 
 
 — hrikad", 269. (med.). 
 
 — madhyama", 269. (med.). 
 
 — vriddhw, 269. (med.). 
 -;- {bhihshu), 284. 
 Atharrana, 128. 149. 
 
 — Oriliya, 152. 
 Atharvanikas, 82. 149. 
 Atharvaniycumd/ropanishad, 154.170. 
 dditya, 131. 
 
 <:Uiitydni, 131. 
 Adityadiisa, 259. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 331 
 
 Adibuddha, 298. 
 
 ddda, 73. 121. 149. 235. 301. 
 
 Ananda-giri, 51. 243. 
 
 — jn^na, 51. 
 
 — tirtha, 42. 51. 
 
 — vana, 168. 
 
 — yardhana, 322. 
 AnandavaUi, 94. 154. 156. r57. 
 ^.narttiya, 55. 
 
 \4ndhras, 94. 
 
 Apastamba, 88, 89 fT. 100. loi. 102. 
 
 317- 325- 
 
 — DharmasHtra, loi. I02. 106. 278. 
 
 , 325- 
 
 Api^ali, 222. 
 dpoMima, 255 (Greek). 
 J^ptavajrasHchi, 161, 
 Abhipratdrina, 136. 
 Amardja, 261. 
 dyana, names in, 53. 120. 
 j.-yahathtina, 130. 
 Ayv/rveda, 265. 267. 271. 
 dra, 254 (Greek). 
 AranyaJea, 8. 28. 29. 48. 92. 
 
 — hinda, 118. 
 
 — jyoUsha, 153. 
 
 — samMtd, 65. 
 Aranyagdna, 64. 65. 
 Aranya-^amhitd, 316. 
 ArStda, Arflhi, 285. 
 Aruna, 93. 
 
 Aruni, 51. 69. 71. 123. 130. 132. 
 
 133. 157. 286. 
 Arunikopanishad, 163. 164. 
 
 t'ruuins, 93. 
 runeya, 133. 157. 
 drchika, 63. 65. 66. 
 i^rjunaka, 185. 
 Aryas, 3. 79. 178. 
 Aryabhata, 61. 254. 255. 257 ff. 
 Arydbkatiya, 61. 257. 
 Aryagiddhdnta, 257. 
 Ai'ydpanehdHti, 237. 
 Aryd^htaiata, 257. 
 Arsha, 85. 
 
 Arshikopanishad, 162. 
 Artheya-Kalpa, 75. 77. 
 Arsheya-Srdhmatfa, 74. 313. 316. 
 ^Jamb^yana, 53. 
 ^LVantika, 259. 
 4.vantik^, riti, 232. 
 4.^d;rka, 84. 278. 
 
 4toarathah, JorZyaA, 46. 53. 242. 
 'Aimarathya, 53. 242. 
 dirama, omopanwkad, 164. 
 
 — (phihshu), 327. 
 
 Aivatard^vi, 133. 
 
 A^valdyana, 32. 34. 49. 52 ff. 59. 62. 
 80. 85. loi. 106. 169. 266. 
 
 — Kaulalya, 159. 
 
 — PariUthta, 62. 
 
 — Brdhmana, 49. 
 AMna-iastra, 314. 
 dhini series, 323. 
 
 fsur^yana, 128. 140. 
 Buri, 128. 131. 133. 137. 235. 236. 
 dsJcanda, 113. 
 dsphvjit, 254 (Greek). 
 Asphuji(d)dhvaia (?), 258. 
 ikhavdla, 264 (Arabic). 
 ithimikd, 89. 
 Itar^ 48. 
 Itihdsas, 24. 72. 93. 122. 124. 127. 
 
 159. 190. 191. 
 Itikdsapurdna, 121. 183. 301. 
 ittha, 254 (Greek). 
 itthUdla, 264 (Arabic). 
 ityukta, 300. 
 inthikd, 264 (Arabic). 
 indrnvdra, 264 (Arab.) 
 Indra, 32.40. 52. 63. 123. 127. 176 
 
 (gramm.). 186. 211. 265 (med.). 
 
 303. 
 
 — and Arjuna, 37. 50. 115. 1 36. 
 185. 186. 
 
 Ind/rajajumiya, 193. 
 
 Indradatta, 293. 
 
 Indradyumna, 133. 
 
 Indraprastha, 178. 
 
 Indrota, 34. 125. 
 
 Ird,vati, 178. 
 
 U, 108. 
 
 f^a, 45. 110. 
 
 liopanishad, 116. 155. 309. 
 
 ihara, 238. 
 
 l^vara, 272 mus. 
 
 l^varakrishna, 236. 237. 
 
 isardpha, 264 (Arabic). 
 
 uhtapratyuHami 122. 
 
 uktha, 67. 81. 
 
 uklhdrtha, 83. 
 
 Ukha, 91. 
 
 XTgrasena, 125. 135. 
 
 iichcha, 257- 
 
 Ujjayini, 185. 201. 209. 252. 257. 
 
 259. 295. 
 Ujjvaladatta, 226. 
 u^ddi, 216. 226. 
 UttaraMpini, 169. 
 Uttaramimdnsd, 239 ff. 
 Utta/rwdmachwi-ita, 207. 
 UUa/i-wiiaUi, 157. 
 
332 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 uttard, uttardrchika, 63. 65. 
 
 uttwrdshddhds, 247. 
 
 Utpala, 243. 260. 322. 
 
 UtpaZini, 227. 
 
 Udayana, 246. 
 
 uddtta, 314. 
 
 ud/lchyas, 132. 178. 
 
 udgdtav, 14. 67. 149. 
 
 Udd^laka, 69. 71. 123. 130. 131. 
 
 IS7- 284. 
 Uddyotakara, 245. 
 Udbhata, 322. 
 UpagrrnithorSiJitra, 83. 84. 
 Upatishya, 199. 
 upadeia, 301 (Buddh.), 
 upadhd, 144, 
 Vpamishads, 28. 29. 42. 48. 73. 74. 
 
 121. 127. 153 ff. 235. 277. 
 
 — number of, 154. 155. 
 
 — ( Up. Brdhmana), 34. 74. 
 Upapnrdnas, 171. 191. 282. 
 Vpalekka, 40. 59. 
 Upaveda, 265. 271. 273. 
 upweydkhydna, 122. 
 upaskd/ra, 244, 
 
 upagtha, 114. 
 updkhydna, 73, 122. 
 Updmgas, 297 (Jain.), 
 upddhydya, 82. 
 
 — nirapehshd, 271. 
 «p(isaJo, "siSd, 306. 
 Upendra, 303. 
 uhhcuyam antarerpa, 49. 
 Umit, 74. 156. 
 waga, 98. 303. 
 
 Urva^i, 134. 207 (drama). 208. 
 
 idioka, 246. 
 
 Uvatta, 42. 
 
 TOanas (K^vya), 36. 153. 
 
 — 278. 282. 325 (jvir.). 
 Utoara, 45. 
 UshaBti, 71- 
 
 ushtra, 3. 
 
 Data, 34. 42. 59. 116. 
 
 Uvata, 144., 
 
 lOhagdna, Vhyagdna, 64. 
 
 Rik-Samhitd, 9. 10. II. 14. 31 ff. 
 
 — and Sdma-S., readings of, 313. 
 
 — concluding verse of, in the forty - 
 eighth Ath. Pwr., 313. 
 
 — Kashmir MS., 314. 
 
 — galitas in, 314, 315. 
 Rigmdhdna, 62. 74. (33). 313. 314. 
 
 316. 
 Rigveda, 8. 33 {rigvedaguptaye). 45, 
 121. 123. 127, 
 
 richai, 8. 9. 14. 31. 33- 63. 64. 65. 
 
 74- 75- , 
 
 — number of, 121. 153. 
 Rishi, 8 (= Terfo). 122. 145. 
 
 — Brdhmana, 64. - 
 
 — mukhdni, 66. 
 Rishy-Anukramani, 88. 
 Ekachiirni, 42. gi. 
 ekapddihd, 117. 
 ekavacliana, 124. 
 ekahanaa, 129. 
 
 ekdha, 66. 76. 79. 80. 139. 
 eke, 134. 140. 
 Aikshv^ka, 125. 
 Aitareya, 48. 49. 56. 70. 85. 
 
 — Brdhmana, 16. 44 ff. 72. 
 
 — °yaka, 34. 62. 
 
 — 'ydiraij.yaka, 32. 48 ff. 75. 315. 
 
 — -yins, 49. 81. 85. 
 
 — °opanishad, 48. 155. 
 Aiti^^yana, 53. 241 (Aita°). 
 Aindra (School), 321. 
 amdramparva, 66. 
 aiharika, 309. 
 
 om, 158. 160. 161. 163. 164. 
 orimvikd, 89. 
 cmkthika, 83. 240, 
 Aukhiyas, 88. 
 Audulomi, 242. 
 Audanya, 134. 
 audichya, 34. 
 Audumba^yana, 53. 
 AuddSLlaki, 157 (Ved.). 267 (erot.). 
 Audbh^iri, 88. 
 Aupatasvini, 134. 
 Aupamanyava, 75. 
 Aupave^i, 133. 
 Aupa^ivi,'i43. 
 Aupoditeya, 133. 
 Auiakya, 246. 
 AushtrSLkshi, 75. 
 Kansavadha, 198. 207. 
 Kaohoh^^ (Buddha's wife), 318. 
 Kachch^yalia, 227. 293. 
 Katha, 89. 92. 184 ; plur. 88. 89. 
 317. 
 
 — vaUi; 157. 
 
 — idkM, 89. 
 
 — irutyupanishad, 163. 164, 
 
 — SAtra. 00. 100. 
 
 — isntra, 99. 100. 
 
 Kanabhaksba, Kanabhuj, 245. 
 
 z6o. 
 Kan^da, 244. 245. 246. 
 kandikd, 59. 89. 107. 117. n8-i20. 
 kar^va, 140 (deaf). 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 333 
 
 Kanva, 3. 31. 52. 106. 105 (plur.) 
 
 140. 
 — Smriti-Sdatra, 143. 
 Kanha, 304. 
 
 Kauhi, Kanhdyana, 304. 
 Katas, 138. 
 Kathdamritsdgara, 213. 217. 219. 
 
 223. 
 Kadrii, 134. 
 Kanishka, Kanerki, 205. 218. 219. 
 
 220. 222. 223. 281. 285. 287. 288. 
 
 290. 294. 302. 306. 308. 
 hanishtha, 269 ( treya). 
 leanydiyumdri, 157. 
 Kapardigiri, 179. 
 KapardkT£[min, 42. loi, 
 impinjala, 211. 
 Kapila, 96. 137. 162. 235 ff. 272. 
 
 284. 308. 
 Kapilavaatu, 33. 137. 284. 
 Eapishthala, 265. 268 (med.)' 
 
 — Kathas, 88. 
 Kapishthala-SaTTihitd, 88, 
 Kabandha, 149. 
 Kabandhin, 159. 
 Kambojas, 178. 220. 
 hammila, 264 Arab, 
 hwratajea, 206. 
 
 Icarana, 259 (aatr.). 
 
 — kutiihala, 261. 262. 
 
 — sdra, 262. 
 KarayindaBvSEmin, lOI. 
 kardZi, 159. 
 
 Earka, 141, 
 Earndtakas, 94. 
 Karnisuta, 276. 
 Karmauda, °dinas, 305. 
 Karmwpradipa, 84. 85. 278, 
 Kwrmamimdnsd, 239 flF. 
 Karmargha, 153. 
 kalds (the sixty-four), 275. 
 KaXd/pa-S'i.t/ra, 227 (gramm.). 
 EaUpin, 184. 
 hdi, 113. 283 yuga. 
 
 — era, 205. 260. 261. 
 Ealinga, 269. 
 Ealin^tha, 272. 
 Tealiyuga, 243. 
 Kalhi-PurdnOf, 191. 
 
 Kalpa, 16. 46. S3. 75. 93. 153 {ith.). 
 176. 242. 
 
 — icdra, 144. 
 
 — Sutras, 16. 34. 75. 100. 102 (Ved.). 
 297 (Jain.) 317. 
 
 Kalpdnwpada, 84. 
 Kalhana, 2!3. 215. 319. 
 
 Kayasba, 120. 
 
 Kavi, 153 (Wanas). 191. 195. 
 
 Eaviputra, 204. 205. 
 
 EaTirdja, 196. 
 
 ka4yapa, 140 (having blaok teeth). 
 
 Ea^yapa, 53. 140. 
 
 — 278. 282 jur. 
 hashd/ya, 78. 306. 
 Easerumant, 188. 
 Eahola, 129. 133. 
 
 Edflkdyana, 153 (Ath.). 266. 269 
 
 (med.) 
 Edthaka, 41. 81. 85. 88. 89 ff. 103. 
 
 317- 
 
 — Griliya, loi. 317. 
 EdthaTcopanislmd,^'^. 156, 238. 240. 
 hdndda, 246. 
 
 hdnda, 59. 89.91. 92. 1 17 £f. 145. 
 
 Edndamdyana, 53, 
 
 Einva, 103. 106. 113 ff. 142. 143. 
 144 (gramm.). 
 
 Kd3j,vajca, 105. 
 
 Esi^ivlputra, 105. 
 
 Ednvydyana, 105. 
 
 Kdtantra, 226. 227. 321. 
 
 KdUya-Grihya, 142. 
 
 Kdliya-Mtra, 91. 99. 100. 142. 
 
 Esttya, 138. 223. 
 
 Esityiiyaua, 53. 61. 80. 83. 84. 107. 
 138 ff. (Ved.) 222. 321. (gramm.), 
 227 lex. 266 med. 285 (Buddh.). 
 
 — Smriti-Sdstra of, 143. 326. 
 
 — Eabandhin, 159. 
 Edtydyani, 127. 138; = Baigi, 
 
 138. 157. 
 
 — putra, 71. 138. 285. 
 KddamJ>aH, 213. 
 KdpUa-Sdstra, 236. 
 
 Edpya, 126.137. 223. 236. 237. 284. 
 KdmandaUya (^Niti-Sdstra), 271. 
 
 325- 
 KdmorSiiira, 267. 
 Edmukdyana, 241. 
 Edmplla, 114. 115 ; "lya, 115. 138. 
 Edmboja, 75- 
 Kdrandavyuha, 299. 
 Eiirttakaujapa, 266. 
 Edrttikeya, 103 (comm.), 
 hbrmiha, 309. 
 
 EEirsbndjini, 140. 241. 242. 
 Edla, 248. 
 Kdlanirnaya, 262. 
 Edlabavins, 14. 81, 83. 96. 
 Edlayavana, 220. 221. 
 Kdldgnirudropanishad, 171. 
 EEildpa, 89. 96. 
 
334 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 K^lid^a, 195. 196. 200 ff. 209. 228. 
 250. 252. 266. 318 f. 
 
 — three Eilliddsas, 204. 
 h6li, 159. 
 
 Kivasheya, 120. 131. 
 KavHa, 236. 
 
 hlvyas, 183. 191. 195. 210. 
 K^vya 36 (TOanas). 153. 
 Kdvyaprahdki, 204. 232. 
 Kdm/ddaria, 232. 
 EdvydUimMrawitti, 226. 232. 
 K^akritsna, 42! 91. 140. 242. 
 Eisakiitsni, 139. 140. 242. 
 K^is,'l25. 286. 
 
 KdMhd, 106. 130. 226. 227. 321. 
 K^l, 269. 283. 
 K^miras, 227. 
 KiWyapa, 14.3 (gramm.). 245 (phil.). 
 
 27s (archit.). 
 Jedshdyadhdra'^, 237. 
 hitava, ill. 
 kimnara, 302. 
 Kirdtdrjuniya, 196. 
 Kikatas, 79. 
 KIrtidhara, 273. 
 kuttaim, 259. 
 Kuthumi, 84. 
 Eundina, 91. 
 
 — (town), 168. 
 Eutapa-Sau^ruta, 266. 
 kuntdpasikta, 146. 
 Eunti, 90. 
 
 EubM, 3. 
 Kumdrapila, 297. 
 Kumdrasamhhaiia, 195. 196. 208. 
 
 3i8. 
 Kum^irilabliatta, 68. 74. 241. 242. 
 Kumirilasvimin, 100. 
 Eumbhamushkas, 303. 
 Eumbh&idas, 302. 303. 
 Eurus, 114. 123. 135. 136. 137. 
 
 138 (and Katas). 286. 
 Eurukshetra, 68. 136. 
 Euru-Pafichdlas, 10. 34. 39. 45. 
 
 68. 90. 114. 129. 132. 135. 186. 
 
 286. 
 huladhwnna, 278. 
 huMra, 254. 
 EuUtika, 281. 
 Euvera, 124. 303. 
 Eu^a and Lava, 197. 
 JcuHlava, 197. 
 Eushmdndas, 303. 
 Eusumapura, 257. 258. 
 Kusvmdkjali, 245. 246. 
 kHrmambhdga, 215. 
 
 Edahmdndas, 303. 
 
 krit, 144. 
 
 krita, 113 (^ga). 
 
 kritHhd, 2. I4!8. 247. 248. 304. 323. 
 
 — series, date of, 2. 
 Zrityeuihintdmatiii, 80. 
 Eri^a, 266 med. 
 ErifeMva, °^vinas, 197. 
 hrislma (black), 304. 
 
 Erishna Devakiputra, 71. 104. 148. 
 169. 186. 238. 284. 304. 
 
 — and E^yavana, 220. 221. 
 
 — and the Fsbdavas, 136. 
 
 — and the shepherdesses, 210. 
 
 — worship of, 71. 189. 209. 238. 
 289. 300. 304. 307. 326. 
 
 — Angirasa, 71. 148. 
 
 — Dvaipityana, 184. 243. 
 
 — Asura Krishna, 148. 304. 
 
 — Krishna Hirita, 50. 
 Erishnajit, 54. 58. 
 Erishnami^ra, 207. 
 Eiishn^jina, 242. 
 Krishndtreya, 266 med. 
 Kekayas, 120. 132. 
 ketu, 250. 
 
 Keaopanishad, 73, 74. 75. 156 ff. 
 
 171. 316. 
 kemad/rwna, 255. 
 kevala, 245. 
 
 — naiydyika, 245. 
 Ee^va E^mirabhatta, 323. 
 Ee^in (Asura), 148. 
 Ke^i-Blidana, °han, 148. 
 'Kesari' samgrdmah, 188. 
 kemva, 304. 
 
 Kaikeya, 120. 
 
 Eaiyata, 56. 83. 93. 95. 223. 224. 
 
 KaiveUyopanishad, 155. 163. 169 f. 
 
 EokUa, 280. 
 
 kona, 254. 
 
 Eo^a, 160. 185. 192. 193. 324. 
 
 Eosala, 33. 68. 137. 285. 
 
 — Tidehas, 34. 39. 132. 134. 135. 
 285. 
 
 Eohala, 273. 
 
 Eauklista, 134. 
 
 kaukkutika, 305. 
 
 Eaundinya, 102. 285, 
 
 Eautsa, 77. 140. 
 
 Eauts^yana, 97, 
 
 Eauthumas, 47. 65. 76. 83. 84. 89. 
 
 96. 106. 
 Eaudreyas, 140. 
 Eaum&rila, 241, 
 Kauravya, 39. 123. 135. 136. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 335 
 
 KaurupaBcMla, 123. 
 kwwrpya, 254 (Greek). 
 Kaidopanishad, 171. 
 Kaufolya (A^vaUyana), 159. 
 Kau^^mbeya, 123. 
 Kau^ika, 149. 152. 153 {Ath.). 
 
 — (Comm.), 42. 91. 
 Kaushitaka, 56. 
 Kaushitdka, 46. 81, 
 
 — "hdranyaka, 50. 54- 
 Kaushltaki, "kin, 46. 68. 8z. 133. 
 
 134- 313- 
 
 — Brdhmana, 26. 44 ff. 71. 
 
 — Upanishad, 50. 73. 127. 155. 
 286. 
 
 Kaushitakeya, 129. 
 
 Kauaalya, 125. 159 (i). 
 
 Kaueurubindi, 123. 
 
 Kauhala, 75. 
 
 hramapdtha, 34. 49. 60. 
 
 Icriya, 254 (Greek). 
 
 Erivi, Kraivya, 125. 
 
 Krauncha, 93. 
 
 Krauahtuki, 61 metr. 153. 248 
 
 Ath. ' 
 kllba, III. 
 hshat/rapati, 68. 
 Ksliapanaka, 200. 
 KsMrapSni, 265 med. 
 KBhirasvtoin, 79. 227. 
 Kshudras, 84. 
 Xshurikopanishad, 165. 
 Kshemamkara, 213. 
 Kshemendra, 213. 215. 319. 320. 
 
 321. 
 Kshemendrabhadra, 293. 
 Kshairakalambhi, 77. 
 Kshaudra, 84. 
 Khandika, 88. 
 Khadirasv^min, 79. 
 Kharoshtha, 248. 
 KMdiiyana, 53, °mns 14. 81. 
 Kh^diklyas, 87. 88. 
 Khddiragrihya, 84. 
 khUa, 92. 97. 107. 130. 144. 249. 
 
 313 *• 
 — Unda, 127. 128. 130. 131. 
 khudddkapdtha, 293. 
 Gangd, 51. 168. 193. 248. 
 Gang^dhara, 142. 
 Gangefe, 246. 323. 
 ganas, 225. 266 gramm. 
 ganaka, 1 1 3. 
 
 GanapatipArvatdpini, 170. 
 Oanapatyupanishad, 154. 170. 
 ganapdtha, 138. 225. 240. 241. 242. 
 
 6ai!,wratnamw,hodadhi, 226. 
 gariita, 159. 
 ganitddhydya, 262. 
 Gane^a, 281. 
 
 — tdpimi, 170. 
 Gad^dbara, 142. 
 
 Gandharva, 272 (Ndrada). 284 (Pafl- 
 chaiikha). 
 
 — poaeessed by a, 126. 
 GandMra, 70. 132. 218, "ria, 147. 
 Garuda, 171. 302 (plur.). 
 
 — Purdna, 191. 
 Garudopanishad, 171. 
 
 Garga, 153 Ath. 221. 252 ff. (aatr.). 
 
 — plur. 252. 253. 
 
 — Vriddhagarga, 153. 253. 
 GaMiopanishad, 160. 167. 272. 
 gdlitas, 314. 315. 
 
 gallakka, 206. 
 gdlianami, ganibhiram, 233. 
 Gdngy^yani, 51. 
 Odr^apatyap'i/rvatdpaniya, 170. 
 githds, 24. 33. 45. 72. 73. 93. 121. 
 122. 124. 125. 127. 132. 184. 
 
 — 299. 301 Buddh. 
 Gdnas, 63. 64. 81. 316. 325. 
 Gdnd!iarvaveda, 271. 272. 
 gdyatrisampanna, 140. • 
 Gilrgi Vichaknavi, 56. 129. 
 
 — Swmhitd, 214. 251. 
 
 G&gya, 56 {Grihya). 63 {Sdmav ). 
 75 (Ma^aka). 143 (gramm.). 153 
 {Ath.). 
 
 — and Kfflayavana, 221. 
 
 — Bdldki, 51. 
 Oitagovinda, 2IO. 
 
 — ' (time of composition), 210. 
 Gunddhya, 213. 
 Gupta (dynasty), 204. 
 Gurudevasvimin, loi. 
 Gurjara, 297. 
 Guhadeva, 42. 323. 
 guhya ddeia, 73. 
 gully am ndma, 115. 
 GAdhdrtharatnamdld, 42. 
 Gritsamada, 31. 
 grihastha, 28. 164. 
 Grihya-Satras, 15. 17. 19. 20. 69. 
 84. lOl. 152. 153. 264. 276. 278. 
 geya, 301 Buddh. 
 Geyagdna, 66. 
 gawikamvAla, 264 Arab. 
 Gairikshita, 41. 
 
 GoniMputra, 223 gr. 267 (erot.). 
 Gotama, 244 flF. (log.). 
 
 — Si,tra, 245. 
 
336 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 Qod^vari, 283. 
 
 Gonardlya, 223 gr. 267 (erot.). 
 
 Oopatha-Brdhmana, jo6. 150. I5I. 
 
 152. 304. 
 Oopavanas, 140. 
 Gopdlatdpaniyopcmishad, 169. 
 gopi, 169. 
 
 Gopichandanopanishad, 1 69. 
 Gobhila, 80. 82. 83. 84. 
 
 — Smriti, 280. 
 golddhydya, 262. 
 Govardhana, 211. 
 Govinda, comm., 55- ^2. 
 
 — teacher of ^amkara, 16I. 243. 
 
 — ST^min, 101 comm. 
 Oauda (style), 232. 
 GaudapSida, i6l. 167. 236. 243. 
 
 298. 
 Gautama, 77 (two G.'s). 
 
 — 84. 143 (jut.). 
 
 — 153. 162 {Ath.). 
 
 — 245 (pM.). 
 
 — 162 (Rishi). 
 
 — Dharma {-SUtra), 85. 278. 281. 
 282. 325. 326. 327. 
 
 — {Pitrimedha-S4tra), 84. 245. 
 Gautamah S^khyah, 284, 
 Gautamas, 137, 
 
 grantka, 15. 99. 165. 193. 
 
 — {niddnasamjnaJca), 81. 
 graha, 67 (Soma-vessel). 
 
 — eclipse, 249. 
 
 — planet, 98. 249. 250, 
 
 — {bdlagralui), 98. 
 grdma, 64. 77. 
 Ordmageyagdna, 64. 65. 
 Ghatakarpara, 200. 201. 
 Ghora .aSgirasa, 71. 
 Chxitnhsluahtiktddidstra, 275 i^ld- 
 
 cmturcuaga, game of, 275. 
 
 Chatmr - adhyd/yikd, 15 1 {'ddhyd- 
 
 yikd). 
 ChkturmniatismriM, 280. 
 Chandra, 219. 227. 
 Chandraka, 319. 
 Chandragupta, 4. 204. 217. 223, 
 
 251. 287. 
 — (Gupta dynasty), 304. 
 Chandrabh^d, 269. 
 Chandra-Tydharana, 227. 
 Champa, 178. 
 chwrdka, 87. 
 Charaka, 265. 266. 268. 270. 284. 
 
 324. 325 med. 
 Charaka-S'dkhdi 89. 
 
 Charakas, 87. 88. 164. 
 Charak^chdrya, 87. 113. 
 Charak^dhvaryus, 87. 133. 134. 
 Charaifarvy'&ha, 95. 142. 153 {Ath.). 
 "chariira, 214. 
 ChiCkra, 123. 
 Chslkr^yana, 71. 
 Chilnakya, 205. 210. 260. 310. 
 chdniddla, 129. 
 Chdnardtas, 193. 
 chjmdanagandhika, 275. 
 ChiCndrabhiigin, 269. 
 Sri-Chitpa, 259. 
 
 Chdrfyaniya, 88. 103. 317 (Silcshd). 
 Chiirvilkas, 246. 
 Chdlukya, 214. 
 Chitra, 51. 
 
 Chitraratha, 68 (BdUikam). 
 chitrd, 247. 248 (series), 
 Chintdraanimitti, 217. 
 Chinas, 243. 
 Ch6da, 130. 
 ChiiUhopanishad, 165. 
 chela, 138. 
 Chelsika, 138. 
 Chaikit^neya, 138. 
 Chaikitdyana, 138. 
 Chaitrarathi, 68. 
 Chailaki, 133. 
 Chyavana, 134. 
 Chhagalin, 96. 99. 
 chhandas (Vedic text), 8. 14. 57. 
 60. 103. 176. 
 
 — (Sdma-Swmhitd), 63. 
 
 — metr., 25. 60. 145. 272. 
 Chliandasii^ 63. 
 Chhandogas, 8. 66. 81. 86. 121. 
 ehhanddbhdahd, 103. 
 chhandmat, 216. 
 
 Chhagaleya, 96. 102. 155, 'fma, 
 
 96. 
 ChhiEgeyas, 96. 
 Chhdndogya-Brdhmaifa, 69. 
 Chhdndogyopanishad, 70 ff. 155. 
 Jaganmohana, 283. 
 Jatdpatala, 60. 
 ■Tatfikarna, 265 med. 
 JaDaka,'33. 53. 68. 76. 123. 124. 
 
 127. 129. 132. 135. 193. 237. 285. 
 
 286 (Mb six teachers). 
 janaha {prajdpati), 76. 
 
 — sapta/rdtra, 76. 
 Janamejaya, 34. 123. 125. 131. 134. 
 
 135. 136. 186. 
 JantCrdana, 303. 
 japamdld, 307. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 337 
 
 Jamadagni, 162, 315. 
 
 Jayatlrtha, 42. 
 
 Jayadeva, 210 (date of). 
 
 Jayabhata, 319. 
 
 Jayaratha, 322. 
 
 JayarsSma, 143. 
 
 Jay^ditya, Jay^pida, 227. 322. 
 
 Jar£[sanidha, 98. 
 
 Jalada, 150. 
 
 JdtaJea, astr., 240. 260. 
 
 JdtaJeas, Buddh., 284. 293. 301. 326. 
 
 jdtajcarman, 19. 102. 142. 
 
 jdti, l6l. 
 
 JStlikarnya, 138. 139. 140. 143. 
 
 Jdnaki, 130. 
 
 JihilsL, 71. 130. 132. 134. 163. 185. 
 
 Jdrbsfli, 143 (Smriti). 
 
 Jdbdlopanishad, 163. 164. 168. 
 
 jdmitra, 255 (Greek), 
 
 jituma, 254 (Greek). 
 
 Jishnu, 259. 
 
 jiva, 162. 
 
 Jivagosv^min, 169. 
 
 Jivala, 133. 
 
 Jiva^rmaQ, 260. 
 
 jiiiia, 254 (Greek). 
 
 jeman, 240. 
 
 Jainas, 214. 217. 236. 244. 293. 
 
 29s ff. 
 Jaimini, 56-58 (Grihya). 65 [Sd- 
 
 mav.). 184. 189. 239 ff. (phil.). 
 
 — BMrata, 57. 189. 
 
 — SMra, 240 (astr.). 322. 
 Jaiminiya, 65. 240.. 316. 317. 
 
 — nydyamdZdvutara, 241. 322. 
 Jaivali, 71. 
 JndnabJidshira, 253. 
 Jndnayajna, 91. 94, 
 JyoHrmd-dhliarana, 201. 260. 261. 
 
 266. 
 Jyotisha, 25. 30. 60. 61. 153 (Aran- 
 
 yaka°). 249. 258. 316. 
 jyau, 254 (Greek). 
 Takshan, 133, 
 Taksha^iM, 185. 
 Tanddlakshai!,a-SAt/ra, 83. 84. 
 tad and tvam, 162. 
 Tadevopanishad, 1 08. 155. 
 taddhita, 144. 
 tantra ceremonial, 167. 208. 209. 
 
 265. 282. 310. 
 
 — gramm., 227. 229. 
 
 — 'text-book,' 229 (term taken to 
 Java). 265. 266. 
 
 taraiA, 263 (Arabic). 
 ta/rka, 158. 244. 
 
 tarHn, 244, 
 
 TalavaJcdJfa-Brdlimana, 316. 
 Talavakdras, 74. 
 taili, tasdi, 263. 264 (Arabic). 
 TdjiJea {-S'dstra), 263 (Arabic). 
 Tdndam (purdnam), 76. 
 TWin, 61 (gr.), 243. 
 TOndius, 70. 
 Tdi}dya, 66 ff. 74. 133. 
 tdpasa, 129. 138. 
 °tdpaniya, "tdpini, 167 ff. 
 Tdrdkopanishad, 163. 164. 168. 
 •Tirandtha, 248. 293. 300. 309. , 
 Tdlavyintanivfcin, loi. 
 tdvuri, 254 (Greek). 
 tin, 144. 
 
 tittiH, 87 (partridge). 
 Tittiri, 41. 87. 88. 90. 91. 
 Tipitaka, 292. 293. 294. 
 Tirimdira, 3. 
 tishya, 248. 
 tlksknadanshtra, 167. 
 Tutdta,. "tita, 241. 
 Tura, 120. 131 (K^vasheya). 
 Turamaya, 253. 274. 
 turmhha, Turuahka, 220. 291. 
 tmlyahdla, 12. 129. 
 Teiovindiipaniskad, 165- l?'- 
 Taittirlya, 81. 87, "yakas 102. 162 
 (^yahe). 317 (Prdt). 
 
 — Samhitd, 88 ff. 108. 248. 
 
 — "yd/ranyaka, 92-94. 238. 240. 
 
 249- 303- 
 
 — "yopanishad, 93. 94. 
 taukskika, 254 (Greek). 
 Taut^tika, °tita, 241. 
 Taulvali, 53. 
 
 trayi vidyd, 8. 45. 121. 191. 
 Trasadasyu, 68. 
 Trikdnda, 227. 
 trikona, 255 (Greek). 
 Tripitaka, 292. 
 tripundravid/ii, 171. 
 Tripuropanishad, 171. 
 Tripwyupanishad, 161. 162. 
 Tribhdshywratna, 103. 
 Tribhuvanamalla, 214. 
 Tri^tilanka, 62. 
 tretd, 113. 159. 
 Traitana, 36. 
 tvam and tad, 162. 
 Daksha, 326 [Smriti). 
 Dandin, 213. 232. 
 Dattaka, 196. 
 Dadhyauch, 128. 149. 
 Dantidurga, 203. 
 
 Y 
 
338 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 dampatl, 38. 
 Darianopanishad, 171. 
 dnriapiirnamiUau, loi. 
 DaiakumJira, 'charila, 206. 213. 250. 
 
 276. 
 dasat, 63. 124. 149. 
 Baiatayl, 83 (oomm.). 
 daiatayl, plur. daiatayyai, 32. 
 
 82. 
 Daiapurusham-rdjya, 123. 
 Da^ar&pa, 231, 232. 
 Daswrathajdtaka, 293. 
 Daha/rasutta, 293, 
 Ddkshdiyana, 227. 228. 
 Dfikshi, Ddkshiputia, 218. 228. 
 DSnava, D^nu, 302. 
 D^lbhya, 85 (JPwHMshta). 143 (gr.). 
 ddsaka, 36. 
 Dflsa^arman, 55. 
 digmjayas, 141. 
 Dinniga, 209. 245. 
 Divoddsa, 269. 
 dindra, 229. 304 (denanus). 
 Dipavansa, 288. 
 Duhshanta, 125. 
 durvdha/rd, 255 (Greek), 
 Durga, 33. 41. 42. 63. 
 Durgasinha, 226. 
 DurgS, 138, 159. 
 ditshkrita, 87. 
 Dushtaritu, 123. 
 drikdi^a, 255 (Greek). 
 driiya, 319. 
 Drishadvati, 67. 102. 
 Deva, Devayijiiika, Sri Deva, 141. 
 
 142. 
 Devaki, 71. 
 
 Devakiputra, 71. 148. 166. 169. 
 devajanavidas, 121. 
 devajanamdyd, 124. 183. 
 DevatddAydya, 74. 75. 
 Devatrilta, 54. 
 Devadatta, 160. 
 Devap^la, 317. 
 Devarijayajvan, 41. 42. 
 Devasvdmin, 260 (astr.). 
 Devipi, 39. 
 
 Devyupanishad, 154. 170. 171. 
 °ddiya, 79. 
 Daivata, 85. 
 Daiv^pa, 125. 
 doshapati, 151. 318. 
 dyuta, 255 (Greek). 
 Dyauahpitar, 35. 
 
 Dramida, DravidSchsIrya, 322. 323. 
 dramma, 229 (Greek). 
 
 drdha, 79. 
 Dr^vidae, 94. 
 
 DrSlhyiyana, 53. 79- 84. 282. 
 Drona, 185. 271. 
 dvdpara, 113. 151. 243. 
 Dv^rak^neLtbayajvao, 324. 
 Dvivedaganga, 72. 104. 139. 
 Dvaipiyana, s. Krishna. 
 Dhanamjaya, 232. 
 DhanapatiB<iri, 243. 
 DJummiieda, 271, 282. 
 Dhane^vara, 214. 
 DhanTantari, 200. 265. 266. 269. 
 Dhanvin, 80. 
 Dhammapada, 293. 
 dhammapdUydydni, 292. 294. 
 Dharma, 176. 276 ff. 
 
 — ^dstrat, 159. 276-283. 
 
 — Sdstra-samgrdha, 325. 326. 
 
 — Satras, 19. 85. loi. 277 ff. 
 
 317- 
 dharmas, roi. 
 Dharma, "putra, °rS[ia, 186. 
 dharmdchArya, 56. 
 Dlidtu-taramginij 227. 
 Dhdtu-pdtha, -pdrdyana, 230. 
 Dhdnamjayya, 76. 77. 82. 
 Dh&ri, 201. 202. 
 Dhivaia, 204. 205. 207. 
 Dhdmrdyaiia, 141. 
 Dh<irtasv£liniii, 79. loi. 
 Dhritarfishtra (Vaichitravirya), 39. 
 
 90. 114. 
 
 — king of the K^is, 125. 
 Dhydnamnd/ipanishad, 165. 
 Dhydnibuddhas, 298. 
 dhruvasya prachalanam, 98. 
 ndkta (nahld), 264, Arab. 
 nakshatras, 2. 90. 
 Nakshatra-Kalpa, 153. 
 nakstiatradaria, 112. 
 Nagnajit, 132. 134. 
 Nachiketas, 157. 
 
 nata, 196. 197. 199. 
 
 — Siitras, 197. 199. 271. 273. 
 Nanda, 205. 117. 223. 
 Nandikesvara-Upapurdna, 171. 
 NeuuId, 68. 
 
 Naraka, 188. 
 nartaka, 199. 
 Nala, 132. 189. 
 Naiodaya, 196. 
 Navaratna, 201. 
 Navabasta, loi. 
 Nika, 123. 
 Ndgas [ndga), 273. 302. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 339 
 
 Ndgdnanda, 207. 
 
 Niigdrjuua, 224. 265. 287, 288 (date 
 
 of). 
 Nslge&, 223, 227. 
 Njjgoiibhatta, 223. 224. 226. 
 NAtakas, 196. 
 ndtya, 197. 200. 
 
 — S'd.$tra, 231. 
 ndtfaka, 205. 281. 
 Nddamndiipanishad, 165. 
 N^ada, 72 (Ved.). 153 (^tA. Par.). 
 
 264 (astr.). 272 (etym. and mus.). 
 
 — panchardtnx; 239. 
 
 — S'ikshd, 61. 272. 
 
 — {-Smriti), 278. 326. 
 N^rasinha, 167, "mantra 167. 168. 
 N&i[yana, 94. 123 (puruaka). 160. 
 
 166. 167. 303. 
 
 N^rfyana, $4 (00mm., several IS.'b), 
 
 58 (do.). 141. 158 £f. (Upan.). 
 Ndrdyanlyopanishad, 93. 157. 166. 
 
 167. 169. 171. 
 Ndrdyanopanishad, 166. 1 70. 
 ndrasaiisis, 93. 121. 122, 127. 
 nigama, 8. 
 
 Nigama-PariMshta, 25. 142. 153. 
 Nigha^tus, 25. 41. 153 {Ath.). 
 
 227. 
 njiya, 167. 
 Nichhivis, 276. 
 
 niddna, 81 (Ved.). 301 (Buddb.). 
 Niddna-Siitra, 24. 62. 77. 81. 82. 
 Nimi, 68. 
 Kirapeksha, 325. 
 Nirdlambopanishad, 1 62. 
 Nirukta, °kti, 25. 26. 41. 42. 44. 
 
 59. 62. 88. 160. 167. 216. 217. 
 
 235- 
 Niiriti, 152. 
 nirbhuja, 49. 
 nirvdnam, 161 (JraAmo). 308 
 
 (Buddh.). 
 Ni^umbha, 206. 
 Kishadhas, 132, 
 NisMdas, 77. 
 
 Niti-S'dstras, 2io. 271. 282. 
 Nllakantha, 188. 1 89. 
 Nilamata, 326. 
 NUamdropanishad, 1 71. 
 Nrisinha, 167. 168. 
 — tdpaniyopanishad, 167. 168. 
 Nrisinha, loi comm., 168. 
 Negas, Naigeyas, 65. 85. 
 Naigeya-S6,tra, 84. 
 Naighantukas, 25. 85. 
 Naid£iuaB, 81. 
 
 Naimi^iya, 70. 
 
 Naimisha, "shiya, 34. 45. 54. 59. 
 
 68. 185. 
 naiydyika, 245. 
 Nairuktas, 26, 85. 
 Naishadldya, 196. 232, 
 Naishidha, 132, 
 Nydya, 159. 237. 242. 245. 246. 
 
 — chintdmani, 246. 323. 
 
 — dariana, 244. 323. 
 
 — Sitra, 85. 235. 245. 
 Fakshilasvilinin, 244. 245. 
 Panchatantra, 206. 212. 215. 221. 
 
 229. 240. 266. 267. 291. 301, 
 pamchadaiarcha, 122. 
 Pailchaparna, 267. 
 pa/iichamdirama, 164. 
 panchalakshana, igo. 
 Panchaviida-Brdhmaifa, 66 fif. 
 Panckavidhi-Satra, 83. 84. 
 Panchavidheya, 83. 84. 
 Panchaiikha, 235. 236. 237. 284. 
 Panchasiddhdntikd, 259. 
 Panchjtlas, 10. 90. 114. 115. 125. 
 
 135- 136. 
 PafioMlaohanda, 50. 315. 326. 
 panchdZapadavritti, 34, 
 Paflohslla Bdlbhravya, 10. 34. (erot. 
 
 Pafioh"). 
 paOchikd, 44. 
 patala, 59. 82. 84. 
 Pataipchala, 126. 137. 223. 236. 
 
 237. 284. 
 Patamjali, 87. 219 ff. 231. 277. 321 
 
 (gr.'). 
 
 — 137. 223. 231. 237 ff. (pWl.). 
 °patha, 117. 
 
 padakdra, 91. 
 
 padapdtha, 23. 33. 43. 49, 60. 
 
 63- 
 padavritti, 34. 
 Paddhatis, 55. 59. 85. 102. 141. 
 
 142. 143. 145. 317. 
 Padma-Purdna, 191. 
 Padmayoni, 153. 
 panaphard, 255 (Greek), 
 Para, 68. 125. 
 Paramahansa, "hansopanisJiad, 163. 
 
 164. 
 Paramidi^vara, 257. 
 parameivara, 162. 
 Parft^ara, 44. 143. 185. 252. 260 
 
 (astr.). 265. 266 (med.). 
 
 — {-Smriti), 278. 280 {kighu and 
 vriddha). 326.J 
 
 Parikshit, 136. 
 
34° 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 Paritta, 293 (Buddb.) . 
 pa/ribluishdi, loi. 140. 144. 222. 
 
 227. 
 PcmbTuUihmduiek'ha/ra, 226. 
 pwrivrdjdka, 112. 147. 164. 
 PwnMshtas, 60. 62. 69. 75. 84. 85. 
 
 loi. 107. 142. 146. 149. 150. 
 
 1-51. 153. 317.. 
 PcurUesha, 119 (Satap. Br.). 
 Parthavas, 4. 188. 318. 
 pwrvam., 66 (Sdniav.). 124 (Atliar- 
 
 van, &o.). 146. 149. 183. 184. 
 Pai^u, 3 (.4). 
 °paKydydni, 292. 294. 
 , Pavana, 272. 
 Pa^upati&rman, 54. 
 Pahlavaa, 187. 188. 318. 
 Piinehar^tra, 238. 
 PdncJumdhya, 83. 
 Pimch^a, 267. 
 pdmchMi, 34 (gr.). 232 {riti). 
 P^chiilya, 138. 
 P^nchi, 133. 
 Pitaliputra, 217. 237. 251. 258. 
 
 290. 295. 
 PdtimoJckhagutta, 293. 326. 
 p&tha, 22. 49. 103. 
 Pdnini, 3. 8. 12. 15. 26. 41. 57. 59. 
 
 61. 77. 82. 87. 216-222. 232. 239. 
 
 241. 242. 245. 249. 266. 281. 
 
 318. 321. 
 ■^- posterior to Buddha, 222. 305. 
 
 — posterior to Alexander, 221. 
 222. 
 
 Pdniniyd Sihshd, 61. 272. 
 P^davas, P^dus, 39. 98. 114. 115. 
 
 126. 135. 136. 137. 185. 186. 
 
 286. 
 pdnditya, 129. 161. 
 pdthona, 254 (Greek). 
 pddas, 161 (the four). 
 pdpmandmra, 318. 
 Psira^avya, 3. 
 Pitrasikas, 188. 220. 
 P&askara, 66. 142. 143. 318. 
 Pdr^s^rinas, 143. 305. 
 Pdrdiariya, 305. 
 P^r^arya, 143. 305 {BUhsTiu-Si- 
 
 tra). 
 
 — (Vy&a), 93. 184. 185. 240. 243. 
 Pilr^aryiya^ia, 243. 
 
 Pdrikshi, 284. 
 
 Pstrikshitas,°tiyas, 34.125. 126. 135. 
 
 136. 186. 
 Piirikshita, 136. 
 Pitli, 288. 292. 293. 295. 
 
 Ffisupata, 238. 
 Pingala, 46. 60. 231. 256. 
 pitaJia, 290. 304. 309. 
 pindapitriyajna, 19. 55. 
 Pindopamshad, 171. 
 pitdmaha, 303. 
 pitritarpana, 55. 
 Pitribhdti, 141. 
 pitrimedha, 108. 198. 
 
 — Siitra, 84, 245. 
 pitta, 266. 
 
 PippaUda, 153. 159. 160. 164. 
 Piyadasi, edicts of, 6. 76. 178. 203. 
 
 252. 253. 292. 295. 
 pUu, 229 (Persian). 
 purUchaU, °M, III. 112.' 
 °putra, 71. 131. 285. 
 Punarvasu, 265. 
 Pwdnas (Ved.), 24. 72. 93. 121. 
 
 122. 124. 127. 159. igo. 
 
 — 190. 191. 195. 206. 207, 213. 
 215. 282. 
 
 purdnam Tdndam, 76. 
 purdmaprolcta, 12. 129. 
 Purukutsa, 68. 125. 
 purusha, 162 (the three ^.'s, phi!.). 
 237. 238. 
 
 — N^iiyana, 123. 124. 
 
 — medha, 54. 87. go. 108. iii. 
 
 — srikta, 65. 108. 155. 
 purushottama, 168. 
 Purdravas, 134. 
 purohita, 150. 
 
 Puli^, 253. 2S4- 2SS- 257- 258. 
 
 Pushkaxa (?), 262. 
 
 Pushpa-SHtra, 82. 84. 
 
 Pashyamitra, 224. 
 
 pdtd (filthy) vdch, 180. 
 
 Ptirna, 98. 
 
 PHrvamimdnsd, 239 ff. 
 
 Prithddakasv^min, 259. 262. 
 
 prishtha, 67. 
 
 peM;ha, 319. 
 
 Paingalopanishad, 171. 
 
 Paingi, Faingin, Paingya, 14. 41. 
 
 46. 56. 81. 90. 130. 134. 184. 
 Paingya, the, 46. 
 Paitdmahasiddhdnta, 258. 
 °paippale, 158. 169. 
 Faippaldda, 146. 150. 152. 1 60. 
 Paila, 56. 57. 58. 
 Paiddchabhdshya, 91. 
 paiidchi hhdshd, 213. 
 Potala, 285. 
 Pauliiasiddkdnta, 253. 254. 258. 
 
 259. 260. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 paulhasa, 129. 
 Paushkarasddi, 102. 285. 
 Paushkaldvata, 268. 
 Paushpindya, "piiiji, 240. 
 Pauskyacliarita, 318. 
 prakriti, 177. 237. 
 prachalanam, 98. 
 Prajipati, 76. 97. 137. 151. 244. 
 prajnapti, a. S'S/rya", 297. 
 Pranavopanishad, 154. 165. 
 Pratijnd-PaHMshta, 102. 106. 115. 
 
 119. 
 Pratithi, 56. 
 pratibuddha, 129. 138. 
 Pratishth^na, 214. 
 Pratikdra-Satra, 83. 
 Pratilidrya, 299 (Buddh.). 
 pratrinna, 49. 
 Pratyaihijndidstra, 322. 
 prapdfhdica, 63. 64. 6$. 66. 76. 79. 
 
 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 89. 97. 117. 
 
 MS- 151- 
 PrabodhMCliandrodaya, 207. 241. 
 Framagamda, 79. 
 pramdiM, 28. 244. 
 prayogas, 102. 
 pravachana, 12. 83. 8$. 131. 
 ^navarakhanda, loi. 240. 
 pravarddhydya, 142. 317 (^(i<A.). 
 pravargya, 108. 119. 139. 
 Prav^hana, 71- 
 pravrdjaka, 285. 
 prawdjiidj 281. 305. 
 pravrdjin, 129. 
 Pra^^ntar^ga, 141. 
 prahia, 89. ICX3. loi. 102. 
 Prahiopanishad, 58. 158 ff. 
 Prasthdnabheda, 267. 271. 275. 
 prdhrita, 177. 
 
 — prakdia, 227. 
 Pr&hyas, 34. 132. 178. 
 Prdchya-Kathas, 88. 
 
 — Pd&chdlishu, 34. 
 Prdndgnihotropanishad, 1 54. 1 62. 
 Prftipiya, 123. 
 Prftibodhiputra, 112. 
 PrdiUdkhya - S4tras, 23. 26. 59 
 
 (iJijv. ). 83 {Sdmav.). 102 (Taat.)- 
 143 (74;as.). 151 (Ath.). 
 
 Prdtitheyi, 56. 
 
 prdmdnas, 28. 
 
 prdyaschitta, 84. 118. 1 39. 
 
 prekshanaha, 319. 
 
 Proti, 123. 
 
 PraudTM-Brdhmana, 74. 
 
 Pldkshdyana, 53. 
 
 341 
 
 . . I, IIS- 134. 136. 
 
 phdlgunyas, 248. 
 
 Phit-Satras, 226. 
 
 Phulla-SAtra, 83. 
 
 iaiism^a, 236. 
 
 °badha, °vadha, 196. 198. 
 
 hcmdku, 12. 124. 
 
 Babhru, 56. 
 
 Barku, 133. 
 
 Balabhadra, 26 1. 263 (schol.). 
 
 Balar^ma, 192. 
 
 iahuvachana, 124, 
 
 Bahvriohas, 8. 66. 86. 89. 121. 122. 
 
 Balivricha-Pa/riUshta, 62. 
 
 Bdhvricha-Brdhmana, 100. 
 
 Bifna, 99. 204. 205. 207. 213. 214. 
 
 232. 319. 
 B^dai4yana, 53. 140. 239 ff. (phil.); 
 
 266 (med.). 
 
 — (astr.), 260, 
 
 — Satra, 163. 
 
 B^dari, 139-140. 241. 242. 
 B^bhravya, 10. 34 (Ved.). 267 
 
 (erot.). 
 Bdrhaddaivata, 72. 
 Bdrhaspatya, °Siiti-a, 246. 
 BSlakrishna, 91. 
 idlakhilyai (s. vdla°), 97. 
 Bdla-Bhdrata, 190. 
 BiMki, SI. 
 Bdverujdtaka, 3. 
 B^hkala, 313. 
 Bflhikabhiahaj, 269. 
 BEthikas, 33. 96. 132. 178. 218. 
 B^hlika, 68. 
 Bilhana, 214. 232. 319. 
 Bukka, 42. 
 Budila, 133. 134. 
 huddha (awakened, eulightened), 
 
 27. 167. 241. 284. 
 
 — kistra, 241. 
 
 Buddha, 3. 56. 98. 102. 138. 184. 
 199. 200. 217 ff. 236. 241. 256. 
 273. 283 ff. 
 
 — date of Buddha's death, 21 7- 
 220. 287-288. 302. 
 
 — posterior (?), or prior, to Piiniiii, 
 3. 222. 305. 
 
 — lived in the S&tra period, 290. 
 301 f. 
 
 — wife, of, 318. 
 
 — and Krishna, 326. 
 Buddhagayi[, 228. 273. 
 Buddhaghosha, 292. 293. 326. 
 BuddhadfEsa, 267. 
 Buddhasdsana, 236. 
 
342 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 ivddhopdsaJca, °siM, 305. 
 '\Jbudh, 27. 
 
 — 'mth.praU, 129. 
 Budha, 278; 282 (jur.), 
 Brihaj-jdiaJca, 259. 260. 
 — jdbdla, 16^. 
 Brihat-Kathd, 213. 
 
 — Smiihitd, 203. 204. 259 £f. 271. 
 274. 
 
 Brihad-Atri, 269. 
 
 — Aireya, 269. 
 
 — Arcmyaha, 70. 71. 72. 73. 
 100. 119. 127 ff. 139. 155. 285. 
 286. 
 
 — uttaratd/pvnl, 169. 
 
 — devoid, 24. '33. 41. 62. 81. 88. 
 314. 316. 
 
 : — TdjnavalJeya, 2S1. 
 Brihadratha, 97. 98. 
 irihant, 280. 
 
 Iirihan-ndrdy<mopanishad,ls6. t^J. 
 '166. 
 
 — Manu, 279. 
 Brihaspati, 153 (Atharran). 
 
 — Smriti, 278. 280 {laghu). 326. 
 Baijav^pi, 266 (med.)., s. Vaija- 
 
 v^pa. 
 Bodha, 236. 
 Bodh£iyaDa, 322. 323. 
 Bodhisattvas, 298. 301. 307. 310. 
 Bauddhas, 108. 158. 
 Baudh^yana, 100. lOI. 102, 112. 
 
 114. 317. 324. 
 
 — Dharma, loi. 102. 278. 
 Brahmagupta, 61. 202. 258 ff. 
 hrahma-chdrin, 28, 112. 123. 164. 
 — jdlasMra, 300. 
 hrahmanya, 166. 
 Brahmadatta, king, 13S. 286 (three). 
 
 — SS (comm.). 
 irahman, etymology of, 11. 
 
 — neut., prayer, formula, II. 149. 
 Divine Power, 6. 127. 161, 
 
 171. 242. 
 
 — masc. Supreme God, 6. 97. 151. 
 158. 161. 166. 167. 170, together 
 with Vishnu and Eudra, 97. 161, 
 with Vishnu and Siva, 167. 180. 
 
 chief priest, 123. 149. 
 
 Brahma-pura, 169. 
 
 — bandhu, 78. 79. 112. 141. 
 
 — mimdnsd, 240. 241 S, 
 
 — vid, 161. 
 
 — mdyopanisJiod, 164. 
 
 — vindiipanishad', 99. 158. 165. 
 
 — veda, 149. i5o._ 
 
 Brahmava{v(wta-Purdr).a, 191. 
 
 — Siddhdnta, 258. 
 
 — Siitra, 70. 96. 242 ff. 308. 322. 
 
 — hatyd, 125. 126. 
 
 BrahmStnandi, 322. 323. 
 
 Brahmopanishad, 160 ff. 
 
 brdhma SphutoMdhdnta, 259. 
 
 Irdhmana, neut. (appellative : ' ex- 
 planation,' 'section of a text'), 
 76. 93. 117. 124. 152. 
 
 work, 8. 11-15. 76. 159. 176. 
 
 239. 240. 
 
 — masc. III. 161 (nature of a Br.), 
 176 (two languages), 180 (no 
 mlechhet), 276. 
 
 — svara, 176. 
 hhdkti, 238. 
 Bhagadatta, 188. 
 Bhagavati-SAIffa, 297. 
 Bhagavadgitd, 169. 235. 238. 242, 
 Ihagavant, 121. 153 (Atharvan), 
 
 160 (Afigiras), 169 {maliddevah, 
 
 284 (Buddha, &o.). 
 Bhagiratha, 193. 
 Bhataghati, 293. 
 Bhatta, 42. 90. 91. 241 ; s. Bh^s- 
 
 karamilra. 
 Bhatta-nSrtiyana, 207. 
 Bhatti-kdvya, 196. 
 Bhattoji Dikshita, 89. 226. 
 Bhattotpala, 242. 243. 258. 259 ff. 
 Bhadatta, Bhadanta, .260. 
 Bhadrab^husv^min, 297. 
 Bhadrasena, 286. 
 Bharata, son of Dultishanta, 125. 
 
 — plur. 114. 125. 
 
 — 231 (rhet.). 272 (mus.). 
 BharatasvSlmin, 42. 65. 79. 
 Bharadvilja, 31. 162. 163 {Ufan.). 
 
 — (Kapishthala), 265. 26S (med.). 
 Bhartyiyajna, 141. 
 Bhartrihari, 209. 210. 
 
 Bhallii, 95. 
 
 Bhava, 178. 
 
 hhavant, 121. 284. 
 
 Bhavabhiiti, 159. 200. 205. 206. 
 
 207. 319. 
 Bhavasvdmin, 42. 79> 91- loi. 
 BhasmajdJbdliX^ 163. 
 Bhiigavata, 238. 
 
 — Purdna, 191. 
 Bhsigavitti, 130. 
 BhSguri, 62. 246. 
 Bh^ditiiyana, 77. 
 BhAmaM, 322. 
 Bharata, 56. 176. 185. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 343 
 
 BMradvilia, 100-102 (Taitt.). 139. 
 
 140. 158 {Ath.). 271 (Droua ?). 
 BhAradvdjiya-&&tra, loo. 317. 
 Bhdravi, 196. 319, 
 BhdrucM, 323. 
 Bhdrunddni admdni, 170. 
 Blisirgava, 150. 153. 159 (Vaidar^ 
 
 bhi). 
 hhdrgava, 250 (astrologer). 
 Bh^UaTins, 14. 62. 81. 95. 134. 
 Bh^Uaveya, 95. 126. 134. 
 BlidMam/upanishad, 95. 154. 164. 
 bhdshd, 57. 103. 144. 176. 177. 180. 
 Bhdshika-S'&tra, 68. 95. 
 hhdshiha-seara, 176. 
 Bhdshya, 56. 57. 144. 176. 
 Bb&a, Bh£[saka, 205. 
 Bh^Lskara, 229. 261 S. 
 
 — mi^ra, 42. 90. gi. 94. lOI. 103. 
 171. 
 
 Bhdsvatika/rana, 261. 
 
 hhikshd, 123. 305. 
 
 hhikakdka, 305. 
 
 ihikshdchara, 'charya, 129. 305. < 
 
 hhikshu, 'kshutfi, 284. 285. 305. 306. 
 
 327- 
 
 — S-iltra, 143. 252. 305. 306. 
 Bhilla, 259. 
 
 Bhimasena, 125. 135- 
 Bhiahma, 39. 
 hhatagana, 98. 
 hhHrja, 227. 263. 314. 317. 
 Bhrigu, S3. 153. 241. 
 
 — plur., 148. 240. 241. 
 
 — valU, 94. 154. 156. 157. 
 Bhela, 265. 270 (med.). 
 hhaihsha, 305. 
 bhaishajyas, 152. 
 hhogandtha, 42. 
 
 Bhoja, 195. 202 (more than one). 
 — "king of Dhdrf, 201. 202. 203. 
 215. 228. 230. 261. 319. 
 
 — 269 med. 
 
 — vnddha", 269 (med.). 
 Bhojadeva (reputed author of the 
 
 Sarasvatikanthdiharana), 210. 
 Bhqjaprabamdha, 215. 
 hhrashta, 226. 
 makwra, dolphin, 252. 
 makha, 127. 
 Magadha, 79, 98. 112. 147. 269 
 
 (weights). 286. 287. 290. 292. 
 
 295. 296. 
 
 — vSLsin, 112. 
 Magas, 148. 
 Maghaav^min, 80. 
 
 maghds, 248. 
 
 Mankha, 319. 
 
 Manju^ri, 298. 
 
 martj, 140. 
 
 Manikai'^ik^i, 1 68. 
 
 mandala, 31. 32. 34. 43. 64. 82. 
 
 Mandlika, 49. 
 
 Matsya, 95. 
 
 Mathur^, 169. 
 
 Madras, 126. 137. 223. 
 
 Madrag^ra, 75. 
 
 madhu, 128. 
 
 Madhu-kdnda, IJ. 127 ff. 138. 
 
 — Brdhmana, 128. 
 Madhuka, 130. 
 Madhusldana, 166. 
 
 — Sarasvati, 267. 27 1. 
 Madhyatd^ini, 167. 169. 
 Madhyadefe, I02. 106. 115. 133. 
 madhyama, 269 (Atri). 280. 
 
 — kdnda, 118. 119. 
 mobdhyamikd, 89. 
 MadhyavalU, 157. 
 manwii, 264 Arabic. 
 Manittha, 260 (also with n). 
 Manu, 134. 211 (and the tish). 277 
 
 (avdyambhuva). 
 
 — Code of, 20. 73. 102. 143. 183. 
 188. 238. 244. 249. 266. 276 ff. 
 
 — Sutra, 99. 
 
 mantra, S {— Veda). 176. 
 
 — rdja, 167. 168. 
 Mammata, 204. 232. 322. 
 {cuiura) Maya, 253. 254. 260. 275. 
 Marichi, 244. 
 
 Maru, 188. • 
 Maruts, 40. 43. 
 markata, 211. 
 Malayade^a, SS- 
 mallaka, 206. 
 Mallindtha, 195. 209. 
 Mafeka, 75. 76. 83. 84. 
 Mah^kanha, 304. 
 Mahik&ia., 209. 
 
 MahdkausMtaki-BrdJimana, 47. 
 maTidjdbdla, 163. 185 (Mah^j.). 
 Mah^deva, 45. 123. 169. 
 Mah^deva, 100. loi. 141 (comm.). 
 
 262 (astr.). 
 mahdn dtmd, 238. 
 
 — devah, no. 123. 
 mahdndga, 302. 
 Mah^ntoa, 293. 
 Mahdndrdyanopannliad, 154. 
 Mahdparinibbdma, 326. 
 Mahd-Brdhmana, 74. 138. 
 
344 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 Mahd-BMrata, 4. 24. 34. 37, 39. 
 
 45- 56- S7- 72- 98. 114- 13s. 136. 
 
 176. 184-190. 205. 206. 210. 243. 
 
 250. 279. 282. 301. 318. 324. 325. 
 Mahdihdshya, 219-226. 231. 238. 
 
 321. 
 Hahd^meni, 93. 
 Mahdydna-S&tras, 98. 299. 
 Tiiahdrdja, 138. 
 Mahdvanta, 292. 293. 
 Mahdvdkyamuktdvdli, 155. 
 mahdviahnu, 167. 
 Mahivira, 296 (Jain.). 
 Makdviracharitra, 207. 
 Mah^vrishas, 70. 147. 
 Mahdvaipulya-SHiras, 298 ff. 
 Mahdvyutpatti, 248 (Buddli.). 
 mahdidla, i6l. 
 mahdirwmarfa, 217. 
 Mahidslsa, 48. 70. 
 mahishi, 114. 
 
 Mahidhara, 104. 107 ff., 116. 141. 
 Mahendra, 291. 292. 295. 
 Mahe^vara, 262 (astr.). 
 Mahopanishad, 154. 166. 
 Mahoragas, 302. 
 H^adha, 79. 
 
 — de^iya, 79. 112. 141. 
 mdgadha, iii. 112. 138. 147. 287. 
 mdgadhi, 232 {riti). 
 
 — language, 295. 296. 297. 
 MdgJuirledvya, 196. 
 IKndavya, 61. 
 'm&oAdiki.ya.-aa,, 53. 
 Mdndaki-Sihshd, 49. 61. 
 Mdndtikeya, 49. 56. 112. 
 MdmiUhyopamisJiad, 161. 164. 167. 
 
 168. 298. 
 M^tridatta, loi. 
 Mdtrimodaka, 144. 
 mdtrd, 160 (om). 161. 
 MfithaTa, 134. 
 MiCdravati, 126. 
 Midri, 126. 
 M^ulliaya, 41. 42. 47. 116. 235. 241. 
 
 243. 245. 246. 262. 
 
 — deva, 42. 
 Miidhavas, 95. 166. 
 Mstdhuki, 133. 134. 
 mddhuri, 91. 
 
 mddhywtndina, southern, 106. 
 Midhyaipdinas, 10. II. 105 ff. 134. 
 
 139. 144. 
 Midhyaipdin^yana, 105. 
 Mddhyaipdini, 106. 
 Mddbyamika, 309. 
 
 tf£[dhyamikas, 224. 
 Mstnava, 134 (^ary^ta). 
 M^nava, MsCnavas, 91. 102. 280. 285. 
 Mdnava-Grihya, 20. 102. 278. 317. 
 Mdnava-Dha/rmaidatra, 20. 277 ff- 
 Mdnasdra, 275. 
 M^nutantavyau, 134. 
 Mdya-mata, 275. 
 mdyd, 284. 
 Mdyddevi, 284. 
 M^ra, 151. 303. 364. 
 Mdricaiideya-Purdrui, 191. 206. 
 MdlaU-mddhava, 207. 320. 
 M^lava, 201. 214. 
 M^lavakilcMrya, 259. 
 Mdlavikd, . Mdlavilalgnimitra, 204. 
 
 207. 
 mdldmantra, 167. 
 Mihaki, 153. 
 Mdhitthi, 134. 
 M^hisheya, 103. 
 MitdJahard, 107. 281. 
 Minanda, 306. 
 Milinda, 306. 
 Mihira, 261. 
 mimdmaka, 102. 240. 
 Mbmdmd, 121. 159. 235. 239 ff. 
 mimdnsd-krit, 240. 
 — SMra, 140. ^39. 
 mukdrind, 263 (Arabic). 
 mukdviid, 263 (Arabic). 
 Mukula, 322. 
 
 mukta, 167. 34 (and amukta). 
 MuhtUeopanUlmd, 155. 
 Mugdhibadha, 226. 
 Mufijastinu, 55- 
 MutibhaB, 134. 
 Mudimbha, 134. 
 
 MundoJcopanishad, 58. 158 ff. 240. 
 Mundopaniihad, 164. 
 mutkaiSa, 264 (Arabic). 
 Mud/rdrdhihasa, 207. 
 muni, 129. 
 
 Ttiunthahd, 264 (Arabic). 
 m/uharta, 151. 
 MtijaTants, 147. 
 mUrdhdbhishikta, 224. 225. 
 Mma-SHtra, 297 (Jain.). 
 mtigorfpAa, 264 (Arabic). 
 MricUmkaH, 200, 205, 206. 207. 
 
 250. 305. 320. 
 mrityumrityu, 167. 
 MrUyvlanghanopanishad (?), 170. 
 MrityvldngdUi, 'IdnffOXa, 170. 
 Meghadata, 198. 204. 208. 209. 
 
 302. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 345 
 
 Mentha, 319. 
 
 Mediidtithi, 52. 
 
 Meru, 93. 
 
 ■mesh&rama, 255 (Greek). 
 
 Maitra, 91. 97. 
 
 MaUra-SMra, 99. 
 
 MaitrSiyanlputra, 71. 98. 285. 
 
 Maitrdyaiiiyaa, 88. 91. 99. 102. 
 
 Maitrdyani-Samhitd, 314. 317. 
 
 Maitrdyanopamshad, 52. 96 ff. 155. 
 
 165. 285. 
 Maitreya, 97. 98. 99. 
 MaitreyS, 56. 99. 
 
 — Ysljnavalkya's wife, 127. 
 MainSga, 93. 
 
 mohsha, i6i. 
 MoggalUna, 230. 
 maundy a, 237. 306. 
 Mauda, 150. 
 Maudgalya, 123. 
 Maudgalydyana, 199. 
 mauna, 129. 
 ■s/ndedth, 180. 
 Yakshas, 98. 273. 302. 303. 
 Yakshavarman, 217. 
 Yajuh-Sariihitd, 9. 10. 
 Yajun/eda, 8. 45. 85 ff. 121. 123. 
 127. 164. 184. 
 
 — "ddmndye, 144. 
 yajus, 8. 9 s. kiMa. 
 yajus-veraes, number of the, 121. 
 yajndvahirna, 68. 
 yajnopavlta, 161. 
 
 yati, 327 (dirama). 
 YaMridramatadipikd, 322. 
 Yati^vara, 323. 
 Yama, 36. 
 
 — Smriti, 325. 
 TanMadbkiya, 193. 
 yaTnayd, 264 (Arabic). 
 YamuQ^, 68. 
 
 Yavana, 178. 187. 188. 214. 220 ff. 
 251. 252. 253. 260 (astr.). 268. 
 
 — priya, 220. 
 
 — vriddhfe, 243. 
 yavandni, 220 ff. 
 yavanikd, 207. 
 Yavani, 220. 252. 
 Yavane^vara, 258. 
 yavaneshta, 220. 
 Yasoga (!), Ya^ogopi, 141. 
 Ya^omitra, iii. 
 Yask^h, 41. 
 
 ydjusTii, 163. 
 
 Ydjnavalldya-lcdnda, 127. 129 ff. 
 137- 138- 
 
 YdjnavaZMni hrdhmandni, 95. 129. 
 
 130. 
 Ystjnavalkya, 33. 104. 120. 123. 
 124. 126. 127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 
 132. 138. 143. 144. 163. 168. 236. 
 237 ff. 285. 
 
 — 'b Code, 107. 122. 143. 205.215. 
 250. 278. 280 ff. 323. 325. 326. 
 
 ydjniha, 240. 
 
 Ydjnikadeva, 141. 
 
 YdjniM- Vpanishad, 93. 94. 
 
 ydtumdae, 121. 
 
 ydtnika, 309. 
 
 ydtrd, 260 (astr. ). 324. 
 
 YSdvas, 3. 
 
 Yitmunamuni, 323. 
 
 Yavana, 220. 
 
 Ydaka, 25. 26. 32. 33. 39. 41. 42. 
 
 44. 46. 57, 59. 61. 62. 81. 82. 85. 
 
 88. 90. 91. 128. 140. 142. 176. 
 
 184. 2i6. 217. 236. 277. 
 yugas (the four), 70. 113. 151. 159. 
 
 190. 243. 247. 277. 
 
 — quinquennial, 113. 247. 
 Yuga-Purdna, 214. 251. 
 Yudhishthira, 185. 186. 188. 286. 
 
 — 's era, 202. 260. 
 
 Yoga, 96. 137. 156. 158. 160. 162. 
 163. 165. 166. 235. 236 ff. 265. 
 285. 
 
 S. ; 
 
 — tattva, 165. 
 
 — S'dstra, 297 (Jain.). 
 
 — Hkhd, 165. 
 
 — SAtra, 223. 237. 
 Yogitchitra, 309. 
 yogin, 161. 239. 
 yaudha, 78. 
 rahta, 78. 
 
 Raghuvania, 195. 196. 208. 302. 
 
 318. 
 Bangandtha, 258. 
 ratnas (the nine), 200, 228. 261. 
 Eatndkara, 319. 322. 
 Batha-Satra, 275. 
 Kabhasa, 227. 
 Satndvali, 204. 320. 
 Sahasya, 119 {S'atap. Br.). 
 Kdjagriha, 199. 287. 295. 
 Rdjataramgini, 213. 215. 219. 220. 
 
 223. 225. 287. 320. 
 rdjaputra, 95. 
 rdjasAya, 54. 
 B£[jastamb£iyana, 120. 
 B^ja^ekhara, 207. 
 B^elyana, 53. 
 
346 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 B^^yaniputra, 71. 77. 79. 
 BfCn^yaniyas, 65. 79. 84. 
 Rita, 61. 
 Rslma, 135. 168. 192. 
 
 — as incarn. of Vishnu, 194. 
 
 — AnpatasTini, 134. 
 Bimakrislma, 85. 143. 
 Bimachandra, 59. 
 Rdmatdpaniyopanishad, 168. 
 Eimatlrtha, 323. 
 Edm£[Duja, 168. 322. 
 Rdm^Lnanda, 168. 
 
 .Bdmdyana, 4. 37. 89. 98. 135. 188. 
 191 ff. 205. 206. 214. 250. 324. 
 Bimila, 205. 
 Bivana (coram.). 42. 66. 
 SdvandbadAa, 196. 
 B^u, 73. 249. 250. 
 Rdhula, 250. 
 
 rUis (varieties of style), 232. 
 Buchidatta, 323. 
 
 Eudra, 6. 40. 97. no. 123. 159. 
 170. 171. 238. 303. 
 
 — by the side of Brahman and 
 Vishnu, 97. 161. 
 
 — jdbdia, 163. 
 Budrata, 322. 
 Budradatta, loi. 
 Budraskanda, 80. 84. 
 Sudmihihajdbdla, 163. 
 Rudropanuhad, 154. 170. 
 ripa (coin), 205. 
 Buyyaka, 322. 
 Benodiksbita, 142, 
 revtUi, 248. 
 Bev^ 123. 
 Bomaka, 253. 324. 
 
 — pura, 253. 
 
 — siddhdnta, 253. 254. 258. 260. 
 romakUpa, 253. 
 
 Eaumyas, 253. 
 Bauhinityana, 120. 
 °lahshdna, 265. 
 Lakshmanasena, 210. 
 
 — era of, 210. 
 
 Lakshmldhara, 262 (astr.). 323. 
 Lagaditch^rya, 61. 249. 
 Lagata, °dha, 61. 249. 258. 
 laghu, 280. 
 
 — Atri, 269 (med.). 
 
 — Aryahhata, 257. 
 
 — Kaumudi, 226. 
 
 — JdtaJca, 78. 260. 
 
 — Jdbdia, 163. 
 
 — Pardiara, 280 (jur.). 
 
 — BrOuupati, 280 (jur.). 
 
 — S'aunaha, 280 (jur.). 
 Lamki, 78. 
 
 Lalita- Vistara, 199. 236. 256. 286. 
 
 291. 299. 300. 
 Lighula, 250. 
 I4ta, 76. 258. 
 Ldtika, 76. 
 Ldti (riti), 232. 
 
 Lityiyana, 53. 68. 76-79. 84. 105. 
 LidMahirja, 61. 258. 
 Libukdyana, 53. 241., 
 L^mak^yana, 53. 77. 241. 
 
 — °nina, 14. 99. 
 Likhita, 326 (Smriti). 
 ZAnga-Purdna, 191. 
 Lichhavis, 276. 277. 285. 
 lipi, 221. 
 
 lipid, 255 (Greek). 
 
 LUdvati, 262 (astr.). 
 
 leya, 254 (Greek). 
 
 loiya {lanjaka), 246. 
 
 LokapraMAa, 321. 
 
 Lokiyatas, 246. 
 
 Logdyata, 236. 
 
 lohita, 78. 
 
 Laukikshas, 96. 
 
 Laukiyatikas, 246. 
 
 Laugiksbi, 99. 102. 103. 139. 317. 
 
 — Sat/ra, 99. 
 Taisesiya, 236. 
 
 varda, 41. 71. 120. 127. 128. 129 ff. 
 184. 
 
 — nartin, 113. 
 
 — BrdJimana, 42. 74. 75. 79. 84. 
 Yajra, 260. 
 
 vajrwiudeha, 167. 
 
 Vajrcistlchyupanishad, 162. 
 
 Vadavi, 56. 
 
 Vatsa, 3. 
 
 Vada (?), 148. 
 
 vaditar, 180. 
 
 Tayomidyd, 265. 
 
 Varadattaj 55. 
 
 Varadardja, 76. 83 (Ved.). 226 (gr.). 
 
 Vararuchi, 200. 202. 230 (Vikrama); 
 
 83 (PhvUa-Satra), 103 (TaUl. 
 
 Prdt.), 206. 227 (Prdkrita-pra- 
 
 kdia), 223 {vdrtt.), 227. 230 (lex.). 
 Vardhamihira, 78. 1 60. 200. 202. 
 
 203. 204. 243. 254. 259 ff. 268. 
 
 275. 279. 
 Varuna, 35. 188. 
 varga, 31. 
 varna, 18. 161. 
 
 — Sutras, 227. 
 varnikd, 246. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 347 
 
 Vardhamilna, 226. 
 Varaha, 217. 
 Valabhi, 196. 214. 256. 
 Valibandha, 198. 207. 
 ■ °valU, 93. 157. 
 Valhika, 123. 134. 
 Valhikas, 147. 
 Va^a (-U^Inaras), 45. 
 Vasishtha, 31. 37. 53. 79. 123. 162. 
 
 — mldhdnta, 258. 
 
 — Smriti, 326. 
 Vasugupta, 322. 
 Vasus, 303. 
 
 vdkovdkya, 121. 122. 127. 
 Vdhyapadiya, 225. 226. 
 Tdgbhata, 269 (med.). 
 
 — vriddha", 269. 
 vdch, 74. 176. 234. 
 
 — {patd), 180. 
 VEichaknavi, 56. 129. 
 ViCchaspatimi^ra, 246, 322, 
 vdja, 104. 
 
 vdjapeya, 54. 
 V^ja^ravasa, 157. 
 vdjasani, 104. 
 
 V^jaaaneya, 104. 128. 130. 131. 
 Vdjasaneyaka, 100. 105. 144. 
 Ydjasaneyi-Samhitd, 317 (oonelu- 
 sion in the forty-eighth ^tA. Par). 
 Vdjasaneyins, 81. 105. 
 vdjin, 104. 
 Vdficheivara (?), 101. 
 vdta, 266. 
 Vdtslputra, 71. 138. 285. 
 
 — «triyas, 138. 
 Vdtsya, 139. 140. 267. 
 VsitsyStyana, 244. 245 (phil.), 266. 
 
 267 (erot.), 323. 
 
 — Faiichaparna, 267. 
 VddhAna (?), ico. 
 vdnaprastha, 28. 164. 
 Ydmakakshdyana, 120. 
 Vdmadeva, 31. 315. 
 
 Vstmana, 84 (Sdmav.), 226. 227 
 
 (gr.), 232 (rhet.), 322. 
 Vdmarathyas, 140. 
 V&Jtnasi, 162. 163. 
 vdrdharnantra, 168. 
 VdnmyupanisJiad, 94. 
 T^rkali, 33. 123. 
 V^rkalinas, 33. 
 vd/rttikas, 222. 225. 
 Vslrshaganya, 77. 
 Vitrshna, 133. 
 Vdrshnya, 133. 
 Vilrshyityani, 53. 
 
 vdlakhilya-s^htas, 31, 32. 
 V^leyaa, 140. 
 
 Viilmiki, 102 {Taitt.). 191. 194. 
 VSahkala, 14. 32. 52. 56. 62. 313 f. 
 
 — Aiiii, 52. 
 
 Vdshhalopanishad, 52. 155. 
 Vfeava, 303. 
 Vdsavadattd, 213. 214. 
 Vfeishtha, 123. 
 VSsishthaa, 123. 
 
 Vdsishiha - Saira, 79. 278. 282 
 
 {Dhcn-ma). 
 V&udeva, 51. 137. 166. 168. 169. 
 
 185. 
 Vstsudeva, 143 (comm.). 
 vdsudevaka, 185. 
 Vdstuvidyd, 275. 
 vdhika, A. bdh°. 
 Vikrama, 200. 201. 202. 204. 20$. 
 
 228. 260. 261. 266. 269. 
 
 — era of, 201 ff. 260. 319. 
 
 — charitra, 200. 201. 214. 267. 
 Vihramdnkacharila, 214. 
 Vikrami[ditya, 200. 201. 202. 205. 
 
 228. 
 Vikramdrka, 214. 
 Viohitravirya, 39. 
 vichhinna, 226. 
 vijaya, 140. 141. 
 Vijayanagara, 42. 
 Vijayanandin, 258. 
 vijita, 141. 
 
 Vijn^nabhikahu, 237. 
 Vitdna-Kalpa, 153. 
 °md, 121. 
 vidagdha, 33. 212. 
 Vidagdha, 33. 129. 
 Vidvi{,\), 148. 
 Videgha, 134. 
 Videha (a. Kosala-Videhas), 10. 33. 
 
 S3. 68. 123. 129. 137. 193. 285. 
 Viddha4dlab/uinjikd, 207. 
 Vidyd, 121. 122. 127. 265. 270. 
 
 — {trayi), 8. 45. 121. 191. 
 Vidy^nagara, 42. 
 Vidy^ranya, 42. 54. 97. 170. 
 Vidvanmanoranjini, 323. 
 
 vidhi {Sdma°}, 74. 83 (five vidJds), 
 
 — (Ved.), 244. 
 
 vidhdna, 33, s. Rig°, Sdma°. 
 
 mdheya, 244. 
 
 Finayo(Buddh.), 199. 290. 292. 304. 
 
 308. 326. 
 Vin^yaka, 47 (comm.), 62 (do.). 
 Vindhya, 51. 99. 283. 
 mpldvita, 226. 
 
348 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 291. 
 Vivasvant, 144. 
 Yivdhwpatala, 260. 
 vU, vUas, 18. 38. 
 
 — pati, 38. 
 VMikhadatta, 207. 
 Vi^^la, 48. 
 vUesha, 245. 
 
 Vi^vakarman, 275 ("rmiyasilpa). 
 VUvakarmaprahdia, 275. 
 Vihakosha, 205. 
 Vi^vanitha, 244 (phU.). 
 Vihavada, 148. 
 
 Vi^vtoitra, 31. 37. 38. 53. 315. 
 
 162 {Upan.). 2JI {Dhanwveda). 
 Vi^vei^vara, 169 (00mm.). 
 VisAavidyd, 265. 
 Vishnu, 6. 42. 97. 126. 127. 156. 
 
 165. 166. 167. 168. 171. 190. 194. 
 
 284. 
 
 — with Rudra and Brahman, 97. 
 161. 
 
 — with Siva and Brahman, 167. 
 180. 
 
 — Code of, 170. 278. 282. 317. 325. 
 Vishnugupta, 260. 
 Vishnuohandra, 258. 
 Vishnuputra, 59. 
 Vishnu-Pwdna, 58. 142. 191. 230. 
 
 318. ^ 
 Vishnuyasaa, 82. 
 Vishvaksena, 184, 
 vijagamUa, 262. 
 ViratharUra, 214. 
 Vlrabhadra, 253. 
 vis0M, 199. 319. 
 Vuttodaya, 293. 
 vritti, °htra, 91. 222. 
 Vritra, 302. 
 vriddha, 280. 
 
 — Atreya, 269 (med.). 
 
 — Garga, 153. 253. 
 
 — Gautama, 205. 281 (jur.). 
 
 — dyumna, 136. 
 
 — Pajrdiaira, 280 (jur.). 
 
 — Bhoja, 269 (med.). 
 
 — Manu, 279. 
 
 — Ydjnavalhya, 2ii, 
 
 — Vdgihata, 269 (med.). 
 
 — Sviruta, 269 (med. ). 
 
 — Hdrita, 269 (med.). 
 vrihcmt, B. irihant. 
 Vriahni, 185. 
 Tenisamhdra, 207, 
 Vet^labhatta, 200. 
 VeUlapaMhaviniati, 214. 215. 
 
 Veda, 8. 23. 58. 144. 176. 244 
 (triple). 
 
 — idkhd, 93. 
 
 Veddngas, 25. 60. 145. 159. 258. 272. 
 veddthwrva, 149. 
 
 Veddnta, 48. 51. 158. 161. 162. 240. 
 245. 
 
 — kaustviJuiprdbhd, 323. 
 
 — sdra, 323. 
 
 — SAtra, 51. 158. 159. 235. 241. 
 245. 322 f. 
 
 Veddrthayatna, 315. 
 
 Teyagdna (!), 64. 
 
 veil, 255 (Greek). 
 
 vaihritd, 177. 
 
 Vaikhinasa, 100. 275. 3 1 7. 
 
 Vaichitraviiya, 90. 
 
 VaijavSpa, "p^yana, 142. 
 
 Vaitdna-Sitra, 152. 
 
 vaidarbha (riti), 232. 
 
 Vaidarbhi, 159 (Bhirgava). 
 
 Vaideha, 276. 
 
 Taidyaka, 265. 270. 
 
 Yaibh&hika, 309, 
 
 vaiydJcara^as, 26. 
 
 Vaiy^ghrapadiputra, 106. 
 
 Vaiyiighrapadya, 106. 
 
 Taiydsaki, 184. 
 
 Vaiiamp^yana, 34. 41. 56. 57. 58. 
 
 87. 89. 93. 13s. 184. 
 Vaiseshika, YaMeahikas, 236. 237. 
 
 245- . 
 Vaiieshi^a-S'&tra, 216. 244. 245. 
 Yai^raTana, 124. 
 Yaishnava (Makha), 127, 
 Yodha, 236. 
 Yopadeva, 226. 
 Tydkarana, 25 {Aiiga). S3. 
 
 — sdirdm, 216. 
 
 — Buddii., 300. 
 vydkri, 176. 
 vydJchydna, 122. 127. 
 Vyighrapild, 106. 
 Yyighramukha, 259. 
 Yyiidi, Vyilli, 227. 228. 321. 
 vydvakdnki, 176. 
 
 Yydsa, Pstr^arya, 93, 184. 185. 
 240. 243. 
 
 — B^arilyana, 243. 
 
 — father of 6uka, 243. 
 
 — author of the 6aiaru,driya (!), 
 III. 
 
 — 62 (teacher of Shadguru^ishya). 
 
 — {Smriti), 283. 326. 
 
 — SAtra, 243, 
 Yraja, 169. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 349 
 
 vrdtinas, 78. 147. 
 vrdtya, 68. 78. no. 112. 141. 146. 
 147. 180. 
 
 — gana, 196. 
 
 — stoma, 67. 78. 80. 
 
 Saka, 187. 220. 260. 285. 291. 
 
 — era, 202. 203. 260 ("Ma, °bh<i- 
 pak^la, Sakendrak^la), 261. 262. 
 
 — nrip^nta, 259. 260. 
 ^akuntald, 125. 
 
 -^ (drama), 206. 207. 320. 
 
 Sakti, 171. 289. 310. 
 
 ^aktiptirra, 260 (astr.). 
 
 sahra, 303. 
 
 iamkara, 303 (epithet of Eudra). 
 
 Samkara, 42. 48. 51. 56. 58. 70. 72. 
 
 73- 74- 94-96- "6. 119, 127. 131. 
 
 139. 157. 159. 160 ff. 188. 241. 
 
 242. 243. 267 (erot.). 308. 
 
 — mi^ra, 244. 
 
 — vijaya, 243. 
 
 Sa«akardnanda, 52. 163. 164. 170. 
 Sanku, 200. 
 
 ^ankha, 58. 275. 278. 282 (Dliarma). 
 
 326 (Smriij). 
 iatapatlia, 117. 1 1 9. 
 ^atapatha-Brdhmana, 116 ff. 276. 
 
 284. 318. 
 iSataruSriya, 108. in. 155. 169. 
 
 170. 
 ^atdnanda, 261. 
 Sat^nika, 125. 
 
 S'atrumjaya Mdhdtmya, 214. 297. 
 iani, 98. 
 ^amtanu, 39. 
 ^abarasvimin, 241. 322. 
 Sabala, 35. 
 
 Sabddnuidsoma, 217. 227. 
 Sambtiputra, 71. 
 samyuvdka, 313. 
 Saryto, 1 34. 
 ^arva, 178. 
 Sarvavarman, 226, 
 Saldtura, 218. 
 
 sastra, canon, 14. 32. 67. 121. 
 ^^kat^yana, 53. 143. 151. 152. 217. 
 
 222. 226. 
 Sdkaptini, 85. 
 ^iikala, 32. 33. 62. 313. 314. 315. 
 
 — (S^gala), 306. 
 
 S^kalya, 10. 32. 33. 34. £0 (two Sdi- 
 kalyas). 56. 143 (gramm.). 163. 
 
 — Vidagdha, 33. 129. 
 Sdhalyopanishad, 163. 167. 
 ^dkiiyanina, 33. 96. 120. 133. 137. 
 
 285. 
 
 ^dki[yanya,97.98. 133.137.285. 308. 
 
 idkta, 171. 
 
 6ikya, 33. 133. 137. 185. 235. 285. 
 
 306. 
 idleyaJMlcshu, 78. 
 
 ^dkyamuni, 56. 98. 137. 268. 309. 
 kdkhd, 10. 91. 158. 162. 181. 
 ^dnkMyana, 32. 52 ff., 80. 313. 314. 
 
 — Grikya, 176. 313. 315. 316. 
 
 — Pa/riiishta, 62. 
 
 — Brdlimwn.a, 44-47. 
 
 — Siitra, 44. 
 
 -^ Arcmyaka, 50. 132. 
 SStyStyana, 53, 95. 102. 128. 
 
 — ° ndka 100. 249. 
 
 — °ni, °nins, 14. 77. 81. 83. 95. 
 96. 120. 243. 
 
 ^^dilya, 71. 76. 77. 78. 80. 82. 
 120. 131. 132. 
 
 — 143 l^mriti). 
 
 — Sitra, 238. 243. 
 
 — "lySiyajia, 53. 76. 120. 
 idta/pathikas, 85. 
 ^^mtanaTa, 226. 
 Sdiiti-Kdlpa, 153. 
 iffdmbavyagnhya, 316. 
 ^imbuvis, 14. 81. 
 idnibhava, I7I> 
 Sdriputra, 285. 
 S'driraka-Mimdnsd, 240. 
 Sdmgadeva, 273. 
 ^£iTngadhara(-/'a[2c27i<iti), 210. 
 S^lamk^ana, 53. 75. 
 S^laink^anaj^, 96. 
 S^laipk^yanins, 14. 77. 96. 
 S^lamki, 96. 218. 
 SiMturiya, 218. 
 S^Uiv^haua, 202. 214. 260. 
 SStlihotra, 266. 267. 
 
 S'a^hd, 25. 60. 61. 145.272. 313. 317. 
 
 — valli, 93. 94. 155. 
 Siras {Upanishad), 170. - 
 SiMditya, 214. 
 
 6iMUn, 197. 
 Hlpa, 198. 
 
 Siva, worship of, 4. 45. no. in. 
 156. 157. 165. 169. 190. 208. 209. 
 
 303- 3°7- 
 
 — developed out of Agni (and 
 Eudra), 159. 
 
 — beside Brahman and Vishnu, 
 167. 180. 
 
 S'ivatantra, 275. 
 Sivayogin, 62. 
 
 S'ivasatnkalpopanishad, 108. 155. 
 Sihikrandiya, 193. 
 
35 o 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 SUupilaladha, 196. 
 
 aina, 114. 
 
 sUrtadecas, 303. 
 
 ■y/hi, 178. 
 
 Suka, son of Vy&a, 184. 243. 
 
 iukra (Venus !), 98. 250. 
 
 — yajHiAshi, 104. 
 ivhriya, 104. 107. 144. 
 
 — Icdmda, 104. 
 
 hiMdni yajAAshi, 104. 131- 144- 
 
 ^ungas, 33. 
 
 iuddJia, 167. 
 
 |unakas, 33. 34. 
 
 Sunab^epa, 47, 48. 55. 
 
 Kumbha, 206. 
 
 S'ulva-S'&tra, loi. 256. 274. 317. 
 
 324- 
 iuthrut, 302. 
 
 ^lidra, 18. 77. III. 112. 276. 
 Sudras, 147. 
 
 ^Adraka, 205. 206. 207. 214, 
 iHnya (zero), 256. 
 ^tilap^i, 166. 
 
 Sesha, 101 (00mm.). 237 (phil.). 
 ^aityiyana, 53. 
 Sail^i, 134. 197. 
 Sail^Uinas, 197. 
 iaiMsha, ill. 196. 197, 
 Saivdbh&shya, 323. 
 ^aivaidstra, 322. 
 Sai^iris, 33. 
 ^ai^iriya, 32. 33. 
 Saufi^yani, 75. 
 ^auchiyrikshi, 77. 82. 
 Saunaka {Rigv.), 24. 32-34. 49. 54. 
 
 56. 59. 62. 85. 143- 
 
 — {Ath.), 150. 151. 158. 161. 162. 
 165. 
 
 — (Mahd-Bhirata), 185. 
 
 — Indrota, 34. 125. 
 
 — Svaidiyana, 34. 
 
 — Grihya, 55 [Rigv.). 
 
 — vartita, 158. 162 {Ath.). 
 
 — laghu°, 280 (Smriii). 
 ^aunakiyas, 1 58. 162. 
 SaunaMyd, 151. 
 S'aunakopanishad (?), 164. 165. 
 iaubhikas, 198 ; s. saubhikas. 
 ^aubhreyas, 140. 
 6aulvS[yana, 53. 
 ^yd,parnas, 180. 
 
 iyena, 78. 
 
 'Jiram, 27. 
 
 iramana, 27. 129. 138. 
 
 srwmand, 305. 
 
 Sri Anauta, 141. 
 
 ^rikantha Siv&hjirya, 323. 
 Sri Ch^pa, 259. 
 Sridatta, 141. 
 ^ridharadfisa, 210. 
 Sridharasena, 196, 
 ^riniv&a, 42. 
 Srinivitsad^sa, 322. 323. 
 Sri Dharmaoilbha, 196. 
 Sripati, 54.58. " 
 Sriparinkusaniitba, 323. 
 Srlmaddattopamishad, 164. 
 Srirara, 320. 
 Sri VyStghramukha, 259. 
 Srishena, 258. 
 Sri Harsha, king, 204. 207. 
 
 — 196 (Naishadhachar.). 
 Sri Hala, 145. 
 
 \/iru, 15. 
 
 Srutasena, 125. 135- 
 
 S'nai, 15. 17. 68. Si. 96. 149 (plur.), 
 
 159. 164. 
 ireshtha, 126. 
 
 ^raika-SAtras, 16. 17. 19. 52. 
 Sleshman, 266. 
 iloka, 24. 69. 70. 72. 73. 74. 83. 
 
 87. 97. 99. 103. 121. 122. 123. 
 
 125. 127. 
 Sviknas, 132. 
 Svetaketu, 51. 71. 123. 132. 133. 
 
 137. 267 (erot.). 284. 
 Sveti^vatara, 96. 99. 
 
 — "roparmhad, 96. 155. 156. 161. 
 165. 169. 236. 238. 
 
 Shatchdkropanishad, 168. 
 ShattrirUat (Smriti), 280. 
 ShadaUti (Smriti), 280. 
 Shadguru^ishya, 33. 61. 62. 83. 
 Shaddarianachintanikd, 322. 
 SlwdbhiahdcTumdrikd, 227. 
 Shadmnia-Brdhmatjia, 69. 70. 
 Shannuvati (Smriii), 280. 
 Shatktitantra, 236. 
 shashiipatha, 117. 119. 
 mm = samvat (but of what era?), 
 
 141. 202. 203. 
 samvat era, 182. 202. 203. 
 Samvarta (Smriti), 278. 326. 
 Samvarta4rutyupanishaid, 154. 164- 
 samskdra, 102 (the sixteen s.). 
 
 — (gramm.), 144. 
 
 — ganapaM, 143. 
 samskntahhdshd, 177. 
 samsihd, 66. 67. 
 
 SamJiitd (Ved.), 8. 9. lo. 14. 22-24, 
 60. 
 
 — (phil.), 75. 
 
SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 351 
 
 Samhitd{3&tr.), 259. 264. 265. 275. 
 
 — Kalpa, 153. 
 
 — pd^Ao, 43. 49. 
 
 — 'topanishad, 34 {Brdhmarj.cC). 74. 
 75 (5(«ma«.). 93- '55 (Taitt.). 316 
 ((S(imai>. ). 
 
 Sakalddhiicdra, 275 (arch,), 
 iamkhydtar, 235. 
 Sa/mgUajratndTca/ra, 273. 
 samgraha, 119 (;S"atapaiAa - ^rdft- 
 
 mano). 227 (gramm.). 
 samy«(ina, 313, 314. 
 Satthitanta, 236. 
 sa«ra, 66. 76. 79, 80. 139, 
 sattrdyana, lOl. 
 Satya, 260 astr. 
 Satyakdma, 71. 1 30. 132. 134, 
 Satyavdha, 158, 
 SatydsMdha, 100. lOl. 102. 
 SadEinird, 134. 
 SaduHikarruknrita, 210. 
 Saddharmapuiidwrika, 299. 300. 
 Sanatkum&a, 72, 164 ; — 275 (ar- 
 
 oMt.). 
 SanaDdan^cMrya, 237. 
 samdhi, 23. 
 
 samnipdta, 248 (Buddh.), 
 Samm/ydsopamishad, 164. 
 Saptarshi (Smriti), 280. 
 Saptcdataka, Saptaiati, 83. 211. 
 
 232. 
 gopto s^ir-^fi/i, 250 (249). 
 samdnam ci, 131. 
 Sarndsa-Sarrihitd, 259. 
 sampi'addya, 152. 
 samrdj, 123. 
 SarasvatI, 74 (V^ch), 
 
 — vydkarana, 227. 
 
 Saraavatl, 4. 38. 44 (Indus). 53. 
 67. 80. 102. 120. 134. 141. 
 
 — kanthdbharana, 210. 232. 
 sarga, 190. 196. 214. 
 sarjana, 233. 
 
 sarpa, 302. 
 
 soJ'jJffli'idas, 121, 
 
 Sarpavidyd, 124. 183. 265. 302. 
 
 Sa/rvada/iiamasartigraha, 235. 241. 
 
 322. 
 sarvainedha, 54- 
 Sarvdnukrarrumi, 6l, 
 sayfrfmnina, 305. 
 Sa/rvopanishatsdropanishad, 162, 
 Salvas, 120. 132. 180. 
 sahama, 264 (Arabic), 
 S^gala, 306. 
 S^keta, 224. 251. 
 
 S^rnkfitySlyana, 266 (med.). 
 
 Sdriikhya, 96. 97. 108. 137 ((S'aiajp.). 
 158. 160. 165-167. 235-239. 242, 
 244, 246. 284. ff. 306. 308. 309. 
 
 — tattva-pradipa, 322. 
 
 — pravacliana, 237. 
 
 — pravaehana-Siitra, 237. 239, 
 
 — ihikshu, 78. 
 
 — yoga, 160. 166. 238. 239. 
 
 — sdrd, 237. 
 
 — S-Atra, 237. 239. 245. 
 Sdmkhyah (Gautamah), 284. 
 S^mkhydyana, 47. 
 Ssttpjiviputra,, 131. 
 
 Siiti, 75. 
 
 Ssttyayajna, °jni, 133, 
 
 SdtrEijita, 125. 
 
 S^pya, 68. 
 
 Sdmajdtaka, 300 (Buddh.). 
 
 Sdmatantra, 83. < 
 
 sdman, 8. 9. 64. 66. 121. 
 
 — number of the sdmans, 121. 
 Sdmaydchdrika-Siitra, 19. 278. 
 Sdmalakshana, 83. 
 
 Sdmavidhi, 'vidhdna, 72. 74. 277. 
 Sdmavedd, 45. 63 ff. 121. 316. 325 
 {Odnas of). 
 
 — PrdtUdkhya, 316. 
 Sdma-Samhitd, 9. 10. 32. 63 ff. 313 
 
 (readings). 316. 
 Sdmastam, 275. 
 SEiyak^yana, 96. 120. 
 S^yak^yanins, 96. 
 S^ya^a, 32. 41, 42. 43. 46. 47. 48. 
 
 52. 65. 66. 68. 69. 72. 74. 91. 92. 
 
 94. loi. 139. 150. 
 Sdratiliasamgdha, 267 (med.). 
 Sdrameya, 35. 
 Sdrasvata, 226 (gramm.), 
 Sdrasvata pdtha, 103. 
 S^vayasa, 133. 
 Sdhityadarpcma, 231, 321. 
 Sinhdsanad'Ddinnsikd,200-202. 214. 
 
 320. 
 Siddhasena, 260 (astr.). 
 Siddhdnta, 253. 255, 258 ff. 269 
 
 (aatr.), 
 
 — kaumudi, 89. 226. 
 
 — Hromami, 261. 262, 
 Sit^, 135. '192. 193. 
 Sukany^, 134. 
 Sukhavati, 306.' 
 Suttanipdla, 293, 
 mtyd, 66. 67. 
 Suddman, 68. 
 Sudyumna, 125, 
 
352 
 
 SANSKRIT INDEX. 
 
 suTtaphd, 25s (Greek). 
 
 Sundaritdpaniyopanishad, 171- 
 
 suparna, 314. 
 
 Suparmidliydya, 171- 
 
 Suparni, 134. 
 
 Suprabhadeva, 196. 
 
 Subandhu, 189. 213. 245. 267. 319. 
 
 Subhagasena, 251. 
 
 SubhadrS, 114. 115. 1 34. 
 
 Snbhdshitaratruikara, 320. 
 
 Sublidshitdvali, 320. 
 
 Sumanasantaka (?), 208. 
 
 Sumantu, 56. S7- S8. 149. 
 
 swra, 98. 302. 303. 
 
 Surdshtra, 76. 
 
 Sulabha, 56. 
 
 Sulabh^, 56. 
 
 Su^rayas, 36. 
 
 stdrut, 266. 
 
 Su^ruta, 266 ff. 324. 
 
 — vriddha, 269. 
 stikta, 31. 32. 124. 149. 
 iiita, III. 
 
 SAtras, 8. 15 {etymol.} cJihandovat); 
 29. 56. 57. 216. 285. 290. 
 
 — 127. 128 (passages in the Brdh- 
 numas). 
 
 — 290. 292. 296. 298 ff. (Buddh.). 
 
 — 128. 161 («. = Brahman). 
 sUtradhdra, 198. 275. 
 Siirya, 62 (comm.). 
 
 Siirya, 40 (god). 
 
 — prajnapti, 297 (Jain.). 
 
 — Siddhdnta, 61. 249. 257. 258. 
 
 — "opanithad, 154. 170. 
 {sapta) si/rydh, 250 (249). 
 S&rydrwna (SmrUi), 280. 
 Sjiajayas, 123. 132. 
 Settiandiui, 196. 
 Saitava, 61. 
 
 Saindhavas, 'viCyanas, 147. 
 tobha, °nagaraka, 198. 
 Soma, 6. 63 (god). 
 
 — (sacrifice), 66. 107. 
 Somadeva, 213. 319. 
 Som^anda, 322. 
 Some^vara, 273 (mus.). 
 Saujfita, 285. 
 
 Sauti, 34. 
 Sauti^ntika, 309. 
 taulrdmani, 107. 108. 118. 139. 
 savihilcas, 198 ; s. iaiibkScai. 
 Saumdpan, 134. 
 SaumiUa, 204. 205. 
 Sanramidhdnta, 258. 
 savlabhdni Brdhmaadnj, 56. 95. 
 
 Sau^ravasa, 105. 
 Sau^rutap£^havds, 266. 
 Skanda, 72. 
 
 — Purdna, 191. 205. 
 SkandasT^min, 41. 42. 79. 
 ShmdopanisJiad, 171. 
 ■\/skdbh, stdbh, 233. 
 tb&pa, 274. 307. 
 
 stotra, 67. 
 stoma, 67. 81. 
 stauhhika, 63. 
 sthavira, 77. 102. 305 
 sthdnaka, 89. 
 SpandaMstra, 322. 
 Sphujidhvaja (?), 258. 
 Sphuta-Siddhdnta, 259. 
 Smwradakana, 208. 
 Snui/rta^S^tras, 17. 19. 34 {Saun.). 
 
 loi. 
 Smriti, 17. 19. 20. 81. 
 
 — S'dstras, 20. 84. 143. 276. 
 Snighna, 237. 
 SvaraparibhdsJid, 83. 
 avddhydya, 8. 93. 144. 
 «V(iiMm^a, 309. 
 
 °svdmin, 79. 
 Sviyambhuva, 277. 
 Svaidiiyana, 34. 
 Mansanddopanishad, l6j. 
 Hansopanishad, 164. 165. 
 hadda, 264 Arabic. 
 Hanumant, 272. 
 j^anumanndto^a, 203. 
 Haradatta, 89. 278. 
 Hari, 166 (Vishnu). 303 (ludra). 
 Hari, 225. 226 gramm. 
 ha/rija, 255 (Greek). 
 Sarivanki, 34. 189. 
 Hari^chandra, 184. 
 Earisv^min, 72. 79. 139. 
 Hariharami^a, 142. 
 6ri Harsha (king), 204. 207. 
 
 — 196 {Naishadhotchar.). 
 
 — chwnta, 205. 214. 319 f. 
 6ri Hala, 145. 
 halahhrit, 192. 
 
 Haldyudha, 60 (metr.), 196. 230 
 
 • (lex.). 
 
 hasa, 112. 
 
 hastighata, 1 17. 
 
 Bdrid/mviha, 88. 
 
 H^rita (E[f ishna), 50. 
 
 — 269 med. 
 
 — vriddha", 269 (med.). 
 
 — {Dhwrma), 278. 282. 325. 
 HiUa, 83. 211. 232. 
 
INDEX OF MATTERS. 
 
 ■35-3 
 
 Hdleyas, 140. 
 Hiistinapura, 185. 
 Sitopadda, 212. 
 hibuka, 255 (Greek). 
 Himavant, 51. 268. 
 himna, 254 (Greek). 
 Hiranyake^i, 100-102. 317. 
 — idkhiya-Brdhmana, 92. 
 Hirariyan^bha, 160. 
 Hute^aTe^a, 266. 
 Hiinaa, 243. 
 hridroga, 254 (Greek). 
 hetthd, 89. 
 hdayas, helavas, 180. 
 
 Hemachandra, 227. 321 (gr.). 230 
 
 (lex.). 297 (Jain.). 
 HeUr^ja, 215. 
 Jt£li, 254 (Greek). 
 Haimavati, 74. 156. 
 Hairanyanslbha, 125. 
 Hailih'ila, 185. 
 hotar, 14. 53. 67. 80. 86. 89. 109. 
 
 129. 149. 
 hard, 254 (Greek). 
 — S'dstra, 254. 259. 260. 
 hautraka, loi. 
 Hrasva, 112. 
 
 INDEX OF MATTEES, ETC. 
 
 AlyoKepois, 254. 
 
 Ahriman (and M&a), 303. 304. 
 
 Akbar, 283. 
 
 Albirtini, 60. 189. 201. 239. 249. 
 253. 254. 257-262. 266. 274. 323. 
 
 Alexander, 4. 6. 27. 28. 30. 179. 
 221. 222. 251. 
 
 Alexandria, 256. 309. 
 
 Alexandrinus (Paulus), 253. 
 
 Algebra, 256. 259. 
 
 Alkindi, 263. 
 
 'AfUTpoxAriis, 251. 
 
 Amulet-prayera, 208. 
 
 Amyntas, 306. 
 
 Avaijyli, 255. 
 
 Andubarius, 255. 
 
 Animal fables, 70. 211 ff., 301. 
 Antigonua, 179. 252. 
 AntiochuB, 179. 252. 
 Aplirodisius (?), 258. 
 'A(ppodLTri, 254. 
 Air6K\i/ia, 255. 
 ApoUodotus, 188. 
 Apollonlu8 of Tyaiia, 252. 
 Apotelesmata, 289. 
 Arabs : Arabian astronomy, 255- 
 257. 263. 264. 
 
 — Arabic astronomical terms, 263- 
 264. 
 
 — commercial intercourse of the 
 Indiana with Arabia, 220. 
 
 — Ai-abian figures, 256. 
 
 Arabs : medicine, 265. 270, 271. 
 
 — music, 273. 
 
 — philosophy, 239. 
 Archimedes, 256. 
 Arenarius, 256. 
 "Apijs, 254. 
 
 Arim, Arin, ooupole d', 257. 
 
 Aristoteles, 234. 
 
 Arithmetic, 256. 259. 
 
 Arjabahr, 255. 259. 
 
 Arkand, 259. 
 
 Arrian, 4. 106. 136. 
 
 Arsaoidan Parthians, 188. 
 
 Ars amandi, 267. 
 
 Asklepiada, oath of the, 268. 
 
 'AcTpamixla of the Indians, 30. 
 
 Atoms, 244. 
 
 Aux, augis, 257. 
 
 Avesta, 6. 36. I48 (Indian names of 
 
 its parts), 302. 
 — and Buddhism, 327. 
 Avioenna, 271. 
 Babrius, 211. 
 Babylon, 2. 247. 
 Baotria, 207 ; s. Valhika. 
 Bagdad, 255. 270. 
 Bali, island of, 189. 195. 208. 
 Bardeaanes, 309. 
 Barlaam, 307. 
 Bashkar, 262. 263. 
 Boo-iXeiis, Basili, 306. 
 Basilid s, 309. 
 
 Z 
 
354 
 
 INDEX OF MATTERS. 
 
 Basilis, 251. 
 
 Beast-fable, 211 ff. 301. 
 
 Bells, 307. 
 
 BengdU recensions, 194. 206. 208. 
 
 Bhabra missive, 292. 294, 295. 
 
 Bih^iL^l, 211. 
 
 Blessed, world of the, Jo. (73). 
 
 B6SSa, 309. 
 
 Boethius, 257. 
 
 Bpax/tofes, 28. 30. 
 
 Buddhism, Buddhists, 3. 4. 20. 22. 
 
 27. 78. 79. 99. III. 138. 151. 165. 
 
 205. 229. 236. 247. 276. 277. 280. 
 
 283 ff. 
 Buddhist nuns, 281. 
 Bundehesh, 247. 323. 
 Csesar, 188. 
 Castes, 10. 18. 78. 79. no. III. 161. 
 
 178. 287. 289. 290. 301. 306. 
 Ceylon, 192. 288. 291. 293. 295. 
 
 — medicine in, 267. 
 Chaldseans, aBtronomy, 248 (Xa- 
 
 rustr). 
 Chaos, 233. 
 Chess, 275. 
 Chinese lunar asterisms, 247. 248 
 
 (Kio-list). 
 
 — statements on the date of Ka- 
 nishka, 287. 
 
 — translations, 229 (Amara). 291. 
 300. 301 (Buddh.). 
 
 — travellers, s. Fa Hian, Hiuan 
 
 Xpi;/uiTiir/t6s (! KcxiS/io^os), 255. 
 Christian influences, 71. 189. 238. 
 300. 307. 
 
 — ritual, influence of Buddhist ri- 
 tual and worship on (and mce 
 verxC), 307. 
 
 — sects, Indian influence on, 239. 
 
 309- 
 Chronicon Paschale, 255. 
 Clemens Alexandrinus, 306. 
 Coin, 205 (nfoakit), 229 (din&a). 
 Coins, Indian, 215. 218. 219. 
 Commentaries, text secured by 
 
 means of, 181. 
 Comparative mythology, 35, 36. 
 Constantius, 255. 
 Creation, 233, 234. 
 Creed-foraiulas, 166. 
 Curtius, 136. 
 Cycles, quinquennial and sexennial, 
 
 113. 247. 
 Damis, 252. 
 Dancing, 196 ff. 
 
 Dira Shakoh, 283. 
 
 Day, beginning of the, at midnight, 
 
 254. 
 Decimal place-value of the figures, 
 
 256. 
 Deeds of gift, c. Grants. 
 Degrees of the heavens, 255- 
 Deimachus, 251. 
 t^EKavht, 255. 
 Dekhan, 4. 6. 192. 283. 
 Dekhan recension (of the Urva^i), 
 
 208. 
 
 ^Vf^VrVP, 35- 
 Demiurges, 233. 
 Denarius, 229. 304. 
 Dhauli, 179. 295. 
 Diagrams, mystic, 310. 
 Dialects; 6. 175 ff. 295. 296. 299. 
 Atdfierpov, 255. 
 AiSv/ws, 254. 
 Diespiter, 35. 
 
 Dion Chrysostom, 186. 188. 
 Dionysius, 251. 
 AtSvvffaSf 6. 
 
 Districts, division of Vedic schools 
 according to, 65. 94. 132. 133. 
 
 of other text-recensions, 195. 
 
 206-208. 
 — Varieties of style distinguished 
 
 by names of, 232. 
 Dolphin, emblem of the God of 
 Love, 252. 274. 325 (Cupid and 
 Venus). 
 
 Aopvipopia, 255. 
 
 Apaxji-fl, 229. 
 
 Dravidian words, 3. 
 
 Dsanglun, 289. 291. 306. 
 
 Dulva, 199. 
 
 Durr i mufassal, 272. 
 
 AvtSv, 255. 
 
 Egypt, commercial relations be- 
 tween India and, 3. 
 
 Waayiay/i, 253-255. 
 
 Elements, the five, 234. 
 
 Embryo, 160. 
 
 'Eirava^opi, 255. 
 
 Eras, Indian, 202. 203, 210. 260. 
 
 Fa Hian, 218. 300. 
 
 Farther India, geographical names 
 in, 178. 
 
 Fer^dAn, 36. 
 
 Festival-plays, religious, 197. 198. 
 
 Figures, 256. 324. 
 
 — expressed by words, 60. 140. 
 
 Firdlisi, 37. 
 
 Firmicus Maternus, 254. 
 
INDEX OF MATTERS. 
 
 355 
 
 Fortuuatua, purae of, 264-265. 
 Fox, in Fable, 211, 212. 
 Gamma, gamme, 272 (mus.). 
 Ganges, 4. 38. 
 
 — mouths of the, 193. 248. 
 Galen, 307. 
 
 Geometry, 256. 
 
 Ginungagap, 233. 
 
 Girnar, 179. 295. 
 
 Gnosticism, 239. 309. 
 
 Gobar figures, 256. 
 
 Gods, images, statues of, 273. 274. 
 
 — language of the, 176. 
 
 — triad of : Agni, ludra, and S(i- 
 rya, 40. 63 (A., I., and Soma) ; — 
 Brahman, Rudra, and Vishnu, 
 97. 161. 167 (Siva), i8o(^iva), 277. 
 
 Grants, 203. 215. 281. 
 
 Greek female slaves, 203. 251, 252. 
 
 — monarchies of Bactria, 188. 207. 
 215. 221. 251. 285. 
 
 — words, 254, 255. 
 
 Greeks : Greek Architecture, 274 
 (three styles in India). 
 
 — Astronomy, 153. 243. 249. 251 
 ff. 
 
 — Commerce with India, 252. 
 
 — Drama, 207. 
 
 — Fables, 211. 
 
 — God of Love, 252. 274 (!). 
 
 — Influence upon India generally, 
 251 ff. 
 
 — Medicine, 268. 324. 325. 
 
 — Philosophy, 220. 221. 234. 
 
 — Sculpture, 273. 
 
 — Writing, 221. 
 Guido d'Arezzo, 272. 
 Gujarat, 139. 179. 207. 251. 
 Qymnosophists, 27. 
 "HXios, 254. 
 
 'H/paKX^s, 6. 136. 186. 234. 
 
 Heraclius, 255- 
 
 Heretics, 98. 
 
 'Bp/iijs, 254. 
 
 Homer, Indian, 186. 188, 
 
 — Homeric cycle of legend, 194. 
 
 "Opi?, 254- 
 
 'Opltav, 255. 
 
 Hindustan, 4. 6. 10. 18. 38. 39. 70. 
 
 187. 192. 283. 296. 
 Hiuan Thsang, 217 ff., 287. 300. 
 Humours, the tiree, 266. 
 Hu^ravanh, 36. 
 'rSpoxios, 254. 
 'T\6|8io;, 28. 48. 
 'TirAyeioi', 255. 
 
 Ibn Abi Ufoibiah, 266. 
 Ibn Baithar, 266. 
 •IxBAs, 254. 
 
 Immigration of the Aryas into Hin- 
 dustan, 38. 39. 
 Indo-Soythians, 220. 285. 
 Indus, 10. 37. 38. 218. 285. 
 Inheritance, law of, 278, 279. 
 Initial letters of names employed 
 to denote numbers, 256 ; to mark 
 the seven musical notes, 272. 
 Inscriptions, 183. 215. 228. 
 Intercalary month, 247. 262 (three 
 
 in the year !). 
 Invisible cap, 264. 
 Jackal and lion in Fable, 211, 
 
 212. 
 Java, island of, 189. 195. 208. 229. 
 
 171. 280. 
 Jehdn, 283. 
 Jeh^ngir, 283. 
 Jemshid, 36. 
 Josaphat, 307. 
 Kabul, 3. 179. 
 Kafu (kapi), 3. 
 Kslgyur, 291. 294. 326. 
 Kiflaio, 317. 
 Kaikavlis, 36. 
 Kai Khosrd, 36. 
 Kalilag and Damnag, 320. 
 Kalila wa Dimna, 212. 
 Kalmuck translations, 291. 
 Ko/ij3i(r9oXoi, 88. 268. 
 Kambojas, 178. 
 Ka/t/Siiffijs, 178. 
 Kan^rese translation, 189. 
 Kanerki, s. Kanishka, 
 Kanherj, 292. 
 Kankah, 269. 
 
 Kapur di Giri, 179 ; s. Kapardigiri. 
 Kashmir, 204. 213. 215. 220. 223. 
 
 227. 232. 291. 296. 
 Kava TO, 36. 
 Kavi languages, origin of name, 
 
 195. 
 — translations, 318 (date of). 325. 
 Keeping secret of doctrines, 49. 
 Kevidpo/ws, 255. 
 Kivrpov, 254. 255. 
 Kijiros, 3. 
 K^ppepos, 35. 
 Ktmpd, 302. 
 Kio-list, 248. 
 Ki\ov/)os, 254. 
 Ku0i)<', 3. 
 Kpids, 254. 
 
356 
 
 INDEX OF MATTERS. 
 
 KpSvos, 254.. 
 AapuHi, 76. 258. 
 L^t, 249. 258. 
 League- boots, 264. 
 Mm>, 254. 
 AerHi, 255. 
 
 Lion and jackal (fox), 211, 212. 
 Longest day, length of the, 247. 
 Love, God of, 252. 274. 
 Lunar mansions, 2. 30. 90. 92, 148. 
 229. 246-249. 252. 255. 281. 
 
 3°4- 
 
 — phases, 28 1. 
 MaSiavSivol, 10. 1 06. 
 Magas, 179. 252. 
 Magic, art of, 264, 265. 
 Magic mirror, 264., 
 
 — ointment, 264. 
 Mahmtid of Ghasna, 253. 
 Mairya (and Mdra ?), 303. 
 MoXXo(, 222. 
 
 Manes, 309. 
 
 Manes, sacrifice to the, 55. 93. 100. 
 
 108. 1 18. 
 Manetho, 260. 
 
 Mansions, twelve, 254. 281 (aetr.). 
 Manuscripts, late date of, 181. 182 
 
 (oldest). 
 M(i(rir070, 75- 
 
 Mazzaloth, Mazzaroth, 248. 
 Medicine in Ceylon, 267 ; in India, 
 
 324, 325- 
 Megasthenes, 4. 6. 10. 20. 27. 48. 
 
 70. 88. 106. 136, 137. 186. 234. 
 
 251. 
 Meherdatea, 188. 
 Menander, 224. 251. 306. 
 Menfeil, 323 (in Soghd). 
 Mendicancy, religious, 237, 
 McirovpdvTiiia, 255. 
 Metempsychosis, 234. 
 Metrical form of literature, 182, 
 
 .183. 
 JEssionaries, Buddhist, 290. 307. 
 
 309- 
 — Christian, 307. 
 Mv^firi, iwb liv^/joiis, 20. 
 Monachism, system of, 307. 
 Monasteries, 274. 281. 
 Mongolian translations, 291. 
 Mundane ages (four), 247 ; s. Yuga. 
 Music, modem Indian, 325. 
 Musical scale, 272. 
 Mysteries, 197. 198. 
 Mythology, Comparative, 35. 36. 
 Names, chronology from, 29. 53. 
 
 71. 120. 239. 284. 285 (a. also 
 
 Anga, Kavi, Tantra, Stitra). 
 Nearchus, 15. 
 
 Neo-Pythagoreans, 256, 257. 
 Nep^I, 291. 309, 310. 
 Ifep^Iese MSS., date of, 318. 
 Nerengs, 56. 
 North of India, purity of language 
 
 in the, 26. 45. 296. 
 Notes, the seven musical, 160. 272. 
 Numbers, denoting of, by the 
 
 letters of the alphabet in their 
 
 order, 222. 
 Numerical notation by means of 
 
 letters, 257. 324. 
 
 — Symbols, 256. 
 Ndshirvin, 212. 
 Omens, 69. 152. 264. 
 Ophir, 3. 
 
 Oral tradition, 12 ff, 22. 48. 
 
 Ordeal, 73. 
 
 Orissa, 179. 274. 
 
 Otbl, 201. 
 
 OipavSs, 35. 
 
 'Of7;«}, 252 (a. Arin). 
 
 'O^vSpdKai, 222. 
 
 Pahlav, 188. 
 
 Pahlavl, translation of Fanchatantra 
 
 into, 212. 267. 
 P^li redaction of the Amarakosha, 
 
 230. 
 
 — of Manu's Code, 279. 
 UavSala, 136. 137. 186. 
 
 Panjdb, 2. 3. 4. 88. 207. 248. 251. 
 
 309- 
 Pantheism, 242. 
 IlapBhos, 254. 
 Parthians, 4. 188. 3 1 8, 
 Parvl, parviz, 323. 
 Pattalene, 285. 
 Paulus Alexandrinua, 253. 255. 
 
 — al Ttiniini, 253. 
 
 Peacocks, exportation of, to Biveru, 
 
 Periplus, 4. 6. 
 
 Permutations, 256. 
 
 Persa- Aryans, 6. 133. 148, 178. 
 
 Persians, 3. 4. 188 5—273 (mus.). 
 
 274 (arch.). 
 Persian Epos, 36. 37. 187. 
 
 — translation of the Upanishads, 
 
 'SS- 
 
 — Veda, 36. 148. 
 Personal deity, 165, 166. 
 HeuKeKauTH, 268. 
 *(ii7is, 255. 
 
INDEX OF MATTERS. 
 
 357 
 
 ' PUloBophsr's Ride,' 291. 
 
 Philostratus, 252. 
 
 Phoebus Apollo, 273 (type of). 
 
 Phoenioians, their commercial rela- 
 tions with India, 2, 3. 248. 
 
 Pholotoulo, 218. 
 
 Phonini, 218. 
 
 Planets, 98. 153. 249-251. 254, 
 255. 281. 304. 
 
 — Greek order of the, 319. 323. 326. 
 Plato (Bactrian king), 273. 
 Pliny, 136. 
 
 Plutarch, 306. 
 Polar star, 98. 
 
 Popular dialects, 6. 175-180. 
 Ilpd/ivai, 28. 244. 
 
 Prose-writing arrested in its deve- 
 lopment, 183. 
 Ptolemaiop, 253. 274 (astr.). 
 Ptolemy, 179. 251. 252 (two). 
 
 — 130 (geogr.). 
 Quinquennial cycle, 113. 247. 
 Quotations, text as given in, 182. 
 
 279. 
 Relic-worship, 306. 307. 
 Egya Cher Rol Pa, 185. 291. 
 Bhazes, 271. 
 Rock-inscriptions, 179. 
 Rosary, 307. 
 ZavSpdKvirTos, 217. 223, 
 2apfidvatf 28. 
 Scale, musical, 272. 
 Schools, great number of Vedic, 
 
 14Z. 
 Seleucus, 4. 
 Semitic origin of Indian writing, 
 
 IS- 
 
 of the Beast-fable, 211, 212. 
 
 Serapion, 271. 
 
 Seven musical notes, 160. 272. 
 
 Sindhend, 255. 259. 
 
 Singhalese translations, 292. 
 
 ZKopwtos, 254. 
 
 2Kv0iai'6s, 309. 
 
 Snake, 302. 
 
 Solar year, 246, 247. 
 
 Solomon's time, trade with India 
 
 in, 3- 
 Sm0o7oo-^>'os, 251. 
 Speusippus (?), 258. 
 Squaring of the circle, 256. 
 Steeples, 274. 306. 
 Stone-building, 274. 
 
 Strabo, 6. 27. 28. 30. 244. 246. 
 
 Style, varieties of, distinguished by 
 names of provinces, 232. 
 
 Succession of existence, 289. 301. 
 
 istifl philosophy, 239. 
 
 Suva^i) 255. 
 
 Sun's two journeys, stellar limits of 
 the, 98. 
 
 ^vpaffrpTjv/if 76. 
 
 Surgery, 269. 270. 
 
 Tandjur, 209. 210. 226. 230. 246. 
 267. 276. 
 
 TaBpos, 254. 
 
 Teachers, many, quoted, 50. 77. 
 
 Texts, uncertainty of the, l8i, 182. 
 224, 225. 
 
 Thouaand-name-prayers, 208. 
 
 Tibetans, translations of the, 208. 
 212.291. 294. 300; o. Dsanglun, 
 KsJgyur, Rgya Cher Rol Pa, 
 Tandjur. 
 
 Tiridates, 3, 4. 
 
 TofiTTjs, 254. 
 
 Transcribers, mistakes of, 181. 
 
 Translations, s. Arabs, Chinese, 
 Kalmuck, Kandrese, Kavi, Mon- 
 golian, Pahlavi, Piili, Persian, 
 Singhalese. 
 
 Transmigration of souls, 73. 288. 
 
 Tplyuivos, 255. 
 
 Trojan cycle of legend, 194. 
 
 Tukhilm, peacocks, 3. 
 
 Valentinian, 309. 
 
 Venus with dolphin (and Cupid), 
 
 325- 
 Vernaculars, 175-180. 203. 
 Veterinary medicine, 267. 
 Weights, 160. 269. 
 Writing, 10. 13. Ij;— of the Ya- 
 
 vanas, 221. 
 — ■ consignment to, 22. 144. 181. 
 
 292. 296. 
 Written language, 1 78 ff. 
 Yeshts, 56. 302. 
 Yima, 36. 
 
 YTiasaf, Ytidasf, BMsatf, 307. 
 Zero, 256. 
 Zeis, 35. 
 — planet, 254. 
 Zodiacal signs, 98, 229. 249. 254. 
 
 25s. 257. 
 Zohak, 36. 
 Zd76>', 254. 
 
358 
 
 INDEX OF AUTHORS. 
 
 INDEX OF AUTHOKS. 
 
 Ambros, 272. 
 
 Anandachandra, 58. 68. 79. 
 Anqiietil du Perron, 52. 96. 154, 
 
 155. 162. 
 Aufrecht, 16. 32. 43. 59. 80. 84. 
 
 112. 150. 191. 200. 210. 211. 224. 
 
 226. 230. 232. 243. 257. 260. 
 261. 267. 272. 313. 315. 
 
 Bdla^&trin, 223. 226. 237. 322, 
 
 323- 
 Ballantyne, 223. 226. 235. 237. 244. 
 Banerjea, 191. 235. 238. 243. 
 Bipfi Deva 6&trin, 258. 262. 
 Barth, 257. 316. 321. 
 Barthelemy St. Hilaire, 235. 
 Bayley, 304. 
 Beal, 293. 300. 309. 327. 
 Benaiy, F., 196. 
 Benfey, 15. 22. 43. 44. 64. 66. 117. 
 
 157. 212. 221. 267. 272. 274. 
 
 301. 306. 320. 
 Bentley, 257. 267. 
 Bergaigne, 44. 
 Bemouilli, 325. 
 Bertrand, 202. 
 BhagTiinUl Indraji, 324. 
 Bhagvib Vijaya, 327. 
 Bhandarkar, 6b. 150. 215. 219. 224. 
 
 319. 321. 326. 
 BMu Ddji, 215. 227. 254-262. 319. 
 Bibliotheca Indica, s. Ballantyne, 
 
 Banerjea, Cowell, Hall, Rdjendra 
 
 L. M., Boer, &c. 
 BlckeU, 320. 
 Biot, 247, 248. 
 Bird, 215. 
 Bohtlingk, 22. 106. 210. 217-220. 
 
 222. 226. 230. 320. 323. 
 Von Bohlen, 272. 
 BoUeusen, 44. 
 Bopp, 178. 189. 
 Boyd, 207. 
 Br&l, 4. 36. 
 Brockhaus, 213. 262. 
 Browning, 84. 
 Buhler, 50. 54. 92. 97. loi. 152. 
 
 ISS- 164. 170. 182. 196. 204. 210. 
 
 212, 213. 214, 215. 217. 222. 
 
 227. 232. 237. 259. 272. 277, 
 278. 280. 282, 283. 297. 314. 
 
 „ 315- 317- 319-322. 324-326. 
 Bur^'ess, Eb., 247. 258 ; — Jas., 215. 
 
 Biimell, 3. 13. 15. 20. 22. 42. 61. 
 
 65. 69. 74. 83. 90. 91. 94. loi. 
 
 102. 103. 150. 155. 163, 164. 170, 
 
 171. 178. 203. 213. 215. 217. 221, 
 
 222. 226. 245. 256. 270. 313. 316. 
 
 321. 
 Burnouf, 81. iii. 162. 179. 191. 
 
 199. 246. 289. 291, 292. 296. 298. 
 
 300. 306. 308. 
 Cantor, 324. 
 
 Cappeller, 226. 232. 320. 
 Carey, 194. 
 
 Chandrak^nta Tarkdlamkflra, 84. 
 Childers, 178. 293.295. 305.308.326. 
 Clarac, Comte de, 325. 
 Clough, 293. 
 Colebrooke, 42. 43. 61. 97. 148. 
 
 151. 154, 157, 158. 163. 201. 
 
 202. 227. 229. 230. 234. 235. 
 
 236. 238. 241, 242. 243. 245. 256. 
 
 259-263. 267. 269. 281. 283. 
 Coomira Svimy, 293. 
 Cowell, 42. 43. 50. 52. 91. 97. 98. 
 
 99. 207. 227. 234. 235. 237, 238. 
 
 242. 256. 283. 291. 322. 
 Cox, 36. 
 Csoma Korosi, 199. 209. 267. 285. 
 
 291. 294. 
 Cunningham, 178. 203. 215. 273, 274. 
 D'Alwis, 293. 
 Darmesteter, J., 314. 
 Davids, 267. 
 De Gubematis, 36. 
 Delbriick, 31. 44. 318. 
 Gerard de Bialle, 3. 
 Dhanapati Sinhaji, 327. 
 Dickson, 326. 
 Dietz, 267. 
 Donner, 19. 44. 
 Dowson, 141. 203. 215. 
 Diimichen, 3. 
 Duncker, 308. 
 D'Eckstein, 97. 
 Eggeling, 203. 215. 226. 291. 
 Elliot, H. M., 239. 267. 
 ElUot, W., 154, 155. 
 Fauche, 189. 194. 
 Fausbbll, 293. 304. 326. 
 Feer, 188. 291. 293. 299. 
 FerguBson, 203. 215. 273. 
 Fleet, 319. 321. 
 Fliigel, 270. 
 
INDEX OF AUTHORS. 
 
 359 
 
 SBucaux, 185. 189. 200. 286. 291. 299. 
 Mederich, 189. 195. 
 SVltze, 320. 
 
 Qftfegildhara Kavirdja, 270. 
 Gai-l-ez, 211. 
 G«{ger, L., 272. 
 Gelduer, 44. 
 
 Gildemeiater, i6i. 229. 239. 270. 
 Giript'asddaTarman, 116. 
 GoldBchmidt, Paul, 196. 
 Goldselimidt, Siegfried, 65. 196. 
 Goldskiioker, 12. 15. 22. 87. 100. 
 130. 144. 193. 207. 221, 222. 
 223. 224, 225. 227. 241. 251. 
 273. 341. 
 Gorresio, ^94. 
 Gough, 435. 244. 322. 323. 
 GovindadeVa^iiatrin, 237. 322. 323. 
 Grassmantl) 44. 315. 
 Griffith, 194. 
 Grill, 207. 
 
 Grimblot, 293. 319. 326. 
 Grohmann, 265. 
 Grube, 171. 
 Von GutBchmid, 188. 
 Haag, 205. 
 
 Haas, 19. 58. 84. 142. 152. 324. 
 Haeberlin, 201. 
 
 Hall, 106. 191. 204. 207. 213. 214. 
 231. 232. 235. 237. 257. 258. 318. 
 
 319- 
 Hankel, 256. 
 
 Harachandra VidydbhAskana, 151. 
 Hardy, 292, 293. 304. 
 Haug, 22. 25. 32. 47., 60. 61. 91. 
 
 93. 100. 150. 152. 153. 155. 162. 
 
 314. 315- 317- 
 HesBler, 268. 
 Heymann, 23 1. 
 Hillebrandt, 44. 314. 
 Hodgson, 291. 292. 309. 
 Holtzmann, 200. 228. 230. 279. 318. 
 Hue, 307. 
 ftvaraohandra Vidy&iigara, 205. 
 
 235- 
 Jacobi, 195. 204. 214. 254. 255. 
 
 260. 281. 319. 323. 326. 
 Jaganmohaua^arman, 231. 
 Jayandriiyana, 243, 244. 
 JlvdnandaVidy^itgara, 270.320.325. 
 Johantgen, 102. 238. 278, 279. 281. 
 
 285. 
 Jolly, 326. 
 Jones, Sir W., 272. 
 Julien, Stan., 218. 301. 
 Kaegi, 44. 
 
 Kashinath Trimbak Telang, 194. 
 Keller, 0., 211, 212. 
 Kennedy, Vans, 170. 
 Kern, 61. 179. 202. 204. 215. 224. 
 243. 257-261. 267. 279. 288. 293. 
 
 299- 318. 324- 
 Ke^avasdstriu, 323. 
 Kielhorn, 25. 61. 68. 95. loi. 155. 
 
 170. 212. 225, 226. 313. 321. 
 Kittel, 189. 
 Klatt, 210. 310. 
 Knighton, 204. 
 Koppen, 283. 306. 307. 308. 
 Koeegarten, 212. 
 Kfishnashastri, 320. 
 Kuhn, Ad., 25. 32. 35, 36. 62. 
 Kuhn, E., 293. 295. 
 Kunte, 325 (Mureshvar). 
 Laboulaye, 307. 
 Langlois, 43. 189. 
 Lassen, 4. 28. 75. 176. 179. 185. 
 
 188. 189. 190. 198. 199. 201. 
 
 202. 204. 205. 214, 218-220. 227. 
 
 229. 239. 244. 247. 251, 252. 254. 
 
 257. 260. 273. 275, 276. 287-290. 
 
 292. 296. 301. 308. 309. 319. 
 Lefmann, 299. 
 Leitner, 273. 
 Letronne, 229. 
 Liebrecht, 307. 
 Linde, Van der, 275. 
 Lindner, 318. 
 
 Loiseleur Deslongohamps, 230. 
 Lorinser, 238. 
 Loth, 0., 263. 
 Ludwig, A., 44. 249. 315. 
 Madhusddana Gupta, 270. 
 Mahe^aohandraNydyaratna, 91. 241. 
 Marshman, 194. 
 Mayr, 279. 
 
 Meyer, Eud., 313, 314. 316. 
 Minayeff, 3. 293. 303. 
 MuUer, E., 299. 
 Miiller, Fr., 293. 
 Muller, M., 15. 16. 19. 22. 31. 32. 
 
 35. 36. 42. 43. 48. 49. 55. 58. 59. 
 
 61. 63. 69. 93. loi. 106. 116. 
 
 142. 151. 155. 176. 180. 205. 
 
 221. 225. 234-236. 241. 244, 
 
 245. 247, 278. 282. 288. 307. 
 
 314, 315. 325. 
 Muir, 41. 44. 210. 292. 299. 
 Myriantheus, 314. 
 Nfeve, 309. 
 Noldeke, 187. 318. 
 Oldenberg, 316. 326. 
 
360 
 
 INDEX OF AUTHORS. 
 
 Olshauaen, 4. 188. 318. 
 
 Patterson, 273. 
 
 Pavie, 189. 
 
 Pertscb, 40, 60, 
 
 St. Petersburg Dictionary, 16. 104. 
 
 108. 112. 141. 266. 305. 
 Pischel, 206-208. 227. 295. 320. 321. 
 Poley, so. 139. 
 Pons, P6re, 216. 254. 
 Pramad^ Ddsa Mitra, 231. 
 Premaohandra Tarkavitgi^a, 232. 
 Prinsep, 179. 229. 
 Prym, 320. 
 
 E^dhdkinta Deva, 275. 
 RfijiirfLnia^strin, 223. 
 Bdijendra LiUa Mitra, 48. 61. 65. 
 
 73. 84. 94. 142. 151. 155. 158. 162- 
 
 164. 166, 167. 169-171, 182. 202. 
 
 210. 215. 220. 271. 274. 275. 297. 
 
 299. 315- 317- 
 B^imamaya Tarkaratna, 158. 168. 
 lUmami^raidstrin, 322. 
 BimanfCrilyana, 58. 91. 243. 
 B^m R&, 275. 
 Bask, 293. 
 Eegnaud, 318. 320. 
 Begnier, 34. 59. 
 Beinaud, 61. 148. 201. 202, 217. 
 
 219. 229. 239. 252, 253. 256- 
 
 259. 262, 263. 266. 269. 274. 307. 
 Benan, 309. 
 Bieu, 230. 
 Boer, 43. 48. 51. 54. 73. 74. 91. 
 
 94. 96. 116. 139. 154. 157. 160. 
 
 161. 231. 235. 244. 262. 
 Bosen, 43. 
 
 Bost,66. 182. 191.236.268.270. 279. 
 Both, 8. 22. 23. 25. 33. 36. 38. 42. 
 
 43. 44. 48. 63. 70. 80. 102. 112. 
 
 146. 147. 150. 152. 178. 201. 
 
 247. 267, 268. 270. 303. 
 Boyle, 271. 
 
 Sachau, 253. 323. 
 
 Satyavrata S^lm^rami, 66. 299. 316. 
 
 Schiefner, 56. 185. 209. 212. 227. 
 
 248. 291. 300. 306. 307. 326. 
 Schlagintweit, E., 310. 
 Sehlegel, A. W. von, 194. 231. 275. 
 Schliiter, 234. 
 
 Schmidt, 289. 291. 306. 
 Schonborn, 48. 
 Schwanbeck, 20. 
 S^dillot, 247. 
 
 Senart, 293. 304. 326. 
 
 Shankar Pandit, 204. 315. 318. 
 
 Sourindra Mohan Tagore, 325. 
 
 Speijer, 19. 102. 142. 
 
 Spiegel, 293. 300. 306. 
 
 Steinschneider, 247. 
 
 Stenzler, 34. 55. 58. 142. 195. 206. 
 
 268. 277-280, 318. 325. 
 Stevenson, 43. 65. 215. 297. 326. 
 Storck, 293. 
 Strachey, 262. 
 Streiter, 55. 
 Tdr^ndtha TarkaTdchaspati, 89. 184. 
 
 226. 
 Taylor, J., 262. 
 Taylor, W., 155. 162. 164, 165. 
 
 167. 169-171. 
 Thibaut, 60. 256. 316. 324, 
 Thomas, 215. 256. 
 Tumour, 267. 292, 293. 306. 
 Vaux, 215. 273. 
 Yechanai^ma^iistiin, 190. 323. 
 Vinson, 3. 
 
 Yi^Tan^tha&Estrin, 60. 
 VuUers, 268. 
 Wagener, A., 211. 
 Warren, 297. 
 Wassiljew, 248. 300. 309, 
 Weigle, 189. 
 West, A. A., 215. 
 West, E., 278. 
 West, E. W., 215. 
 Westergaard, 22. 184. 201. 203. 
 
 215. 223. 230. 284. 288. 293. 
 
 295. 304. 
 Wheeler, T., 190. 251. 281. 
 Whish, 254. 
 Whitney, 2. 23. 64. 103. 150. 152. 
 
 247. 257, 258. 
 Wilkins, 228. 
 Wilkinson, 262. 
 Williams, 189. 
 Wilson, H. H., 43. 148. 179. 189. 
 
 191. 204-207. 213. 215. 221. 
 
 230. 236, 237. 250. 268. 270, 
 
 271. 281. 285. 305. 306. 318. 
 Wilson, J., 215. 
 Windisch, 297. 
 Windischmann, 73. 243. 
 Wise, 270. 
 
 Woepcke, 253. 256, 257. 
 Wright, Dan., 318. 
 Zimmer, 44. 
 
 PRINTED BV BALLANTYNE, HANSON ANt> CO. 
 EDINBURGH AND LONDON 
 
V ^V'lN 
 
 ^ s 
 
 kV; 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 •is. s \ 
 
 \ 
 
 N 1\. \>'» \